Rundown and Rotten

Naenae College's crumbling buildings can be traced directly back to financial negligence by the College dating to the early 2000s. The college failed to monitor its finances, took on excessive debt, and required a $1.6 million government bailout in 2004 to avoid insolvency.

But rather than correct course, the school quickly defaulted on the bailout loan. Money that should have gone to critical maintenance was instead diverted to debt payments for years, allowing the facilities to fall into dangerous disrepair.

A letter from the principal himself admits the debt is responsible for the "very poor condition" of school property. The bailout, necessitated by administrative failures, left Naenae College unable to provide a safe and healthy environment for students.

School leadership kicked the can down the road, prioritising debt service over infrastructure. They balanced the books on the backs of students now stuck in crumbling, hazardous buildings.

IR Group

PROJECT SPECIFICATION

Naenae College Administration Upgrade

910 High Street

Avalon

Lower Hutt

Issued for Tender/Consent

26 Jul 2022

PROJECT OVERVIEW

Scope

This contract is for the interior upgrade of Block YA (Administration block) at Naenae College, High Street, Lower Hutt as descriibed below. All work is to be carried out to the best of trade practise and in accordance with all relevant standards, manufacturer's instructions and the NZ Building Code. Please check all dimensions on site. Allow to complete the following items of work.

Note: All exterior renovation of the building to be designed by Resolve Architects. This includes reroofing the building, design of the entrance portico, ramp and stairs, specifying all exterior doors and windows and any additional exterior features and specifying the mechanical ventilation system for the three WC's.

Demolition - Interior

Uplift all existing carpet and flooring and prepare floors as necessary for new floor coverings

Remove interior walls and doors at locations shown in drawings.

Remove any wall coverings (e.g. Autex) and prepare wall linings for new Autex Composition, Resene paint or Plytech wall lining as shown on interior elevations

Remove light fittings, pin boards, fixtures and features and sanitary fixtures in both toilets adjacent to the hall foyer.

Dispose of all removed debris from site.

General New Work - Interior

interior joinery and the like. Allow for new scotias, skirtings & architraves to new work as indicated in drawings.

o All new walls to be lined with 10mm GIB or GIB product specified by Engineer in Bracing Plan OR 12mm Plytech as specified

o GIB to be F4 where painted and F1 where covered with Autex Composition or Exoply wall lining

Electrical

. Supply and install new ceiling mounted radiant heaters as indicated in the drawings

Plumbing and Drainage

. Allow to run cold water to toilet cisterns (WC1, 2 and 3)

Floor Finishes

Painting

Doors

Address

Site Address

910 High Street

Suburb

Avalon

City

Lower Hutt

Lot #

Lots 1 and 2 DP18397 and Part Lot 1 DP19671

Site Conditions

Wind Zone

VH - Very High Wind Speed

Earthquake Zone

Zone 3

Exposure Zone

Zone C - Medium

Snow Loading Zone

Zone N1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Preliminaries & General7

Project Overview7

Siteworks 15

Partial Demolition 15

Carpentry20

Timber Framing 21

GIB® Plasterboard Linings24

Plytech Plywood Interior Linings38

Aluminium Joinery45

Aluminium Windows & Doors45

Glazing49

Non-Structural Glazing49

Insulation53

Mammoth Polyester Insulation53

Painting & Decorating56

Resene Painting General 56

Resene Interior Surfaces 61

Autex Interior Acoustic Treatments & Finishes62

Floor Coverings68

Commercial Vinyl Surfacing from Jacobsen 68

Carpet & Resilient Floor Coverings73

Plumbing77

Workmanship78

Materials 80

Systems 80

Electrical 82

Workmanship83

Materials & Control84

Elements85

Systems 85

Appendix86

GIB General Wall and Ceiling installation86

T+R Interiors Eclipse 64mm Aluminium Suite 86

Phonic Ceiling Tiles - data sheet86

Phonic Ceiling Tiles - installation guide 86

Zenthe Timber Screen 86

IQ Optima 86

Advanced Flooring Gold Coast 86

Advanced Flooring Evertread 86

Energocassette86

LED ceiling batten86

LED recessed ceiling light 86

Autex Composition 86

Resene Paint Fire Ratings86

Hafele track system 86

Caroma Luna BTW Toilet86

Caroma Cosmo86

Methven Glide Basin Mixer86

Tork Paper Towel Dispenser86

Supreme Classic soap dispenser86

Tork Mini Jumbo Toilet Roll Dispenser86

IKON Centurio Double Sink 86

Methven Glide Sink Mixer86

Mechanical Ventilation for WC's 86

Melteca 86

Ecoglo Pictogram 86

The Contract Documents are complementary and comprise this Specification, the accompanying drawings, the NZ Standards Contract NZS 3910 together with Schedules as specified below, any written documentation clarifications issued during tendering/estimating, any manufacturer/supplier information issued with this Specification, any list of agreed Subcontractors, the contract establishment letter and any other relevant correspondence, and any Site Instructions or additional details or instructions issued as Variations. (The NZS 3910 Contract will be emailed upon request).

If the Architect/Designer has not been engaged to administer the Contract or observe the works, then the term Architect/Designer, where referred to in this specification, means Contract Administrator.

These Project Specific Conditions supersede the Standard Conditions where they are in conflict. Refer any ambiguity or apparent discrepancy within or between any Contract Documents to the Architect/Designer, whose interpretation shall be binding on all parties.

Ensure that all Trades are aware of all Conditions and that subcontract prices are accepted on this basis, and in a form acceptable to the Registered Master Builders Federation or the Certified Builders Association. Ensure that all persons engaged on the works are aware of all items in this specification and on the drawings that may in any way affect their section of the works.

Relevant site conditions are believed to be correctly represented in the Contract Documents, however the Contractor (and Subcontractors where appropriate) are requested to inspect the site to ascertain for themselves the nature and extent of the works and the rights and interests that may be interfered with in the execution of the works, as no claims for additional payment will be recognised on the grounds of insufficient description.

Carry out whatever actions or precautions are required to avoid or to absolutely minimise noise, dirt, dust, access, etc. inconvenience or disruption of any nature to the adjacent owners or tenants. Indemnify the Principal against any claims arising from this source.

Take all appropriate precautions to protect all third party property, services, etc., and indemnify the Principal against any claims arising from the construction operations. Any damage to third party property caused by construction activities or failure to protect shall be rectified as soon as possible by the person causing the damage, or by appropriately qualified trades-persons employed by the person responsible for the damage if necessary.

Suspend operations during weather which would affect the quality of work in progress. Secure the works as soon as possible against adverse weather, dust and vandals. Avoid structural damage that is caused by overloading.

Adequately protect all finished work and maintain until the date of Practical Completion. Each trade shall protect the work of all other trades, and each trade is responsible for making good any damage they cause to finished works. Arrange special protection as required for windows and doors, finished timber work, plumbing fittings and hardware, cabinets and other joinery, and similar items.

The Contractor will be held responsible for the full period of his legal responsibility in connection with this Contract for ensuring that all work execution, materials, and fittings, are completely in accordance with Contract requirements.

The Contractor is responsible to the Principal for the appropriateness and fitness, in relation to a reasonable expectation or requirement, of all of the materials and workmanship incorporated into the works by himself or his subcontractors; for this reason few specific guarantees are required in these contract documents. The terms and conditions of any warranty or guarantee required or provided shall not in any way negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty or guarantee had been furnished.

No apparent expression of the Architect's/Designer's reasonable satisfaction shall be deemed to be acceptance of defective materials or workmanship within the terms of the Contract or to be an authority for any Variation except where such Variation is authorised as provided for in the Contract. Instructions that are given verbally are deemed to be instructions for proper execution of the works and do not involve extra charges.

Workmanship in all trades is required to be equal to or better than recognised good trade practice. The Contractor shall provide all necessary setting out information and component dimensions for subcontractors and shall check and be responsible for the accuracy of their work.

Should any tradesperson consider that the surface finish or general conditions of previous work are unsatisfactory to ensure a proper finish for their own work thereon, that tradesperson shall give immediate notice to the Contractor or Architect/Designer as appropriate and shall not proceed until all necessary improvements have been made. Failing such notice the trade concerned will not be relieved of responsibility for a poor finish due to such unsatisfactory condition.

Specialist Finishes Subcontractors are responsible for ensuring that substrates are completely appropriate for them to achieve first class results, and to this end shall, in sufficient time, instruct the Contractor with regard any fixings, primings, sealings or whatever for the substrate that vary in any

way from the substrate manufacturer's standard recommendations. The Contractor shall advise the Architect/Designer with regard these variances, and not proceed until the Architect/Designer has agreed to them.

The Contractor and all Subcontractors affected shall be jointly and severally responsible for completion of the whole of the works in a completely watertight condition and shall therefore examine all details to be satisfied that this condition can be achieved. If any detail is considered unsatisfactory the Architect/Designer shall be notified immediately and he/she will then either interpret the detail to the Contractor's satisfaction, or accept responsibility for watertightness at the points in question, always assuming reasonable workmanship.

Ensure that all materials or items incorporated into any particular construction or finish are compatible and that their individual use is approved by the manufacturers and/or suppliers of the other parts of the system.

For all electronic/electrical/mechanical operating systems all work and all necessary materials and items incidental to the primary item specified, that are incorporated into the works, shall be such as to leave a neat, efficient, easily maintained and robust installation, completely in accordance with all of the recommendations of the primary items' manufacturers. Where appropriate, source all parts of a system from a single supplier or manufacturer.

The Contractor shall make provision for all temporary works and services required for the satisfactory completion of the contract works. The Contractor shall pay all associated costs and fees; carry out all necessary maintenance, alterations and servicing requirements; and remove temporary works and services on completion of the contract works. Temporary works and services shall comply with the requirements New Zealand Building Code.

This Specification covers contract administration, standards, materials quality, workmanship and the scope of works only: the exact nature of the works and all specialist items, descriptions, etc., are contained on the drawings, which also take full precedence.

All clauses in all specification sections apply to their full extent and meaning to the entire Contract. Trade sections and paragraphs have been introduced into this specification for reference only and it shall not be construed that each trade section is a complete segregation of the materials and labour of that trade. The onus is on all trades to be conversant with any and all clauses which in any way affect their work.

(Be aware that the ‘scope’ noted in the ‘Project Overview’, and scope and general extent clauses within this specification, are included to provide a general indication only and must NOT be interpreted as schedules of quantities - the exact nature and extent of all aspects of the works are shown on the drawings).

New Zealand Standards (NZS), Australian Standards (AS), Joint Standards (AS/NZS), British Standards (BS), Acts of Parliament, Regulations made thereunder, Codes of Practice, and any specific Manufacturer's Instructions or Manufacturer's Recommendations that are referred to in these Contract Documents shall all be deemed to be the latest published edition thereof at the time of drawings issue, and shall be followed by the Contractor and all Subcontractors to the full extent applicable consistent with the intent of this Contract. Documents cited within other cited publications are deemed to form part of this specification.

Where Standards have a number of Divisions, e.g. AS/NZS 3500.1, AS/NZS 3500.2, etc., each of the Divisions relevant to this project is deemed to form part of this specification.

Retain current copies of significant cited documents and manufacturer's technical literature on the site.

Comply with all relevant provisions of the NZ Building Code, and with all relevant territorial or statutory authority regulations, by-laws, obligations, etc. Give all required notices.

The Principal has obtained a Land Use Consent. The Principal has applied for and paid for the Project Information Memoranda, the Building Consent and other approvals required for the works to start. The PIM and Building Consent will be forwarded to the Contractor as quickly as possible after they are issued by the Territorial Authority. Note: It is an offence under the Building Act to carry out work not in accordance with a Building Consent.

Should the Building Consent be subject to any conditions which modify the requirements of the Contract Documents in any way, the Architect/Designer reserves the right to negotiate any or all of these modifying conditions with the Building Consent Authority. If after these negotiations additional work is required, it will be handled as a Variation to the Contract.

The Principal will apply for the Code Compliance Certificate (CCC) and any other licenses or approvals for the building to be used. However, Practical Completion will NOT be certified until the CCC inspection has occurred and any additional works required by the local Building Consent Authority have been completed. To this end it is recommended that the Contractor obtains all required certificates, guarantees, Producer Statements, as-built drawings, etc., required for the CCC application as work proceeds, to facilitate application for the CCC as soon as the works are completed. For his part, the Principal hereby undertakes to apply for the CCC within one day of all required material being in hand. Likewise, the Contractor should have capacity available to attend as quickly as possible to any items identified by the Building Consent Authority as being required prior to the issue of the CCC.

Coordinate the works of all trades to ensure efficient progress of the works. Ensure that all holes, sleeves, penetrations, supports, etc., that are required for services are correctly incorporated as work proceeds. Identify and sufficiently forward-notify the appropriate persons of all deadlines for the supply of fittings, components, information, etc.

Except where they are clearly to the contrary, all dimensions are deemed to be to the bare surface of concrete, masonry, timber framing or other basic construction material. All figured dimensions take precedence over scaled sizes. Where any detail is included in more than one drawing the larger scale detail takes precedence. Where any ambiguity exists refer to the Architect/Designer for interpretation.

The word ‘provide' and the word ‘fix' used separately in the Documents shall be taken to mean ‘provide and fix' unless otherwise stated.

When the term ‘allow' occurs in the Documents, except with reference to Monetary Allowances, the cost of the item shall be at the risk of the Contractor.

The terms ‘approved', ‘directed', and ‘selected' when used in the Documents refers to the approval, direction or selection of or by the Architect/Designer. Please give adequate notice of when these decisions are required. ‘Architect/Designer' shall mean the Architect or Designer, their representative or any Consulting Engineer engaged by the Architect/Designer.

The Contract Documents show the extent and nature of the works but there is no warranty expressed or implied that they show each and every minor detail or item required to be included by the Contractor. Should any material, structural member, fixing, or item or work appear to be inadequately described, yet obviously necessary for the neat, strong and satisfactory completion of the work, it shall be incorporated into the Contract Works.

Comply with the Health and Safety at Work Act 2015 (HSWA), and with all relevant Health and Safety at Work Regulations 2016, and with all relevant WorkSafe New Zealand (WorkSafe) Approved Codes of Practice and WorkSafe Information and Guidance, particularly those for construction and building maintenance. Comply with the relevant provisions of the New Zealand Building Code, in particular Clause F5.

So far as is reasonably practicable and according to a PCBU's (person conducting a business or undertaking) primary duty of care, take all necessary steps required to make the site and the contract works safe, and to provide and maintain a safe working environment. Ensure that all those working on or visiting the site are aware of the site safety rules and are not unnecessarily exposed to hazards.

Each PCBU, so far as is reasonably practicable, must ensure the health and safety of workers, and that other people are not put at risk by its work. If more than one PCBU has a duty in relation to the same matter, each PCBU with the duty must, so far as is reasonably practicable, consult, co-operate with, and co-ordinate activities with all other PCBUs who have a duty in relation to the same matter.

PCBUs can enter reasonable agreements with other PCBUs to meet their duties, but cannot contract out of their duties.

Notify WorkSafe as soon as possible when a notifiable event occurs. Take all reasonable steps to preserve the site of the notifiable event in accordance with WorkSafe requirements. Ensure that the site of the event is not disturbed until authorised otherwise by WorkSafe. Keep records of all notifiable events.

Scaffolding shall comply with all Statutory and Local Authority Regulations, with the WorkSafe 'Best Practice Guidelines for Scaffolding', AS/NZS 1576 (Scaffolding equipment), AS/NZS 4576 (Guidelines for Scaffolding), and AS/NZS 4994 (Roof edge scaffolding), and shall be maintained for the duration and removed on completion.

The use of ballistic fixings must absolutely comply with all relevant safety recommendations at all times. No rubbish fires are allowed on site. Portable/personal disc/tape players, radios and iPods must not be used anywhere on the site. No smoking on site, except in the designated location in accordance with the Smoke Free Environments Act 1990, the location of which will be determined by the Contractor, with the approval of the Principal.

A PCBU's primary duty of care includes, but is not limited to, so far as is reasonably practicable:

Before commencing work on the site, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the contract administrator a health and safety plan. The health and safety plan shall include, but not be limited to: - the health and safety of all people on the site and on other properties, and the general public;

Carry out all construction operations in accordance with the submitted health and safety plan.

The Architect/Designer will issue Site Instructions (SI) to amend or clarify the works. Upon receipt of a SI the Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect/Designer if he believes there are price or timing adjustment implications. The Architect/Designer will then issue a Variation Price Request (VPR) for pricing of the possible Variation by the Contractor, within the time stipulated, or within 10 days if no time is stipulated. If the Contractor does not return the VPR within the time stipulated the Architect/Designer will assess it at reasonable rates. Once agreement is reached on price and/or timing a Variation Order (VO) for the item will be issued. Note that works covered by a SI or a VPR must NOT be actioned until the VO is issued.

When a Variation is contemplated and timing does not allow SI and VPR action the Contractor is to advise, and record in the site diary, an estimate of price and timing implications. If accepted by the Architect/Designer, a VO will be issued immediately. The Contractor shall then co-operate with the Architect/Designer to establish agreed pricing.

Claims for Variations neither priced nor estimated prior to being put in hand (but considered valid) will be incorporated into Progress Payment Certificates or the Draft Final Accounts as claimed and accepted but with a proviso allowing 5 (five) days for written objections by either the Principal or the Contractor, to any aspect of them, for further consideration.

The Main Contractor's Variations Margin agreed pre-contract will be the maximum accepted for any trade unless higher rates are nominated pre-contract and are accepted. The Main Contractor's agreed Variations Margin shown shall be deemed to include all preliminary and general costs, overheads, variation processing costs, and profit. If no margin is given, a 5% overall margin will be applied.

Note that ‘loss of anticipated profit' claims consequent upon reduction of works extent will NOT be recognised, and that the cost of processing Variations is deemed to be included in the P & G Allowance.

Also note that for Variations pricing all materials shall be charged at the actual net invoiced cost plus margin; i.e. recognised ‘Trade Price’, volume discounted where appropriate.

Progress Claims shall be in writing, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Construction Contracts Act 2002, and shall include all of the following:

pre-contract.

Note that retentions will be held exactly in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.

Clear construction debris and rubbish from the works at regular intervals, and additionally if so instructed by the Architect/Designer. Clean each space thoroughly before commencing any finishing works.

In preparation for the Practical Completion inspection carry out the following:

(Note that a Code Compliance Certificate must be obtained before Practical Completion will be certified. Obtain all required certificates, guarantees, as-built drawings, etc., as work proceeds to enable the CCC application to be submitted as soon as construction is completed).

2


SITEWORKS


2.1


Preliminary


Refer to General Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions in this Specification as appropriate. Read this section in conjunction with all other trade sections.

Comply with the New Zealand Building Code 1992 including all revisions and amendments, Verification Methods where appropriate, and construction principles that are embodied in the Acceptable Solutions.

Comply with all relevant provisions and recommendations of:

NZBC F1                    Hazardous Agents on Site

NZBC F2                     Hazardous Building Materials

NZBC F3                    Hazardous Substances and Processes

NZBC F4                     Safety from Falling

NZBC F5                    Construction and Demolition Hazards

Carry out the partial demolition to the buildings and structures as indicated for demolition on the approved drawings, including those that are located below ground level, and remove and dispose of all resulting demolished debris. Aspects of this work include the provision of all precautionary safety measures, screens, scaffoldings, hoarding, covered walkways and the like necessary for carrying out and completing the demolition work. All aspects of this work shall be carried out to comply with the requirements of the NZ Building Code, relevant Regulations and Acts, the controlling Territorial Authority, and as specified herein.

Comply with the Health and Safety at Work Act 2015 (HSWA), and with all relevant Health and Safety at Work Regulations 2016, and with all relevant WorkSafe New Zealand (WorkSafe) Approved Codes of Practice and WorkSafe Information and Guidance.

Comply with all relevant WorkSafe NZ Approved Codes of Practice and Information and Guidance requirements; in particular the NZDAA 'Demolition - Best Practice Guidelines for Demolition in New Zealand', and the 'OSH Guidelines For the Provision of Facilities and General Safety in the Construction Industry'.

In addition to all other compliance requirements for general demolition, the removal, transportation and disposal of asbestos and Asbestos-Containing-Materials (ACMs) shall comply with the Health and Safety at Work (Asbestos) Regulations 2016, and with the 'Management and Removal of Asbestos Approved Code of Practice' (ACOP).

Prepare and submit an Asbestos Management Plan conforming to the requirements of the ACOP that clearly outlines the management, handling and removal of asbestos materials.

Confirm all local authority and WorkSafe NZ requirements for asbestos materials before commencing demolition. Only certified asbestos removers with a current Certificate of Competence for Restricted Work with Asbestos shall carry out work associated with asbestos materials and ACMs.

Allow for all work associated with the safe and orderly execution of the demolition work, including complying with all Territorial Authority requirements, Building Consent, Building Act, Health and Safety requirements, and all other acts, laws, by-laws and regulations that may affect the execution of the works.

Notify WorkSafe NZ of work that is notifiable (particular hazardous work) under the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995, 24 hours before starting the work.

The times during which demolition work may be carried out is restricted. Comply with all conditions of the Building Consent. Do not carry out demolition work outside the permitted times.

Demolition work shall be carried out by suitably skilled and experienced workers and operators trained for this type of work, including the necessary demolition methods and the maintenance and inspection of demolition plant and equipment. Carry out demolition work in a careful manner so as to avoid damage to existing buildings, structures or property not scheduled for demolition and to be retained

Ensure that supervisory personnel have a detailed knowledge of the precautions and procedures outlined in the WorkSafe NZ 'Demolition - Best Practice Guidelines for Demolition in New Zealand'.

Notify the Contract Administrator the name of the appointed demolition supervisor prior to commencement, who shall be the holder of a current safety qualification recognised by WorkSafe NZ. Evidence of this shall be made available to the Contract Administrator.

All practicable steps must be taken for the safety of employees, and equipment must be operated by competent people. Particular care must be taken when employees demolish unsafe or damaged structures such as brittle roofing, fire-damaged and cantilevered structures.

Provide all necessary shoring or strutting or other protection to ensure complete safety and protection throughout the contract.

Protect public footpaths, kerbs, gutters, crossings, etc., (and keep them free and clear of debris or excavation material), and pay all charges in connection with any damage rectification. Ensure that roads and paths are not obstructed and the traffic is not impeded while the work is being carried out.

Where there is a danger to the public, warning signs, barricades or warning devices must be provided and used.

Notify the Contract Administrator immediately of any services or conditions or constructions encountered which are inexplicable or not anticipated on the drawings or in this specification. Removal, disconnection, relocation or otherwise for these shall all be as directed and carried out by appropriately qualified tradespersons.

The Principal has the right to remove any fixtures and fittings, and to demolish or remove any part of the building, before the building is handed over to the Contractor.

Carefully dismantle and remove any materials and items that are scheduled or identified otherwise for reuse. Store and protect these from damage, weather and contamination until completion of the works or as directed.

All materials, debris and other items arising from demolition shall become the property of the Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise, and due allowance for the credit value (if any) of such materials, items, etc., shall be made in the tender.

Apart from those items scheduled for salvage or reuse all demolition material becomes the property of the Contractor, and together with rubble shall be removed from the site as quickly as possible.

Remove all demolition rubble and waste material off the site to an approved landfill, and in such a manner as to cause as little inconvenience as possible to the adjoining owners and the public. Pay all associated landfill and disposal fees.

Remove demolition rubble, waste and salvaged materials continually from the site through the period of the demolition, and do not allow these to accumulate on site.

The burning of demolition waste on the site is not permitted.

Take full responsibility for:

Check the relationship and the condition of adjacent buildings, structures and areas. No part of the demolition process shall adversely affect the integrity of adjacent buildings, structures or areas to be retained.

Take all necessary measures to minimise nuisance from dust, noise and other causes affecting adjoining areas, properties and the public.

Refer to NZS 6803 'Acoustics - Construction noise', and comply with the requirements of the Building Consent (as applicable). Use appropriate plant, equipment and machinery so as to comply with required noise limits.

Make all necessary allowances to reinstate and make good any damage caused by the demolition work to any existing building or property, including site, being retained. No reinstatement or making good work shall be undertaken without prior assessment and instruction from the Contract Administrator.

Ensure that all demolition work has been carried out to the required standard, including the disconnection and sealing off of redundant services.

Leave the site clear of all demolition rubble, waste materials and disturbed ground to the required standard.

Remove all associated machinery, plant, tools, equipment, etc., from the site.

Check that any remedial work associated with demolition damage to other buildings or property or retained area of the site has been carried out to the requirements and satisfaction of the Architect/Designer.

Check that any materials and/or items salvaged on behalf of the Owner have been handed over to the Owner and are no longer the responsibility of the Contractor.

Provide copies of all necessary compliance documents to the relevant parties.

IR Group

Naenae College Administration                  Issued for Tender/Consent

Upgrade

Refer to General Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions in this Specification as appropriate. Read this section in conjunction with all other trade sections.

Comply with the New Zealand Building Code 1992 including all revisions and amendments, Verification Methods where appropriate, and construction principles that are embodied in the Acceptable Solutions.

Comply with all relevant provisions and recommendations of:

2097:2006(AS/NZS)

Methods for sampling veneer and plywood

2098.0:2006(AS/NZS)

Methods of test for veneer and plywood - General introduction and list of methods

2270:2006(AS/NZS)

Plywood and blockboard for interior use

2588:2018(AS|NZS)

Gypsum plasterboard

2589:2017(AS/NZS)

Gypsum linings - Application and finishing

3601:1973(NZS)

Metric dimensions for timber

3602:2003(NZS)

Timber and wood-based products for use in building

3603:1993(NZS)

Timber Structures Standard

3604:2011(NZS)

Timber-framed buildings

3622:2004(NZS)

Verification of timber properties

3631:1988(NZS)

New Zealand timber grading rules

3640:2003(NZS)

Chemical preservation of round and sawn timber

AS/NZS 1080.1:2012

Timber - Methods of test - Method 1: Moisture content

AS/NZS 1604.3:2012

Specification for preservative treatment - Part 3: Plywood

NASH Standard

Residential and Low-rise Steel Framing - Part 1: Design Criteria

NZBC C/AS2-AS6

Protection from Fire

NZBC G6

Airborne and Impact Sound

This section includes the receiving, stacking and storage of all Carpenter's materials and the fabrication, erection and fixing of all framing, sheathings and finishing timbers, including all work incidental to neatly finishing in other trades and all temporary work and temporary bracing.

The Carpenter shall attend upon all trades, and shall supply and fix all obviously necessary but not specifically mentioned fixings and materials.

Supply and install timber framing to the floors, walls, roofs, and other timber framed elements, as identified and detailed on the drawings. All aspects of this work shall be in accordance with NZS 3604, product manufacturers' recommendations, and as shown on the drawings and the specification.

Where required by the NZ Building Act 2004 it is the building contractor's responsibility to ensure that all restricted building work is carried out by a Licensed Building Practitioner.

All work shall be carried out to current best trade practise by experienced and competent tradesmen, familiar with the materials and installation techniques, in accordance with NZS 3604 and as shown on the drawings.

Co-operate with other trades to ensure that all preliminary and preparatory works are completed to specification and as shown on the drawings prior to installing timber framing.

Co-ordinate with other trades to install timber framing as required.

Unless otherwise noted or specified on the drawings or specification, all framing timber shall be minimum structural grade SG 8 Radiata pine in accordance with NZS 3622.

Framing timber shall be seasoned or kiln dried, and be straight and true and free from wind, warp and distortion, and in lengths suitable for the members required, and shall have a moisture content of between 12% and 18% before installation.

Do not used damaged, faulty or defective materials.

All non-durable timber framing shall be appropriately treated against moisture and/or insect decay by treatment plants with recognised quality assurance systems that are administered by the Timber Preservation Council (NZTPC). Treatment of timber and wood-based building products shall be to the requirements of NZS 3602 as an absolute minimum, and all treated timber shall be identified and marked as required.

Carefully manage treated framing during installation to avoid accidental use of timber with a lower performance or durability treatment than that required or specified.

Check timber framing upon delivery and reject sub-standard or damaged material.

Store timber framing dry under cover, fillet stacked and well clear of the ground, and protect from

damage, moisture, and contamination.

Ensure all appropriate personal protection equipment is worn at all times when handling and cutting treated framing.

All timber framing members, including all dwanging, strutting, blocking, bracing etc, shall be sized, setout, fitted and fixed to the requirements of NZS 3604 and as shown on the drawings to accommodate structural loadings, cladding and lining setout and support, and the installation of other building components, fixtures and fittings.

All framing shall be erected without deviation, true to line, level, angle and plumb, and evenly aligned and square, and within the tolerances allowed in NZS 3604 Table 2.1. Framing members accurately cut, lapped, housed, joined, and seated so as to provide full contact over the bearing surfaces.

Temporarily prop, brace, tie, and secure framing members and elements as required until the framing is complete and self supporting. Leave in place for safety purposes as long as required.

Protect timber framing as required during installation against damage and moisture, and against significant variation of moisture content until ready for lining. Avoid ponding of water around floor plates.

The notching, checking, and boring of framing members shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of NZS 3604.

Avoided checking and cutting where possible and keep to such dimensions so as not to prejudice the purpose for which the member is used. Keep edge notching to a minimum and where possible use centrally bored holes instead.

Concealed services pipes and wiring shall not project beyond the framing face and where possible shall be beyond the lining's fixing reach.

Protect timber framing as required during installation against damage and moisture, and against significant variation of moisture content until ready for lining. Avoid ponding of water around floor plates.

Except for jack studs, bottom plates and top plates, framing members may be substituted with built-up members in accordance with the limitations of NZS 3604 2.4.4.7 with the prior approval of the Architect/Designer only.

Unless otherwise noted or specified, timber framing fastenings and connectors shall be as specified in the relevant fixing schedules of NZS 3604 or have an equivalent capacity as specified therein. Timber framing connectors and fixings shall comply with the product information as required in NZS 3604

Unless otherwise noted or specified, the minimum durability of timber framing fixings and fastenings, excluding nails and screws, shall comply with the durability requirements of NZS 3604 Table 4.1.

Galvanised steel fixing components, excluding nails and screws, shall have galvanised coating masses in accordance with NZS 3604 Table 4.2.

Unless noted or specified otherwise, the materials for nails and screws shall be as given in NZS 3604 Table 4.3.

Steel fixings and fastenings in contact with timber treated with copper based timber preservatives (H3.2 or higher) shall be in accordance with NZS 3604 4.4.4.

Stainless steel nails shall be minimum Grade 304 unless otherwise specified or noted.

Unless specified or shown otherwise, all bolted and coach screwed connections shall be M12 or M16 in accordance with the relevant fixing requirements given in NZS 3604.

Bolted and coach screwed connections shall have either a 50mm x 3mm square, or a 55mm x 3mm round, washer to each head and nut for M12 and M16 fixings. Washers shall be of the same material and durability as the bolt or coach screw.

Top and bottom plates shall be to the dimensions and layout shown on the drawings. Unless specified or shown otherwise, top and bottom plates shall be fixed in accordance with NZS 3604 7.5.12 and Tables 8.18 and 8.19, true to line and level or angle.

Joints in top plates shall be made over a stud or over blocking between studs, and all top plate connections shall be in accordance with NZS 3604 8.7.3. Form all holes and edge notches in top and bottom plates in accordance with NZS 3604 8.7.5.

Studs shall be to the dimensions and spacings shown on the drawings, and installed true to line and plumb in both directions between top and bottom plates.

Unless noted otherwise, non-load bearing wall studs shall be to the spacings given in NZS 3604 Table

Form all holes and edge notches in studs in accordance with NZS 3604 8.5.1.5. Do not notch, check, cut, or bore holes in the middle third of any trimming stud.

Should the need arise, studs shall be straightened in accordance with NZS 3604 8.5.3 with prior approval from the Architect/Designer only.

Unless noted otherwise, studs in loadbearing walls for 3 kPa floor loads shall be in accordance with NZS 3604 Table 14.10.

Lintels shall be to the dimensions and locations shown on the drawings, and installed true to line and level, and shall be supported by a 45mm thick doubling stud or jack stud fixed to a trimming stud, and secured against uplift in accordance with NZS 3604 8.6.1.8 as required.

The thickness of a lintel may be made from two or more members, where each member is the length of the lintel, in accordance with NZS 3604 2.4.4.7.

Unless specified or shown otherwise, sill and head trimmers to openings shall be the same width as the wall stud and to the thickness given in NZS 3604 Table 8.15, and installed at the required opening height true to line and level, and supported by a 45mm thick doubling stud or jack stud fixed to a trimming stud.

Dwangs shall be the same width and thickness as the wall stud, and installed at the centres noted on the drawings, and accurately cut and fixed in place true to line and level and flush with stud edges. Dwangs fixed in accordance with NZS 3604 Table 8.19.

Ceiling framing shall be to the dimensions, layout, spacings, and details shown on the drawings, and shall be installed true to line, level and plane, and securely fixed in accordance with NZS 3604 Table 13.3.

Supply and install GIB® Plasterboard Linings specified herein, as sheet lining materials to the walls, ceilings and other elements identified on the drawings, complete with all accessories required for proper installation, finishing and performance. All aspects of this work shall be in complete accordance with the current GIB® Site Guide and relevant GIB® Systems literature (check www.gib.co.nz, or call 0800 100 442 for the latest editions), and other relevant product manufacturers' recommendations.

No substitutions are permitted for GIB® Plasterboard Linings, GIB® Systems or GIB® System components and accessories.

This specification must be read in conjunction with relevant GIB® Systems specifications - GIB® EzyBrace® Systems, GIB® Fire Rated Systems, GIB® Noise Control Systems, GIB® Aqualine® Wet Area Systems, GIB® X-Block® Systems, GIB® Quietline®, GIB® Intertenancy Barrier System, and GIB® Rondo® Metal Batten Systems - and other specifications sections, as they are interrelated.

Comply with the Health and Safety at Work Act 2015 (HSWA), and with all relevant Health and Safety at Work Regulations 2016, and with all relevant WorkSafe New Zealand (WorkSafe) Approved Codes of Practice and WorkSafe Information and Guidance, particularly those for construction and building maintenance.

GIB® Product & System Warranty:

GIB Systems Durability.

The following systems have, unless stated otherwise in GIB® technical literature, a serviceability life in excess of that stated and satisfy the requirements of NZBC Clause B2 Durability:

50 Years:

Provide the GIB® Product & System Warranty on the manufacturer's standard warranty form. Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works.

Include with the warranty: a copy of the completed GIB® Installation Sign-Off sheet, and the GIB® Plasterboard Lining Systems Care and Maintenance bulletin.

Installation of GIB® Plasterboard Linings and associated GIB® Systems shall be carried out by a registered member of the Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries of New Zealand Inc. (AWCI). If not already provided and if requested, submit evidence of AWCI membership and relevant experience.

Ensure that the installation and finishing of GIB® Plasterboard Linings and associated GIB® Systems comply in all respects with the approved design drawings and specifications, and Building Consent.

Maintain and comply with industry-recognised quality control and assurance procedures to ensure that all stages of work are carried out to the highest standard.

Carry out all necessary pre-installation, installation and finishing inspections of GIB® Plasterboard Linings for each area of work in accordance with the requirements of the GIB® Site Guide and associated industry Code of Practice (AWCI) recommendations.

Complete the GIB® Site Guide Pre-Installation Checklist prior to installing GIB® plasterboard linings, and relevant GIB® Performance Systems Installation Checklists.

Complete the GIB® Interior Plasterer/Stopper Installation Sign-Off Certificate upon completion and before handover for subsequent decoration.

Should defective materials and/or work be found at any time before the final acceptance of the work, it shall be rejected. Rejected GIB® Plasterboard Linings and GIB® Systems materials and work shall be repaired and/or replaced to the satisfaction of the Architect/Designer, without delay and at no additional cost to the Principal.

GIB® plasterboard linings shall be as specified herein and as indicated on the approved drawings. The substitution of GIB® branded plasterboard linings and GIB® System components for alternative brands is not permitted under any circumstances.

The substitution of a specified GIB® plasterboard lining for an alternative GIB® plasterboard lining by the Contractor shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of the GIB® Site Guide: 2.3 - Board Substitution Options, and relevant GIB® Systems literature. Such substitutions shall only be permitted with the Architect's/Designer's written authorisation, and shall be at no additional cost to the Principal. Should any resultant extra work and/or redesign work be required to accommodate alternative GIB® Plasterboard Linings to satisfy design, performance and compliance requirements, then the cost of these shall be borne by the Contractor.

GIB® plasterboard products must NOT be:

Bracing Performance - GIB EzyBrace® Systems - Timber Framing. To the timber framed elements noted as 'Bracing' on the drawings, additionally comply with all relevant aspects of the GIB EzyBrace® Systems (2016) publication and GIB Ezybrace® Bracing Software according to the specified bracing unit rating, BRANZ Appraisal No.928 (2016), and other relevant product manufacturers' recommendations. Refer to separate specification GIB EzyBrace® Systems.

Wet Area Plasterboard Linings - GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems. To the areas noted as ‘Wet Area’ on the drawings, additionally comply with all relevant aspects of the GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems (2007) publication, BRANZ Appraisal No.427 (2007), and other relevant product manufacturers' recommendations. Refer to separate specification GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems.

GIB® Standard Plasterboard, 10mm. A 10mm thick standard plasterboard interior lining. Suitable for use in residential and commercial applications on walls. Manufactured to exceed the requirements of AS/NZS 2588. Refer to the GIB® Site Guide.

Installed Location: Line all new timber framed walls with 10mm GIB unless alternative GIB material specifed by Engineer (see Bracing Plan)

GIB® Standard Plasterboard, 13mm. A 13mm thick standard plasterboard interior lining. Suitable for use in residential and commercial applications on walls and ceilings. Manufactured to exceed the requirements of AS/NZS 2588. Refer to the GIB® Site Guide.

Installed Location: All new ceiling linings to be 13mm GIB

GIB Aqualine®, 10mm. A 10mm thick moisture resistant plasterboard interior lining, with a water resistant polymer impregnated core to help prevent moisture penetration. Suitable for use in residential and commercial applications on walls and ceilings in spaces at risk from water or moisture damage. Manufactured to exceed the requirements of AS/NZS 2588. Refer to the GIB® Site Guide.

Installed Location: In all wet areas i.e. WC's, kitchen and behind vanity unit in sick bay

GIB Aqualine®, 13mm. A 13mm thick moisture resistant plasterboard interior lining, with a water resistant polymer impregnated core to help prevent moisture penetration. Suitable for use in residential and commercial applications on walls and ceilings in spaces at risk from water or moisture damage. Manufactured to exceed the requirements of AS/NZS 2588. Refer to the GIB® Site Guide.

Installed Location: Ceiling linings in new WC lobby and WC's 1 to 3

Metal Ceiling Battens - GIB® Rondo® Metal Batten Systems. Installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements to the layout and details shown on the approved drawings. Refer to the GIB® Site Guide, and to separate specification GIB® Rondo® Metal Batten Systems.

GIBFix® Framing System - incorporating GIBFix® Angle and GIB® Grabber® Dual Thread Drywall Screws. Refer to the GIB® Site Guide, and to separate specification GIBFix® Framing System.

GIB® Plasterboard Fasteners. Fasteners for fixing GIB® Plasterboard Linings shall be selected and used according to best fixing practices and the GIB® Site Guide and relevant GIB® Systems literature.

Fastener heads shall be set slightly below the plasterboard sheet surface without breaking the paper facing.

Screw Fixing to Timber Framing:

Nail Fixing to Timber Framing:

GIB® Adhesives. In addition to GIB® plasterboard fasteners, fix GIB® Plasterboard Linings using GIB® adhesives in accordance with the requirements of the GIB® Site Guide and GIB® System literature.

GIB® Adhesives:

GIB® Metal Trims. Perforated metal corner beads and edge trim made from galvanised steel. Installed in accordance with the requirements of the GIB® Site Guide and GIB® Systems literature.

GIB® Metal Trim Profiles:

plasterboard. Available in 3.0m lengths.

GIB® Goldline® Paper Faced Metal Trims. Paper-faced metal corner beads and edge trim made with a patented, high quality paper laminated to galvanised steel forms. Paper faced metal trims shall be

embedded in jointing compound - do not mechanically fasten paper faced trims. Installed in accordance with the requirements of the GIB® Site Guide and GIB® Systems literature.

GIB® Goldline® Profiles:

GIB® Paper Faced Composite Trims. Flexible, reinforced, cut-to-length, paper faced corner trims, suitable for use on internal and external corners with an angle between 90° and 270°. Paper faced composite trims shall be embedded in jointing compound - do not mechanically fasten paper faced trims. Installed in accordance with the requirements of the GIB® Site Guide and GIB® Systems literature.

GIB® Paper Faced Composite Trims:

GIB® Plasterboard Control Joints. Form movement control joints in plasterboard lined walls and ceilings to the locations and details shown on the approved drawings. Where not indicated on the drawings, movement joints shall be positioned in accordance with the requirements and recommendations given in the GIB® Site Guide and relevant GIB® Systems literature.

When not specified on the drawings, select the most suitable GIB® Plasterboard Control Joint according to location, application, durability, and finish detail required.

GIB® Plasterboard Control Joints:

GIB® Compounds. Use the most suitable GIB® Compounds to joint and finish GIB® Plasterboard Linings according to the plasterboard type, location, application, durability, and quality of finish required. GIB® Compounds shall be applied and finished in accordance with the manufacturer's

requirements to the specified finish level, and used in conjunction with GIB® Paper Joint Tape and GIB® Plasterboard Trims.

GIB® Compounds:

GIB® Paper Joint Tape. A 50mm wide, spark perforated paper joint tape used to strengthen joints between plasterboard sheets. Centre-creased for internal and external corner applications.

Recommended for jointing GIB® plasterboard wall and ceiling linings in accordance with the GIB® Site Guide and GIB Systems literature.

Wet Area Sealant. A mould resistant, flexible, neutral curing silicone sealant with strong adhesion, suitable for wet area applications and where there is high humidity, including bathrooms, toilets, showers, wash-down areas, kitchens, laundries.

Applied in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's instructions, as required by the GIB® Site Guide and GIB® System literature. Sealant joints shall be in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's joint design width-to-depth ratio.

GIB® Gapfiller. A general purpose, gun applied, one-part water based, paintable acrylic gap filler. Provides excellent adhesion for gaps and cracks and other low movement joints. Used in strict in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Refer to the GIB® Site Guide.

To the areas noted as a specific Level of Finish (3-5) on the drawings, additionally comply with all relevant aspects of the GIB® Site Guide and AS/NZS 2589, complete with all system accessories, and other relevant product manufacturers' recommendations.

NOTE: Unless stated otherwise, Level 4 is the default Level of Finish.

Carry out all necessary inspections and assessments of completed plasterboard jointing and finishing prior to hand-over for subsequent decoration.

Do not apply surface sealers and decorative treatments until written agreement between the Contractor and Painter/Decorator is given confirming the specified Finish Levels have been achieved and the plasterboard linings are ready for subsequent sealing and decoration.

Co-operate with other trades to ensure that all preliminary and preparatory works are completed to specification and as shown on the drawings.

Co-operate with the Decorator to ensure that the specified Finish Levels for plasterboard jointing and finishing is achieved before decorating commences.

Coordinate with other trades to install GIB® Plasterboard Linings as required, and to ensure that: - appropriate tolerances and clearances allow for adjacent internal linings, fixtures, fittings, services, etc; and

Where required by the NZ Building Act 2004, it is the building contractor's responsibility to ensure that all restricted building work is carried out by a Licensed Building Practitioner.

Installation and finishing work of GIB® Plasterboard Linings shall be carried out by qualified and experienced tradespersons, familiar with the specified materials and installation and finishing techniques, in accordance with the GIB® Site Guide and the relevant GIB® product technical literature, and to fully comply with all warranty requirements. Submit evidence of experience on request, e.g. National Certificate of Interior Systems, or Certified Business Member of AWCINZ.

GIB® Plasterboard Linings shall be jointed and finished to the specified Finish Levels in accordance with AS/NZS 2589 and GIB® Site Guide. Make all necessary arrangements for the quality assessment of plasterboard jointing and finishing Finish Levels prior to commencing decorating.

All cutting, fixing, jointing, finishing and sealing techniques shall be exactly as recommended by the manufacturer. All work shall be such as to leave a neat, efficient and robust installation, to the required standard and free from damage and defects.

Protect surrounding surfaces and areas from jointing compound splashes and sanding dust.

Store GIB® Plasterboard Linings indoors, in neat, flat stacks off the floor, in dry conditions and without any sagging or distortion, in accordance with the GIB® Site Guide. Keep plasterboard linings, compounds and accessories dry, out of direct sunlight, and protected from damage, moisture and contamination at all times.

Do not use damaged or defective materials and products, or products that are beyond the designated shelf life.

Should a problem be encountered with any GIB® product during installation or delivery, immediately contact the GIB® Helpline on 0800 100 442. Do not continue to use the product that is not performing to specification or expectation. Keep samples of the product in question and where possible, document batch numbers and/or manufacturing dates.

Handle all products and materials in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and relevant Product Data Sheets and GIB® Site Guide, and in a manner that prevents damage. Carry plasterboard sheets on edge, and avoid damage to sheet edges, ends, and surfaces.

Installers shall be familiar with and comply with the requirements of the GIB® Site Guide precautions for use, and use appropriate safety gear when handling materials.

Installers shall conform with all relevant WorkSafe NZ Guidelines and Codes of Practice -including the OSH Guidelines For the Provision of Facilities and General Safety in the Construction Industry.

All framing and substrates shall be complete and ready for GIB® Plasterboard Lining installation.

Timber framing shall comply with NZS 3604, or with NZS 3603 and AS/NZS 1170 for specific design, and have a maximum moisture content 18% at the time of plasterboard lining installation.

Light structural steel framing shall comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 4600 or the NASH Standard for Residential and Low-rise Steel Framing, Part 1: Design Criteria. All light structural steel

framing members shall satisfy the requirements of AS/NZS 1170. Comply with the steel framing fabricator's specifications and requirements for plasterboard installation.

Steel stud partitioning shall comply with AS 1397 and as specified and shown on the drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's specifications and requirements for plasterboard installation.

Concrete substrates shall comply with the CCANZ CP 01:2011 or with NZS 3109. New concrete must have aged for a minimum of 28 days. Ensure that concrete surfaces are within the tolerances specified. For of direct bonded plasterboard linings, concrete substrates must below 75% relative humidity prior to installation.

Concrete masonry substrates shall comply with NZS 4229, or with NZS 4230 and AS/NZS 1170 for specific design. For of direct bonded plasterboard linings, concrete masonry substrates must below 75% relative humidity prior to installation.

Carry out all necessary moisture readings. Do not commence installation until the moisture readings are below the required level.

Carry out all necessary substrate inspections and preparatory work in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the GIB® Site Guide prior to installation. Complete and sign the GIB® Site Guide Pre-Installation Checklist.

Check that the building envelope has been finished at all penetrations including doors, windows, services, etc., and the building is weathertight.

Check junctions to all other building elements and ensure that all necessary works have been completed, including cavity insulation.

Check that all fixtures, fittings and built-in items are correctly installed, and that all framing and substrate edges are completed as detailed.

Confirm the location and details of movement control joints, as indicated on the drawings, prior to installation.

Ensure all pre-wiring and service piping is installed and complete.

Check that any required cavity insulation has been installed correctly and its bulk thickness does not exceed the framing thickness.

Remove all debris and rubbish from framing voids prior to installing linings.

The commencement of work on each section/area shall be deemed to indicate full acceptance by the installer that all preparatory works by other trades is complete.

Framing - check all aspects of preparatory works, including but not limited to:

Check that all building work, mechanical, plumbing, electrical, fire protection and other services installed above the ceiling are completed and independently supported by the building structure - not by the ceiling system.

Install GIB® Plasterboard Linings and accessories in accordance with the requirements of the GIB® Site Guide and product technical literature and associated fixing schedules, to the locations and details shown on the drawings. For GIB® Performance Systems, refer to the relevant GIB® system specification.

Prior to installation, confirm:

GIB® Plasterboard Ceiling Linings - Standard Ceiling Fixing with Metal Ceiling Battens. Metal ceiling battens shall be from the GIB® Rondo® Metal Batten Systems - refer to separate specification GIB® Rondo® Metal Batten Systems.

Unless independently supported, uniformly distributed loads (fixtures and fittings and/or overlaid insulation) supported by GIB® plasterboard ceiling linings shall not exceed 3.0 kg/m².

Metal ceiling batten spacings shall be shall be as given in the GIB® Site Guide according to the specified plasterboard thickness - 600mm for 13mm or greater thickness, 450mm for 10mm thickness. Ceiling battens shall all run in the same direction within the ceiling area. In no case shall ceiling battens be continuous over movement control joints in the structure.

Install GIB® Plasterboard sheets right angles to ceiling battens, with sheet end-joints staggered minimum 600mm and located off battens and back-blocked. Fully support sheets during positioning and fixing - for ceiling installations, the use of a mechanical lifting machine is recommended.

Plasterboard sheets shall be fixed to ceiling battens in conjunction with GIBFix® adhesive applied at maximum at 200mm centres. Do not apply adhesive at sheet edges or within 200mm of fasteners. Firmly press the plasterboard where adhesive has been applied to ensure full contact.

Fix sheets to timber ceiling battens with GIB® Grabber® Self Tapping Screws in accordance with GIB® Site Guide fastener schedule according to the plasterboard thickness. Position fasteners no closer than 12mm from a tapered edge or 18mm from a cut sheet edge.

Install all necessary paper-faced metal beads, casing beads, shadow and reveal beads and other edge trims to plasterboard corners and edges as necessary and as detailed on the drawings.

Form movement control joints to the locations and details shown on the approved drawings. Where not indicated on the drawings, movement joints shall be positioned at maximum 12m intervals in both directions on any single ceiling, and where there is a change in ceiling lining material, and shall coincide with the junctions between adjoining spaces.

Accommodate recessed light fittings, heating and ventilating diffusers and grilles and other utility fixtures and fittings that penetrate the ceiling lining.

GIB® Plasterboard Wall Linings Horizontally-Fixed to Timber Framing. Install GIB® plasterboard sheets horizontally, at right angles to studs, with any end-joints staggered, and with the bottom edge of the lower sheet gapped 5–10mm off finished floor level.

All joints between sheets shall be touch fitted. Eliminate or minimise the butting of sheet end-joints by using full-length or long-length sheets. Give careful consideration to the placement of sheet joints. Where possible, place joints in situations where they are less likely to be affected by critical lighting.

It is recommended that sheet end joints in horizontally fixed plasterboard be unsupported, off-stud and back blocked - stud centres must not exceed 600mm. For plasterboard linings with Level 3 Finish and Level 4 Finish, sheet end joints can be located on-stud.

Sheet end joints at openings, such as window and door openings, shall not coincide with the vertical edges of the opening - sheets shall be fitted so that the vertical end joint falls minimum 200mm either side of the edge of the opening.

Plasterboard sheets shall be fixed to timber framing in conjunction with GIBFix® adhesive applied at maximum at 300mm centres to intermediate studs. Do not apply adhesive at sheet edges or within 200mm of fasteners. Firmly press the plasterboard where adhesive has been applied to ensure full contact.

Fix sheets to timber framing with GIB® Grabber® High Thread Screws or GIB® Nails in accordance with GIB® Site Guide fastener schedule. Place fasteners at 300mm centres to top and bottom plates and to perimeter studs, and to each stud where the horizontal joint crosses the stud, with screws no closer than 12mm from sheet edges. It is recommended that fasteners at wall corners are placed 50mm in from the corner in each direction (horizontal/vertical).

Install all necessary paper-faced and metal beads, casing beads, shadow and reveal beads and other edge trims to plasterboard corners and edges as necessary and as detailed on the drawings.

Form movement control joints to the locations and details shown on the approved drawings. Where not indicated on the drawings, movement joints shall be positioned at maximum 12m intervals in both directions (horizontally/vertically), and shall coincide with movement joints in the primary structure, and where there is a change in wall lining material.

Accommodate piped and cabled services and other building services fixtures and fittings that penetrate the wall lining.

GIB® Plasterboard Wall Linings Vertically-Fixed to Timber Framing. Install GIB® plasterboard sheets vertically, parallel with studs, with any end-joints staggered, and with the bottom edge of the lower sheet gapped 5–10mm off finished floor level.

All joints between sheets shall be touch fitted. Eliminate or minimise the butting of sheet end-joints by using full-length or long-length sheets. Give careful consideration to the placement of sheet joints. Where possible, place joints in situations where they are less likely to be affected by critical lighting.

Form sheet edge joints on studs. Short vertical edge joints (400mm or less) such as above windows and door can be made off stud and back blocked.

Sheet joints at openings, such as window and door openings, shall not coincide with the vertical edges of the opening - sheets shall be fitted so that the vertical end joint falls minimum 200mm inside the edge of the opening.

Plasterboard sheets shall be fixed to timber framing in conjunction with GIBFix® adhesive applied at maximum at 300mm centres to intermediate studs. Do not apply adhesive at sheet edges or within 200mm of fasteners. Firmly press the plasterboard where adhesive has been applied to ensure full contact.

Fix sheets to timber framing with GIB® Grabber® High Thread Screws or GIB® Nails in accordance with GIB® Site Guide fastener schedule. Place fasteners at 300mm centres around the perimeter of each sheet, no closer than 12mm from sheet edges. It is recommended that fasteners at wall corners are placed 50mm in from the corner in each direction (horizontal/vertical).

Install all necessary paper-faced and metal beads, casing beads, shadow and reveal beads and other edge trims to plasterboard corners and edges as necessary and as detailed on the drawings.

Form movement control joints to the locations and details shown on the approved drawings. Where not indicated on the drawings, movement joints shall be positioned at maximum 12m intervals in both directions (horizontally/vertically), and shall coincide with movement joints in the primary structure, and where there is a change in wall lining material.

Accommodate piped and cabled services and other building services fixtures and fittings that penetrate the wall lining.

Joint and finish GIB® Plasterboard Linings with GIB® joint and finishing compounds appropriate for the plasterboard type and durability, and the finish level required. Refer to Joint & Finishing Compounds clause.

Carry out jointing and finishing according to the specified Finish Level in accordance with the GIB® Site Guide and GIB® Compounds brochure. Reinforce sheet joints and internal corners with joint tape or paper-faced trim embedded into the Taping (first) Coat.

Sheet joints, internal and external corners, and fastener heads shall be evenly finished with GIB® compounds. When dry, lightly sand to a smooth finish with 220 grit sandpaper or drywall sanding screen to remove tool marks, ridges and other imperfections prior to subsequent sealing and decorating.

Check that GIB® Plasterboard Linings have been installed in accordance with the GIB® Site Guide and GIB® Systems literature, and are finished to the specified finish levels.

Check for any damage and defective work - repair or replace as necessary to the required standard.

Ensure that inspection and assessment of the plasterboard Finish Level has been carried out, and that written agreement stating the completed jointing and finishing is acceptable for subsequent surface sealing and decoration has been provided.

Ensure that the GIB® Installation Sign-Off Certificate has been completed and signed by the Interior Plasterer/Stopper.

Leave all of this work complete and to the required standard in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements, as shown on the drawings and the conditions of the Building Consent.

Clean up thoroughly and leave the finished work and surrounding surfaces clean and free of contamination from compound splashes and dust. Remove all associated rubbish and excess material from the site.

Issue to the Owner a copy of the GIB® Plasterboard Lining Systems Care and Maintenance bulletin, and a copy of the GIB® Product and System Warranty.

Preparation and painting (by others) of GIB® Plasterboard Linings shall be carried out in accordance with AS/NZS 2311 and with the paint manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to separate specification section Painting & Decorating.

Supply and install Plytech Plywood Interior Linings, as specified herein, to the locations identified on the drawings, complete with all components and accessories required for proper installation and performance. All aspects of this work shall be in complete accordance with Plytech International Ltd technical literature (check www.plytech.co.nz, or email sales@plytech.co.nz, or call 0800 900 905 for the latest editions), other relevant product manufacturers' recommendations, and the New Zealand Building Code.

No substitutions are permitted for Plytech Plywood Interior Linings.

This specification should be read in conjunction with other specification sections, in particular Painting & Decorating, as they are interrelated.

Comply with the Health and Safety at Work Act 2015 (HSWA), and with all relevant Health and Safety at Work Regulations 2016, and with all relevant WorkSafe New Zealand (WorkSafe) Approved Codes of Practice and WorkSafe Information and Guidance, particularly those for construction and building maintenance.

Plytech International Ltd Product Warranty - as applicable and according to warranty terms and conditions.

Installer's Installation Warranty - according to warranty terms and conditions.

Plytech Plywood Interior Linings materials shall be as specified herein and as indicated on the design drawings. The substitution of the specified Plytech Plywood Interior Lining materials for an alternative brand or material is not permitted under any circumstances.

The substitution of a specified Plytech plywood material for an alternative Plytech plywood material by the Contractor shall only be permitted with the Contract Administrator's written authorisation, and shall be at no additional cost to the Principal. Should any resultant extra work and/or redesign work be required to accommodate an alternative Plytech plywood material to satisfy design, performance and compliance requirements, then the cost of these shall be borne by the Contractor.

Maintain and comply with industry-recognised quality control and assurance procedures to ensure that all stages of the works are carried out to the highest standard.

Ensure that the installation and finishing of Plytech Plywood Interior Linings comply in all respects with the approved design drawings and specifications, and Building Consent.

Should defective materials and/or work be found at any time before the final acceptance of the work, it shall be rejected. Rejected Plytech Plywood Interior Linings work shall be repaired and/or replaced to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator, without delay and at no additional cost to the Principal.

Plytech Plywood Interior Linings must NOT be:

Except for specific engineering design (SED) ceiling systems, plywood used for ceiling linings shall not exceed 17.5 kg/m².

Plytech Ambience Poplar PF - 12mm. A high quality, appearance grade, interior plywood to EN 635. 2440mm long x 1220mm wide x 12mm thick panel, featuring a decorative, straight-grained Italian Poplar veneer face 'blonded' to a creamy-white appearance, and factory pre-finished with a UV protective, clear gloss coating.

Technical Specification - to EN 635:

Installed as an interior wall lining in accordance with Plytech technical literature, to the layout and details shown on the design drawings.

Installed Location: As shown on drawings - floor plan and elevations

Plywood Fixings. Fixings for plywood interior linings shall be selected and used according to best fixing practices and Plytech recommendations; and shall be appropriate for the lining application and performance, and to suit the supporting frame material. Fixing type and placement (frequency) shall be as specified herein and/or on the design drawings. Refer to Fixing clause.

Adhesive. Bostik Gold Ultra - or approved-equivalent - water-based, high-bond strength construction adhesive. Used to adhere plywood interior linings, in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's requirements.

Co-operate with other trades to ensure that all preliminary and preparatory works are completed to specification and as shown on the design drawings.

Coordinate with other trades to install Plytech Plywood Interior Linings as required, and to ensure that:

Where required by the NZ Building Act 2004, it is the building contractor's responsibility to ensure that all restricted building work is carried out by a Licensed Building Practitioner. The building shall be completely enclosed and weathertight before plywood lining installation commences.

Installation of plywood interior linings shall be carried out by qualified and experienced tradespersons, familiar with the specified materials and installation techniques, in accordance with the manufacturer's technical literature, and to fully comply with all warranty requirements.

All cutting, drilling and notching of plywood materials shall be carried out using suitable tools and equipment.

All work shall be such as to leave a neat, efficient and robust installation, to the required standard, free from damage and defects.

Take all reasonable measures during installation to protect plywood panels from damage and surface marking likely to affect the appearance of the finished lining.

Make all necessary provisions to protect adjacent finished work and surfaces from damage during installation.

Upon delivery to site, inspect materials and reject those items found to be damaged, defective or substandard, and contact Plytech immediately.

Store plywood panels inside in a weatherproof and well ventilated area; stacked flat and level and clear of the floor on evenly spaced bearers; without sagging or bending, and free from excessive compression - if available, store panels on the supplied delivery pallet. Keep stored plywood panels and accessories clean and dry, and protected from damage, moisture and contamination at all times.

Do not use damaged or defective plywood panels or accessories, or products that are beyond the designated shelf life.

Should a problem be encountered with any Plytech plywood product, immediately contact Plytech International Ltd on 0800 900 905. Do not continue to use the product that is not performing to specification or expectation. Keep the product in question, and where possible, document numbers and/or manufacturing details.

Handle materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and in a manner that prevents damage, surface marking, and does not reduce its performance.

Installers shall be familiar with, and comply with, the manufacturer's safe handling requirements and precautions for use, and shall use appropriate safety gear when handling materials.

Installers shall conform with all relevant WorkSafe NZ Guidelines and Codes of Practice -including the OSH Guidelines For the Provision of Facilities and General Safety in the Construction Industry.

Carry out all necessary substrate inspections and preparatory work in accordance with the plywood manufacturer's recommendations.

All framing and substrates shall be complete and ready for plywood lining installation.

Timber framing shall comply with NZS 3604, or with NZS 3603 and AS/NZS 1170 for specific design, and have a maximum moisture content 18% at the time of plywood interior lining installation. Carry out all necessary moisture readings. Do not commence installation until the moisture readings are below the required level.

Light structural steel framing shall comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 4600 or the NASH Standard for Residential and Low-rise Steel Framing, Part 1: Design Criteria. All light structural steel framing members shall satisfy the requirements of AS/NZS 1170. Comply with the steel framing fabricator's specifications and requirements for plywood lining installation.

Steel stud partitioning shall comply with AS 1397 and as specified and shown on the drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's specifications and requirements for plywood lining installation.

Concrete substrates shall comply with the CCANZ CP 01:2011 or with NZS 3109. New concrete must have aged for a minimum of 28 days. Ensure that concrete surfaces are within the tolerances specified. For of direct bonded plywood linings, concrete substrates must below 75% relative humidity prior to installation.

Concrete masonry substrates shall comply with NZS 4229, or with NZS 4230 and AS/NZS 1170 for specific design. For of direct bonded plywood linings, concrete masonry substrates must below 75% relative humidity prior to installation.

Check that the building envelope has been finished at all penetrations including doors, windows, services, etc., and the building is weathertight.

Check junctions to all other building elements and ensure that all necessary works have been completed.

Confirm the location and details of movement control joints, as indicated on the drawings, prior to installation.

Ensure all pre-wiring and service piping is installed and complete.

Check that any required cavity insulation has been installed correctly.

The commencement of work on each section/area shall be deemed to indicate full acceptance by the installer that all preparatory works by other trades is complete.

Framing - check all aspects of preparatory works, including but not limited to:

Install Plytech Plywood Interior Linings to the locations, layout and details shown on the design drawings.

Prior to installation, confirm:

Install plywood wall lining panels and panel trim to the layout and details shown on the design drawings. Framing/battens behind expressed negative detail joints must be painted Matt Black (or other specified colour or treatment) prior to plywood panel installation.

Except where shown otherwise on the design drawings, plywood wall panel joints (vertical/horizontal) and panel edges shall be true to plumb and level, straight and accurately aligned. Panel joints shall be as detailed on the drawings, and centred over the supporting frame/batten line.

Except where detailed otherwise, the panel surface between adjoining/adjacent panels shall be flush and even, without abrupt variation across the joint.

Orientate decorative plywood panels with the face veneer grain facing the layout shown, and with site-cut edges hidden from view. Exposed site-cut edges shall be finished to match the factory-finished edges.

Decorative plywood panels of the same wood species and veneer grade shall be placed so that the face veneer colour and grain between adjacent panels is relatively uniform and non-contrasting and is within the permitted variation limit - any variation occurring shall be gradual and within the permitted limits.

Accurately form cut-outs for power outlets, controls, switches, and other cabled and piped services fixtures and fittings that penetrate the wall lining, to the locations and layout shown on the drawings, with cut-outs correctly sized and to the required tolerances.

Fix plywood panels to framing with the specified fasteners and specified spacings. All fasteners shall be uniformly spaced and accurately aligned.

Install all necessary finishing mouldings and trim as detailed to complete plywood panel joint and edge details.

Plywood Fixings - Walls. Nail-fix plywood wall panels with Copper, Square Shank, Rose Head Nails, in conjunction with Bostik Gold Ultra construction adhesive. The nail length must allow minimum 30mm penetration into framing. Set nail heads onto the plywood panel surface - not into or below the surface.

Fastener Placement - Standard Fixing:

centres around the sheet perimeter - 15mm from sheet edges - and at maximum 400mm centres to intermediate supports. All fasteners shall be uniformly spaced and true to line.

Use Bostik Gold Ultra construction adhesive in strict accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

Visually inspect installed Plytech Plywood Interior Linings to ensure they have been installed to the required layout and details shown on the design drawings, and are correctly fixed, and all jointing and panel edges are properly finished and accurately aligned etc.

Check for any damage and defects - repair or replace as necessary to the required standard.

Leave all of this work complete and to the required standard, and in accordance with warranty requirements.

As required, protect the completed installation from damage and contamination until hand-over as scheduled or directed.

Leave this work clean and free of surface marking. Cleaning pre-finished plywood shall be done with a damp cloth - do not use harsh, abrasive cleaners or solvents.

Leave adjacent surfaces and finished work clean and free of damage and contamination. Remove all rubbish and excess material from site.

Issue to the Owner a copy of the Plytech International Ltd plywood cladding maintenance requirements.

IR Group

Naenae College Administration                  Issued for Tender/Consent

Upgrade

Refer to General Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions in this Specification as appropriate. Read this section in conjunction with all other trade sections.

Comply with the New Zealand Building Code 1992 including all revisions and amendments, Verification Methods where appropriate, and construction principles that are embodied in the Acceptable Solutions.

Comply with all relevant provisions and recommendations of:

1734:1997(AS/NZS)

Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Flat sheets, coiled sheet and plate

1866:1997(AS/NZS)

Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollow shapes

2208:1996(AS/NZS)

Safety glazing materials in buildings

4211:2008(NZS)

Specification for performance of windows

4223.1:2008(NZS)

Code of practice for glazing in buildings - Glass selection and glazing

4223.2:2016(NZS)

Glazing in buildings - Part 2: Insulating glass units

4223.3:2016(NZS)

Glazing in buildings - Part 3: Human impact safety requirements

4223.4:2008(NZS)

Glazing in buildings - Part 4: Wind, dead, snow, and live actions

4667:2000(AS/NZS)

Quality requirements for cut-to-size and processed glass

4668:2000 (AS/NZS)

Glossary of terms used in the glass and glazing industry

AS/NZS 4666:2012

Insulating glass units

No specific supplier is nominated, although a list of acceptable brands is given below. The Contractor shall state with their tender which brand they is using.

Thermal performance (NZBC H1/AS1) must be as required to meet the Designer’s Thermal Evaluation.

APL Brands:

-Altherm

-First

-Vantage

-Smartwood

-Metro Series

-Thermal Heart

-Architectural Series

-Commercial

ASL Brands:

-Elite

-Fairview

-Residential

-Evolution

-Architectural

-Commercial

Fletcher Aluminium Brands:

-Pacific Residential

-Pacific Thermal

-Pacific Architectural

-Atlantic High Performance

-ALTI

-Nubulite

-Rylock

Nalco Brands:

-Nulook

-Bradnams

Architraved.

Single Glazed for all interior doors and interior glazed partitions

Polyester powder coating in accordance with WANZ Powder Coating Quality Assurance System and AAMA 2603-98 performance is required.

Polyester powder coating in accordance with WANZ Powder Coating Quality Assurance System and AAMA 2603-98 performance is required.

Hardware colour matched to Aluminium Joinery.

Hinges, stays, catches, fasteners, latches, locks and furniture as offered by the window and door manufacturer. Key alike all lockable window hardware able to be keyed alike.

Account for all keys and deliver separately to the site manager. Factory fit all required and scheduled hardware.

These windows will be manufacturerd in workshops containing all mechanical equipment appropriate for the work, and by experienced and competent tradesmen who are familiar with the techniques and materials specified.

The manufacturer will co-ordinate with other trades to establish the exact sizes for all frames before fabrication. Frames and sashes will be fabricated true, square, rigid, and ‘out of wind’, with all joints strongly mechanically fixed, and with mitres tight and fully sealed. Potential thermal, wind and seismic movements will be accommodated within the construction. All cavities will drain to the exterior, and all drilling swarf etc. will be removed during fabrication.

Stays, hinges, running gear and glazing will be installed as scheduled (the Designer will be notified if any scheduled hardware of fixing position appears to be inappropriate for this project).

Hardware will be fixed true to line and position, and adjusted and oiled as required for correct operation.

Glass will be cut true and square, sized to provide correct edge clearances, blocked into place as required, and all units will be delivered either pressure fit, pocket glaze, or beaded/wedged, unless site glazing is required. Glazing gaskets will be compatible with all adjacent materials, and cut 1% over-length to absolutely avoid stretching during installation. Frames will be braced etc. as necessary for transportation to the site.

Flashings as detailed will be supplied. Flashing materials will be compatible with the windows.

Comply with the New Zealand Building Code 1992 including all revisions and amendments, Verification Methods where appropriate, and the construction principles that are embodied in the Acceptable Solutions.

Arrange for delivery of windows to the site only when a suitable storage situation is available for them, handle the windows in accordance with the manufacturers requirements, avoid any frame distortion, avoid rubbing damage, avoid contact with concrete, plaster, mud etc. and keep them dry. Retain protective coverings for as long as possible, and remove them at completion.

Experienced and competent tradesmen who are familiar with the techniques and materials specified shall carry out all installation work. Fix in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Take utmost care to avoid damage to anodized or powder coated surfaces - correction of any such disfigurement requires written authority - replace any badly damaged items.

Use fixings compatible with the materials involved, as recommended by the windows manufacturer and to comply with the DWP requirements, basically aluminium or Type 316 stainless steel where exposed externally; galvanized to AS/NZS 4680, 610g/m2, may be used where not exposed.

Thoroughly check all preparatory work to openings prior to installation, including underlay, corner seal tapes, adjacent cladding, pre-installed flashings, waterproofing systems etc. as appropriate. Use

inert barriers or coatings to prevent contact between dissimilar metals or between aluminium and concrete.

Install flashings as detailed and supplied by the windows manufacturer, installed tightly and neatly with absolute minimum tolerances, with head weathering jamb, jamb weathering sill, and sill open (draining) to exterior. Except where the window is recessed all head flashings shall extend 30mm minimum beyond the frame.

Air-seal all frame perimeters to adjacent structure to a depth of 15 - 20mm with expanding foam or appropriate sealant including a PEF rod at head, sill and jambs to retard the spread of sealant.

Weather-seal frame jambs etc. to adjacent surfaces (or to each other) as detailed or as required by the windows manufacturer, to achieve a fully watertight installation. In preparation for sealant the joints shall be clean, dry, and primed if necessary. Insert closed cell polyethylene backer rods or a polyethylene tape slip layer if required. Mask adjacent surfaces if appropriate, install the sealant fully in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations, and finish to even smooth surfaces.

Remove trade debris progressively, appropriately clean any affected adjacent surfaces, thoroughly clean the windows, check that all hardware is in full working order, and provide safety indication of the glass for the balance of adjacent works.

Refer to General Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions in this Specification as appropriate. Read this section in conjunction with all other trade sections.

Comply with the New Zealand Building Code 1992 including all revisions and amendments, Verification Methods where appropriate, and construction principles that are embodied in the Acceptable Solutions.

Comply with all relevant provisions and recommendations of:

1170.0:2002(AS/NZS)

Structural design actions - Part 0: General principles

2208:1996(AS/NZS)

Safety glazing materials in buildings

3604:2011(NZS)

Timber-framed buildings

4211:2008(NZS)

Specification for performance of windows

4223.1:2008(NZS)

Code of practice for glazing in buildings - Glass selection and glazing

4223.2:2016(NZS)

Glazing in buildings - Part 2: Insulating glass units

4223.3:2016(NZS)

Glazing in buildings - Part 3: Human impact safety requirements

4223.4:2008(NZS)

Glazing in buildings - Part 4: Wind, dead, snow, and live actions

4232.2:1988(NZS)

Performance criteria for fire resisting enclosures - Part 2: Fire resisting glazing systems

4667:2000(AS/NZS)

Quality requirements for cut-to-size and processed glass

4668:2000 (AS/NZS)

Glossary of terms used in the glass and glazing industry

AS/NZS 4666:2012

Insulating glass units

Supply and install the selected glass products to the windows, doors, curtain wall systems, roofs and canopies, balustrades and barriers, partitions and screens, and other non-structural glazing elements, as noted and shown on the drawings. All aspects of this work shall be in accordance with the glass manufacturer's installation requirements and recommendations, other relevant product manufacturers' recommendations, and as shown on the drawings.

Co-operate with other trades to ensure that all preliminary and preparatory works are completed to specification and as shown on the drawings.

Coordinate with other trades for all necessary holes and cut-outs, etc., for glass-mounted hardware, fittings and fixtures, and to install all glass and glazed elements as required.

All installation work shall be carried out by experienced and competent tradesmen familiar with the products specified and installation techniques, to the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations, and the requirements of the relevant Glazing Standards, and to the layout and details shown on the drawings.

Handle and store glass in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Provide temporary safety markings to all glass panes as the installation work progresses.

Finish all external glazing wind and watertight.

Do not use damaged, marked or faulty materials.

Clear Float Glass. Clear annealed float glass, complying with AS/NZS 4667 and in accordance with NZS 4223.1. Installed to the locations identified on the drawings and schedules.

Toughened Safety Glass. Toughened Grade 'A' Safety Glass, complying with AS/NZS 2208 and AS/NZS 4667 and in accordance NZS 4223.1. Installed to the locations identified on the drawings and schedules. All cutting and drilling and other processing requirements must be done prior to toughening.

To be used in all interior doors, sidelights and in all glass internal partitions

Clear PVB Laminated Safety Glass. Grade 'A' Safety Glass with PVB (polyvinyl butyral) interlayer, complying with AS/NZS 2208 and AS/NZS 4667 and in accordance with NZS 4223.1. Installed to the locations identified on the drawings and schedules.

12mm laminated safety glass to be used in all interior aluminium partitions. Specifications of glass to comply with requirements of T+R Interior partitions

Mirrored Float Glass. Clear annealed float glass with a reflective silvered coating and manufacturer-applied protective backing, complying with AS/NZS 4667 and in accordance with NZS 4223.1.

Installed to the locations identified on the drawings and schedules.

Provide all necessary glazing components and accessories including glazing putty, metal retaining sprigs, glazing tape, gaskets, sealants, setting and distance blocks, etc., to complete timber framed glazing as required.

Provide all necessary glazing components and accessories including glazing tape, setting and distance blocks, sealants, gaskets, etc., to complete aluminium framed glazing as required.

Ensure all timber glazing rebates and beads are clean and dry, and have been primed or sealed to the glazing manufacturer's requirements. Glazing beads to be precut with tight closed joints. Adhesive backing tape neatly applied to rebates and jointed at corners. Setting blocks sized to maintain a uniform gap all round glass edge, and glass panes firmly set into frames against the backing tape.

Timber glazing beads neatly fitted against continuous backing tape on glass, firmly set and fixed to the frame straight and parallel as detailed on the drawings to prevent any movement.

Install glass panes into aluminium frames in accordance with the glazing manufacturer's recommendations and NZS 4223.1, and as detailed.

Frameless glass doors and screens shall be safety glass in accordance with NZS 4223.3.

Frameless glass doors and screen panels cut to the dimensions shown on the drawings, and factory pre-drilled and cut as required for all necessary fixings, brackets, cleats, hinges, locks, latches, closers and other hardware or fixtures, and edge finished as specified, prior to installation.

Install frameless glass doors and screen panels to the layout and details shown on the drawings and in accordance with any proprietary fixing manufacturer's requirements.

Glass screen panels set straight, true to line and plumb. Panel joints plumb and parallel as detailed.

Fixings, clamps, brackets, and hardware etc. neatly set-out and aligned as detailed.

Note: where relevant, new structural glass barriers shall comply with NZBC B1/AS1 (Amendment 13) and must have an interlinking rail, unless the barrier is laminated safety glass and has features to retain panes of glass or prevent collapse, in the event of breakage. The interlinking rail shall be designed to resist serviceability limit state (SLS) loads, specified in AS/NZS 1170 and B1/VM1, in the event that a glass pane of the barrier breaks.

Frameless mirrors to the dimensions noted on the drawings, all edges finished as specified. Install to the locations indicated on the drawings with an approved adhesive and double sided adhesive tape in accordance with the glazing manufacturer's recommendations.

Flat polished edges to frameless mirrors.

Check that all glass has been installed correctly to the required standard and as shown on the drawings. Check for damage and surface marking and replace as necessary. Clean off and remove all temporary safety markings, as programmed and when instructed, and leave glass trade clean. Remove all rubbish and waste material from site.

Issue to the Owner a copy of the Glass Manufacturer's maintenance requirements and all necessary Manufacturer Warranties.

6


INSULATION


6.1


Preliminary


Refer to General Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions in this Specification as appropriate. Read this section in conjunction with all other trade sections.

Comply with the New Zealand Building Code 1992 including all revisions and amendments, Verification Methods where appropriate, and construction principles that are embodied in the Acceptable Solutions.

Comply with all relevant provisions and recommendations of:

4243.1:2007(NZS)             Energy efficiency - Large buildings - Building thermal envelope

4246:2016(NZS)              Energy efficiency - Installing bulk thermal insulation in residential

buildings

4859.1:2018(AS|NZS)

Thermal insulation materials for buildings - Part 1: General criteria and technical provisions

Supply and install the specified Mammoth Polyester Insulation products to the locations as identified on the drawings, complete with accessories. All aspects of this work shall be in complete accordance with Mammoth Insulation product manuals and installation guides, (check www.mammoth.co.nz, or call 0800 626 668 for the latest editions), relevant BRANZ Appraisals, other relevant product manufacturers' recommendations, and as shown on the drawings.

No substitutions are permitted for the specified Mammoth Polyester Insulation products.

Mammoth Ceiling Blanket R3.2. Non-woven thermally bonded polyester fibre insulation blanket, coloured white. Installed as ceiling thermal insulation to the locations shown on the drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and BRANZ Appraisal No.797 (2020). R-value R3.2. 200mm thick x 870mm wide blanket.

Location: Above all new ceiling linings

Co-operate with other trades to ensure that all preliminary and preparatory works are completed to specification and as shown on the drawings.

Co-ordinate with trades to install Mammoth Polyester Insulation as required.

Store the Mammoth Polyester Insulation products undercover, in a weatherproof environment, off the floor, on a flat, even surface in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Keep materials dry and protected from damage, moisture and contamination at all times.

Do not use damaged or defective products.

Handle the specified products in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and in a manner that prevents damage to and contamination of the product.

Installers shall be familiar with and comply with all associated product Safety Data Sheet precautions for use, and use appropriate safety gear when handling materials.

All installation work shall be carried out by experienced and competent installers, familiar with the specified products and installation techniques, in accordance with the manufacturer's installation requirements, Mammoth Insulation BRANZ Appraisals, relevant Standards, and as shown on the drawings.

The building envelope must be fully enclosed and weatherproof, with construction materials at or below the required moisture content, before insulation installation commences.

The insulation will achieve normal thickness and R-value within 72 hours after installation. However, performance may be reduced if stored for a prolonged period of time in the compression packaging. Always maintain full insulation thickness to ensure that the stated thermal and acoustic values are achieved.

Mammoth Ceiling Blanket - installed in a truss/framed roof space. Carefully lay the blanket over the ceiling joists, at right angles to joists, and allow the blanket to drape into the joist cavity. Prevent undue compression, creases, tucks or folds in the blanket and maintain loft during installation.

Maintain a minimum 25mm clearance between the top of the insulation and the roof/roofing underlay.

In confined spaces where the insulation is likely to breach the 25mm clearance, use a thinner insulation and maintain the minimum 25mm clearance.

Firmly butt all side and end joins together, ensuring there are no gaps, and maintain full thickness of the product to ensure maximum thermal performance.

Cover the entire ceiling, including at least 50% of the exterior top plate width (except where obstructed by other framing eg. ceiling joists).

To prevent air circulation between the ceiling and insulation, block off ends of each bay between the joists/truss chords.

Tear the insulation to fit into the spaces between the joists/truss chords.

Refer to the manufacturer's installation guidelines for all clearances and cutting instructions.

Take extreme care when working around exposed electrical cables - treat all cables as live.

Check that all specified Mamoth Insulation products have been installed correctly in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

Check for damage and defects - repair or replace as necessary.

Ensure the Mammoth Insulation will be adequately protected for durability in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements.

Leave this work complete and to the required standard in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements.

Leave adjacent surfaces and finished work clean and free of damage. Remove all associated rubbish and waste material from site.

Issue to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's Product Warranty for the installed products.

Refer to General Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions in this Specification as appropriate. Read this section in conjunction with all other trade sections.

Comply with the New Zealand Building Code 1992 including all revisions and amendments, Verification Methods where appropriate, and construction principles that are embodied in the Acceptable Solutions.

Comply with all relevant provisions and recommendations of:

2310:2002(AS/NZS)

Glossary of paint and painting terms

2311:2017(AS/NZS)

Guide to the painting of buildings

2312.1:2014(AS/NZS)

Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by the use of protective coatings - Part 1: Paint coatings

3750.0:2008(AS/NZS)

Paints for steel structures - Introduction and list of Standards

Supply and apply the selected Resene coating systems to the surfaces identified on the drawings and as noted in the Resene Interior/Exterior/Protective Finishes schedules within this specification. All aspects of this work shall be in accordance with the Resene One-Line Specifications, Product Data Manual, and Putting Your Safety First (check 0800 RESENE for the latest editions), and other relevant product manufacturer’s recommendations.

The Manufacturer/Supplier is to warrant this work under normal conditions of use against failure referring to the Resene Promise of Quality in the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual.

Substitutions are NOT permitted to any specified Resene coating system, or associated components and products. Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system.

If in the applicator's own expertise and judgement an amendment to this specification is required, or where a substrate preparation, or required painting system is not covered in this specification, this shall be brought to the attention of the contract administrator and any amendment agreed before work proceeds any further.

Painters to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the techniques specified and with the Resene coating systems and be members of the Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc.

The applicator is to have the necessary skill, experience and equipment to undertake the work. The applicator remains responsible for ensuring proper completion of the work.

Refer to and comply with the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 including the obligation to:

Eliminate hazards and if hazards cannot be eliminated or isolated, then minimise the hazards in this work by using the proper equipment and techniques as required by the MPNZA Painters hazard handbook and Resene Putting your safety first handbook.

Supply protective clothing and equipment.

Inform the contractor as well as the employees and others on site of those hazards and put in place procedures for dealing with emergencies.

Obtain from Resene (phone 0800 RESENE, or www.resene.co.nz) the safety data sheet for each product used and comply with the required safety procedures. Keep sheets on site.

Do not combine paints from different manufacturer's in a paint system.

Use only Resene products (which are guaranteed for consistency and performance under ISO 9001 and APAS) prepared, mixed and applied as directed in the Resene One-Line Specifications and Product Data Manual. This specification has been written using where practical and available both low/no VOC and Environmental Choice approved products.

Use only if and when expressly directed by Resene for their particular product in a particular application. Always wear gloves when handling any solvents including turpentine as harmful chemicals may be absorbed into the body through the skin.

To conform to required trade practice, which shall be deemed to include those methods, practices and techniques contained in the Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc. Specification manual.

Where surfaces have been treated with preservatives or fire retardants, check with the treatment manufacturer that coating materials are compatible with the treatment and do not inhibit its performance. If they are not compatible, obtain instructions before proceeding.

The descriptions of areas in schedules and elsewhere are of necessity simplified. Coat ancillary exposed surfaces to match similar or adjacent materials or areas, except where a fair-faced natural finish is required or items are completely prefinished. In cases of doubt obtain written instructions before proceeding.

Do not paint hinges or hardware that cannot be removed. Before commencing work carefully remove hardware, fixtures and fittings, set aside where they cannot be damaged or misplaced and replace on completion.

Supply, lay and fix dropsheets, coverings and masking necessary to protect adjoining, fixtures, fittings and spaces from paint drops, spots, spray and damage.

Refer to the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual for surface preparation sheets (or obtain them by phoning 0800 RESENE, or at www.resene.co.nz) listed in the materials systems schedule clauses. Carry out the preparatory work required by them for each of the substrates.

Handle cautiously lead-based paint and asbestos, if present, as outlined in the preamble of the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual and the Putting your safety first brochure.

Remove and/or repair sharp edges, cracks and holes if present, as outlined in the preamble of the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual.

Elastomeric sealants, if used, should not be painted. The paint film will not match the flexibility of the sealant and may severely limit its effectiveness.

If any substrate or surface, that even with the preparation work called for in this section, cannot be brought up to a standard that will allow painting or clear finishing of the required standard then do not proceed until remedial work is carried out.

Make good cracks, holes, indented and damaged surfaces. Use suitable gap fillers to match the surface being prepared. Any special priming requirements of the fillers must be satisfied. Allow to dry or set before sanding back level with the surface. Prime or seal timber before using putty.

Exterior and wet areas: Use only Portland cement base or water-insoluble organic base gap fillers.

Carry out this work under cover in a suitable environment with suitable lighting. Store items, both before and after coating, in a clean, dry area protected from the weather and mechanical damage, properly stacked and spaced to allow air circulation and to prevent sticking.

Pre-treat any cut surfaces of preservative treated timber before priming. Ensure L.O.S.P. treated joinery has dried sufficiently to lose solvent odour. Pre-treat bare timber with Resene TimberLock (see Data Sheet D48) to improve the durability of subsequent coats. Liberally coat end grain, allow to soak in and then recoat.

Where off-site coatings are specified they must be applied to surfaces including those concealed when incorporated into the building.

Apply primer to suit the coating system to surfaces which will be concealed when incorporated into the building.

Prime or seal and paint bottom edges of external doors before hanging.

Stained, varnished, or painted joinery to have the first two coats, or the primer and one undercoat, applied to rebates and beads before glazing.

According to the putty manufacturer's instructions allow putty to set, then prime with Resene Wood Primer (see Data Sheet D40). Fully protect the putty by completing the Resene coating system as soon as it is sufficiently firm.

Comply with the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual data sheets and the additional requirements of this work section.

Ensure large wall areas that require more than one container of paint per coat, have enough paint boxed (mixed) together to complete the final coat. This will not apply if a single factory batch of paint, rather than shop tinted paint, is applied.

Although generally supplied ready-mixed, thoroughly mix paints. Lift any settled pigment and ensure the paint is homogenous.

Defer painting of exterior surfaces until weather conditions are favourable - warm dry days without frost or heavy dews. Avoid painting in direct sunlight any surfaces that absorb heat excessively. As far as possible apply paint in the temperature range 15°C to 25°C. If temperatures fall outside the range of 10°C and 35°C do not paint unless paints with the necessary temperature tolerance have been specified. Do not apply solvent borne paint if moisture is present on the surface.

Painting work to generally follow the following sequences:

Select brush, roller, or pad and apply coatings to the requirements of Resene to obtain a smooth, even coating of the specified thickness, uniform gloss and colour.

Lightly sand primers, sealers, undercoats and intermediate coats to remove dust pick-up, protruding fibres and coarse particles. Complete by removing dust immediately before applying the next coat.

Correct defective work immediately and recoat as required, following precisely the Resene system being applied.

Each coat of paint and the completed paint system to have the following qualities and properties:

Clean adjoining surfaces, glass and fittings of any paint contamination. Clean off glass indicators at the completion of the building works. Clean glass inside and out to a shining finish. Use the Resene Washwise on site 'paint equipment clean-up water' reclamation system to minimise the environmental impact of cleaning paint application tools.

Leave the whole of this work uniform in gloss and colour, of correct thickness, free from painting defects, clean and unmarked and to the standard required by following procedures.

Remove dropsheets, coverings and masking to leave surrounding surfaces and areas clean, tidy and undamaged. Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

Replace hardware without damage to it or the adjoining surface and leave hardware properly fitted and in working order.

Note: The use and disposal of paint and thinners represents a significant environmental hazard. Ensure all paint and thinners are disposed of in the following manner:

Good maintenance of coating systems involves a routine of regular cleaning as well as regular inspections. Regular inspections of the coating systems are recommended to identify breakdown, accidental damage to or undesirable deterioration of the paint.

Refer the Resene Caring for your paint finish brochure and the Resene website, www.resene.co.nz/comn/services/maintenance.htm.

Resene One-Line Spec. No. 2i 1.2

Surface prep: Resene D82; and Resene TimberLock D48, solventborne preserver/conditioner

1st coat: For normal recommended system - Resene Quick Dry D45, waterborne primer/undercoat; or

For timber that stains - Resene Wood Primer D40, solventborne primer; or

For hardboard only - Resene Sureseal D42, solventborne sealer; or

For painting over varnish - Resene Waterborne Smooth Surface Sealer D47a, waterborne sealer

2nd coat: Resene Lustacryl D310, waterborne semi-gloss enamel

3rd coat: Resene Lustacryl D310, waterborne semi-gloss enamel

Colour: To be selected

Location: Any interior MDF or timber trim and selected interior doors

Resene One-Line Spec. No. 3i 3.1

Surface prep: Resene D82

1st coat: For stained finish - Resene Waterborne Colorwood D50a, waterborne wood stain; or

For clear finish - Resene Waterborne Colorwood Reducing Base D50a, waterborne clear (optional)

2nd coat: Resene Aquaclear D59, waterborne gloss urethane

3rd coat: Resene Aquaclear D59, waterborne gloss urethane

4th coat: Resene Aquaclear D59, waterborne gloss urethane

5th coat: Resene Aquaclear D59, waterborne gloss urethane (optional)

Location: All interior ply trim - scotias, skirtings, rails, wall linings and architraves. Interior doors.

Resene One-Line Spec. No. 15i 1.4 SC Level 5 (EC)

Surface prep: Resene D84; Resene D85; Resene D87; Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal D807, waterborne prep

1st coat (if reqd): For wet area, stained, porous or powdery areas - Resene Sureseal D42NEC, solventborne sealer

2nd coat: Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen D311, waterborne low sheen enamel

3rd coat: Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen D311, waterborne low sheen enamel

Colour: To be selected

Location: Interior walls as shown on the interior elevations

Resene One-Line Spec. No. 15i 1.4 K Level 5

Surface prep: Resene D84; Resene D85; Resene D87; Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal D807, waterborne prep

1st coat (if reqd): For wet area, stained, porous or powdery areas - Resene Sureseal D42, solventborne sealer

2nd coat: Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen Kitchen & Bathroom D311K, waterborne low sheen enamel 3rd coat: Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen Kitchen & Bathroom D311K, waterborne low sheen enamel

Colour: To be selected

Location: Interior walls in new WC's and WC lobby, kitchen and sick bay

Resene One-Line Spec. No. 15i 1.5 Level 5 Ceiling

Surface prep: Resene D84; Resene D85; Resene D87; Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal D807, waterborne prep

1st coat (if reqd): For wet area, stained, porous or powdery areas - Resene Sureseal D42, solventborne sealer

2nd coat: Resene Ceiling Paint D305, waterborne flat

3rd coat: Resene Ceiling Paint D305, waterborne flat

Location: On all new ceilings and on any existing ceilings that are damaged during construction and need a fresh coat of paint

Supply and install Autex Interior Acoustic Treatments & Finishes, as specified herein, complete with all accessories required for proper installation and performance. All aspects of this work shall be in complete accordance with the manufacturer's technical literature and installation requirements (check https://www.autexglobal.com/nz, call 0800 428 839, or email enquiries@autex.co.nz for the latest editions), other relevant product manufacturers' recommendations, and as indicated on the design drawings and schedules.

No substitutions are permitted for Autex Interior Acoustic Treatments & Finishes.

For the purpose of this specification, Autex Interior Acoustic Treatments & Finishes is referred to as 'Autex Acoustic Treatments'; and Autex Industries Ltd as 'Autex'.

The following is a list and/or general description of the extent of these works, which are more specifically defined in the contract documents, required for the completion of the contract works:

Line GIB with Autex Composition in specified colours as shown on the drawings

Comply with the Health and Safety at Work Act 2015 (HSWA), and with all relevant Health and Safety at Work Regulations 2016, and with all relevant WorkSafe New Zealand (WorkSafe) Approved Codes of Practice and WorkSafe Information and Guidance, particularly those for construction and building maintenance.

Autex Industries Ltd Manufacturer's Warranty - according to the warranty terms and conditions:

Installer's Installation Warranty - according to the warranty conditions.

Autex Interior Acoustic Treatments shall be as specified herein and on the design drawings. The substitution of Autex Interior Acoustic Treatments for an alternative brand is not permitted under any circumstances.

The substitution of a specified Autex Acoustic Treatment for an alternative Autex Acoustic Treatment by the Installer shall only be permitted with the Contract Administrator's written authorisation, and shall be at no additional cost to the Principal. Should any resultant extra work and/or redesign work be required to accommodate an alternative Autex Acoustic Treatment to satisfy design, performance and compliance requirements, then the cost of these shall be borne by the Installer.

Carry out all necessary pre-installation and installation inspections and checklists for each area of the works. Complete all necessary Sign-Off Certificates before handing over completed work.

Should defective materials and/or work be found at any time before final acceptance of the work, it shall be rejected. Rejected Autex Acoustic Treatments materials and work shall be repaired and/or replaced to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator without delay and at no additional cost to the Principal.

Autex Composition®. A decorative and functional acoustic wall covering, with a hook-and-loop receptive surface, specifically designed to reduce and control reverberated noise in building interiors.

Manufactured from Autex Vertiface® fabric laminated to an acoustic, needle-punched polyester backing.

Technical Details:

Fire Properties - tested to ISO 9705:

Installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements to the layout and details shown on the design drawings.

Colour: To be selected

Installed Location: See drawings of interior elevations

Surface sealers and primers for direct-stick installations shall be alkaline resistant, and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

Water-based and solvent type adhesives used for direct-stick applications must be as specified or approved by Autex according to the material, substrate and application of the specified Autex acoustic treatment's installation. Adhesives should be used strictly in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's instructions.

Extruded aluminium edge profile for trimming Autex acoustic treatments, to the profile dimensions shown on the design drawings.

Finish/Colour: To match joinery colour

Co-operate with other trades to ensure that all preliminary and preparatory works are completed to specification and as shown on the design drawings.

Coordinate with other trades to install Autex Acoustic Treatments as required.

Where required by the NZ Building Act 2004, it is the building contractor's responsibility to ensure that all restricted building work is carried out by a Licensed Building Practitioner.

All installation work shall be carried out by experienced and competent installers, familiar with the specified products and their installation techniques, in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements, and to fully comply with all warranty requirements.

All work shall be such as to leave a neat and efficient installation, to the required standard and free from damage and defects.

Make all necessary provisions to protect adjacent work and surfaces from damage during installation.

Upon delivery to site, inspect materials and reject those items found to be damaged, defective or contaminated, and contact Autex Industries immediately.

Store materials indoors on a flat, clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Keep stored materials dry and protected from damage, distortion, moisture and contamination at all times.

Do not use damaged or defective materials, or products that are beyond their designated shelf life.

Should a problem be encountered with any Autex product during use or delivery, immediately contact Autex Industries Ltd on 0800 428 839. Do not continue to use the product that is not performing to specification or expectation. Keep the product in question and where possible, the document batch numbers and/or manufacturing details.

Handle materials in accordance with the manufacturer's technical literature, and in a manner that prevents damage (including surface marking) and distortion to the material, and does not reduce its performance.

Installers shall be familiar with and comply with the manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet precautions for use, and use appropriate safety gear when handling materials.

Installers shall conform with all relevant WorkSafe NZ Guidelines and Codes of Practice -including the OSH Guidelines For the Provision of Facilities and General Safety in the Construction Industry.

The building must be fully enclosed and weathertight, and the interior suitably clean and dry before installation commences.

Carry out all necessary substrate inspections and preparatory work in accordance with Autex recommendations prior to installation.

The commencement of work on each section/area shall be deemed to indicate full acceptance by the Installer that all preparatory works by other trades are appropriate to achieve the required finished results.

Install Autex Interior Acoustic Treatments and Finishes in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions, and to any specific layout and/or orientation and/or pattern shown on the design drawings and/or as instructed.

Ensure to plan the installation before cutting and installing materials.

Autex recommends completing the entire installation using product from the same production batch. Inspect Autex materials before cutting and installing. Do not proceed if damage or defects are present in the material, and contact Autex immediately for advice. Any variations in colour or appearance of Autex materials must be notified and discussed immediately with an Autex technical representative - do not continue until resolved to their satisfaction.

The work should be progressively checked for appearance and installation quality (including adequate adhesion for direct-stick applications).

Clean up as the work proceeds.

Install Autex Composition® in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

Autex wall coverings are designed to be butt-jointed, and should be hung from the top down, smoothing outwards whilst maintaining pressure towards any joints. Roll each drop immediately after it is hung using a hand roller 100-150mm wide, rolling towards the butt-joint first, then the entire drop. Butt joints should be plumb and true to line, clean and flat with no gaps or visible compression marks.

Apply adhesive to surfaces as recommended by Autex for adhesive location, method and timing, and in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's instructions. Take all necessary care not to apply adhesive excessively or to contaminate non-adhered surfaces. Clean up adhesive contamination of Autex materials in accordance with Autex recommendations.

Remove cover plates, light fittings and other fixtures as the work proceeds. Replace plumb, square and true to line as the work is completed.

As the work proceeds, ensure to remove any air bubbles, wrinkles, gaps, stains and blemishes, in accordance with Autex recommendations.

Check that the specified Autex Interior Acoustic Treatments & Finishes have been correctly installed to the required layout, with all jointing, edge-trimming and other detailing correctly finished.

Check the installation for damage, marks and defects - repair or replace as necessary. Carry out any repairs in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and to the required standard.

Leave this work complete, clean, free of defects and blemishes, and to the required standard in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

Leave the completed works and surrounding surfaces clean and free of rubbish. Remove all associated rubbish and excess material from site.

Issue to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's care and maintenance requirements, and a copy of the manufacturer's product warranty and the installer's installation warranty.

Refer to General Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions in this Specification as appropriate. Read this section in conjunction with all other trade sections.

Comply with the New Zealand Building Code 1992 including all revisions and amendments, Verification Methods where appropriate, and construction principles that are embodied in the Acceptable Solutions.

Comply with all relevant provisions and recommendations of:

1884:2013(NZS AS)

Floor coverings - Resilient sheet and tiles - Installation practices

2455.2:2007(AS/NZS)

Textile floor coverings - Installation practice - Carpet tiles

3661.2:1994(AS/NZS)

Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces - Part 2: Guide to the reduction of slip hazards

4586:2004(AS/NZS)

Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials

NZBC D1

Access Routes

NZBC D1/AS1

Access Routes

Supply and install the specified Commercial Vinyl Surfacing from Jacobsen to the locations, layouts and details shown on the drawings, complete with all associated components and accessories. All aspects of this work shall be in complete accordance with the manufacturers' technical literature (check jacobsens.co.nz, or call 0800 800 460 for the latest editions), other relevant product manufacturers' recommendations, and as shown on the drawings.

No substitutions are permitted for the specified Commercial Vinyl Surfacing from Jacobsen.

Tarkett iQ Optima. A homogeneous vinyl sheet floor covering with iQ PUR™ Unique Surface Restoration technology. Compliant with ISO 10581. Installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation requirements and NZS/AS 1884, to the locations and layout shown on the drawings.

Wear Layer Thickness: 2.0mm

Total Thickness: 2.0mm.

Sheet (roll) Width: 2.0m.

Total Weight: 2.800 kg/m².

Classification (EN 685): Commercial: 34. Industrial: 43.

Slip Resistance (AS/NZS 4586): SRV 45. R10.

Reaction to Fire: Critical Radiant Flux 10.3 kW/m² - refer to Fire Test Report.

Underfloor Heating: suitable for use over underfloor heating systems - max. 27°C temp.

Colour: To be selected

Installed location: As shown in drawings - sick bay, toilets, and kitchen

Tredsafe® Proprietary Trim. Refer to separate Tredsafe® Trim specification.

Cove Fillet - as specified below. For shaping and supporting coved vinyl flooring. Installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements to the locations and details shown on the drawings.

Vinyl to be coved 150mm

Cove Capping - as specified below. Installed as an edge finish to coved vinyl floor coverings in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements to the locations and details shown on the drawings.

Aluminium capping on coved edge of vinyl

Transition Strip - as specified below. Installed as a transition strip between the vinyl flooring and adjacent floor covering in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements to the locations and details shown on the drawings.

Floor Levelling Compound. A proprietary, pre-batched self-smoothing/levelling compound, approved by Jacobsen for the application. Applied as an underlayment and preparation treatment to uneven floor substrates and surfaces, for subsequent vinyl floor coverings, in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

If needed a floor levellling or floor patching compound may be used

Adhesives for vinyl flooring and/or wall coverings shall be as recommended by the floor covering manufacturer, and must be compatible with the specified floor/wall covering product and its application - including substrate construction and material, and the product's end-use and environment. All adhesives shall be used and applied in strict accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's instructions. Where required by the adhesive manufacturer, seal or prime porous substrates in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Co-operate with other trades to ensure that all preliminary and preparatory works are completed to specification and as shown on the drawings.

Coordinate with other trades to install the specified Commercial Vinyl Surfacing from Jacobsen as required.

All installation work shall be carried out to best trade practice by experienced and competent installers, familiar with the products specified and installation techniques, under the direct supervision of a Registered National Flooring Association (NFA) Member, to fully comply with Jacobsen warranty requirements, in accordance with the manufacturer's installation requirements and NZS/AS 1884.

As recommended by the floor covering manufacturer, use only an approved adhesive that is compatible with the specified floor covering, its substrate and its application/use.

The building must be fully enclosed and weathertight, with all associated edge trim, doors, joinery, etc., installed prior to laying the specified floor coverings.

All work shall be such as to leave a neat and efficient installation.

Do not cover or bridge movement control joints with the specified floor coverings - use only proprietary movement control joints specifically designed for the application and floor covering.

Upon delivery to site, inspect the specified products and reject those items that are found to be damaged, defective or contaminated. Contact Jacobsen for replacement of rejected items at time of delivery to site.

Store the specified products and materials undercover, in a weatherproof environment, off the floor, on a flat, even and level surface in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Keep products and materials dry, out of direct sunlight and protected from damage, moisture and contamination at all times.

Do not use damaged, defective or contaminated materials or products, or products that are beyond their designated shelf life.

Handle the specified products in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and in a manner that prevents damage to and contamination of the product.

Allow vinyl coverings to properly condition for at least 24 hours prior to laying in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Maintain the temperature of the installation site, vinyl and adhesive between the range of 18°C to 35° C for at least 24 hours before installation. Do not commence the installation if the room or substrate temperature is below 18°C.

Installers shall be familiar with and comply with all associated product Safety Data Sheet precautions for use, and use appropriate safety gear when handling materials.

All substrates to be shall be structurally sound, even and smooth, clean, dry, and free from dirt, dust, grease, oil, wax, paint residue, loose plaster and laitance, curing compounds and other materials and contaminants likely to affect adhesion.

Carry out all necessary moisture readings of substrates. Do not commence installation until the moisture readings for the whole area are below the required level.

Carry out all necessary substrate inspections and preparatory work in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to application.

Subfloors must have no deviations greater than 3mm over a 3.0m straightedge in any direction, and no deviations at all over a 200mm straightedge in any direction.

Check that all fixtures, fittings and embedded items are correctly installed, and that all substrate edges are completed as detailed.

Confirm the location of any movement control joints prior to commencement, ensuring that all joints are trimmed with a proprietary expansion control joint as indicated on the drawings.

Allow floor levelling compounds and mortar screeds to properly cure in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations before commencing.

The commencement of work on each section/area shall be deemed to indicate full acceptance by the Floor Covering Subcontractor that all preparatory works by other trades are appropriate to achieve the required finished results.

Vinyl Sheet Flooring: Install vinyl sheet floor coverings by direct-stick method to clean, dry and properly prepared substrates in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended installation requirements and NZS/AS 1884. Confirm the vinyl sheet layout and pattern requirements and the location of all seams and joins prior to laying.

As required by the adhesive manufacturer, seal or prime porous substrates or substrates where dusting or powdering exists. The use and application of adhesive shall be exactly to the adhesive manufacturer's instructions.

Allow vinyl sheet floor coverings to properly condition in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to laying.

Plan the laying sequence so as to avoid any cross joins in vinyl sheet flooring. Where cross joins are unavoidable, obtain written approval from the Architect/Designer of all cross join locations before proceeding. Cross joins in vinyl sheet flooring are not acceptable in wet-areas.

Accurately lay vinyl sheet floor coverings to the layout pattern indicated on the drawings, ensuring that each sheet is correctly fitted and jointed and fully bonded to the substrate, free of air bubbles and distortion. Vinyl sheet floor coverings must be installed in a consecutive sequence from the same roll and in the same direction.

Where indicated and detailed on the drawings, cove vinyl sheet flooring along walls and upstands, with external and internal corners butterfly-mitred and thermo-welded or chemical-welded (product dependant).

Thermo-welded seams and joints shall each be welded with a colour-matched rod and in a continuous seam. Neatly trim welds and finish smooth and flush with the vinyl sheet.

Chemical-welded seams and joints shall be only undertaken to properly cut, prepared and masked sheet edges. The liquid chemical must be injected the full thickness of the joint in a single application.

Thoroughly roll each newly laid vinyl sheet with a suitably weighted roller to ensure maximum adhesion.

Edge Trim: As required and indicated on the drawings, install all necessary edge trim, including vinyl skirting, cappings, transition strips, etc., - all neatly finished, accurately aligned and true, to the required layout and details shown on the drawings.

Protection: Keep the working area cordoned off during installation and protect completed work from traffic, damage and contamination until hand-over or as directed.

Check that the specified vinyl surfacing and associated trims have been correctly installed to the required layout, with all joins, seams, edge-trimming and other detailing correctly finished.

Check the vinyl surfacing installation for damage, marks and defects - repair or replace as necessary. Carry out any repairs in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and to the required standard.

Thoroughly clean the installed vinyl floor and/or wall coverings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures and techniques.

Leave this work complete and to the required standard in accordance with Jacobsen requirements. Leave adjacent surfaces and finished work clean and free of damage. Remove all associated rubbish from site.

Protect the completed installation from damage, trafficable dirt and grime, and stains as necessary until hand-over as scheduled or directed.

Issue to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's maintenance requirements and a copy of the manufacturer's Product Warranty and the installer's Installation Warranty for the products and installation.

Supply and install the specified carpet tiles to the areas and surfaces, layouts and details shown on the drawings, complete with all accessories. All aspects of this work shall be in accordance with the specified floor covering manufacturers' technical literature and installation requirements, relevant Standards and Code requirements, other relevant product manufacturers' recommendations, and as shown on the drawings.

Carpet tile flooring; to the specified product, pile style and content, and colour and pattern. Installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and AS/NZS 2455.1 and AS/NZS 2455.2 to the locations and layout shown on the drawings.

Advanced Flooring Gold Coast 04 and Gold Coast 05 to be used. See Sheet A104 for layout patterns of tiles.

Non-recessed entrance mat; to the specified product, style, infill material and colour, and frame material and finish. Installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements to the locations and details shown on the drawings.

Prior to installation; ensure that the substrate surface is smooth, rigid, flat and true, and dry and clean and free of contaminants. Remove any high spots and fill any depressions flush and level with the use of an approved levelling compound.

Advanced Flooring Evertread Entrance Matting Blue 602 to be installed as shown on Floor Coverings drawing

Carpet to vinyl/thin resilient flooring transition strip; to the specified product, material, finish and colour, and size. Installed as a transition strip between carpet and thin resilient floor coverings in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements to the locations and details shown on the drawings.

Floor levelling compound, as specified. Applied as a surface preparation to uneven floor substrates for subsequent floor covering laying in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

To be applied if necessary

Floor covering adhesives shall be as recommended by the floor covering manufacturer, and be suitable and compatible with the specified flooring product, substrate type and environment, and the flooring product's end use; and shall be applied in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's instructions. Seal or prime porous substrates exactly as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.

Co-operate with other trades to ensure that all preliminary and preparatory works are completed to specification and as shown on the drawings.

Co-ordinate with other trades as required to install the specified floor coverings and accessories.

All installation work shall be carried out by experienced and competent floor layers, familiar with the products specified and installation techniques, under the direct supervision of a Registered National Flooring Association (NFA) Member, in accordance with the manufacturer's installation requirements, NZS/AS 1884, AS/NZS 2455.1, AS/NZS 2455.2 and AS/NZS 4586 as relevant, and as noted and detailed on the drawings.

Use only approved adhesives that are compatible with the specified floor covering product and the substrate as recommended by the floor covering manufacturer.

The building must be fully enclosed and weathertight with all doors and necessary fittings and trim installed prior to laying floor coverings.

Store and handle all floor covering products and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Store products and accessories under cover and out of direct sunlight on a flat and level surface; keep dry and protect from damage and contamination at all times.

Do not use damaged or defective flooring products or accessories, or products that are beyond their designated shelf life. Do not damage or mark or distort flooring products and accessories during handling.

Allow floor coverings and accessories to properly condition for a minimum of 24 hours, or as recommended by the manufacturer, prior to laying in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer, do not lay floor coverings below 150C room temperature.

Ensure the substrate surface is free of oil, grease and other contaminants, then sweep or vacuum as required to ensure it is absolutely clean. Ensure that any expansion or crack control joints are

appropriately trimmed - do not install floor coverings over them.

The commencement of work on each section of floor shall be deemed to indicate a full acceptance by the relevant Flooring Subcontractor that all preparatory works by other trades are appropriate to achieve the required finished results.

Install by direct stick method carpet tile floor coverings and accessories, including all jointing, in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations, procedures and techniques, AS/NZS 2455.2, and as shown on the drawings.

Allow carpet tile floor coverings to properly condition in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to laying. Turn underfloor heating systems off 48 hours prior to installation and leave off during installation and for a minimum of 48 hours after completion. Thoroughly clean each area before commencing work. Seal or prime as necessary any porous surface receiving floor covering adhesive, and apply adhesive exactly to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Confirm the laying method/direction of the carpet tiles prior to laying. Do not install carpet tile floor coverings over expansion joints - use only the specified expansion joint cover strip and neatly finish carpet tile flooring in accordance with the cover strip manufacturer's requirements.

Carpet tile flooring accurately laid, fitted and jointed and fully bonded to the substrate. Cut and properly prepare cross joins to ensure accurate pattern alignment. Roll carpet flooring with a suitably weighted roller as recommended by the manufacturer to ensure maximum adhesion.

Accurately install stair tread nosings and lay pre-cut carpet tile pieces to each stair tread and riser and finish neatly into or under the nosing edge as necessary.

Install any required carpet tile skirting, capping and edge trim, transition strips, etc., as noted and detailed on the drawings; all finished straight and level and true to line.

Keep the working area cordoned off and protected during installation and protect completed installation work from damage and contamination until hand over of the works as programmed/scheduled.

Ensure that the specified floor coverings have been installed correctly, and that all seams, joints and accessories have been and completed correctly. Check for damage and defects and repair or replace as necessary.

Thoroughly clean the installed floor coverings in accordance with the manufacturers' recommended techniques and procedures.

Carry out any product specific finishing/polishing applications as recommended only by the floor covering manufacturer.

Leave the works area clean and remove all rubbish and waste material from the site.

Protect the completed works from damage, trafficable dirt and grime, and stains as necessary while other works are in progress.

Issue to the Owner a copy of the Manufacturers' maintenance requirements and a copy of the Manufacturers' Materials Warranties and the Applicators' Installation Warranties for all of the installed floor coverings.

IR Group

Naenae College Administration                  Issued for Tender/Consent

Upgrade

Refer to General Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions in this Specification as appropriate. Read this section in conjunction with all other trade sections.

Comply with the New Zealand Building Code 1992 including all revisions and amendments, Verification Methods where appropriate, and construction principles that are embodied in the Acceptable Solutions.

Comply with all relevant provisions and recommendations of:

1221:1997(AS/NZS)

Fire hose reels

1254:2010(AS/NZS)

PVC-U pipes and fittings for stormwater and surface water applications

1260:2017(AS|NZS)

PVC-U pipes and fittings for drain, waste and vent applications

1477:2017(AS|NZS)

PVC pipes and fittings for pressure applications

1546.1:2008(AS/NZS)

On-site domestic wastewater treatment units - Septic tanks

1596:2014(AS/NZS)

The storage and handling of LP Gas

2032:2006(AS/NZS)

Installation of PVC pipe systems

2033:2008(AS/NZS)

Installation of polyethylene pipe systems

2492:2007(AS/NZS)

Cross-linked polyethylene (PE-X) pipes for pressure applications

2537.1:2011(AS/NZS)

Mechanical jointing fittings for use with crosslinked polyethylene (PE-X) for pressure applications - Part 1: Plastics piping systems for hot and cold water installations - Crosslinked polyethylene (PE-X) -General

2642.2:2008(AS/NZS)

Polybutylene pipe systems - Polybutylene (PB) pipe for hot and cold water applications

2712:2007(AS/NZS)

Solar and heat pump water heaters - Design and construction

3500.1:2015(AS|NZS)

Plumbing and drainage - Part 1: Water services

3500.1:2018(AS|NZS)

Plumbing and drainage Part 1: Water services

3500.2:2015(AS|NZS)

Plumbing and drainage - Part 2: Sanitary plumbing and drainage

3500.2:2018(AS|NZS)

Plumbing and drainage Part 2: Sanitary plumbing and drainage

3500.3:2018(AS|NZS)

Plumbing and drainage Part 3: Stormwater drainage

3500.4:2015(AS|NZS)

Plumbing and drainage - Part 4: Heated water services

3500.4:2018(AS|NZS)

Plumbing and drainage Part 4: Heated water services

3501:1976(NZS)

Specification for copper tubes for water, gas, and sanitation

4020:2018(AS|NZS)

Testing of products for use in contact with drinking water

4121:2001(NZS)

Design for access and mobility: Buildings and associated facilities

4517:2010(NZS)

Fire sprinkler systems for houses

4602:1988(NZS)

Low pressure copper thermal storage electric water heaters

IR Group

Naenae College Administration                  Issued for Tender/Consent

Upgrade

4603:1985(NZS)

Installation of low pressure thermal storage electric water heaters with copper cylinders (open-vented systems)

4606.1:1989(NZS)

Storage water heaters - General requirements

4607:1989(NZS)

Installation of thermal storage electric water heaters: valve-vented systems

4613:1986(NZS)

Domestic solar water heaters

4614:1986(NZS)

Installation of domestic solar water heating systems

4617:1989(NZS)

Tempering (3-port mixing) valves

4692.1:2005(AS/NZS)

Electric water heaters - Energy consumption, performance and general requirements

5601.1:2013(AS|NZS)

Gas installations - Part 1: General installations

7602:1977(NZS)

Specification for polyethylene pipe (Type 5) for cold water services

7643:1979(NZS)

Code of practice for the installation of unplasticized PVC pipe systems

7646:1978(NZS)

Specification for polyethylene pipes and fittings for gas reticulation

AS/NZS 3500.5:2012

Plumbing and drainage - Part 5: Housing installations

NZBC B2/AS1

Durability

NZBC G11

Gas as an Energy Source

NZBC G12

Water Supplies

Carry out all works necessary to leave the water, waste, vent and soil systems serving the sanitary fittings and the plumbing hardware shown on the drawings or specified below in correct working order complete with all ancillary systems (safetrays, floor drains, overflows, relief valves, etc.) required, and with all normal incidentals customarily installed by this trade.

Comply with the Building Code, Territorial Authority By-laws and statutory authority Regulations as appropriate. Obtain all necessary permits and consents, serve all necessary notices, arrange for all tests and pay all fees and customary charges in connection with the required works.

Co-operate with all other trades. Attend upon Concretor, Drainlayer and Carpenter to set out the exact positions of pipe runs before adjacent work is put in hand, and to ensure that all pipes, sleeves, fixings, flashings etc. are correctly incorporated into the structure as construction proceeds.

All plumbing work shall be carried out by, or under the direct control of, properly qualified tradesmen, and shall be to recognised high standards.

Observe best local trade practice to avoid problems which arise from freezing winter conditions.

The cutting away and checking of timbers shall be limited to such dimensions as will not prejudice the purpose for which the timber is used; observe NZS 3604 restrictions on the holing and checking of joists and beams. Chasing and checking of other materials only to approval. Install seismic restraints to storage tanks and HWCs.

Weatherseal wherever pipes, screws, bolts or other fastenings penetrate an external surface, and particularly roofing; seal with gaskets, flashings (and overflashings if necessary) or mastic as appropriate - any damage that results from failure of such seals will be made good at the Plumber's expense.

Adequately protect all surfaces. Any damage to fittings or surfaces made good by the appropriate trade at the Plumber's expense.

Joints between pipes of different materials shall always be to the approval of the TA Plumbing Inspector.

Pipework set-out neatly with a minimum number of bends, and more or less parallel to and at right angles to structural elements - avoid diagonal piping.

All internal pipework shall be concealed except where otherwise is either shown or approved. Exposed pipework shall be accurately and neatly run. Arrange all pipework (and particularly traps) in a manner which will allow maximum future accessibility for repairs or maintenance. Arrange for access panels to any primary maintenance positions, and install conveniently located isolating valves for each group of fittings. Wingbacks securely and squarely fixed. Crox unions usually acceptable only at the final connection to fittings. Install white plastic flanges where pipes penetrate linings in visible locations.

Set pipework out in straight runs to even gradients. Fix all pipes to the structure sufficiently to fully support and to prevent sagging or vibration. Clips and saddles shall be the same material as the pipe. Exterior pipes on stand-off brackets. Fixings to the exterior or damp locations shall all be hot dip galvanized unless otherwise noted. Sleeves for pipes or drains penetrating concrete or masonry shall be uPVC, 20mm minimum larger internal diameter than the external diameter of the pipe, finished flush with concrete or masonry, and packed and mastic sealed.

Close open ends of the systems during construction to prevent the entry of foreign matter.

All work shall respect in full all probable thermal movements - layouts, fixings and jointings shall be arranged to allow thermal movement without risk of prejudice to watertight conditions, or risk of damage from straining of the pipes which will generate failures.

In particular, observe best local trade practice to avoid problems arising from freezing conditions.

Allow to carry out all excavation that is required to suit the services installed by this trade. Check for other services before excavation. Trenches true to line and level, base of trenches clear of loose material, and shore trenches as required to suit the ground conditions. Backfilling shall be carried out by this trade, and be to the requirements specified in Siteworks.

All plumbing services shall be completed in stages which will allow for proper testing under normal working pressures prior to the application of insulation, concealment or other enclosure. Testing of piped water services shall be by hydrostatic testing in accordance with AS/NZS 3500.1 and shall not show any leakage when subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of 1500kPa for a period of not less than 30 minutes. All leaks remedied and retested. On completion the whole of the plumbing services to be subjected to full operational tests in the presence of the plumbing inspector, with any defects revealed in these tests properly remedied.

Warranty cards and manufacturer's guarantees for all items supplied and installed by this trade shall be correctly filled in and handed over at Practical Completion.

Materials shall be delivered with packaging and labeling intact. Incidentals (jointing compounds, PTFE tape, seals, washers, silfos, solvent cements, etc.) shall be completely appropriate for the application involved. The use of imperfect items or items damaged in any way is always subject to approval.

Separate dissimilar metals in any circumstances which could produce contact or electrolytic action by a water film, with thick plastic tape, bituminous felt or other inert material. Pipes in contact with or built into concrete or masonry shall be fully spiral wrapped in Denso tape or equal.

All traps sized to AS 3500.2. Wastes and vents all uPVC. Wastes shall be to AS 3500.2 falls as a minimum. Vents shall be generally as indicated, but avoid where permissible in compliance with AS 3500.2, or shall be combined above the flood level of the fittings.

All cold water supply pipework shall be medium/high-density polyethylene (MDPE/HDPE), arranged and fixed so that all joints are in a fully ‘relaxed' condition, without any stress or tension.

Lay on a 20mm main from the existing toby along the route shown on the Site Plan to the connection position noted on the Floor Plan (pipe depth, protection, backfilling, signal strip etc. to comply with all

Supply Authority requirements). At the connection position take a branch feed off for the hosecocks (and reticulate to the positions shown and install angle hosecocks) and toilet cisterns and then take the main feed through an accessibly positioned cleanable in-line sediment and dirt filter.

Primary distribution from the water filter shall be in 20mm piping, reducing to 12mm for the final feed to individual items. Install conveniently located isolating valves to turn off each group of fittings, and install a small isolating valve alongside each toilet cistern not integrally fitted with one. (Note that these isolating valves and the hosecocks are not covered by the Plumbing Hardware Prime Cost Sum).

Supply the electric storage high pressure hot water cylinder noted on the drawings and install it where shown. Where appropriate install the cylinder on a safetray, with its drain discharging in a visible location.

Install temperature and pressure relief valves, cold water expansion valves, flow control valves, line strainers, pressure limit valves, and non-return/isolating valves as required to leave the hot water system in full design operational order. Install a tempering valve for each cylinder to control the hot water temperature at any sanitary fixture used for personal hygiene at not more than 55°C.

Check that the water pressure is suitable for the cylinders operation, and install PRV's if excessive.

Pressure relief discharges shall be copper and to the exterior in approved positions.

Flush all pipework before making the final connections. Lag the main distribution pipes full length with wall pipe insulation.

Showers shall have priority feeds, without 'tees', and the pipework layout shall ensure that the showers temperature and pressure remain as even as possible.

Irrespective of whether a mixing device is installed, the storage water heater control thermostat shall be set at a temperature of not less than 60°C to prevent the growth of Legionella bacteria.

Refer to General Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions in this Specification as appropriate. Read this section in conjunction with all other trade sections.

Comply with the New Zealand Building Code 1992 including all revisions and amendments, Verification Methods where appropriate, and construction principles that are embodied in the Acceptable Solutions.

Comply with all relevant provisions and recommendations of:

2201.1:2007(AS/NZS)

Intruder alarm systems - Client's premises - Design, installation, commissioning and maintenance

2293.2:1995(AS/NZS)

Emergency evacuation lighting for buildings - Inspection and maintenance

2293.2:2019(AS|NZS)

Emergency lighting and exit signs for buildings - Part 2: Routine service and maintenance

3000:2018(AS|NZS)

Electrical installations - Known as the Australian/New Zealand Wiring Rules

3012:2010(AS/NZS)

Electrical installations - Construction and demolition sites

3085.1:2004(AS/NZS)

Telecommunications installations - Basic requirements

3100:2009(AS/NZS)

Approval and test specification - General requirements for electrical equipment

3112:2011(AS/NZS)

Approval and test specification - Plugs and socket-outlets

3191:2008(AS/NZS)

Electrical flexible cords

5000.1:2005(AS/NZS)

Electric cables - Polymeric insulated - For working voltages up to and including 0.6/1 (1.2) kV

60227.5:2003(AS/NZS)

Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including 450/750 V - Flexible cables (cords)

60335.2.30:2009(AS/NZS)

Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety - Particular requirements for room heaters

60335.2.30:2015(AS|NZS)

Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety - Part 2.30: Particular requirements for room heaters

60335.2.35:2013(AS/NZS)

Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety - Part 2.35: Particular requirements for instantaneous water heaters

60598.2.2:2001(AS/NZS)

Luminaires - Particular requirements - Recessed luminaires

60598.2.2:2016(AS|NZS)

Luminaires - Part 2.2: Particular requirements - Recessed luminaires

60598.2.22:2005(AS/NZS)

Luminaires - Particular requirements - Luminaires for emergency lighting

60898.1:2004(AS/NZS)

Electrical accessories - Circuit-breakers for overcurrent protection for household and similar installations - Circuit-breakers for a.c. operation

61009.1:2015(AS/NZS)

Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent protection for household and similar uses (RCBOs) - Part 1: General rules

6104:1981(NZS)


Specification for emergency electricity supply in buildings


AS/NZS 2053


Specification for unplasticized PVC conduit and fittings for electrical wiring

Electrical switchgear and controlgear


AS/NZS 3439


NZECP 54


Recessed luminaires


Supply and install all materials, including all necessary minor and incidental items, for proper completion of all of the electrical services specified or shown on the drawings. The contract will not be deemed to be complete until the Electrician has provided an Electrical Certificate of Compliance (made available to the Contractor in time for the Code Compliance Certificate application).

Obtain all necessary permits and consents, serve all notices and pay all fees in and customary charges connection with the works.

The position of switches, light and power outlets and other fittings, although shown specifically in some instances, are in general only shown diagrammatically. The exact location of each of these items will be as directed on site by the Architect/Designer; the Electrician shall give reasonable notice of when this information is required. Items positioned in contravention of this shall be repositioned if directed, including rewiring if necessary, all at the Electrician's expense.

Unless drawn (on 1:20 wall elevations) or specified otherwise the mounting height to the centreline of the following items above the floor shall be:

(Notify the Architect/Designer if either the actual fitting or mounting position seem to make the mounting height noted above inappropriate).

Warranty cards and manufacturers guarantees for items supplied and installed by this trade shall be filled in correctly and handed over at Practical Completion. Arrange all circuits to obtain an optimum balance of the system, and check and reconnect where necessary to achieve this on completion. Leave the works clean and tidy and in full operational order.

Co-operate with all other trades and attend upon the Concretor and Carpenter to set out all required penetrations and to ensure that all wiring and fittings are correctly incorporated as work proceeds. The Carpenter will provide and fix all necessary dwangs and timber supports in locations determined by the Electrician.

All electrical work shall be carried out by, or under the direct control of, registered tradesmen, and shall be to recognized high standards. All work shall be such as to leave a neat, efficient and robust installation. Neatly label switchboards to identify each circuit.

The cutting away and checking of timbers shall be limited to such dimensions as will not prejudice the purpose for which the timber is used; observe NZS 3604: 2011 restrictions on the holing and checking of joists and beams. Chasing and checking of other materials shall be only to approval.

Adequately protect all surfaces. Any damage to fittings or surfaces made good by the appropriate trade at the Electrician's expense.

Joints within cable runs will not normally be accepted. TPS cable shall be adequately supported, and clipped at regular intervals. At terminations all strands of conductors shall be fully secured in a terminal block or clamped under a screw head washer; do not cut away any strands. Wiring which terminates in enclosed fittings and/or where subject to heat liable to cause deterioration, shall be high temperature type, with the tails made off with heat resisting sleeves, to protect the permanent wiring.

Wire lights in 1.5mm 3 core - 7.5 amps loading max per circuit (allow for 100w to all light fittings unless identified otherwise).

Wire power outlets in 2.5mm 3 core - 7 maximum GPO singles or doubles per circuit. Assess power outlets for specific equipment and allow accordingly.

Conceal all wiring except as noted on drawings or below. All wiring cast into concrete shall be run in conduit pipes. All cables shall be stranded (single core is unacceptable).

Wire more or less parallel to and at right angles to the structural elements - avoid any diagonal wiring. Layout of the principal distribution wiring shall be to approval. Position all wires to minimise the risk of damage from subsequent nailing of linings etc.

Generally, do not run TPS horizontally within timber walls except in the area up to 300mm above floor. Wire in the ceiling framing and drop vertically to outlets and switches.

Do not run TPS horizontally within partitions except in the area up to 300mm above floor. Wire in the ceiling void and drop vertically to outlets and switches. Principal wiring in the ceiling void shall be supported on adequate catenaries.

All materials delivered with packaging and labeling intact. All required incidentals (insulating tape, seals, fixings, etc.) shall be completely appropriate for the application involved. The use of items damaged in any way is subject to approval in each instance.

Supplied and installed by Contractor

Co-operate with all other trades to ensure that the following services are installed complete and in accordance with their manufacturer’s recommendations with all normal or necessary incidentals and with all wiring concealed.

Ceiling mounted radiant heaters to be supplied and installed as specified

Provide a driven main earth suitable for the full installation, close to the meterboard, complying fully with all appropriate regulations and to the complete approval of a certified inspector. Bond all exposed metals, including light fittings and piped services and provide earth conductors for the entire system. Sheathing to any neutral screened cables may be used for earthing.

Cutting GIB® Plasterboard


Measure the wall to determine the required sheet size. Generally cut the sheet 2mm–3mm less than the exact dimension needed.


Position the sheet with the face paper side up. Mark the sheet as required.


Firmly hold the straight edge on the line to be cut.

Cut through the face paper and into the plaster core by sliding the knife blade against the straight edge.


Break the sheet core by snapping the sheet back firmly while holding on to the sheet edge.


Turn the sheet over so that back paper is now facing up. Score the back paper to complete the cut.


Cutting GIB® Plasterboard

For sheets requiring multiple cuts, use a handsaw to complete the short cuts before scoring and snapping the longer cut.

Mark the position of any power outlets or pipes on the face of the board.

Make hole at a corner of the marked outlet. Cut out the box as marked.

Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction

Tip: To get the saw started, drill holes at each of the corners but within the opening. In some cases the saw can simply be pushed through the sheet without the need for holes.

Fixing GIB® Plasterboard

Apply GIBFix® adhesive at specified centres. Apply immediately prior to fixing the GIB® plasterboard. Do not allow time for the adhesive to “skin” over.

GIBFix® adhesive daubs should be approximately 35mm in diameter and about 12mm high.

Cold temperatures (10ºC or less) will affect the curing time of adhesive. It is recommended that steps are taken to achieve 10ºC at the time of installation.

Tip: Do not place GIBFix® adhesive behind fasteners. This will increase the risk of “fastener popping” Place at least 200mm from fasteners

Fit the GIB® plasterboard in position against the framing. Press the sheet firmly against the framing to ensure a good bond with the adhesive.

Sheets must be 5–10mm from the floor. Place packers to suit OR use a flat bar to lift the sheet off the floor.

(Note that some specific fire rated systems require that the sheets are fixed hard to the floor).

Install fasteners at specified centres. Make sure that the head of the fastener is bedded just below the surface of the board.

Tip: Use an electric drywall screwgun equipped with an adjustable depth control head and Philips bit. If a screw is overdriven and the paper and/or core of the GIB® plasterboard is damaged, insert a second screw approximately 50mm from the first and then remove the first screw.

How much GIBFix® adhesive to use?

A simple method of reducing GIBFix® waste and having consistently sized daubs of adhesive is to remove the sealer cap from a sipper type drink bottle top and fit it to the nozzle of an adhesive cartridge. Press the face of the cap against the surface and apply pressure to the adhesive applicator gun. The cap will fill with adhesive and when full, pull the cap away from the surface. This will leave a daub of adhesive approximately 35mm in diameter and with a raised “peak” of about 10–12mm.

GIBFix® One

GIBFix® AllBond

Timber Framing

Joint Placement                                Vertical Fixing


Give careful consideration to the placement of sheet joints in walls and ceilings.

Try to minimise sheet joints by using the largest sheet size available.

Where possible place joints in situations where they are less likely to affected by critical lighting.


Form sheet edge joints in vertically fixed walls on studs.

Shorter vertical joints (400mm or less) such as above a window or door can be made off the stud. Joints under windows can be made off the stud provided that nogs are installed to reduce the unsupported joint to 600mm or less. Alternatively the joint may be back blocked.


Horizontal Fixing


Around Door or Window Openings


Sheet edge joints in horizontally fixed walls may be unsupported (stud centres must not exceed 600mm).

For levels of finish 3 and 4, sheet end butt joints may be made on studs. However, to reduce the risk of joint defects, it is strongly recommended that sheet end butt joints are back blocked off framing.


Sheet edge joints formed at the edge of door and window openings are highly prone to cracking. To reduce the risk of cracking it is strongly recommended that sheets are cut around openings and joints are formed no closer than 200mm to the edge of the opening.


General Installation – Not recommended


General Installation – Not recommended


Prone to cracking due to frame flexibility. Not recommended for general installations.




cceptable


General Insta


This moves the joint away from problem area. Floating joint, correctly taped and stopped is less likely to crack.




Positioning the jo 200mm from the window edge will reduce the likelihood of cracking.




General Installation – Recommended


High Movement Applications


If the grooved jambs have been tl itlld this is not difficult for a competent fixer, The lining on this wall will need to be fixed prior to any adjacent walls,




For applications prone to a high degree of movement, such as transportbl homes, consider should be given installing a contr the edges of the window (see p. 4




Control Joint


Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction


IK 4.3 GIB® PLASTERBOARD INSTALLATION – WALLS

UId

For installation guidance on GIB EzyBrace® and       For all other GIB® Performance Systems refer to

GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems refer to the GIB®    the relevant GIB® Systems literature.

Performance Systems section.

  • 4.3.1    Timber Frame – Horizontally Fixed

Wall Framing

  • —    Framing dimensions, spacings and nog requirements must comply with NZS3604:2011

— Timber moisture content must not exceed 18% (see p. 30)

  • —    Nogs to be evenly spaced with a maximum spacing of 1350mm. If staggering nogs off a centreline (Option A) it is recommended a maximum offset of 50mm–75mm

  • —    Nogs are not required behind the horizontal joint except in shower situations and specific fire, noise or impact prone area, such as stairwells or doorways

Fasteners

  • —    10mm GIB® plasterboard, minimum 25mm x 6g GIB® Grabber® high thread screws*

  • —    13mm GIB® plasterboard, minimum 32mm x 6g GIB® Grabber® high thread screws*

Installation

  • —    300mm to top and bottom plates and perimeter studs

  • —    Pairs of single fasteners to each stud where horizontal joint crosses

  • —    Place fasteners no closer than 12mm from paper bound sheet edge or 18mm from any cut edge

  • —    Fasteners at wall corners to be placed 50mm in from the corner in each direction

  • —    Do not place GIBFix® adhesive at sheet edges or within 200mm of fasteners

  • —    Place daubs of GIBFix® adhesive at 300mm centres to intermediate studs

  • —    Sheet edges at door or window openings can be adhesive fixed unless forming part of the perimeter of a bracing element

Stopping

  • —    Refer to the Jointing and Finishing section (p. 78)

*Some GIB® Performance Systems may require different fastener lengths and types. Refer to the applicable GIB® System literature for more information.

Timber Frame – Horizontally Fixed

Fasteners as specified above at 300mm centres to top and bottom plates and perimeter studs


Fasteners to each stud where the horizontal joint crosses the stud


Option A


5–10mm gap between bottom edge of lower sheet and floor

Fastener placement 50mm in each direction from corner

GIBFix® adhesive or fasteners as specified above at 300mm centres

Sheets touch fitted

Option B


Studs at 600mm maximum



4.3 GIB® PLASTERBOARD INSTALLATION – WALLS

For installation guidance on GIB EzyBrace® and       For all other GIB® Performance Systems refer to

GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems refer to the GIB®    the relevant GIB® systems literature.

Performance Systems section.


  • 4.3.2    Timber Frame – Vertically Fixed

Wall Framing

  • —    Framing dimensions, spacings and nog requirements must comply with NZS3604:2011

  • —    Timber moisture content must not exceed 18% (see p. 30)

Fasteners

  • —    10mm GIB® plasterboard, minimum 25mm x 6g GIB® Grabber® high thread screws*

  • —    13mm GIB® plasterboard, minimum 32mm x 6g GIB® Grabber® high thread screws*

Timber Frame – Vertically Fixed

Installation

  • —    300mm centres around sheet perimeter

— Place fasteners no closer than 12mm from paper bound sheet edge or 18mm from any cut edge

  • —    Fasteners at wall corners to be placed 50mm in from the corner in each direction

  • —    Do not place GIBFix® adhesive at sheet edges or within 200mm of fasteners

  • —    Place daubs of GIBFix® adhesive at 300mm centres to intermediate studs

  • —    Sheet edges at door or window openings can be adhesive fixed unless forming part of the perimeter of a bracing element

Stopping

  • —    Refer to the Jointing and Finishing section (p. 78)

  • * Some GIB® Performance Systems may require different fastener lengths and types. Refer to the applicable GIB® System literature for more information.

    Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction

    Fastener placement 50mm in each direction from corner

    Studs at 600mm maximum

    Sheets touch fitted

    5–10mm gap between bottom edge of lower sheet and floor


IK 4.3 GIB® PLASTERBOARD INSTALLATION – WALLS

UId

For installation guidance on GIB EzyBrace® and       For all other GIB® Performance Systems refer to

GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems refer to the GIB®    the relevant GIB® systems literature.

Performance Systems section.

  • 4.3.3    Steel Frame – Horizontally Fixed

Metal framing to which GIB® plasterboard is fixed must be in accordance with AS/NZS 4600 or NASH Standard. The lining thickness for specific design steel framing systems can be determined by the designer as a component in the system.

For other light steel framing application a minimum thickness of 13mm GIB® plasterboard shall be used.

Wall Framing

— Steel stud dimensions to be min. 64 x 34 x 0.50mm nominal with a 6mm return

— Steel channel dimensions to be min. 64 x 30 x 0.50mm nominal

  • —    Studs must be spaced at 600mm centres maximum

  • —    Ensure that the studs are placed with the open side facing in the same direction (see diagram p. 42)

Fasteners

  • —    13mm GIB® plasterboard, minimum 25mm x 6g GIB® Grabber® fine thread self taping screws*

Installation

  • —    300mm to top and bottom channels and end studs

  • — Pairs of single fasteners to each stud where horizontal joint crosses

— Place fasteners no closer than 12mm from paper bound sheet edge or 18mm from any cut edge

— It is recommended that fasteners at wall corners be placed 50mm in from the corner in each direction

  • —    Do not place GIBFix® adhesive at sheet edges or within 200mm of fasteners

— Place daubs of GIBFix® adhesive at 300mm centres to intermediate studs

  • —    Sheet edges at door or window openings can be adhesive fixed unless forming part of the perimeter of a bracing element

Stopping

  • —    Refer to the Jointing and Finishing section (p. 78)

*Some GIB® Performance Systems may require different fastener lengths and types. Refer to the applicable GIB® System literature for more information.

Fastener placement 50mm in each direction from corner

Studs at 600mm maximum

Sheets touch fitted

5–10mm gap between bottom edge of lower sheet and floor


For installation guidance on GIB EzyBrace® and       For all other GIB® Performance Systems refer to

GIB Aqualine® Wet Area Systems refer to the GIB®    the relevant GIB® systems literature.

Performance Systems section.


  • 4.3.4    Steel Frame – Vertically Fixed

Metal framing to which GIB® plasterboard is fixed must be in accordance with AS/NZS 4600 or NASH Standard. The lining thickness for specific design steel framing systems can be determined by the designer as a component in the system.

For other light steel framing application a minimum thickness of 13mm GIB® plasterboard must be used.

Wall Framing

— Minimum steel stud dimensions to be min. 64 x 34 x 0.50mm nominal with a 6mm return

— Steel channel dimensions to be min. 64 x 30 x 0.50mm nominal

  • —    Studs shall be spaced at 600mm centres maximum

  • —    Ensure that the studs are placed with the open side facing in the same direction (see diagram p. 42)

Fasteners

  • —    13mm GIB® plasterboard, minimum 25mm x 6g GIB® Grabber® fine thread screws*

Steel Frame – Vertically Fixed

Installation

  • —    300mm to centres around sheet perimeter

  • —    Place fasteners no closer than 12mm from paper bound sheet edge or 18mm from any cut edge

  • —    It is recommended that fasteners at wall corners be placed 50mm in from the corner in each direction

  • —    Do not place GIBFix® adhesive at sheet edges or within 200mm of fasteners

  • —    Place daubs of GIBFix® adhesive at 300mm centres to intermediate studs

  • —    Sheet edges at door or window openings can be adhesive fixed unless forming part of the perimeter of a bracing element

Stopping

  • —    Refer to the Jointing and Finishing section (p. 78)

  • * Some GIB® Performance Systems may require different fastener lengths and types. Refer to the applicable GIB® System literature for more information.

    Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction


«0

GIB

  • 4.3.5    Fastening to Metal Studs

Correct Method

As the face of a steel stud can deflect initially, the correct sequence of attaching the plasterboard is important. The first sheet is attached to the open side of the stud which will cause minor deflection but will pull back tight against the sheet when the screw is fully tightened.

When the second sheet is fixed there will be minimal deflection as the open flange is now supported by the previous sheet.

Support the stud to avoid twisting.

Fastening GIB® Plasterboard to Metal Studs


First sheet






Second sheet Lipped joint


Second sheet Twisted stud


■) Incorrect fixing sequence

Incorrect fixing method can result in lipped joints, twisted studs and misalignment of the wall.

Tip: Occasionally a bow may develop in the board due to storage methods. It might be necessary to temporarily hold the board until the adhesive cures.

Screw through an offcut of plasterboard and remove the block and screw once adhesive has cured.

  • 4.3.6    Grooved Jambs and Architraves

Winstone Wallboards recommends:

The use of architraves for finishing around doors and windows for the following reasons. — Larger plasterboard sheets can be used, resulting in fewer joints.

  • —    Speedier installation of plasterboard.

  • —    Reduced chance of remedial work due to better placement of joints

Architraves make best practice fixing of plasterboard much simpler. If the use of grooved jambs is unavoidable here is some information to help minimise plasterboard fixing problems.

Grooved door jambs and window liners are an integral part of the New Zealand building scene. Unfortunately their use means that additional joints often need to be made in the wall surface. Installation of grooved jambs is subject to workmanship skills. Unless the jambs are correctly set up and installed, with a 1–2mm clearance for the plasterboard, it is difficult to install the board effectively.

Grooved Jambs and Architraves

Summary

  • —    Grooved jambs are designed to be quick and easy to install. Unless they are installed correctly, they can cause delays in plasterboard fixing and remedial work due to poorly positioned joints

  • —    Unless a small amount of time and effort is invested in getting the unit set up correctly, grooved jambs and liners can cause far more problems than they are worth

  • —    Simple best practice carpentry techniques are all that is required to install units accurately

— Accurate measuring and ordering by the building contractor

— Accurate fabrication by the joinery manufacturer

— Careful installation by the installer

  • —    The use of architraves is the recommended method of finishing around doors and windows

If the use of grooved jambs is unavoidable there are some golden rules to be followed.

The groove must be at least 1–2mm wider than the board that is being used. Trying to get a 10mm plasterboard into a 10mm groove will be difficult.

Line the back of the groove up with the face of the substrate.

Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction

Correct installation of grooved jambs using an 11–12mm packer.


Correct


Incorrect


Recommended option using architrave

DO NOT place the tapered edge of a sheet into the groove. This requires unnecessary additional stopping.


«0


4.3.7 Reducing Joints When Using Grooved Jambs


GIB

  • —    Line the wall with the opening before lining any adjacent walls

  • —    Joinery must be accurately installed to give 1.5–2mm clearance for sheet into the groove. (see p. 43)

  • —    Groove depth should be 8mm minimum

  • —    Cut lower sheet 20mm less than overall wall length

  • —    Measure from wall or floor to outer edge of joinery frame (not into groove)

  • —    Cut lower sheet as shown in Fig. 2

  • —    Install sheet by placing against the wall and sliding and lifting into grooves as required

  • —    Repeat the procedure for the upper sheet. Measure D from the top edge of the fixed lower sheet to the top outer edge of the window frame. Deduct 6mm from this measurement

    Fig. 1                          Fig 2. – Lower Sheet

  • 4.4.1    General Installation

Truss dimensions and spacings must comply with NZS3604:2011.

The use of GIB® Rondo® metal ceiling battens is strongly recommended. Timber battens can be prone to conditions that contribute to joint failure and popped fasteners. If the use of timber ceiling battens is unavoidable, additional care needs to be taken to ensure that the moisture content is 18% or less (see p. 30).

To limit sag in GIB® plasterboard ceilings, long term uniformly distributed loads such as that of fixtures and fittings and/or overlaid insulation shall not exceed 3kg/m2 unless independently supported

Winstone Wallboards recommends:

  • —    13mm GIB® plasterboard on GIB® Rondo® steel battens at 600mm centres

  • —    Ceiling battens are installed after the roof framing is complete and the roof has been loaded

  • —    All ceiling sheets be fixed at right angles to the ceiling framing. Sheets must not be fixed in the same direction as the framing to which it is attached. All ceiling battens in a single area need to run in the same direction to enable this. Sometimes this will require additional nogs to be fitted between trusses. Failure to do this will result in a tapered edge/cut edge joint at a point that is highly susceptible to cracking

General Ceiling Installation




  • 4.4.2 Standard Ceiling Fixing

This information applies to the general installation of GIB® plasterboard. If bracing, fire or noise control is a consideration consult the relevant GIB® Systems literature.

Ceiling Framing

  • —    If using timber ceiling battens, timber moisture content must not exceed 18% prior to lining (see p. 30)

  • —    Battens should all run in the same direction within a ceiling area. Additional nogs may be required to achieve this

Batten Spacing

  • —    10mm GIB® plasterboard – 450mm maximum — 13mm GIB® plasterboard – 600mm maximum — Winstone Wallboards recommends the

use of 13mm GIB® plasterboard in ceiling applications for optimal performance

Fasteners

Metal Battens

  • —    Minimum 25mm x 6g GIB® Grabber® fine thread self tapping screws*

Timber Battens

  • —    Minimum 32mm x 6g GIB® Grabber® high thread screws*


Fastener Spacings

  • —    Single screws at the edges and centre of the sheet across the batten

  • —    Single screw at 600mm maximum to the perimeter of the ceiling. See p. 68 for ceiling diaphragm installation

  • —    Place fasteners no closer than 12mm from a taper sheet edge or 18mm from a cut sheet edge

Adhesive

  • —    Place daubs of GIBFix® adhesive at 200mm to intermediaries

  • —    Do not place adhesive at sheet edges or within 200mm of fasteners

Lining

  • —    Sheets should be touch fitted

  • —    Sheets must be fixed at right angles to the ceiling framing unless otherwise specified in GIB® Performance System specifications

Stopping

  • —    Refer to the Joint and Finishing section (p.78)

*Some GIB® Performance Systems may require different fastener lengths and types. Refer to the applicable GIB® System literature for more information


Ceilings


1 x GIB® Grabber® screw to sheet edge at each batten intersection


GIB® Rondo® batten and clip


Back-block sheet end joints


Stagger sheet end joints by minimum 600mm


(600mm for 13mm GIB® plasterboard, 450mm for 10mm GIB® plasterboard)


GIBFix® adhesive


1 x GIB® Grabber® screw to sheet centre at each batten intersection


Sheet edge back blocks (see to p. 47)


Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction


gib 4.4.3 Raking Ceilings and Skillion Roofs Due to the higher temperatures and low air movement that can occur in raking ceilings it is strongly recommended that clip fixed GIB® Rondo® metal battens are used (these are considered to be ceiling suspension systems).

Because of the heat that can be generated in roof spaces, timber battens can be subjected to conditions that contribute to joint failure and popped fasteners.

The use of control joints or perimeter relief will help reduce the risk of cracking in large, expansive ceilings.

These may not be suitable for use in Fire or Noise Control Systems.

Back blocking of all ceiling joints is highly recommended as it can reduce the likelihood of cracking.

Fixed – Steel Backing Angle


Flexible – Perimeter Relief


Note: It is recommended that a flexible perimeter relief be used where there is a high risk of movement.



  • 4 .4.4 Back Blocking – Butt and Edge Joints

Back blocking is the practice of laminating an off-cut of plasterboard to the back of a joint using GIB-Cove® Bond adhesive.

Back blocking is required to ceiling sheet edge joints as follows:

Timber Battens When there are 3 or more tapered edge joints in a ceiling area

Metal Battens When there are 6 or more tapered edge joints in a ceiling area

Back blocking is required to all joints when a Level 5 Finish has been specified.

Back blocking is strongly recommended at sheet end joints in ceilings. Some fire rated systems require that joints are made on solid blocking and that requirement takes precedence and must be followed. Refer to GIB® Fire Rated Systems specifications for more information.

Back blocking is not required for a Level 4 Finish when a suspension system has been used. This includes GIB® Rondo® metal ceiling batten system fixed on clips. See p. 46. Sheets ends should be back blocked.

Due to wind pressure when garage door is open, and vibration from garage door opening, it is recommended that all sheet joints in garage ceilings are back blocked.

Back Blocking

Back Blocking Comprises 2 Steps:

  • —    Laminating a piece of plasterboard to the back of the joint

  • —    Forming a tapered edge to help form a flat stopped joint

Step 2 can be omitted but the stopped joint will need to be much wider (500–600mm) in order to minimise the effect of the stopping joint thickness.

Back Blocking Technique

— Make back blocks at least 300mm wide and cut to fit loosely between framing members

  • —    Apply GIB-Cove® Bond to the underside of the back block with a 6–8mm notched trowel

  • —    Do not use synthetic wall board adhesive for back blocking

  • —    If possible, attach the back block to the back of the joint from above

  • —    If access from above is not possible, apply GIB-Cove® Bond to one half of the back block before attaching the bak block to the edge of the shee. Ins                           gh

the tapered                          lock

  • —    Apply GIB                    ainder

of the bac                   ng the

next she

Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction

gib 4.4.5 Control Joints – Walls and Ceilings These control joints and maximum recommended centres aim to provide relief from stresses associated with changes in temperature, humidity and the response of dissimilar construction materials (e.g. metal, timber, gypsum and plasterboard). For more significant structural movements consult the building designer.

Walls

  • —    In long unbroken partitions or wall runs, control joints are required at maximum 12m centres They are also required where structural control joints occur in the primary structure

  • —    Door frames extending from floor to ceiling constitute effective control joints

Ceilings

  • —    Extensive ceiling areas must have control joints spaced at maximum 12m centres

  • —    It is recommended joints be positioned to intersect lighting fixtures, heating vents or air diffusers

Other situations

  • —    Where GIB® plasterboard meets dissimilar materials, it must be isolated by an edge trim or casing bead

  • —    In stairwells and high timber framed walls, provision should be made for timber movement by leaving a 20mm gap between the sheet lining at, or near, the upper floor joists. This gap can be covered by a suitable cover batten

Joint Control

Joint Position

Maximum Centres

Walls

12 metres

Ceilings

12 metres

Perimeter relief using GIB® Goldline® Tape-On Trims

Control Joints in Ceilings – Recommendation to Reduce Risk of Cracking

There are some common places within the 12m spacing where cracks are most likely to occur in ceilings (as shown below).

It is recommended to consider installing control joints in these locations (as shown below) to reduce the risk of cracking.

Where hallways exit from a larger ceiling area.

At internal corners in irregular shaped ceilings or where the main ceiling would look better divided into smaller sections.

At openings such as skylights, voids or recessed strip lighting. This may also include designated functional areas of a space.

Plan view                                         Plan view


Plan view


  • 4 .4.5 Control Joints – Walls and Ceilings Installation of the GIB® Rondo® P35 control joint

  • —    Allow an 18mm minimum gap between the plasterboard sheets

  • —    Locate the GIB® Rondo® P35 control joint centrally in the gap. Staple both flanges to the lining at 150mm centres maximum

  • —    Finish with jointing compound using the channel nibs as screeding guides

  • —    When the joint is dry remove the protective tape

Control joint using GIB® Goldline®

Platinum trim

  • —    Allow a 14–17mm gap between the plasterboard sheets

  • —    Install GIB® Goldline® Platinum GR reveal to one side of joint

  • —    Install GIB® Goldline® L Trim to the other side. Use a spacer to provide an even gap between the trim. This can be between 3–12mm

  • —    Apply compounds as described on p. 83–84

GIB® Plastic W-profile Control Joint

  • —    Discrete finish and has tear-away tabs for easy installation

  • —    This trim is thicker than the other control joint trims and thus may have implications for the final joint height

  • —    Available in 3.0m lengths

Note: Contact the GIB® Helpline 0800 100 442 for detailing of control joints in GIB® Performance Systems (e.g. fire, noise, bracing).


Installation of the Rondo® P35 control joint 1.

min. 18mm gap

K------->1

f Jfc|L I

K----------------------------X

70mm


Control joint using GB® Gldline® Platinum trim 2.


14mm–17mm



13mm GR Reveal





GIB® Goldline® G4 10mm L-Trim


GIB® Plastic W-profile Control Joint


3.


16mm–18mm

K------>1


Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction


«0

GIB


GIB® Rondo® Steel Battens


Timber Stud Walls



Stud



£


GIB® Rondo® P35 Control Joint


150mm max

18mm gap between sheets


GIB® Rondo® P35

Control Joint



18mm gap between sheets



GIB® Goldline® Platinum Trim

14mm–17mm gap between sheets

Two Storey Full Height Wall with Expansion Joint

Masonry Junction Timber or Steel Framing

edge fastening requirements



4.4.6 GIB® Rondo® 310 Metal Batten System Installation Instructions


The GIB® Rondo® 310 system forms a strong, stable and flat substrate for ceilings in residential and commercial applications. The 35mm dimension allows it to be directly substituted into ceilings where 35mm timber battens would traditionally have been used. Consult an electrical contractor for any earthing requirements that may need to be incorporated.

There are two methods of fixing GIB® Rondo® 310 metal battens.

Recommended method

Clipped using either:

311D clip for a drop of 0–30mm

313 clip where a larger drop is required between the bottom of the truss chord, joist or rafter and the back of the ceiling batten

See detail on page (69)

For ceiling diaphragm details refer to p. 66


310          312



340 NZ18     GIBFix®

Angle

A drop of up to 130mm can be achieved in order to accommodate services or variations in framing heights

  • —    GIB Quiet Clip® in GIB Noise Control® Systems

Alternative method

  • —    Directly by fastening with pairs of min. GIB® Grabber® 32mm x 8g wafer head screws through the flange

  • —    Alternatively pairs of min. 45mm x 2.8mm flat head nails can be used

  • —    For fixing to steel framing a drill tip screw is recommended

    GIB

Note: If the 310 system is to be used in a ceiling diaphragm the batten needs to be screwed directly through the flanges to the framing.

Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction

GIB® Rondo® 310 System

Recommended Best Practice Details                     Other Details

max.



Insert one 32 x GIB® Wafer

Head screw into the vertical slot firmly but not quite home. Adjust levels as required and then drive completely home

Insert 2 further fasteners to complete the connection


  • —    Establish a datum line for the ceiling

  • —    Place a string line on the datum line at right angles to the battens, under the truss or joist closest to the centre of the room

  • —    Install GIB® Rondo® clips at 600mm centres (450mm for 10mm GIB® plasterboard) using the string line to establish the correct position

Cut the batten to the required length using snips or a hacksaw

Insert the batten into the channel at each end and fit into the clip

Install remainder of clips ensuring that the batten is straight and flat

GIB® Rondo® 310 Batten Span Table for Residential Internal Applications


Battens


GIB® Plasterboard Thickness – Single layer

10mm

13mm

Maximum Batten Spacing (mm)

450

600

Multi Span (mm)

1200

Single Span and Garages (mm)

900



The GIB® Rondo® 308 system is a light weight yet very strong ceiling batten. In addition to its function as a ceiling batten it can also be used as a wall furring channel and is an integral part of GIB Noise Control® Systems for walls. Consult an electrical contractor for any earthing requirements that may need to be incorporated.

GIB® Rondo® 308 System

308 Batten

142 Perimeter Channel

NZ18 or GIBFIx® Angle Can be installed inverted

138 Jointer

226 Clip

394 Clip



308           138


142 NZ18     GIBFix®

Angle

Recommended method

The GIB® Rondo® 308 system is installed using either:

  • —    226 clip for a drop of 0–30mm

  • —    394 clip where a larger drop is required between the bottom of the truss chord, joist or rafter and the back of the ceiling batten.

Up to 130mm clearance between the bottom of the framing and the back of the batten of can be achieved in order to accommodate services or variations in framing heights

Note: If the 308 system is to be used in a ceiling diaphragm, the batten needs to secured directly to the framing (see p. 69).

Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction

«0

GIB® Rondo® 308 System


Insert one 32 x 8 GIB® Wafer Head screw into the vertical slot firmly but not quite home. Adjust levels as required and then drive completely home

Insert 2 further fasteners to complete the connection


max.


Establish a datum line for the ceiling

Place a string line on the datum line at right angles to the battens, under the truss or joist closest to the centre of the room

Install GIB® Rondo® clips at 600mm centres (450mm for 10mm GIB® plasterboard) using the string line to establish the correct position

GIB® Rondo® 308 Batten Span Table for Residential Internal Applications

Cut the batten to the required length using snips or a hacksaw

Insert the batten into the channel at each end and fit into the clip

Install remainder of clips ensuring that the batten is straight and flat

Battens


GIB® Plasterboard Thickness – Single layer

10mm

13mm

Maximum Batten Spacing (mm)

450

600

Multi Span (mm)

1200

Single Span and Garages (mm)

900


  • 4.4.8    GIB® Rondo® Suspended Ceiling System The range of GIB® Rondo® suspended ceiling componentry provides additional clearance above the ceiling level. This could be to run electrical, plumbing or ventilation equipment. The system allows for the ceiling lining material to be directly attached to the lower face of the battens.

    GIB® Rondo® Suspended Ceiling Components

    TCR Jointer (cut from 127 / 128)







    5mm increments

    Betafix can be used for wall or ceiling applications

This is not to be confused with a two way grid system which accommodates proprietary ceiling tiles. The components can be assembled in a wide range of combinations to suit a variety of applications. Refer to GIB® Rondo® System literature for more information.

GIB

Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction

IK 4.5 CURVING GIB® PLASTERBOARD

UId

GIB® plasterboard can be curved. Curvature is dependent on the thickness and type of board and whether the board is applied wet or dry. Sheets must be fixed horizontally to walls.

The radii shown are for GIB® Standard and GIB Ultraline®. Other performance boards such as

GIB Fyreline® and GIB Aqualine® can also be curved but with slightly increased radii due to the increased density of the board.

It is not recommended to curve high density boards such as GIB Braceline / GIB Noiseline® or GIB Toughline® due to the risk of breakage.

Minimum Bending Radii of GIB® Plasterboard

Board Thickness/Type

Minimum Radius (Wet)

Minimum Radius (Dry)

10mm GIB® Standard

900mm

1200mm

13mm GIB® Standard

1000mm

1500mm

10mm GIB Ultraline®

1000mm

1500mm

13mm GIB Ultraline®

1500mm


Framing Centres

Wall or Ceiling Radius

Maximum Stud, Batten or Joist Spacing

900mm–1200mm

200mm

Over 1200mm–3000mm

300mm

Over 3000mm

400mm


Application Method

  • —    Ensure that framing spacings are correct

  • —    If possible, select board length to allow for one unbroken panel to cover the entire curve with enough extra length to extend 300mm beyond each end

  • —    Alternatively apply water with a paint roller to both sides


  • —    If creating an outside curve, begin installation at one end and fasten the sheet as it is wrapped around the curve

  • —    If creating an inside curve, start fastening the sheet at the centre of the curve and work outwards to the end of the sheet

Note: Lining the inside of the curve will be more difficult than lining the outside and will require additional labour.



  • 4.6 FIXING TO MASONRY

Direct bonding of GIB® plasterboard to concrete or brick masonry walls must only be considered when the concrete or masonry substrate is thoroughly dry and adequately protected against moisture penetration.

The substrate must be firm, dry, and free of dust, grease, release agents and curing compounds.

Direct Bonding (For Sheet Heights up to 3m)

  • —    Determine the sheet position for either vertical or horizontal fixing and mark on wall

  • —    GIB® plasterboard sheets can be fixed vertically or horizontally. Horizontal fixing creates fewer joints and is recommended

  • —    Use GIB-Cove® Bond to bond the GIB® plasterboard to concrete or masonry surfaces

  • —    Mix GIB-Cove® Bond to a smooth, thick consistency — Apply GIB-Cove® Bond daubs approximately 50mm diameter x 12mm thick at 300–400mm centres vertically and 500–600mm centres horizontally.

Ensure that adhesive is placed no closer than 25mm from the edge of the sheet

  • —    Where irregularities up to 10mm occur on the masonry surface, use larger daubs of adhesive to bridge the gap

  • —    Position the sheet and press into place

  • —    Obtain true alignment and flatness by using a long straight edge over the surface of the sheet

  • —    Alternatively, apply adhesive over the entire back surface of the sheet using a notched trowel

  • —    Apply GIB-Cove® or GIB® Trims to wall and ceiling intersections

  • —    Fix skirting and architrave with masonry nails or adhesive

Wall Strapping must be used:

  • —    Wall Strapping must be used:

  • —    When the concrete or masonry wall is below ground level

  • —    When the concrete or masonry wall is an external wall, unless a proprietary external weatherproofing system can be verified as providing weather tightness for the life of the building

  • —    In bathrooms, laundries and other wet areas

  • —    When the concrete or masonry substrate or paintwork is in poor condition

  • —    When the wall surface contains irregularities of more than 8–10mm strapping can be packed to provide a flat surface for the plasterboard

  • —    For walls in excess of 3.0m in height

  • —    Use either nominally 50 x 25mm timber strapping

or metal furring channels. Deeper strapping may be required to accommodate insulation requirements

  • —    Fix DPC behind timber strapping

  • —    Fix strapping vertically to the wall surface at a maximum of 600mm centres, with either a continuous horizontal batten or nogs at the top and bottom of the wall

  • —    Install services prior to installing GIB® plasterboard linings

In situations where dampness or rain penetration problems exist, corrective measures must be taken prior to installation of interior linings.

Movement and control joints in the main structure must be carried through the GIB® plasterboard linings. This can be achieved by installing a control joint in the plasterboard.

Daubs approximately 50mm diam. x 12mm high

Daubs placed no closer than 25mm from sheet edge

Control joints in walls need to continue through GIB® plasterboard

GIB-Cove® Bond adhesive daubs at 300–400mm centres vertically and 500–600mm centres horizontally


50 x 25mm KDMG timber or GIB® Rondo® Steel Battens, maximum 600mm apart.

Pack battens as required to provide a flat surface

Trouble Shooting              Repairs & Maintenance Finishing & Jointing Systems    GIB® Performance Systems     General Installation             Pre-Installation                Product Range                Introduction

For vertically fixed boards, use nogs between battens at 800mm centres

Nogs are not required for horizontally fixed boards

IK 4.6 FIXING TO MASONRY

UId

If insulation is required to concrete or masonry, it is recommended that GIB® Rondo® 308 battens are clipped to GIB® Rondo® A239 clips as

shown. A239 clips should be spaced at 1200mm centres (maximum) vertically and 600mm centres (maximum) horizontally.

A239 Clip

308 Batten

Anchor bolt

Polystyrene


GIB® Plasterboard overlay


ALUMINIUM


ECLIPSE ALUMINIUM SUITE





PRODUCT SUMMARY

The Eclipse Aluminium Partition Suite is a quality, user-friendly group of flexible Aluminium sections and extrusions. Its complete system caters for nearly any variable in an interior office fit-out.

This versatile suite has been designed to work with 64mm and 92mm stud sizes respectively and can be clad with 13mm plasterboard. A separate 45mm suite can be added as a slim-line extension to the 64mm and 92mm sections or can be installed separately as a minimalistic and cost effective alternative.

The Elipse Aluminium Suite has been acoustically tested for STC performance and the results reflect actual performance as a complete system. The double glazed partition is able to reach an STC performance of 47dB.

The suite is available in a range of colours and finishes; 500+ Resene and Dulux powdercoat colours, 15 MetWood finishes, bespoke and others available upon request. An antimicrobial coating can be applied for when used in hygiene and medical spaces. The standard anodised colour is silver.

The suite has great adaptability to meet most functionality and aesthetic purposes. Furthermore, since the product is manufactured in New Zealand, bespoke options are available.

METWOOD FINISHES:

••••••••

Black Bean Darkest Gum Dark Riverwood Washed Riverwood Plywood Washed Teak Honey Manuka Oak Broom

Beachwood          Tawa         Kahikatea         Concrete White Concrete Grey Marble White Marble


ECLIPSE ALUMINIUM SUITE


ALUMINIUM


ECLIPSE 45MM ALUMINIUM PARTITIONING SUITE

Designed to work in isolation or in conjunction with the Eclipse 64mm, the Eclipse 45mm offers a fine-line design with soft detailing. Again the pocket glazing and snap fix componentry enhances the user friendly nature of the suite, whilst ensuring high aesthetic appeal with the completed installation.

ECLIPSE 45MM FRONTLINE ALUMINUM PARTITIONING SUITE

A new take on the existing 45mm suite, to add a frontline glazing option for the slimline look.

ECLIPSE 64MM ALUMINIUM PARTITIONING SUITE

This has been primarily designed around 64mm steel stud to incorporate up to four layers of 13mm Gypsum Plasterboard.

The J Mould has been added to the suite to enhance the flexibility and to assist with the trimming off of strapped walls and bulkheads etc. The Eclipse 64mm Aluminium Partitioning Suite offers immense flexibility incorporating pocket glazing and snap fix componentry together with detailing to incorporate the Eclipse 45mm as required.

ECLIPSE 64MM FRONTLINE ALUMINIUM PARTITIONING SUITE

A frontline glazing addition to the comprehensive 64mm suite, provides an added ability to double glaze for acoustically sensitive areas.

ECLIPSE DOOR SUITE

A comprehensive door suite in 100mm, 120mm and 80mm options. This suite has the ability to offer top hung sliding doors, bottom rolled sliding doors and hinged doors. The glazing pocket allows for thicker acoustic glass and the doors will accommodate acoustic seals for improved privacy. Acoustic doors are available where required.

The Eclipse Aluminium Suite poster, brochure, Revit and DWG files are available for download from the T&R Interior Systems website; tris.co.nz


O INT&RIOR SYSTEMS

Guiding Design Informed Interiors

Eclipse Aluminium Partitioning Suite

0800 666 556 www.tris.co.nz Wellington, Auckland, Christchurch

Stick-on

Door Suite

45mm

45mm Suite

VertiBrace

Glazing

Pocket Fillers

Slipper

Glazing Mullions

Frontline

Plates

19.10                                     19                                        19

AE023                AE018

AE023

AE405

FlatSlipperPlate

AE406

AcouticSlipperPlate (uses2xSeal)

AE018

64mmClip-InDoorSto

((uupsetso5Se0aml)m

19.1                                  19.7

Bead

—^

120mm

120mm

DoorStop

E005/B

G2l/a6z4i/n4g5mBemadBra

GlazingBead

64mm Frontline & Double Glazing

GlazingBe

WShape(carpet)

BShape(hardfloors)

64mm Suite

TrEu5n0k3iLng95Li

45mmFrontline GlazingBead

E002/45

Stick-On GlazingMullio

E402/120

AE011 64mmFlat Clip-InFiller

AE400/120

AE009/100

E415 nternalDoo GMuiilldeOAnldy)aptor

AE416

SlidingDoor

Pick-Up

AE011/R 64mmRebate Clip-InFiller

132

A9P2Eom0ck3me2-tF9rH2oenatdlitrnaecGklazing

Climp-ImnPFoillcekre

92mmSnap-In 92mmRebated lip-InFiller Jointer                    Clip-InFiller


®     AE318         AE317

92mmClip-In DoorStop 92mmClip-InDoorStop

ABiE-4F1o7ldDoorStop       ((uupsetosS50eaml)mDoors)        (upto40mmDoors)



((uupsetso4S0eaml)mD


GlazingBead


AE407

(AucsoeussSticealS)ideSlipperPlate



92mm Frontline & Double Glazing


AE011/D 64mmSnap-In Jointer



PHONIC DIRECT FIX

High Performance Acoustic Ceiling Tile


PHONIC

ACOUSTIC CEILING TILES


High Absorption

Glasswool


Hygrothermal


Hygiene


Fire Test- Group 1S




PRODUCT SUMMARY

Phonic Direct Fix is a white painted, textured glasswool acoustic ceiling tile. Direct Fix eliminates the need for an exposed grid and enhances the clean smooth monolithic surface.

30 year lifetime system warranty to withstand conditions up to 40°- 99% relative humidity without visible sag.

EMISSIONS, SUSTAINABILITY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

For Green Star rated projects, Phonic meets the Greenguard Emission Certificate standard.

PHONIC

ACOUSTIC CEILING TILES

PHONIC DIRECT FIX s

High Performance Acoustic Ceiling Tile 0W

GENERAL TEST DESCRIPTION         RESULT              TEST METHOD

Absorption (ISO 354) 20mm Direct Fix

NRC 0.75

ASTM C432

αW 0.55

ISO 11654

SAA 0.94

ASTM C423

With 35mm air gap

NRC 0.85

ASTM C432

αW 0.85

ISO 11654

SAA 0.92

ASTM C423

Attenuation (ASTM E1414-11A)

CAC & Dn,c,w 23

ISO 717-1 ASTM E413-10

20mm (without plasterboard backing)

Light Reflectance

LR 87% +

ASTM E1477-98

Density

120kg/m3

Weight

20mm: 2.4kg/m2

Fire Test - ISO 5660 Part1

Group 1-S

Cone Calorimeter

2013 Fire Test

1-S Classification THE BEST YOU CAN GET

NZBC C/VM2 Appendix A

Cleanroom

ISO Class 3

ISO 14644.3:2015

Moisture Rate

≤ 1%

JC/T 670 – 2005

Thermal Conductivity

≥ 0.04 (kcal/mh°C)

JIS A 1412

Est. R-Value (m2k/w)

20mm: R0.5

Size

20mm Depth x [600x600] [1200x600]

Other sizes available on request.

Colour

White

Installation

Tiles are best installed in an Ashlar pattern. Phonic Direct Fix is only covered by warranty if only installed in the Ashlar pattern.

1 r a         ___

JILT '

+

Shown with air gap

Shown as direct fix

Acoustic Performance re-tested in New Zealand labs in 2019. Please note; these results may differ from earlier datasheets

INGREDIENTS

Fibreglass tissue face with acrylic resin (back and front of tile) 7-10% - Fibreglass (Glasswool) 80-85%, Acrylic resin 15-20%, Acoustic board 70-80% - Glasswool 88-89%, Phenolic resin 11-12%, Water-based paint 20-25% - Acrylic emulsion 10-15%, Inorganic filler (Kaolin, Calcium carbonate) 40-55%, Environmentally friendly flame retardant 15-25%, A variety of additives (Dispersant, Leveling agent; from Polycarboxylate ammonium salt, EGBE-Ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, Water) 3-5%, Ion water 15-20%, Glue 2-4% - Acrylic resin 50-55%, Ion water 45-50%.


PHONIC

ACOUSTIC CEILING TILES


INSTALLATION GUIDE

PHONIC DIRECT FIX FREE-FLOATING


STEP ONE




STEP THREE


Plasterboard

Phonic Direct Fix tile


STEP FOUR


Aluminium Angle


ALTERNATIVE


] 29mm4



Furrning Channel at 300mm centres


Plasterboard


Phonic Direct Fix tile


Perimeter Channel

] 19mm4


STEP ONE

Determine tile configuration and identify fixing points for the H Clips on the ceiling. The layout is dependent on the desired configuration. Leave the edges free.

Please note that whatever the configuration, the final tile will have a maximum of one edge with H clips.

STEP TWO

Install an aluminium angle along the edges to create a frame

STEP THREE

Apply adhesive to the back of the tiles and place the tiles into the aluminium frame. Complete one row at a time and use H Clips to mechnically fix the edges as identified in step 1. All tiles with edges on the perimeter should be propped while the adhesive dries.

STEP FOUR

Apply adhesive and slide the final tile into place. Prop until adhesive is dry.


ZENTHE

Wall Dividers & Screens

Technical Data Sheet

Smart customisable wall divider and screen system

New Zealand

website

Address

06 842 0004

zenthe.co

8 Cooper Street Havelock North, 4130

Australia

1800 958 382

email

sales@zenthe.co

New Zealand

Technical Information

General Information

Zenthe common name

Wall Dividers & Screens

Key Features

+ Group 1S fire ratings

+ Customisable batten spacings and batten sizes

+ Responsibly sourced options available

Typical applications

Interior wall divider or screen

Option one

Solid Timber Battens

Finished solid timber

10-year product warranty

Option Two

FR MDF/Timber Veneer Battens.

Pressed timber veneer finish. A large choice of timber veneers available.

5-year product warranty

Typical Physical Properties

Typical batten size

90mm x 45mm for both options. Fabricated to the height required.

NRC Rating

Please note that these NRC values are based on the battens being installed with 25mm acoustic panel between each batten. NRC 0.60>

Group Fire rating

NZ: 1S (Solid timber with intumescent coating)

NZ: 1S (FR MDF / Timber Veneer)

AUS: 2 (FR MDF / Timber Veneer)

Environmental Properties

Green Building rating compliance

View the EnviroSpec Summary Sheet

responsibly sourced

Available with:

FSC® Chain of Custody

PEFC™ Certification

Ask for our FSC® / PEFC™ certified products

Installation methods

Refer to website for details




System 1


System 2


System 3


Solid Timber Species

Southland Beech

New Zealand


Victorian Ash

Australia PEFC®


American White Ash

North America


r

Yellow Cedar

Canada

FSC® / PEFC®


American Maple

North America


FSC®

European Beech

Central Europe


American White Oak

North America


European White Oak

Central Europe


Radiata Pine

New Zealand


Tawa

New Zealand


FSC®

American Cherry

North America


FSC®

Spotted Gum

Australia PEFC®


Western Red Cedar

North America FSC® / PEFC®


FSC®

Malaysian Kauri Oceania


Matai

New Zealand


Rosewood

South-East Asia


Saligna

Australia


Rimu

New Zealand


Iroko

West Africa


Sapele

West Africa


FSC®


FSC®


Solid Timber Species

i 1 Illi

Kwila


American Walnut

North America


Australian Blackwood

Australia

PEFC®


Bubinga

Africa


Jarrah

Australia PEFC®


South-East Asia


FSC®

Western Hemlock

Canada


Timber Veneer Species


Hoop Pine

Australia


White Ash

North America


Tawa

New Zealand


Tasmanian Oak

Australia


American Red Oak

North America


FSC®

American White Oak

North America


FSC®

European Beech

Europe


FSC®

Queensland Maple

Australia


Silver Beech

New Zealand


Brush Box

Australia


FSC®

Tasmanian Blackwood

Australia

PEFC®


FSC®

Black Butt

Australia


FSC®

American Walnut

North America


Coloured Rimu

New Zealand


Totara

New Zealand


FSC®

Red Cedar

North America

FSC®


FSC®

Jarrah

Australia PEFC®


Heart Rimu

New Zealand


Smoked Oak

Engineered from

American White Oak


FSC®


Other veneer options available on request

Sustainability

Zenthe carries Chain of Custody (CoC) certification that enables us to sell Timber, MDF, Plywood and Timber Veneer that carries either FSC® certification or PEFC™ certification.

FSC® certified timber and PEFC™ certified timber undergo independent, third-party audited certification procedures at every step of the supply chain. This provides designers, specifiers, architects, and consumers absolute assurance that those forest and wood products labelled as FSC® certified or PEFC™ certified originate from responsible sources, which are managed to be prescribed social, economic, and environmental standards.


The mark of responsible forestry



Zenthe Solid Timber battens are a natural product and has knots and blemishes in the timber. There will be different colour & grain variations from batch to batch. All timber needs to be handled with care and by qualified tradesmen. Battens need to be stored inside, out of sunlight, off the ground, in a dry moisture free environment and flat, well supported and totally free of moisture with a cover sheet on the top for protection. Zenthe take no reasonability for bowed battens due to incorrect storage and moisture ingress. Zenthe needs to be advised of any complaints within 3 days of received the goods. Any complaints received after 3 days will be void.

ZENTHE

Leaders in interior decorative, acoustic, fire safe Panel and Batten systems.

zenthe.co

Latest update: 2010-09-11

^Tarkett

COMMERCIAL


iQ Optima


Technical Data

VINYL

Type of flooring

EN 649

Homogeneous vinyl flooring

CE certification

Yes

Classification

EN 685

Commercial: 34

Industrial: 43

Wear layer thickness

EN 429

2,0 mm

iQ PUR

Yes

Total thickness

EN 428

2,0 mm

Total weight/m²

EN 430

2800 g

Dimensional stability

EN 434

≤ 0,40 % for rolls

≤ 0,25 % for tiles

Abrasion

Thickness loss

Volume loss

EN 660:Part 1

EN 660:Part 2

Group P: ≤ 0,15 mm

Group P: ≤ 4,00 mm³

Residual indentation

EN 433

Approx. 0,03 mm

Castor chair test

EN 425

Suitable

Static electrical charge

EN 1815

< 2 kV

Underfloor heating

Suitable – max. 27ºC

Thermal resistance

EN 12667/DIN 52612

Approx. 0,01 m² K/W

Reaction to fire

EN 13501-1

EN ISO 9239-1

EN ISO 11925-2

Class Bfl s1 ≥ 8 kW/m² Pass

Light fastness

EN ISO 105-B02

≥ level 6

Chemical resistance

EN 423

Good resistance

Bacteria resistance

ISO 846:Part C

Does not favour growth

Clean room test

ASTM F51/00

Class A

Slip resistance

DIN 51130

EN 13893

R9 ≥ 0,3

Colours

30

Form of delivery

EN 426 Sheet (rolls)

EN 427 Tiles (box)

Approx. 25 r m x 200 cm art. no. 3242_ _ _ 3 digit colour number

61,0 x 61,0 cm

14 tiles/box=5,21 m² art. no. 3217_ _ _ 3 digit colour number


DATA SHEET

Greenpad – Gold Coast


issue 10/16

Carpet Plank Module pg 1/2


Distributor/Manufacturer

Advance Flooring Systems Limited/Voxflor.

Trade Name

Greenpad – Gold Coast.

Product Description

DuPontTM Sorona® Yarn Dyed & Solution Dyed fibre carpet plank tiles with a PVC or Mix-BacTM backing system.

Product Benefit

Greenpad Gold Coast is a sustainably manufactured carpet module with superior stain resistance providing you a highly durable carpet tile that is easy to clean.

Area of Application

Gold Coast is suitable for use in any high traffic commercial areas.

Composition

Gold Coast carpet modules are made with a graphic tufted multi-level loop construction consisting of 100% renewable DuPontTM Sorona® fibre, bonded to a fiberglass reinforced PVC or Mix-BacTM backing system.

Dimensions

Pile height           4mm + 0.5mm at 21 OZ/yd2

Tile size             250 x 1000mm

Pattern & Colours

Graphic tufted multi-level loop pattern available in a range of 6 colours.

Manufacture

Gold Coast carpet modules are manufactured in China, by Voxflor using manufacturing processes that is ISO 14001:2004 compliant for its Environmental Management Systems.

Smoke/Fire

Gold Coast carpet plank modules comply by exceeding the NZ requirements.

Electrical Resistance

Gold Coast carpet plank modules comply by exceeding the NZ requirements.

Durability

Class 3, Extra Heavy Commercial.

Advance

SYSTEMS

FLOORING

Advance Flooring Systems Ltd

email: info@advanceflooringsystems.com

www.advanceflooringsystems.com

DATA SHEET            issue 10/16

Greenpad - Gold Coast Carpet Plank Modules pg 2/2

Sound Absorption

Voxflor carpet modules with Mix-BacTM backing systems can reduce reverbative noise in a commercial office environment.

UV Resistance

Some fading may be observed in areas of intense sunlight.

Sustainability

Voxflor is committed to the protection of the environment and all products are manufactured to strict ISO 14001: 2004 standards. All Voxflor Greenpad carpet tiles with PVC and Mix-BacTM backing systems are accredited by Environmental Choice New Zealand – licence number 3314129

Installation

Gold Coast carpet modules must be installed by a competent and experienced carpet installer and we recommend the full stick method - more information on the recommended installation procedures is available on our website www.advanceflooringsystems.com or upon request.

We recommend the following installation method for Gold Coast


Recommended Adhesive

Strongbond 65 – Look Floors, or Polymer 999 PS – Gilt Edge Industries.

Cleaning and Maintenance

Proper maintenance is one of the most important factors to ensure good performance of carpet. Gold Coast should be vacuumed daily. In the first instance, we believe a good entrance matting system installed at entry areas will help collect up to 90% soiling before it is tracked into the interior of the building - more information on the recommended maintenance procedures is available on our website www.advanceflooringsystems.com or upon request.

Warranty

The manufacturer provides a Fifteen (15) year limited warranty for castor chairs, delamination and dimensional stability, a lifetime stain, soil and antistatic limited warranty and a 25-year fade resistance, abrasive wear limited warranty.

Advance Flooring Systems Ltd

email: info@advanceflooringsystems.com

Advance

SYSTEMS

www.advanceflooringsystems.com


DATA SHEET


issue 04/17


EverTread        Entrance System           pg 1/2

Manufacturer

Advance Flooring Systems Limited

Trade Name

EverTread

Product Description

An 17mm deep aluminium strip mat system with polyamide inserts for entrance areas.

Product Benefit

EverTread is an entrance mat system engineered to trap soiling and moisture that is easy to clean and protects flooring surfaces inside. EverTread has fully interlocking aluminium base that eliminates additional moisture through by specially designed molded feet and can handle medium rolling loads.

EverTread provides excellent slip resistance mitigating the risk of slips and falls causing injury.

Area of Application

EverTread is ideal for extreme levels of foot traffic for any commercial entry application such as commercial premises, hotels and tertiary education facilities. EverTread is to be used indoors or in weather protected areas.

Composition

EverTread is manufactured with continuous anodised aluminium interlocking strips, molded anti-clatter feet and polyamide carpet inserts.

Dimensions

Strip depth           17mm

Overall tread size     40mm

Appearance

Natural anodised aluminium interlocking strip system available in a range of 8 polyamide insert colours.

Manufacture

EverTread is manufactured by Advance Flooring systems to its copyright design.

Smoke/Fire

The EverTread matting system has been tested and exceeds the AU & NZ requirements.

Slip Test

EverTread has been tested and exceeds the AS/NZS 4586: 2004 NZ & AS 4586: 2013 AU requirements.

Advance

FLOORING

Advance Flooring Systems Ltd

email: info@advanceflooringsystems.com

www.advanceflooringsystems.com


SYSTEMS


DATA SHEET


issue 04/17


EverTread        Entrance System           pg 2/2

Durability

Extra Heavy Commercial.

UV Resistance

Some fading of the polyamide carpet inserts may be observed in areas of intense sunlight. Aluminium sections are not affected.

Sustainability

Advance Flooring Systems is committed to the protection of the environment. EverTread is designed to minimise environmental impacts during manufacture and engineered to last a long first lifecycle supported by a 15 year warranty.

Installation

EverTread tiles must be installed by a competent and experienced installer, more information on the recommended installation procedures is available on our website www.advanceflooringsystems.com or upon request.

Cleaning and Maintenance

EverTread has low maintenance requirements and can be removed for cleaning as excessive dirt if required. Special dirt collection zones and polyamide infills gather dirt for simple and effective cleaning. Daily Maintenance: Vacuum EverTread thoroughly with a powerful vacuum cleaner preferably with power driven brushes. This agitates the pile to loosen the trapped dirt.

Periodic Maintenance: A routine visual inspection will identify when EverTread is becoming embeded with dirt which can be removed by a water spray extraction method. Alternatively, EverTread can be scrubbed by machine or hand, rinse thoroughly using a wet and dry vacuum cleaner. In cases of staining, household solvents may be used, however must only be applied to a rag and rubbed onto the pile. Do not pour solvents directly onto the mat as a breakdown of the infill adhesive may result. More information on the recommended maintenance procedures is available on our website www.advanceflooringsystems.com or upon request.

Warranty

Advance Flooring Systems provides a fifteen (15) year product warranty, that the product will be free of manufacturing defects and the product is maintained according to the manufacturers maintenance instructions, subject to fair wear and tear.

FLOORING

Advance

SYSTEMS

Advance Flooring Systems Ltd

email: info@advanceflooringsystems.com

www.advanceflooringsystems.com


EnergoCassette

Electric Ceiling Heating System

EnergoCassette can be used in false ceilings or directly onto the ceiling on supplied brackets. The heater is suitable for a wide range of installations in both dry and wet areas up to 4 m ceiling height. It frees valuable wall and floor surfaces.

The low surface temperature, no greater than 100°C, emits a gentle and comfortable heat, with energy savings up to 30% compared to a convective or hot air systems.

Energotech

ENERGY EFFICIENT HEATING SYSTEMS

How Does It Work?

The EnergoCassette, ENC, emits a gentle low temperature radiant heat to floors, walls and objects in a room. As a result, you can lower the air temperature in the room and still achieve an even and comfortable indoor climate, with energy savings up to 30% compared to a convective or hot air system.

The heater is suitable for low to medium ceiling heights. The stylish and elegant design suits offices, schools, hotels, showrooms, hospitals, hot yoga studios, residential homes etc.

The ceiling mount frees valuable floor and wall spaces, while the heater is protected from contact and damages. An excellent choice of heating system for public areas.

Use the EnergoCassette for a safe, trouble and maintenance free heating system, offering an even and comfortable indoor climate.

Design and Composition

EnergoCassette consists of a galvanized sheet steel plate which is powder coated in white - RAL9016. The backside of the heater, against the ceiling, is insulated. The heater is designed for a long life expectancy with a robust and durable heating element.

Technical Information

Output: 300W or 600W, 230V.

Appliance and protection class: Class I - IP55.

Mounting height: Up to approximately 4 m.

Connection: Fixed installation to a 4 mm² terminal block in the connection box. Connection between several heaters is possible.

Suspension: ENC can be mounted into a suspended ceiling system with visible grids of widths 15 mm or 24 mm. It is however equally suitable for surface mounting onto the ceiling, using the supplied H-bracket.

Type

Output 230V

mm

kg

L

W

H

C/C1

C/C2

ENC300

300W

593

593

45

275

175

5.5

ENC600

600W

1193

593

45

370

270

10.0

Further information regarding mounting and installation can be obtained from our technical brochure.


Temperature control is simply carried out with use of our room thermostats or heating regulators.

20.02.19-01EN

Energotech

Energotech AB | Firmagatan 5 | SE-213 76 Malmö, Sweden | +46 40 866 90 | info@energotech.se | www.energotech.com

The decorative, easy to install LED replacement batten

The FastSet LED decorative batten is the perfect 1:1 replacement for conventional battens. With a wide profile and easy installation it simply fits into all different indoor applications. FastSet can be installed as a standlone luminaire or in a line configuration.

Features & Benefits

Production Specifications

Model

FastSet Surface Mount (SM150)

Type

LED15

LED35

LED60

LED37

LED50

LED80

Equivalent of

2X18W Fluorescent

2X36W Fluorescent

2X58W Fluorescent

2X36W Fluorescent

2X58W Fluorescent

Power

13w

30w

52w

35w

43w

65w

System lumen

1500lm

3500lm

6000lm

3700lm

5000lm

8000lm

Length

602mm

1160mm

1160mm

1440mm

1440mm

1440mm

Power factor

>0.9

Type

Fixed output (PSU)

Diffuser

Ribbed Opal Diffuser

Electrical Class

Class I

Input Voltage

200V-240V, 50/60Hz

CCT

4000K (NW)

CRI

>80

SDCM

3

Beam Angle

116°

Operating Temperature

0ºC - 35ºC

Lifetime (L70)*

50,000 hours

IP /IK rating

IP40/IK03

Mounting Type

Direct to Ceiling, Suspension by wire or via a 2M Rod

Electrical Connection

Central cable entry with loop in loop out push-in terminal block

Housing colour

RAL 9003

Material

Diffuser: PC

Housing: Metal housing

Application

Education Departments, General offices

*When a new fitting reaches 70% of full potential

Flicker free Philips Office Elite Products utilise industry best LED drivers that deliver flicker1 free performance and no stroboscopic effect2 .

Dimming performance is improved with Elite Luminaires by the addition of further bits totalling 32,000 (15bit). These interpolated dimming levels protect against flicker artefacts during light level transitions.

Dimensions

FastSet_Surface_Mounted-SM150C_L602


FastSet_Surface_Mounted-SM150C_L1160


FastSet_Surface_Mounted-SM150C_L1440


580


720



1040 ! 60


1320                 1 60



Dimensions shown above are nominal measurement. Slight variation in dimension may occur in production.

Order Placement Information

Version: October 2021


12ncs

Description

Specification

TBC

SM150C LED15S/840 PSU P15 L602

13w, 1500lm, 4000K, fixed output, 2ft

TBC

SM150C LED35S/840 PSU P15 L1160

30w, 3500lm, 4000K, fixed output, 4ft

TBC

SM150C LED60S/840 PSU P15 L1160

52w, 6000lm, 4000k, fixed output, 4ft

TBC

SM150C LED37S/840 PSU P15 L1440

35w, 3700lm, 4000k, fixed output, 5ft

TBC

SM150C LED50S/840 PSU P15 L1440

43w, 5000lm, 4000k, fixed output, 5ft

TBC

SM150C LED80S/840 PSU P15 L1440

65w, 8000lm, 4000k, fixed output, 5ft

TBC

SM150 Rod Suspension kit

2M Rod suspension Kit (2pcs required per fitting)

TBC

SM150 Wire Suspension kit

2M Wire suspension Kit (2pcs required per fitting)

© 2019 Signify Holding. All rights reserved. Signify reserves the right to make changes in specifications and/or to discontinue any product at any time without notice or obligation and will not be liable for any consequences resulting from the use of this publication. Application images shown may not reflect actual products advertised.

Signify New Zealand Limited

Level 3, 123 Carlton Gore Road

Newmarket, Auckland 1023 New Zealand

T: 0800 454 448 / 0800 4 LIGHT

www.philips.co.nz/lighting

Signify Australia Limited

65 Epping Road, North Ryde NSW 2113

Australia

T: 1300 304 404

www.philips.com.au/lighting

PHILIPS

Lighting

SmartBright LED Downlight DN029B

DN029B G2 LED8/CCT PSR-E D90 CAU

The SmartBright Downlight family is the perfect energy-efficient LED replacement for conventional downlights. It offers three solutions:;Solution 1;The energy-efficient LED replacement for conventional downlights;Essential SmartBright Downlight G3 DN029B-1 – this trailing- and leading-edge dimmable downlight is the ideal functional replacement for conventional downlights. This affordable and easy-to-install fitting delivers high energy savings without compromising on light quality.;Solution 2;Select the right colour temperature to suit your style;This hassle-free Essential SmartBright DN029B-2 downlight provides you with the flexibility to select the perfect colour temperature (Warm White/Cool White/Day Light) for the required use. Integrated with trailing/leading edge dimming capability, this affordable and easy-to-install fitting delivers high energy savings without compromising on light quality.;Solution 3;Enjoy the flexibility of a dimmable fitting without paying more;The Essential SmartBright DN029B-3 step dimming downlight is the perfect hassle-free replacement for conventional dimmable downlights. Adjust the light level directly from the switch and save money with installation as a dimmer unit is not required.

Product data

General Information

Operating and Electrical

Lamp colour code

3000/4000/6500

Input Voltage

220 to 240 V V

Light source

No

Input frequency

50 or 60 Hz

replaceable

Power factor (min.)

0.8

Luminaire light beam spread

100°

Controls and Dimming

Connection

Plug-in connector 2-pole

Dimmable

Yes

Protection class IEC

Safety class II (II)

Mechanical and Housing

Initial chromaticity

(3000K@, 0.4400,

0.40304000K@0.37600.36566500K@0.31300.3370) 6

Housing material

Metal–Plastic

Reflector material

Polycarbonate

Initial input power

7.5 W

Optic material

Polycarbonate

Power consumption

+/-10%

Fixation material

Stainless steel

tolerance

Optical cover/lens

Frosted

finish

Over Time Performance (IEC Compliant)

Overall length

114 mm

Median useful life

30000 h

Overall width

114 mm

L70B50

Overall height

56 mm

Overall diameter

114 mm

Application Conditions

Colour

White

Ambient temperature

-20 to +40 °C

Dimensions (height x

56 x 114 x 114 mm (2.2 x 4.5 x 4.5 in)

range

width x depth)

Product Data

Approval and Application

Full product code

871951425177900

Ingress protection code

IP40/IP54 front

Order product name

DN029B G2 LED8/CCT PSR-E D90 CAU

Mech. impact

IK03 [ 0.3 J]

EAN/UPC – product

8719514251779

protection code

Order code

929002531219

SAP numerator –

1

Initial Performance (IEC Compliant)

quantity per pack

Initial luminous flux

(system flux)

800 lm

Numerator – packs per outer box

12

Initial LED luminaire

106.00 lm/W

SAP material

929002531219

efficacy

SAP net weight (piece)

0.230 kg

Lamp colour temperature

3000 4000 6500 K

Colour Rendering Index

80

[iKOsj J

Dimensional drawing

5

DN029B G2 LED8 3CCT 9W D90 DIM AU

Photometric data


Downlight DN029B G2 LED8 CCT PSR D90

Lifetime



Time (hours)


B50L70 30K LMP


B50L70 30K LED



© 2021 Signify Holding All rights reserved. Signify does not give any representation or warranty as to the accuracy or completeness of the information included herein and shall not be liable for any action in reliance thereon. The information presented in this document is not intended as any commercial offer and does not form part of any quotation or contract, unless otherwise agreed by Signify. Philips and the Philips Shield Emblem are registered trademarks of Koninklijke Philips N.V.

www.lighting.philips.com

composition acoustic wall coverings

Product Specifications


Total Product Weight: Typically 1600gsm

Total Nominal Thickness: io-l2mm

Finish: Available in fine velour or’'Classic" rib finish

Roll Length/Width: Standard 25m x 1,22m

Peel 'n' Stick Tiles:

Tile Size: 600mm x 600mm

Tile Pack: 6 tiles per pack (2.16m2 coverage) (Selected colours available only)

'Hook and Loop': Hook and loop compatible.

A hook of 1.5mm or less is recommended

Fire Ratings:

AS1530 Part 3

Spread of Flame (Index 0-10) 0

Smoke Developed (Index 0-10) 5

  • -    Tested April 2002, CSIRO

AS/NZS 3837

Group 3

Ave Specific Extinction Area: 157.7m2/kg

  • -    Tested August 2004, CSIRO

BS476

  • Part 5:    Class P

  • Part 6:

Index i* = 5.2, Index r2 = 3.2, Index r3 = 0.8

Fire Propagation Index = 9.2

  • Part 7:    Class 1Y

  • -    Tested October 2000, CSIRO

Fastness to Light: Composition is suitable for indoor use only and has been tested to the following standard ISO 105-B02-1994 (Grey Scale 1-5):

Light Fastness Rating 3

Installation: Please refer to our Composition Installation Guide for installation instructions and hints.

Acoustics: Composition’ has been tested to a Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.4 and wi II typical ly reduce reverberated noise by approximately 40% This graph illustrates the acoustic performance of Composition through the frequency range of 100 5000Hz. For copies of the full acoustic test report, please contact Autex. (Tested in accordance to ISO 354)

Composition has been engineered specifically to reduce and control reverberated (echo) noise in building interiors. Composition will also increase the sound transmission performance of walls. When adhered to one side of a wall, Composition provided a 3 STC point increase in the performance of the wall. For specific acoustic requirements, we recommend you consult an acoustic engineer.

Service: For further information about Composition or any other Autex Wall Covering products, please contact your local distributor, an Autex Representative or visit our website at www.autex.co.nz

Care & Maintenance: Please refer to our Autex Wall Coverings Care & Maintenance Guide for cleaning instructions.

How to Specify: "Autex Composition acoustic wall covering with NRC0.4 fixed to the wall substrate in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Please contact Autex or your local distributor".

Composition® is manufactured in New Zealand and is a registered trademark of Autex Industries Ltd. Autex reserves the right to a Iter specifications without prior

AUTEX



AUtKK FdLSflM Ltd 7C2 ?i6^csea:ncM Rrwfcsa^ZCBl taiisU-17^. Aik k hi>< kr^Tlrinrd

W ire *4*KC HVR«:n^ F. » -^Hf lF MIC

Fi i .i m> TCC 4.TR ^ WAHU4.<*JlUie


notification. Autex Industries Ltd is an ISO9001 certified company.

r: Bosca}

XV'I l^i pl p p ’’1-41.» irp

\T -I¥l.' rtrn.i

Pi . -11 KHKT&WI

E > -HU 3 VS 7 LCM

hspioa 1 TOFTS IT

«.^m^iiiparirruu


AutSXPty Ltd 1-^ tarf-Jk M,


All information offered on th is card is given in good faith but without warranty* Autex reserves the right to alter specifications without prior MtiftCMtolt Autex ts an ISO 9001 certified company* Slight variations in colourfrom the samples may be experienced due to the nature of the manufacturing process. Issue: COMP241108

Resene Paint Systems - Fire Ratings

Reserve

10 jMir.f this prr.fa'.jciCMi.^ -. ns*?

The listed Resene paint systems over the listed substrate have been fire tested using a cone calorimeter in accordance with ISO 5660 to determine Group Classification in accordance with New Zealand Building Code (NZBC) Verification Method C/VM2 Appendix A; National Construction Code (NCC) Volume One Specification C1.10 and A2.4 of the Building Code of Australia

Substrate

Undercoat (1 coat unless otherwise stated)

Topcoat (2 coats unless otherwise stated)

Indicated Group No.

Test Report

10mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall Waterborne

Wallboard Sealer (SR 10 sqm/L)

Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen (SR 15 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH4967

10mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall Waterborne

Wallboard Sealer (SR 10 sqm/L)

Resene SpaceCote Flat (SR 15 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH4967

10mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall Waterborne Wallboard Sealer (SR 10 sqm/L)

Resene Zylone Sheen (SR 15 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH4967

10mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall Waterborne Wallboard Sealer (SR 10 sqm/L)

Resene Ceiling Paint (SR 12 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH4967

10mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Sureseal (SR 15 sqm/L)

Resene SpaceCote Flat (SR 14 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

7-593235-CO

10mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Sureseal (SR 15 sqm/L)

Resene Lustacryl (SR 14 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

7-593262-CO

13mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall Waterborne Wallboard Sealer (SR 11 sqm/L)

Resene ClinicalCote Satin (SR 14 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH4925

13mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall Waterborne Wallboard Sealer (SR 11 sqm/L)

Resene ClinicalCote Low Sheen (SR 15 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH4925

13mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall 3 in 1 (SR 2.5 sqm/L)

Resene ClinicalCote Satin (SR 14 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH4925

13mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall 3 in 1 (SR 2.5 sqm/L)

Resene ClinicalCote Low Sheen (SR 15 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH4925

13mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal (SR 6 sqm/L)

Resene ClinicalCote Satin (SR 14 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH4925

13mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal (SR 6 sqm/L)

Resene ClinicalCote Low Sheen (SR 15 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH4925

13mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall 3 in 1 (2 coats) (SR 7 sqm/L)

-

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NZBC)

FAR3981

13mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall 3 in 1 (SR 7 sqm/L)

Resene Zylone Sheen VOC Free (SR 16 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NZBC)

FAR3981

13mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall 3 in 1 (SR 7 sqm/L)

Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen (SR 16 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NZBC)

FAR3981

13mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Waterborne Smooth

Surface Sealer (SR 12 sqm/L)

Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen (SR 16 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NZBC)

FAR3981

13mm Paperfaced Plasterboard

Resene Broadwall Waterborne

Wallboard Sealer (SR 10 sqm/L)

Resene Ceiling Paint (SR 12 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NZBC)

FAR3981

6mm Fibre Cement Board

Resene Quick Dry (SR 12 sqm/L)

Resene Uracryl 802 (SR 16 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH5139*

6mm Fibre Cement Board

Resene Quick Dry (SR 12 sqm/L)

Resene Uracryl 803 (SR 16 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH5139*

6mm Fibre Cement Board

Resene Sureseal (SR 12 sqm/L)

Resene Uracryl 802 (SR 16 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH5139*

6mm Fibre Cement Board

Resene Sureseal (SR 12 sqm/L)

Resene Uracryl 803 (SR 16 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH5139*

8mm MDF

Resene Quick Dry (SR 12 sqm/L)

Resene Fireguard (SR 3.5 sqm/L)

3 (NZBC) 3 (NCC)

FH5137

8mm MDF

Resene Quick Dry (SR 12 sqm/L)

Resene Fireguard (SR 3.5 sqm/L), Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen (SR 14 sqm/L)

3 (NZBC) 3 (NCC)

FH5137

18mm MDF

Resene Quick Dry (SR 12 sqm/L)

Resene Fireguard (SR 3.5 sqm/L)

3 (NZBC) 3 (NCC)

FH5137

18mm MDF

Resene Quick Dry (SR 12 sqm/L)

Resene Fireguard (SR 3.5 sqm/L), Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen (SR 14 sqm/L)

3 (NZBC) 3 (NCC)

FH5137

9mm thick 'A' grade plywood

Resene Aquaclear Semi-Gloss

Resene Aquaclear SemiGloss (3 coats SR 12 sqm/L)

3 (NZBC)

FAR3981

≥ 26mm Metrapanel

Pre-primed

Resene Fireguard (SR 1 sqm/L), Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen (SR 16 sqm/L)

1-S (NZBC) 1 (NCC)

FH5334

Notes:

Test reports give the Group rating determined by application of a paint system to a given substrate thickness. The same Group rating applies to the paint system applied to greater thicknesses of the substrate given in the test report.

The Group rating of a given substrate coated with a standard 3 coat acrylic paint system will be the same as the uncoated substrate.

FH5139*

It is considered that the resulting Group Classifications achieved by paint systems on fibre cement substrates would not be adversely affected if applied to a concrete substrate. Paint system applied at coverage rates not less than the minimum specified for the fibre cement substrate.

31 Jan 2014

10


SLIDING & FOLDING


SLIDING AND FOLDING

FOR SLIDING FRAMELESS GLASS DOORS - INFRONT


EKU CLIPO 16 GPK/GPPK




  • >    Version:                Model GPK with top glass retaining

profile and visible bottom guide with zero clearance.

Model GPPK with top and bottom glass retaining profile and concealed bottom guide with zero clearance, with soft closing mechanism (optional)

  • > Door height (mm):      ≤1400

  • > Door width (mm):      ≤1000

  • > Glass thickness (mm): 6

  • > Door stopper:         Top door stopper

  • > Material:                  Plastic

  • > Running gear:           Top running, 2 rollers

  • >    Running gear guided by:Friction bearing mounted roller: Plastic,

  • >    Adjustment facility (mm): +2/-1 on running gear

  • >    Installation:              Running gear without tools

(quick fixing system), guide for screw fixing without glass preparation


Running gear installation



Minimum door width for one soft close mechanisms - 400 mm


Minimum door width for two soft close mechanisms - 600 mm


HAFELE


Installation dimensions


Clipo 16 GPK; with glass fixing profile at the top




Clipo 16 GPPK; with glass fixing profile top and bottom

Door overlap


A

A+16

2


A = Internal cabinet width H = Internal cabinet height B = Door width


Dimensions in mm Dimensional data not binding. We reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.


Revision: 1.0


Caroma

Luna Cleanflush™

Vitreous China 4.5/3 litre Dual Flush Wall Faced

Close-Coupled Rimless Toilet Suite


Date: February 2017


Supersedes all previous issues


3.19.2



Caroma

Luna Cleanflush™

Vitreous China 4.5/3 litre Dual Flush Wall Faced Close-Coupled Rimless Toilet Suite

cleanflush


Combining a contoured design with rimless pan technology, the Luna Cleanflush™ is a superior flushing system suitable for domestic and commercial applications. Incorporating several patented technologies: Caroma Flow Splitter™, Caroma Flow Balancer™ and Caroma Uni-Orbital® Connector, the Cleanflush pan is innovative and the next evolution in toilets. The Flow Splitter evenly flows water around the top of the bowl to meet at the Flow Balancer which directs the water powerfully into the sump, reducing the need for brush cleaning. The rimless pan is easy to clean and unlike traditional pan profiles, provides full visibility of any grime build up. Caroma Cleanflush™ provides a cleaner clean for peace of mind.

Pan:               Luna Cleanflush™ wall faced close coupled 4.5 litre full flush rimless pan.

Traps:             Universal trap for S or P-trap installations.

Cisterns:          Universal close coupled cistern – has a free fitting lid and is suitable for domestic

and light commercial applications. Available with internal overflow. Available in either back entry or bottom inlet options.

Cistern inlet stop valve and inlet connection is concealed within the cistern and is included (back entry version only). Vandal Resistant Conversion Kit – A simple to install conversion is available for the standard mechanism to lock lid onto the cistern, recommended for use in heavy use commercial areas. Code No.750109. Important: Working pressure minimum 30kPa to maximum 1000kPa flow pressure. Rain water tank compliant. Accurate wall setout for B.S.P. 1/2" Nipple water inlet connection is essential.

Fixing:            The cistern is fixed directly to the pan with a robust concealed base fixing system

without the need for wall fixing.

Seats:            The Xena soft close quick release thermoset toilet seat is provided as standard

with the Urbane Cleanflush™ suite. See chapter 5.01 SEATS of the Caroma Technical Manual for further details.


Colours:         White only.


Installation:      The installation of the toilet suite shall be in accordance with the normal minimum

drainline grade requirements in AS/NZS 3500.2.

Dimensions:     All dimensions are in millimetres and are subject to normal manufacturing variations.

Caroma pursues a policy of continuing improvement in design and performance of its products. The right is therefore reserved to vary specifications without notice.


373

150


connector supplied - up to 50mm sideways adjustment)


Luna Cleanflush™ Wall Faced

Close Coupled Toilet Suite with

Xena Soft Close Seat          Code No.

4.5/3 litre Bottom Inlet

Internal Overflow                  844810

4.5/3 litre Back Entry

Internal Overflow                  844820


50


Waste

outlet


Uni-Orbital® connector can be positioned anywhere in shaded area up to 50mm.


350


Note: All height dimensions to underside of pan, make allowance for bedding when installing.

Bedding: The pan should be fixed to the floor with a sand cement mixture of 3:1 to a depth of 60mm. Do not use lime or fast drying cement in the bedding mixture. When bedded the back of the foot of the pan should be approximately 10mm above the finished floor.

Bracket fixing: The pan should be bedded with an acetic cured silicone sealant and fixed with the D82 Fixing Brackets supplied.



Pan seal


D82 Concealed Fixing Bracket



Caroma Industries Limited ABN 35 000 189 499

Sales Offices in all States.

Caroma

design for life


Date September 2014


17.14


Cosmo


Vitreous China Wall Basin

Basin Size: 500mm x 440mm (nominal)


&


Contemporary style doesn’t have to mean edges and angles, nor does it have to cost the earth. The Caroma Cosmo wall basin is surprisingly economical whilst offering elegant curves and a very modern aesthetic. Due to its compact size, a wall basin has always been a practical choice. With the addition of a shroud, it becomes a beautiful one as well. The basin is suitable for domestic, commercial and accessible applications X complying to AS 1428.1-2009 Amd. 1 using standard Caroma plastic traps.*

Tap Holes:       Basin available in: one taphole – centre option Code No.861515; three taphole

option Code No.861535.

Tapware - other All electronic and basin care mixers referred to in section 19 comply to than sole AS1428.1-2009 Amd. 1 installations other than sole occupancy unit when occupancy unit: matched with this basin.

Tapware - sole Recommended tapware for sole occupancy unit for compliance to AS1428.1-2009 occupancy unit: Amd. 1; Electronic Tapware: Designo, Designo Solar, Mix Neu and Celis.

See section 19 for further details.

Tapware is shown for photographic purposes only

Waste Outlet: Chrome flush fitting waste and white plug supplied, suitable for a 40mm trap connection. Alternative waste options are available — Chrome grate waste and white plug Code No.687328C, Vandal Resistant Flush Fitting Plug and Chrome Waste Code No.687141, Covered Plug and Waste Code No.687142 and Vandal Resistant Covered Chrome Plug and Waste Code No.687143.

Shroud:         Shroud, Code No.639950, completely conceals P-trap waste pipe fittings. Use

D.210 fixing clip suitable with D.200 bracket option and 40mm Caroma plastic P-trap Code No.102112. Note: It is essential for the installation of the shroud to the basin that clearance is provided for the shroud in the plumbing setout from water inlet pipes and connections.

Bowl Capacity: 4 litres to overflow.

Overflow:        Overflow available only. Designed for maximum tap flow rate of 15 litres/minute.

Fixing:           D.200 Basin Fixing Kit – Supplied. Bolts directly to the finished wall.

Colours:        White.

D.200 basin fixing kit hole centre positions


D.200 Basin Fixing Kit

D.210 Concealed

Fixing Clip Assembly included with shroud


Inlet position to allow for shroud


Shroud

Option

Code No. 639950



Finished Floor



Free access space requirement


Finished Floor


Suitable for installation to comply to Australian Standard AS 1428.1-2009 Amendment No.1 Design for access and mobility

METHVEN

GLIDE BASIN MIXER

050




  • •    Solid brass construction for longevity

  • •    Twin stud mounting for secure basin installation

  • •    Stainless steel flexible inlet hoses

  • •    Fixed cast spout fitted with aerator

  • •    5 star WELS rating on 5l/m

GLBCP

GLBBK

Chrome

Matte Black

https://www.methven.com/nz/glide-basin-mixer

FREEPHONE 0800 804 222 | FAX ORDERS 0800 805 222 | EMAIL CUSTOMERCARE@NZ.METHVEN.COM methven.com


Tork® Matic® Hand Towel Roll Dispenser


Article

551000

Material

Plastic

System

H1 - Hand towel roll system

Height

372 mm

Width

337 mm

Depth

203 mm

Colour

White


The Tork Matic® Hand Towel Roll Dispenser in Elevation Design delivers easy maintenance to keep busy washrooms functioning and reduces consumption with one-at-a-time sheet dispensing. Tork Elevation dispensers have a functional, modern design, that makes a lasting impression on your guests.

www.tork.co.nz

Shipping data


Consumer unit

Transport unit

EAN

7322540348941

Pieces

1

1

Consumer units

1

Height

372 mm

417 mm

Width

203 mm

209 mm

Length

337 mm

340 mm

Volume

0 dm3

29.6 dm3

Net weight

3180 g

3.2 kg

Gross weight

3680 g

3.7 kg

Packing material

Carton

Carton



Choose a refill that suits you


Tork® Matic® Soft Hand Towel Roll Advanced

290067

Tork® Matic® Extra Soft Hand Towel Roll Premium

290016

Tork® Matic Extra Long Hand Towel Roll Universal

290059


Alternative products



552200    559030    558038


Contact

New Zealand

Sales & Support Centre

0800 523 565

Free phone 0800 523 565

Private Bag 93100

Henderson, Auckland 0650

customerservice@asaleocare.com



SUPREME CLASSIC SOAP


Automatic Foam Soap Dispenser


  • ■    Hygienic hands free operation

  • ■    Economic and efficient

  • ■    Simple refill replacement



SUPREME CLASSIC SOAP DISPENSER

The Supreme Classic Soap Dispenser is a hands free automatic wall mount foam soap dispenser, available in two stylish finishes. The foam soap is dermatologically tested and provides smooth velvety foam suitable for sensitive and dry skin. Foam Soap refills are quick and easy to replace.

COLOUR OPTIONS


Silver & Black




SPECIFICATIONS

Operation Capacity Portion Control Power Dimensions Warranty Refill

Automatic Non-Touch

1100 ml - Up to 2750 portions 0.3-0.4 ml

Requires 4 x C size batteries 282H x 124W x 115D mm 12 months excludes battery

Foam Soap - dermatologically tested

SPL LIMITED I PO Box 437. Cambridge 3450 | P. 07 823 5790 I F. 07 823 5792 I E. officefflsplwashrooms.co.nz I www aplwathroomi co nz


Tork® Mini Jumbo Toilet Roll Dispenser



Article

555000

Material

Plastic

System

T2 - Mini jumbo toilet system

Height

275 mm

Width

345 mm

Depth

132 mm

Colour

White


Tork® Mini Jumbo Toilet Roll Dispensers hold up to 400m of toilet paper, all in a compact dispenser perfect for areas with limited space.


www.tork.co.nz


Compact size perfect for areas with limited space

Reduce waste with the stub roll feature

Simple and intuitive to service with semi transparent window


Shipping data


Consumer unit

Transport unit

EAN

7322540354843

Pieces

1

1

Consumer units

1

Height

275 mm

284 mm

Width

132 mm

139 mm

Length

345 mm

352 mm

Volume

0 dm3

13.9 dm3

Net weight

927 g

0.9 kg

Gross weight

1000 g

1.2 kg

Packing material

Carton

Carton



Choose a refill that suits you

Tork® Extra Soft Mini Jumbo Toilet Roll Premium

Tork® Mini Jumbo Toilet Roll

Universal

Tork® Recycled Mini Jumbo Toilet Roll Advanced

Alternative products



555500    557500    554030


Contact

New Zealand

Sales & Support Centre

0800 523 565

Free phone 0800 523 565

Private Bag 93100

Henderson, Auckland 0650

customerservice@asaleocare.com


IKON PRODUCT INFORMATION

12-14 Charlies Way, Frankton, Hamilton, New Zealand, 3204

Phone 0800 83 83 84 Fax 0800 83 83 85

orders@ikon.nz www.ikon.nz

iKoni


Centurio 1.5 IK723143I (Intergrated/Laser edge)

$629.00

Description

Ikon are excited to be able to now offer stainless steel sinks with iKolor-ed wastes and overflows. All you need to do is:

For this specific sink, we recommend a double (waste only). Click on the link then continue with the following instructions:

For any advice before placing your final order, please don’t hesitate to contact us.

This product has a lifetime warranty from the date of original purchase. For more information please refer to our FAQ’s section on sink warranties

CLICK HERE FOR THE LATEST BROCHURE

Additional information

Cabinet size

60cm

Main bowl depth

180mm

Images



[wcsp_cross_sell orderby="rand" order="ASC" product_num="5" display_columns="3" title="Hello title.." product_id="Product ID"]

METHVEN

GLIDE SINK MIXER


CONSTRUCTION: Brass body

CARTRIDGE TYPE: 25 mm ceramic

SUPPLY: Suitable for mains pressure only INLET CONNECTIONS: 1/2 “ BSP Female WORKING PRESSURE: 150 - 1000kPa

DIMENSIONS FOR FITTING: 35 - 38 mm diameter hole

OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 5 °C - 80 °C

GLKCP

Chrome

GLKBK

Matte Black

https://www.methven.com/nz/glide-sink-mixer

FREEPHONE 0800 804 222 | FAX ORDERS 0800 805 222 | EMAIL CUSTOMERCARE@NZ.METHVEN.COM methven.com

NAENAE COLLEGE ADMINISTRATION

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011


MECHANICAL SERVICES - VENTILATION


Drawing Index


CONSENT ISSUE


Prepared By:



SHEET

SHEET TITLE

M-01

Cover

M-02

Legend

M-03

Equipment Schedule and Ventilation Summary

M-04

System Layout


General Notes

  • -    All work to comply with current edition of New Zealand Building Code (NZBC), relevant standards and statutory requirements for mechanical ventilation. Work to be carried out as per industry best practice and to good workmanship.

  • -    This mechanical ventilation specification is in accordance with the requirements of NZBC G4/AS1. To ensure compliance, outdoor airflow rates are calculated as per NZS 4303 Ventilation Rate Procedure, and exhaust airflow rates as per AS1668.2. If at a later time, space use changes and/or new contaminants are introduced, then this design will need to be re-evaluated by Simx.

  • -    Equipment locations and system layouts are a guide only, based on the information provided at the time, and without the benefit of an onsite inspection. Contractor to coordinate with other trades to ensure that the systems will fit in the designated spaces, confirm all required products and prepare shop drawings.

  • -    All dimensions are in millimetres (mm), duct dimensions are the air stream sizes, and other dimensions are the nominal sizes unless otherwise specified (e.g. face size, neck size). Refer to product dimensional data and installation manual when determining space requirements.

  • -    Requested fan static pressure is an estimate only, based on the pressure drop allowance across the index run of the particular system. Where the actual system layout is expected to vary significantly from the proposed layout thereby affecting airflow delivery, the contractor is to verify fan suitability with Simx.

  • -    Systems to be designed, installed, and commissioned as per AS/NZS 3666.1, with specific requirements as per AS 1668.2 and other applicable standards, using materials and methodology to ensure compliance with NZBC B2 Durability. Systems to be maintained to ensure compliance with NZBC H1 Energy Efficiency (clause H1.3.6).

  • -    Ductwork to be constructed and installed as per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, AS 4254 (parts 1 and 2 as applicable), and other applicable standards.

  • -    Weatherproofing of roof and external wall penetrations to comply with NZBC E2/AS1. Penetration details to be prepared by architect or registered building practitioner.

  • -    Firestopping to be specified and installed where components penetrate fire walls, floors and ceilings. Smoke dampers to be specified and installed as required.

  • -    Acoustic dampening to be specified and installed where components penetrate acoustic rated building elements, and/or system noise exceeds space acoustic requirements. Vibration dampening to be installed as required.

  • -    Seismic restraints to be specified and installed for mechanical plant and systems in accordance with the requirements of NZS 4219.

  • -    Fans to be accessible for service and maintenance as per New Zealand Electrical Regulations. All other plant, equipment and components to be accessible for service and maintenance as per AS/NZS 3666.2.

  • -    All electrical work to comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 3000 and other applicable electrical standards. Wiring and additional required controls to be provided by the contractor.


K K 3

Supply Diffuser

Supply Diffuser (3-way/2-way opp/2-way cnr)

Swirl Diffuser

Il                  1      1               ~ll

Slot Diffuser w/ Plenum

Exhaust/Return Grille

Louvre Grille

c

Wall Cowl

Roof Cowl

Wye Branch

Branch Take-off

Double Branch Take-off

Bevelled Junction

[^

Tee Junction

Bend

Transition

Offset Transition

Manual Damper

Back-draught Shutter

ea (^

Circular duct cross-section (towards/away)

Rectangular duct cross-section (towards/away)



Rigid Duct

Sem-rigid Duct

Flexible Duct

Inline Axial Fan

Inline Mixed Flow Fan

Inline Centrifugal Fan

Ceiling Fan

Wall Fan

Roof-mounted Fan

Heat Recovery Unit

Air Filter

Air Filter + Box

Silencer (Circular)

Silencer (Rectangular)

Rangehood


Flexible duct recommended airflow

Size (mm)

Airflow (L/s)

ø150

25 – 54

ø200

55 – 96

ø250

97 – 152

ø300

153 - 220

ø350

221 - 300

ø400

301 - 390


Simx Limited

1 Haliday Place, East Tamaki, Auckland 2013 PO Box 14347, Panmure, Auckland 1741

P: +64 9 259 1660 | F: +64 9 259 1661

technical@simx.co.nz | www.simx.co.nz


B

27/10/21

Remove passive transfer system, add door grilles.

AM

A

26/10/21

Original Issue

AM

REV.

DATE

DESCRIPTION

BY

CLIENT:



PROJECT:

Naenae College Administration



Duct Reference Tag (sizes shown are examples only)

Ø2 EA

Function

ø200           Circular duct air stream diame

300x150       Rectangular duct air stream si

Function:       OA - Outdoor Air

EA - Exhaust Air

SA - Supply Air

Lining:          N - Nude

0 /

■J

ter in mm

ze in mm

RA - Return Air

TA - Transfer Air

I - Insulated


Equipment Reference Tag

(supply fan example shown)

Supply Air Fan

Fan 1

SAF – 01

100 L/s

Total Airflow Rate


Other Reference Tag

SAF - Supply Air Fan

ATT – Attenuator/Silencer

EAF - Exhaust Air Fan

AF - Air Filter

TAF - Transfer Air Fan

MD - Manual Damper

HRU - Heat Recovery Unit

BD - Back-draught Shutter


ADDRESS / LEGAL DESCRIPTION:

910 High Street, Avalon, Lower Hutt 5011


SHEET TITLE:

Legend


DESIGNED:

AM

REVIEWED: -

DATE:

27/10/2021

SCALE:

NTS

REV.:

B

SHEET:

M-02


FAN SCHEDULE

Ref.

Serving

Type

Manufacturer

Model

V/Ph/Hz

Motor (kW)

FLC (A)

Requested Duty

Order Code

Operation

*Control

EAF-01

WC1, WC2, and WC3

Inline – Mixed Flow

Simx

IMF-150SIL-EC

230/1/50

0.073

0.48

85 L/s @ 120 Pa

FAN6858

Continuous

Speed controller for commissioning (supplied), master HVAC control system with isolation switch for service and maintenance (by others).

GRILLE, DIFFUSER, & COWL SCHEDULE

Ref.

Type

Manufacturer

Model

Nom. Neck Size (mm)

Neck Adaptor/ Plenum Box

Airflow (L/s)

Order Code

Comments

E1

Ceiling Grille

Simx

Eggcrate Round

Ø150

-

25-35

DCT2608

w/ inbuilt damper

RC1

Roof Cowl

Simx

General Purpose

Ø150

-

85

DCT0172

c/w 0.5m HPDE tube + EPDM flashing

DG1

Door Grille

Simx

DRAG

300x300

-

-

DCT3486

c/w 2-pieces for both sides of door

MD

Manual Damper

-

-

Ø150

-

-

-

Part of duct system (by others)

VENTILATION SUMMARY

Room

Floor Area m²

Number of Fixtures

Number of Occupants

Ventilation Type

Ventilation Rate (L/s)

Minimum Airflow (L/s)

Design Airflow (L/s)

Comments

Per Room

Per Sqm

Per Fixture

Per Person

WC1

1.98

1

-

Extract

-

10

25

-

25

25

Make-up air via door grille DG1 and 25mm under-door gap.

WC2

1.98

1

-

Extract

-

10

25

-

25

25

Make-up air via door grille DG1 and 25mm under-door gap.

WC3

3.47

1

-

Extract

-

10

25

-

35

35

Make-up air via door grille DG1 and 25mm under-door gap.

Simx Limited

&          ^* 11                  1 Haliday Place, East Tamaki, Auckland 2013

<   T  v*imv    PO Box 14347, Panmure, Auckland 1741

P: +64 9 259 1660 | F: +64 9 259 1661

technical@simx.co.nz | www.simx.co.nz

CLIENT:

PROJECT:

Naenae College Administration

ADDRESS / LEGAL DESCRIPTION:

910 High Street, Avalon, Lower Hutt 5011

SHEET TITLE:

Equipment Schedule & Ventilation Summary

DESIGNED:

AM

REVIEWED: -

DATE:

27/10/2021

RESOLVE1?

B

27/10/21

Remove passive transfer system, add door grilles.

AM

■ acHiitcn

SCALE:

NTS

REV.:

B

SHEET:

M-03

A

26/10/21

Original Issue

AM

REV.

DATE

DESCRIPTION

BY

Duct Reference



GROUND FLOOR NTS


Legend

1_______ Rigid

Semi-rigid ■  Flexible

Colour

{______)  Outdoor/Supply Air

1______}  Exhaust/Return Air

1______} Transfer Air

Size, Function, & Lining

Air stream size

Ø20

EA/N

Function:

OA - Outdoor Air

EA - Exhaust Air

SA - Supply Air

*Lining:

N - Nude

RA - Return Air

TA - Transfer Air

I - Insulated

*Refer to Drawing Notes


Drawing Notes:

€^ Simx


Simx Limited

1 Haliday Place, East Tamaki, Auckland 2013 PO Box 14347, Panmure, Auckland 1741

P: +64 9 259 1660 | F: +64 9 259 1661

technical@simx.co.nz | www.simx.co.nz

CLIENT:

RESOLVE'7/

B

27/10/21

Remove passive transfer system, add door grilles.

AM

• ■CHITtCO

A

26/10/21

Original Issue

AM

REV.

DATE

DESCRIPTION

BY


PROJECT:

ADDRESS / LEGAL DESCRIPTION:

SHEET TITLE:

DESIGNED:

REVIEWED:

DATE:

Naenae College Administration

910 High Street, Avalon, Lower Hutt 5011

System Layout

AM

-

27/10/2021

SCALE:

REV.:

SHEET:

NTS

B

M-04



Melteca® is a tough melamine surface laminated to Superfine® particleboard or Lakepine medium density fibreboard (MDF) to provide a double faced, pre-finished decorative panel.

Melteca is available in five different finishes and a range of colours, patterns and woodgrains. These are presented in the Melteca colour brochure and on the Melteca website.

COMPOSITION

Sheets of melamine impregnated overlay are bonded to both sides of either Superfine particleboard or Lakepine medium density fibreboard substrate under heat and pressure. The resin on the top surface of the overlay cures, forming a tough, stain resistant finish.

Sheets are identified by Melteca branding, including colour and other manufacturing details along the panel edges. Packs are clearly identified with the distinctive brand label.

USES

  • •    Interior use only

  • •    Kitchen, bathroom and laundry cabinets

  • •    Furniture – commercial and residential

  • •    Wall units

  • •    Bar fronts

  • •    Shelving

  • •    Wardrobes

  • •    Shop fittings and displays

  • •    Wall linings (provided specific installation instructions are followed).

For uses other than those specified in this section, and for use in the construction industry, please contact Laminex New Zealand on 0800 303 606.

SPECIFYING

When specifying Melteca, include the following information:

Product characteristics

Colours

Refer to the Melteca brochure or the Melteca website

Finish

Refer to the Melteca Availability Guide at melteca.co.nz

Sheet size

Refer to the Melteca Availability Guide at melteca.co.nz

Thickness

In mm, refer to the Melteca Availability Guide at melteca.co.nz

Substrate

Lakepine MDF, Lakepine MRZero, Superfine Particleboard, Superfine MR Particleboard

Edge finish

1mm or 2mm edgetape. Refer to the Melteca Availability Guide at melteca.co.nz

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS Edge finishing

The edges of Melteca panels should be finished with a PVC or ABS edgetape solution. For the range of thicknesses, colours and finishes available, refer to the Melteca Availability Guide at melteca.co.nz

Note: Any exposed substrate must be sealed before service.

Load bearing applications

Melteca is suitable for load bearing applications such as shelving, tables, desks, store displays, shop fittings, and kitchen cabinets.

When designing these load bearing items the tables below can be used to establish the correct support spacings to achieve an acceptable deflection for a given loading.

Shelf loading span tables*

Single span shelf

Shelf Loadings

Board thickness

kg/m2**

12mm

16mm

18mm


Multiple span shelf

Shelf Loadings kg/m2**

Board thickness

12mm

16mm

18mm

25

890

1190

1330

50

630

840

940

75

510

680

770

100

440

590

670

200

310

420

470

300

250

340

380

400

220

290

330

500

210

270

310


25

690

930

1040

50

550

740

830

75

480

640

720

100

440

580

660

200

310

420

470

300

250

340

380

400

220

290

330

500

210

270

310

*Spans based on creep factor of 2 with final deflection of 0.006 x span **Loadings uniformly distributed.


Performance data

Properties

Test method

Test results

Resistance to wear

Taber Abraser ISO 4586-2 (6) Din 53799(4.66) AS/NZS 4266.20

Patterns>150 cycles to 50%

Patterns removal colours>400 cycles to substrates.

Resistance to staining

Liquid Agents for 16 hours ISO 4586 (15)

DIN 53799 (4.14.2)

AS/NZS 4266.25

No visible marks

Resistance to dry heat

180°C for 20 minutes

ISO 4586.2 (8)

DIN 53799 (4.9)

AS/NZS 4266.26

No cracks

Resistance to cracks

70°C oven for 24 hours ISO 4586.2 (24)

DIN 53799 (4.7.3)

AS/NZS 4266.24

No cracks

Steam resistance

Steam for 2 hours ISO 4586.2 (24) DIN 53799 (4.11.2)

AS/NZS 4266.23

No cracks or blisters

Melteca complies with the requirements of AS/NZS 1859.3 2005

LIMITATIONS

  • •    Melteca is not intended for use in an exterior situation

  • •    Surface protection (mouse pad) should be provided at regular to high use computer work stations

  • •    Do not use Melteca in constant wear situations such as sink bench tops, high use shop counters, bar tops or restaurant tables

  • •    Melteca must not be used in high humidity or wet areas such as saunas or showers

  • •    The Melteca substrate must not come in contact with any liquid. Failure to keep dry will affect the performance of the panel

  • •    Health and Safety Precautions (Refer Health and Safety section of this document).

HANDLING AND STORAGE

  • •    Melteca is a high quality product and must be handled accordingly

  • •    Do not slide panels over each other or across sharp or gritty surfaces

  • •    Melteca must be stored away from moisture, heat and sunlight

  • •    Sheets must be flat stacked on aligned bearers or gluts

  • •    Bearers or gluts must be of uniform thickness and must extend across the full width of the stack. See Fig 1.

    Fig 1. Ensure that the gluts run the full pack width

Melteca must be protected from the weather, dampness and direct wetting and should be stored inside.

Fungal and insect resistance

Melteca is resistant to fungal decay and insect attack providing the moisture content of the panels does not exceed 18%.

FIRE PERFORMANCE

The Group Number Classifications below were generated from tests carried out and data recorded in accordance with the test procedure described in ISO 5660 2002 – Reaction-to-Fire – Part 1: Heat Release & Part 2: Smoke Production Rate, for the purposes of determination of the Group Classification in accordance with the New Zealand Building Code Verification Method C/VM2 Appendix A

Melteca bonded to Lakepine Medium Density Fibreboard (MDF) substrate

Group Number Classification 3

Please note: Indicative testing has indicated a change in substrate to Lakepine MRZero or Superfine particleboard (Standard or MR) will not alter the Group Number Classification.

Effects of heat

Precautions must be taken to ensure that Melteca is kept clear of nearby heat sources, such as free standing fire places

and space heaters, wall ovens, hot plates etc. The structural life of the substrate may be impaired if temperatures exceed 50°C for prolonged periods.

Melteca can withstand short term exposure to temperatures of 65°C above ambient without fear of ignition.

Manufacturers of heat appliances, referenced above must be consulted to ensure that correct clearances and ventilation are provided for.

DURABILITY

When stored, handled, used and maintained in accordance with this document, Melteca will meet the durability requirements of the NZBC B2.3.1(c) and carries a 7 year limited warranty.

Laminex New Zealand will not be liable to any person for any product failure if the conditions as to storage, handling, use and maintenance of Melteca as outlined within this document are not complied with.

DIMENSIONS

Lakepine substrate (i)

Thickness (mm)

9

12

16

18

25

30

Weight (kgs/m2)

7.15

9.4

12.24

13.72

18.4

22

Superfine substrate (ii)

Thickness (mm)

9

12

16

18

25

30

Weight (kgs/m2)

6.34

8.32

10.96

12.28

16.4

19

(i) Includes Lakepine MDF, Lakepine MRZero (ii) Includes Superfine and Superfine MR

Sheet tolerances (mm)

Length and width

+/- 2.00

Thickness (on Lakepine MDF)

+ 0.35 - 0

Thickness (on Superfine particleboard)

+ 0.40 - 0

Squareness (maximum difference between diagonals)

3.00

Straightness (maximum deviation in plane along the edge)

1.00 per metre

WORKING RECOMMENDATIONS Machining

To obtain the best results when machining Melteca, avoid excessive speed rates.

Guidelines for cutting Melteca

Saw diameter (mm)

250

300

350

400

Saw RPM

4600

3800

3300

2900

# of teeth

80

96

108

120

Rim speed (m/sec)

47

56

66

75

Max feed rate (m/min)

43

52

58

65

As these are examples taken from various tooling manufacturers, please consult with your tooling supplier to ensure safe operating speeds are used.

A saw fitted with a scribing saw or hollow ground saw blade will produce the best result directly from the sawing equipment. This will eliminate further work prior to edge finishing.

However, sophisticated machinery is not always necessary to achieve quality edge finishes, A sharp bench saw buzzer or router combination or for the home handyperson, a fine tooth panel saw, hand-planer combination can be used to give excellent results.

In both applications, panels should be cut slightly oversize and then edges planed to final dimensions. To avoid excessive breakout when hand-sawing, keep saw on a low angle to the sheet, provide adequate support to the sheets and do not force saw-blades through the cut.

Gluing

The surface of Melteca is made to withstand resistance to adhesion, however, this can cause problems with some glues. For gluing of Melteca to Melteca surfaces,

abrading of the surface is required and the use of a Melamine adhesive such as Woodlock 3100 is recommended.

For using as a wall lining, framing must be dry and a suitable wall board adhesive such as Maxbond should be used after first sanding the surface to provide a key for adhesive. Expansion joints should also be allowed for.

Fastening

Selected screws

Always use screws specifically designed for use with medium density fibre board or particle board e.g. Twinfast-screws or Super-screws. Drill a pilot hole slightly beyond the full depth of the screw penetration. Do not over- tighten screws.

A drop of adhesive applied to the screw thread will increase holding power.

Face screwing

To avoid surface lifting, screws must not penetrate more than two thirds of panel thickness, e.g. 16mm panel = 10.5mm maximum penetration.

Pilot hole diameters for Superfine particleboard

Screw gauge

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Pilot Hole

Dia in mm

1.0

1.25

1.45

1.6

1.65

1.95

2.1

2.25

Pilot hole diameters for Lakepine MDF

Screw gauge

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Pilot Hole

Dia in mm

1

2

2.4

2.6

2.7

3.0

3.3

3.5

GUIDELINES FOR CNC MACHINING OF MELTECA® PANELS

Panel cutting

Cutter type

12mm Spiral cutter

4mm Spiral cutter

Cutter speed RPM

18000 rpm

18000 rpm

Max feed rate (m/min)

2.0 m/min

1.0 m/min

Recommended cutters are Vortex 1200 two flute upcut finishing spiral type or equal.

Panel boring

Cutter type

20mm Forstner bit

8mm Brad point

5mm Brad point

Cutter speed RPM

4000 rpm

4000 rpm

4000rpm

Max feed rate (m/min)

1.3 m/min

1.0 m/min

1.5 m/min

Recommended max feed rate

47

56

66

Chip load information

The chip load is a measurement of the thickness of material removed by each cutting edge during a cut. This is a valuable piece of information which can then be used to calculate new setups.

Calculations are as follows: chip load = Feed Rate (millimetres per minute) / (RPM x 2 Flutes) Chip Load = 0.4233

Chip loads are based on material thickness of average size for the cutting edge length of the tool. These recommendations do not apply to thicker materials or tools with long cutting edge lengths. These chip loads are only a recommended starting point and may not accommodate all circumstances.

We would strongly encourage you to consult your tool supplier directly on new tool applications.

Cutter setup and cutting tips

Care should be taken to ensure that the scriber tips of the cutter are set below the lower face of the panel to avoid chipping of the lower face veneer.

For fine finishing an onion skin cut* finish is recommended and for small pieces such as small drawer backs and cabinet rails, these should be tabbed to adjacent parts to hold these in place during the cutting process. Tabs need be only thick enough and long enough to hold 0.3mm, 15-20mm long. Once the cutting is completed the tabs may be snapped off and if necessary, a light sanding to remove.

EDGE FINISHING

It is recommended that all edges of panels be edge finished.

Edgetape for Melteca boards must be applied with an edge banding machine as cold pressing with contact adhesive is unsatisfactory. Edgetape is available for all Melteca colours in a range of material types, sizes and finishes. For details on this, refer to the Melteca availability guide at melteca.co.nz

  • •    Edgetape comes primed for hot melt glue application or preglued for heat re-activated machines

  • •    Apply at feed rates and temperatures as per the mechanical edge bander and adhesive supplier’s recommendations

  • •    A range of laser edgetapes are available for selected Melteca colours, refer to the Melteca Availability Guide for information.

CARE AND CLEANING

Regular cleaning requires only a wipe down with warm soapy water, follow up with dry cloth. The use of streak-free glass cleaner and a soft cloth can also maintain the surface.

NEVER USE ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ON MELTECA FOR ANY REASON:

Abrasive cleaners, such as

• Jif

• Neat Jonola

• Vim

• Wire wool

• Ajax

• Scourer pads

• Chemico

• Sand paper

• Brasso

• Mr Muscle

cleaner

Spills, stain and mark removal

  • •    Stubborn marks or stains: Clean with Ajax spray and wipe; a soft nylon nail brush will assist if dirt particles prove hard to move

  • •    Hair rinse, bleach, oven cleaners: Wash with hot soapy water and wipe dry

  • •    Fabric dye: Cold water wash and wipe dry. Then methylated spirits, then wipe with warm soapy water and wipe dry

  • •    Battery acid, hydrogen peroxide, glue hardeners: Cold water wash and wipe dry

  • •    Hair dye: Wash with methylated spirits and wipe dry followed by mineral turpentine, then wipe with warm soapy water and wipe dry

  • •    Leather dye: Wash with methylated spirits and wipe dry followed by mineral turpentine, then wipe with warm soapy water and wipe dry

  • •    Smearing, fingermarks, marking from cold or hot dishes, stickiness: Apply 1 or 2 applications of acetone (from pharmacy), then wipe with warm soapy water and wipe over with dry cloth

  • •    Newsprint: Methylated spirits or mineral turpentine then wipe with warm soapy water and wipe dry

  • •    Rust: Vinegar or lemon juice

  • •    Pencil: Water and cloth

  • •    Felt pen or dry marker: Methylated spirits or acetone, then wipe with warm soapy water and wipe dry

  • •    Paint: Acetone or duco lacquer thinners (from paint shop), then wipe with warm soapy water and wipe dry

  • •    Glue - contact type: Ados solvent PS (from paint shop), then wipe with warm soapy water and wipe dry

  • •    Persistent stains or marks, bleaching, fading, colour changes: Refer to Laminex New Zealand Customer Services 0800 303 606.

HEALTH AND SAFETY

Health and Safety precautions must be taken when working with wood panel products.

  • •    Exposure to wood dust and/or formaldehyde may cause irritation to the eyes, respiratory system and skin, and may cause sensitisation resulting in asthma and/or in dermatitis

  • •    Wood dust is classified as a known carcinogen. Repeated inhalation of wood dust over many years may cause nasal cancer. Formaldehyde has been evaluated by the International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) as a group 1, carcinogenic to humans

  • •    Storage areas containing large quantities of Melteca must be adequately ventilated

  • •    Work areas must be well ventilated and kept clean. Sawing, sanding and machining equipment must be fitted with dust extractors to ensure that dust levels are kept within standards laid down by Occupational Health and Safety New Zealand, or the specific country of use. If not, a dust mask conforming with AS/NZS 1715 and AS/NZS 1337 must be worn

  • •    Offcuts, shavings and dust must be disposed of in a manner which avoids the generation of dust and in accordance with the requirements of local waste authorities

  • •    In end use applications all product surfaces exposed to occupied space must be sealed.

TECHNICAL SUPPORT

As not all product use options can be described herein, additional end use and specifying information is available as a complimentary service.

For further information, please phone Laminex New Zealand® Customer Services on 0800 303 606.

www.laminexnewzealand.co.nz

The information contained in this technical data sheet must not be reproduced or published in whole or in part without written prior consent of Laminex New Zealand®.

Laminex New Zealand® reserves the right to revise without notice any information contained in this technical data sheet.

© Copyright 2017 Melteca® is marketed and distributed by Laminex New Zealand®. A division of FLETCHER BUILDING PRODUCTS LTD. This technical data sheet supersedes all previous issues.


o Q (D Illi





co


co








NAENAE COLLEGE

DRAWINGS

SHEET NO.

DRAWING

SCALE

A000

PROJECT PAGE

1:150

A001

PROJECT NOTES

NA

A100

SITE PLAN

As shown

A101

EXISTING FLOOR PLAN SHOWING DEMOLITION

1:125

A102

PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN WITH DIMENSIONS

1:125

A103

PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN WITH WALL COVERINGS

1:125

A104

PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN AND FLOOR COVERINGS

1:200

A105

LINTEL PLAN

1:125

A106

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

1:100

A200

INTERIOR CROSS SECTIONS

1:50

A201

INTERIOR CROSS-SECTIONS

1:50

A202

INTERIOR CROSS-SECTIONS

1:50

A203

INTERIOR CROSS-SECTIONS

1:50

A204

INTERIOR CROSS-SECTIONS

1:50

A205

INTERIOR ELEVATIONS OF ADMIN/RECEPTION

1:50

A206

INTERIOR ELEVATIONS OF MEETING ROOM

1:35

A207

INTERIOR ELEVATIONS OF TOILETS

1:25

A208

ALUMINIUM INTERIOR PARTITIONS

1:25

A209

ALUMINIUM INTERIOR PARTITIONS

1:25

A210

ALUMINIUM INTERIOR PARTITIONS

1:25

A211

ALUMINIUM INTERIOR PARTITIONS - DETAILS

As shown

A212

ALUMINIUM INTERIOR PARTITIONS - DETAILS

As shown

A213

ALUMINIUM INTERIOR PARTITIONS - DETAILS

As shown

A214

DOOR SCHEDULE

1:50

A300

PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

1:125

A301

ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

1:100

A400

LINTEL AND JOIST DETAIL ACROSS HALLWAY

As shown

A401

INTERIOR JOINERY - RECEPTION COUNTER

1:25

A402

INTERIOR JOINERY - RECEPTION COUNTER

1:25

A403

INTERIOR JOINERY - RECEPTION COUNTER

1:25

A404

INTERIOR JOINERY - KITCHEN AND SICK BAY

1:20

A405

FRAMELESS SLIDING WINDOWS

NA

A406

FRAMELESS SLIDING WINDOWS

NA

A407

PHONIC CEILING TILES

NA

A408

ZENTHE TIMBER SCREEN

NA

A409

ZENTHE TIMBER SCREEN

NA

A410

FRAMING DETAIL

1:5

PROJECT NAME

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

ADDRESS

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011

PROJECT STATUS

TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS

DATE

AUGUST 2022


IR GROUP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

PROJECT NOTES

TIMBER FRAMING

Interior timber framed walls below 3m in height SG8 H1.2 90x45 studs @ 600crs with dwangs @ 800crs. For interior walls higher than 3m, H1.2 90X45 studs @ 400crs with dwangs @ 800crs

All trimming studs to comply with NZS 3604:2011 Clause 8.5.2.1 unless specified otherwise

Fixings and Fastenings

All fixings and fastenings to be suitable for Exposure Zone C as outlined in NZS3604:2011 Table 4.1.

The nailing schedule for timber framing is to comply with NZS3604:2011 Table 8.19.

Top Plates (H1.2)

Load-bearing walls (interior)            2/90x45mm

Non-load bearing walls                  90x45mm

Bottom Plates (H3.2)

All interior walls                           90x45mm

Holes and checks in top plates shall not exceed those as shown in NZS3604:2011 Figures 8.19 and 8.20

Bottom Plate Fixing

Requirements for the fixing of bottom plates of external and internal walls to suspended timber floor is given in NZS 3604:2011 Table 8.19. The specifications are:

  • •         Hand-driven nails to external walls and internal wall bracing elements -

2 x 100 x 3.75mm nails @ 600crs max.

  • •         Hand-driven nails to unbraced internal walls - 1 x 100 x 3.75mm nail

@ 600crs max.

  • •         Power-driven nails to external walls and internal wall bracing element -

3 x 90 x 3.15mm nail @ 600crs max.

  • •         Power-driven nails to unbraced internal walls - 1 x 90 x 3.15mm nail @

600crs max.

Depending on the capacity of bracing within walls, the manufacturer of the bracing system may specify different fixings to those above. The max. bracing capacity for walls fixed to timber-framed floors under NZS3604:2011 is 120BU/m.

The Ministry of Education requires that galvanised steel fixings (nails, bolts, plates etc.) in contact with timber treated with copper-bearing preservatives are NOT to be used

SED BEAMS AND WALL BRACING

Beams and Wall Bracing have been SED. Refer to accompanying

Engineer's documentation for calculations, designs and specifications for beams and wall bracing

INTERIOR


Final measurements for all finishes to be checked and confirmed on site by the contractor

Flooring

Wall Lining

indicated). Refer to Engineer's Bracing Plan for specialist wall linings and requirements

comply with NZBC G3 Clause 1.6.

Ceiling Lining

for level 4 paint finish. Paint in Resene Ceiling White - refer to Reflected Ceiling Plan

aluminium angle along ceiling edges - refer to Reflected Ceiling Plan

Interior Doors

Frameless sliding windows (Admin/reception)

Interior Aluminium Partition Suite

Interior trim

Skirting:    SPP SA135x18

Architraves: SPP SA85x18

Scotia:     SPP Scotia SC35

Interior Joinery

Sanitary Fixtures

Mechanical Ventilation (WC1 to WC3)

Lighting

Heating

Plan

Server, fibre and cables

!R GRWP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


CLIENT

NAENAE COLLEGE


PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011

TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS

PROJECT NOTES


Sheet No. A001


Scale          1 : 1 @ A3

Date        AUGUST 2022

Drawn By    JANINE FENELON


This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is not to be reproduced without written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


LOCATION PLAN 1:200


SITE PLAN


1:1000


1


2


3


4


5


6


7



8


YA


12


20


13


14


11


10


15


16


17


9


19


18


LEGAL DESCRIPTION


Lots 1 and 2, DP 18397

Part Lot 1, DP 19671


SITE DESCRIPTION


SNU

XA

X

R

M

10

9        12

Z8

GB



9r


YC

1

1517


3 GA


YF

2 J .


1


2


3


5


6

12


YECARP5ARKS


C2ARPARKS


VS



Exposure Zone      C

Earthquake Zone     3

Wind Zone          Very High

!R GROUP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A100

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

TENDER/CONSENT

SITE PLAN

Scale

As indicated @ A3

not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

DRAWINGS

Date

written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

AUGUST 2022

Do not scale from drawings.

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Drawn By

JANINE FENELON

7343


2128


3455



TEACHING


DEMOLITION



EXD29


MEDICAL


00


Allow to demolish, remove and dispose of all components shown in dashed red lines - interior walls, doors, windows, fixtures and fittings School to salvage any specific items prior to demolition and construction commencing

Remove existing wall linings (ply and plasterboard) and prepare for new wall linings

Remove nominated ceiling linings and prepare for new GIB ceiling linings (refer to Reflected ceiling plan)

Uplift existing flooring throughout and prepare floors for new floor coverings - carpet tiles and vinyl. Allow to infill existing drains and waste pipes

Allow to isolate, disconnect and make good all services for demolition

Remove light fittings, pin boards, fixtures and fittings and consult with school regarding re-use or retention

Remove all existing radiator heaters, hot water cylinders and heat pumps and consult with school regarding re-use or retention

Allow to relocate electrical, data and security components


5245


RAMP

STORAGE

2840

5615

DN

DN

DECK

EXW17

OFFICE

MEETING

PHOTOCOPIER

EXD11

EXD18

OFFICE

OFFICE

OFFICE

OFFICE

PRINCIPAL

ADMIN

1830

EXD04

HALL FOYER

TOILETS

EXD01

EXD02

pro

EXW09

EXW08

EXW07

EXW06

EXW05

DECK

DN

RAMP

2715

2715

3325

2950

3735

5695

3597

6128

EXW04 EXW03 EXW02 EXW01



OFFICE


STORAGE


!R GRWP


CLIENT


PROJECT


PLAN DESIGN DELIVER


NAENAE COLLEGE


janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


SICK BAY


II OFFICE

IL


EXW15


WAITING AREA

OFFICE



KITCHEN

EXD15


EXD14


TOILETS


EXD09


EXD03


ADDRESS


STATUS


DRAWING


Sheet No.


A101


INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK


910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011


TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS


EXISTING FLOOR PLAN SHOWING DEMOLITION


Scale


Date


Drawn By


1 : 125 @ A3


AUGUST 2022


JANINE FENELON


This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is not to be reproduced without written permission.


Do not scale from drawings.


!R GRWP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt



6113

7213

3393

5100

5610

3612


CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A102

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011

TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS

PROPOSED FLOOR

PLAN WITH DIMENSIONS

Scale

Date

Drawn By

1 : 125 @ A3

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON



ELEVATION INDICATOR


This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is not to be reproduced without written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


IR GRWP


PLAN DESIGN DELIVER


janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


OFFICE 6

SICK BAY

HALLWAY

OFFICE 7

OFFICE 3

FEATURE WALL #2

SERVICES CUPBOARD


OFFICE 1


OFFICE 2



FEATURE WALL #1


KITCHEN



WALL LININGS


Autex Composition - colours to be selected


4 Feature Walls created with Autex - Designs to be confirmed


Plytech Ambience Poplar clear coated 2440x1220x12mm


T+R Interiors Eclipse 64mm Aluminium Suite


Non-structural screen created with timber battens


All other interior walls to be painted in selected Resene colours



No interior work in the hatched areas



OFFICE 4


CLIENT


NAENAE COLLEGE


MEETING

If I fl fl fit»

WC3

ADMIN


STUDENT ENTRANCE


OFFICE 5

WIND LOBBY


HALLWAY



STORE 2


RECEPTION


PROJECT


ADDRESS


STATUS


DRAWING


INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK


910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011


TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS



Sheet No.


A103


PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN WITH WALL COVERINGS


Scale


Date


Drawn By


1 : 125 @ A3


AUGUST 2022


JANINE FENELON


This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is not to be reproduced without written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


TEACHING SPACE

(NO CHANGES)

STORE

OFFICE 1

OFFICE

OFFICE 2

OFFICE 7

SICK BAY

STUDENT ENTRANCE

MEETING

OFFICE 3

HALLWAY

RECEPTION

ADMIN

OFFICE 4

OFFICE 5

WIND LOBBY

wn

(NO CHANGES)


MEDICAL


(NO CHANGES)


KITCHEN


STORE 2


EXISTING TIMBER DECKING - NO CHANGES TO BE MADE

SHEET VINYL -TO BE SELECTED


ADVANCED FLOORING GOLD COAST 04

AND GOLD COAST 05 LAID IN HERRINGBONE PATTERN IN RECEPTION, HALLWAYS, STUDENT ENTRANCE AND ADMIN. ALL OTHER AREAS TO HAVE CARPET LAID IN AN ASHLAR PATTERN. SEE ADVANCE FLOORING PLAN BELOW


ADVANCED FLOORING EVERTREAD ENTRANCE MATTING BLUE 602


TEACHING SPACE


A

Advance

FLOORING SYSTEMS

Please Note:

Tn» Illustration is »or reference only

Phone: 09 634 4455

Option: 0715

Project

Naenae College Admin Upgrade Project

Finished quantities and sites to be confirmed with on-site measure

For the most accurate representation of colours. please view on a screen. Printing may reduce the clarity and cotour accuracy.

Email:

Sales@advanceflooringsystems.com

!R GR^UP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

CLIENT

NAENAE COLLEGE

PROJECT

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

ADDRESS

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011

STATUS

TENDER/CONSENT

DRAWINGS

DRAWING

PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN AND FLOOR COVERINGS

Sheet No.

Scale

Date

Drawn By

A104

1 : 200 @ A3

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is not to be reproduced without written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


BEAMS

All beams shown on drawings (X) have been specified by Structural Engineer. Refer to the accompanying Engineer's Beam Plan

LINTELS

Lintels are only specified for INTERIOR doors and windows. Exterior door and window lintels specified by ANOTHER

Lintels shall be provided over all openings in loadbearing walls.

Lintels shall be of the dimensions given by Tables 8.9 in NZS3604:2011.

All lintels to be H1.2 SG8 unless noted otherwise.Uplift fixings noted on Lintel

Plan as per attached Lumberlok options:

Type E - 1.4 kN

Type F - 4.0 kN

Type G - 7.5 kN

Type H - 13.5 kN

Refer to manufacturer's specifications for specified fixings and fasteners for lintels


DOOR LINTELS

MARK

LINTEL SIZE

LINTEL FIXING

ND01

Specified by ANOTHER

ND02

Specified by ANOTHER

ND03

Specified by ANOTHER

ND04 - ND06

90 x 90

G

ND07 and ND23

140 x 90

G

ND08, ND10, ND11

ND12, ND13, ND16, ND17 - ND21

90 x 90

ND22

140 x 90

G

ND09, ND14, ND15, ND24 and ND25

Doors are part of the aluminium framed partition suite


WINDOW LINTELS

MARK

LINTEL SIZE

LINTEL FIXING

NW01

190 x 90

G

NW02

190 x 90

G

NW03

190 x 90

G

NW04 - NW07

Specified by ANOTHER


!R GRWP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A105

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011

TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS

LINTEL PLAN

Scale

Date

Drawn By

1 : 125 @ A3

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON

not to be reproduced without written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


EXISTING CEILING HEIGHTS


NOTE


PROPOSED CEILING HEIGHTS


Ceiling height to be 3200mm. Existing ceiling linings to be replaced with new 13mm GIB on 70x35 timber battens or GIB Rondo battens.


Each colour represents a different existing ceiling height


Ceiling heights to be maintained and ceiling linings to be retained. Replace or repair if damaged during construction and paint in Resene Ceiling White

Ceiling height to be maintained and ceiling linings to be retained. Replace or repair if damaged during construction and paint in Resene Ceiling White

Ceiling height to be 2400mm. New 13mm GIB ceiling linings on 70x35 timber battens or GIB Rondo battens. Paint in Resene Ceiling White for Kitchens and Bathrooms

Ceiling heights in transition areas/hallway to be determined by the height of the clerestory windows (specfied by others)

Grid ceilings: T + R Interiors Phonic Ceiling Tiles 1200x600 direct fixed to GIB ceiling lining

EnergoCassette ENC300

EnergoCassette ENC600



!R GRWP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A106

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

TENDER/CONSENT

REFLECTED CEILING

Scale

1 : 200 @ A3

not to be reproduced without

DRAWINGS

PLAN

Date

Drawn By

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON

written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


SECTION A200/1


SPP SA135x18 skirting painted in Resene Eighth Tapa


Selected vinyl coved 150mm up wall with capping


SECTION A200/2



!R GRWP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A200

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

TENDER/CONSENT

INTERIOR CROSS

Scale

1 : 50 @ A3

not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

DRAWINGS

SECTIONS

Date

written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

AUGUST 2022

Do not scale from drawings.

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Drawn By

JANINE FENELON

SECTION A201/1

3633


SECTION A201/2

Eighth

coated with Resene Aquaclear


!R GRWP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A201

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

TENDER/CONSENT

INTERIOR

Scale

1 : 50 @ A3

not to be reproduced without

DRAWINGS

CROSS-SECTIONS

Date

Drawn By

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON

written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.

SECTION A202/1


Resene Sea Fog


SPP SA135x18 skirting painted in Resene Tapa Eighth


SECTION A202/2



!R GRWP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A202

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011

TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS

INTERIOR

CROSS-SECTIONS

Scale

Date

Drawn By

1 : 50 @ A3

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON

not to be reproduced without written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


SECTION A203/2

10mmGIB lining                      Frameless sliding window. Additional framing required          Elevation of reception counter indicative. 13mm GIB ceiling on GIB         T+R Interiors Eclipse 64mm

Tapa Eighth                                          to be selected

A408 and A409 for details

!R GRWP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A203

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

TENDER/CONSENT

INTERIOR

Scale

1 : 50 @ A3

not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

DRAWINGS

CROSS-SECTIONS

Date

written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

AUGUST 2022

Do not scale from drawings.

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Drawn By

JANINE FENELON

SECTION A204/2



m




IR GR^UP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A204

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011

TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS

INTERIOR

CROSS-SECTIONS

Scale

Date

Drawn By

1 : 50 @ A3

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON

not to be reproduced without written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


ELEVATION ONE


ELEVATION TWO


painted in Resene Eighth Tapa

providing a non-structural screen. See Sheets A408 and A409 for details


Lined door face to finish flush with Autex on wall


ELEVATION THREE

ELEVATION FOUR




!R GRWP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A205

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

TENDER/CONSENT

INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

Scale

1 : 50 @ A3

not to be reproduced without

DRAWINGS

OF ADMIN/RECEPTION

Date

AUGUST 2022

written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.

Drawn By JANINE FENELON

ELEVATION ONE


ELEVATION TWO




Scotia SC35 painted in Resene White


EnergoCassette ceiling mounted radiant heater



MEETING


SA135x18 skirting painted in Resene Tapa Eighth


Resene Sea Fog




LED ceiling batten


ELEVATION THREE

ELEVATION FOUR

Storage cupboard. Doors painted in Resene Tapa Eighth


Resene Sea Fog



Feature wall #2. Autex design to be confirmed



SA135x18 skirting painted in Resene Tapa Eighth


SA135x18 skirting painted in Rese Tapa Eighth


IR GR^UP

CLIENT                 PROJECT                  ADDRESS              STATUS               DRAWING                  Sheet No.     A206                    This design and drawing is the

copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE      INTERIOR UPGRADE OF    910 HIGH STREET       TENDER/CONSENT     INTERIOR ELEVATIONS      Scale        1 : 35 @ A3             not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK AVALON              DRAWINGS           OF MEETING ROOM                                            written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Date        AUGUST 2022

LOWER HUTT 5011                                                                                                          Do not scale from drawings.

Drawn By    JANINE FENELON


13mm GIB ceiling on 70x35 timber battens or GIB Rondo battens. Painted in Resene Ceiling White for Kitchens and Bathrooms

Scotia SC35 painted in Resene White

10mm GIB Aqualine painted in selected Resene colour


SANITARY WARE AND ACCESSORIES

All sanitary fixtures, dimensions and clearances are to comply with the Ministry of Education Reference Design for School Buildlings in New Zealand Toilets Version 2.0 February 2017


A

Caroma Luna Cleanflush Back to Wall Suite

B

Caroma Cosmo WHB with Methven Glide Basin Mixer

Vinyl coved 150mm up wall with

C

Supreme Classic Soap Dispenser (900mm above FFL)

capping. Colour to be selected

D

Tork Paper Towel Dispenser (1200mm above FFL)


E Frameless mirror (Top of mirror 1800mm off FFL and 600mm wide)


F Tork Twin Mini Jumbo Toilet roll dispenser


Vinyl coved 150mm up wall with capping. Colour to be selected

10mm GIB Aqualine painted in selected Resene colour

Solid core flush faced interior door. Paint quality. Painted in selected Resene colour

1920


G Sanitary Bin


!R GRWP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A207

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011

TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS

INTERIOR ELEVATIONS OF TOILETS

Scale

Date

Drawn By

1 : 25 @ A3

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON

not to be reproduced without written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.



A2/208 ELEVATION SHOWING HALF HEIGHT WALL FROM HALLWAY


Bracing and lintel to be designed by engineer

4 x 90x45 studs shot through and lined with Plytech Ambience Poplar

Half height timber framed wall. 90x45 studs @ 400crs. Lined with Plytech Ambience Poplar 2440x1220x12mm

Clear timber trim 20mm


1/A208 ELEVATION FROM HALLWAY SHOWING                                                                                                                               SA135x18 skirting painted


!R GRWP

CLIENT                 PROJECT                  ADDRESS              STATUS               DRAWING                  Sheet No.     A208                    This design and drawing is the

copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE      INTERIOR UPGRADE OF    910 HIGH STREET       TENDER/CONSENT    ALUMINIUM INTERIOR       Scale         1 : 25 @ A3             not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK AVALON               DRAWINGS            PARTITIONS                                                     written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Date        AUGUST 2022

LOWER HUTT 5011                                                                                                          Do not scale from drawings.

Drawn By    JANINE FENELON

1/A209 ELEVATION FROM WAIT AREA SHOWING INTERIOR PARTITIONS INTO OFFICES 2 AND 3

Clear timber trim

OFFICE 2

ND14

ND15

Frosted film between 400 and 1800mm off FFL

900 wide door

COS

900 wide door

COS


OFFICE 3


One sheet of 12mm laminated safety glass OR two equally dimensioned sheets.


One sheet of 12mm laminated safety glass OR two equally dimensioned sheets.


!R GRWP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A209

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

TENDER/CONSENT

ALUMINIUM INTERIOR

Scale

1 : 25 @ A3

not to be reproduced without

DRAWINGS

PARTITIONS

Date

AUGUST 2022

written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


Drawn By JANINE FENELON



1/A210 ELEVATION FROM HALLWAY SHOWING PARTITIONS INTO OFFICE 4 AND 5


Door into Office 5

Clear timber trim 90x10mm

OFFICE 5

OFFICE 4

ND25

Frosted film from 400 to 1800 above FFL

900

1236

1236

1613


A212


2


HALLWAY




3373

IR GR^UP

CLIENT                 PROJECT                  ADDRESS              STATUS               DRAWING                  Sheet No.     A210                    This design and drawing is the

copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE      INTERIOR UPGRADE OF    910 HIGH STREET       TENDER/CONSENT    ALUMINIUM INTERIOR       Scale         1 : 25 @ A3             not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK AVALON               DRAWINGS            PARTITIONS                                                     written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Date        AUGUST 2022

LOWER HUTT 5011                                                                                                          Do not scale from drawings.

Drawn By    JANINE FENELON

Ceiling Level


Glazing Wedge


3/A211 FULL HEIGHT GLAZING SECTION (E64-03)

Fixing Stake 01, 02,

AE010

64mm Headtrack

Framing

Interior lining

Fixing Stake 01, 02, 03

AE016 64mm Pocket Clip-In Filler

Clear timber trim 90x10mm


Glazing Wedge


2/A211 FULL HEIGHT GLAZING SECTION (E64-03)


12mm laminated safety glass


AE010

64mm Pocket Headtrack


IR GR^UP


PLAN DESIGN DELIVER


janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


Glazing Wedge

Glazing Wedge

Setting Block

Fixing Stake 01, 02, 03

Fixing Stake 01, 02, 03

Floor Level

AE020

64mm Glazing Bead

AE019

64mm Glazing Track


CLIENT


PROJECT


ADDRESS


STATUS


NAENAE COLLEGE


INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK


910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011


TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS


Fixing Stake 01, 02,

Glazing Wedge

Glazing Wedge

Fixing Stake 01, 02, 0

AE010

64mm Headtrack

Framing

Interior lining

Fixing Stake 01, 02, 03

Glazing Wedge

Glazing Wedge

Setting Block

Fixing Stake 01, 02, 03

10mm GIB lining

12mm laminated safety glass

Top plate 90x45 SG8 for fixing

Clear timber trim 90x10mm

AE016

64mm Pocket Clip-In Filler


DRAWING


Sheet No.


A211


ALUMINIUM INTERIOR PARTITIONS - DETAILS


Scale


Date


Drawn By


1 : 50 @ A3


AUGUST 2022


JANINE FENELON


This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is not to be reproduced without written permission.


Do not scale from drawings.


2/A212 ECLIPSE 64 TERMINATION DETAIL WITH TIMBER TRIM (E64-12)

3/A212 ECLIPSE 64 TERMINATION DETAIL INTO CONCRETE WALL (E64-12)

90 x 10



1/A212 ECLIPSE 64 DOOR PLAN (E64-09)

12mm laminated safety glass

12mm laminated safety glass


12mm laminated safety glass


!R GRWP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A212

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

TENDER/CONSENT

ALUMINIUM INTERIOR

Scale

1 : 50 @ A3

not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

DRAWINGS

PARTITIONS - DETAILS

Date

written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

AUGUST 2022

Do not scale from drawings.

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Drawn By

JANINE FENELON

!R GROUP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A213

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

TENDER/CONSENT

ALUMINIUM INTERIOR

Scale

As indicated @ A3

not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

DRAWINGS

PARTITIONS - DETAILS

Date

written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

AUGUST 2022

Do not scale from drawings.

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Drawn By

JANINE FENELON

AE010

64mm Headtrack

AE016

64mm Pocket Clip-In Filler


2/A213 DOOR PLAN SHOWING INTERSECTION WITH TIMBER FRAMED WALL


10mm GIB lining

Fixing Stake 01, 02, 03

AE010

64mm Headtrack


AE401/100

100mm Top Rail

Glazing Wedge

AE403

Door Glazing Bead


AE016

64mm Pocket Clip-In Filler


Glazing Wedge

Selected Glazing To Comply With Glazing Standards

Glazing Wedge


Selected Glazing to comply with glazing standards

Glazing Wedge

Setting Block

Door Seal Insert

Floor Level

AE402/100

80mm Bottom Rail

AE403

Door Glazing Bead

RP88I

Raven Seal


Fixing Stake

01, 02, 03

90x45 SG8 timber stud

Clear timber trim

90 x 10



Clear timber trim

90 x 10

10mm GIB lining

Fixing Stake 01, 02, 03

AE010

64mm Headtrack


AE016

64mm Pocket Clip-In Filler


Glazing Wedge

Selected Glazing To Comply With Glazing Standards

Glazing Wedge


Fixing Stake

01, 02, 03

90x45 SG8 timber stud

Clear timber trim

90 x 10

Timber framed wall with 10mm GIB lining



DOOR SCHEDULE


ND01, ND02 and ND03

Doors specified by Resolve Architects


ND04, ND05, ND06, ND10,

ND11, ND12, ND13 and ND16

100mm commercial powdercoated aluminium framed door with glass

panels and mid-vision rail

Colour of aluminium to be selected

Single glazing Grade A safety glass

Legge 500 series Plate with Ergo 62

lever (512 plain plate) - satin chrome

Assa Abloy 250A door stop, or comparable for each interior door


ND07 and ND23


ND08, ND17 and ND18


Solid hardwood timber French double doors with glass panels and mid-vision rails.

Single glazing Grade A safety glass


Doors to swing both ways

Drake and Wrigley 1091 Push Plates (satin chrome) on both faces of each door


40mm interior hollow core flush faced door. Paint quality finish. Colours for doors ND17 and ND18 to be selected

ND08 to be lined with Autex Composition on Admin office face. Colour to be selected


SA85x18 architrave clear coated with Resene Aquaclear

Legge 500 series plate with Ergo 62 lever (512 plain plate). Satin chrome


Assa Abloy A250 door stop, or comparable for each interior door


MARK

LOCATION

HEIGHT

WIDTH

ND01

Reception

2200

2000

ND02

Wind Lobby

2200

3000

ND03

Student Entrance

2200

2000

ND04

Lobby

2000

860

ND05

Hallway

2000

860

ND06

Admin Office

2000

860

ND07

Hallway

2200

900

ND08

Store 2

1980

810

ND10

Sick Bay

2000

860

ND11

Meeting Room

2000

860

ND12

Office 4

2000

860

ND13

Office 4

2000

860

ND16

Office 1

2000

860

ND17

Store 1

1980

810

ND18

Toilet Lobby

1980

810

ND19

WC1

1980

760

ND20

WC2

1980

760

ND21

WC3

1980

760

ND22

Office 1

1980

1800

ND23

Hallway

2200

900


ND19, ND20 and ND21

ND22

ND09, ND14, ND15, ND24 and ND25


40mm interior solid core door with 25mm undercut, clashed 4 edges and fitted with 4 rising butt hinges.

40mm solid core flush faced. Paint quality. Colour(s) to be selected

Holyoake DG52BFL Door grille (300Hx300W)

SA85x18 architrave clear coated with Resene Aquaclear


100mm commercial powdercoated aluminium framed double sliding door with mid-vision rail

Colour of aluminium TBC

Single glazing Grade A safety glass

Schalge Silvi BTB Pull Handle

OA 316L SS on both sides of door.

Handles positioned on aluminium frame


Doors will constitute part of the aluminium framed glass partition suite.


DOOR NOTES

  • •         Contractor to check and confirm all dimensions of

doors and windows on site before manufacture

  • •        All aluminium joinery to comply with NZS4211 and to

be powder coated commercial suite

  • •        All glazing to comply with NZS4223.3:2016

  • •          Clear single glazing for all interior doors, windows

and glass partitions

Safety Glass Installation

Use in doors, interior partitions, sidelight panels, low level windows and all other locations to comply with NZS4223, part 3 as modified by NZBC F2/AS1 1.0 Glazing

Hinges

Hang interior doors on 100mm LP bronzed steel butts, 3 butts per door

For hardwood double doors, 4 butts per door


Drake and Wrigley 1466 Offset pull handle on plate on inside face

Lockwood 801 Indicator Bolt


!R GRWP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011

TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS

DOOR SCHEDULE

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


Sheet No. A214


Scale         1 : 50 @ A3

Date        AUGUST 2022

Drawn By    JANINE FENELON


This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is not to be reproduced without written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


PLUMBING NOTES

Contractor to ensure all work complies with the NZBC and relevant standards, along with local territorial authority bylaws prior to work commencing.

All Foul Water plumbing work to comply with AS/NZS3500.2:2015 and all Storm Water plumbing work to comply with E1/AS1 and AS/NZS3500.3:2015

Water Supply

Water supply pipe materials to comply with G12/AS1 Table 1:

Hot and cold:      Copper, stainless steel or polybutylene

Cold only:         uPVC or polyethylene

All hot and cold water pipework through slab shall be in DN65 uPVC conduit.

All hot water piping shall be thermally insulated to comply with H1/AS1 Clause 5.0 hot water systems.

All water supply pipe sizes installed to comply with G12/AS1 Table 4:

Mains connection to building:          20mm dia, polyethylene

Sink and WHB basin:                15mm dia. polybutylene

Pipes based on a maximum pipe length of 20m

Water pipes to achieve the flow rates given in G12 Table 3 or to be sized using the dimensions in G12 Table 4.

Ensure hot water temperature at any sanitary fixture used for personal hygiene does not exceed 450.

Fixture Trap and Waste Sizes

Fixture traps for hand basins and sinks to be DN40 trap, DN65 drain pipe

Fixture traps from WC to be DN 100 trap and DN100 drain.

IR GR^UP

CLIENT                 PROJECT                  ADDRESS              STATUS               DRAWING                  Sheet No.     A300                    This design and drawing is the

copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE      INTERIOR UPGRADE OF    910 HIGH STREET       TENDER/CONSENT     PLUMBING AND            Scale        1 : 125 @ A3            not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK AVALON               DRAWINGS            DRAINAGE                                                      written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Date        AUGUST 2022

LOWER HUTT 5011                                                                                                          Do not scale from drawings.

Drawn By    JANINE FENELON

ELECTRICAL NOTES

All electrical works to comply with NZBC F7/AS1, AS/NZS 3000:2007, AS/NZS 3008.1.2:2010 and AS/NZS 5000.2:2006.

Run any new wiring in wall cavities/ceilings before new linings are fitted.

ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING LEGEND

Recessed downlights are to be CA135, CA180, IC or IC-F to comply with AS/NZS 60598.2.2 Amendment A.

Location of exterior lighting to be specified by other

All power points 300mm off FFL.

To comply with G9/AS1 2.0 all new light switches are to be horizontally aligned with door handles and 1000mm off FFL. Toggles or button control of light switches shall project clear of the switch plate.

All habitable internal spaces to have a minimum illuminance of 20lux or a minimal total wattage required per m2 of floor area as shown in G8/AS1 Table 1.

Lighting

Supply and fit new light fittings, associated light switches and wiring to suit at locations shown on drawings.

Power Outlets

Allow for each new wall to have at least one new double power outlet

Mechanical Ventilation

Three WC's to be mechanically ventilated with a combined Solatube/ventilation system, specified by others

LED ceiling batten

LED recessed ceiling light

Light switch

Two way light switch

Single power outlet

Double power outlet

Electrical circuit

EnergoCassette ENC300

EnergoCassette ENC600


!R GRWP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A301

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

TENDER/CONSENT

ELECTRICAL AND

Scale

As indicated @ A3

not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

DRAWINGS

LIGHTING

Date

written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

AUGUST 2022

Do not scale from drawings.

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Drawn By

JANINE FENELON

A401 CROSS SECTION THROUGH WAIT AREA, HALLWAY AND OFFICE 7 1:25


2/A401 DETAIL SHOWING ADDITION OF NEW LINTELS ABOVE ALUMINIUM PARTITIONS AND CHANGES TO EXISTING JOISTS IN HALLWAY


1:10



Eclipse 64mm aluminium suite




Existing ceiling cut back to allow for existing joists to be hung off new lintel. Size to be confirmed by engineer.

Allow for ceiling lining to be replaced with 13mm GIB and painted in Resene Ceiling White


13mm GIB ceiling lining New lintel specified by engineer. Phonic ceiling tiles Max. height 150mm               direct fixed to existing

ceiling lining


Clear timber trim


Mitek JH47x90 joist hanger


Existing joist cut to allow for new lintel to be inserted



!R GRWP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A400

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

TENDER/CONSENT

LINTEL AND JOIST

Scale

As indicated @ A3

not to be reproduced without

DRAWINGS

DETAIL ACROSS HALLWAY

Date

Drawn By

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON

written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.

!R GRWP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


4200

1265

2000

935

669

1200

1200

1819010

ELEVATION B V

BENCH @ 900mm

18

-718

©

it..

OPEN SHELVES

CUPBOARDS

CUPBOARDS

CUPBOARDS

OPEN SHELVES

CUPBOARDS

ELEVATION D A

INTERIOR JOINERY

Benchtop

Cabinetry

OPEN SHELVES

Decorative Panels

•

Hardware

•

•

Frameless sliding windows

CUPBOARDS

LU —I LU

FLOOR PLAN OF RECEPTION COUNTERS IN MAIN RECEPTION AREA AND IN STUDENT RECEPTION AREA

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•


CLIENT


NAENAE COLLEGE





CUPBOARDS


LU

—I LU


PROJECT


ADDRESS


STATUS


DRAWING


Dimensions to be checked and confirmed on site by contractor before manufacture of any interior joinery


Given that the cabinetry and counters are wall hung, additional dwangs need to be incorporated in the wall framing


30mm benchtop in same material for both benchtop heights

Material and colour to be selected

Benchtop on reception and student reception side of the design to be supported by a timber cleat (100x25mm)


All carcasses to be 18mm double sided white MUF

Doors, open shelves, end panels and base panels to be LPL (18mm) in selected colour with 2mm edge tape in colour to match.

One adjustable shelf in each cupboard

Open shelves at fixed heights


Decorative panels on Elevation A and Elevation C of the reception counter to be selected


All hardware to be Blum, Hettich or Hafele or comparable. This includes hinges, handles and all accessories

Elite Amelia Cross Bar 192mm BN (12 handles) r



Hafele EKU CLIPO 16 GPPK track system for sliding frameless glass windows 6mm glass to be supplied by glazier


Sheet No.


A401


INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK


910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011


TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS


INTERIOR JOINERY -

RECEPTION COUNTER


Scale


Date


Drawn By


1 : 25 @ A3


AUGUST 2022


JANINE FENELON


This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is not to be reproduced without written permission.


Do not scale from drawings.


ELEVATION A




INTERIOR JOINERY


Dimensions to be checked and confirmed on site by contractor before manufacture of any interior joinery


Given that the cabinetry and counters are wall hung, additional dwangs need to be incorporated in the wall framing


Benchtop


•

•

•


30mm benchtop in same material for both benchtop heights

Material and colour to be selected

Benchtop on reception and student reception side of the design to be supported by a timber cleat (100x25mm)


Cabinetry


•

•


•

•


All carcasses to be 18mm double sided white MUF

Doors, open shelves, end panels and base panels to be LPL (18mm) in selected colour with 2mm edge tape in colour to match.

One adjustable shelf in each cupboard

Open shelves at fixed heights


Decorative Panels


•


Decorative panels on Elevation A and Elevation C of the reception counter to be selected


Hardware


•


•


All hardware to be Blum, Hettich or Hafele or comparable. This includes hinges, handles and all accessories

Allow PC sum of $15/handle


Frameless sliding windows


•

•


Hafele EKU CLIPO 16 GPPK track system for sliding frameless glass windows 6mm glass to be supplied by glazier


IR GR^UP


CLIENT


PROJECT


ADDRESS


STATUS


DRAWING


Sheet No.


A402


PLAN DESIGN DELIVER


NAENAE COLLEGE


janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK


910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011


TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS


INTERIOR JOINERY -

RECEPTION COUNTER


Scale


Date


Drawn By


1 : 25 @ A3


AUGUST 2022


JANINE FENELON


This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is not to be reproduced without written permission.


Do not scale from drawings.


ELEVATION C




ELEVATION D

INTERIOR JOINERY

Dimensions to be checked and confirmed on site by contractor before manufacture of any interior joinery

Given that the cabinetry and counters are wall hung, additional dwangs need to be incorporated in the wall framing

Benchtop

a timber cleat (100x25mm)

Cabinetry

colour with 2mm edge tape in colour to match.

Decorative Panels

selected

Hardware

handles and all accessories

Frameless sliding windows

!R GRWP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A403

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011

TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS

INTERIOR JOINERY -

RECEPTION COUNTER

Scale

Date

Drawn By

1 : 25 @ A3

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON

not to be reproduced without written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


KITCHEN JOINERY FLOOR PLAN


KITCHEN JOINERY ELEVATION



!R GRWP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt






KITCHEN AND SICK BAY JOINERY


Dimensions to be checked and confirmed on site by contractor before manufacture of any interior joinery

Benchtop

  • •        40mm HPL with arris edge and 150mm coved upstand

  • •         Colour to be selected


Cabinetry

  • •        All carcasses to be 18mm double sided white MUF

  • •        Drawer fronts, doors, open shelves, end panels and back

panels to be LPL (18mm) in selected colour with 2mm edge tape

  • •        One adjustable shelf in each cupboard

  • •        Open shelves and overhead shelves to be adjustable


in colour to match.


Hardware

  • •         All hardware to be Blum, Hettich, Hafele or comparable.

This includes hinges, handles and all accessories e.g. cutlery tray

  • •         All drawers to be self-close

  • •        Elite Amelia Cross Bar 192mm BN handles (14 handles for kitchen and sick bay)


Kitchen Sink

  • •        IKON Centurio 1.5 IK723143l double sink with drainer, undermounted in benchtop

Sick Bay Sink

  • •        Oliveri LR510 NZ single round bowl, undermounted in benchtop

Tap

  • •        Methven Glide sink mixer for both the kitchen and sick bay





SICK BAY JOINERY PLAN


SICK BAY JOINERY ELEVATION


CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A404

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011

TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS

INTERIOR JOINERY -

KITCHEN AND SICK BAY

Scale

Date

Drawn By

1 : 20 @ A3

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON

not to be reproduced without written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


HAFELE EKU CLIPO 16 GPPK FOR SLIDING FRAMELESS WINDOWS IN RECEPTION AND ADMIN AREA

NOTE

EKU CLIPO 16 GPK/GPPK


The EKU CLIPO Model GPPK will be used for the frameless glass windows in the reception/admin area

Soft closing mechanism for all sliding windows and locks (3x) for each window

2 x 6mm glass for each window not supplied as part of the Hafele system. To be supllied by glazier


!R GR^UP

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


  • >    Version:               Model GPK with top glass retaining

profile and visible bottom guide with zero clearance.

Model GPPK with top and bottom glass retaining profile and concealed bottom guide with zero clearance, with soft closing mechanism (optional)

  • > Door height (mm):      <1400

  • > Door width (mm):      <1000

  • > Glass thickness (mm): 6

  • > Door stopper:         Top door stopper

  • > Material:                 Plastic

  • > Running gear:          Top running, 2 rollers

  • >    Running gear guided by: Friction bearing mounted roller: Plastic,

  • >    Adjustment facility (mm): +2/-1 on running gear

  • >    Installation:             Running gear without tools

(quick fixing system), guide for screw fixing without glass preparation



A = Internal cabinet width H = Internal cabinet height B = Door width


CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

910 HIGH STREET AVALON

TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS

LOWER HUTT 5011


DRAWING

Sheet No.

A405

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

FRAMELESS SLIDING

Scale

@ A3

not to be reproduced without

WINDOWS

Date

Drawn By

AUGUST 2022

JANINE FENELON

written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.


1/A406 HEAD AND COUNTER TRACK DETAILS FOR FRAMELESS SLIDING GLASS WINDOWS

NOT TO SCALE


Running gear installation




Minimum door width for one soft close mechanisms - 400 mm



Minimum door width for two soft close mechanisms - 600 mm


Clipo 16 GPPK; with glass fixing profile top and bottom

!R GR^UP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A406

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

TENDER/CONSENT

FRAMELESS SLIDING

Scale

1 : 25 @ A3

not to be reproduced without

DRAWINGS

WINDOWS

Date

AUGUST 2022

written permission.

Do not scale from drawings.

Drawn By JANINE FENELON

www.tris.ca.nz 0800 666 556 info@tris.co.nz

I0R SYSTEMS

Guiding Desigri - Ir nor med Inter ior s

Phonic Direct Fix tile

Phonic Direct Fix tile

YOU WILL NEED

1200x600

Guiding Design-Informed interiors

Please note that whatever the configuration, the final tile will have a maximum of one edge with H clips

Perimeter Channel

STEP TWO

Install an aluminium angle along the edges to create a frame

STEP FOUR

Apply adhesive and slide the final file into place. Prop until adhesive is dry.

PHONIC

ACOUSTIC CEILING TUES


INSTALLATION GUIDE PHONIC DIRECT FIX FREE-FLOATING


STEP ONE

Determine tile configuration and identify fixing points for the H Gbps on the ceiling. The layout is dependent on the desired configuration, leave the edges tree.


Plasterboard


Aluminium Angle


Plasterboard


IR GRWP


CLIENT


PROJECT


PLAN DESIGN DELIVER


NAENAE COLLEGE


janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt


www.tris.co.nz

0800 666 5S6 info@trisjco.nz


INSTALLATION GUIDE PHONIC DIRECT FIX ON PLASTERBOARD




Wal I boa rd Adhesive


H-Clip -

C Max Direct Fix Tiles -


STEP THREE

Apply adhesive to the back of the tiles and place the tiles into the aluminium frame. Complete One row at a time and use H Clips to mechnically fix the edges as identified in step 1. Ail files with edges on the perimeter should be propped while the adhesive dries.


INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK


ADDRESS


STATUS


600x600


Plasterboard

Phonic Direct Fix tile


DRAWING


Sheet No.


A407


910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT 5011


TENDER/CONSENT DRAWINGS


PHONIC CEILING TILES


Scale


@ A3


Date


Drawn By


STEP ONE

Determine tile configuration and identify fixing points tor the H Clips on the ceiling. The layout is dependent on the desired configuration. Ashlar pattern is recommended, especially where the ceiling may not be entirety level. Disucss with T&R interior Systems if you wish to do nonashlar installation.


STEP TWO

Apply a couple of blobs of adhesive to the back of the files and place them onto the plasterboard ceiling. Use H Clips as per layout to secure into place. Complete one row at a time. Please note that there is a small airgap between the tiles and the plasterboard; the adhesive is there as a safety measure only and should not adhere the tile directly onto the plasterboard.


STEPTHREE

Apply adhesive and si de the final tile into place. Prop until adhesive is dry.


AUGUST 2022


JANINE FENELON


This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is not to be reproduced without written permission.


Do not scale from drawings.


FOR THE TIMBER SLATTED SCREEN IN THE RECEPTION AREA

SYSTEM 1 WILL BE USED FOR THE BASE OF THE SCREENS AND SYSTEM 2 FOR THE TOP OF THE SCREENS

SEE DETAILS FOR BOTH SYSTEMS ON SHEET A409

43 x 90mm BATTENS TO BE USED AT 70mm CRS

BATTENS TO BE AMERICAN WHITE OAK

LENGTH OF SCREENS IN MAIN RECEPTION 1400mm MAX. AND LENGTH OF SCREENS IN STUDENT RECEPTION 1000mm MAX.

HEIGHT OF TIMBER BATTENS TO BE CONFIRMED ON SITE BY CONTRACTOR BEFORE ORDERING MATERIAL

Tlnibai Bust it el selected speongs

Al<<ww*n U-Ctaroel wnich are tbad to base lb®d wm Stainless Steel M8*40 irwsonr» anefw web countecMink Miwf nut

Use countersonn. wood screws when fining Ic wood suMtiate

Each Belta' sci vw lined to. J-shapad channel


SYSTEM 1


SYSTEM 2


Individual installation


Base u-channel and top u-channel fixing


Bracket & bolt fixing

Screw fix fixing

Batten spacing at your specification

Batten spacing at your specification

Individual c-bracket batten support

Top and bottom u-channel fixing and mid height continuous support rod

Each batten [batten, brackets and bolts) will need to be installed individually.

Aluminum top and bottom u-channels are fabricated then black powder-coated. Battens are placed in channels then screw fixed at the desired spacings All dividers are fabricated to the height required

IR GR^UP

CLIENT                 PROJECT                  ADDRESS              STATUS               DRAWING                  Sheet No.     A408                    This design and drawing is the

copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE      INTERIOR UPGRADE OF    910 HIGH STREET       TENDER/CONSENT     ZENTHE TIMBER           Scale         @ A3                 not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK AVALON               DRAWINGS            SCREEN                                                        written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Date        AUGUST 2022

LOWER HUTT 5011                                                                                                          Do not scale from drawings.

Drawn By    JANINE FENELON

SYSTEM 1

U-Bracket

43mm, 70mm & 140mm deep

SYSTEM 2

U-Channel



Zenthe Continuous

Aluminium U-Channel


Ze nibs Aluminium U-Bracket


IR GR^UP

CLIENT                 PROJECT                  ADDRESS              STATUS               DRAWING                  Sheet No.     A409                    This design and drawing is the

copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE      INTERIOR UPGRADE OF    910 HIGH STREET       TENDER/CONSENT     ZENTHE TIMBER           Scale         @ A3                 not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK AVALON               DRAWINGS            SCREEN                                                        written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz

027 6222 138

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Date        AUGUST 2022

LOWER HUTT 5011                                                                                                          Do not scale from drawings.

Drawn By    JANINE FENELON

1/A410 PLAN OF FRAMING DETAIL OF CORNER OF OFFICE 7

!R GRWP

CLIENT

PROJECT

ADDRESS

STATUS

DRAWING

Sheet No.

A410

This design and drawing is the copyright of IR Group Ltd and is

NAENAE COLLEGE

INTERIOR UPGRADE OF

910 HIGH STREET

TENDER/CONSENT

FRAMING DETAIL

Scale

1 : 5 @ A3

not to be reproduced without

PLAN DESIGN DELIVER

ADMINISTRATION BLOCK

AVALON

DRAWINGS

Date

written permission.

janine@irgroup.co.nz 027 6222 138

LOWER HUTT 5011

AUGUST 2022

Do not scale from drawings.

716 Main Road North, Upper Hutt

Drawn By

JANINE FENELON

SpencerHolmes

engineers - surveyors - plann

STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS

FOR

ADMIN BLOCK ALTERATIONS

AT

NAENAE COLLEGE 910 HIGH STREET AVALON LOWER HUTT

FOR THE

NAENAE COLLEGE BOARD OF TRUSTEES

Spencer Holmes Limited 57 Willis Street

PO Box 588

WELLINGTON

Phone (04) 472 2261

Design Features Report

Admin Block Alterations

Naenae College - 910 High Street LOWER HUTT

SpencerHolmes engineers - surveyors - plann

Spencer Holmes Limited has been commissioned by the Naenae College Board of Trustees to undertake structural engineering design services for the proposed alterations at the admin block for Naenae College, 910 Naenae College, Avalon, Lower Hutt.

The admin block at Naenae College is a lightweight timber structure on subfloor framing with foundation walls. The proposed alterations involve wall changes and a new entrance way.

This Design Features Report (DFR) defines the design criteria for the seismic strengthening of this existing building as indicated below;

Acceptable Solutions (B1/AS)

Specific Engineering Design (B1/ VM1 and VM4)

  • -    Site Inspections and Investigations

  • -    Foundations

^   Beams/Lintels/Framing

  • -    Retaining Walls

  • -    Bracing

-    Geotechnical Engineering Report

^   SED of Foundations

^   SED of Beams/Lintels/Framing

  • -    SED of Retaining Walls

  • ^   SED of Bracing

  • -    SED of Masonry Walls

The design actions for this building are in accordance with AS/NZS 1170;

Importance Level        = 2

Design Working Life     = 50 years

The wind loads on this building have been determined from the Hutt City Council wind maps.

Wind Zone

M (Medium)

Snow and ice are not significant loads for this building        Region: N1, < 400m

The seismic loads on this building have been determined from NZS3604:2011;

EQ Zone

Soil Class

Roof Cladding

Single-Storey Walls

Roof Pitch Degrees


=3

= D

= Light

= Light

= 0-25


(Deep/Soft)


Particular elements are designed to the recommended serviceability deflection limits of AS/NZS 1170.0:2002, Table C1.

Building Usage                        Details

Geotechnical Report

Greater Wellington Regional Liquefaction Hazard           -               Low

The foundation system specified is concrete piles down to 300kPa ground.

Non Structural / Cladding         = By others

Note: The design of non -structural elements and cladding specification are by the Architects and/or Others and are not covered by this design features report.

NZS 3604             = Exposure Zone C (Medium)

There is no effective verification method for B2 contained within the Building Code, however we can confirm that for the structural elements shown in our documentation;

NZS 3602 2003              Chemical preservation of round and sawn timber

NZS 3604 2011              Timber framed buildings

NZS 3640 Part 1:2003        Timber and wood-based products for use in building

Timber treatment is to be selected in accordance with Table 1A of B2/AS1. The timber treatment is to be specified by the Architects and/or others.

NZS 3101 Part 1:2006        Concrete structures standards

Concrete covers have been selected in accordance with NZS 3101, Part 1, Section 3.

SNZ TS 3404:2018 Durability requirements for steel structures and components

Steel protection has been specified in accordance with SNZ TS 3404 Table 6.

Analysis of the structural system has completed using a combination of hand calculation, excel spreadsheets, and 2D/3D analysis using Space-Gass computer software.

These calculations are included as part of this Design Features Report

Structural drawings have been prepared in hand sketch, and supplied to the client in pdf format.

The design is based on the verification of specific design B1/VM1 and VM3 aspects to the construction by a suitably qualified Chartered Professional Engineer in accordance with ACENZ/IPENZ level CM3.

We confirm that Spencer Holmes Limited been engaged to undertake construction monitoring to the recommended level above. The following inspections for specific design elements are required to meet this level:

Inspection of non-specific design structural elements to NZS 3604:2011 such as floor slabs/foundations, bracing, framing, and simple lintels generally undertaken by the Building Inspector for the Local Territorial Authority.

200384P01

associations consultings engineering

Building Regulation Clause(s) ……B1

PRODUCER STATEMENT - PS1 - DESIGN

ISSUED BY:


Spencer Holmes Limited


TO:

Naenae College Board of Trustees

TO BE SUPPLIED TO:   Hutt City Council

IN RESPECT OF:


Admin Block Alterations


AT:

Naenae College, 910 High Street, Avalon, LOWER HUTT

We have been engaged by the owner/ developer referred to above to provide structural engineering and design services in respect of the requirements of Clause(s) NZBC B1 of the Building Code for

All

| ^ | Part only (as specified in the attachment to this statement)

Structural aspects of the works as shown on the Spencer Holmes Limited Drawings stated below

of the proposed building work.

The design carried out by us has been prepared in accordance with Compliance Documents issued by Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment verification methods B1/VM1 and B1/VM4 and the Approved Documents of the NZBC.

The proposed building work covered by this producer statement is described on the drawings titled Structural Sketch Details for Admin Block Alterations and numbered 200384 B01 (details SK1 to SK8 inclusive) and dated May 2022; together with the specification reference 200384 S01 and dated May 2022, and other documents

set out in the schedule attached to this statement.

On behalf of the Design Firm, and subject to:

300kPa under all foundations or as per the drawings,

confirmed by a Chartered Professional Engineer to a construction monitoring level of CM3.

“Medium” wind speed zone,

and

I believe on reasonable grounds that a) the building, if constructed in accordance with the drawings, specifications, and other documents provided or listed in the attached schedule, will comply with the relevant provisions of the Building Code and that b), the persons who have undertaken the design have the necessary competency to do so. I also recommend the following level of construction monitoring/observation:

CM1 CM2 CM3 CM4   CM5 (Engineering Categories) or    as per agreement with owner/developer (Architectural)

I,        Hayden Daniel Milburn              am registered as:   0 CPEng   Number: 1022071

I am a Member of:   ^| ENGINEERING      and hold the following qualifications:    BE (Hons), CMEngNZ

NEW ZEALAND

The Design Firm issuing this statement holds a current policy of Professional Indemnity Insurance no less than $500,000*. The Design Firm is a member of ACENZ.

SIGNED BY Hayden Daniel Milburn ON BEHALF OF Spencer Holmes Limited

DATE 30th May 2022


(Signature)


Note: This statement shall only be relied upon by the Building Consent Authority named above. Liability under this statement accrues to the Design Firm only. The total maximum amount of damages payable arising from this statement and all other statements provided to the Building Consent Authority in relation to this building work, whether in contract, tort or otherwise (including negligence), is limited to the sum of $500,000*.

This form to accompany Form 2 of the Building (Forms) Regulations 2004 for the application of a Building Consent.

SpencerHolmes

engineers • surveyors -planners

Project n^G PAtcOU-tC^-AOwP^jiL^^

Page

1

By

J<1

□ate

m/v icxz Job Ref

. -^UM

Description Kjw itP

u^tiO^rTp^G S\k^C(i.vaftL t^or-OrStZ» FOa Th^ A.vxG^^I lOO i <^f<

-tv\G ^O/^S^t Jrv««A.TxOJ I^US^V- ®V c^^ero^G- COuUGQ.^^

O&^l&o TO I>JC.u>oG

BQ/\flKiCt tiV'^GcVO

CpkjOPt Oe.VrG«x> ^r^t^ 0g^1G»*\J

ST^ c.OxJOTTtOkJ^>

GCk 2^^ S iSSU. OASJk O r^&rJ.O^ Vj» )G "Soots SOOta.0^ CiOZ.OiMx,^ fST AJpP^Gxx/v^SV&kM 2.7<-

^fS@#®gf MAMA^EMĒMT" IL A M @ PL A NN 0 N ® - B^^^l^i^l® ° ^ T l^ ULI Q Ī HI ^ ^ IL - @ II VII IL = F S ® S


BEAHSgl

Alisea Uniformly roof floor wall

Point Dea

External V (ULS) (SLS) Point Win

UMQ QQl (ULS) (ULS) (ULS) (ULS)

ULTIMAT

* M* =

TRY.

Moment C

SUPPORT (Reaction

tULS)

(Reaction

(ULS)

11'

Shear Cap samcfz Limit Defle Distance tc

CHECK:

Defies! inn

Vibration

rjl£i

®#jj ^ ^udl

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAl

G* & Qw

IAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA.A

A                   B

ā =   0 mm

z

b = 3800 mm

c

  • 1,3 kN/m

0 0 kN/m

0 0 KN/m

  • 1.3 kN/m

0 0 kN

Max Downward [ Tables 5 1.5 2 & 6.3 )

  • 3.0 kN/m

  • 2.1 kN/m

0.0 KN

0.0 kN

t 0.0 kN            k3 = 2.0

+ 0.0 kN          y, = 04

+ 0,0 kN          V, = 0.7

+ 0 0 kN

  • 7.0 kNm

MPa

x 103 mm"

A toW?

kNm

kNm          OK

2 4 kN

5 7 kN

4 0 kN

  • 5.9 kN

  • 6    7 kN

-2.3 kN

10 6 kN

  • 2 .4 kN

  • 5 .7 kN

  • 4    0 kN

  • 5    3 kN

  • 6    7 kN

-2.3 kN

10.0 kN

kN

kN           OK

48El>x1(3a/l)-4(a4)‘|

OK OK OK OK

1 - 3800 mm

1                                                           :

Distributed Dead Loads:                                               Uniformly Distributed Live Loads:

0 50 kPa x         5 00m =    2 5 kN/m                          roof: 0 25 kPa x 5.00m -

0.50 kPa x          0.00m =     0 0 kN/m                        Ext floor: 2.00 kPa x 0.00m -

0 35 kPa x          0.00m =     0.0 kN/m                         1 nt floor 1 5 0 KPa a 0 00m -

beam self weight =     0.1 kN/m

6^1=    2.6 KN/m                                         0^ =

d Load                       GM =       0.0 kN                            Point Live Load:       Qrl =

Wind Loads:      Max ii^warri ( TablasR 1,R 2 S 5 $)                                        External Wind Loads;

1.50 kPa x          5.00m x      -0.9  =  -6.8 kN/m                               x     0.4  =

1.05 kPa a          5 00m x      -0.9  -  -4.7 kN/m                               x     0.4  =

d Loads:                                W«.ws     0,0 kN                                     ¥¥«.*» =

W.^«    0-0 kN                              Wt.w =

^ŌĪNATĪOHS: 1.35G =        3.5 kN/m ♦ 0.0 kN            (SLS)           HaGi^G =   5.8 kN/m

12G&1,50 =       5 0 kN/m »0 0 kN           (SLS)           G & mlQ -   3.5 kN/m

0 9G8W„=        4 4 kN/m  +0.0 kN           (SLS)        G8yi,O8W, =   8 2 kN/m

>2G8W„ =       6.2Wm  ♦ O.OkN           (SLS)       G 8 yi,Q 8 W, =  56kN/m

F LIMIT STATE: wF/S +        Pab/I          =       11.1 kNm                                  M" =

2(300x45 HySpan          Clear Span, 1   3800 mm mm

fez        90 mm                     E =     13200

3=      300 mm                  Z~     1350

4=       OS                         l.i      202 5

k, =         0.8

k>=         1.0

fb-       48.0 MPa

apaoity:                         ®M„=®klMfbZ                      *      41 s

»=        11,1

reactions; it A)                           Ga      s           5.0 kN           (Reaction at A)            0* =

W.,...,A      =         -12.8 kN                                    Wuo^ =

Wx^A    =        -0 0 kN                            W.«* =

1.35G     =         6 7 kN          (SLSi            k/JS^.Q =

12G815Q     *        9,6 kN          •              G 8 V.O -

o 9G a w„     -         -a.3 kN                        g a y,o a w, =

12G8W„    =       11 7 kN                    GaysQSW, =

it C)                           Gr      -           5.0 kN           (Reaction at C)            Qc =

Wbdac      •        -12 8 kN                                  «...,£ =

W^a -        -SOHN                           Wt>#lC=

1.35G     =         67kN          (SLS)            ksG 8 <yO =

1 2GS 1 50     =         3 6 kN           "               6 8^0 =

0 9G & W„      =         -8.3 kN            '■            G 8 VsQ 8 W, =

«2G8W„    =       11 7 kN         ”          G8v.Q8W. =

salty:                                 ®V„= ® kl fs 0.67 A                          =       614

«       11.7

ABILITY LIMIT STATE: ction to Span / 300                         =          12.7 mm                   A = (5 w 1* / 384 E 1) . ( P P

Wall 1300                          —        30 0 mm               d — 9000 mm

lim>=      91.0 x 10E mm1

27300x45                                           1,-     202.5 x 10* mm'

A' =       2.7 mm      ( G )

A’ =        5 8 mm       ( kjGS i|/|Q )

A’ =      5.7 mm     { G 8 y,0 8 W,)

(IkN MidSpan, Pin-Pin Supports )                       X« -      0 43 mm

USE:         2/300x45 HySpan                tor       Beam 1

0.43 mm

0/19 mm

0.11 mm

SpencerHolmes ,

• rr>2<wrT j iiiMiwAplu^a,' /

Project        Naenae Colleoe -

Admin Block Alterations

f Page

bv

JCB

Date

4/04/2022

Description    Beam 2

Steel Beam - 1 PL

l Job Ref

200384     J

BEAM SETUP-.

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

6 i*ii & Qwii

A AAA A AAA A A AAA A Al

G„. & Qw

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

3 =

0 mm

B

b = 5000 mm

1 =

5000 mm

LOADS;

Uniformly Distributed Dead Loads

roof:       0.50 kPa x  5.00m =

floor:       0.50 kPa x  0 00m =

wall       0 35 kPa x  0 00m =

beam sell weight ~

Gutfl “

Point Dead Load:              Gn( =

2 5 kN/m 0.0 kN/m 0 0 kN/m 0.3 kN/m 2.8 kN/m

U p kN

Uniformly Distributed roof 0 25 kPa x External floor 2 00 kPa x Internal floor 1.50 kPa x

Point Live Load:

Live Loads:

5 00m =

0.00m =

0 00m =

Qua -

O«“

13 kN/m

0.0 kN/m

0.0 kN/m

1.3 KN/m

0.0 kN

External Wind Loads:

(ULS)            1.5 kPa x

(SLS)            1 1 kPa x

Point Wind Loads:

Mat Upward ( Tablas5.1.5.2 A

5,00m X     0.9 =

5 00m x     »0.9 =

WU1W =

si;

-6.8 kN/m

-4.7 kN/m 0.0 kN 0 0 kN

External Wind Loads: x     0.4 -

x     04 =

w^n = w.^.=

Max DnwnwwK.1 ( Tables 5,1, 5-3 & 5,3 )

3.0 kN/m

2.1 kN/m

0.0 kN

0.0 kN

LOAD COMBINATIONS:

(ULS)            1 35G =

(ULS)     1.2G&E5Q =

(ULS)       0.9G&Wu =

(ULS)       1.2G8W„ =

3 7 kN/m

5.2 kN/m

4.3 kN/m

6.3 kN/m

  • ♦    0.0 kN

  • ♦    D O KN

+ 0.0 kN

+ 0 0 kN

(SLS) (SLS) (SLS) (SLS)

G 4 >V|Q =

G & 'i'sQ =

GSip.Q&W, =

G&w.QSW. x

3 3 kN/m

3.6 kN/m

1.1 kN/m

5.7 kN/m

+ 0.0 kN

+ 0.0 kN

+ 0.0 kN

+ 0.0 kN

t,= 0 4

V.= 07

ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE: • M' = w 1' / 8 +

Pabn

=

197 kNm

-M'-

13.3 kNm

TRK-    230PFC

Clear Span. 1

5000 mm

®M„ = d-o,= If? U= n*“

67.1

230

75

12

6.5

1

kNm mm mm mm mm

M„-

J =

•r= 1»*

6*

E =

75 kNm

108 x IQ1 mm*

1.76 x 10" mm4

15 x 10s mm*

80000 MPa

200000 MPa

Segment Length1

Twist Restraint

Load Height:

Rotation Restraint:

Effective Segment Length

Reference Buckling Moment:

Moment Modification Factor

u=

Mo =

I’m ’

k, k, k L

34 N/A

kNm

L« k = k = k =

O»-p. •

5000

1.07

2 00

1 00

5362

0 362

1.000

mm

mm

(Table 5.6 3(1))

(Table 6 6 3(2)1

( T«Mm A ft :l| 31 ) (5 6.3 1 >

1 Eq 5.6.1 1(3) A (4)| (Tab^56 1 62 |

Moment Capacity:

SUPPORT REACTIONS:

(Reaction at A)

(ULS)

1

II

■ 0

(Reaction al C)

(ULS)

•                                      1

u

u

G„ W41», A «.,«.,* 1 35G 2G 8 1 5Q 0 9G & W„ 1 2G & W„

Ge Woup, c W^ll: 1 35G 2G & 1 50 0.9G & W„ 12G a w„

®M„ =

X

TF

o,„as®M„

6 0 kN -16.9 kN

11.8 kN

9.3 kN

13X1 kN .10 7 kN

16.8 kN

6 9 kN •16.9 kN -11 «kN

9 3 kN

13 0 kN -10.7 kN

15.8 kN

=        24.3

>X        19 7

(Reaction at A)             Qi =

Wj^g, .ft = vw =

(SLS)              G & qi# -

G & tj^Q -G & h^Q & W, --            C & y.Q & W. =

(Reaction at C)             Q- =

Wji tfuC ” VW* (SLS)             G & wQ =

G & 'mG ~

"            G & V,Q & Wt -

G & V,Q & W, =

kNm kNm

3.1 kN

7 S kN

5.3 kN

8 1 kN

9.1 kN

-2.7 kN

14.3 kN

3 1 kN

7 5 kN

5.3 kN

8.1 kN

91 kN

-2.7 kN

14 3 kN

(Tables 6 11 (H)

OK

sfBwcfAfljtrn; limit statz

Limit Deflection to Span / 300

Distance to Wall / 250

167 mm

18 8 mm

A = ( 5 w I4 / 384

d = 4700 mm

£ T) + ( P l’/48 EI) xfOa/ll

■4(a/l?)

steel

TRY.    230PFC

Deflection:

k nw ^-b =

A* =

A*-

140

268

4.2

49

x105 mtn* x 10" mm* mtn      ( G )

mm      ( G & m^Q )

OK OK

( G & v*Q & ws )

Vibration (1kN Midspan. Pin-Pin Supports )

OK OK

V =

A*> =

67

049

mm

mm


BEAM SETUP: Gudi & Qudl            I Gp« & Qpt

A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Aw A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

a = 3200 mm          1     b = 3200 mm

0.3 kN/m

0.0 kN/m

0.0 kN/m

0.3 kN/m

6.2 kN

Ma» OaMwfflid (Tables 5 152553)

0.7 kN/m

0.5 kN/m

15.0 kN

10 5 kN

+ 9.4 kN         ^sO.4

+ 11.2 kN           M'.= 0 7

+ 12.4 kN

+ 21.7 kN

48 5 kNm

kNm

x 103 mm4

x 10* mm4

x 10* mm4

MPa

MPa

mm

( Table 5 6.3(1))

(Table 5 6.3(2)) (Table563(3) I

mm           (563 1 )

(Eq 5 S I 1(3)&(4)|

(Table 2 6 1*2)

kNm           | law* 5.61 Id!)

kNm          OK

A 9 kN

9 8 kN

  • 6    9 kN

  • 7.8    kN

  • 8.9    kN

  • -6.6 kN

  • 15.8 kN

  • 3 9 kN

  • 9.8 kN

  • 6.9 kN

  • 7.8 kN

  • 8.9 kN

  • -6.6 kN

15 8 kN

40 El}x{(3a/l)-4(3/1/)

OK OK OK OK

1 - 6400 mm

LOADS; Uniformly Distributed Dead Loads:                                        Uniformly Distributed Live Loads:

roof      0.50 kPa x 100m*   0 5 kN/m                         roof 0.25 kPa x 100m =

floor       0 50 kPa x  0.00m -    0 0 kN/m                    External floor  2 00 kPa x  0 00m  =

wall:       0 35 kPa x  0.00m *   0 0 kN/m                     Internal floor  1.50 kPa x  0 00m  =

beam self weight =    0 4 kN/m

G^i =   0.9 kN/m                                          Q^ =

Point Dead Load:              G^=     6.9 kN                           Point Live Load;       Qp( •

External Wind Loads:      Ma# Upward (Tab*» si 5 2 4 5 3)                              External Wind Loads;

(ULS)            1.8 kPa x   1.00m x     -0.9  *  -1.6 kN/m                                x     0.4  =

(SLS)            1.3 kPa x   100m x     -0 9  *  -1.1 kN/m                                x     0.4  a

Point Wind Loads:                       Wu up =    -33.8 kN                                    Wu^n •

W^ x -23.7 kN                             WMn =

LQ^SQMBINAn^N^

(ULS)           135G =  1.2 KN/m  +9.3 kN           (SLS)            G&yP =   1.0 kN/m

(ULS)     12G&15Q =  14kN/m + 176kN          (SLS)           G&V,Q =   1,0kN/m

(ULS)        0 9G&W„ =  0.9 kN/m + 27 6 kN            (SLS)         G4i|,.Q&Wt =   01 kN/m

(ULS)        12G8WU*  1.8 kN/m + 23 3 kN            (SLS)         G & v.O & W, =   1.5 kN/m

ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE:

+ M* =   wl’/8 ♦    Pab/I     «      485kNm                              -M* =

TRY:    250PFC                    ®M„ =     104,0 kNm                  M..=       116

Clear Span, I              6400 mm        d =       250 mm                      J =       238

b. -         90 mm                         I, =        3.64

k=        15 mm                     l,=       35.9

t, =         8 mm                     G =     80000

n» =         1                          E=    200000

Segment Length:                                                                       L =       3200

Twist Restraint                                                                                    k,=         1.13

Load Height:                                                                                k,-        2.00

Rotation Restraint                                                                                 k.=         1.00

Effective Segment Length:                     L, =     k,k,k.L                               =       3612

Reference Buckling Moment.                 Ml =        116 kNm                      o. =      0.601

Moment Modification Factor                   s« -        N/A                            o.„ =       1000

Moment Capacity:                    PM„’o,a,«M„                          =      62.5

>=       48.5

$Ue£QSI-R£AQHQttSl (Reaction al A)                     Ga     =           6 2 kN            (Reaction at A)             O. a

Wo».*    *       -22 1 kN                            WM^A =

W.^,»    -       -15.5 kN                              W,^A =

(ULS)                        1 35G     -          8.4 kN           (SLS)               G 4 iwQ =

“                 12G415Q    =       13.3 kN          "              G 8 v,Q =

"                   0 9G8W„    =       -16 5 kN          *           G4k>,Q4W, =

”                  1.2G4W„    =       17 3 kN         ’          G&m.Q&W. =

(Reaction at C)                    Gc      =           6.2 kN            (Reaction at C)             Qt  =

W.»c   =     -221 kN                      W^x

W««e     =        -15 5 kN                                W,.<i„.c»

(ULS)                     1.35G    *         8.4 kN         (SLS)             G4wQ =

1.2G8 15O    =        13 3 kN           ”               G 8 v,Q =

”                    0.9G4W„    =       -16 5 kN           *           G 4 v,Q & W, =

“                  1.2G&W„    =       173kN          *          G&V.Q4W, =

SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STA TE:

Limit Deflection Io Span / 300                =         21,3mm                  A - ( 5 w I* / 384 E I) + (P l’/

Distance to Wall / 250                     =        18.8 mm                 d = 4700 mm

steel.                                           1^-,»=      40,6x10’mm‘

TRY:     250PFC                                      I, =      451 x 10* mm*

Deflection:                                                A" =        6,3 mm      (G)

A* =       8 0 mm     ( G & vO )

A* =      16.9 mm     ( G & v,Q 4 W.)

Vibration (1kN Midspan. Pln-PIn Supports)               A» -       0 61 mm

USE:     250PFC           for          Beam 3


BEAM SETUP;

LOADS:

Uniformly Distributed Dead

roof:       0,50 kPa k

floor:       0,50 kPa x

wall:       0.35 kPa x

beam s

a = 2600 mm

b~ 1200 mm

0 7 kN/m

0 0 kN/m

0 0 kN/m

0.7 kN/m

1= 3800

mm

Loads:

2 70m-   1.4 kN/m

0 00m =   0.0 kN/m

0 00m =   0 0 kN/m

elf weight -    0,2 kN/m

6^=   1.6 kN/m

Uniformly Distributed roof: 0 25 kPa x External floor: 2 00 kPa x Internal floor: 1 50 kPa x

Live Loads.

2 70m =

0 00 m -

0 00m -

Ow “

Point Dead Load:

G^ =     6.2 kN

Point Live Load

O„-

3 d kN

External Wind Loads:

Mar Upward | Tables. Ē,1,5,2 5 5,3 )

External Wind Loads:

Max Downward ( Tables 5 1,52 S 5.3 )

(ULS)            1.8 kPa x

2.70m x -0.9 = -4.4 kN/m

X

0.4 =

2.0 kN/m

(SLS)            1.3 kPa X

2 70m X -0.9 = -3.1 kN/m

X

0.4 *

1.4 kN/m

Point Wind Loads:

W„ „„ =   -22.1 kN

wM„=

9.8 kN

W, ^ =   -15.5 kN

«•>.=

6.9 kN

LOAD COMBINATIONS:

(ULS)            1.35G =

2 1 kN/m + 8 4 kN             (SLS)

G & wiQ =

1 9 KN/m

♦ 78 kN          m,-04

(ULS)      12G815Q =

2 9 kN/m + 13 3 kN             (SLS)

G & qlaQ -

2 1 kN/m

+ 8 9kN          M., = 07

(ULS)       0 9G&W„ =

3 0 kN/m + 16.5 kN            (SLS)

G&^Q&W, =

1 0 kN/m

+ 6.5 kN

(ULS)       12G&W„ =

3.9 kN/m * 17,2 kN             (SLS)

G8.|nQ8W, -

3 4 kN/m

+ 15 8 kN

iLkllMAILLIMJJ^STATE:

+ M‘=   wl!/8 +

Pab/I     =      211 kNm

# =

10 0 kNm

TRY:    2O0PFC

♦M*=      55.0 kNm

Mu =

61

kNm

Clear Span, 1:

3800 mm       d 4      200 mm

J =

101

x 10' mm4

b, =        75 mm

ly-

1 65

x 10“ mm‘

t. =         12 mm

U'

10 6

x 10' mm'

U =       6 mm

G =

80000

MPa

'V =            1

E =

200000

MPa

Segment Length.

L =

3800

mm

Twist Restraint

k,-

1.11

(Table 5 6 3(1))

Load Height:

k| =

200

(Table 56.3(2))

Rotation Restraint:

L =

1 00

( Table 6.6.3^)

Elective Segment Length

Lc-     k(ktkfL

=

4200

mm           (563 1 )

Reference Buckling Moment:

Ma =        41 kNm

Qa =

0479

( Eq 5.6^ 1(3)& (4J )

Moment Modification Factor

P. =        N/A

t^ =

1 000

( 1 «016 5.6-1 & 2 )

Moment Capacity:

OM„ = am a, ^Mv

26.4

kNm           (Tubb 5,6 Tift))

21.1

kNm          OK

SUPPORT REACTIONS:

(Reaction al A)

Ga     =         5 0 kN

(Reaction al A)

Ox =

2.5 kN

W„„,,A     =        -154 kN

WydoA'

6.8 kN

W..„„*     =        -10.8 kN

«..■„,*’

4 8 kN

(ULS)

1.35G     =          6.7 kN

(SLS)

G & mQ =

6 0 kN

1

,2G & 1.50      =           9.7 kN

n-

G & H^Q -

6 7 kN

0 9G 8 Wk     =        -10 9 kN

“            G 8 t,Q & W, =

-4 0 kN

1.2G8W»    =        12.8 kN

G 8 T,O a w, =

11.5 kN

(Reaction at C)

Gc     =         7.3 kN

(Reaction at C)

Qc =

4 0 kN

W.^ c     °       -23.5 kN

Wu^c-

10.4 kN

W,,w,c     -        -16.5 kN

WM„.0 =

7 .3 kN

(ULS)

1 35G     =         9 8 kN

(SLS)

G & ip Q =

8.8 kN

’                              1

2G8 15Q     =        14.6 kN

G & v$Q =

10.0 kN

if

0 9G 8 W„     =        -17.0 kN

•              G & i|isQ 8 W, =

-6 4 kN

0

12G8W.    =       19.1 kN

“          G&m/.Q&W. =

17.3 kN

SERVICEABILITY ljmitSTATE:

Limit Deflection to Span / 300

~       12*7 mm

A • (5w I' / 364

E I) + { P I3 /

48 E I} x | (3a/i| -4(a/i)!)

Distance to Wall / 250

=        IB.8 mm

d = 4700 mm

steel.

IjUlW

9 2 k106 mm4

TRY:     200PFC

lx'

19 1 x 10' mm4

Deflection

A*®

2.6 mm      ( G )

OK

d' =

3.1 min       ( G & ihQ )

OK

A'=

6 1 mm     ( G 8 wtQ &

W. I

OK

Vibration {1kN Midspan, Pin-Pin Supports)                Au,, =

0 30 mm

OK

USE:     200PFC            for          Beam 4

SPACE GASS 12.85 - SPENCER HOLMES L ID


31 May 2022. 9 01 AM


Load cases:

■ 13  ----- 1.2G+W.D0WN UL3


130.10)


IaLS unw^t^g»



CP’-jT. $<y An 7v £


Materials:

■ 1 STEEL

■ 2 F22 Ash HW S


£eb>\ \(> df^Q -t


Job: G A2020jobs1200380-99\20G®4\Catts\Beam 5 & 6

Units - Len: m, Sec: mm, Mat: MPa, Dens WiA3. Temp Celsius, Force: kN, Mom: KNm Mass T, Acc: g's. Trans: miTh Stress: MPa Scales • Frame: 1.56, Load: None. Disc; None, Moment: 1, Shear: None. Axial None, Torsion None

SPACE GASS 12,85 - SPENCER HOLMES L TO


31 May 2022. 6 04 AM


Load cases;

  • ■    22   ------- G+Wu.ctovvn



Sui uMni^G




o\<


Materials:

  • ■    1 STEEL

  • ■    2 F22 Ash HW S



Job: G42020jobsl200380-99\200384tCalcs1Beam 5 & 6

Units - Len m, Sec. mm Mat: MPa, Liens; Tm^, Temp: Celsius, Force: kN Morn kNm, Mass, T. Acc gs. Trans: mm, Stress: MPa Scales - Frame: 1:56, Load: None, DiSja 1 Moment: None, Shear. Hone, Axial: None, Torsion: Hone

SpencerHolmes

engineers- surveyors -planners

Project /O^M Aô, COULg-C»C - ^ JA^^Uj fcuZ*- ^ ACVg.R/s^ t<yj \

Description \&GP VC C^r^J^ft^T^O^


J^OPFC CG^^GCTTlOtO


U,0"7 mo^


2 % C WN ^ v ^o^x Z

SJUrOf^ *~ Ml6 800’S US&O IkJ CauC^lxttTo^

1


W& &ft£>ôe t.S fioers


Page


By

fee


Date

MAX 2 04'1

Job Ref

2 00”^


SpencerHolmes

engineers - surveyors -planners


Description iitk&OiR Cr


Page IO

By

Date rjyi 7 0-17.

Job Ref

L lOO^tA


^ix^I^^

SRcxCt RurO<tTTOrO To ^0 UJOJUfc’ TA&U TvA^ GXI^^MG ^flRC^0£. AOV^ttTOkJ To <^ BR^ ^q To N 2:^606^ 20 W. vom-U^ QCrAOvQ-Q A&G TO &R k^xQ/^o KT LaBU/Ax.

KN GoTUna iOTRo to

GO 2:0^^ %

SOIL CLAS^ ^

£O< R gj^C LRG. D gaaA rO O

bJ i^6OU: XO\\ —t Th^vG C,.^ -o- UlCrWT l*0OC'--4> LICAaT vJ^i^

—^ O-7V

TOTtsA- ^^Ks ftOOto

~ tl.SrAX fe.S>|v

' ZA-^

STiROLR sTorj^V v^kk_^

-  UFM/^K-m^^\

EXtAaAi- JC AUuOt^G ^.OO V

» Z-iO^BkAA 3K ^lA

= 2S2I6R

OtAM^j^c £<vl.oSS «oo C

* 1Z$\GM * $\°\<\A

* TfeOOteAA

o J as


HKaaI^it^


3


^gigrt * ^ow^a rrW'


m^

+

STAIRS

-®

CORRIDOR

CP

Easing windrwi

md ^*1 eiWFisK

©

F

nSKV.ni

Wr wiwm

© p!

HALL LOBBY

ENTRANCE


’rav^. re* ,’tog ptaLh. .........tonein^idticc


JfcOfeSA


"Hr



p


o


ft


U'LfejJ ^ '^. V^n


TU^kA


uirW^x it*~


ŪTiA^


. wKling lira» xr^vh^r^nxt


®


EilSUra »nrfiRS npcAte'd Kilts


c U^60/^*l.U»>\ u»-


j lO^A


EXBl*!p lnrter det* wd, Stam


E«Glr^ Airflows ard wsll flmldirq

—WtuirlCd and Mifaiit*srn«l In* hxjiwI Urtess rated othwwiHj


HAL_ LOMY ENTRANCE


Plan - Ground - Exist/Demo


A«O$S


EXIT


4-®


Un orntaK *M mrtrm 4 rmttcr* «to taTSratrs tri rt’h'WBfrarjMncMr wift fti»««»*n#rticmr/' rtjwrtja Corarfcr a n nptsi j> dsotpras to »• anrtirr htwhUW» Plant fa ^ ^ to or)>jfr*ri wtt Ite sfM-Jkatort W «nw r® repxatttey 'n ^ tr#rips rata ft th<Mi«ti*nrTrti


M«                             «MWft




LEVEL 1. 171 VIVIAN STREET TE ASO PQ BOX B7W. WELLINGTON

' i ARCHITECTS CO


Naenae College


I" «71HJ

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

* |pd Mw

9to High Sired Avalon Hutt div


Plan - Ground -Existlng/Demc

■ OHAFT ■ Dmim &> wy-.     IW/.W2

100      P-04


^g^©^^&^ MAM$®ĒMl£Mir- IL A IM & P IL A M M II IM ® - BMffiWSWIllM® • ^T^^^^^K^L = & II V 11 L ° F I % Ē

Spencer Holmes

Pate

ft

Sv

JCB

Propel

Naenae College

Date

31/05/2022

Description

Wall Bracing

\^j&6 Rei

2_OOA%v

A

Bracing Demand

Along

Across

Wind:

BU

Earthquake:

2521

2600 BU

Height of Level

4-4 >TT

Bracing direction-

Along

bU/m limit

U08U/m

Wind

Earthquake

Bracing line

No of Elements

Bracing member

Wall height

Type

Length

BU's/m

Bu's/m adj

BU

Bu’s/m adj

BU

A

$

1

2.4 m

RiG-H

16 m

150,0

120.0

312.0

120.0

312.0

2

14 m

BU-H

1.2 m

125.0

120.0

144.0

105.0

126.0

3

2,4 m

BIC- H

o,8m

110.0

110.0

88.0

115.0

92.0

B

s

J

2,4 m

BL&H

4,em

150,0

120.0

576.0

120.0

576.0

2

2.4 m

BtG H

O.Bm

110.0

110.0

88.0

115.0

92.0

3

2.4 m

BU-H

34 m

125.0

120.0

408.0

105,0

357,0

4

2,4 m

BU-H

0,8 m

90.0

90.0

72.0

100.0

80.0

5

2.4 m

mr..h

n n m

110.0

110.0

88.0

115.0

92.0

t

A

1

2.4 m

BLG H

24 m

150.0

120.0

288.0

120.0

288.0

2

2.4 m

BUS-11

16m

150.0

120.0

216.0

120.0

216.0

3

2-4 m

BLG-H

04 m

110.0

110.0

44.0

115.0

46.0

4

2.4 m

BUS ■

0.4 m

110.0

110.0

44.0

115.0

46.0

S

24 m

616 H

OB m

110.0

110.0

88.0

115-0

92.0

$

24 m

BLb II

11 0 r»i

110.0

110.0

110,0

115.0

115.0

Total

2566.0 BU's

2530.0 BU's

Demand

0.0 BU's

2521.0 BU's

WDIV/Ol

100.4%

Spencer Holmes ) r^finrm »u<w^p»» pro>M»f>

6»

KB

Project

Naenae College

bate

31/05/2022

Detcrlprion

WAI! FT racing

\^ Job Ref

2OoU;q J

Bracing Demand

Along

Across

Wind;

BU

Earthquake.

2521

260C BU

Height of Level BU/m limit

Bracing line

74m 120 W/m

No of Elements

Bracing direction:

Bracing member

Across

Wall height

Type

Length

Bracing directionWind

BU's/m        Bu‘s/m ad)

BU

Earthquake

Bu's/m adj     BU

M

2

1 2

2.4 m

2.4 m

91641

BIG H

33 m

18 fi»

150.0

1500

120.0

120.0

4200

336.0

120.0      420.0

120.0      336.0

N

1 2

24m

2.4 m

BL^H 61644

19 m

1 4m

150.0

150.0

120.0

120.0

468.0

168.0

120.0      468 0

120.0      168 0

5

i

2

2 4m

2.4 m

fit A H m*H

aim 33 m

150 0

150.0

120.0

120.0

396.0

396.0

120.0      396.0

120.0      396.0

p

1 2 a

2.4 m

2.4 m

2 4m

au-H

“1 l"H

2 2m

1.4 m

17 m

125.0

150.0

125.0

120.0

120.0

120.0

264.0

168.0

144.0

105.0     2310

120.0     1680

105.0     1260

Total Demand

2760.0 BU's 0.0 BU's #DlV/0!

2709.0 BU's

2600.0 BU's

104.2%


z <o z

w      CD

CD  ° CD

3 X 3

CD  — CD

CD CD CD

o °

CD CO CD CD

CD

00 o CD

Q.

O

-^

H

c &

CD CD

W

"0 70

-* O

CD m


Number

of Blows

Depth (mm)

Penetration (mm/blow)

0

0

0

5

100

20

15

190

9

25

310

12

35

450

14

37

560

55

43

670

18

53

810

14

55

950

70

58

1100

50

63

1200

20

73

1440

24

76

1590

50

81

1730

28

86

1850

24

91

2020

34

101

2200

18

106

2330

26

109

2460

43

112

2610

50

117

2760

30





UI

I 2

i X o .

U\JU)J

m h *o r-9      O 9

e. 5 w • ” y 2

O O x o

=L ® 8 3

Ī 1 f 1 ”2        ~

S « ® u> s 8 § i 0            "

3      N

©

0 p

N

Z <0 Z <2 ® ° m m

® “ ® w o 3

<0 <0 ® to 3

•• ® o tn 2 o

Q.

O

—I w

C 2 £ 7 ® K ® M «

-n    m

5  °

M O  o

00   K

S    00

m    j»


Number

of Blows

Depth (mm)

Penetration (mm/blow)

0

0

0

10

150

15

20

320

17

30

640

32

35

880

48

38

1070

63

43

1170

20

48

1270

20

53

1410

28

63

1680

27

68

1880

40

73

2030

30

83

2190

16

93

2420

23

103

2630

21

108

2750

24


PENETRATION RESISTANCE


Cumulative Number of Blows


When probes are driven through fill material then the indicated bearing capacity shall not be relied upon.


m


O


m z m

33


O


BEARING CAPACITY GRAPH


Penetration (mm/blow)

Ultimate Bearing Capacity (kPa)



Z <0 z

®    ®

□ T □ M — SU ® <Q ®

S 5

»• <0

at o

0) H CL

O


Number

of Blows

Depth (mm)

Penetration (mm/blow)

0

0

0

10

180

18

20

280

10

25

380

20

30

510

26

35

680

34

45

1070

39

55

1240

17

65

1400

16

75

1590

19

85

1770

18

95

1960

19

105

2130

17

115

2260

13

125

2410

15

135

2570

16

145

2720

15







nr <

Lu- E o E

& o a x

-J o CD s

C/)

z o

£ or o

P in Lu GO

CM O

REMARKS

COLOUR, MOISTURE, GRADING.

HOLE 1

GROUND

200

CL

BROWN SANQ/CLAY

OF MEDIUM PLASTICITY (MANY POCKS 2-2ūmmf

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400



SpencerHo|n(es

engineers - surv^y^rs


TEST DATE:


28/01/22


HOLE LOCATION(S):


NOTES:


MAJOR DIVISIONS

0

I  i 3

5   CM o

TYPICAL NAMES

GRAVELS             J °

(more than 1/2 of <

’JGM

Silty gravels, gravel-sand-silt mixtures

E

E

CO O

—1 o

O °

to A

O *5

Id

2 o

L?

O -

LlJ §

(/) £

81

coarse fraction     ^

> 2 mm)

iGC

Clayey gravels, gravel-sond-clay mixtures

•

• •

4

sw

Well graded sands or gravelly sands, little or no fines

SANDS

(more than 1/2 of

SP

Poorly graded sands or gravelly sands, little or no fines.

coarse fraction

< 2 mm)

••SM

Silty sands, sand-silt mixtures

f SC

Clayey sands, sand-clay mixtures

"e E

CD co ° _1 o O v CO -

Qi "

2 ° < X tr -

O c o

Ld 5 2 £ u_ o

SILTS AND CLAYS    W

lCL

Sandy clays, silty clays, lean clays

( LL < 50 )

0L

Organic silts and organic silty clays of low plasticity

MH

Inorganic sifts, fine sandy or silty soils, elastic silts

SILTS AND CLAYS    %

|ch

Inorganic clays of high plasticity, fat clays

( LL > 50 )

1OH

Organic clays of medium to high plasticity, organic silty clays, organic silts

WS

/W zw.

HIGHLY ORGANIC SOILS ^

zxzv —- .

s PT

Peat and other highly organic soils


CLASSIFICATION CHART


( Unified Soil Classification System)


Spencer Holmes Ltd 57 Willis Street, Level 10 PO Box 588

Wellington New Zealand

Phone (04) 472-2261

Fax (04) 471-2372 email admin@spencerholmes.co.nz


SITE INVESTIGATION


910 HIGH ST


NAENAE


CAD file E200384-AU1 +


^ 28 JAN. 2022

SCALE


DRAWING NUMBER

E20-0384-AU1


REV


Spencer Holmes Ltd Directors: Mark Cooney, Jon Devine, Ian Leary, Philip McConchie, Hudson Moody

Associates:  Jo Cushen, Vaughan England, David Gibson, Shayne McKenna, John McNaughton, Hayden Milburn, Thomas Smith

Consultant: Peter Smith, Hudson Moody

SpencerHolmes

engineers - surveyors - plann

STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

ADMIN BLOCK ALTERATIONS

AT

NAENAE COLLEGE 910 HIGH STREET AVALON LOWER HUTT

FOR

NAENAE COLLEGE BOARD OF TRUSTEES

Spencer Holmes Limited 57 Willis Street

PO Box 588

WELLINGTON

Phone (04) 472 2261

CONTENTS

1  PRELIMINARY & GENERAL 1

1 PRELIMINARY & GENERAL

Throughout this specification, reference is made to various Ministry of Business, Innovation & Employment (MBIE) Acceptable Solutions and Verifications Methods for New Zealand Building Code Clauses used to establish compliance with the New Zealand Building Act.

Reference is also made to various Standards produced by Standards New Zealand (NZS, AS/NZS, NZS/AS), New Zealand Transportation Authority specifications (NZTA), Transit New Zealand specifications (TNZ) to overseas standards and to listed Acts, Regulations, and various industry codes of practice and practice guides. The latest edition (including amendments and provisional editions) at the date of this specification applies unless stated otherwise.

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to be familiar with the materials and expert in the techniques quoted in these publications.

Documents cited both directly and within other cited publications are deemed to form part of this specification. However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited documents, with the resolution of any variances being confirmed by the Contract administrator in writing and then notified to the Building Consent Authority for consent prior to any work proceeding.

The Temporary Works consists of the preparation of programmes, methodology statements and “falsework” design that define the method and sequence in which the building or structure is to be built. In this context, falsework refers to all staging, temporary propping and bracing, scaffolding and access, that is, that there is at least one method and sequence that can be followed to construct the design. It includes shop drawings, shoring, cranage, site access and the like.

The contractor shall be responsible for providing all appropriate temporary works for the project to be undertaken and completed in a safe and secure manner.

Support and brace the existing structure during the cutting of new openings or the replacement of structural parts. Prevent debris from overloading any part of the structure. Do not remove supports until the new work is strong enough to support the existing structure. Ensure all work remains structurally stable and sound.

If a geotechnical report has been undertaken for the site this section is to be read in conjunction with the report, any discrepancies between the two documents should be brought to the attention of the engineer.

The ultimate ground bearing capacity to be 300kPa minimum firm natural ground or certified fill under all foundations or as per the drawings and the engineer is to be informed of any discrepancies between the drawings and the ground conditions on site.

The location of the neighbouring boundaries should be defined before excavation adjacent to a boundary commences, no excavation is to be undertaken across a boundary without the neighbours written consent. The extent of excavation should be true to the lines as shown on the drawings, do not over excavate.

No excavation is to be undertaken below a 45 degree plane of influence from an adjacent buildings foundation or retaining wall footings. The engineer must be informed of the situation and provide confirmation before any excavation can continue.

The maximum depth of cut or batter is to be no more than 2.5m in depth, any cuts deeper than this must be benched and approved in an excavation methodology report.

Non-specific aspects of structural design complying with the requirements of NZS 3604 for a “Medium” wind speed zone.

All proprietary products are to meet the performance requirements of the manufacturer’s specification, and be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.

The engineer is to be informed and is to confirm the use of any propriety product that differs from that shown on the plans or specification.

NZS 3602:2003        Chemical preservation of round and sawn timber

NZS 3604:2011        Timber framed buildings

NZS 3640 Part 1:2003 Timber and wood-based products for use in building

Timber treatment is to be selected in accordance with Table 1A of B2/AS1. The timber treatment is to be specified by the Architect and/or others.

NZS 3101 Part 1:2006 Concrete structures standards

Concrete covers have been selected in accordance with NZS 3101, Part 1, Section 3.

SNZ TS 3404:2018     Durability requirements for steel structures and components

Steel protection has been specified in accordance with SNZ TS 3404 Table 6.

NZS 3604           = Exposure Zone C (Medium)

The primary responsibility for completing the contract works in accordance with the requirements of the plans and specifications is the constructor's.

The involvement of the consultants during the construction phase is to ensure that;

This project requires verification of specific design aspects of the construction by a suitably qualified Chartered Professional Engineer in accordance with ACENZ/IPENZ level CM3, defined as;

Review, to an extent agreed with the client, random samples of important work procedures, materials of construction and components for compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications and review important completed work prior to enclosure or on completion as appropriate. Be available to provide the constructor with technical interpretation of the plans and specifications.

Spencer Holmes Limited have been engaged to undertake construction monitoring to Level CM3 in accordance with ACENZ Conditions of Engagement of the structural aspects which have been specifically designed.

The following schedule of on-site inspections is required by Spencer Holmes Limited in order to meet the required level of Construction Monitoring specified, and to ensure the intent of the design is satisfied;

It may also be appropriate to contact Spencer Holmes Limited on occasion in order to address contingent design issues during construction.

Contact Engineer:              Joseph Bond

027 262 7144

Jcb@spencerholmes.co.nz

Aspects of the timber framing and preline inspection for standard wall bracing within the scope of NZS 3604 is to be undertaken by an inspector from the territorial local authorities.

In order to issue a Producer Statement PS4 Construction Review, Spencer Holmes Limited will require from the Contractor a Sixth Schedule Form of Producer Statement - Construction in accordance with NZS 3910 on completion of the structural works.

Refer to the Preliminary and General Clauses of this Specification and to the General Conditions which are equally binding to all trades. This section of the Specification shall be read in conjunction with all other Sections.

This section includes manufacturing, supplying, forming, positioning and placing of all concrete joining, and all other work attached to or embedded in the concrete necessary for the completion of the structure as shown on the plans or specified herein.

Unless otherwise specified or otherwise shown on the drawings all reinforced concrete work shall be carried out in strict accordance with the provisions of the New Zealand Building Code, NZS 3109:1997 "Specification for Concrete Construction", and related standards.

All materials shall comply with the current relevant NZ Standard.

Cement shall comply with the requirements of NZS 3122. Unless otherwise specified cement shall be Type GP, General Purpose Portland cement or Type GB, General Purpose Blended Cement. The use of supplementary cementing materials is encouraged. The use of type HE (high early strength), LH (low heat) or SL (low drying shrinkage) cements require the approval of the Engineer.

Cement in storage shall be kept dry and on a platform at least 225 mm above the ground.

Cement which has become lumpy or partially set shall be condemned and removed from the works immediately. Cement shall be stored and handled as to be protected from moisture or any contamination.

The Engineer may at any time require tests or analysis to be carried out in accordance with the Standards. Any cement not approved shall be removed from the site or from the place of manufacture.

Aggregates and their grading shall comply with NZS 3121.

The source of the aggregates shall be approved prior to commencement of manufacture and neither the source of the aggregate nor the grading shall be changed during the course of the contract without approval.

When requested by the Engineer, the supplier shall submit the results of sieve analyses carried out by a laboratory qualified and equipped for such work.

The use of pumps for concrete placement shall not constitute an acceptable justification for reduction in aggregate size.

Water shall comply with NZS 3121 and shall be free from significant amounts of deleterious impurities.

Where the manufacturer considers it desirable, an air entrainment agent may be added providing the use complies with the requirements of NZS 3109 are complied with.

The target air content shall never exceed the maximum target air content specified in NZS 3109.

Where a super plasticiser is used no air entrainment shall be adjusted for the air entraining effects of the super plasticiser.

Where specified, a super plasticiser of Daracem 100 (or similar approved) as manufactured by WR Grace shall be used at the rate recommended by the manufacturer sufficient to increase the slump from an initial of 50mm to 140mm.

No other additives shall be used without the approval of the Engineer.

Admixtures shall not contain calcium chloride, nor shall they adversely affect the reinforcement or any protective coating thereon.

Expansive admixture is not to be used in polystyrene block walls.

The alkali content in the cement shall not exceed 0.6% by weight and the total alkali content in the concrete shall not exceed 2.5 kg/m3. Where sand or aggregate is proposed that is potentially reactive as defined in CCANZ TR 03 Alkali Silica Reaction then the Engineer shall be notified and mitigation measures shall be submitted.

Reinforcing bars shall be either Grade 300E or Grade 500E complying with AS/NZS 4767, as designated on the drawings. (Bars designated with an "X", “H” or “RB” prefix shall be Grade 500E).

Grade 300E round mild steel rods complying with NZS 3402 shall be used for all stirrups, column ties and other reinforcement requiring tight hooks or tight bends, unless noted otherwise

Grade 300E and grade 500E MA deformed steel rods complying with AS/NZS 4671 shall be used for all other reinforcement as detailed.

All high strength reinforcing steel to be New Zealand manufactured micro alloy steel (denoted as MA).

Imported reinforcing steel will NOT be accepted without the specific written approval of the Engineer, and shall be demonstrated to be in accordance with AS/NZS 4671 and manufactured by the micro alloy process.

Welded wire mesh reinforcement shall be ductile meshing conforming to the requirements of AS/NZS 4671 and shall be ductility class E, have a minimum yield stress of 500 MPa, maximum of 600 MPa and a uniform elongation of over 10%.

All terminal ends of reinforcing bars shall be hooked. Intersecting walls, beams and foundations shall contain return longitudinal reinforcement, as detailed for the intersecting members, unless shown otherwise on the drawings.

Unless detailed otherwise all bars shall be assumed to be continuous, with lap lengths of 40 and 60 bar diameters for Grades 300E and 500E respectively.

All hooks shall be standard hooks in accordance with NZS 3109.

At the time concrete is placed, steel reinforcement shall be clean and free from all loose scale, rust, dried mortar, oil, paint, retardant or other coating which may prevent perfect bond.

Reinforcement appreciably reduced in section by corrosion or local pitting shall be rejected.

Epoxy grout shall be Hilti HIT-HY RE500, Ramset Epcon C8, or an approved equivalent system, and shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

All epoxy products to be mixed, stored and placed strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Epoxy shall only be placed at temperature and moisture/humidity levels that meet the manufacturer’s guidelines.

Concrete shall be at least 7 days old before epoxy grouting work may proceed. If a diamond head drill is used the holes must be pre-roughened to the Engineer's approval.

Holes for grouted in bars shall be typically be a minimum of 6mm larger than the nominal diameter of the bars to be grouted (or as per the manufacturer's instructions) and shall be drilled, generally at 20 degrees to the horizontal.

The holes shall be blown out with compressed air to remove all spallings and drill dust, and shall be thoroughly dry prior to grouting.

The steel dowels shall be degreased and dipped in epoxy and sufficient epoxy injected into the hole to fill the cavity on placement of the steel dowel. The steel dowel shall then be placed into the hole and forced back into the hole until epoxy is ejected around the perimeter of the dowel

Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, or by the architect, vapour barrier / moisture-proofing shall be 0.25mm Polythene or similar approved underlay, taped at all joints and penetrations with Danco Insultape 100 (72mm width), and laid over 25mm sand blinding.

Protect vertically applied membrane against puncturing from backfill operations with 4.75mm minimum thickness fibre cement board.

All concrete shall be as per the mix designs given at the end of this Section.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing before commencing the works whether he intends to use ready-mixed or site-mixed concrete. Site mixing of concrete will not be permitted where ready-mixed concrete is available unless approved by the Engineer. Ready-mixed concrete shall comply with the requirements of NZS 3104, and shall be supplied by an approved supplier from a plant approved by the New Zealand Ready Mixed Concrete Association for the manufacture of the nominated grade of concrete. This approval is to be sought prior to the commencement of the Works.

Manufacture shall comply with the requirements of NZS 3104 and all details of the proposed concrete supply as required by NZS 3109 clause 6.9 and 6.10 shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of supply.

The Contractor shall allow for all costs incurred by the manufacturer in order to carry out quality control testing as required by NZS 3104. Results shall be forwarded to the Engineer within 7 days of testing.

The Engineer shall be advised at least 24 hours before any concrete is to be placed so that he may inspect the formwork, reinforcement, foundations, construction joints and discuss proposed placing methods before placing commences.

Concrete shall be delivered from the batching plant to the site in accordance with NZS 3104. Concrete shall be transported without loss of mortar or segregation. Delivery dockets shall show the job, date and time of loading the mixer drums, grade, specified strength and slump.

The time between adding the ingredients to the mixer and discharging at the site shall in no case exceed 90 minutes, or 300 revolutions, whichever comes first or such shorter time as directed by the Engineer.

The addition of water to the mix after dispatch from the ready mix plant is strictly forbidden.

Copies of all delivery dockets shall be collected by the foreman.

All concrete shall be handled and placed in cleaned and prepared formwork in accordance with NZ Standards, with care being taken to avoid segregation and to minimise the time between manufacture and placement.

The method of placing concrete shall be approved by the Engineer prior to placing concrete, but such approval will not absolve the Contractor from providing dense homogeneous concrete.

Work on the section to be poured shall be complete in all respects before pouring starts.

No concrete shall be placed until the engineer has approved the foundations, reinforcing steel, formwork and construction joint preparation.

Concrete shall be transported, handled and placed in a manner which will avoid segregation and shall be placed before initial set occurs. Where reverberations of any layer fails to cause the concrete to become plastic, no fresh concrete shall be placed over it and the surface of the layer shall be treated as a construction joint. No concrete shall be placed over any layer in which initial set has already taken place.

Dropping of concrete through a free fall greater than 2 metres shall not be permitted unless otherwise approved. For tall vertical elements the maximum fall of concrete shall be limited to 1.5m/100mm of member thickness.

As far as possible the placing of concrete shall be controlled to ensure that any free fall is entirely clear of reinforcement.

Concrete shall be placed directly in corners, at ends and at 1.5m intervals along the formwork. The depth of each layer shall not exceed 500mm and it shall be well worked into the preceding layer.

The depositing of a large quantity of concrete at any point with the intention of moving it along the forms will not be permitted.

The use of troughs, chutes and pipes to aid in depositing concrete to its final position shall be permitted provided that they are kept clean and free of any coating of hardened concrete.

The use of water to facilitate the movement of concrete along the troughs, chutes or pipes will not be permitted.

Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground, nor shall concrete be placed in unfavourable conditions which may be detrimental to the quality and finish of the concrete in the structure, unless adequate precautions are being taken. Unfavourable conditions shall be deemed to include low temperatures (below 5 degrees with temperature descending or below 2 degrees with temperature ascending), excessively hot dry conditions, excessively wet conditions or any conditions making it impracticable to work or finish concrete adequately. Refer to CCANZ TM 35 New Zealand Guide to Concrete Construction Section 12.1.6 Plastic Cracking for further recommendations.

When the pouring of concrete is interrupted by rain, the area shall be covered immediately and the pour shall then be terminated at properly formed construction joints in positions approved by the Engineer.

Where the temperature may drop overnight by over 13° insulation shall be used to protect the concrete from the temperature drop. Further recommendations are found in CCANZ TR10 Specifying Concrete for Performance Section 6.3.2.

All construction joints are to be prepared to an exposed aggregate finish of 5mm minimum roughness between pours i.e Rugasol and waterblasting surface. This is a requirement for the structural walls.

Where new concrete is to be bonded to old concrete the surface of the old concrete shall be prepared by chipping back to expose fresh aggregate.

The concrete placing shall be carried out continuously between construction joints and in such a manner that a plastic concrete face is maintained. Where the location of construction joints are shown on the drawings, they shall neither be relocated nor eliminated without the approval of the Engineer. Where no construction joints are shown on the Contract Drawings and such are required, their location shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

Unless specifically instructed otherwise, all concrete shall be vibrated to produce a dense uniform mass with at least two approved high frequency immersion vibrators (not less than 133 Hz) operated by experienced workmen.

The vibration shall be sufficiently intense to cause the concrete to settle rapidly into place and to positively affect the concrete over a radius of at least 500mm. The vibrator shall be uniformly inserted, not further apart than the vibration is visibly effective and sufficiently close to the forms to effectively vibrate the concrete at the formed surface.

Vibration shall be such that expulsion of entrapped air and settlement of the concrete is visibly evident over all areas of the surface and shall continue until this action ceases and until coarse aggregate at the surface is embedded. Vibration shall not be prolonged beyond the time at which this condition is reached and care is to be taken to avoid vibration of reinforcing steel or formwork and to withdraw the spud slowly.

Freshly cast concrete surfaces shall be protected from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures or damage from rain. Curing shall be commenced as soon as the exposed surface has hardened sufficiently but not later than two hours after finishing.

All concrete surfaces shall be cured for a minimum of 14 days. Curing may consist of maintaining the concrete surface wet by periodic hosing or a continuous fine water spray for 14 days or by periodic hosing for the first 7 days followed by the use of a sprayed membrane for a further 7 days.

Polythene or hessian may be used to reduce water loss. All plastic sheeting must be fully lapped at joints and sealed at the edges.

Where form work is removed from vertical surfaces within the specified curing period, the exposed concrete surface shall be fully cured.

Surface finishes shall be as set out in the Schedule of Surface Finishes at the end of this section of the specification.

Surface finishes shall comply with the requirements of NZS 3114 for the class of surface finish nominated.

All surfaces shall be finished true to line and level as shown on the Drawings and shall be free of bony or porous areas and excessive depressions or projections. Horizontal surfaces shall be finished with a wood or steel float as required to achieve the tolerances specified in NZS 3109.

The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the method of producing the specified finish and for ensuring that the execution of the work at all times is carried out and supervised by personnel skilled in the production of the class of finish specified.

Surface tolerances, colour variation and physical irregularities shall comply with the requirements of NZS 3114 for the class of finish specified in the schedule of surface finishes.

Bolt holes shall be filled in accordance with the treatment specified.

When the surface finish does not comply with the requirements of the specified surface finish, and minor surface defects exist, the surface dressing treatment for minor repairs shall be carried out as specified below.

Surface tolerance, colour variation and physical irregularities comply with the requirements of NZS 3114 for the class to finish specified in the schedule of surface of surface finishes.

Floor surfaces shall have no abrupt deviations, and gradual deviations shall not vary by more than 3mm from a 3 metre straight edge placed anywhere on the surface, and such maximum variation shall extend over a minimum distance of 1 metre.

Where a “U3 X” surface finish has been specified, the floor shall be compacted and floated with "Kelly" machines fitted with discs to provide a smooth level uniform and dense hard wearing surface.

At least two machines shall be available at the time of finishing.

Along walls and in other inaccessible positions, finish by hand steel trowelling.

Hand finish edges of slab to provide a dense hard wearing surface.

Do not commence finishing until the moisture film has disappeared from the screeded surface and the concrete surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent an excess of fine material from being worked to the surface.

Where a portion of an exposed surface requires treatment, the whole of the exposed surface of the defective face of the member shall be treated.

The surface shall be thoroughly wetted and shall be painted with a thin grout of 1:1.5 cement: fine sand worked in by vigorous rubbing with cork or wood floats and finally rubbed smooth with burlap.

After drying remove any surplus sand with Carborundum stones.

The surface on completion shall be dense, smooth, free from defects and match the parent surface in colour and texture.

Abrupt deviations shall be ground to a 1 in 50 height to length and fins and projection shall be ground flush.

Surface dressing shall be cured for 7 days.

The Engineer shall be notified of any major surface defects. When the Engineer permits a repair to be attempted the repair shall be carried out as soon as practicable after stripping. Acceptance of the entire concrete pour incorporating the repair will be dependent upon the adequacy of the repair. Where a substantial defect occurs, the presence of which would jeopardise the structural integrity of the building, the entire concrete pour containing the repair shall be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense.

Protect all new concrete work and ensure that no heavy loads are placed on or moved over the finished concrete until 28 days old.

Refer to the Preliminary and General Clauses of this Specification and to the General Conditions which are equally binding to all trades. This section of the Specification shall be read in conjunction with all other Sections.

The work to be done under this Section comprises the supply of all labour, materials and plant for the fabrication and erection of all structural steelwork and miscellaneous metalwork shown or implied on the drawings or in the specification.

Materials and workmanship shall confirm to the current requirements of the following Codes and Standards except where modified by this Specification;

NZS 3404

AS/NZS 1554

AS/NZS 2312

SNZ TS 3404

Steel Structures Standard

Welding of Steel Structures

Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by the use of protective coatings

Durability requirements for steel structures and components

Hot-rolled structural steel shall be G300 in accordance with AS 3679.1.

Hollow structural steel sections shall be C350 in accordance with AS 1163.

Steel plate shall be G250 or G300 in accordance with AS 3679.1.

The Contractor shall not substitute specified structural steel sections without the approval of the Engineer. Generally members shall be fabricated using single length sections. Members fabricated using short length sections shall not be made without the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall allow for the taking of all samples and the supply of all material certificates required by this Specification.

The Contractor shall allow for carrying out of all tests specified in this Specification.

If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material or workmanship is defective, he may require the Contractor to carry out additional tests. If these tests show the material or workmanship to be unsatisfactory, all costs associated with testing and making good shall be borne by the Contractor. Should the tests prove satisfactory, such costs shall be borne by the Principal.

All nuts and bolts shall be 150 metric coarse threads, hexagon Grade 4.6 (AS1111 and AS 1112 respectively).

All bolt, nuts and washers shall be hot dipped galvanised.

All bolts shall be fitted with appropriate washers. At least one washer shall be placed under the bolt head or nut whichever is to be rotated.

Tapered washers shall be used where the part under the bolt head or nut is not perpendicular to the centreline of the bolt.

Nuts or bolts subject to severe vibration and vertical bolts in tension shall be locked in position using an approved method.

Unless noted otherwise, holes shall be 2mm larger than the nominal bolt diameter. Where slotted or oversize holes are permitted in the drawings they shall comply with AS 1511.

No part of the threaded portion of the bolt of a bearing bolt shall be within the thickness of the parts to be bolted together.

Threaded ends of bearing bolts projecting greater than 10mm from the end of the nut, if visible from the completed structure, shall be cut off flush with the end of the nut, except as otherwise specified.

Suitably store bolts to protect from corrosion.

Retain coating of oil to bolts.

All workmanship on or off-site shall be in accordance with NZS 3404. All work shall be carried out by skilled and appropriately qualified tradesmen.

Where portions of the work are exposed to view and form part of the architectural treatment, attention shall be given to the finish. Shearing, flame cutting and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately. Sharp corners and edges, and edges that are marred, cut or roughened in handling or erection shall be faired by grinding or other approved means.

Flame cutting of holes for bolts or rivets (including enlargement of drilled holes) will not be permitted. Remove all burrs and other defects from all holes.

Where noted on the Engineer's drawings, steelwork exposed to view shall have welds ground smooth.

The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for carrying out all the structural steelwork in accordance with the requirements of this Specification and the associated Contract Documents.

Should the Contractor become aware of any conflict of components, signs of distress or excessive deflection in any member at any stage during detailing, fabrication or erection of the steelwork, he shall immediately notify the Engineer, and confirm such notice in writing as soon as is practicable.

The drawings indicate the general arrangement and dimensions of the steelwork and have been made to scale. Where dimensions have not been given, scaled dimensions shall not be used.

Where steelwork is being placed onto or connecting with existing construction, the Contractor shall check and verify all dimensions and levels on site before commencing fabrication of any new steel. Any discrepancy found between the drawings and the site dimensions shall be referred immediately to the Engineer who shall direct any amendments as necessary.

The structural drawings and the architectural drawings are complementary and the Contractor shall consult the latter for materials, details and dimensions not shown on the former. If any discrepancies are found within the drawings refer to the Engineer for instructions before proceeding.

The Contractor shall be responsible for his construction procedure and must ensure that no part of the structure is overstressed as a result of construction loads. If required, the Contractor shall provide calculations for examination to the Engineer which show that the structure is adequate to support the proposed construction loads.

Where end cleats, brackets and other connections are not specifically detailed on the Engineer's drawings, they shall be of a type and proportion to suit the location and reaction shown thereon.

The Contractor shall allow for any drilling and cleats indicated on the Engineer's drawings, and those necessary to support and connect finishes and fixings of other trades.

The structural steelworker shall be fully responsible for checking on-site all dimensions relating to the setting out of all portal frames, sockets, angles, plates, bolts, dowels, etc, before commencing fabrication. Any discrepancies are to be reported to the Engineer, and work is to be put on hold until further instructions are given.

The Engineer shall be notified well in advance of commencement of work in the shop in order that inspections of materials and workmanship may be made.

The end clearances shown on the Engineer's drawings shall not be exceeded; where these are not shown the Contractor shall ascertain the clearances used in the design of the connections.

Structural members consisting primarily of a single rolled section shall, after fabrication, unless otherwise specified, conform to the tolerances prescribed in NZS 3404. Built up structural members, unless otherwise specified, shall conform to the tolerances specified in clause 15.3 of NZS 3404.

Completed members shall be free from twists and bends, within a tolerance of 1 in 1000 from a flat plane in any direction, and not more than 6mm overall. Open joints, sharp kinks and bends shall be cause of rejection. All parts to be joined shall fit accurately before welding. Re-entrant cuts shall be filleted to a radius of not less than 10mm.

Tolerances in straightness and length shall conform with clause 15.3.3, 15.3.5 or 15.3.6 of NZS 3404 as appropriate. These tolerances shall not result in a cumulative error over the whole or any part of the structure.

Sheetmetal and plate bending shall be in accordance with AS/NZS 3678-2011 Table C1. Alternatively join with complete penetration butt welds.

All welding shall conform to the requirements of AS/NZS 1554.1: Structural Steel Welding. All welding shall be category SP Structural Purpose unless noted otherwise.

Preparatory work, procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as to obviate distortion and minimise shrinkage stresses. Fully prepare and clean off all fusion faces and surrounding surfaces. Work is to be positioned for flat welding wherever possible.

Maintain a 5mm gap between all parts to be butt welded together by use of soft wire cushions. All butt welds shall be brought up proud of the parent metal.

The Contractor shall arrange for all welders employed on the work to be tested by welding inspectors nominated by the Engineer. The testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of NZS 2980: Qualification of Welders for Fusion Welding of Steels, and the Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of all costs in respect of the tests.

Welders shall only be employed on the types of weld for which they have satisfactorily completed tests.

Site welding shall not be undertaken without approval.

Symbols shown on the drawings are in accordance with AS 1101.3-2005 Graphical Symbols for General Engineering - Welding and Non-Destructive Examination.

The extent non-destructive examination of welds shall be in accordance with NZS 3404 Table 34 and AS/NZS 1554 as follows;

Welding Classification Schedule

Location

Frame Structural Ductility Category

Weld Failure Consequence (redundancy)

Seismic Demand

Fatigue

Non-Destructive Testing

CPW

k-area

Fillet Weld

All

4 Elastic µ=1

A - Major

Low

NA

UT 10% including 2 of the first 10

MT 10%

NA

Weld testing shall be in accordance NZS 3404.1 2009 Steel Structures Standard Table 34 and the above Welding Requirement Schedule.

Before any welding is commenced, the Engineer shall be advised so that an inspection of the prepared surfaces can be made.

The testing of welds will be carried out by a specialist organisation and may include ultrasonic testing or radiography or such other methods of testing or such other methods to testing considered appropriate by the welding inspector.

The Contractor shall comply with all reasonable demands of the welding inspector to cut out weld in search of defects and shall supply the plant necessary for the purpose. The cost of testing welds shown to be defective, and the repair or making good thereof, shall be bourn by the Contractor.

If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the total amount of repair in any one welded seam is excessive, the whole of the seam shall be cut out and rewelded.

Defects shall be cut out by Arc/Air and the gouging heat shall be the smallest necessary to satisfactorily achieve the cut.

The inspector shall examine all seams from which defects have been cut out and his approval obtained before rewelding is commenced. Rewelding shall be executed in a manner and by practices acceptable under this specification. Where practicable, the rewelding shall be by the same process as used in the original welding.

Preheating shall be used for all weld repairs.

The cost of all testing and repairs to all defects shall be borne by the Contractor.

Surface treatment shall be in accordance with SNZ TS 3404 Durability requirements for steel structures and components Surface treatment shall constitute complete systems of surface preparation and protective coatings.

3.8.1     Schedule of Surface Treatments

Schedule of Surface Treatments

ID

Location

Exposure Class

System Designation

Description

Surface Prep.

Protective Coatings

TYPE

PRN

DFT (mm)

A

Interior

C1

ALK1

Alkyd Primer

St 3/Sa 2

Alkyd Primer

C05

40

Unless noted otherwise on the drawings all steelwork permanently exposed to external atmospheric conditions associated with decks and landscaping structures shall be hot dipped galvanised.

All articles to be galvanised shall be handled in such a manner as to avoid any mechanical damage and to minimise distortion.

Design features that may lead to difficulties during galvanising should be pointed out prior to dipping.

Galvanising parameters such as galvanising temperature, time of immersion and withdrawal speed shall be employed to suit the requirements of the article.

The composition of the zinc in the galvanising bath shall not be less that 98.0% zinc.

The galvanised coating shall be continuous, adherent, as smooth and evenly distributed as possible, and free from any defect that is detrimental to the stated end use of the coated article. On silicon killed steels, the coating may be dull grey provided the coating is sound and continuous.

The integrity of the coating shall be determined by visual inspection and coating thickness measurements.

Where slip factors are required to enable high strength friction grip bolting, where shown , these shall be obtained after galvanising by suitable mechanical treatment of the faying surfaces.

Where a paint finish is to be applied to the galvanised coating, this should be advised at the time of order and all spikes shall be removed and all edges shall be free from lumps and runs.

The galvanised coating shall be sufficiently adherent to withstand normal handling during transport and erection.

Contractor is to inform engineer of damaged surfaces or welded areas before installation. Engineer is to inspect and advise contractor of repair requirements.

Damaged surfaces or welded areas shall be made good with Resene Amercoat 68A Zinc EPOXY Primer or equivalent applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

The maintenance schedule for the galvanised steelwork that is exposed and permanently fixed is to be as per the methodology stated in Section 10 “Maintenance of Protective Coating Systems” from AS/NZS 2312: 1994 “Guide to the protection of iron and steel against exterior atmospheric corrosion” or any later revision.

The criterion for assessing when to paint the steelwork is 5% of the surface in any particular area is showing signs of rusting. The preparation and repainting system to be applied should be in accordance with the standard, and decided using the appropriate paint systems of the time.

Exterior steelwork shall be maintained as per the Schedule of Maintenance Items.

Schedule of Maintenance Items

Element

Age when required

Frequency

Exterior Steelwork

Low pressure water cleaning

1 year

Annually

Inspection

15 years

Annually

Steel to concrete interfaces shall be in accordance with the New Zealand Steelwork Corrosion and Coatings Guide Section 12.16. Non conductive paint layers shall be placed at the interface region with mastic sealant beads. The mastic sealant bead shall be Sika AT-Façade.

In some situations, such as a timber slat deck, steel-supporting beams support timber treated with copperbased treatment chemicals, which will be damp in use and therefore more corrosive to the steel.

In these situations, the steel should:

All transport and erection of fabricated sections shall be under the control of a competent foreman.

When transporting steelwork from place of fabrication to site for erection it shall be loaded, stored and unloaded in such a manner as to obviate straining of any parts.

The Contractor shall provide proper plant and all fuel, staging, tools and temporary fixings required for the safe proper and complete erection of structural steelwork.

Erect steelwork true to line and level without distortion or strain, in accordance with NZS 3404.

Remove all erection fittings and make good.

No holes shall be made in the flanges of any framing member for erection or for any other purpose unless specified.

Stability shall be ensured at all stages of construction with due allowance for wind and earthquake induced loads.

Dry packing under baseplates shall be undertaken using Conbextra or similar approved non-shrink grout, mixed to a consistency suitable for the nature of the application.

All bolts and fasteners shall be fitted with appropriate washers and shall be thoroughly tightened (to torque settings where recommended by manufacturers). Protruding ends of bolts shall be centre-punched against nuts to prevent loosening.

Chemical bolt anchoring systems shall be as per specified on the drawings, typically shown as;

Alternative products must be submitted to the engineer for approval.

Chemically anchored bolt fixings shall be installed in accordance with product specifications.

Proof testing of sample installations throughout the structure shall be completed in accordance with product specifications and in locations specified by the engineer.

Acceptance of proof testing results as meeting the requirements of the design loads is at the discretion of the engineer.

Site welding shall be carried out fully in accordance with previously stated requirements for welding.

During erection, steel members shall not be cut, burnt, welded or drilled in a manner not in accordance with the Engineering Drawings or Workshop Details.

Drifting may only be used to bring member into position and no enlargement of holes or distortion of connection components shall be permitted.

The Contractor shall adopt an erection procedure such that all members can be erected in position without distortion.

Where steelwork is supported by concrete, masonry or like material, it shall be set up on packing or wedges to facilitate alignment and permit subsequent grouting. Such packs, if permanent, shall be either of solid steel or grout of similar strength to the permanent grout. All other packs shall be removed before completion of grouting.

The grouting of base plates and other steelwork, where noted on the drawings, shall be carried out using an approved proprietary, flowable,non-shrink grout in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provided the necessary holes and header tubes to ensure the complete filling of the grout spaces.

On completion the stripped edges of the finished work shall be tidied and all grout splashes removed from the steelwork.

Unless shown otherwise all edges shall be finished to give a 45 deg. slope from the underside of the base plate.

Refer to the Preliminary and General Clauses of this Specification and to the General Conditions which are equally binding to all trades. This section of the Specification shall be read in conjunction with all other Sections.

This section includes the manufacture, supply, erection and fixing of all structural timbers. Work covered by this section includes:

Materials and workmanship shall confirm to the current requirements of the following Codes and Standards except where modified by this Specification.

Timber and wood based products shall comply with NZS 3602. Timber shall be graded to comply with NZS 3631, “Classification and Grading of NZ Timbers New Zealand Timber Grading Rules”. All timbers shall be the best of its specific kind.

The following NZ Standards, including all related amendments, and other statutory references apply to

this section of the work.

NZS 3602

Timber and Wood-Based Products

NZS 3603

Timber Design

NZS 3604

Light Timber Frame Buildings (not requiring specific design)

NZS 3618

Mechanical Stress Grading of Timber

NZS 3621

Standard Names of Commercial Timbers in New Zealand

NZS 3622

Verification of Timber Properties

NZS 3631

New Zealand Timber Grading Rules

NZS 3640

Minimum Requirements of the NZ Timber Preservation Council Inc. Inc.Chemical preservation of round and sawn timber

AS/NZS 1148

Timber – Nomenclature – Australian, New Zealand and Imported Species

AS/NZS 1328

Glued Laminated Structural Timber

AS/NZS 1748

Timber – Solid – Stress-Graded for Structural Purposes

AS/NZS 2269

Plywood – Structural

AS/NZS 4357

Structural Laminated Veneer Lumber

AS/NZS 4787

Timber – Assessment of Drying Quality

AS 1649

Timber – Methods of test for Mechanical Fasteners and Connectors

All general framing, lintels, floor joists, beams and trusses to be a minimum of SG8 (Stress Graded) to the requirements of NZS 3622 “Verification of Timber Properties”.

Timber shall be dried to the specified moisture content according to recognised principals of air drying, by forced air drying or by kiln drying complying with NZS 3602 and AS/NZS 4787.

Framing timbers shall not exceed 24% moisture content at the time of enclosure. Unless otherwise specified, variation in moisture content shall not exceed the range specified in Clause 9.1205 of NZS 3602.

All general framing, lintels, floor joists, beams and trusses to be a minimum of SG8 (Stress Graded) to the requirements of NZS 3622:2004 “Verification of Timber Properties”.

Timber shall be dried to the specified moisture content according to recognised principals of air drying, by forced air drying or by kiln drying complying with NZS 3602 and AS/NZS 4787.

Framing timbers shall not exceed 24% moisture content at the time of enclosure. Unless otherwise specified, variation in moisture content shall not exceed the range specified in Clause 9.1205 of NZS 3602.

Plywood shall meet the requirements of AS/NZS 2269. The properties shall be, unless specified otherwise on the drawings, as follows:

The manufacturer shall be accredited by the Engineered Wood Products Association of Australasia (EWPAA).

Plywood ply arrangements shall be:

Thickness

Number of Plies

Identification Code

7mm

3

7-24-3

9mm

3

9-30-3

12mm

5

12-24-5

15mm

5

15-30-5

17mm

7

17-24-7

21mm

7

21-30-7

25mm

9

25-30-9

Laminated Veneer Lumber shall meet the requirements of AS/NZS 4357. The properties shall be, unless specified otherwise on the drawings, as follows:

The manufacturer shall be accredited by the Engineered Wood Products Association of Australasia (EWPAA).

Glued Laminated Timber shall meet the requirements of AS/NZS 1328. The properties shall be, unless specified otherwise on the drawings, as follows:

Timber shall be treated in accordance with the current requirements of the hazard specifications of NZS 3640. Treatments are to be in accordance with the requirements of NZS 3602: 2003 and the MBIE Acceptable Solutions and Verifications Methods for New Zealand Building Code Clause B2 Durability Acceptable Solution B2/AS1.

All timber shall be branded in accordance with the requirements of the Timber Preservation Council.

Timber supplied that is inappropriately treated and or incorrectly branded shall be removed and replaced with timbers that comply with the specification.

All cut surfaces of timber members treated to TPC specification H3 to H6 shall be protected by a liberal brush application of:

Concentrated tanalith solution, or Copper napthenate.

Shall be in accordance with best trade practice, and this shall be deemed to include those methods of practise and processes contained in current syllabuses for the New Zealand Trade Certificates in Carpentry, Joinery and Timber Machining National Certificate in Carpentry and National Certificate in Joinery.

All framing shall be in accordance with NZS 3604 “Timber Timber-Framed Buildings”. The best workmanship shall be employed in thoroughly securing and framing together, spiking and bolting down as the various circumstances require. Only skew nailing will be permitted in the framing. Punch all nails in exposed joinery and work to be painted. All nails and spikes shall be of gauge and length suitable for the particular work. Nails shall enter the second timber at least one half their length before punching.

Remove all arises, rough patches, hammer-marks, and other surface defects before painting is begun.

Checking and cutting away of timbers shall be avoided whenever possible, and shall be limited to such dimensions that will not prejudice the purpose for which the timber is used. No studs shall be cut across the grain to straighten them.

Wherever possible, beams and joists shall be holed at mid-height, and the hole size shall be limited to one fifth of the depth of the member. Holing within 600mm of the ends of members shall be avoided.

All framing timbers shall be thicknessed to produce regular plain surfaces. All exposed timbers are to be gauged.

All timber and wood based products shall be protected from moisture pick up during storage and erection. Members specified as “dry”, installed in a structure must be sealed or remain wrapped until the roof is installed.

All timber and timber products shall be stacked on well-aligned bearers, kept well clear of the ground or floor slabs, and covered for protection from sun and rain.

Any timber that at the time of installation has degraded beyond the specified limits shall be rejected.

All timber and wood based products shall be adequately protected against physical damage during the currency of the contract.

Any physical damage to timber and wood based products shall be cause for rejection and replacement.

Large timber members should be handled with web slings. Cable or chain slings, fork lifts and tipping trucks my easily damage the timber and should be used with care.

Wherever deep and slender glue laminated sections are to be lifted when lying flat, guidance from the Engineer must be sought as to the number and location of lifting points.

All fixings and fastenings shall be to the minimum standard required in accordance with NZS 3604 for the applicable wind zone.

The protection required for steel fixings and fastening excluding nails and screws shall be in accordance with Table 4.1 of NZS 3604.

The protection required for steel fixings such as nails and screws shall be in accordance with Table 4.3 of NZS 3604.

Unless otherwise specified, all fixings shall comply with NZS 3602.

Proprietary or patent fixings shall only be used in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

Unless otherwise specified, nails shall be manufactured from steel to AISI 1015. Nails shall have characteristic strengths that meet NZS 3603:1993 table 4.4 when tested according to AS 1649.

All nails and spikes shall be of a gauge and length suitable for the particular work and shall enter the second timber at least one half of their length before punching.

Nails for plywood and proprietary fixings shall comply with the specific requirement of that work.

Where specified the nails and nail spacings are to be strictly adhered to for plywood bracing walls, nailplates and straps. When standard proprietary systems that have been specified then the manufacturers instructions are to be strictly adhered to.

When using gun nails with plywood or particle board, an adjustable packer shall be used to ensure that the nails are not driven too far or left proud of the surface.

Nails fixing exterior timbers shall be galvanised or stainless steel as required by NZS 3604.

Unless otherwise shown or specified, holding-down bolts for plates on horizontal surfaces shall be 12mm diameter at 1000mm centres. Bolts holding vertical timbers against concrete or masonry shall be at 600mm maximum centres. In all cases there shall be a bolt within 300mm of each end of the timber.

All bolts shall have hexagonal heads and nuts and shall have heavy gauge washers bearing on the timber. Bolts are to project through the nut at least one full thread after tightening, and nuts secured by punching thread.

Triplegrips, multigrips, joist shoes, gang nail plates etc, shall be handled and fixed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

Construct timber framing in accordance with NZS 3604 and to the details shown on the drawings.

Timber used for scaffolding or any other temporary purpose shall not be incorporated in the building.

Under all timber plates between concrete and timber fix Malthoid Fabric 10 damp-course, neatly cut around all bolts, etc, or other suitable approved damp material over-lapping the timber by at least 6mm.

Spencer Holmes Ltd Directors:  Mark Cooney, Jon Devine, Ian Leary, Philip McConchie

Associates:  Jo Cushen, Vaughan England, David Gibson, Shayne McKenna, John McNaughton, Hayden Milburn, Thomas Smith

Consultants:  Peter Smith, Hudson Moody

SpencerHolmes

engineers - surveyors

STRUCTURAL SKETCH DETAILS

FOR

ADMIN BLOCK ALTERATIONS

AT

NAENAE COLLEGE 910 HIGH STREET AVALON LOWER HUTT

FOR THE

NAENAE COLLEGE BOARD OF TRUSTEES

Spencer Holmes Limited 57 Willis Street

P O Box 588

WELLINGTON

Phone (04) 472 2261

fOUhJb WoJ

CMiOvA’G (A^ACWf 0*3 WTC


0 U ^O AM UCft 6X1 •’«Ki DOv*m TO a 04 Pxts ©K

2.1 fn . t»o UXMC^n. TO Co^iSik^ SOOt^fe^


£21^2p2£L£$£±_flh^^ itU.Lt Ul®o © UM


SpencerHo|n(es

9ng‘tn^9fs * su/ve

Level 10. 57 Willis Street P0 Box 588. Wellington. NZ Phone (04) 472-2261

Email 0dmlnO3pencerh0lrnes.c0.nl

(WIT

M AfcruUt COuLG^^-&QWJ51 0« TRtAVte ^

PROJECT

’JAG'^Mr tOvut&C.

AQrXlrvO tic OCX.

h^tfciAT-ro.-J^

Ē



Mu CO^^-^TG


PRINCIPAL CONSULTANT

5« UO^/ft^(n.v& XT a#x^xtvvt \

OWNS Tim

FOiAT^OKtXO'^ P <->=>» J

n^^O^^QE MAMAGFMFNT- LAM® F L A M M i M ® - SM0VSVI/M® - ST0^0T0n^L - ® 0 WIL - F 00 Ē

Ccpyrijht of ths Moving a wded m Spent# Hokne; lid The Contractor sMl verity d dmersiocia w rite.

GUM

CS'tXt.

ME

f^-rsH 2 O^X

S<X£

SIZE

v.^o O

A4

DRAWING NUMBER

100%tM-^\<^

I^ĒāOIUI^^Ē MAWA@ēMēIMT-

LAM® P IL A M IM 0 M @ - BM®VĒtfl!M@ = ^V^^QT^MAL - © D W 0 L - F II ® S

^BBQ^B^Q® I^AMA^ēMēMT^ LAM® IP L A M M 6 M ^ - ^M^^ē^^M^ - BT^®©7^^AL ° © 0 W 1 L = ^ 0 IP ē

'      ^v^-ni^coz

^V                 cr.i

ZTOl Z,^W      ^>OS-

KUt uo MMMfels p ^p» pqr spaqiioo an PH "«PH nxi^ * pis* • ^f *W P W^

a ^ b a - 7 b ^ b s • T/^^BBJL^^^ia “ ^MBAa^^ims - & monm w i a @m v 7 -jLiM3Bfla®wMWBM a$a^©3a&

'OMtiJJOJ

$ ^Vtjj AVUOJ 14 e» ^ t run 9MMVM

Si's-5-1.1.'■'>»'? XX

JA^QSdTj/^O^ 'OX

WOW» 1MIMM

'ir'^t-lTo-S L t^ 1x10^9 vj xv»a v -^^'V'QI ^'«'••a^N inroad 'S^-54^^4- JO -5mcg ^'^'V'cra VJCM^rt

zu'oa'mupHM^uadBpiJiuipD |ftur] 19ZI-W» (MJ) «“Md ZN 'uoi6ui(p« Ba? «og Qd JWflS SHUM ZE '01 P*»l

$jj>»ur6ua

sa)uioH-i93uad$

>T^ ® ot:i 9W)s

>g riXXGQi ē^^īTi ^^frQd ^AdCm


^«'«QShJ

<?O1 J.W tXMJ^

a^rax Hdxzy

GO?

v-jim Trajds O1^

P

N


O k>


CXMt '"OQVi


1>MQ MOW-?


\ aa COn <$ 'S.TTd.faiS tloH



©©©©©©©ē MAMA^EUWSMir ° LAM© P L A M M 0 M © ° ©UMWEWŪM® - ©TM©©^©©AL = © I V B L - F B E Ē

TTt^e.G« fiFAA-A


Top plat <s

I0TO


AroO GT \ IX)^



OOea^L-^.


TT^feG^L feFZXTO Dove^lG £F u\O


fcM


TXA^t^e^

F>€aaa


TOP PLhTG


COukQ Lt-

Stwq



SOOn^ SUsst JSWACfc stqaps e/«


SCALt IMO <S A<A


SpencerHomjes  \

engineers * surveyors ^^/snpers J

Level 10. 57 Willis Street

PO Box 5843, Wellington, NZ

Phone (04) 472-2261

^ Email admirrO^ricerholmesxo                 ^

7----------------------

CUENT

^ Atr^KS^ COU^ CKjrC

BOrxR^ Of "'‘lAASTOt^

PROJECT

MA^^A.^. COiA_fcG,C, -hoMavP Cit^tA*, h-vr^ftKr xo^x

PRINCIPAL CONSULTANT

'X(t ^JOiaF/k^OLV^ xt* aac torreeft drawn; tttle

&GT«dJ> X


Copyright of the towing is vested in Spencer Holmes lid The Contador tod writy d ^martsons on toe,

DRAWN

^oa

_ iorx

SCALE

SIZE

mo

A4


DRAWING NUMBER

ZOO^BU-^KfJ ^


^fSO^^^f MAWA@EMIFMT- LAM® PL A MM 0 N @ - ê^^\fĒVSM@ = BTffiHJ]®irUffiAlL - ® I V D L ° IF B ^ Ē


®EB©®N®E MANAGEMENT- LAN® PLANNING - GUJNTEVDNG - ®TN®GT®NAL - © II V II L ° NONE


3 3 II 3 “ TUSH® ’ ^^^^^3>^^1^ - ^IMOAāA^m^ - ® IM Ō IM IM V 7 3 @ IM V 7 -AIMāW^&WMWIIW 33>^lM0B33


?07\S-*i?^.oi^

_________QUON 5N^


w

O \ *1

rues

A-Zoc

not

31»

30 Q

MMIQ


‘9|K HO EUOtClfiUjp |D ^UM pp «pOipOQ ^

TH MUPH jiMds « pqm « 6^9 o« p *RMqq


« ^yMVOc, TUU OMMYWQ rx>^Xx\A JTyM XO. ^^QS 3?-J > o^O^ ^>1 IWiTlSNOO TWMdd

'»1Q''^) r^Twcry

- d-^^A-^^^ ^t^^mr*

DlfOBd

^ ^5iir>7M- A*> «^wwoa ‘^‘“^'V'C'S ^'V^-JX/rM

^               ZlTO3'£dUipl4J»3UOdB0qilJpD IpULQ^

i9EWa (#0) *»Md ZN 'uojBuiipm '099 *O0 Od ___      1®WJS SHUM 4S '01 pA»n

/$J»ŪUūj^ SjWaAJflfi ■ SJ^au/JStra

i ssbjoHJaouads


'^S SnxoNoi/j


\^vf^^

5f c**

^C>o^\


Oms -3ts»yxoc1


JLV9T1'J



s/^


^V^S


0 4^09,1 CA- w^d“ā 74'dC^I


x«5$


\v> x o^* It


<>CMlH-5«k

■&dc~<d4jrXA^


OvulS VMXO1


-iides*


APPLICATION FOR PROJECT INFORMATION MEMORANDUM AND/OR BUILDING CONSENT (FORM 2)

Section 33 or 45, Building Act 2004

THIS IS A PDF FILL-IN FORM COMPATIBLE WITH MOST PDF VIEWERS. IF YOU ENCOUNTER DIFFICULTY WITH ANY OF THE CONTROLS, TRY USING A DIFFERENT PDF VIEWER. CHROME IS FREE TO DOWNLOAD AND COMPATIBLE WITH THIS FORM.

HOW IT WORKS

All building work done in New Zealand must comply with the Building Code, and a building consent is often needed. Some building work is exempt from needing a consent. For more information go to www.building.govt.nz

Commercial and multi-unit building work will also need careful planning and may have additional requirements.

Your council can tell you about any district or regional plans that may require you to get resource consent or other permits.

WHEN YOU NEED A BUILDING CONSENT

The following list is a summary of building work that will need a consent, but you should always check with your local council to confirm.

You are breaking the law if you carry out building work that is not exempt and does not have a building consent. You may be fined up to $200,000 and, if work continues, a further fine of up to $20,000 for every day or part-day during which the offence continues.

Your council can also issue you a notice to fix for carrying out building work without consent, including instant fines of up to $1,000. They can remove the building work if it is dangerous or insanitary.

HOW TO APPLY

As a minimum, the documents listed below must be included in your application. Depending type of application, additional documents might be required or requested while the Council/Territorial Authority (TA)/Building Consent Authority (BCA) process your application.

HOW TO SUBMIT YOUR APPLICATION

Check with the Council/TA/BCA you are applying to for more information on how to submit your application. Electronic submissions may be available with the relevant Council/TA/BCA on the simpli.govt.nz website.

APPLICATION FOR PROJECT INFORMATION MEMORANDUM AND/OR BUILDING CONSENT (FORM 2)

Official Use Only

Section 33 or 45, Building Act 2004

Building Consent

Amendment to Building Consent

Project Information Memorandum (PIM) complete only sections 1-6 and 10-12

Staged Building Consent - Stage number ______ of ______ expected number of stages.

Building Consent for a National Multi-use Approval (MultiProof) - MultiProof Number ________________

® No O Yes - provide details


Have you discussed your application with the Council / BCA before making this application?


List PIM, building and resource consents related to this project (if any):

Consent Number

Description

Are you applying for Owner-Builder exemption to complete the Restricted Building Work?

If Yes, complete and attach the 'Statutory Declaration as to Owner Builder Status (Form2B)'.

If No, complete and attach the 'Memorandum from Licensed Building Practitioner: Certificate of Design Work (form2A)'.

O No

O Yes

The first point of contact:

✓

Agent

Owner

Who should we contact for invoicing?

✓

Agent

Owner

Payee name for invoicing:

NAENAE COLLEGE

4. WHO IS INVOLVED?

In addition to the Designer, Architect and Engineers, provide the details of all licensed building practitioners who will be involved in carrying out or supervising the restricted building work. If these details are unknown at the time of the application, they must be supplied before the work begins. If you have additional roles to add, please use the table in Appendix A.

Name:

Ian Rattray

Entity or Company:

IR Group

Licensing class/ Role:

Design 2

LBP or Registration number:

Email:

frank@irgroup.co.nz

Street Address:

716 Main Road, Te Marua, Upper Hutt 5018

Mailing Address:

If different from street address

Contact numbers

Mobile:

021427347

Other:

Name:

Nigel Ball

Entity or Company:

Resolve It Architects

Licensing class/ Role:

Architect

LBP or Registration number:

Email:

nigel.ball@riarch.nz

Street Address:

171 Vivian Street, Te Aro, Wellington 6011

Mailing Address:

If different from street address

Contact numbers

Mobile:

04 830 2925

Other:

Does this application include the installation of a new or relocation of a solid fuel burner?

O Yes             ® No — Go to section 8

Make of the heater/burner:

Model of the heater/burner:

Design:

O Freestanding O Inbuild

Type of fuel:

Wetback connection:

ONew    O n/a

OExisting

Hearth construction type:

Hearth thickness:

mm

Specify the fixings of the hearth:

What is the floor constructed of?

n/a

Specify air gap between hearth and floor:

n/a

mm

Height of flue above roof ridge:

mm

Will the installation require new penetration through the roof or exterior wall?

If yes, specify the material the penetration will be made through

O No    O Yes

Type of flue kit:

Will the flue termination be more than 3m from any structure, including neighbours buildings?

O No O Yes

Distance from outer flue shield to framing timbers:

mm

Will the flue pass through more than one storey?

O No    O Yes

Will the proposed appliance need to be installed closer to combustible material than manufacturers recommendations?

O No — continue to section 8

O Yes

Distance hearth projects from the front of the heater:

mm

Distance hearth projects from the side of the heater:

mm

Distance from the centre of the chimney to the walls:

mm

Distance from the back of the heater to the wall:

mm

Is the heater installed on an angle to the walls?

O No   O Yes

Provide method of wall protection if required:

Are there any specified systems in the building? Residential cable cars are considered specified systems, see SS16

® Yes


O No — Go to section 10


You need to provide information on the specified systems contained on the compliance schedule for the building and, in the opinion of the personnel who installed them, are capable of performing to the performance standards set out in the building consent.

For more information on how to complete this section, see MBIE's Compliance Schedule Handbook

What is the existing compliance schedule number? (if applicable)

Risk Group: (for more information, see C/AS2)

Total occupancy numbers:

Highest fire hazard category for building use (insert number)

The following specified systems are contained on the compliance schedule for the building and, in the opinion of the personnel who installed them, are capable of performing to the performance standards set out in the building consent:

Specified System

60 C

*x LU

"D CU i_ CU 4-»

<

3 0) z

"D CU

<

■n <u

o E <u oe

(Ū

C

Performance Standards

Acceptable Solution, Verification Method, Standard or specific document

Inspection

Inspection Procedures may be identified by a written description, or a reference to a Standard or other document

Maintenance

Maintenance procedures may be identified by a written description, or a reference to a Standard or other document

Reporting

Reporting procedures may be identified by a written description, or a reference to a Standard or other document

Responsibility

List persons/ companies for the adjacent procedures

SS1   Automatic system for

fire suppression

O

O

O

O

O

SS2   Automatic or manual

emergency warning systems for fire or other dangers

O

O

O

O

O

NZS 4512:2003

Monthly by IQP Annually by IQP

Monthly by IQP Annually by IQP

All tests and maintenance to be recorded in log books complying with th

Wormald

2021-11-02

Application For Project Information Memorandum and/or Building Consent

Specified System

bo

LU

"D CU

4-»

<

3 O) Z

"D

<

■n <u

o E <u oe

(Ū

C

Performance Standards

Inspection

Maintenance

Reporting

Responsibility

SS3   Electromagnetic or automatic doors or windows

SS3.1 Automatic doors

o

o

o

o

o

SS3.2 Access control doors

©

o

o

o

o

C/AS2 Amendment 2 November 2020 3.15 and NZS 4239

By owner/occupier: Daily: Check doors are not locked, blocked, or barred By IQP:

Monthly by owner Annually by IQP

All tests and maintenance to be recorded in log books complying with th

IPQ

SS3.3 Interfaced fire or smoke doors or windows

o

o

o

o

o

C/AS2 Amendment 2 November 2020 3.15 and NZS 4178

By owner/occupier: Daily: Check doors are not locked, blocked, or barred By IQP:

Monthly by owner Annually by IQP

All tests and maintenance to be recorded in log books complying with th

IPQ

SS4   Emergency lighting

systems

o

o

o

o

o

AS 2293 as amended by F6/AS1 Amendment

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per AS 2293 Part 2

Monthly by owner Annually by IQP

Monthly by owner Annually by IQP

Wormald

SS5   Escape route

pressurisation systems

o

o

o

o

o

SS6   Riser mains for use by

fire services

o

o

o

o

o

2021-11-02

Application For Project Information Memorandum and/or Building Consent

Specified System

bo

LU

"D CU

U

4-»

<

3 O) Z

"D

<

■n

> o E u oe

(Ū

C

Performance Standards

Inspection

Maintenance

Reporting

Responsibility

SS7   Automatic backflow

preventers connected to a potable water supply

o

o

o

o

o

SS8   Lifts, escalators, travellators, or other systems for moving people or goods within buildings

SS8.1 Passenger-carrying lifts

o

o

o

o

o

SS8.2 Service lifts

o

o

o

o

o

SS8.3 Escalators and moving walkways

o

o

o

o

o

SS9   Mechanical ventilation

or air-conditioning systems

o

o

o

o

o

Fire and smoke control to AS 1668.1

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per AS 1851

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per AS 1851

Monthly by owner Annually by IQP

Monthly by owner Annually by IQP

SS10 Building maintenance units providing access to exterior and interior walls of buildings

o

o

o

o

o

SS11 Laboratory fume cupboards

o

o

o

o

o

2021-11-02

Application For Project Information Memorandum and/or Building Consent

SS12 Audio loops or other assistive listening systems

SS12.1 Audio loops

o

o

o

o

o

SS12.2 FM radio frequency and infrared beam transmission systems

o

o

o

o

o

SS13 Smoke control systems

SS13.1 Mechanical smoke control

o

o

o

o

SS13.2 Natural smoke control

o

o

o

o

o

SS13.3 Smoke curtains

o

o

o

o

o

SS14 Emergency power systems for, or signs relating to, a system or feature specified in SS1-13

SS14.1 Emergency power systems

o

o

o

o

o

SS14.2 Signs for systems

o

o

o

o

o

F8/AS1

Amendment 4 January 2017

Monthly by owner Annually by IQP

Monthly by owner Annually by IQP

By owner/occupier: Monthly: Ensure signs are in plac

2021-11-02

Application For Project Information Memorandum and/or Building Consent

Specified System

bo

LU

"D CU

4-»

<

3 O) Z

"D

<

■n <u

o E <u oe

(Ū

C

Performance Standards

Inspection

Maintenance

Reporting

Responsibility

SS15 Any or all of the following systems and features, so long as they form part of a building's means of escape from fire, and so long as those means also contain any or all of the systems or features specified in clauses 1 to 6, 9, and 13:

SS15.1 Systems for communicating spoken information intended to facilitate evacuation; and

o

o

o

o

o

SS15.2 Final exits

As defined by clause

A2 of the building code

o

o

o

o

o

NZBC C/AS1 Fire Safety or to the standard applicable at the time of install

All tests and maintenance to be recorded in log books complying wi

Monthly by Owner or agent Annually by IQP

Monthly by Owner or agent Annually by IQP

IPQ

SS15.3 Fire separations

o

o

o

o

NZBC C/AS1 Fire Safety or to the standard applicable at the time of install

Check integrity of wall & ceiling linings, door seals and closers.

Monthly by Owner. Annually by IQP

Monthly by Owner. Annually by IQP

IPQ

SS15.4 Signs for communicating information intended to facilitate evacuation

o

o

o

o

o

F8/AS1 Amendment 4 January 2017

By owner/occupier: Daily: Check doors are not locked, blocked, or barred Weekly: As per dail

By owner/occupier: Monthly: Ensure signs are in place where required, are legible, clean, and

By Owner or suitably qualified person.

IPQ

SS15.5 Smoke separations

o

o

o

o

o

SS16 Cable car

All buildings with a cable car, including single residential buildings, require a compliance schedule.

o

o

o

o

o

2021-11-02

Application For Project Information Memorandum and/or Building Consent

Please include the following document as part of your application. Additional documents might be requested as part of the assessment of your application. Incomplete applications may be returned unprocessed.

Proof of ownership

® Copy of Record of Title

O Copy of Lease Agreement

O Agreement for Sale & Purchase

O Other document showing the full name of the legal owner(s)

Project Information Memorandum (PIM)

Certificate attached to PIM

Development Contribution Notice

✓

Plans, specifications and other supporting information (Include information on the compliance method, e.g. where the work deviates from an Acceptable Solution method.)

Memorandum from Licensed Building Practitioner – Certificate of Design Work (Form 2A)

Statutory Declaration as to Owner Builder Status (Form 2B)

The Council/ Building Consent Authority (BCA)/ Territorial Authority (TA) will charge a fee for your application and any subsequent work involved in processing your application. The fee will include statutory levies payable to BRANZ and the Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment.

The information you have provided on this form is required so that your application or the building consent it relates to can be processed under the Building Act 2004. The Council, Territorial Authority (TA) or Building Consent Authority (BCA) collates statistics relating to building work and has a statutory obligation to provide information to third parties. The information is stored on a public register, which must be supplied to whoever requests the information. Under the Privacy Act 2020, you have the right to see and correct personal information the Council, TA and BCA hold about you.

In providing this information, you agree to your details being used for customer surveys carried out by the Council, TA or BCA.

All the information contained in the application is, to the best of my knowledge, true and correct.

I request that you issue a project information memorandum, project information memorandum and building consent, or building consent for the building work described in this application.

[✓ I understand that this application is to be assessed against Acceptable Solutions unless otherwise stated in section 8.

[✓ I understand that this application may only be made with the owner's approval.

Full name:

Frank Bourke

Signature:

Digital signatures acceptable

Digitally signed by Frank Bourke

Frank Bourke Date: 2022.08.28 13:12:09 +12'00'

Date:

21-07-2022

Appendix A – List of those involved in the build

Complete if additional space is required for Section 4

Name:

TBC

Entity or Company:

Licensing class:

LBP or Registration number:

Email:

Street Address:

Mailing Address:

If different from street address

Contact numbers

Mobile:

Other:

Name:

Entity or Company:

Licensing class:

LBP or Registration number:

Email:

Street Address:

Mailing Address:

If different from street address

Contact numbers

Mobile:

Other:

Name:

Entity or Company:

Licensing class:

LBP or Registration number:

Email:

Street Address:

Mailing Address:

If different from street address

Contact numbers

Mobile:

Other:

Name:

Entity or Company:

Licensing class:

LBP or Registration number:

Email:

Street Address:

Mailing Address:

If different from street address

Contact numbers

Mobile:

Other:

simph 2021-11-02     Application For Project Information Memorandum and/or Building Consent

MULTI RESIDENTIAL DWELLING, INDUSTRIAL OR COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS CHECKLIST

Adobe Reader is required to fill this form out online. Download for free: get.adobe.com/reader/

Address: Naenae College, 910 High Street, Avalon, Lower Hutt

You can submit this checklist electronically with the rest of your application by selecting ‘Apply for it’ under the ‘Do it here’ menu at huttcity.govt.nz. The address to post or deliver your application is:

Environmental Consents Division, Hutt City Council, 30 Laings Road, Private Bag 31912, Lower Hutt 5040.

For additional help go to: huttcity.govt.nz/apply-online/ or phone 04 570 6666.

Once you have attached all the required information, please check for completeness as an incomplete application or lack of any supporting information will mean that your application cannot be accepted for processing.

0 a Building Consent Application form (one (1) copy)

Completed and signed by the owner or by an agent on behalf of the owner.

0    b  Signatures

0   d  Contacts

h List building consents previously issued

0    j   Proof of ownership (one (1) copy)

One recent copy of current certificate/s of title (i.e. not older than three (3) months) or where applicable one copy of purchase agreement (if recently purchased) or one copy of relevant portions of current lease.

k Consent notices

l Easement notices

Environmental Consents | Hutt City Council | 30 Laings Road, Private Bag 31912, Lower Hutt 5040 | huttcity.govt.nz | 04 570 6666

ECB-FORM-337 | June 2019

m Building over two allotments

n Geotechnical reports

0 p   Locality plan (1:500) showing:

Physical location of the subject building in relation to streets or landmarks, north point, name of building and Lot and DP number.

Inspections and monitoring - details of proposed inspection regime including:

0     r   Professionals eg, Architects, certification to be supplied on completion

0     s   Engineers, certification to be supplied on completion

u   Product statements and other documentation to be supplied on completion.

Application fee

0 v Applications will not be accepted without payment of the appropriate fees. Fees payable are set out in the published fee schedule of Council that has jurisdiction over the project site.

Complete for all projects involving demolition of significant parts of buildings or the demolition or removal of whole buildings that are three or more storeys.

Note: Where the project is ONLY for the complete removal or demolition of a building you are not required to complete any further sections

0 a Means of barricading the site

Provide details of temporary barriers, gates which swing inwards or other means of restricting public access to the area

b Proposed tipping location for demolition materials (address/landfill)

c Hazardous building materials

Provide safety plan detailing the safe handling and disposal of hazardous materials

d Site management plan covering management to control silt run off, noise and dust

e Proposed destination for relocated building

f Access to and from the site (including use of kerb and crossings)

g Specify termination of existing services:

Details about the building such as:

h Number of storeys, type of materials the building is constructed of (note: Photographs of the building would be useful)

0 i The extent of your work. You will need to contact the relevant service authorities specified below to advise them of the extent of:

Electricity, gas, drainage, water, transport, telecommunications, cable television or any other services that may be affected.

j Transportation of relocated building

You will be required to contact and provide details to Council's Transportation and Traffic Department

k Does the relocated building have a code compliance certificate from where it has been removed

0 l Existing wind zone for the building

Existing floor plan (1:100/1:50) showing:

0    a   Dimensions of internal floor plate

0    b   Location of exits

c   Location and dimensions of lifts and lift cars including doors

d   Location and dimensions of exit stairs or exit ways

0    e  Exit door sizes

0 f   Location and dimension of toilets and cleaners sink

0    g  Reasonably practicable

Your proposal is required to fully comply with the building code. Where upgrading to fully comply with the building code for the above is not proposed you are required to supply supporting documentation making the case as to why it is not reasonably practicable to do so.

0 h Means of escape from fire

Assessment of means of escape for the whole building including floor plans showing egress routes to safe place. The assessment must incorporate a statement that the assessor is suitably experienced /qualified and has carried out a site inspection as part of the assessment.

0 i   Accessibility (for buildings/uses listed in schedule 2 of the building act 2004) assessment of access

and facilities for people with disabilities for the whole building. The assessment must incorporate a statement that the assessor is suitably experienced/qualified and has carried out a site visit inspection as part of the assessment.

Application for discretion re upgrades (pursuant to section 112(2) of the building act 2004) including:

j   Supporting information as to why the project would not proceed if the building was required to

comply.

k   Description of improvements proposed related to means of escape from fire and access and

facilities for people with disabilities.

Complete for all existing buildings where the proposal will change the established use of all or part of the building.

In addition to the assessment of means of escape documentation must also include assessment of the whole building for structural stability in fire and protection afforded to other sleeping areas and other property.

Assessment against non-specific codes (NZS 3604 and NZS 4229) or engineering assessment included as part of the structural specific design.

Assessment of existing facilities within the building comparative to current code and levels of amenity provided by the Acceptable solutions

An assessment of the building is required with respect to all building code clauses. If the proposal is for the project to meet anything less than full compliance with any clauses of the building code.

Complete for all buildings with uses listed in Schedule 2 of the Building Act 2004.

Access and facilities for the disabled (1:100/1:50) for the whole building showing:

Complete for all new buildings, or existing buildings where the footprint of the building will change or where an additional storey is being added

0 a Site Plan (1:100) showing:

Dimensions of all boundaries, north point, finished floor levels, ground contours (extended to boundaries) and/or levels, site area, street name and number, Lot and DP number, outline of building and distances to boundaries. Include on the site plan the designated wind zone of the site (eg, specific design, extra high, very high, high, medium or low)

b Foundation plan (1:100/1:50) showing:

c Subfloor bracing

Provide subfloor bracing plan and calculations for all piled structures. Where the structure is specifically engineered, this should be included with the structural calculations.

Subfloor bracing plan and calculations are required where an additional storey is to be added.

d Foundation details

Details including reinforcing and connections

Complete for new buildings and for projects with existing walls removed or new walls added

0 a Proposed floor plans (1:100/1:50) showing:

b Lighting plan (1:100/1:50) showing:

c Bracing plan (1:100/1:50) showing:

d Sections and details (1:50/1:20/1:10) showing:

loads require specific design

e Product certification

f Alternative solutions: if the proposal uses products or systems that are not covered in the acceptable solutions of clause E2 of the building code:

Complete for all projects incorporating specific structural design. Refer to Council's building consent producer statements policy and procedure (ECB-POL-002)

a Structural calculations

with this application along with structural drawings.

b Producer statements

Zealand Building Code, a copy must be attached with this application. (note all structural producer statements are required to have accompanying calculations)

Complete for all new buildings and for existing buildings where there are alterations to the external shell.

0 a Elevations (1:100/1:50) showing:

b Risk assessment (Risk matrix in E2/AS1 may be used)

0 c Roof and cladding details

d Product certification

e Alternative solutions

Complete for all projects with new installation or alteration of plumbing or drainage services

Plumbing and drainage plan (1:100) showing:

Complete for all applications

0 a Fire report

b Proposed fire protection plan (1:100/1:50) showing: (if applicable).

c Alternative solutions

d Reasonably practicable

e FENZ (Fire and Emergency New Zealand) Referral

Complete for all applications

Note: The specification must be specific to the project and cover all aspects of the proposed work.

0        Specification

H1 analysis including methodology and calculation

Analysis for HVAC, air flow ,solar gains and lighting energy where applicable

Complete for all buildings that contain systems or features that are required

New compliance schedule for the proposed building work

Provide a list of the following:

Amendment to an existing compliance schedule for the proposed building work

Provide a list of all specified systems that are being:

a altered or added in the course of the building work, details of the systems, proposed maintenance and testing regime for inclusion in the compliance schedule, or

b removed from the building in the course of the building work and an explanation of why this is happening.

Complete for all buildings

Gantries and hoardings

Certificate Application if required

Site management plan covering

Provide safety plan detailing the safe handling and disposal of hazardous materials.

Complete for all projects where the building use involves the storage, or use of, or processing with hazardous substances, including explosive, radioactive, toxic or flammable materials and compressed gases

Details

b Individual container size and aggregate volume HSNO report

c Name of test certifier and HSNO scope covering

Plans and specifications describing

d Spaces where hazardous substances are stored and used and the method of disposal of waste

e Consideration of containment, pressure relief, electrical hazardous area zoning and ventilation

Fire Report

f Include specific consideration of these activities

Complete for all projects with an intended use including the manufacture, storage, preparation or sale of food products

Food premises

Hair salons

Doctor surgeries

Early childcare facilities

Health clinics

Dentistry

Funeral premises

Details:

system proposed

The issue of a building consent does not relieve the owner of any duty or responsibility under any other act. Please check with your local territorial authority regarding the requirement for other approvals required and fees payable. These may include:

Consents under the Resource Management Act

Vehicle access

Road openings

Health licensing

Liquor licensing

Trade waste licensing

Earthquake strengthening requirements

Heritage New Zealand

GHD easements, water meters and backflow devices

Wellington Water, services and inundation

Greater Wellington Regional Council, inundation

0        Ministry of Education

A guidance document is available to help complete the section in the application form on ‘means of compliance’ for each building code clause.

COMPLIANCE SCHEDULE

Section 103, Building Act 2004

huti^ty

^^ TE AWA KAIRANGI

THE BUILDING

Street address:

914 High Street                 Building name:           NAENAE COLLEGE

AVALON 5011

Level/unit number:

Ground level + Level 1              Location within site or     Refer to page 9

(Special Needs Unit: Single level) block number:

Year first constructed:

(Special Needs Unit: 2013)        Intended life of the          Indefinite

building if 50 years or less:

Current lawfully established use:

COLLEGE / SPECIAL CARE FACILITY

Occupancy:         1886

School (1775)

SNU (111)

Fire Hazard Class:        2

Purpose Group: CL / SC

Legal description of land:

Pt LOT 1 DP 19671

THE OWNER

Name:

Ministry Of Education

Street address or registered office:

C/- ARGEST Ground floor 155 The Terrace Wellington Central

Wellington 6011

Contact person:

Rob Wilson (AGENT)

Phone numbers:

Mailing address:

C/- ARGEST

Landline:

04 472 7905 (AGENT)

PO Box 10145

The Terrace

Mobile:

029 472 7905 (AGENT)

Wellington 6143

Daytime:

04 472 7905 (AGENT)

Email:

rwilson@argest.com (AGENT)

After hours:

0800 274 378 (AGENT)

Website:

www.argest.com (AGENT)

Fax number:

04 473 1111 (AGENT)

Compliance Schedule No: CS656

1 of 14

SUMMARY OF SPECIFIED SYSTEMS

SS1

- Automatic systems for fire suppression

SS2

- Automatic or manual emergency warning systems for fire or other danger

SS3/3

- Interfaced fire or smoke doors or windows

SS4

- Emergency lighting systems

SS7

- Automatic back-flow preventers connected to a potable water supply

SS8/1

- Passenger carrying lifts

SS9

- Mechanical ventilation or air conditioning systems

SS11

- Laboratory fume cupboards

SS14/2

- Signs for systems

SSI 5/2

- Final exits

SS15/3

- Fire separations

SSI 5/4

- Signs for communicating information intended to facilitate evacuation

SS15/5

- Smoke separations

Location

Acceptable solution

Risk Group

Escape lieight

Area m-

Occupant density nr p

Occupant loads

Classroom 1

C7AS4

CA

0

80

2

40

Classroom 2

C/AS4

CA

0

74

2

37

Tech room

C/AS4

CA

0

38

10

4

Recording room

C/AS4

CA

0

23

10

3

Staff room

C/AS4

CA

0

20

5

4

Studio 1,2 & 4

C/AS4

CA

0

44

10

5

Store, lobby etc

C/AS4

CA

0

0'

Total occupant load

93

Music Hall and

C/AS4

CA

0

400

-

700

Storage

C/AS4

CA

0

74

2

o'

Music/Dance/Drama

Performance

C/AS4

CA

0

100

2

50'

Total occupant load

700

G2

Library

320 m2

10m2/person

32

Teaching laboratories

440 m2

5 m’/peraon

88

Offices

61 m2

10 m2/porson

7

G3

Workshop

96 m2

10m2/person

10

G4

Classrooms

328 m2

2 m2/porson

164

G5

Classrooms

198 m2

2 m2/person

99

U1

Staff room

193 m2

5 m’/person

39

Classrooms

241m2

2 m’/person

121

U2

Classrooms

292 m2

2m*/person

146

U3

Classrooms

352 m2

2 m2/person

176

U4

Classrooms

200 m2

2 m’/person

100

SPECIFIED SYSTEMS

System or sub-system

Performance standards

Inspection, maintenance & reporting procedures

SS1 - Automatic systems for fire suppression

Fire sprinkler system Only at Special Needs Unit

TYPE 7

NZS 4541:2007

Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems

NZS 4541:2007 Part 12: Routine Testing, Maintenance and

Inspection

Inspections and maintenance by IQP

SS2 - Automatic or manual emergency warning systems for fire or other danger

Naenae College buildings

Vigilant Tyco Automatic fire alarm

(manual call points with thermal and smoke detection)

TYPE 4 - MX1 Analogue Addressable Fire Panel

NZS 4512:2010

Fire detection and alarm systems in buildings

NZS 4512 Part 6: Maintaining Systems in Compliance and good working order

Testing:         Monthly by IQP

Survey:         Annually by IQP

Survey tests must include the interface with the operation of Smoke Stop Doors by the activation smoke detectors on either side of the smoke door.

Special Needs Unit

Automatic fire alarm (manual call points with smoke detection)

TYPE 4 - Notifier Analogue Addressable Fire Panel Visual and Audio alarms.

NZS 4512:2010

Fire detection and alarm systems in buildings

NZS 4512 Part 6: Maintaining Systems in Compliance and good working order

Testing:         Monthly by IQP

Survey:         Annually by IQP

Survey tests must include any interfaces with operation of smoke/fire control or egress route doors or lifts where present.

SS3/3 - Electromagnetic or automatic doors or windows

Electromagnetic held-open type released on fire alarm (fire / smoke control door)

Also at Special Needs Unit (note: some rooms are provided with electric mortise locks, i.e. delayed action unlocking devices)

AS/NZS 1905.1:1997

Inspections:

Monthly by Owner to ensure the correct release of hold open devices on receipt of signal from Emergency Warning System or operation of associated smoke detector. The test must be co-ordinated with the IQP performing the Emergency Warning System test.

Place all doors in the held open position.

Test the Operation of the Emergency Warning system as per the compliance schedule requirements or apply calibrated test smoke to associated smoke detector.

Inspect each door to ensure release has occurred.

Record performance of test

Advise IQP of any door that failed to release and repair urgently.

Annual Inspection:        By IQP

Perform test procedure of Monthly Inspection.

SS4 - Emergency lighting systems

Emergency Lighting

Only at Special Needs Unit

See note under SS15/4 (Inspection, maintenance & reporting procedures)

AS/NZS2293.1995 Part 1

AS2293.1:2005 - (Emergency escape lighting and exit signs) Part 1: System design, installation, operation

AS2293.3:2005 - (Escape luminaries and exit signs) Part 3: Emergency escape luminaries and exit signs

AS/NZS 2293.2:1995 - Emergency evacuation lighting for buildings - Inspection and maintenance

Inspection:       6 monthly by a suitably qualified person or

IQP in accordance with the NZ Standard.

Surveys:        Annually by IQP

Maintenance:    By Owner.

All tests and maintenance to be recorded in log books complying with the relevant Standard.

SS7 - Automatic back-flow preventers connected to a potable water supply

Make: Wilkins RPZ 20mm

Model: 375 RP

s/n: A104193

Location: ZONE

Science Room 6 in cupboard under sink at north wall

Make: Watts DOV 15mm

Model: 007 M3

s/n: 10174

Location: Science Room 5 in cupboard under sink, SW corner of room

AS/NZS 2845.1:1998

Water supply

AS 2845.3:1993 Water supply - Backflow prevention devices - Field testing and maintenance

Testing:          Annually by IQP. Carry out the tests and

checks detailed in the relevant Manual/Standard.

Maintenance:    By IQP. Repair or replace the back-flow

preventer immediately any defect is apparent.

SS8/1 - Passenger carrying lifts

NZS 4332:1997

Non-domestic passenger and goods lifts.

NZS 4332 section 2.5 Maintenance and inspection

Inspection:      Annually by IQP

Maintenance:    By IQP in accordance with manufacturer's

or supplier's recommendations. The period between maintenance and servicing checks shall be dependent on the level of usage of the lift. It shall never exceed 6 months, but could be up to fortnightly.

SS9 - Mechanical ventilation or air conditioning systems

Mechanical Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems

Location of equipment: (P13)

Refer to:

AS 1668.2:2002 Ventilation and air conditioning in buildings

NZS 4303:1990 Ventilation for acceptable indoor air quality NZS 4302:1987 Code of practice-control of hygiene in air and water systems in buildings

The annual test shall include a test of the operation of any interface with any emergency warning system for fire or fire detection system.

Inspection:       By qualified owner or IQP (as required).

Tests:            By IQP (maximum interval - annually).

Survey:         Minimum of annually by IQP

Maintenance:    By IQP

Kitchen/laundry/bathroom extraction systems.

Fresh air systems

  • •    Welding

  • •    Kitchen

  • •    Kitchen SNU

  • •    Canteen SNU

  • •    Toilet SNU

  • •    Hall

  • •    Hall

NZ Building Code G4 AS 1668.2:2002

(Section 5 Mechanical Ventilation Exhaust Systems)

AS/NZS 1668.1:1998 (Section 11 Kitchen Hood Exhaust Systems)

Owner to remedy defects immediately they are apparent.

Owner to report annually on condition and performance of single independent supply or extract systems when fan(s) provide the sole method of air change.

IQP to report annually on condition and performance of combined extract systems for multiple dwellings.

Windsor ME250 Sawdust Extraction System

Location: Tech block

Refer to designer's specifications & drawings for performance requirements; contractor's operating and maintenance manual for inspection and maintenance requirements

Maintenance:    Quarterly by owner

Inspection:      Annual performance checks by IQP

SS11 - Laboratory fume cupboards

2 x Fume cupboards

Thermoplastic Educare

Location: Science wing.

2 x FC’s in room 6 & Chern Prep Rm R6.

AS/NZS 2243.8:2006 Safety in laboratories Part 8: Fume cupboards

In the absence of any original references or manufacturer's instructions, refer to relevant parts of AS/NZS 2243.8:2001 Section 5

Inspection: Annual by IQP

SS14/2 - Signs

(relating to one or more of the specified systems 1-13)

Signs for systems

SS1

SS2

SS3/3

SS4

SS8/1

SS9

SS11

The Standard(s) that the specified system was installed to.

Inspection:      Monthly by Owner

Annually by IQP.

Annual inspection by IQP for the specified system to which the signage relates.

Maintenance:    By owner / IQP

All tests and maintenance to be recorded in log books complying with the relevant Standard

SS15/2 - Final exits

Final exits

Naenae College all final exists

Special Needs Unit 3 x final exits

(REFER TO PLANS)

NZBC C/AS1 Fire Safety or to the standard applicable at the time of installation and last lawful approval.

Inspection:      Monthly by Owner or agent

Annually by IQP

Ensure escape route is free from obstructions, able to be used without the need for any key or tool.

SS15/3 - Fire separations

Special Needs Unit

Boiler adjacent to the Special Needs Unit building [60/60/60]

Note: The Special Needs Building does NOT have any fire cell or fire separation as per the fire report with the exception of the above.

Refer to Fire Report drawing number FSK21 attached

(REFER TO PLANS)

NZBC C/AS1 Fire Safety or to the standard applicable at the time of installation and last lawful approval.

Inspection:      Monthly by Owner.

Annually by IQP

Check integrity of wall & ceiling linings, door seals and closers.

Maintain fire separations to ensure continued functional operation.

SS15/4 - Signs for communicating information intended to facilitate evacuation

(part of a means of escape from fire which contains one or more of the specified systems 1-6, 9 and 13)

Signs for communicating information intended to facilitate evacuation.

(REFER TO PLANS)

NZBC F8/AS1 Signs or to the standard applicable at the time of installation and last lawful approval.

Inspection:      Monthly by Owner

Annually by IQP.

Maintenance: By Owner or suitably qualified person.

Signs shall be refurbished before they become illegible and shall be replaced immediately if missing.

Maintain signage to ensure continued functional operation.

Illuminated EXIT signage at SNU

(REFER TO PLANS)

AS/NZS2293.1995 Part 1

AS2293.1:2005 - (Emergency escape lighting and exit signs) Part 1: System design, installation, operation

AS2293.3:2005 - (Escape luminaries and exit signs) Part 3: Emergency escape luminaries and exit signs

AS/NZS 2293.2:1995 - Emergency evacuation lighting for buildings - Inspection and maintenance

Inspection:       6 monthly by a suitably qualified person or

IQP in accordance with the NZ Standard.

Surveys:        Annually by IQP

Maintenance:    By Owner.

All tests and maintenance to be recorded in log books complying with the relevant Standard.

Note: Where illumination of signage is necessary, the procedures of SS 4 should be used to verify that illumination occurs for the required duration. Where available, signage should be inspected in accordance with the published Standard or the performance specification of the associated specified system.

SS15/5 - Smoke separations

Smoke separation

Smoke control doors at Special Needs Unit

(REFER TO PLANS)

NZBC C/AS1 Fire Safety or to the standard applicable at the time of installation and last lawful approval.

Inspection:      Monthly by Owner.

Annually by IQP

Check integrity of wall & ceiling linings, door seals and closers.

Maintain smoke separations to ensure continued functional operation.

Original CS issued date:      25 July 1994

BWoF annual renewal date:      * 01 May

Draft CS dates:

■ 13 February 2014 (based on BC120716)

- 01 August 2016 (based on BC160286)

Signature:

Adam Wheeler

Building Warrant of Fitness Officer On behalf of Hutt City Council

Amendment dates:

Note

On 18 July 2013, it was agreed with ARGEST (agent for the Ministry of Education for BWoF purposes) that the BWoF for all the state schools will be renewed on 1 May each year with the exception of:

• Kimi Ora School (CS1646):              10 February each year

o Hutt Valley Activity Centre (CS1573):     29 May      each year

The current compliance schedule reflects this agreement.

PLANS

Final exit doors at locations C. D & G are to be provided with electric mortice locks for security. Under normal operation these require a swipe card to operate. These locks are to release automatically on fire alarm activation (which includes smoke detection in inis building, and on a fire alarm elsewhere in the school which requires evacuation cl the school). They arc also lo be fail-safci'fail-opon, ano be provided with an omorgoncy release button behind a frangible panel.


BC120716


LEGEND

DEOP

TOP

exi r

EXIT

EXIT

Ground Floor Plan

Suggested exit s<gn location farrows as appropriate)

A-B E-F

A-B-C A-B-D E-F-G



'ravel route


Maximum Travel Distances


15m < 10m OK

10m < 18m OK


25m < 45m OK

26m < 45m OK

22m < 45m OK


AMENDMENT


GRANTED

8/06/2013


HUTT CITY COUNCIL


HUTJ^TY


• Drawing Tula

Egress Provisions

• Project:

Naonae Special Needs Unit

• Dato 27/5/13

• Project No:

9944

• Scale NTS

• Drg No

FSK11

• Rev: C

• Issued

Consent

• Drawn: Joanna Williams

^^^ Wi/C***

s &T


STEPHENSON ^TURNER ARCHITECTS


Naenae College Special Needs Unit


9944


A-22O


E


LEGEND

Sprinkler Va Ve

Manual Call Point

Fire Safely Precaution* to be provided: a type 7 fire alarm system throughout - oomprising a sprinkler protection system complying with NZS4541 as modified by Appendix D of C/ASt and a manual fire alarm system complying with NZS 4512.

Extent of sprinkler protection:

Fire extinguishers or nose reels are not required for compliance with the building code, but may be recommended by the NZ Fira Service as part of the evacuation scheme approval. These should be located in areas under leecher supervision.

Fire separations

90/90/99 Fire Rating -.-.

tire


from adjacent trading


1h«i 13b from Iw tic* # Mluttnq. Hit nt*


DreMng TC® Fire Safety Precautions


Protect:


Naanae Special Needs Unit


Date 31/7/12


Protect No: 9944


Scale MTS


Or® No.: FSK21


Rev. B


tawed:   Tender/Conaent


Drawn. Joanna Williams


wi4iu^f


Naonac CoSogo Spocml Needs Unit


ENGINEERS

CREAHNG [i<5P1ROTOMAL


Ground Floor Ann


EWVWMWBMW


9944


A-220


—— (60)/60/60 rRR walla with -/60/306m doora — (90)00/30 rRR walls with -/30/303m doors •—• New lift enclosure


Proposed Now

Lift Location

77 m total pp^n path



New door to bo installed




G5

CARPARKS



21422 Naenaa ColiEoe Lift Installation

BdkSing Consent


FIRE ENGINEERING DESIGN


oaoe 15


——  (60)/60/60 FRR walls with -/60/30Sm doors

BUILDING CONSENT

GRANTED 22/08'2016

HUTT COY COUNCIL

HJl/!'!

21422 Naenae College Lift Installation Bui e ng Consent


FIRE ENGINEERING DESIGN


page 16


Those documents must be retained on site. Inspections may not be carried out If they are not. ____________________]


BUILDING CONSENT


BC1T0709


GRANTED

4110/2017


HUTT CITY COUNCIL wrv<r»


From the rear of admin block


A214


Ministry of Education

Naenae College Must Slock 930 High St Avalon. Lower Hutt


Dead end path length = 11 m

Total open path length = 24 m


'87513


iq m.


Proposed Floor Plan *

Accessibility Report


Dead end path length = 2 m Total open path length = 33 m


98.6 sq m


■ ■!■■■■■■■


From main block to cafeteria and then to the hall


P0Boi3S3«

Wellington MaC Centre 51X5

New Zealand

PH *64-4-920 0032

FAX *64-4-920 0031

designgroup5t3pLatoneLUott.cr_.hr


Two accessible routes


Dead end path length = 20 m Total open path length = 42 m


REVISED 13/9/2017          ..........................~.........

HUTT CITY Propocod Root Plan for AooeccIiNllty

COUNCI©^^------


^ Dead End Open Path ^ Total Open Path


Required illuminated exit sign in accordance with F8/AS1

Required e^Staency lighting coveraq to F6/AS1

cl uslgng rc-up stapleton elliott


STEPHENSON &TURNER ENGINEERS

FIRE ENGINEERING DESIGN

for

ADMIN BLOCK

NAENAE COLLEGE 910 HIGH STREET

AVALON

LOWER HUTT

for

NAENAE COLLEGE BOARD OF TRUSTEES

Stephenson & Turner New Zealand Limited Architects and Building Services Engineers

PO Box 11393 Wellington

For Consent

July 2021

24523

CONTENTS

Document Control

Prepared by:

Reviewed by:

J. King

BE, DipEngFire, CPEng


A. Fiton

MSc (Fire Engineering), MEngNZ

Table 1 – Quality Assurance

Rev

Date Issued

Comment

0

28/07/2021

For Consent

1 INTRODUCTION

This is the Fire Engineering Design for the proposed alterations of the Admin Block at Naenae College at 910 High Street, Avalon, Lower Hutt. The design demonstrates compliance with the performance requirements of the New Zealand Building Code that relate to fire safety, to the extent required by the Building Act 2004.

The building is a two storey building containing classrooms, school hall, music department, cafeteria, administration area and library, and associated spaces.

It is proposed to alter the layout of the administration area. The proposed layout is shown on the attached sketches.

The proposed alterations do not constitute a change of use.

A fire engineering design for the building was documented in “Fire Engineering Design”, dated August 2016 by Stephenson & Turner Ltd. The report used the now superseded New Zealand Acceptable Solution C/AS4 as the basis for identifying the fire safety requirements for the building. The previous fire design is attached in Section 8.3 of this report.

The building has an escape height of less than 4m.

The proposed work is an alteration to an existing building and therefore the fire engineering design of the building is to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of Sections 17 and 112 of the Building Act 2004:

17 All building work must comply with building code

All building work must comply with the building code to the extent required by this Act, whether or not a building consent is required in respect of that building work.

112 Alterations to existing buildings

provisions of the building code that relate to—

before the building work began, continue to comply with those provisions; or

This design does not address sanitary facilities, structural performance or access, and facilities for persons with disabilities beyond any specific allowances for additional provisions identified in the egress design.

This design addresses the requirements within the building only, up to the point where escape routes reach the final exit.

The building is assessed as risk group CA (C/AS2 Table 1.1). This design uses Acceptable Solution C/AS2 Amendment 2 2020 to determine the requirements for full compliance with the New Zealand Building Code. This design includes “as nearly as is reasonably practicable” analysis to determine compliance to the extent required by the Building Act 2004.

This design also follows the “Fire and safety design requirements for schools” dated July 2008 and additional requirements from the “Addendum to Fire and Safety Design Requirements for Schools”, dated May 2018 by the Ministry of Education (MoE), which are taken into account where more stringent than the Building Code requirements. It is noted that these requirements are at the discretion of the Ministry to enforce.

The New Zealand Building Act 2004 and compliance with the Building Code address the issues of life safety, protection of neighbouring property, and allowing fire-fighting operations. They specify minimum standards for compliance and do not address the prevention or restriction of damage by fire to the subject building or its contents. Such provisions are beyond the requirements of the Act, and are matters for the owner and their insurers to address separately.

Under Section 75 of the Fire and Emergency New Zealand Act 2017, the Fire and Emergency New Zealand Regulations 2018 will apply to this building. When required, an application must be made to Fire and Emergency New Zealand for approval of an evacuation scheme.

This design does not address the presence of any dangerous goods in the building. Any such goods used or stored within the building should comply with the dangerous goods regulations.

The following general assumptions have been made as part of the fire engineering design:

Further, in the assessment of the fire design of the building, the following assumptions are implicit:

It is assumed that the contents of this fire report have been read, understood, and incorporated within designs by other trades or disciplines. Stephenson and Turner Ltd disclaims any responsibility for designs by other trades or disciplines.

The occupant number is taken from the referenced fire design, or from the occupant load from C/AS2 Table 1.2 for the area of alteration. The table below details the occupancy:

Location

Area (m2)

Occupant Density (m2/p)

Occupancy1 (persons)

G1

Hall

400

0.8

500

Admin

440

10

44

Music

510

5

102

Cafeteria

170

1.25

136

G2

Library

320

10

32

Teaching Laboratories

440

5

88

Offices

61

10

7

G3

Workshop

96

10

10

G4

Classrooms

328

2

164

G5

Classrooms

198

2

99

U1

Staffroom

193

5

39

Classrooms

241

2

121

U2

Classrooms

292

2

146

U3

Classrooms

352

2

176

U4

Classrooms

200

2

100

Total

9502

1 It is not expected that all areas would contain the maximum occupancy simultaneously

For convenience, rooms being used intermittently such as circulation spaces, toilet facilities, storerooms, etc. are not considered in the above Table as the occupants using these rooms are counted elsewhere in the building.

The floor area of an unsprinklered firecell shall not exceed 5,000m2 (C/AS2 Table 2.1).

The Ground Floor is divided into five firecells and Level 1 is divided into four firecells. Each stair is also a separate firecell except the south west stair which is not fire separated from the Ground Floor.

Based on the referenced fire design, the existing firecells in the building are less than 5,000m2 and comply with this requirement.

Refer to Section 5.5.1 for internal fire separation requirements.

As per the referenced fire design, the building is fitted with an automatic smoke detection and manual fire alarm system throughout. The system is expected to be in compliance with NZS 4512.

Except for the firecell G3, each firecell has a maximum expected occupant load between 100 and 1000 people and the maximum escape height is less than 4m. The floor between the levels is assumed to be a fire separation, and there are no intermediate floors nor sleeping firecells in the building.

The required fire safety systems are a Type 4 automatic smoke detection and manual fire alarm system and a Type 18 building hydrant system (C/AS2 Table 2.2b).

The Type 18 building hydrant system is not required to be considered under Section 112 of the Building Act 2004.

The existing Type 4 fire safety system meets the minimum requirements. The existing fire alarm system is to be altered as necessary to suit the new layout, in accordance with NZS 4512.

Refer to Section 6.1 for the additional Ministry requirements.

The fire resistance ratings of internal fire separations are to be based on the life rating of 60 minutes (C/AS2 Table 2.4). Internal fire separations are addressed in Section 5.5.1 of this report.

The fire resistance ratings of external fire separations are to be based on the property rating of 120 minutes (C/AS2 Table 2.4). External fire separations are addressed in Section 5.6 of this report.

1 Firecell G3 is permitted with a single escape route because it contains less than 50 occupants, the escape height is less than 10m and has a maximum open path length less than the permitted dead-end open path length (C/AS2 3.13.1).

The number of escape routes complies with the requirement.

The clear height shall be no less than 2100mm across the full width except that landings, stairways and corridors (less than 2m in length) may reduce the required height by no more than 100mm. Any door opening within, or giving access to, any escape route shall have a clear height of no less than 1955 mm for the required width of the opening (C/AS2 3.3.1).

The escape route heights meet these requirements.

Permitted escape route lengths are given in C/AS2 Table 3.2. The permitted and measured maximum escape route lengths are as follows (taken from the referenced fire design):

Dead End Open Path

Total Open Path

Location

Permitted DEOP1

Measured DEOP

Permitted TOP2

Measured TOP

G2

40m

13m

100m

77m

G3

40m

15m

100m

N/A

U3

40m

15m

100m

75m

1

2

Escape route lengths are marked on the attached sketches and referenced fire design. The proposed and existing escape route lengths comply with the requirements.

The minimum required width for escape routes that are not accessible routes (C/AS2 3.3.2c):

These can be reduced to 700mm for horizontal travel within dead end open paths.

The total required width in unsprinklered firecells shall still be available should the widest of the escape routes be unusable (C/AS2 3.3.2d) and allow 7mm/person for horizontal travel and 9mm/person for vertical travel (C/AS2 3.3.2a). Required and provided escape route widths are as follows:

Firecell

Number of occupants

Horizontal width required

Vertical width required

G1

782

5,474mm

N/A

G2

127

889mm

N/A

G3

10

70mm

N/A

G4

164

1,148mm

N/A

G5

99

693mm

N/A

U1

160

1,120mm

1,440mm

U2

146

1,022mm

1,314mm

U3

176

1,232mm

1,584mm

U4

100

700mm

900mm

As noted in the referenced fire design, the escape route widths comply with the above requirements.

The requirements for doors on escape routes are given in C/AS2 3.15.

Doors on escape routes shall be hinged or pivoted on one vertical edge only, except that sliding doors may be used where the space has an occupant load of less than 20. The doors existing doors are expected to meet this requirement.

Door handles shall comply with D1/AS1 for use by people with disabilities.

Doors shall be constructed to ensure that the forces required to open these doors do not exceed those able to be applied:

When the building is lawfully occupied locking devices shall:

allow the door to open in the normal manner. If the pressing of a button close to the door is required, it shall have signage complying with F8/AS1, and

o  Automatically switch to the unlocked fail-safe condition, or

o  Be fitted with a push button or switch that releases the lock and allows the door

to be opened from the inside (without a swipe card or key code). This push button or switch may be placed behind a break-glass panel but must be clearly labelled “Emergency door release”.

Doors on escape routes shall be hung to open in the direction of escape except if the number of occupants in the space using the door as an escape route is less than 50. The existing doors are expected to comply with this requirement.

Doors on open paths shall provide an unobstructed opening width no less than 760mm, and when multi-leaf, have no single leaf less than 500mm. The minimum width may be reduced to 600mm if the route is not required to be an accessible route. The existing door widths are expected to meet these requirements.

Within exitways (including entry and final exit doors), the minimum exitway width required is 875mm within horizontal safe paths and vertical safe paths.

Doors shall open no less than 90°, open onto a floor area which extends for a distance of no less than the arc of the door swing and is at the same level on both sides of the door for the full width of the escape route.

When opened, doors shall not cause the door swing to obstruct the minimum required width of any escape route.

The doors including the main entrance shall provide free egress in the direction of escape at all times.

Doors on escape routes (whether or not the doors are fire doors) shall be fitted with simple fastenings that can be easily operated from the direction from which people approach when making their escape (C/AS2 3.15.14).

Vision panels shall be provided on doors which are hung to swing both ways, lead into, or are within, exitways, except when the door is the egress from a sleeping space, or subdivide corridors used as escape routes (C/AS2 3.15.6).

Vision panels are assumed to have been provided where required on doors leading into exitways.

Automatic sliding doors in an open path or at final exits are permitted provided that in the event of a power failure or malfunction, the door or access control systems shall continue to provide a safe means of escape from fire without reducing the required width by either automatically opening and remaining open or being readily pushed to the outward position by the building occupants in an emergency (C/AS2 3.15.7).

The new automatic sliding door is required to be fitted with a fail-safe device to automatically slide open on any malfunction or power failure and remain open, or be readily pushed to the outward position by the building occupants in an emergency.

Panic fastening devices shall be fitted on doors on the escape route including exitways and final exits where serving more than 100 people (C/AS2 3.15.2). The panic fastening devices have been discussed in the referenced fire design and panic fastening devices are provided where required. The existing arrangement is proposed to be maintained.

A dead end shall not serve an occupant load greater than 50 (C/AS2 3.8.2).

There is no dead end exceeding 50 people, which complies with the requirement.

External escape routes are required to meet the requirements of a safe path between the point where they enter a space exposed to the open air and the final exit. Safe path separation requirements shall be achieved by providing either distance or fire rated construction between the escape route and adjacent firecells (C/AS2 3.11.1).

Separation by distance shall be achieved by (C/A2 3.11.2):

For an escape route which passes through an opening in an external wall, parts of the external wall need not be fire rated if:

In the area of alteration, the external deck provides a direction of escape to a single final exit that diverges from the external wall at an angle of no less than 45° in plan (C/AS2 3.11bii).

All other external escape routes are not to be altered as part of the proposed work and are expected to comply with the above requirements.

All building features shall have signs complying with F8/AS1 (C/AS2 3.16.1).

As noted in the referenced fire design, a progressive upgrade process is underway whereby all signs will be self-illuminated signs.

As part of this project it is proposed that all signs within the area of alteration be upgraded as required to self-illuminated signs, in compliance with F8/AS1. The recommended locations of exit signs are shown on the attached sketches.

Emergency lighting is required to be provided throughout the building to comply with F6/AS1. The existing building is fitted with a partial coverage emergency lighting system.

The referenced fire design used an ANARP analysis to determine compliance with the requirements that relate to emergency lighting to the extent required by Section 112 of the Building Act 2004. Given that the proposed work is that of a similar nature to the referenced fire design, the ANARP analysis is considered to remain valid. Therefore, emergency lighting is not required to be upgraded throughout the building. Refer to Appendix 8.3.

It is however proposed that emergency lighting and/or photoluminescent wayfinding marking be provided in the area of alteration, including the new external decks, ramps and stairs, to comply with F6/AS1.

Each floor in a multi-storey building shall a fire separation (C/AS2 4.31.1). Floors shall have an FRR for exposure from the underside and achieve 60/60/60 FRR (C/AS2 4.13.2).

The floor is of concrete construction and expected to achieve the required 60/60/60 FRR.

The safe path stairwells shall be separated from all adjoining firecells by fire separations achieving (60)/60/60 FRR (C/AS2 4.9.2).

The referenced fire design used an ANARP analysis to determine compliance with the requirements that relate fire separations to the extent required by Section 112 of the Building Act 2004. It was determined that even though some fire separations did not achieve (60)/60/60 FRR but (30)/30/30 FRR, these were considered to comply as nearly as is reasonably practicable with the requirements. Given that the proposed work is of a similar nature to the referenced fire design, the ANARP analysis is considered to remain valid. Therefore, the existing fire separations are not required to be upgraded to achieve (60)/60/60 FRR. Refer to Appendix 8.3

Fire doors shall have a FRR of -/60/30 Sm FRR (C/AS2 4.16.1). As noted in the referenced fire design, all fire doors have been required to be maintained and returned to full operational condition, including the operation of hold open devices. The fire doors are therefore expected to comply with this requirement.

Existing fire separations are not proposed to be altered as part of the proposed work.

Lift, conveyors and services which pass from one firecell to another shall be enclosed within protected shafts. Every protected shaft shall be a separate firecell within the firecell or firecells in which it is located. The shaft walls between each floor shall have an FRR applied to both sides (C/AS2 4.11.1 & 4.11.2). Alternatively, shafts shall be fire separated at each floor with all service penetrations fire stopped. Protected shafts which do not extend through the roof or lowest floor shall be enclosed at their top and bottom by construction which satisfies the required fire resistance rating (C/AS2 4.11.3).

As identified in the referenced fire design, the lift shaft is expected to achieve the required (60)/60/60 FRR.

Lift landings shall not open into or be located between open paths and shall be provided with a smoke lobby separated from all other areas (C/AS2 3.10.4).

For full compliance, smoke lobbies should be retrofitted at each lift landing throughout the building.

The benefits associated with providing smoke lobbies is to prevent smoke spreading through the lift shaft between levels. It is noted that the smoke would be required to spread into the lift shaft through the lift door, upwards to fill up the lift shaft until being able to spread out from the lift shaft through the lift door on the upper level. For that scenario to occur it is considered that a reasonable amount of time would be required, where in contrast to the early warning provided by the fire alarm system, it is considered very unlikely that any egressing occupants

be impeded by smoke, especially when considered that alternative escape routes are provided.

The sacrifices associated with such upgrade include the cost and work involved to provide the smoke lobbies, as these are also remote from the area of alteration.

Given the above, it is not considered that the benefits associated with retrofitting smoke lobbies outweigh their associated sacrifices. Therefore, the lift landings are considered to comply as nearly as is reasonably practicable.

There are no additional fire and smoke separation requirements within the building for full compliance. Refer to the attached sketches for the location and required fire resistance ratings of internal fire separations.

Refer to Section 6.2.1 for the additional Ministry requirements.

Any structural elements providing structural support to fire rated construction shall either have the same FRR for stability as the supported element, or be in another firecell from the supported element.

Any element connected to a fire rated element shall either have the same FRR for stability as the connected element, or shall have connections designed to collapse without affecting the stability of the fire rated element.

Structural elements shall comply with Section B1 of the Building Code, including post-fire stability requirements.

Any service penetrations through fire separations are to be fire sealed with suitably tested fire stopping systems to maintain the same fire resistance rating as the separation (C/AS2 4.4.2).

Any new service penetrations through fire separations are to be fire sealed with suitably tested fire stopping systems to maintain the fire resistance rating of the penetrated element.

Existing surface finishes are expected to have complied with the requirements at the time of construction and are therefore considered to comply as nearly as is reasonably practicable with the requirements.

All new surface finishes and suspended flexible fabrics shall comply with the following requirements:

LOCATION

REQUIREMENTS

Crowd spaces wall and ceiling linings

Group No. 1S or 2S.

Wall and ceiling linings in other occupied spaces

Group No. 1, 2 or 3.

Exitways wall and ceiling linings (stairwells)

Group No. 1S.

Ducts for HVAC systems – internal surfaces

Group No. 1S.

Ducts for HVAC systems – external surfaces

Group No. 1, 2 or 3.

Flooring

Minimum critical radiant flux 2.2 kW/m2.

Suspended flexible fabrics

Flammability index not greater than 12.

If foamed plastics building materials or combustible insulating materials form part of a wall or ceiling system, the complete system shall achieve a Group Number as specified above and the foamed plastics shall comply with the flame propagation criteria as specified in AS 1366 for the material being used. Foamed plastics shall not be used to comply with the Ministry requirements.

External fire spread is not required to be considered under Section 112 of the Building Act 2004.

Firefighting facilities are not required to be considered under Section 112 of the Building Act 2004.

The Ministry of Education requirements are separate requirements and generally additional to the requirements of the Building Act, therefore all of these requirements must be met unless advised otherwise by the Ministry of Education.

The fire alarm system requirements (as per latest addendum) are as follows:

The existing Type 4 fire safety system is integrated in a site wide fire alarm system and meets the above requirements. The existing fire alarm system is to be altered as necessary to suit the new layout, in accordance with NZS 4512.

Areas in the building shall be subdivided to create firecells comprising a maximum of 800m2 in area. The building is currently subdivided into nine firecells, however some appear to exceed 800m2. Therefore, supplementary fire separations should be retrofitted to reduce the firecell sizes to less than 800m2. This requirement is at the Ministry’s discretion to enforce.

New fire separations, if provided, are to achieve (60)/60/60 FRR with -/60/30 Sm FRR fire doors and are to extend to the underside of the roofing and inside face of the cladding material.

External fire spread between buildings on the same property must be considered for compliance with the Ministry requirements.

However, given that the building is existing and that the proposed alterations do not impact on the separation distance requirements, external fire spread between buildings on the same property is not required to be considered further.

Rooms with up to 20 occupants are to have at least one door at least 810 mm wide, opening in either direction. Manual sliding doors are considered to be at least equivalent to inward opening doors and are therefore also permitted.

Rooms with more than 20 occupants are to have at least one door at least 810 mm wide opening outwards.

Rooms with more than 50 occupants are to have at least two doors at least 810 mm wide, opening outwards.

All other escape route features are to comply with Acceptable Solution requirements.

The proposed door widths and opening directions in the area of alteration meet the requirements. It is not proposed that the other door widths and opening directions throughout the building be reviewed as part of this report.

The surface finish requirements relate to superseded versions of the Acceptable Solutions. It is considered that compliance with current requirements will meet the Ministry of Education requirements.

Foamed plastics building materials are not to be used.

FENZ vehicle standing areas are to be provided at no more than 18m from any part of the building to be protected.

The maximum hose run to the most distant point of buildings from the vehicle access position should not be more than 75m.

Fire service vehicular access is provided from High Street and Walters Street across the school site. The hose run distance from any hard standing to any part of the building is expected to be less than 75m.

The school must have an evacuation procedure. The evacuation procedure needs to be approved by Fire and Emergency New Zealand.

The evacuation procedure should include:

Provided the building is altered as shown on the attached sketches and in accordance with the following requirements it will meet the fire safety requirements of the New Zealand Building Code to the extent required by the Building Act 2004.

If provided, new fire separations would be required to achieve (60)/60/60 FRR with -/60/30 Sm FRR fire doors and to extend to the underside of the roofing and inside face of the cladding material. Refer to Section 6.2.1.

8 APPENDICES

  • 8.1    Compliance Schedule

The following specified systems are expected to be required to be identified on the Compliance Schedule for the building. Refer to the MBIE Compliance Schedule Handbook for more information.

COMPLIANCE SCHEDULE

Address: 910 High Street, Avalon, Lower Hutt

General:

Lawful building use(s): School building

Highest Fire Hazard Category: 2

Occupancy number(s): 950

Risk Group(s): CA/WB

Purpose Group(s): CL/WL

Specified System

Existing, new, or altered

Performance Standard

Inspection & Maintenance Procedures

SS1: Automatic systems for fire suppression

New

NZS 4541

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per Section 12 of the referenced performance standard

SS2: Automatic or manual emergency warning systems

Existing

NZS 4512

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per Section 6 of the referenced performance standard

SS3/1: Automatic doors

New

C/AS2 Amendment 2 November 2020 3.15 and NZS 4239

By owner/occupier:

Daily: Check doors are not locked, blocked, or barred

By IQP:

Monthly: Check operation of release mechanism, fail-safe, and any connection with the fire alarm system

Yearly: As above

SS3/2: Access-controlled doors

New

C/AS2 Amendment 2 November 2020 3.15 and NZS 4239

By owner/occupier:

Daily: Check doors are not locked, blocked, or barred

By IQP:

Monthly: Check operation of release mechanism, fail-safe, and any connection with the fire alarm system

Yearly: As above

Specified System

Existing, new, or altered

Performance Standard

Inspection & Maintenance Procedures

SS3/3: Interfaced fire or smoke doors or windows

Existing

C/AS2 Amendment 2 November 2020 3.15 and NZS 4178

By owner/occupier:

Daily: Check doors are not locked, blocked, or barred

By IQP:

Monthly: Check operation of release mechanism, fail-safe, and any connection with the fire alarm system

Yearly: As above

SS4: Emergency lighting systems

Altered

AS 2293 as amended by F6/AS1 Amendment 4 January 2017

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per AS 2293 Part 2

SS5: Escape route pressurisation systems

New

As required by the Mechanical Designer

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per AS 1851

SS6: Riser mains

New

NZS 4510

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per Section 9 of the referenced performance standard

SS7: Automatic back-flow preventers

N/A

As required by the Hydraulic Designer

As required by the Hydraulic Designer

SS8: Lifts, escalators, travelators, or other systems for moving people or goods within buildings

N/A

As required by the Vertical Transportation Designer

As required by the Vertical Transportation Designer

SS9: Mechanical ventilation or air conditioning systems

New

Fire and smoke control to AS 1668.1

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per AS 1851

SS10: Building maintenance units

N/A

As required by the Specialist Designer

As required by the Specialist Designer

SS11: Laboratory fume cupboards

N/A

As required by the Specialist Designer

As required by the Specialist Designer

SS12: Audio loops or other assistive listening systems

N/A

As required by the Specialist Designer

As required by the Specialist Designer

SS13/1: Mechanical smoke control

New

As required by the Mechanical Designer

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per AS 1851

SS13/2: Natural smoke control

New

As required by the Mechanical Designer

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per AS 1851

SS13/3: Smoke curtains

New

BS EN 12101 Part 1

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per AS 1851

SS14/1: Emergency power systems

N/A

As required by the Electrical Designer

As required by the Electrical Designer

Specified System

Existing, new, or altered

Performance Standard

Inspection & Maintenance Procedures

SS14/2: Signs

Altered

F8/AS1 Amendment 4 January 2017

By owner/occupier:

Monthly: Ensure signs are in place where required, are legible, clean, and illuminated

By IQP:

Yearly: As per monthly

SS15/1: Systems for communicating spoken information intended to facilitate evacuation

N/A

NZS 4512

Inspection and maintenance procedures as per Section 6 of the referenced performance standard

SS15/2: Final exits

Existing and new

C/AS2 Amendment 2 November 2020 3.1 & 3.12

By owner/occupier:

Daily: Check doors are not locked, blocked, or barred

Weekly: As per daily, plus ensure routes to final exits do not contain combustibles, that doors are fitted with simple fastenings, and that they swing to full width of opening

By IQP:

Yearly: As above

SS15/3: Fire separations

Existing

C/AS2 Amendment 2

November 2020 Part 4

By owner/occupier:

Weekly: Check for damage to separations, operation of fire doorsets and any locking devices

By IQP:

Yearly: As above

SS15/4: Signs

Altered

F8/AS1 Amendment 4 January 2017

By owner/occupier:

Monthly: Ensure signs are in place where required, are legible, clean, and illuminated

By IQP:

Yearly: As per monthly

SS15/5: Smoke separations

New

C/AS2 Amendment 2

November 2020 Part 4

By owner/occupier:

Weekly: Check for damage to separations, operation of smoke doorsets and any locking devices

By IQP:

Yearly: As above

SS16: Cable cars

N/A

As required by the Specialist Designer

As required by the Specialist Designer

FSK 01 – Ground Floor

FSK 02 – Level 1

FSK 03 – Proposed Fitout

FSK 01 – Ground Floor


. (60)/60/60 FRR walls with -/60/30Sm doors (as per referenced fire design) , (30)/30/30 FRR walls with -/30/30Sm doors (as per referenced


Drawing Title: Ground Floor

Project: Naenae College - Admin

Project No: 24523

Drawing No: FSK01

Drawn: Alex Flton

Revision: 0

Date: 28/07/2021

STEPHENSON &TURNER ENGINEERING

Issue: For Consent


Existing Lift Location


Proposed fitout. Refer FSK 03.


FSK 02 – Level 1


(60J/60/60 FRR walls with -/60/30Sm doors (as per referenced fire design)

(30)/30/30 FRR walls with -/30/30Sm doors (as per referenced fire design)



Existing Lift

Location


Drawing Title: Level 1

Project: Naenae College - Admin

Project No: 24523

Drawing No: FSK02

Drawn: Alex Flton

Revision: 0

Date: 28/07/2021

STEPHENSON &TURNER ENGINEERING

Issue: For Consent


FSK 03 – Proposed Fitout


PHOTOCOPIERS

DEOP

DECK

iTUDENT ENTRANCE

RESOURCE MANAGER

SICK BAY

MEETING

HALLWAY

STORAGE

HALL FOYER

LOBBY

RECE ’TlON

PRINCIPAL

ADMIN

WC1

RAMP

STAIRS

RAMP

TIMBER DECKING

SHEET VINYL - TO BE SELECTED

CARPET TILES - TO BE SELECTED

VINYL PLANKS - TO BE SELECTED

TEACHING SPACE

(NO CHANGES)

MEDICAL

STORAGE

HALl WAY

DECK

RAMP

STAIRS

KITCHEN

NOTE

New flooring (carpet, vinyl) to have a critical radiant heat flux of not less than that specified in Table 4.2 of C/AS4 being 2.2kW/m2.

All new interior surface finishes (paints etc) on ceilings and walls within the altered areas are required to satisfy the group number requirements of Section 4.7.7, C/AS4.

TOP = < 100m (towards adjacent stairwell)



Drawing Title: Proposed Fitout

Project: Naenae College - Admin

Project No: 24523

Drawing No: FSK03

Drawn: Alex Fiton

Revision: 0

Date: 28/07/2021

STEPHENSON &TURNER ENGI

Issue: For Consent


STEPHENSON


^TURNER


ARCHITECTS


ENGINEERS


FIRE ENGINEERING DESIGN

for

NEW LIFT INSTALLATION

NAENAE COLLEGE 910 HIGH ST LOWERHUTT

for

NAENAE COLLEGE

Stephenson & Turner New Zealand Limited Architects and Building Services Engineers PO Box 11393 Wellington

BUILDING CONSENT ISSUE 3

August 2016

21422

CONTENTS

Appendix A - MBIE Score Sheet 18

Document Control

Prepared by

BE, DipEngFire, CPEng

Revision history

21/12/15       Building Consent

20/07/16       Building Consent Issue1

16/08/16       Building Consent Issue2

18/08/16       Building Consent Issue3

1 INTRODUCTION

This is the Fire Engineering Design for the proposed alterations for a new lift installation to the main building at Naenae College, 910 High St, Lower Hutt. The design demonstrates compliance with the performance requirements of the New Zealand Building Code that relate to fire safety, to the extent required by the Building Act 2004.

The main building is a two storey building containing classrooms, school hall, music department, cafeteria, administration area and library, and associated spaces.

It is proposed to install a lift in an existing atrium at the north side of the building.

The use of the building will remain unchanged from its current use.

For the purposes of this report north is taken to be as shown on the attached sketches.

The building has an escape height <4 m.

The proposed work is an alteration without change of use and Section 112 of the Building Act applies.

112 Alterations to existing buildings

existing building, or part of an existing building, unless the building consent authority is satisfied that, after the alteration, the building will –

This design does not address sanitary facilities, structural performance or access and facilities for persons with disabilities beyond any specific allowances for additional provisions identified in the egress design.

The occupancy of the building is assessed as Risk Group CA (C/AS4 Table 1.1).

Ministry of Building, Innovation and Employment (MBIE) guidelines are used to determine the extent of information to be provided in relation to the proposed alterations. These guidelines use a scoring system to determine the level of information required to be provided in relation to proposed works to the building. The score sheet for this building is included in Appendix A to this report.

The calculated score for this building is 17 For a building with a score between 12 and 19 the recommended information to be provided is:

12-19 Gap assessment using the appropriate Acceptable Solution from C/ASi - C/AS?

It is reasonable to request a gap assessment of the existing building's means of escape from fire unless the individual circumstances of the building suggest otherwise.

The gap assessment should:

■ use the appropriate Acceptable Solution from C/AS1 - C/AS7 • highlight where the existing building fully complies with the Acceptable Solution

• highlight where there are gaps between the building's fire systems and features and the requirements of the Acceptable Solution

A gap assessment using an Acceptable Solution can be undertaken for complex, existing buildings even if they have features that do not comply with the Acceptable Solution. For example, a building may have more than one intermediate floor or one floor that is larger than permitted in the Acceptable Solution. In this case, the gap assessment should highlight where the existing building complies with the appropriate Acceptable Solution and where there is any gap.

This design uses Acceptable Solution C/AS4 as the basis for determining what would be required for full compliance with the New Zealand Building Code and notes where compliance is not achieved. An analysis of compliance as nearly as is reasonably practicable (ANARP) is presented in Section 7 of this report.

The New Zealand Building Act 2004 and the Building Code address the issues of life safety, protection of neighbouring property, and allowing fire-fighting operations. They specify minimum standards for compliance and do not address the prevention or restriction of damage by fire to the subject building or its contents. Such provisions are beyond the requirements of the Act, and are matters for the owner and their insurers to address separately.

Under section 21A of the Fire Service Act, the Fire Safety & Evacuation of Buildings Regulations will apply to this building. When required, an application must be made to the NZ Fire Service for approval of an evacuation scheme. Although the fire safety precautions contained within this design should allow the approval of the scheme, we recommend that the Fire Service be consulted prior to occupation of the altered building.

This design does not address the presence of any dangerous goods in the building. Any such goods used or stored within the building should comply with the dangerous goods regulations.

For the assessment of the fire design of the building, the following assumptions are implicit:

The client has provided a copy of a fire engineering design for this building prepared by National Consultants Ltd, entitled “Fire Safety Assessment Report Number 10740”, dated 4 March 2016, relating to an upgrade to the fire alarm system to a Type 4 smoke detection and alarm system throughout the building.

As identified in the referenced previous report, the maximum number of occupants in the building is taken as 950. The building is divided into firecells as noted in Section 6.1 below. Firecell numbers are as shown on the sketches attached to this report.

The approximate maximum number of occupants for each space is as follows:

FIRECELL

LOCATION1

AREA

OCCUPANT DENSITY1

NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS2

G1

Hall

400 m2

0.8 m2/person

500

Admin

440 m2

10 m2/person

44

Music

510 m2

5 m2/person

102

Cafeteria

170 m2

1.25 m2/person

136

G2

Library

320 m2

10 m2/person

32

Teaching laboratories

440 m2

5 m2/person

88

Offices

61 m2

10 m2/person

7

G3

Workshop

96 m2

10 m2/person

10

G4

Classrooms

328 m2

2 m2/person

164

G5

Classrooms

198 m2

2 m2/person

99

U1

Staff room

193 m2

5 m2/person

39

Classrooms

241 m2

2 m2/person

121

U2

Classrooms

292 m2

2 m2/person

146

U3

Classrooms

352 m2

2 m2/person

176

U4

Classrooms

200 m2

2 m2/person

100

Notes:

1.   Circulation spaces are excluded to avoid duplication.

2.   Occupant densities are taken from C/AS4 Table 1.2.

3. It is not expected that all areas would contain the maximum occupancy simultaneously.

Awareness - The occupants are assumed to be awake and fully aware of the activities in their surroundings.

Familiarity - The occupants are assumed to be familiar with the layout of the building.

As the building is not sprinklered the firecell area is limited to a maximum of 5,000 m2 (C/AS4 2.1.1).

Based on the locations of fire doors as observed on site, and assuming that the fire doors are installed in fire separation walls, the ground floor is divided into five firecells and the first floor is divided into four firecells. Each stair is also a separate firecell except the south west stair which is not fire separated from the ground floor.

None of the firecells exceeds 5,000 m2 floor area.

Except for the firecell G3, each firecell has a maximum expected occupant load between 100 and 1000 people and the maximum escape height is <4 m. The floor between levels is assumed to be a fire separation, there are no intermediate floors and there are no sleeping firecells in the building.

The required fire safety systems are a Type 4 alarm system, Type 9 smoke control in air handling systems and Type 18 building fire hydrant system (C/AS4 2.2.1). The fire hydrant system is not required where the Fire Service hose run distance is less than 75 m.

The existing fire safety systems meet these requirements. The smoke detection system is to be modified as necessary to meet the coverage requirements of NZS 4512 in the altered area.

The required number of escape routes from each firecell is determined from C/AS4 Table 3.1. The requirements for single escape routes are given in C/AS4 3.13.

The firecell containing the hall, performing arts area, cafeteria and administration could potentially contain between 500 and 1000 occupants and requires at least three escape routes. At least three escape routes are provided.

All other firecells except the north east ground floor firecell contain between 50 and 500 occupants and require at least two escape routes. All are provided with at least two escape routes.

The north east ground floor firecell is permitted a single escape route because it contains less than 50 occupants, has an escape height less than 10 m and has an open path length less than the permitted dead end open path length.

The clear height shall be no less than 2100 mm across the full width of each escape route, except that isolated ceiling fittings not exceeding 200 mm in diameter may project downwards to reduce this clearance by no more than 100 mm. Any door opening within any escape route shall have a clear height of no less than 1955 mm for the required width of the opening (C/AS4 3.3.1).

The existing escape routes meet these requirements.

The total combined width of all available escape routes must be sufficient to accommodate all occupants at a width per occupant of 7 mm for horizontal travel, 9 m per person for vertical travel. As the building is not sprinklered the widest escape route from each firecell is considered to be unavailable.

Required minimum total width for each firecell is as follows:

FIRECELL

NO. OCCUPANTS

HORIZONTAL WIDTH REQUIRED*

VERTICAL WIDTH REQUIRED**

G1

782

5474 mm

NA

G2

127

889 mm

NA

G3

10

70 mm

NA

G4

164

1148 mm

NA

G5

99

693 mm

NA

U1

160

1120 mm

1440 mm

U2

146

1022 mm

1314 mm

U3

176

1232 mm

1584 mm

U4

100

700 mm

900 mm

* The minimum permitted width for horizontal travel is 850 mm in an open path, 1000 mm is an exitway, or 1200 mm on an accessible route.

** The minimum permitted width for vertical travel is 1000 mm in an open path or exitway, 1100 mm on an accessible route.

Widths of escape routes are discussed in Section 7.2 of this report.

Permitted escape route lengths are given in C/AS4 Table 3.2. The permitted escape route lengths are as follows:

Location

DEOP *

Permitted TOP **

Naenae College

40 m

100 m

*

**

Dead end open path Total open path

The maximum dead end open path length is approximately 15 m, which complies with the requirement.

The maximum total open path length is approximately 77 m, which complies with the requirement.

A dead end shall not serve and occupant load greater than 50 (C/AS4 3.8.1). There are no dead ends that contain more than 50 occupants.

The requirements for doors on escape routes are given in C/AS4 3.15.

The condition and operation of existing doors are discussed in Section 7.6 of this report.

Doors on escape routes shall be hinged or pivoted on one vertical edge only, except that sliding doors may be used where the space has an occupant load of less than 20.

Door handles shall comply with D1/AS1 for use by people with disabilities.

Doors shall be constructed to ensure that the forces required to open these doors do not exceed those able to be applied:

When the building is occupied locking devices shall:

o Be readily opened by an alternative method.

Doors on escape routes shall be hung to open in the direction of escape except if the number of occupants in the space using the door as an escape route is less than 50.

Doors on open paths shall provide an unobstructed opening width no less than 760 mm, and when multi-leaf, have no single leaf less than 500 mm. The minimum width may be reduced to 600 mm if the route is not required to be an accessible route.

Doors within exitways (including entry and final exit doors) shall provide an unobstructed opening width no less than 875 mm.

Doors shall open no less than 90°, open onto a floor area which extends for a distance of no less than the arc of the door swing and is at the same level on both sides of the door for the full width of the escape route.

When opened, doors shall not cause the door swing to obstruct the minimum required width of any escape route.

Panic fastenings shall be fitted on doors serving crowd occupancies of more than 100 people and which are required to be secured against entry while the building is occupied. The existing doors to outside from the hall are fitted with panic fastenings. No other exit doors are fitted with panic fastenings.

Doors not fitted with panic fastenings shall have simple fastenings that can be easily operated from the direction from which people approach when making their escape.

Illuminated or photoluminescent exit signage is to be provided to comply with F8/AS1. Requirements for signage are discussed in Section 7.3 of this report.

Emergency lighting is required to be provided throughout the building to comply with F6/AS1. The existing building is fitted with a partial coverage emergency lighting system.

The fire resistance rating (FRR) of internal fire separations is to be based on the life rating of 60 minutes (C/AS4 2.3.1).

The floor between levels is required to be a fire separation (C/AS4 4.13.1). The stairwells are also required to be fire separated from all other spaces.

For full compliance the fire separations should have at least the following fire resistance ratings (FRRs):

Walls (60)/60/60

Doors -/60/30Sm

Floors 60/60/60

Structure providing support to fire rated elements is required to have at least 60/-/- FRR.

Based on the fire doors observed on site the existing fire separations are a mix of 30 and 60 minute separations. Non-fire rated windows were observed in the wall between the north east stairwell and firecell U2. The FRR of the floor between levels is unknown, however the concrete construction is expected to achieve at least 60/60/60 FRR.

The condition of the existing fire separations and a reasonably practicable level of compliance are discussed in Section 7.5 of this report.

The separations between the proposed lift shaft and the rest of the building shall provide at least (60)/60/60 FRR walls, -/60/60 Sm doors and -/60/- FRR lift landing doors.

Any new penetrations through fire separations shall be fire sealed to maintain the fire resistance rating of the penetrated element.

All new surface finishes and suspended flexible fabrics within the building shall comply with the following:

LOCATION

REQUIREMENT

Stairwells

Group No. 1S

Wall* and ceiling linings in classrooms

Group No. 1S or 2S

Wall and ceiling linings in other occupied spaces

Group No. 1, 2 or 3.

Ducts for HVAC systems – internal surfaces

Group No. 1S.

Ducts for HVAC systems – external surfaces

Group No. 1, 2 or 3.

Flooring in protected stairways and firecells accommodating more than 50 people

Minimum critical radiant flux 2.2 kW/m2.

Flooring in other spaces

Minimum critical radiant flux 1.2 kW/m2

Suspended flexible fabrics

Flammability index not greater than 12.

*      The maximum group number of the wall linings in the classrooms is permitted to be increased

to group number 3 for surfaces less than 1.2 m above floor level for ground floor spaces except in firecell G1 (C/AS4 4.17.7).

If foamed plastics building materials or combustible insulating materials form part of a wall or ceiling system, the complete system shall achieve a Group Number as specified above and the foamed plastics shall comply with the flame propagation criteria as specified in AS 1366 for the material being used.

The performance of existing surface finishes is unknown. The requirement for surface finish performance in relation to the proposed alteration is discussed in Section 7.7 of this report.

External fire spread is not required to be considered under section 112 of the Building Act 2004.

Firefighting facilities are not required to be considered under section 112 of the Building Act 2004.

As noted in Section 2.3 of this report, the building is required to meet the current requirements for means of escape “as nearly as is reasonably practicable” (ANARP).

The extent of what is reasonably practicable can be assessed by a consideration of the sacrifice required to provide compliance versus the benefit provided by compliance.

It is noted that the proposed alteration is minor in its effect on fire safety of the building and the work is confined to a small area of the building. It is therefore considered that upgrading of fire safety features should be concentrated in the vicinity of the proposed alteration, while taking into account the degree of non-compliance more remote from the alteration.

There are a number areas of possible non-compliance within the building:

All corridors and final exit doors on escape routes comply with the required minimum width for any individual door or corridor.

Internal doors within the corridors also comply with the required minimum width. Widths of doors from individual rooms have not been checked, however none appeared to be unusually narrow as observed on site. It is proposed to retain all existing doors at their existing widths.

Firecell G1 has at least nine single or double leaf doors at final exits. Although the widths of these doors have not been measured, it can reasonably be expected that the doors will provide at least the required 5474 mm minimum total width with the widest door excluded.

Within this firecell the Hall has a design occupant load of 500, requiring at least two escape routes, and at least 3500 mm escape route width with the widest escape route excluded. The Hall is provided with three double leaf doors to the east, each approximately 1500 mm wide, a double leaf and two single leaf doors to the north providing a total of approximately 3600 mm to the north, and a double leaf door approximately 1500 mm wide to the west. The stage is also provided with single leaf doors to the east and the west.

The north door counts as one escape route. Excluding this route the remaining escape routes provide approximately 6000 mm width from the main hall area.

There are also two double leaf doors to the east leading to an open courtyard. These doors are not to be marked as escape routes.

Firecell G2 has at least four double leaf doors at final exits serving this firecell. These will easily provide the required minimum width with the widest door excluded.

Firecell G3 is served by one double leaf final exit which will provide the required minimum width.

Firecell G4 has escape routes via the base of the stairwell to the east of the firecell and via a corridor and final exit in firecell G2. The final exits are double leaf doors which provide the required minimum width with the wider door excluded.

Exits from firecell G5 are via the bases of the stairwells to the east and west ends of the firecell. Any one of the final exit doors from these stairs would provide the required minimum width.

Exits from firecell U1 are via the north west stairwell or via open paths in firecells U2 or U3. It is noted that the south west stair currently forms part of the open path within firecell G4. This stair is therefore not counted as an escape route from upper floor firecells. The remaining stairs and final exits provide at least the required minimum width for horizontal and vertical travel with the widest exit excluded.

Exits from firecell U2 are via the north east stair or via the open path within firecell U1 to the north west stair. A further exit is available via the open path in firecell U3 to the stair at the east end of U3.The final exits are at least three double leaf doors. The stairs and doors provide at least the required minimum exit width with the widest route excluded.

Firecell U3 has exits via the stairwell at the east of the firecell and via the open path in firecell U1 to the north west stairwell, or to the north east stairwell via U2. Each of the stairwells leads to at least one double leaf door. These escape routes provide at least the required width for vertical and horizontal travel with the widest escape route excluded.

Exits from firecell U4 are via the south east stair or through a short section of open path in U3 to the stair at the east of U3. These stairs lead to two double leaf doors. The escape routes provide at least the required escape route width.

Based on the above the escape routes within the building and the final exits are expected to provide at least the required width for compliance with C/AS4 requirements.

Existing exit signs consist of a mix of reflective and self-illuminated signs. A progressive upgrade process is under way whereby all signs will be self-illuminated signs.

As part of this project it is proposed that all the signs on escape routes from firecells G2, U1 and U2 be upgraded as required to self-illuminated signs.

Existing fire doors are not fitted with the required signs. As part of this project it is proposed to install signs to fire doors serving firecells G2, U1 and U2.

Emergency lighting is currently fitted to the ground corridor to the west of the proposed new lift, and to the north west fire separated stairs. It is not proposed to extend the emergency lighting as part of this project.

It is noted that the proposed alterations to the building are minor and have no effect on the ability of occupants to escape.

The benefit of providing emergency lighting is that visibility is maintained in case of power failure at night. In relation to fire safety this benefit occurs only if a power failure occurs simultaneously with a fire. Given that the primary use of the building is during daytime the combination of circumstances where the emergency lighting provides any benefit is very unlikely.

It is also noted that the proposed illuminated exit signs will provide guidance to escaping occupants at night.

Given the minimal benefit and the minor nature of the proposed alteration it is not considered reasonably practicable to extend the existing emergency lighting system.

Based on the locations of fire doors, and on the assumption that the walls into which the fire doors are installed are also fire rated, the building is divided into firecells as described in Section 6.1 of this report and as shown on the attached sketches.

Given the mix of 30 and 60 minute ratings the general rating for all firecells is considered to be 30 minutes. This does not comply with the current requirement to provide separations based on a life rating of 60 minutes.

The floor between levels is of concrete and may reasonably be expected to provide at least 60/60/60 FRR.

The walls appear to be framed and plasterboard lined, or concrete and may reasonably be expected to provide at least (30)/30/30 FRR.

The new separations at the location of the proposed lift are to provide (60)/60/60 FRR.

It is noted that a new Type 4 smoke detection system has recently been installed throughout the building. This will give the earliest possible warning of any fire and thereby minimise the required egress time. It is therefore likely that the existing 30 minute based fire separations will provide adequate time for all occupants to escape safely, and the benefit of upgrading to 60 minutes is small.

There would be substantial building work involved in upgrading existing fire separations to 60 minutes. Since the benefit is minimal it is not considered reasonably practicable to upgrade existing fire separations.

One exception is the windows at the first floor beside the stairwell door of the north east stair. These windows are clearly not fire rated and are to be replaced with construction having at least -/60/60 FRR.

The existing fire doors are generally in poor condition, with closers incorrectly adjusted or missing. Many of the doors are fitted with electromagnetic hold open devices, most of which appear not to be operational.

As part of this project all fire doors are to be maintained and returned to full operational condition, including the operation of electromagnetic hold open devices.

In the separation between firecells G2 and G4 a door has been removed. This is to be replaced with a new door having at least -/60/30Sm FRR.

The requirements for panic fastenings may reasonably be considered in relation to the commentary to acceptable solutions C/AS1 – C/AS7. It is expected that the hall may be used for a crowd occupancy at night, and with the doors to outside required to be secured against entry. These doors comply with the requirement for panic fastenings.

Other final exit doors serving more than 100 occupants would not normally be secured against entry during normal daytime use. If the classroom areas are used at night the occupant number is expected to be substantially less than in daytime use and it is unlikely that any door would serve more than 100 occupants. On this basis it is not proposed to fit panic fastenings to any additional doors.

Existing surface finishes generally consist of paint on plasterboard or concrete. These would generally be expected to achieve a surface finish group No. of 1S on concrete, 2S on plasterboard (C/VM2 Table A1).

This would comply with current requirements except in stairwells. Given the low probability of a fire starting in a stairwell, and that almost the entire building has alternative escape routes available, it is considered that the benefit of upgrading the surface finishes is negligible and therefore not reasonably practicable.

21422 Naenae College Lift Installation Building Consent Issue 3

Provided the fitout alterations are constructed as described in this report and in accordance with the following requirements they will meet the fire safety requirements of the New Zealand Building Code fire safety requirements to the extent required by the Building Act 2004.

least (60)/60/60 FRR walls, -/60/60 Sm doors and -/60/- FRR lift landing doors.

FSK 01 – Ground Floor

FSK 02 – First Floor

[Stairl

Wō

i Stair

Stair

— (60)/60/60 FRR walls with -/60/30Sm doors

■“• (30)/30/30 FRR walls with -/30/30Sm doors

—• New lift enclosure

□ MC

YB

Y*

~ 19

Stair ^

Drawing Title: Ground Floor

Project:

Naenae College

Scale: NTS

Drawing No. FSK01

Rev: 1

Issued: Building Consent

Drawn: Jason King

I 5 E

CARPARKS

Date: 20/07/2016 Project No.: 21422

Proposed New Lift Location

77 m total open path

New door to be installed

_G3

G4 h



(60)/60/60 FRR walls with -/60/30Sm doors

Proposed New Lift Location

Project:

Naenae College

Scale: NTS

Drawing No. FSK02

Rev: 1

Issued: Building Consent

Date: 20/07/2016 Project No.: 21422


(30)/30/30 FRR walls with -/30/30Sm doors New lift enclosure


Windows to be replaced with -/60/60 FRR construction


□rawing Title: First Floor


Appendix A - MBIE Score Sheet


Major Consulting Group Ltd PO Box 25334

Wellington 6146

majorconsulting.co.nz



W-01422

Asbestos Refurbishment

Survey Report

Naenae College, 910 High Street, Avalon, Lower Hutt 5011

For:

Frank Bourke

IR Group Ltd

Level 2 / 3 Swan Lane

Te Aro

Wellington 6011

Client                                W-01422                                              Date of Report

IR Group Ltd                          Asbestos Refurbishment Survey                           23/12/2021

MCG quality control

Project no.:

W-01422

Title:

Asbestos Refurbishment Survey

Client:

IR Group Ltd

Level 2 / 3 Swan Lane

Te Aro

Wellington 6011

Client contact:

Frank Bourke

Date of survey

20/12/2021

Date of report:

23/12/2021

Office:

Wellington

Status:

Final

Surveyor:

Mike Dunnett

Signature:

,4W

Date:

23/12/2021

Technical reviewer:

Becky Lloyd

Approved reviewer:

Shelley Major

Signature:

Signature:

Date:

24/12/2021

Date:

24/12/2021

Disclaimer

Major Consulting Group Ltd. (MCG) has prepared this report for the sole use of the client, showing reasonable skill and care, for the intended purposes as stated in the agreement under which this work was completed. The report may not be relied upon by any other party without the express agreement of the client and MCG. No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made as to the professional advice included in this report.

Where any data supplied by the client or from other sources have been used, it has been assumed that the information is correct. No responsibility can be accepted by MCG for inaccuracies in the data supplied by any other party. The conclusions and recommendations in this report assume that all relevant information has been supplied by those bodies from whom it was requested.

Table of Contents

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Frank Bourke from IR Group Ltd engaged Major Consulting Group Limited (MCG) to carry out a targeted asbestos refurbishment survey at Naenae College, 910 High Street, Avalon, Lower Hutt 5011. The purpose of the survey was to identify, as far as reasonably practicable, asbestos-containing material (ACM) that must be removed prior to refurbishment works being undertaken.

The survey was carried out by Mike Dunnett, Asbestos Assessor on 20/12/2021.

Where ACM is found, an asbestos register is developed that details the material to be removed by an appropriately licensed removalist prior to intrusive work commencing. (See Section 3).

Any ACM identified during the refurbishment survey has been assessed using a material risk assessment (see Appendix 5) and categorised according to its potential to release fibres: i.e. high, medium, low and very low risk.

Note, if IR Group Ltd intends to commence works later than three months from the date of the survey, IR Group Ltd will need to actively manage the risk of exposure to respirable fibres. As appropriate, please consult MCG on developing an asbestos management plan.

This report is designed to be kept as a record of assessment of the extent and characteristics of the asbestos found and is based on information made available during the survey on 20/12/2021. This report is not intended as a specification for any removal works. Please talk to us about providing a detailed specification for works if required.

Reports on previous asbestos inspections were not available prior to commencing the survey.

The table below details the locations that were found to contain asbestos or presumed to contain asbestos, the material risk assessment, and the recommended action for remediation.

Naenae College

Floor

Area / Room

Material Description

Sample No.

Material Risk

Recommended Action

External

029 / Eaves

lower soffit - Cement products

S011

Low (6)

Remove

External

002 / External pillar

cement cladding -Cement products

S002

Low (6)

Remove

External

032 / Eaves

soffit - Cement products

X011

Low (6)

Remove

External

003 / North eaves

soffit - Cement products

S003

Low (5)

Remove

External

028 / Eaves

soffit - Cement products

X001

Low (5)

Remove

External

030 / External Walls

cladding - Cement products

S012

Low (5)

Remove

External

001 / Eaves

soffit - Cement products

S001

Very Low (4)

Remove

External

005 / Northwest Corner Cladding

profiled cement cladding - Cement products

S005

Very Low (4)

Remove

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Naenae College

_

E E

Floor

Area / Room

Material Description

Sample No.

Material Risk

Recommended Action

External

006 / Northwest corner eaves

soffit - Cement products

S006

Very Low (4)

Remove

M

CD >

U CD X UJ

External

006 / Northwest corner pillar

cement cladding -Cement products

S007

Very Low (4)

Remove

External

031 / Upper Cladding

cladding - Cement products

S014

Very Low (4)

Remove

External

037 / Under iron roof

Bitumen - Bitumen products

PS001

Very Low (3)

Remove

The following lists MCG’s key recommendations regarding Naenae College:

+ Check the roof void for asbestos contamination when the roof has been removed to enable an investigation.

+ Any products likely to be disturbed during the refurbishment works should be removed by a class B licensed removalist prior to the works starting.

+ We recommend ensuring all workers are trained to recognise and manage asbestos risks according to the Approved Code of Practice for the Management and Removal of Asbestos (ACOP).

+ If the scope of refurbishment changes or suspect items or dust is identified, immediately contact MCG to conduct further testing.

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

The purpose of the refurbishment survey is to identify asbestos-containing materials that could be disturbed during the planned refurbishment work to be removed prior to intrusive or destructive works commencing.

+ The survey was carried out in accordance with Major Consulting Group Ltd’s quality management system.

+ Field investigations have been restricted to a level of detail required to achieve the stated objectives of the work.

+ The survey may have involved destructive surveying methods to gain access to all areas within the agreed scope.

The methodology used for the survey is detailed in Appendix 4.

Site address:                                   Naenae College, 910 High Street, Avalon, Lower Hutt

5011

Site description:                                  School

Scope of works for the refurbishment survey:      Refurbishment survey of administration block

Areas excluded:

No areas were excluded during the survey

As appropriate, the scope included:

presence of asbestos fibres

Unless otherwise agreed, the following areas were out of scope due to the unacceptable risks they present to our surveyors:

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

15 samples were taken during the course of this survey, and then analysed by a laboratory holding accreditation from International Accreditation New Zealand (IANZ).

C

O

U

73 O

■i—

C

It should be noted that it is possible that some asbestos may remain hidden within the building structure, so care should always be taken during refurbishment work. If suspect material is found, work must cease pending further sampling and analysis.

This report is subject to the service constraints given in Appendix 6.

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

3 Asbestos register


The asbestos register records where asbestos-containing material was found during this survey.

A material risk score is also provided.


Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

^M

to

External

029 / Eaves

lower soffit

Cement products

S011

Low damage: a few scratches or surface marks, broken edges on boards, tiles etc.

Occasionally disturbed

Enclosed sprays and lagging, AIB (with exposed face painted or encapsulated) asbestos cement sheets etc.

12m²

•

_

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

Chrysotile, Amosite, Crocidolite

No

Low (6)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.


£ V) □) O


tn O

O


cn


Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

^

External

001 / Eaves

soffit

Cement products

S001

Good condition: no visible damage

Usually inaccessible

Enclosed sprays and lagging, AIB (with exposed face painted or encapsulated) asbestos cement sheets etc.

30m²

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

Amosite, Chrysotile

No

Very Low (4)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.


£ cn

□) O


tn O

O


tn


Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^1

External

028 / Eaves

soffit

Cement products

X001

Low damage: a few scratches or surface marks, broken edges on boards, tiles etc.

Usually inaccessible

Enclosed sprays and lagging, AIB (with exposed face painted or encapsulated) asbestos cement sheets etc.

30m²

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

^^^^jF

Amosite, Chrysotile

No

Low (5)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.

Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

Br ^ .

External

002 / External pillar

cement cladding

Cement products

S002

Low damage: a few scratches or surface marks, broken edges on boards, tiles etc.

Usually inaccessible

Enclosed sprays and lagging, AIB (with exposed face painted or encapsulated) asbestos cement sheets etc.

1item

fll^^a

^?iK"

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

Chrysotile, Amosite, Crocidolite

No

Low (6)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.

III

III

Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

/    .Location 1

J Location 2 f

External

037 / Under iron roof

Bitumen

Bitumen products

PS001

Low damage: a few scratches or surface marks, broken edges on boards, tiles etc.

Usually inaccessible

Composite materials containing asbestos: reinforced plastics, resins, vinyl tiles.

Throughout

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

p^^r^^^^^ET^8^ ’       " ’

fc*!&   Aj. ^1 £

Chrysotile

No

Very Low (3)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.


£ cn

□) O


tn O

O


tn


Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

External

005 / Northwest

Corner Cladding

profiled cement cladding

Cement products

S005

Good condition: no visible damage

Easily disturbed

Enclosed sprays and lagging, AIB (with exposed face painted or encapsulated) asbestos cement sheets etc.

30m²

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

k

Chrysotile, Amosite

No

Very Low (4)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.

Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

f!^

External

003 / North eaves

soffit

Cement products

S003

Low damage: a few scratches or surface marks, broken edges on boards, tiles etc.

Usually inaccessible

Enclosed sprays and lagging, AIB (with exposed face painted or encapsulated) asbestos cement sheets etc.

32m²

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

Amosite, Chrysotile

No

Low (5)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.


£ cn

□) O


tn O

O


tn


Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

3j

External

006 / Northwest corner eaves

soffit

Cement products

S006

Low damage: a few scratches or surface marks, broken edges on boards, tiles etc.

Occasionally disturbed

Enclosed sprays and lagging, AIB (with exposed face painted or encapsulated) asbestos cement sheets etc.

4m²

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

Chrysotile

No

Very Low (4)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.


£ cn

□) O


tn O

O


tn


Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

External

006 / Northwest corner pillar

cement cladding

Cement products

S007

Low damage: a few scratches or surface marks, broken edges on boards, tiles etc.

Occasionally disturbed

Enclosed sprays and lagging, AIB (with exposed face painted or encapsulated) asbestos cement sheets etc.

10m²

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

Chrysotile

No

Very Low (4)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.



Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

External

032 / Eaves

soffit

Cement products

X011

Low damage: a few scratches or surface marks, broken edges on boards, tiles etc.

Occasionally disturbed

Enclosed sprays and lagging, AIB (with exposed face painted or encapsulated) asbestos cement sheets etc.

7m²

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

Chrysotile, Amosite, Crocidolite

No

Low (6)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.


£ cn

□) O


tn O

O


tn


Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

1 B

s

til

External

030 / External Walls

cladding

Cement products

S012

Low damage: a few scratches or surface marks, broken edges on boards, tiles etc.

Easily disturbed

Enclosed sprays and lagging, AIB (with exposed face painted or encapsulated) asbestos cement sheets etc.

80m²

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

Amosite, Chrysotile

No

Low (5)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.

Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Naenae College

Location

Item

Material

Sample no.

Condition

Ease of access

Surface treatment

Extent

r i e

External

031 / Upper Cladding

cladding

Cement products

S014

Good condition: no visible damage

Usually inaccessible

Enclosed sprays and lagging, AIB (with exposed face painted or encapsulated) asbestos cement sheets etc.

20m²

Asbestos type

Labelled?

Material risk score (fibre release potential)

Recommended action

Amosite, Chrysotile

No

Very Low (4)

Remove. Engage a Class B licensed asbestos removal contractor to remove this item and any associated ACD. A clearance certificate must be obtained from a licensed asbestos assessor independent of the removalist prior to reoccupation.


£ cn

□) O


tn O

O


tn


Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



The register below records samples that were taken during this survey that, when analysed, did not show evidence of containing asbestos.

This register must be read in conjunction with the full report. It should not be extracted or used in isolation.

Naenae College

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Floor

Area / Room

Material

Approx. m²

Sample Number

Result

External

004 / Windows

window putty - Mastics and putty

all items

S004

No asbestos detected in sample. No further action required.

Ground Floor

020 / Northwest entrance

cladding - Cement products

3m²

S008

No asbestos detected in sample. No further action required.

Ground Floor

023 / Nurses Room

Vinyl flooring - Vinyl sheeting

12m²

S009

No asbestos detected in sample. No further action required.

Ground Floor

024 / Nurse

Vinyl flooring - Vinyl sheet paperbacked

15m²

S010

No asbestos detected in sample. No further action required.

Ground Floor

025 / Sickbay

Vinyl flooring - Vinyl sheeting

12m²

X010

No asbestos detected in sample. No further action required.

Ground Floor

010 / Main entrance

vinyl flooring - Vinyl sheeting

42m²

S015

No asbestos detected in sample. No further action required.

Ground Floor

027 / Kitchen

paper backing - Paper and felt

3m²

S016

No asbestos detected in sample. No further action required.

Asbestos Refurbishment Survey:

Naenae College

No asbestos was found within the walls and roof void. However, a previous sample of the bitumen under the roof has returned a positive result for asbestos. Depending on the condition of the bitumen it is possible that some areas may be contaminated and a full environmental clean of the roof void may have to be undertaken. Because of the construction of the building it is not possible to properly inspect the roof void for possible contamination until the roof is fully removed.

U c

All asbestos material should be removed by a qualified Class B asbestos removalist and a clearance certificate provided by a licensed assessor.

As noted elsewhere, asbestos may remain hidden in the fabric of the building. If any suspicious material is located during the refurbishment, work must immediately stop pending further testing by a competent person.

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Appendix 1: Site plans and sample locations

No asbestos detected

SOO? - Vinyl Flooring S010 - Vinyl Flooring X010 - Vinyl Flooring S015 - Vinyl Flooring S016 - Paper Backing


CO C O

Q.

0) ^


No access gained


Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

910 High Street - Refurb Survey - External



cn C O Q.

0) ■^


Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Appendix 2: Certificates of analysis


HiU Laboratories Level 3,204 Thorndon Quay

Thorndon

TRIED, TESTED AND TRUSTED Wellington 60H New Zealand

T 0508 HILL LAB (44 555 22)

T +64 7 858 2000

E mail@hil-labs.co.nz

W www.hill-laboratories.com

Certificate of Analysis

Page 1 of 2 1

Client:

Contact:

Major Consulting Group Limited                     Lab No:

Shelley Major                                     Date Received:

C/- Major Consulting Group Limited                 Date Reported:

PO Box 25334                                Quote No:

Featherston Street                                 Order NoWellington 6146                                   Client Reference;

Add. Client Ref:

Submitted By:

2807701

21-Dec-2021

22-Dec-2021

89027

W-01422

Date sampled: 20/12/21

Mike Dunnett

Sample Type: Building Material                                                                                   1

Sample Name

Lab Number

Sample Category*

Sample Weight on receipt (g)

Asbestos Presence / Absence

Description of Asbestos in Non Homogeneous Samples

S001

2807701.1

Fibre Cement

1.27

Amosite (Brown Asbestos) detected. Chrysotile (White Asbestos) detected

N/A

S002

2807701.2

Fibre Cement

3.11

Amosite (Brown Asbestos) detected. Chrysotile (White Asbestos) detected Crocidolite (Blue Asbestos) detected.

N/A

S003

2807701.3

Fibre Cement

1.16

Amosite (Brown Asbestos) detected. Chrysotile (White Asbestos) detected.

N/A

S004

2807701.4

Others

0.87

Asbestos NOT detected.

N/A

S005

2807701.5

Fibre Cement

1.04

Amosite (Brown Asbestos) detected. Chrysotile (White Asbestos) detected.

N/A

S006

2807701.6

Fibre Cement

0.95

Chrysotile (White Asbestos) detected. Organic fibres detected.

N/A

S007

2807701.7

Fibre Cement

1.60

Chrysotile (White Asbestos) detected.

N/A

SOOS

2807701.8

Other #2

1.23

Asbestos NOT detected.

N/A

8009

2807701.9

Linoleum /Vinyl floor tile

2.13

Asbestos NOT detected. Organic fibres detected.

N/A

S010

2807701.10

Linoleum / Vinyl floor tile

7.64

Asbestos NOT detected. Organic fibres detected.

N/A

S012

2807701.11

Fibre Cement

1.02

Asbestos NOT detected. Organic fibres detected.

N/A

8014

2807701.12

Fibre Cement

1.10

Amosite (Brown Asbestos) detected. Chrysotile (White Asbestos) detected.

N/A

8015

2807701.13

Linoleum / Vinyl floor tile

3.04

Asbestos NOT detected. Organic fibres detected.

N/A

8016

2807701.14

Fibre Cement

2.45

Asbestos NOT detected. Organic fibres detected.

N/A

S011

2807701.15

Fibre Cement

1.12

Amosite (Brown Asbestos) detected. Chrysotile (White Asbestos) detected. Crocidolite (Blue Asbestos) detected.

N/A


£ □


u


0)


Glossary of Ter ms

  • •    Loose fibres (Minor) - One or twofibres/fibre bundles identified during analysis by stereo microscope/PLM.

  • •    Loose fibres (Major) - Three or more fibres/fibre bundles identified during analysis by stereo microscope/PLM.

  • •    ACM Debris (Minor) - One or two small (<2mm) pieces of material attached to fibres identified during analysis by stereo microscope/PLM.

  • •    ACM Debris (Major) - Large (>2mm) piece, or more than three small (<2mm) pieces of material attached to fibres identified during analysis by stereo microscope/PLM.

  • •    Unknown Mineral Fibres - Mineral fibres of unknown type detected by polarised light microscopy including dispersion staining. The fibres detected may or may not be asbestos fibres. To confirm the identities, another independent analytical technique may be required.

  • •    Trace - Trace levels of asbestos, as defined by AS4 964-2004.

For further details, please contact the Asbestos Team.


Analyst's Comments

" Putty

m Concrete/Render



This Laboratory is accredited by International Accreditation New Zealand (IANZ), which represents New Zealand in the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC). Through the ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement (ILAC-MRA) this accreditation is internationally recognised.

The tests reported herein have been performed in accordance with the terms of accreditation, with the exception of tests marked * or any comments and interpretations, which are not accredited.


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Summary of Methods

The following tablets) gives a brief description of the methods used to conduct the analyses for this job. The detection limits given below are those attainable in a relatively simple matrix. Detection limits may be higher for individual samples should insufficient sample be available, or if the matrix requires that dilutions be performed during analysis. A detection limit range indicates the lowest and highest detection limits in the associated suiteof analytes. A foil listing of compounds and detection limits are available tom the laboratory upon request. Unless otherwise indicated, analyses were performed at Hill Laboratories, 28 Duke Street, Frankton, Hamilton 3204.

co £ □ U

Sample Type: Balding Material

Test

Method Description

Default Detection Limit

Sample No

Asbestos in Bulk Material

Sample Category*

Assessment of sample type. Analysed at Hill Laboratories -Asbestos; 204 Thorndon Quay, Wellington.

-

1-15

Sample Weight on receipt

Sample weight. Analysed at Hill Laboratories - Asbestos; 204 Thorndon Quay, Wellington.

0.01 g

1-15

Asbestos Presence / Absence

Examination using Low Powered Stereomicroscopy foilcwed by 'Polarised Light Microscopy1 including 'Dispersion Staining Techniques'. Analysed at Hill Laboratories - Asbestos; 204 Thorndon Quay, Wellington. AS 4964 (2004)- Method for the Qualitative Identification of Asbestos in Bulk Samples.

0.01 %

1-15

Description of Asbestos in Non Homogenous Samples

Form, dimensions and/or weight of asbestos fibres present. AS 4964 (2004) - Method for the Qualitative Identification of Asbestos in Bulk Samples.

-

1-15

These samples were collected by yourselves (or your agent) and analysed as received at the laboratory.


0)


Testing was completed between 21-Dec-2021 and 22-Dec-2021. For completion dates of individual analyses please contact the laboratory.

Samples are held at the laboratory after reporting for a length of time based onthestability of the samples and analytes being tested (considering any preservation used), and the storage space available. Once the storage period is completed, the samples are discarded unless otherwise agreed with the customer. Extended storage times may incur additional charges.

This certificate of analysis must not be reproduced, except in full, without the written consent of the signatory.

Ashleigh Teal

Section Manager - Asbestos

Lab No: 2807701-A2Pv1                        Hill Laboratories                                      Page 2 of 2

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Appendix 3: Survey register

The survey register records all areas that have been surveyed, together with the results of the survey.

£

□)

(I)

Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



(I) £


VO


Naenae College

Floor

Area / Room

Location

Accessed

Reason for No Access / Inaccessible Areas / General Room Comment

Approach

Photo

Ground Floor

007 / Ladies Bathroom

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material

VISITORS ONLY

mO STU^5

' 1

U^K '

Ground Floor

008 / Mens Bathroom

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material

IE33

VISITORS ONLY

Ground Floor

009 / Meeting Room

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material

Ground Floor

011 / Administration Room

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material


£

□)

(I)



Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Naenae College

Floor

Area / Room

Location

Accessed

Reason for No Access / Inaccessible Areas / General Room Comment

Approach

Photo

Ground Floor

012 / Reception

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material

Ground Floor

013 / Principals Office

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material

■B1

Ground Floor

014 / Resource Managers Room

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material

NIB

Ground Floor

015 / Principal Assistant

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material

1 ^i^^^BH si


£

□)

(I)



Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021




Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Naenae College


Floor

Area / Room

Location

Accessed

Reason for No Access / Inaccessible Areas / General Room Comment

Approach

Photo

Ground Floor

021 / Administration Specialist room

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material

1 ■*1 ■?

Ground Floor

022 / Photo copy room

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material

aS *'

Ground Floor

026 / Storage

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material

Ground Floor

020 / north west entrance

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos not detected in sample.

Sampled S008

Ml

1_____i


£

□)

(I)



Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Naenae College

Floor

Area / Room

Location

Accessed

Reason for No Access / Inaccessible Areas / General Room Comment

Approach

Photo

Ground Floor

023 / Nurses Room

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos not detected in sample.

Sampled S009

Ground Floor

024 / Nurse

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos not detected in sample.

Sampled S010

Ground Floor

010 / Main entrance

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos not detected in sample.

Sampled S015

JI

Ground Floor

027 / Kitchen

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos not detected in sample.

Sampled S016

tn

^ I


£

□)

(I)



Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Naenae College


Floor

Area / Room

Location

Accessed

Reason for No Access / Inaccessible Areas / General Room Comment

Approach

Photo

Ground Floor

025 / Sickbay

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos not detected in sample.

Cross Reference X010

External

029 / Eaves

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Sampled S011


£

□)

(I)



Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Naenae College

Floor

Area / Room

Location

Accessed

Reason for No Access / Inaccessible Areas / General Room Comment

Approach

Photo

External

033 / Eaves

Yes

No suspect materials were identified within the room during the survey

No Suspect Material

External

037 / Under iron roof

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Previously Sampled PS001

%**^v/^    A|^| £   ^ ^ .

77

External

001 / Eaves

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Sampled S001

External

002 / External pillar

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Sampled S002


£

□)

(I)


(I) £


VO


Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Naenae College

Floor

Area / Room

Location

Accessed

Reason for No Access / Inaccessible Areas / General Room Comment

Approach

Photo

External

003 / North eaves

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Sampled S003

^^1

External

004 / Windows

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos not detected in sample.

Sampled S004

External

005 / Northwest Corner Cladding

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Sampled S005

al

External

006 / Northwest corner eaves

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Sampled S006

Ai


£

□)

(I)


(I) £


VO


Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Naenae Coll

Floor

ge

Area / Room

Location

Accessed

Reason for No Access / Inaccessible Areas / General Room Comment

Approach

Photo

External

006 / Northwest corner pillar

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Sampled S007

External

030 / External Walls

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Sampled S012

External

031 / Upper Cladding

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Sampled S014

-^witurrr

8

External

028 / Eaves

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Cross Reference X001

1      ‘ M


£

□)

(I)



Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Naenae College

Floor

Area / Room

Location

Accessed

Reason for No Access / Inaccessible Areas / General Room Comment

Approach

Photo

External

032 / Eaves

Yes

Sampled suspect material. Asbestos detected in sample.

Cross Reference X011

7          1'


£

□)

(I)


(I) £


VO


Asbestos Refurbishment Survey :

Naenae College


W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021



Appendix 4: Survey methodology and limitations

MCG’s survey methodology is based on:

+ The New Zealand Approved Code of Practice for the Management and Removal of Asbestos

+ WorkSafe NZ’s guidance for conducting asbestos surveys

+ The UK Health and Safety Executive’s guidance document Asbestos: The Survey Guide (HSG 264) +  ISO17020:2013 detailing the internationally accepted standards for performing inspections

Sampling was carried out in a manner designed to create minimal disturbance in accordance with published guidance and documented methods; however, it may have involved destructive techniques to get into the fabric of the structure. Hand tools and dust suppression techniques were employed to limit the potential generation of respirable fibres.

All samples collected were appropriately labelled and securely double-bagged whilst on site, prior to analysis by an accredited laboratory. Sampling points were sealed as appropriate to prevent fibre release.

Once all works associated with the asbestos refurbishment survey were completed, a visual assessment of the areas surveyed was carried out and, where necessary, made good to ensure that the site was suitable for reoccupation.

It was not felt necessary to appoint a licensed asbestos removal contractor to facilitate access to all areas on site.

It must be noted that asbestos materials are frequently concealed within the fabric of buildings or within sealed building voids; accordingly, it is not possible to regard the findings of any survey as being definitive. It must always remain a possibility therefore that further asbestos-containing material may be found during other activities.

MCG cannot accept any liability for the report not containing information on concealed spaces which may exist within the fabric of the building where the extent and presence of these is not evident at the time of the survey. We accept no liability where additional ACM is found during refurbishment activities. Accordingly, the Client is advised to make provision during the course of any refurbishment for the additional services of a suitably experienced surveyor/specialist to provide advice and/or take samples and/or provide supplementary report(s) in the event that additional ACM is uncovered during the course of the refurbishment.

All areas which have not been accessed must be presumed to contain asbestos until investigation and sampling proves otherwise.

Guidance on work with asbestos can be found in the Health and Safety at Work (Asbestos) Regulations 2016 and Approved Code of Practice for the Management and Removal of Asbestos. Additional relevant information is also available in various HSE guidance notes including HSG213, HSG247, HSG189/2 and HSG227.

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Appendix 5: Risk assessment

0)

co tn CD V» v>

Materials that are identified positive for asbestos during the survey are allocated a material assessment score to indicate the type and condition of the ACM, and its potential to release fibres. The material risk assessment guides the recommendations to minimise the risk of exposure to respirable asbestos fibres.

□

The table below shows the algorithm used for calculating the risk.

Sample Variable

Score

Examples

Product type (or debris from product)

1 (Low)

Composites (plastics, resins, mastics, roofing felts, vinyl floor tiles, paints, decorative finishes, cement etc.)

2 (Medium)

AIB, textiles, gaskets, ropes, paper etc.

3 (High)

Lagging, spray coatings, loose asbestos etc.

Extent of damage

0 (None)

No visible damage.

1 (Low)

Few scratches/marks, broken edges etc.

2 (Medium)

Significant breakage of non-friable materials or several areas of damage to friable material.

3 (High)

High damage/visible debris.

Surface

Treatment

0 (None)

Non-friable composite asbestos/encapsulated cement.

1 (Low)

Enclosed sprays/lagging/board or bare cement.

2 (Medium)

Bare AIB or encapsulated lagging/spray.

3 (High)

Unsealed lagging/spray/loose asbestos.

Asbestos Type

1

Chrysotile.

2

Amphibole asbestos excluding Crocidolite.

3

Crocidolite.

The material risk assessment score is calculated by adding the scores above to show the correlation to exposure risk, as shown in the table below.

Material Assessment Score

Fibre Release Potential

10 or higher

High

7 – 9

Medium

5 – 6

Low

4 or lower

Very Low

Scores of 7 or more indicate that urgent attention is required. Scores of 6 or less may be deemed nonurgent. However, this is only used as a guide: specific recommendations are given with the survey results detailed in the asbestos register.

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Appendix 6: Service constraints

co H— c

□

U

</> c o u

(D U

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

Appendix 7: Glossary

The following is a list of the different asbestos types:

Name

Description

Chrysotile

White asbestos

Amosite (aka grunerite)

Brown asbestos

Crocidolite

Blue asbestos

Tremolite

Fibrous forms of these minerals may be found very occasionally during sample analysis. They should be considered as hazardous as amosite and crocidolite.

Anthophyllite

Actinolite

Erionite

A fibrous mineral that may be found in volcanic ash deposits.


a V» V) O 0


The following terms, abbreviations and acronyms may appear in the text of this report:

Abbreviation

Meaning

AIB

Asbestos insulation board

AC

Asbestos cement

ACM

Asbestos-containing materials

ACD

Asbestos-containing dust

AMP

Asbestos management plan

HSE

Health and Safety Executive, the UK equivalent of WorkSafe NZ

HSG

Health and Safety Guide, issued by HSE

NADS

No asbestos detected in sample

P

Presumed: Sample is presumed to contain asbestos

SP

Strongly Presumed: Sample is strongly presumed to contain asbestos

X

Cross-referenced to a sample already taken

W-01422

Issue Date: 23/12/2021

▲▲▲

RESOLVE'?

ARCHITECTS

MINISTRY OF EDUCATION

TE TĀHUHU O TE MĀTAURANGA

Detailed Design Report

Weathertightness Remediation

Administration Building at Naenae College

July 2022


Prepared By: Resolve It Architects Ltd

For the Ministry of Education

Version 1.0 Template, September 2019

MINISTRY OF EDUCATION

TE TĀHUHU O TE MĀTAURANGA

Document Control Records

Document Prepared by:

Resolve It Architects Ltd

L1 171 Vivian Street

Te Aro

Wellington

Telephone:          04 903 4976

Email:                info@resolveitarchitects.co.nz

Revision History

Revision No.

Prepared By

Description

Date

01

Nigel Ball

Architect

220814

Document Acceptance

Action

Name

Position

Signed

Date

Prepared by:

Nigel Ball

Architect

220814

Reviewed by:

Mark Ansell

Director

220814

Approved by:

Mark Ansell

Director

220814

Table of Contents

Appendix A - Architectural Documents  16

1 Introduction

The purpose of this Detailed Design report is to clearly present to the Ministry of Education the remedial work solutions that will address the identified weathertightness failures that are causing consequential damage to the building. In addition, it records the following –

This report may also be provided to other interested parties including the School’s BoT and Building Consent Authority when a building consent application for the works is being lodged.

The Naenae College administration block is a single level L shaped building, the ends of each wing join against adjacent blocks: a classroom block to the east and the Hall lobby to the south. It has timber framed windows and a variety of cladding types including fibre cement sheet and vertical shiplap timber. The roof consists of two large mono-pitch upper roofs and a lower-level section of roof below the clerestory window line on the inside elevation of the L configuration, all roofs are clad with longrun metal roofing. The roofs on the clerestory side are set at a minimal and/or insufficient falls with little to no upstand against the clerestory windowsills. The block has been added to over the years which has contributed to a complicated the roofscape with poorly flashed junctions and sections of roof with insufficient low pitch, this has resulted in the roof cladding degradation and blockages from leaf litter.

The scope of this developed design is for the exterior envelope, including both the roof cladding and exterior wall claddings, it also includes changes to the exterior envelope due to the interior layout changes. Remediation of the roofs necessitates the replacement of the clerestory windows with new aluminium framed windows resized to allow for compliant sill clearances from the new roof.

The admin building’s weathertightness scope is limited to the roofing works and clerestory windows. The existing roofs are to be remediated by installing a new overlay roof system over the existing longrun metal roofing. The lower section of the roof on the courtyard side is to be re-pitched to provide the required falls and this necessitates the replacement of the clerestory windows to achieve compliant sill clearances from the new roof.

The interior layout has been the subject of a review and redesign by IR Group. This has resulted in changes to the exterior envelope and structure which include:

2 General Information

The Administration Block roofs have exceed their weathertightness lifespan and require immediate remediation or replacement. Asbestos has also been identified in the build up of the existing roof construction so the proposed weathertightness remediation solution is to install an overlay system over the all of the existing roof cladding.

The weathertightness failures and consequential damage identified in the Remediation Inspection report, and that the Ministry has decided to address are summarised as follows:

N/A

Further to our engagement, the following additional weathertightness failures and consequential damage that have been identified and confirmed by the Ministry to be addressed are summarised as follows:

N/A

This project involves the installation of a new overlay roof system over the existing longrun trough roof cladding. The over lay roof system make-up consists of PIR boards within the troughs of the existing roof cladding, a vapour control layer, a layer of PIR sheet and weather proofed with waterproof membrane outer layer.

Other work included in the project are a result of the redesign of the interior which include:

The roof remediation and interior layout redesign has resulted in the following upgrades and substitutions:

The weathertightness remediation design is in accordance with E2/AS1, with all roof falls in compliance with the acceptable solution. A summary of the roofing systems and wall cladding compliance is set out below:

A project specific QA plan will be prepared using the MOE standard template and utilised during the construction phase.

Architects / Designers are required to answer all questions in this section as part of their Preliminary Design Report. The checkboxes in the list are activated by a double click in MS Word. If any of the ‘No’ or ‘N/A’ boxes are checked, explanatory notes must be provided in the comments’ column.

Compliance


Yes


No


N/A


Comments


General

Yes

No

N/A

Comments

Do the latest plans and amendments show changes (clouded) with version numbering and dates?

KI

Is a project specific QA plan being developed?

KI

Are the outline specification notes project specific?

K

Refer Project Specification

Have recommendations from the Remediation Inspection Report been incorporated?

I |

KI

No Remediation Inspection Report

Have any scope changes from the Remediation Inspection Report been recorded and justified?

I |

I |

K

Has a check been made to establish whether the existing building requires any seismic strengthening?

I |

K

(this issue should be confirmed with the Ministry)

Has a check been made to establish whether the existing building needs any fire engineering input?

K

Refer to Section 112 Assessment

Has a check been made to establish whether there are any asbestos containing materials (ACM) in the existing building & if so, has a demolition survey been prepared?

KI

□

□

ACM Report appended

If an Alternative Solution being proposed, has a supporting rationale been provided?

If proprietary systems are being used, is there a BRANZ Appraisal, codemark or other form of certification?

Have the limitations of a codemark or BRANZ Appraisal been considered and addressed?

Has a check been made to determine whether the building’s occupants need to be vacated during the remediation works?

□ □ K

^ □ □

^ □ □

□

(this issue should be confirmed with the Ministry)

Compliance                             Yes No N/A

Comments

Surface Water                            Yes No N/A

Comments

Are floor and finished ground levels shown on the plan?

Are finished ground levels formed to carry water away from the building?

Has the size and capacity of channel drains been checked?

Has the size and capacity of roof gutters and downpipes been checked?

Either existing compliant condition or new future landscaping design by others

Existing remain unchanged

Structure                                  Yes No N/A

Comments

Has a check been made to establish

whether any existing wall bracing elements 0           □

are affected?

Designed by Structural Engineer

Timber Framing                           Yes No N/A

Comments

Is a timber remediation expert to be employed during the construction phase?

Wall Cladding                             Yes No N/A

Comments

If the cladding system has open (expressed)

joints, has a Rigid Air Barrier (RAB) system □    □

been incorporated?

Do existing cladding systems have sufficient clearance above finished ground levels?

Has an option to increase the durability of

the new cladding system been considered K □ and / or discussed with the Ministry?

Roofing

Yes

No

N/A

Comments

Has a rationale been provided if replacing existing roof surfaces and the existing falls are less than recommended?

KI

Have membrane fall heights been calculated to ensure they can be achieved on site (e.g. clashes with high level window sills)?

|X|

□

□

Roof pitches to be raised to 2 degrees minimum where required

Where a change of roofing is proposed (from membrane to metal roofing), have the acoustic ramifications been considered and allowed for?

□

□

K

Have maintenance requirements of all material and system selections been considered? Provide comment.

KI

□

□

Existing configuration, pitches, condition and budget have led to the proposed overlay roof system being selected as the solution to best satisfying all design considerations.

Architects / Designers are required to answer all questions in this section as part of their Detail Design Report. The checkboxes in the list are activated by a double click in MS Word. If any of the ‘No’ or ‘N/A’ check boxes are checked, explanatory notes must be provided in the comment’s column.

General

Yes

No

N/A

Comments

Do the latest plans and amendments show changes (clouded) with version numbering and dates?

KI

Has a project specific construction phase QA plan been provided?

□

KI

□

Pending

Is the specification project specific?

KI

□

□

Have large scale details for all key flashings, junctions, changes of plane and assembly details been provided at 1:5 or 1:2 scale?

KI

□

□

Have 3D views of all complex flashing details been provided?

KI

□

□

If required as a part of the project, have seismic strengthening issues been coordinated with the weathertightness remediation works?

If required as a part of the project, have fire engineering issues been coordinated with the weathertightness remediation works?

K

□

Refer Fire Report

Has a timber remediation section been included in the specification?

KI

□

□

Has the design considered thermal expansion for metal roofs (particularly roofs with sheet length/ flashings/ gutters over 12m in length)?

□

□

KI

Membrane roof cladding

Has the metal roof design been checked for aggravated thermal bridging?

K

Has a check been done to confirm material compatibility of all external envelope components?

K

1 1

I |

Has full design coordination been undertaken with other consultants (structural engineer, mechanical engineer etc.)

KI

□

□

Structural

Appendix A - Architectural Documents

Drawings

Title

Size

Drawing number

Revision

Date

Location Plan

A1

000

A

14/08/2022

General Notes

A1

001

A

14/08/2022

Plan – Ground – Existing/Demo

A1

100

A

14/08/2022

Plan – Clerestory – Existing/Demo

A1

101

A

14/08/2022

Plan – Roof – Existing/Demo

A1

102

A

14/08/2022

Plan – Ground – Proposed

A1

110

A

14/08/2022

Plan – Clerestory – Proposed

A1

111

A

14/08/2022

Plan – Roof – Proposed

A1

112

A

14/08/2022

Plan – Rainfall Calculation

A1

113

A

14/08/2022

Elevations - Existing

A1

200

A

14/08/2022

Elevations - Existing

A1

201

A

14/08/2022

Elevations - Proposed

A1

210

A

14/08/2022

Elevations - Proposed

A1

211

A

14/08/2022

3D Views - Proposed

A1

212

A

14/08/2022

3D Views – Existing & Proposed

A1

213

A

14/08/2022

3D Views – Existing & Proposed

A1

214

A

14/08/2022

Sections

A1

300

A

14/08/2022

Sections

A1

301

A

14/08/2022

Sections

A1

302

A

14/08/2022

Sections – Proposed Enlarged 1:20

A1

303

A

14/08/2022

Sections – Proposed Enlarged 1:20

A1

304

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

500

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

501

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

502

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

503

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

504

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

505

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

506

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

507

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

508

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

509

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

510

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

511

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

512

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

513

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

514

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

515

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

516

A

14/08/2022

Construction Details

A1

517

A

14/08/2022

Joinery Schedule

A1

700

A

14/08/2022

Specification

Title

Size

Ref. number

Revision

Date

Naenae College Admin Building Exterior

A4

R21112

21/07/2022

Other Supporting Information

Title

Size

Ref. number

Revision

Date

Fire Engineering Design

A4

24523

July 2022

Asbestos Refurbishment Survey Report

A4

W-01422

23/12/2021

NAENAE COLLEGE

ScVIqoU h>A£NM^ . ^OLL^&B.

P\WIZ.^i M(\^^S GT^eT. MZ\EKM£

LoC-ftl. t<o\)ĒE.Wil®T (!.EftC.E<OC£i Lov^ei?. lAiATT C|Ty

^^2J> S£fl= <2,EK)C£', AÔoH-TH&^K)- 0//^°^

teg|oh) ea^e^tetOcei well.ii\)g.Tok^ O^ Ma^R^UoeK. fZ.eFE.R.EbJCt'. 1948^00' / (^48500 .

UE&P^U TiE^e^h^ria^', Loi&Law 2. W iô?-,^ .

,ft£-E4(^o): i'S 1O/7.U.                   _

ETftTuS: - >C< C-KYDfXP.y 5cHOOL..('MCL,U9eS KiP.eMftt

C           Zo(o),

L£(^^L D^KC^IpTl-Ni ?m . Lcn\ I DP l9^'.

CT, ^e^ -

^CA ^(^ '. o. 06^0 Kos .

?LM fc^.                 ■   .   .

^T^T^S'. 5ECOMbf\^ School , (\UCLU^£6 ^KIC^G

TOT6C. 6I7ê K^e^ :     \^ 13 U


W


Extract from N./. Gazette, "23 August 1962, No. 53, page 1367

l.and Hehl for State Housing Purposes Set Apart for Secondary School Purposes in the City of Lower Hutt, and Previous Proclamation Revoked

COBHAM Governor-General

A PROCLAMATION

Pursuant Io the Public Works Act 1928, I, Charles John, Viscount Cubham, the Governor-General of New Zealand, hereby revoke the Proclamation dated the 30th day of April I9(>2, published in Gazette, 10 May 1962, Np. 29, at page 717, and registered as No. 527 446, Wellington Lund Registry, and also hereby proclaim and declare that the land described in the Schedule hereto, now held for State housing purposes, is hereby set apart for secondary ■school purposes; and I also declare that this Proclamation shall take enect on and after the 27lh day of August 1962.

SCHEDULE

Weilingion Land Disinter

An. that piece of land containing 35*18 perches situated it): the City of Lower Hull, Wellington R.D., being (Lot 3, D.P. -18397J being part Section 50, Hutt District. Part certificate of .title,. Volume 586, folio 192, Wellington Land Registry.

[i„s,]                W. S, GO OSMAN,- Minister of Works.

God Save ihe QueenI

(H.C. X/71/2/21; D.O. 13/1/75/0)

^£|LU .iiMj-U it ij^uV^A l& ;j u <ii ii.j2S.< &! isfii &&i!d&ipj£^w -^IiiÊ i^Uiī X * f-i- -t> SjliZji/Iiiij&Xi^ei: fcu'iiii’l'iiiiSiJik'iilk XtlS^ jstJaSilkj^^i^ J ^"s-^to.^-ripe Linn Cert! fi onto under Section 26

of the IJouilnj Act 19IJ> rulutu'.; to pipe UnG,T for tllO pUBBOgO Of ^^^^/."ii-^i ^<r r ^T^^^^/^

/3 - ^ - /^j ^

Particulars Entered In Regis ter.-book.

I olio


4 2«


17


'«.mi 1 .mil Hvflstr.ir, WLLLh'JGIQH,



$


iSft

V

feo:             ✓-

'Extract from N.Z, Gazette, 1 Nov. 1962, No. 68, page 1878 I-----------------------------------------------------

Land Heki for State Housing Purposes Set Apart for Public . Schools anil a Secondary School hi the Chy of Lower Halt

H. E. BARROWCLOUGH, Administrator of the Government

A PROCLAMATION

Pursuant to the Public Works Act 1928, J, Major-General the Right ; Honourable Sir Harold Eric harrowclough, the Administrator of the Government of New Zealand, hereby proclaim and declare that the land firstly and secondly described, in the Schedule hereto, now held for Stale housing purposes, is hereby set apart for public schools, and that the land thirdly ’described in (he sard Schedule, now held for State housing purposes, is hereby set apart for a secondary school; and I also declare that this Proclamation shall lake effect on and after the 5th day of November l%2i

WbLUNaroN Land UisiRicr

All those pieces of land situated in the City of Lower Hull, Wellington R.D., described as follows:

^8 0 4   ’ Lot 1, D.P. 22796, being pari Section 43, Hutt

District. Part certificates of titlo, Volume 594, folio 240. and Volume 764, folio 49, Wellington Land Registry, subject Io pipeline certificates K, 39408 and K. 43763, Wellington Land Registry.

1 3 18’04 Lot 82, D.P. 15742, being part Section 40( Hutt ,                 District, and part Section 8s, Waddington

Settlement. Pari certificate of title, Volume 517, folio 290, Wellington Land Registry.

_ 32 I 20*26 Lots 1 and 2, B.P. 18397, being Section 693

Irid. Part certificates of title,. Volume 586, '.                folio 192, and Volume'359, folio 63, and pari

Proclamation No,:i'’ 5701, ; Wellington Land Registry; !'.’ . f

Givch under the hand of His Excellency the Administrator of the Government, and issued under Ihc Seal of New Zealand, (his 26th day of October 1962.

(la]              W. S. GOOSMAN, Minister of Works.

God Save die Queen!

(H.C. Xfll/lflS, Xm/2/19, X/71/3/13; D.O. 32/0/8/1) R. E. OwtH, Government Tibiler, Wellington, New ZeeUtiil,

SPECIFICATION

of work to be done and materials to be used in carrying out the works shown on the accompanying drawings

Naenae College Admin

Building Exterior

(project name)

910 High Street, Avalon, Hutt City, New Zealand

(project address)

Ministry of Education

(client)

Project Ref: R21112

Date: 21 July 2022

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1220

PROJECT

3

1222

PROJECT PERSONNEL

6

1232

INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS

9

1232S1

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULE SECTIONS

11

1237

WARRANTIES

12

1237S1

SCHEDULE OF WARRANTIES

15

1239

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

16

1239S1

SCHEDULE OF OPERATION & MAINTENANCE INFO

20

1240

ESTABLISHMENT

21

1247

TRAFFIC CONTROL

23

1250

TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES

25

1256

WASTE MANAGEMENT

30

1260

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

33

1270

CONSTRUCTION

40

3102

CONCRETE WORK - STANDARD

52

3410

STRUCTURAL STEEL

61

3821

TIMBER FRAMING

67

3897

REPLACEMENT & TREATMENT OF DECAYED TIMBER

74

4161T

THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS, DPC, DPM, & TAPES

80

4171HR

JAMES HARDIE® RIGID AIR BARRIERS

87

4221KH

KLC HORIZONTAL WEATHERBOARD CLADDING SYSTEM

92

4231HA

JAMES HARDIE® AXON™ PANEL CLADDING

98

4231HE

JAMES HARDIE® EASYLAP™ PANEL CLADDING

104

4239JH

JAMES HARDIE® SOFFITS

110

4337

PLYWOOD ROOFING & DECKING SUBSTRATE

115

4424RL

ROOFLOGIC ULTRATHERM XTREME FIBERTITE ROOFING SYSTEM

118

4521AC

APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS

133

4610AG

AGP® GLAZING RESIDENTIAL

145

4811S

SIKA SEALANTS

151

4821

FLASHINGS

158

4851

EXTERIOR HANDRAILS & TIMBER BALUSTRADES

162

6700R

RESENE PAINTING GENERAL

164

6711R

RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR

172

0jk|0master

Verified spec ID: 247848-235612

This specification has been produced using Masterspec software and completed on

IM 21/07/p2022.         p g p            p

Scan to verify or go to masterspec.co.nz/verify

7411D DIMOND RAINWATER SPOUTING SYSTEMS

7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS

175

179

1220   PROJECT

This general section describes the project including:

Read all general sections together with all other sections.

Naenae College Administration building: Remediation of roof and exterior walls. Interior works are specified under the separate interior documentation package. Work Scope includes:

New overlay roof system

New exterior wall cladding

New main entrance

New student entrance

New Accessible ramp

This project does not include Restricted Building Work.

Design Construction Safety

Refer to the separate project design construction Safety Design Report.

Provide particular health and safety procedures and methods to mitigate any hazards or risks in the report, and specifically include them as well as any other health and safety matters in the site Health and Safety Plan (refer to section 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT for Plan requirements). The Contractor is still required to undertake its own assessment, to determine if they consider there are any further safety matters and provide for these in carrying out the construction of the work.

Principal's Health & Safety Matters

Site hazards known to the principal are: Active school site

Obtain a copy of the principal's site health and safety plan.

Site

The site consists Naenae College of:

1.8

As shown on Drawings

drawing:

LEGAL DESCRIPTION

The site of the works, the street address and the legal description are shown on the drawings.

1.9

EXISTING BUILDINGS

Existing buildings Naenae College Administration building consist of:

Refer drawing(s): Drawings

1.10

EXISTING SERVICES

The following are the network utility services:

Electrical:        Yes

Communications: Yes

Water:          Yes

Gas:           Assume yes, Check on site.

Stormwater:     Yes

Foul water:      Yes

1.11

The services are also shown on the drawings.

SITE FEATURES

Some landscape features may be being retained. Confirm with Landscape Architect.

1.12

Site environment - Durability

EXPOSURE ZONE

The exposure zone is to NZS 3604, Section 4 Durability, 4.2 Exposure zones and NZBC E2/AS1.

The site zone is: C

Site environment - Wind

1.13

WIND DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN

The design wind pressures are to NZS 3604, Table 5.4 Determination of wind zone, up to and including Extra High Wind Zone.

Building wind VH (refer to NZS 3604, table 5.4)

zone

Site environment - Seismic

1.14

EARTHQUAKE ZONE - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN

The zone is to NZS 3604, Section 5 Bracing design, 5.3 Earthquake bracing demand.

The earthquake 3

zone is:

1.15

Archaeological discovery

REPORT FINDING ANY ANTIQUITIES AND ITEMS OF VALUE

Report the finding of any fossils, antiquities and other items of value, to the Contract Administrator. All to remain undisturbed until approval is given for removal.

Pre-1900, items or evidence of human activity on the site, come under the Heritage New Zealand Pouhere Taonga Act 2014. If such items or evidence is discovered work must stop immediately and the Contract Administrator must be notified immediately. The site may be classified as an Archaeological Site under the Act, and the Contract Administrator or Owner must contact the Heritage New Zealand for authority to proceed.

Post-1900 items remain the property of the owner, pre-1900 items may remain the property of the owner or the Crown subject to what is found.

Known archaeological information relating to this site includes the following: -

1222

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

PROJECT PERSONNEL

GENERAL

This general section provides a list of the parties who are involved with the project. Communications to these personnel are to be sent to them at the address as listed. Refer to the construction contract for:

Principal

PRINCIPAL

Name:           Ministry of Education

Postal:

Street:

Telephone:

Represented by:

Mobile:

Email:

Contractor

COMPANY

Name:        TBC

Postal:

Street:

Telephone:

Represented by:

Mobile:

Email:

CONTRACT MANAGER

Person:        TBC

Mobile:

Telephone:

Email:

SITE FOREMAN

Person:        TBC

Mobile:

Telephone:

Email:

Consultants

CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR

Practice:         IR Group

Postal:         PO Box 40651, Upper Hutt 5140

Street:

Telephone:      04 526 7711

Represented by: Frank Bourke

Mobile:          (027) 427-3471

Email:           frank@irgroup.co.nz

1.6

ARCHITECT

Practice:         Resolve It Architects

Postal:         PO Box 9792

Street:           Level 1, 171 Vivian Street, Te Aro, Wellington.

Telephone:      04 930 4976

Represented by: Mark Ansell

Mobile:         021 479 706

Email:           Mark.ansell@riarch.nz

1.7

INTERIOR DESIGNER

Practice:         IR Group

Postal:         PO Box 40651, Upper Hutt 5140

Street:

Telephone:

Represented by:

Mobile:

E-mail:

1.8

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

Practice:        TBC

Postal:

Street:

Telephone:

Represented by:

Mobile:

Email:

1.9

FIRE ENGINEER

Practice:        TBC

Postal:

Street:

Telephone:

Represented by:

Mobile:

Email:

Territorial Authority

1.10

BUILDING CONSENT AUTHORITY

Name:          Hutt City Council

Postal:          Private Bag 31-912, Lower Hutt, 5040

Street:          30 Laings Road, Lower Hutt

Telephone:      +64 04 570 6666 | 0800 488 824

Mobile:

Email:           contact@huttcity.govt.nz

1.11

BUILDING CERTIFIER

Name:         N/A

Postal:

Street:

Telephone:

Represented by:

Mobile:

E-mail:

1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS

1 GENERAL

This general section relates to definitions and interpretation that are used in this specification.

Definitions

1.1

1.2

DEFINITIONS

Hold point:

A stage of the construction where the contract administrator and any other nominated person requires notice to be given that particular work is to be carried out. Work may not proceed on that particular part until the contract administrator and any other nominated person has advised that work can continue. A notice period of 2 Working Days is required unless stated otherwise.

Notification point:

A stage of the construction where the contract administrator and any other nominated person requires notice to be given that particular work is to be carried out. Work may continue and the contract administrator and any other nominated person may choose whether or not they wish to witness the particular work being carried out. A notice period of 2 Working Days is required unless stated otherwise.

Product:

A thing or substance produced by natural process or manufacture.

Proprietary:

Identifiable by naming the manufacturer, supplier, installer, trade name, brand name, catalogue or reference number.

Provide and fix:

"Provide" or "fix" or "supply" or "fix" if used separately mean provide and fix unless explicitly stated otherwise.

Required:

Required by the documents, the New Zealand Building Code or by a statutory authority.

Review:

Review by the contract administrator and other consultants is for general compliance only. Review does not remove the need for the contractor to comply with the stated requirements, details and specifications of the manufacturers and suppliers of individual components, materials and finishes.

Neither can the review be construed as authorising departures from the contract documents.

Working day:

Working day means a calendar day other than any Saturday, Sunday, public holiday or any day falling within the period from 24 December to 5 January, both days inclusive, irrespective of the days on which work is actually carried out.

Workplace:

Workplace means the place where work is being carried out, or is customarily carried out, for a business or undertaking including any place where a worker goes, or is likely to be, while at work (under Health and Safety at Work Act 2015).

PERSONNEL

Principal:

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022

The person defined as "Principal" in the conditions of contract.

Contractor:

The person contracted by the principal to carry out the contract.

Contract administrator:

The person appointed by the principal to administer the contract on the principal's behalf. Where no person has been appointed by the principal, it means the principal or the principal's representative.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

The following abbreviations are used throughout the specification:

AAMA AS AS/NZS ASTM AWCINZ

American Architectural Manufacturers Association Australian Standard

Joint Australian/New Zealand Standard

American Society for Testing and Materials Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries of New Zealand Inc.

BCA BRANZ BS COP CSIRO

Building Consent Authority

Building Research Association of New Zealand

British Standard

Code of practice

Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research

Organisation

HERA LBP MBIE MPNZA NZBC NZS NZS/AS NZTA NUO OSH PCBU

Heavy Engineering Research Association

Licensed Building Practitioner

Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment

Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc

New Zealand Building Code

New Zealand Standard

Joint New Zealand/Australian Standard

New Zealand Transport Agency

Network Utility Operator

Occupational Safety and Health

Person Conducting a Business or Undertaking

(under Health and Safety at Work Act 2015)

RBW

SARNZ

SED TA TNZ

Restricted Building Work

Scaffolding and Rigging New Zealand Inc

Specific Engineering Design

Territorial Authority

Transit New Zealand

(Transit New Zealand is now New Zealand Transport Agency NZTA - some specifications are still prefixed TNZ)

Words defined in the conditions of contract, New Zealand Standards, or other reference documents, to have the same interpretation and meaning when used in their lower case, title case or upper case form in the specification text.

Where the context requires, words importing singular only, also include plural and vice versa.

1232S1 EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULE SECTIONS

This general section provides an explanation of schedule sections and their relationship to general sections and work sections. Specific schedule sections contained within this specification are also identified.

A schedule section identifies work sections that contain common requirements, as identified in the title of the schedule section. For example 1235S1 SCHEDULE OF SHOP DRAWINGS identifies work sections that have requirements for shop drawings. Details of the requirements are contained in the identified work sections with additional requirements contained in the general section 1235 SHOP DRAWINGS.

Some schedule sections are identified by the 4 digit CBI (Co-ordinated Building Information) number of the general section that they relate to, followed by the letter "S" followed by a numeral (1-9). The numeral allows for multiple schedule sections to be associated with the same general section.

Other schedule sections that do not share a common CBI number with a general section, have their own unique 4 digit CBI number, followed by the letter "S" followed by a numeral. These schedule sections contain additional subject content relating to the schedules and the identified work sections.

The following Schedule sections are contained within the specification: 1237S1  Schedule of Warranties

1239S1   Schedule of Operation & Maintenance Info

1237  WARRANTIES

This general section refers to the requirements for warranties/guarantees, referred to within this specification and referred to within separate specifications/documents relating to this project. It includes:

These guarantees/warranties are in addition to any warranties, implied warranties, or guarantees that are required by the Building Act, the Building Regulations, or the building consent.

Refer to 1237S1 SCHEDULE OF WARRANTIES for work sections contained in this specification that have requirements for warranties.

Warranties

Provide executed warranties in favour of the principal in respect of, but not limited to, materials, components, service, application, installation and finishing called for in that specified section of work. The terms and conditions of the warranty in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability under the terms of the warranty called for in that specified section of work.

Where installer/applicator warranties are offered covering execution and materials of proprietary products or complete installations, provide such warranties to the contract administrator. These warranties may be provided in lieu of the warranties that are otherwise required provided that these warranties are subject to similar conditions and periods.

Provide warranties in favour of the principal. The terms and conditions of such warranties in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.

Where warranties are offered covering materials, equipment, appliances or proprietary products, provide all such warranties to the contract administrator.

Provide warranties in favour of the principal. The terms and conditions of such warranties in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.

Submission

Obtain the warranties from the installers, applicators, manufacturers and suppliers at the earliest possible date and review to ensure that they are correctly filled out and executed. Where warranties are executed as a deed, ensure that a duplicate copy is provided for execution by the owner/principal. Keep safe and secure until required for submission.

Obtain copies of warranties required as a condition of the building consent in the form required for submission to the BCA. Keep safe and secure until required at the time of the BCA final inspection and Code Compliance Certificate.

Obtain copies of warranties listed in the contract documents. Provide all warranties at the same time. If the project has an operations and maintenance documentation provision, present the warranties with the operations and maintenance information. If no operations and maintenance documentation provision exists, present the warranties to the contract administrator in a loose-leaf binder with a contents index suitably labelled and including the project name and details. Provide a title on the binder edge "Warranties for (project name)"

Refer to NZS 3910 Conditions of Contract for building and civil engineering construction, clauses 11.5 and 11.6 for requirements relating to the time for submission of warranties and guarantees. Submit all warranties/guarantees to the engineer no later than the date that the contractor notifies that it believes the contract works qualify for practical completion.

Project warranties / guarantees

Guarantee - Contractor - New Zealand Certified Builders Association

Provide the Halo 10 year residential guarantee insurance application and obtain all required signatures. Submit the application to the insurer along with payment of the premium prior to the commencement of construction. Provide the application acceptance confirmation and policy document to the owner.

Weathertightness and watertightness warranty

A warranty is required from the contractor for a minimum period of 2 years, covering the weathertightness of the complete building envelope and the watertightness of all liquid supply and disposal systems and fittings. This general warranty is in addition to any specific warranties required.

Provide this warranty in favour of the principal. The terms and conditions of this warranty in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.

1237S1

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

SCHEDULE OF WARRANTIES

GENERAL

This schedule section identifies work sections in the specification that have requirements for warranties.

ASSOCIATED SECTIONS

Read in conjunction with:

Warranties

WARRANTIES

Refer to the following sections:

4161T Thermakraft Underlays, Foils, DPC, DPM, & Tapes

4171HR James Hardie® Rigid Air Barriers

4221KH KLC Horizontal Weatherboard Cladding System

4231HA James Hardie® Axon™ Panel Cladding

4231HE James Hardie® EasyLap™ Panel Cladding

4239JH James Hardie® Soffits

4424RL RoofLogic Ultratherm Xtreme Fibertite Roofing System

4521AC APL Commercial Aluminium Windows & Doors

4610AG AGP Glazing Residential

4811S Sika Sealants

6700R   Resene Painting General

7411D   Dimond Rainwater Spouting Systems

7411MA Marley Rainwater Disposal Systems

PROJECT WARRANTIES

Refer to section 1237 WARRANTIES for project warranties.

WARRANTIES - ADDITIONAL ITEMS

Refer to separate documentation for warranties not contained within this specification.

1239  OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

This general section relates to operation and maintenance (O&M) documentation referred to within this specification and referred to within separate specifications/documents relating to this project. This documentation is required by the principal so that they can operate and maintain the contract works.

Refer to 1239S1 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION & MAINTENANCE INFO for work sections contained in this specification that have requirements for:

Operation and maintenance documents

Provide operation and maintenance documentation necessary to operate and maintain the works. This documentation is to include:

Provide details of any maintenance requirements required by the Building Act.

In addition provide maintenance requirements for items including:

INSTRUCTIONS

Provide equipment and appliance manuals and operating information including details of all isolating valves and switches.

Provide details of actual selections used in the construction of the works including:

Include brochures and other information included with the items supplied.

Provide details of any selections used in the construction of the works that are different from what was specified.

Documentation format

Unless otherwise specified in a work section,

Submit O&M documentation in both hard copy and as electronic portable document format (PDF) files.

Submission and review

Unless otherwise specified in a work section, provide draft O&M documentation no later than the date of practical completion or the date on which the principal takes occupation of the works, whichever occurs first.

Submit O&M documentation to the named reviewer for review.

O&M review indicates only that the reviewer is satisfied that the documents are legible. The review is not a check of the accuracy of the documents, however the reviewer may comment on any aspect of the documentation and require the documents to be revised and resubmitted. Review of operation and maintenance documentation does not relieve the contractor of responsibility for the correctness of the documentation.

The reviewer may advise that:

notes, annotations or comments provided; or

Amalgamate the reviewed accepted and corrected O&M documentation into the final O&M documentation

Final documentation

Prior to the end of the defects notification/liability period, provide complete O&M documentation in both hardcopy and electronic form.

Provide the hard copy version of the O&M documentation in a loose-leaf binder with a contents index identifying operation and maintenance documents, requirements, manuals, operating instructions and selections. In addition include the project name, contractor's name and the date of practical completion on the index page.

Include indexed sections to identify all operation and maintenance manuals that are not contained within the binder. Provide a copy of the front cover or other identifying feature of the manual within the section with a note stating "this manual has been provided separately".

Provide a title on the binder edge "Operation and maintenance instructions for (project name)". If more than one binder is required identify each binder by number and ranking (e.g. Volume 2 of 3) and group information logically between the binders for ease of reference.

Provide operation and maintenance manuals clearly and neatly marked on the spine or front cover so as to identify the project name. Where operation and maintenance manuals are a collection of loose leaf documentation, provide documentation in a loose-leaf binder as described above.

Provide a copy of all hardcopy information in PDF format arranged in logical named folders. In addition provide DWG files of documentation if available.

The contract administrator may review the final documentation and require alteration and resubmission.

O&M Documentation

MAINTENANCE

Provide a complete electronic copy to the contract administrator.

Provide two hardcopy sets of completed O&M documentation to the contract administrator. At least one set is to contain all available original documentation. The contractor is to retain a third hardcopy set for their records.

Provide any documentation (including required original documentation) as required to the relevant territorial authority.

Provide a complete electronic copy to the contract administrator.

Provide two hardcopy sets of completed maintenance manuals to the contract administrator. At least one set is to contain all available original documentation. The contractor is to retain a third hardcopy set for their records.

Provide any documentation (including required original documentation) as required to the relevant territorial authority.

Maintenance contract proposals

Unless otherwise specified in a work section, provide maintenance contract proposals to the contract administrator no later than the date of Practical Completion. Provide in electronic and hardcopy form.

1239S1 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION & MAINTENANCE INFO

This schedule section identifies work sections in the specification that have requirements for the submission of:

Read in conjunction with:

Information for operation and maintenance

Refer to the following sections:

4231HA James Hardie® Axon™ Panel Cladding

4231HE James Hardie® EasyLap™ Panel Cladding

4239JH James Hardie® Soffits

6700R   Resene Painting General

7411D   Dimond Rainwater Spouting Systems

Operation and maintenance manuals

There are no work section requirements.

Maintenance contract proposals

There are no work section requirements.

Additional Items

Refer to separate documentation for the submission of operation and maintenance requirements not contained within this specification.

1240  ESTABLISHMENT

This general section relates to site establishment including:

Notices and approvals

Comply with all statutory obligations and regulations of regulatory bodies controlling the execution of the works.

Attend on building consent authority officers, statutory and network utility inspectors, as necessary to obtain approvals, including those required for the completion of the works.

Notify all network utility operators of proposed works before commencing site operations. Ascertain location of services or confirm that none exist in the vicinity of the works. Take all necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing services.

Inspections

Survey and photograph existing site, buildings before commencing site establishment. Provide the contract administrator with a copy for their record.

Site preparation

Access to the site is limited to: Work zone and immediate adjacent areas as necessary to facilitate contract works

Limited to the following designated working areas on the site: Work zone and immediate adjacent areas as necessary to facilitate contract works

Carry out all investigations necessary and peruse all information available to determine ground conditions and likely ground performance both on the site and adjacent to it. Also refer to the territorial authority project information memorandum (PIM).

Existing buildings

Control access and working areas within existing buildings. Liaise with building owner to establish site limitations.

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                                                         1240 ESTABLISHMENT Page 21

Liaise with the building owner to arrange access to areas of the existing building which are not normally part of the contract.

Temporary construction

Provide as necessary temporary sheds, offices, lunch rooms, sanitary accommodation and other temporary buildings required for storage, management of the works, for the use of workers while on site and as required by Acts and Regulations.

Provide and maintain a temporary site fence, 2 metres high from ground level on the side accessible to the public. Construct to comply with NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards.

Provide hazard board and other safety signage as required.

Obtain approval to, provide and erect a timber framed sign board. Sign to be, fully painted with vinyl lettering or fully printed, and displaying:

First aid

Provide first aid equipment.

1247  TRAFFIC CONTROL

This general section relates to temporary on and off site traffic control including:

Access and egress

Refer to the building and resource consents for territorial authority requirements relating to the provision of a traffic management plan. Submit the plan to the contract administrator.

The management of traffic safety on-site and related traffic off-site, to WorkSafe Managing Work Site Traffic - Good Practice Guidelines. Movement on and off-site also to territorial authority and/or NZTA requirements.

Provide protection to existing vehicle crossing for use by construction traffic for the duration of the contract. Comply with territorial authority requirements for the construction of temporary protection to the crossing. Ensure the protection is capable of supporting the heaviest loads to be delivered to the site. Maintain to an acceptable standard until it is no longer required for construction traffic.

Replace the crossing if the temporary protection has not properly protected the existing crossing.

Traffic control and signage

Where temporary works are required to be carried out in the roadway, obtain all required consents and comply with the road network authorities traffic management requirements.

Provide marker cones and barriers to demark restricted and dangerous areas and for other site safety reasons as required.

Deliveries

Refer to SELECTIONS for goods delivery area. Delivery vehicles that are not able to use the designated delivery area must queue in the designated off site waiting area.

Parking

Refer to SELECTIONS for on site parking areas and parking restrictions.

Completion

When no longer required remove temporary protection. Clean and leave in the condition prior to the contract works commencing. Replace surfaces where the protection has not provided the required protection.

Access to the site is limited.

Refer drawing: As determined by school

Egress from the site is limited.

Refer drawing: As determined by school

Site access and egress is allowed between the following times.

Times:          As determined by school

Site access and egress is not allowed between the following times.

Times:          As determined by school

Designated      As determined by school

delivery area:

Off site waiting As determined by school area:

On site parking is limited to the following areas.

Location:        As determined by school

Parking is not allowed in the following areas.

Location:        As determined by school

1250  TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES

This general section relates to temporary works and services required for the construction of the contract works. It includes

Temporary works

Pay all rates/fees in respect of temporary works.

Maintain alter, adapt and move temporary works and services as necessary. Clear away when no longer required and make good.

Take reasonable precautions to prevent unauthorised access, including access outside working hours, to the site, the works and adjoining property. Safeguard the site, the works, materials and plant from damage and theft.

Provide and maintain a site fence, 2 metres high from ground level on the side accessible to the public. Construct to comply with NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards. Construct as required for public areas and as shown on the drawings.

Construct the fence with:

Provide and maintain a 1 metre high site fence to non-public areas. Construct using:

Provide and maintain hoardings, 2 metres high from ground level on the side accessible to the public. Construct to comply with NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards. Construct as required for public areas and as shown on the drawings.

Construct hoardings with continuous cladding of:

Provide temporary lighting as necessary to protect the public and others, for the proper execution of the works and to meet the requirements of territorial or other authority.

Provide appropriate measures to prevent or minimise sediment generation and silt run off. Comply with territorial and other authority requirements relating to carrying out earthworks.

Prevent silt run off by:

Provide sediment control by:

Pump water from trenches and other areas of the site using methods to prevent sediment entering any drain or watercourse. Filter dirty water before discharging into drainage system.

Provide appropriate measures to prevent cement/concrete washwater or slurry run off to; drains or waterways, landscaped areas new or remaining and adjoining public or private properties. Comply with territorial and other authority requirements relating to cement/concrete washwater.

Control run off from:

Small project with relatively large exposed ground areas - prevent run off by:

Large project and those without suitable ground area - prevent run off by:

Spilt or surplus material:

Pump washwater away from drains, waterways and adjoining property.

To the Health and Safety at Work Act 2015.

Carry out excavation to WorkSafe, Good Practice Guidelines - Excavation Safety. This may include deep excavation, trenching, and areas behind unfilled retaining walls.

Carry out excavation using plant and equipment suitable for the purpose.

Scaffolding

Provide scaffolding for the efficient execution of the works.

Comply with:

Temporary works - Existing Buildings

Buildings which remain occupied during the construction must have temporary works agreed with the occupier/owner in advance.

Provide and maintain full height temporary partitions, dust sealed and with appropriate access doors, as shown on the drawings.

Construct the partitions from;

Provide and maintain 2.0m high temporary screens with appropriate access doors, as shown on the drawings.

Construct the screens from;

Provide and maintain full height temporary dust screens as shown on the drawings.

Construct the screens from;

Temporary services

Provide clean, fresh water for the works and make arrangements for distributing about the site.

To AS/NZS 3012.

Nominate the person to install and be responsible for the complete temporary electrical installation. The name and designation of the person responsible is to be displayed prominently and close to the main switch or circuit breaker.

Inspect and overhaul the installation at such intervals as are prescribed by the network utility operator but not more than three monthly intervals.

Provide on-site temporary telephone facilities.

Provide on-site temporary computer facilities complete with an email and internet connection capable of sending, receiving and printing site communications.

Provide on-site temporary printing facilities capable of printing A4 and A3 colour prints.

Keep available devices able to take and send quality printable digital photographs.

Care and protection - existing buildings

Protect existing buildings and other designated features which are to remain in position during the execution of the works.

Protect access routes through the building and areas adjacent to the work area that are to remain in place. These include lifts and stairs. Comply with all fire egress requirements at all times.

Maintain the integrity of the systems at all times. If work requires de-activation of a system, give notice to the relevant Fire and Emergency NZ service. Follow their instructions and reinstate the system to their requirements.

Make good all damage to existing buildings caused in carrying out the contract works.

Care and protection - Site

Review information provided relating to survey marks. Physically locate and protect survey marks. Where required use a licensed cadastral surveyor to reinstate survey marks disturbed during construction.

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                                      1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES Page 28

Review information provided relating to underground and above ground services. Physically locate the position of all such services. Arrange with the network utility operator for all necessary exploratory work, location, protection, isolation, off-setting, reinstatement or alterations required. Record any alterations made to such utilities.

Protect existing services and parts of service systems, whether indicated or not, that are to remain in place during the execution of the works. Provide temporary caps or covers to prevent the ingress of dust and other contaminants into the systems, ducts, pipes etc. Reinstate where required and repair any damage resulting from carrying out the contract works.

Protect existing trees, fences, gates, walls, gardens and other designated landscape features which are to remain in position during the execution of the works. Construct a temporary fence at the outer edge of the drip line of trees to be protected. Comply with territorial authority requirements.

Make good all damage to existing roads, footpaths, grounds, services, landscape elements and site features caused in carrying out the contract works.

Care and protection - Project

Provide and maintain temporary protection as required to protect products during transport, storage and handling. Provide temporary protection as required to protect the work in progress and the finished work. Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for removal of protection.

Refer to individual work sections for any special protection requirements.

Protect all adjacent school property and trees.

Care and protection - miscellaneous

Provide locksets with temporary keying, or install with the cylinders removed.

Provide temporary storage areas and protective covers and screens to meet the requirements of the products to be stored.

Rubbish removal

Maintain on site appropriate means for the storage and removal of construction waste material. Where required or appropriate provide for the separate storage of recyclable waste and other materials requiring special disposal.

1256

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

2

2.1

WASTE MANAGEMENT

GENERAL

This general section relates to the implementation of a site waste management plan.

It includes:

ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

REBRI Resource Efficiency in the Building and Related Industries

DOCUMENTS

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following REBRI documents are specifically referred to in this section:

REBRI Contract Specification for Waste Management

REBRI Waste Management Plan

REBRI Waste Transfer Form

REBRI Guides and Resource Recovery Documents (various)

REBRI contact details

Organisation:    REBRI

Web:          www.branz.co.nz/REBRI

Email:          branz@branz.co.nz

Special requirements

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERALLY

Clauses in this section are additional to or modify clauses in other standard sections, particularly those covering demolition. This section should be read in conjunction with the rest of this specification with regard to all waste management for the project.

Refer to the clause RELATED WORK above for the main sections that are affected by this section.

Requirements - General

ENSURE

Ensure all site management and staff, subcontractors, material and product suppliers and waste disposal companies are made aware that this is a REBRI project (in part or full) and provide access to or copies of the waste management plan.

PRODUCTS

Equipment

CONTAINERS

Provide appropriately sized and sited containers/bins for the storage of reusable, recyclable and waste products. Clearly label each container.

Conditions

Store all materials so they are not damaged prior to use.

Plan the measurement and ordering of materials and components to minimise waste.

Statutory requirements

Conform to applicable regulations for disposal and removal of common and hazardous waste.

Handle and dispose of all hazardous and banned materials in accordance with national and local regulations - these hazardous and banned materials may include but are not limited to asbestos, underground storage tanks, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), abandoned chemicals (petrol, pesticides, herbicides, flammable and combustible substances), freon from cooling equipment, lead-based paints, smoke detectors and mercury-containing switches, also contaminated soil or fill.

Completion

All cleaning materials used on the project to be biodegradable and non-toxic.

1260

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

GENERAL

This general section relates to project management requirements including:

Site Meetings

PURPOSE OF SITE MEETINGS

The purpose of site meetings is to:

SITE MEETING ATTENDANCE

The following persons to attend:

REPORTING

The following reports are required to be presented at site meetings:

Contractor:      A detailed status report

SITE MEETING MINUTES

The contract administrator is to keep full minutes of all site meetings and arrange distribution to all those involved within 3 working days.

The minutes are to record

Reporting

A contractor's detailed status report is to address the following:

Cash flow estimates

The contractor is required to submit to the contract administrator a detailed cash flow estimate of all payments to which the contractor considers they will be entitled to under the contract. Where no time is stated in the conditions of contract, provide the cash flow estimate within 20 working days of the date of award of the contract. The contractor shall subsequently submit such revised cash flow estimates at 3 month intervals.

Cost control

Give reasonable notice to the contract administrator before covering up work which requires to be measured.

To be signed by the contractor's representative as confirming the labour, times and materials used, before being supplied to the contract administrator.

Communicating and records

Communications between the parties shall be as follows: -

Directions:       In writing delivered by email with a copy by post or

hand

Meeting minutes: In writing delivered by email

RFI's:            (Requests for information) by email or in writing to

the contract administrator

Deliver communications to the addresses listed in the contract agreement by means as allowed.

Where such addresses are not included in the contract agreement:

Serve notices to the addresses listed in the contract agreement by means as allowed.

The principal, contractor and the contract administrator must notify the others if they change their address for delivery or transmission of communications.

Ensure all records specified are kept, held and collated on site in a form that makes the information easily accessible when it is needed. Distribute copies as and when necessary to those persons entitled under the contract to that information.

Before commencing work take digital photographs recording existing conditions of existing buildings and structures, including adjacent areas that may be affected by the carrying out of the contract works. Include adjacent roadways and footpaths and neighbouring buildings and the like. Where there is existing damage to adjacent buildings and/or structures, ensure that the photographs adequately record the extent of the damage or failure. Refer to SELECTIONS.

Take digital photographs recording progress. Refer to SELECTIONS.

Confidentiality

Unless specifically agreed photographs and other images of the work are not to be used by the contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers and others involved in the construction of the works.

Photographs taken for record purposes may be kept but must not be passed to other persons.

Where required as a condition of the contract arrange for workers to provide a confidentially agreement. Workers who have not provided such an agreement shall be excluded from the site.

Programming

Include the proposed sequence of all significant on-site and off-site activities, including any intermediate key dates mentioned in the contract. Identify the critical path. Provide a tabulated schedule of information for each activity in order of:

Identify the dates by which particular information, material or plant need to be supplied or arranged by the contract administrator. Also identify any constraints which may have been imposed by the programme.

Supply copies of the programme to the following:

Contract1

administrator

Architect1

Designer1

Principal1

Quantity1

surveyor

Site supervisor 1

Monitor the programme by:

Hold Points and Notification Points

Refer to section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for definition of hold points and notification points.

HOLD POINTS

The following hold points are in addition to hold points nominated in work sections. Notify of hold point work/item, do not to proceed further with work/item until advised to continue.

Notify:           Contract administrator

Notification:      2 working days prior to work/item being carried out.

Hold Point Schedule

Location

Hold Point

Requirement

Roof

Make good of Existing

Proof of suitability: That the existing roof cladding is suitable to accept the new overlay roof system.

Roof

RoofLogic overlay system prior to membrane installation

Proof of suitability: That the new overlay roof system is suitable to accept the waterproof membrane.

Wall

Pre-clad

Existing and new timber members are suitable for lining.

Working hours

WORKING HOURS

Work on site is not restricted. Comply with territorial authority consent conditions and noise and nuisance controls.

Comply with territorial authority consent conditions and noise and nuisance controls, in addition work on site is restricted to: Weekdays:      As determined by the school

Saturdays:      As determined by the school

Sundays:       As determined by the school

Public holidays: As determined by the school

Work outside these hours may be permitted with the contract administrators consent. Allow a minimum of 24 hours notice (in writing) when seeking the contract administrators consent. If the contract administrator consent is given obtain any required permits and permission for such work

Health and safety

Refer to the requirements of the Health and Safety at Work Act 2015. Comply also with all other relevant New Zealand safety legislation.

The Contractor will ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that, each subcontractor they engage and each separate contractor is aware of and complies with its obligations under health and safety-related law.

For the purpose of health and safety-related law, the contract administrator and others involved in contract administration and observation and construction monitoring will not at any time have management or control of the Workplace.

Comply with:

Until further regulations are made under the Health and Safety at Work Act 2015 to cover them, the transitional provisions of the Act continue in force until revoked or amended.

Take all practical steps to make the site and the contract works safe and to provide and maintain a safe working environment. Ensure that all those working on or visiting the site are aware of the rules governing site safety, are properly supervised and are not unnecessarily exposed to hazards and risks.

Co-operate, consult and co-ordinate health and safety matters with each PCBU including all subcontractors, suppliers, separate contractors, others engaged on the project and others who may be affected by the construction of the works.

Identify any significant hazards and risks.

Maintain proper procedures for dealing with any emergencies that may arise. Immediately investigate accidents, identify their cause and maintain a register of accidents and serious harm. Provide a copy of any report which the contractor is required to make to a public authority on any accident which is associated with carrying out the contract works and results in serious harm to any person.

Refer to individual work sections for detailed requirements on this project.

On the request of the contract administrator, acting on reasonable grounds, suspend any identified hazardous activities and proceed to eliminate, isolate or minimise them in order to comply with the Act, without prejudice to any other rights of the principal under the contract.

Appoint a suitably qualified site safety person to co-ordinate site safety and to attend all site meetings.

Prepare and submit a health and safety plan to the contract administrator before commencing work on site. Include in that plan all people on site and the general public, as well as the following items and any other necessary items:

Advise the contract administrator of unusual or atypical features in the Plan in addition to any features already identified in section 1220 PROJECT and/or any separate project design construction safety report. Keep a copy of the plan in the site office.

Maintain health and safety plan and alter to accommodate changing situations and /or substitutions. Advise contract administrator of changes.

Carry out all construction operations in accordance with the submitted health and safety plan.

Inform workers and others on the site of:

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                                             1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 38

Do not use explosives except with the written approval of the territorial authority/WorkSafe. Comply with their safety requirements and use construction blasters holding a current, appropriate Approved Handler Certificate and Controlled Substance Licence issued by WorkSafe, to the Health and Safety at Work (Hazardous Substances) Regulations.

Comply with the requirements of WorkSafe and the Health and Safety at Work Act 2015. Powder-actuated fastening tool operators to have the appropriate current Certificate and/or Licence and tools to have the appropriate certificate of fitness if necessary.

Meetings

Frequency:      fortnightly

Start date:

Time:

Venue:

Convener:

Photographs

Copies required: Electronic copy by email

Recipient:       Contract Administrator

Position:

Frequency:     Weekly

Copies required: Electronic copy by email

Recipient:       Contract Administrator

1270  CONSTRUCTION

This GENERAL section relates to common requirements for construction issues including:

Refer to 1270S1 SCHEDULE OF SAMPLES & PROTOTYPES for work sections contained in this specification that have requirements for samples and prototypes.

Refer to 1270S2 SCHEDULE OF SPARES & MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS for work sections contained in this specification that have requirements for spares and maintenance products.

Quality control and assurance

Carry out and record regular checks of material quality and accuracy, including:

Where any material, quality or dimension falls outside specified or required tolerances, obtain written direction from the contract administrator. Where building consent approval is affected, confirm remedial action with the Building Consent Authority.

Provide all materials, plant, attendances, supervision, inspections and programming to ensure the required quality standards are met by all project personnel.

Prepare a quality plan for the execution of the contract works and submit a copy of the quality plan to the Contract Administrator within 10 Working Days of the date of award of the contract. The quality plan shall describe the procedures for meeting the requirements of the contract in respect of:

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                                                      1270 CONSTRUCTION Page 40

Within 5 working days of the contractor submitting a quality plan to the contract administrator for review, the contract administrator may advise that:

Review by the contract administrator of the quality plan does not make the quality plan a contract document. The contractor at all times remains responsible for the construction of the Works. If resubmission of a quality plan is required, the contract administrator will give their reasons. The contractor shall take account of the reasons and resubmit a revised quality plan within a period of 5 working days.

Do not commence any part of the contract works, other than establishment, setting out and site preparation until the contract administrator has completed their final review of the quality plan.

Give notice to the contract administrator and any other nominated person of hold points and notification points. Refer to work sections and 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT for hold points and notification points required.

Lodge notice of the intention to commence any notifiable work and any work that will at any time include any notifiable work, in accordance with Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995.

Notifiable work includes:

Noise and nuisance

Minimise the effects of noise generation by including in the planning of the work such factors as placing of plant, programming the sequence of operations and other management functions. Limit construction noise to comply with the requirements of NZS 6803, the requirements of the Resource Management Act sections 326, 327 and 328 and the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995 clause 11.

Refer to NZS 6803 Tables 2 and 3 for the upper limits of construction work noise received in residential zones, dwellings in rural areas, industrial areas and commercial areas, note also the allowed adjustments. Do not exceed these limits or any limits imposed by regional councils or territorial authorities.

Provide information to neighbours of any noise generation from the site liable to constitute a problem. Explain to them the means being used to minimise excessive noise and establish with them the timings most suitable for the noise generating work to be carried on.

Discuss with any complainant the measures being used to minimise noise. Where possible modify these measures to accommodate particular circumstances. Finally, determine the sound level at the location under discussion using methods and observation reporting as laid down in NZS 6803. If the noise level is above the upper limits of NZS 6803, table 2 and table 3, cease the noise generating operation and remedy the problem.

When the works are to be carried out in or around occupied premises, ascertain the nature and times of occupation and use. Carry out the works in a manner to minimise inconvenience, nuisance and danger to occupants and users.

Keep the adjacent footpath and road clear at all times. Where work must be carried out in the roadway or footpath, obtain required consents from the territorial authority. Where temporary use is made of the footpath or roadway for deliveries and the like ensure that public safety is protected and the goods and materials moved as soon as practicable. Sweep, wash and otherwise clean the roadway/footpath and restore it to its previous condition.

Make good damage that has occurred as a result of carrying out the contract works. Where there has been significant damage, contact the territorial authority and obtain instructions for making good. Pay the territorial authority costs associated with making good.

The management of traffic safety on-site and related traffic off-site, to WorkSafe Managing Work Site Traffic - Good Practice Guidelines. Movement on- and off-site also to territorial authority and/or NZTA requirements.

Remove dirt and droppings deposited on public or private thoroughfares from vehicles servicing the site to the satisfaction of the appropriate authorities and the contract administrator.

Take precautions to prevent damage and nuisance from water, fire, smoke, dust, rubbish and all other causes resulting from the construction works.

In accordance with the Smoke Free Environments Act 1990 smoking is not allowed on site.

Do not:

Set-out and tolerances

Locate and verify survey marks and datum points required to set out the works. Where these do not exist or cannot be located advise the contract administrator who will arrange for the required points to be established.

Record and maintain their position. Re-establish and replace disturbed or obliterated marks.

Establish a permanent site datum to confirm the proposed levels and their relationship to all other existing and new levels.

Set out the work to conform with the drawings.

Permit without charge, the use of instruments already on site for checking, setting out and levels.

Check all dimensions both on drawings and site, particularly the correlation between components and work in place. Take all dimensions on drawings to be between structural elements before linings or finishes, unless clearly stated otherwise.

All work to be level, plumb, and true to line and face. Unless otherwise specified in specific work sections of this specification, tolerances for structural work shall comply with the following:

Concrete construction:

To NZS 3109 Concrete construction

Clause 3.9 Tolerances for reinforcement

Table 5.1 Tolerance for precast components

Table 5.2 Tolerance for in situ construction To NZS 3114 Concrete surface finishes

Masonry construction:

To NZS 4210 Masonry construction: Materials and workmanship

Clause 2.6.5 Tolerances

Table 2.2 Maximum tolerances

Structural steelwork:

To NZS 3404.1 Steel structures standard

Section 14.4 Tolerances (after fabrication)

Section 15.3 Tolerances (erection)

Timber framing:

To NZS 3604 Timber-framed buildings

Clause 2.2 Tolerances

Table 2.1 Timber framing tolerances

Refer to work sections for tolerance requirements for finishes.

Execution

Before commencing any part of the work carefully examine the previous work on which it depends, to ensure it is of the required standard.

Refer defects to the contractor to be remedied, if the remedy is outside the scope of the contract documents the contractor shall obtain direction from the contract administrator. Do not carry out work over previous work that is defective and will affect the required standard.

Construct the work in accordance with the documents issued for construction including any direction that may have been given by the contract administrator that varies the construction document.

The documents issued for construction will not include all details relating to every material, junction and interface with other materials.

Where the detail provided is of a general nature, or where no detail is provided, refer to the manufacturer's documents for information relating to installation and execution of that part of the work.

Where there is more than one method or detail appropriate to the part of the work in question, refer the options to the Contract Administrator for direction as to which detail or method to use.

Where a NZBC Acceptable Solution is referred to in the specification but not shown on the plans, obtain a copy of that Acceptable Solution and make it available to the workers carrying out that part of the work.

Use appropriate techniques and methods to prevent damage and minimise delays due to weather.

Defective or damaged work

Repair defective, damaged and marked elements, or replace them where repair is not possible or will not be acceptable. Adjust operation of equipment and moving parts not working correctly. Refer to individual work sections for any special requirements.

Hot work - fire safety

Generally, to NZS 4781 Code of Practice for Safety in Welding and Cutting, includes but not limited to: Welding; flame cutting; disc cutting; grinding; bitumen blowers; blow lamps; brazing; burning off; soldering; use of hot air guns.

Note - where the standard refers to the use of asbestos, alternative fire-resistant materials are to be used.

Manage fire risk to adjacent combustible materials by isolating hot work at a safe distance away, or store combustible materials away from fire hazards. Additional precautions may be necessary if combustible material cannot be separated from hot work, refer to NZS 4781, 6.1.4.

A hot work permit, issued by the main contractor, is required when it is not possible to isolate hot work from adjacent fire hazards. Refer to example in NZS 4781, Appendix A.

Fire systems should remain operational where possible while welding or cutting work is performed. Where required, shield fire systems to NZS 4781 clause 6.4.

Maintain a fire watch at least 30-minutes after hot works are suspended e.g. during lunch breaks or overnight, to NZS 4781, clause 6.2.7.

For hot works in confined spaces, prevent potential ignition of flammable gases, to NZS 4781 clause 6.5.

Qualifications

The work is to be carried out by workers and / or supervisors who are experienced, competent and familiar with the materials and the techniques specified. Workers must also be familiar with the manufacturers' and suppliers' installation and application instructions and standard details provided by them in relation to the use of the products for this project. If requested provide evidence of qualification / experience.

Where restricted building work (RBW) forms part of the contract works, workers, or supervisors of that work must be licensed building practitioners (LBP) holding current licenses for the particular restricted building work. For rare instances where non-RBW also requires an LBP refer to individual work sections for details.

REQUIREMENTS

Where required by a manufacturer or supplier, workers must be specifically trained /approved / accredited / registered / licensed / certified by them. Refer to individual work sections for details.

Where workers and / or supervisors of work are required to be licensed, registered or similar under legislation, they must have a current license before they start the work and maintain currency until their part of the work has been completed and all documentation that is required has been provided.

REQUIREMENTS

Where workers and / or supervisors of work are required to be trained / licensed / certified or similar under industry rules or contractual requirements, they must have a current qualification before they start the work and maintain currency until their part of the work has been completed. Refer to individual work sections for details.

Where producer statements are required for parts of the work, ensure that person is suitably qualified and authorized to issue such producer statements.

Should it be necessary to replace a person, ensure that records of work, producer statements, warranties and the like required for the part of the work they have carried out are obtained.

Ensure that the replacement person takes responsibility for the work they carry out and that they are able to provide such records of work, producer statements, warranties and the like required as a condition of the contract and the building consent.

Products

Products to be new unless stated otherwise, of the specified standard, and complying with all cited documents.

Ensure all parts of a construction or finish are compatible and their individual use approved by the manufacturers and suppliers of other parts of the system. Source all parts of a system from a single manufacturer or supplier.

Protect products during transit and delivery on site and / or off site. Reject and replace goods that are defective or damaged or will not provide the required finish.

Handle products carefully to avoid damage and distortion and in accordance with codes of practice and the manufacturer's or supplier's requirements. Avoid any contact with potentially damaging surfaces or conditions.

Store products to avoid visual damage, environmental damage, mechanical damage and distortion. Store in accordance with codes of practice and the product manufacturer's or supplier's requirements. Maintain the proper condition of any protective packaging, wrapping and support.

Refer to individual work sections for any special requirements.

Ensure substrate conditions are within the manufacturer's or supplier's stated guidelines both before and during the installation of any material, product or system. Obtain written instructions on the necessary action to rectify unsatisfactory conditions.

Install in accordance with the manufacturer's or supplier's technical literature.

Ensure that all installers are familiar with the required substrate conditions and the manufacturer's or supplier's specified preparation, fixing and finishing techniques.

Comply with the relevant and/or cited Standard for any material or component. Obtain certificates of compliance when requested by the contract administrator.

To be in perfect condition when incorporated into the work.

Separate incompatible materials and metals with separation layers, sleeves or gaskets of plastic film, bituminous felt or mastic or paint coatings, installed so that none are visible on exposed surfaces.

Samples

1.52


SAMPLES FOR REVIEW


Where specified in the work sections submit samples and any nominated supporting documentation to the named reviewer and notify the contract administrator of the submission. Where no person is named as the reviewer, submit to the contract administrator.

Samples for review may be described as a portable sample for review, portable control sample, fixed sample for review or fixed control sample. A portable sample refers to a sample that is easily movable, convenient for carrying. A fixed sample refers to a sample that is not portable. If the location of a fixed sample is not defined in the work section, obtain direction from the contract administrator.

For samples that are located on site, or by agreement with the contract administrator are located off site, notify the reviewer and contract administrator of their location and availability for review.

Timing for the provision and review of samples is to be included in the contract programme. Where no time is stated in a work section allow 10 working days for each review. Allow for such resubmission and further review as may be required. No extension of time will be allowed for resubmission and further review.

Obtain written instructions in relation to the samples from the contract administrator. Do not proceed further with related work items until advised to continue.

Samples may be incorporated in the finished work if confirmed in writing by the contract administrator, otherwise allow to completely remove any fixed samples. Remove from the site any rejected samples.

Refer to SAMPLES clauses in work sections for further detail.


1.53


CONTROL SAMPLES


Samples become control samples if an instruction is given by the contract administrator to that effect. Control samples will be used for comparison purposes throughout the contract. Control samples may be portable or fixed in place, refer to SAMPLES clauses in work sections for further detail.

Control samples that are to remain on site, or otherwise in the care of the contractor, are to be maintained in original condition.

If confirmed by the contract administrator, fixed control samples may be incorporated in the finished work, otherwise allow to remove fixed control samples from site when instructed by the contract administrator.


1.54


OTHER SAMPLE REQUIREMENTS


Where specified in the work sections obtain samples for the purposes described.

Prototypes


1.55


PROTOTYPES - TESTING


Where specified in the work sections provide and test prototypes. Timing for the provision, testing, disassembling, re-assembling, retesting and review of prototypes and test results is to be included in the contract programme. Where no time is stated in a work section allow 10 working days for each review of test results. Submit test results to the named reviewer and to the contract administrator. Where no person is named as the reviewer submit test results to the contract administrator.

Obtain written instructions in relation to the prototype from the contract administrator. Do not proceed further with related work items until advised to continue.

Refer to PROTOTYPES - TESTING clauses in work sections for further detail.

Where specified in the work sections provide prototypes for review. Timing for the provision, disassembling, re-assembling and review of prototypes is to be included in the contract programme. Where no time is stated in a work section allow 10 working days for review by the named reviewer. Where no person is named as the reviewer notify the contract administrator for direction.

Obtain written instructions in relation to the prototype from the contract administrator. Do not proceed further with related work items until advised to continue.

Refer to PROTOTYPES - REVIEW clauses in work sections for further detail.

Refer to the PROTOTYPES - TESTING and PROTOTYPES - REVIEW clauses in work section for details on what is to happen after the review and or testing of the prototype is complete. Where no information is provided refer to the contract administrator for direction.

Prototypes may become control samples if an instruction is given by the contract administrator to that effect.

Spares & maintenance products

Collect, protect, package, label and store safely all spares and maintenance products specified in the work sections. Give the contract administrator an inventory of all spares and maintenance products.

If no instruction is given within a work section for the location of spares and maintenance products, then deliver to the owner.

If no instruction is given within a work section for timing in relation to the provision of spares and maintenance products, then provide at practical completion.

Refer to SPARES & MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS clauses in work sections for further detail.

Cleaning during the works

Carry out periodic site cleaning during the contract period. Place waste material in appropriate storage pending removal from the site. Keep food waste separate from construction waste.

Keep the work area clean, remove of all debris, unused and temporary materials and elements from the site as work progresses and on completion. Refer to individual work sections for any specific requirements.

Maintain a clean and clear site and area surrounding the site as it is occupied by school users both during school hours and after school hours.

Remove protection

Remove all temporary markings, labels, packaging and coverings to products unless instructed otherwise, or where they are required for protection.

Maintain temporary protection until removal is required by the manufacturer/supplier, the execution of the work or the requirements of individual work sections. Re-establish protection as necessary.

Remove temporary protection and special protection immediately prior to practical completion or before when there is no further risk of damage.

Refer to individual work sections for any special removal requirements.

Completion

Refer to individual work sections for any special completion requirements.

Leave work to the standard required for the following procedures.

Carry out tests as detailed in the work sections. If testing identifies a failure to meet performance requirements, notify the contract administrator and any nominated recipient, identify and correct the cause of failure and repeat the test. Submit test results and certification documentation to the contract administrator and any nominated recipient.

Remove all debris, unused materials and the like from the site. Arrange for material to be recycled to be collected or delivered to the recycler.

Ensure all services are complete and operational, with all temporary labelling removed, required labelling fixed and service instructions provided.

Clear the contract works of all construction materials, waste, dirt and debris.

Clean the contract works including:

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                                                      1270 CONSTRUCTION Page 49

protection/markings.

In addition to cleaning carried out by the contractor, use a commercial cleaning company to clean the whole of the interior of the building, including all appliances, equipment, fittings, surfaces and finishes to leave it without any blemish. Cleaning to include:

Commissioning

Refer to individual work sections for any special commissioning requirements.

Adjust, ease and lubricate all doors, windows, drawers, hardware, appliances, controls and all moving parts to give easy and efficient operation.

Carry out tests as detailed in the work sections. If testing identifies a failure to meet performance requirements, notify the contract administrator and any nominated recipient, identify and correct the cause of failure and repeat the test. Submit test results and certification documentation to the contract administrator and any nominated recipient.

Provide instruction and demonstration to the owner/occupier to the extent that is listed below and as required for them to reasonably occupy and use the building. This is to include at least the following:

Remove any temporary lock cylinders and complete final keying prior to handing over keys to the principal on completion of the works. Leave the works secure with all accesses locked. Account for all keys/cards/codes and hand to the principal along with an itemised schedule, retaining a duplicate schedule signed by the principal as a receipt.

Practical completion submission

In addition to requirements in the contract and contained elsewhere in the specification provide the following information submissions for practical completion:

Defects period submissions

Provide the following at periods required by the contract administrator, where no period is stated, provide this information monthly:

Completion submissions

In addition to requirements in the contract and contained elsewhere in the specification provide:

3102  CONCRETE WORK - STANDARD

This section relates to formwork, reinforcement, concrete mixes and the placing of concrete.

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

DPM          Damp proof membrane

MPa          Megapascal

CCANZ        Concrete NZ (Legacy Documents)

The following definitions apply specifically to this section:

ACRS           Australian Certification Authority for Reinforcing

Steels - An independent certification scheme for reinforcing steel and structural steel, by product and manufacturer/processor. Certifies compliance with Australia/New Zealand Standards.

Web site - www.steelcertification.com

Documents

CCANZ CP 01 Code of practice for weathertight concrete and concrete masonry construction

1.3

MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Manufacturer and supplier documents relating to this part of the work:

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company:

Web:

Email:

Telephone:

Requirements

1.4


QUALIFICATIONS


Workers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and techniques specified.

Performance

1.5


TESTING


Carry out sampling and concrete acceptance tests during construction to NZS 3109.9. Concrete acceptance tests during construction. Conduct 7 day strength tests. After a 7 day test result of less than 60% of the specified strength, stop concrete placement until it is shown that the suspect concrete compiles with the specification.

Carry out slump tests, yield tests and air content tests to NZS 3112.1, sections 4, 5 and 9, and evaluate to NZS 3104.2.15. Control tests and their evaluation. Make available all test records to the contract administrator on request.

1.6

STEEL REINFORCING COMPLIANCE

Steel reinforcing and steel prestressing materials for concrete to AS/NZS 4671 or AS/NZS 4672.1, respectively. Steel to be manufactured in New Zealand, or by an overseas manufacturer holding a current valid NZ S Mark or ACRS certificate for that type of steel. Confirm compliance and provide evidence if requested.

Steel that fails to meet these requirements is not to be used (or ordered) without the contract administrators written approval, further proof and/or testing may be required.

1.7


QUALITY ASSURANCE


Carry out the whole of this work to the requirements of NZS 3109.

Quality assurance procedures to include all aspects of concrete construction including;

Advise the name of the suitably qualified and experienced representative who is responsible for quality control of the concrete work. The representative is to sign a written quality control checklist for each on-site concrete pour. Provide a copy to the construction reviewer in sufficient time for a pre-pour inspection on request.

1.8

1.9

2

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.9

2.10

INSPECTIONS BY CONSTRUCTION REVIEWER

INSPECTIONS BY BUILDING CONSENT AUTHORITY

PRODUCTS

Materials

CEMENT

Portland cement to NZS 3122.

CEMENT, FILLER

Portland limestone filler cement to NZS 3125.

SAND

To NZS 3121.

COARSE AGGREGATE, NORMAL CONCRETE

To NZS 3121, except as modified by NZS 3104: clause 2.5.3, Coarse aggregate. The total mass of reactive alkali in the concrete mix to not exceed the requirements of section 2 of Concrete NZ, Alkali Aggregate Reaction publication.

WATER

To NZS 3121.

Concrete

NORMAL CONCRETE

Normal concrete 17.5, 20, 25 MPA up to 50 MPa grade, (refer to SELECTIONS), maximum aggregate size 19mm ready-mixed to NZS 3104. Provide delivery dockets listing mix and despatch details.

MASS CONCRETE

Concrete having a minimum strength of 10 MPa at 28 days

Reinforcement

GRADE 300E STEEL

To AS/NZS 4671. Round bars are shown by symbol "R" and deformed bars by symbol "D", followed by the diameter in millimetres.

GRADE 500E STEEL

To AS/NZS 4671. Round bars shown by symbol "HR" and deformed bars by symbol "HD" followed by diameter in millimetres.

WELDED WIRE FABRIC

Hard drawn steel wire spot welded with correct gauge to AS/NZS 4671 Class E, smooth or deformed and to the spacings and dimensions either specified or shown on the drawings. 500E mesh to AS/NZS 4671 as modified by NZS B1/VM1.

2.11

2.12

2.13

2.14

2.15

3

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

TYING WIRE

Mild drawn steel wire not less than 1.2mm diameter.

SPACERS AND CHAIRS

Precast concrete or purpose made moulded PVC to approval. Where concrete spacer blocks are used in exposed concrete work use blocks similar to surrounding concrete.

STRUCTURAL PLYWOOD

To AS/NZS 2269.0 for shutter face with plywood grade as necessary to obtain the concrete finish specified.

TIMBER FALSEWORK

No. 2 framing radiata pine or as required to construct the required formwork.

RELEASE AGENT

A release agent that will not stain or adhere to the concrete, contaminate reinforcing steel or construction joints, or have a detrimental effect on any finished surface or applied finishes.

EXECUTION

HANDLE AND STORE

Handle and store reinforcing steel and accessories without damage or contamination. Store on timber fillets on hard ground in a secure area clear of any building operation. Lay steel fabric flat.

Ensure reinforcement is clean and remains clean so that at the time of placing concrete it is free of all loose mill scale, loose rust and any other contamination that may reduce bonding capacity.

Fix formwork

LOADINGS

Design and construct formwork and falsework in accordance with sound engineering principles to withstand the worst combination of:

PROVIDE ALL FORMWORK

Provide all formwork necessary to support and confine the concrete and shape it to the required dimensions. Fabricate in a manner permitting its easy removal without damage to the concrete.

Provide a 20mm x 20mm chamfer to all corners unless detailed otherwise.

Protect corners from damage during and after stripping.

Keep absorbent formwork wet before concrete is placed. Clean formwork by waterblasting.

FALSEWORK

Carry strutting down to a construction sufficiently strong and stable to afford the required support without permissible stress or deflections being exceeded.

Prop through to other floors if the construction load on a particular suspended floor exceeds the design load.

Unless stated otherwise on the drawings permissible deviations from established lines, grades, dimensions and cambers to remain within the tolerances laid down in NZS 3109: table 5.1, Tolerances for precast components and table 5.2, Tolerances for in situ construction.

Unless stated otherwise on the drawings, permissible abrupt, offset and gradual deviations for the specified surface finish to remain within the tolerances laid down in NZS 3114: table 3, Tolerances for abrupt deviations or offsets and gradual deviations.

Formwork linings and surface finishes as nominated for both fair face and concealed or exposed surfaces. Unless detailed, obtain written confirmation of the type and pattern of all joints.

Construct joints to prevent loss of grout between joints in form linings, as well as between forms and completed work. Column forms to have full height linings so that no horizontal joints occur on exposed faces.

Cambers shown on the drawings or specified, relate to the concrete immediately before formwork is struck. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, construct forms to achieve the following:

Ensure the safe removal of all or any part of the formwork. Remove without shock, vibration or damage to the concrete and in such a manner as to take the imposed stresses gradually to NZS 3109.5.4. Stripping times to NZS 3109 table 5.3.

Install reinforcing

Cut and bend bars using proper bending tools to avoid notching and to the requirements of NZS 3101.1, 8 and NZS 3109: 3.3 Hooks and bends.

Minimum radii of reinforcement bends to NZS 3101.1, 8 and NZS 3109: table

Use a purpose built tool for on site bending and to deal with minor adjustments to steel reinforcement.

To NZS 3109, 3.9, Tolerances for reinforcement.

Secure reinforcement adequately with tying wire and place, support and secure against displacement when concreting. Bend tying wire back well clear of the formwork. Spacing as dimensioned, or if not shown, to the clear distance minimums in NZS 3109, 3.6, Spacing of reinforcement.

Length of laps where not dimensioned on the drawings in accordance with the SELECTIONS. Provide laps only where indicated on the drawings. Tie all lapping bars to each other. Plain bars lapped splices must be hooked

Wire mesh laps to NZS 3101.1, lap one mesh square plus 50mm minimum (do not count bar extension beyond the outermost wire).

For in-situ concrete, foundations and interior slabs on ground, to NZS 3604 or NZS 4229, the reinforcement and welded mesh cover to be:

Location, cover to

NZS 3604

NZS 4229

Footing, to earth

75mm

75mm

Footing, to DPM

75mm

50mm

Foundation, to edge

75mm

75mm

Slab, to slab top

30mm

30mm

Slab, to slab edge

50mm to 75mm

50mm to 75mm

Build in all grounds, bolts and fixings for wall plates and bracing elements, holding down bolts, pipes, sleeves and fixings as required by all trades and as shown on the drawings, prior to pouring the concrete.

Do not use grounds exceeding 100mm in length. Location and form of conduits to be approved in writing by the Contract Administrator. Minimum cover 40mm. Do not encase aluminium items in concrete. Do not paint steel embedded items more than 25mm into the concrete encasement. Cut back form ties to specified cover and fill the cavities with mortar.

Form all pockets, chases and flashing grooves as required by all trades and as shown on the drawings.

Wrap all pipes embedded in concrete with tape to break the bond and to accommodate expansion. Do not embed pipes for conveying liquids exceeding a temperature of 50°C in concrete.

If it is a project requirement, ensure that reinforcing is electrically equipotential bonded (or at least conductor cable attached) before the concrete is poured. For bonded reinforcing ensure all reinforcing is interconnected with good contact at joints and tight conductive ties.

Place concrete

Do not place concrete until all excavations, boxing and reinforcing have been inspected and passed by the Building Consent Authority.

Do not place concrete in high winds or other unfavourable conditions. Refer to NZS 3109: 7.2 Unfavourable conditions, for when concrete may not be placed. Remove and make good concrete damaged by frost, dry and wet conditions.

Protect formwork, reinforcement, "build in" items and fresh concrete from damage, as the pour is placed, making good any damage if it occurs.

Transport concrete from agitator to final placement as quickly as possible using means that avoid segregation.

Set up and supervise pump operation, placing and compaction of the mix to NZS 3109, 7.4, Handling and placing and NZS 3109, 7.6, Compaction Advise the ready-mix supplier of the type of pump and the slump required, in addition to the concrete grade, strength and quantity.

Place concrete in layers not more than 500mm deep, compacted and vibrated. Do not place fresh concrete against the preceding layer after more than 45 minutes, or such lesser time as required by the circumstances, to NZS 3109: clause 7.4, Handling and placing.

To NZS 3109: clause 7.6, Compaction. Compact by vibration of the concrete to expel entrapped air and until settlement of the concrete is visibly evident over all areas of the surface. Maintain vibration until settlement ceases and coarse aggregate at the surface is embedded. Do not continue vibration beyond reaching this condition.

Use sufficient immersion vibrators, with one spare for emergency, to ensure that vibration is achieved throughout the entire volume of each layer of concrete, and until complete compaction is reached, to NZS 3109: clause 7.6, Compaction.

Finishing

To NZS 3114, 105, Specification of finishes, for off the form finishes and to NZS 3114, Part 3, Floors, exterior pavements, and inverts, for slabs and pavements. Refer SELECTIONS.

Curing

Cure all concrete of normal cement type and mixing proportions for a minimum of 7 days. Keep time between placing of concrete and the start of curing to an absolute minimum. Ensure curing is continuous.

Notify the curing method to be used for this work. Select from the following methods;

Keep formwork left in place continuously moist by sprinkling with water over the curing period. Continue sprinkling the exposed surface if the formwork is removed before the end of the curing period.

When covering with sheet materials, ensure that edges are well secured throughout the specified curing period, to prevent draughts passing over the surfaces of the concrete.

Do not use coverings employing water at times of freezing weather.

Protect

Protect plastic concrete from indentation and surface marking.

Protect surfaces of stripped concrete from damage especially at arrises.

Protect from rust marks and other surface disfigurements.

Defects

Reject concrete with structural defects. Immediately after stripping formwork, identify all defects and obtain direction. Do not carry out any repair work until directed and then only in accordance with the direction. Repair defects by cutting out, making good and replacing, or otherwise as directed.

Make good surface defects immediately after forms are stripped. Make good hollows or bony areas with 1:2 mortar or plaster, finished to the same tolerances as the parent concrete. Fill any tie rod holes with 1:2 mortar.

Completion

Remove all unused materials and all concrete and reinforcing debris from the site.

Location:        New main entrance

Type:            ply

Finish:

Location:        New main entrance

Concrete grade: Refer Structural Engineers Specification Add to mix:

3410  STRUCTURAL STEEL

This section relates to the fabrication, erection and specialist coating of structural steelwork of a general nature, for Construction Category CC1 or CC2 (to AS/NZS 5131).

Refer to SELECTIONS for project Construction Category.

Refer to 6745 PROTECTIVE COATINGS - STEELWORK for specialised coating /painting.

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

AESS           Architecturally Exposed Structural Steelwork

CC            Construction Category

NDE           Non-Destructive Examination

Manufacturer and supplier documents relating to work in this section are:

Copies of the above literature are available from

Web:

Email:

Telephone:

Facsimile:

Requirements

Welding operators (and supervisors) to be experienced, competent workers, qualified to AS/NZS 5131, Table 7.4, to suit relevant Construction Category and weld category.

To AS/NZS 5131 Section 12 and Appendix F, Tolerance Class 1.

Refer to drawings to ensure all required details and fixings are provided for in the structural steelwork. Verify dimensions against site measurements prior to fabrication.

To AS/NZS 5131, Section 13, Inspection, Testing And Correction and AS/NZS 5131 Appendix I, Inspection of Welding and Bolting (New Zealand Only), as follows:

Refer to section 1270 CONSTRUCTION

Comply with New Zealand, Australian, British or Japanese Standards for steel as required by NZS 3404.1, section 2, including, type, category, and suppression of brittle fracture. Also to AS/NZS 5131, Section 5.

Steel members and sections steel grade table

Component

Conforming to

Grade

Hot rolled steel sections

AS/NZS 3679.1

300; 350; 300L0; 300S0; 350L0, 300L15; 350L15

Plates and flats

AS/NZS 3678;

AS/NZS 1594;

250; 300; 350; 400; 450; WR350;

250L0, 300L0; 350L0; 300L15;

350L15

Plates and flats

AS/NZS 1594; TS 102

HA250; HA300; HA350; HA400;

HW350

Circular hollow sections

AS/NZS 1163; TS 102

C250L0; C350L0; C450L0

Square hollow sections

AS/NZS 1163; TS 102

C350L0; C450L0

Rectangular hollow sections

AS/NZS 1163; TS 102

C350L0; C450L0

Welded beams and columns

AS/NZS 3679.2; TS 102

300; 400

Shear studs (composite slab to steel)

AS/NZS 1554.2

380

Quench & tempered plate

AS 3597

500; 600; 700; 900; 1000

Purlins and girts

AS 1397

G250; G300; G350; G450; G500;

G550, Z350, Z450

2.2

2.3

2.4

WELDING CONSUMABLES

To comply with and be selected for grade of steel being welded as required by AS/NZS 1554 series of standards.

FLUX

Welding flux to be dry and from sealed containers.

BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS

Grade 4.6, screws AS 1111.2 and bolts to AS 1111.1. Grade 4.6 nuts to comply with AS 1112.1. Property Class 8.8 bolts and equivalent nuts and washers (high strength structural quality only) to comply with AS/NZS 1252.1. Hot-dip galvanize to AS/NZS 4680 (and AS/NZS 1214), bolts, nuts and washers forming a permanent part of a structure subject to a protective coating.

Bolt Categories and tensioning

Bolting category

Bolt standard

Property Class

Tension method

Tensioned joint type

4.6/S

AS 1111.1

4.6

Snug tight

8.8/S

AS/NZS 1252.1

8.8

Snug tight

8.8/TB

AS/NZS 1252.1

8.8

Full tension

Bearing

8.8/TF

AS/NZS 1252.1

8.8

Full tension

Friction

2.5

3

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

In bearing type connections where the thread position relative to the shear plane is to be controlled.

N - threads included in shear plane

X - threads excluded from shear plane

F - friction type joints - prepare faying surfaces

GROUT

To AS/NZS 5131, 5.8.

EXECUTION

Preparation, assembly and Fabrication

GENERALLY

To AS/NZS 5131, Section 6.

DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING OF PRODUCTS

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to delivery, storage and handling of products.

ROUTINE MATTERS

Refer to 1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES for protection requirements. Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to defective or damaged work, removal of protection and cleaning.

SURFACE FINISH

Grind off all burrs and sharp arrises.

CUTTING

To AS/NZS 5131, Section 6.5.

HOLING

To AS/NZS 5131, Section 6.7

Do not use slotted holes for connections, other than those documented.

Welding

WELDING GENERALLY

To AS/NZS 5131, Section 7 and AS/NZS 1554.1. Equipment to comply with AS/NZS 1554.1, clause 1.8.2.

Site weld only when correct alignment and preset or camber have been achieved.

Weld types as documented elsewhere or on drawings

Weld categories not documented elsewhere or on drawings to be Category GP.

NON-DESTRUCTIVE WELD EXAMINATION

Non-destructive weld examination (NDE) to AS/NZS 5131, clause 13.6.2 and AS/NZS 5131 Appendix I, Inspection of Welding and Bolting (New Zealand Only).

If non-visual NDE is required, use a third party testing authority.

Repair any welds revealed as faulty by NDE and repeat the examination.

Mechanical fastening

To AS/NZS 5131.

Connection contact surfaces to AS/NZS5131, 8.4.1.

Category 8.8/TF bolting to be clean, as rolled and free from applied finishes.

For washers, place one washer under the part rotated during tightening process (nut or bolt head).

Permanent bolt only when correct alignment and preset or camber have been achieved.

For tensioning of bolting categories 8.8/TB and 8.8/TF, use part-turn method or a direct tension indicator device. Ensure clear thread run out beneath the nut after tensioning is to New Zealand requirement of AS/NZS 5131, 8.2.2.

Select length of bolts such that the threaded portion does not occur within the shear plane between joined parts.

Erection of structural steel

To AS/NZS 5131, Section 11.

Make sure every part of the structure has sufficient design capacity and is stable under construction loads produced by the construction procedure.

Comply with NZBC F5/AS1: Construction and demolition hazards, and the WorkSafe publication: Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety in the construction industry.

For each group of anchor bolts, provide a template with set-out lines clearly marked for positioning the bolts when casting in.

Start erection only when the holding down bolts and anchorages have been cast-in-place long enough to achieve sufficient strength.

Provide temporary bracing, propping and restraint as required to make structure safe. Fix any temporary members so as not to weaken or deface permanent steelwork. Leave temporary bracing and restraint in place until the erection is sufficiently advanced to allow safe removal of temporary bracing.

Other than work shown on the shop detail documentation as site work, do not fabricate, modify or weld structural steel on-site.

Before grouting steelwork supported by concrete or masonry, set steelwork on packing or wedges as follows:

Grout at supports before constructing supported floors, walls and roofing.

Do not grout if the base plate or the footing surface temperature are outside the range 3°C to 35°C or to manufacturer's requirements.

Fill the space beneath the base plate with grout, if necessary hammered in tight to ensure complete filling of space.

Use drifting only to bring members into position, without enlarging holes or distorting components.

If it is a project electrical requirement, ensure that any electrically at-risk, steel frames or isolated members, are earthed (or at least conductor cable attached) before the steel has any in-situ finishes applied or is enclosed.

Remove temporary elements on completion and restore the surface.

Completion & Commissioning

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for completion requirements and if required commissioning requirements.

3821

1

1.1

1.2

1.3


TIMBER FRAMING

GENERAL


This section relates to the supply and erection of timber framing, as a framed structure, or as part of a partitioning system.

RELATED WORK

Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC for underlays, foils and DPC.

ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

SG Structural grade to NZS 3604, 1.3 Definitions

Documents


DOCUMENTS


Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:


NZBC B2/AS1 AS/NZS 2904 NZS 3602

NZS 3603


Durability

Damp-proof courses and flashings

Timber and wood-based products for use in building

Timber structures standard


NZS 3604      Timber-framed buildings

NZS 3622       Verification of timber properties

NZS 3631 New Zealand timber grading rules

NZS 3640 Chemical preservation of round and sawn timber


WorkSafe Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety in the construction industry.

BRANZ BU 582 Structurally fixed cavity battens

*A copy of NZS 3604 Timber-framed building, must be held on site.


1.4

1.5

2

2.1


MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work:

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company:

Web:

Email:

Telephone:


DIMENSIONS

All timber sizes except for roof battens are actual minimum dried sizes.

PRODUCTS


Materials

TIMBER FRAMING, TREATED


Species, grade and in service moisture content to NZS 3602, NZBC B2/AS1 and treatment to NZS 3640, NZBC B2/AS1. Structural grade (SG) to NZS 3604, NZS 3622 with properties to NZS 3603.

Graded to NZS 3631, treated where required by NZBC B2/AS1, NZS 3602, table 1, and treatment to NZS 3640.

Treated to NZBC B2/AS1, NZS 3602, table 1 and to NZS 3640, clause 6.3.1.

Species:         Radiata pine

Grade:         SG6

Size:         70mm x 45mm, 45mm x 45mm or 45mm x 19mm

If dwangs, nogs or blocking is required for exterior insulated walls, ensure they are not full depth of framing. Install flush with face of wall required, leaving a minimum 20mm or 45mm preferable gap to the other face to NZS 3604, 8.8. Dwangs and nogs if required to be at 1350mm centres maximum to NZS 3604, 8.8.

H3.1 Radiata pine battens, minimum 20mm thickness, width and height to match timber framing studs. Temporary fix battens before being fixed into the framing with the cladding fixings. To NZS 3602, table 1, reference 1D.10, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 50-year durability performance.

Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC section

Components

Type to NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the size and number for each particular types of joint as laid down in the nailing schedules of NZS 3604, sections 6 - 10.

Wood screws to the requirements of NZS 3604, 2.4 Fastenings and Fabrication, and section 4, Durability, and of the type, number and form required for each screw application to NZS 3604, sections 6 - 10.

Bolts and coach screws complete with washers, to the requirements of NZS 3604, clause 2.4.5 Bolts and Coach Screws, and section 4, Durability, and of the type, number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6 - 10.

Use stainless steel threaded rods of the required length, with washers and nuts at both ends, when stainless steel bolts of the required length are not available.

Supply for each particular joint the connectors and fixings as noted on the drawings. Comply with the requirements of the manufacturer, NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6-10.

2.12


BRACING STRAPS


Nail-on type to the requirements of NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular application to NZS 3604, sections 6-10.

2.13

POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS

To type, size and charge required by the powder actuated tool manufacturer for each particular member and the substrate.

2.14


CORROSION RISKS


For interior timber, treated with copper-based timber preservatives (H3.2 or higher), use a minimum of hot-dipped galvanized steel fixings and fasteners.

For exterior timber, timber in damp areas and timber subject to occasional wetting, use only stainless steel (or equivalent) fixings and connectors, when the timber is treated with; Copper Azole (CuAz, Preservative code 58), Alkaline Copper Quaternary (ACQ, Preservative code 90), Micronise Copper Azole (code 88) or Micronised Copper Quaternary (code 89).

3


EXECUTION


Conditions

3.1


PROTECT TIMBER


Protect all timber against damage and from inclement weather. Ensure that any variation in moisture content is kept to a minimum, before and after erection and before enclosure.

3.2


EXECUTION


Execution to comply with NZS 3604, except as varied in this specification.

Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).

3.3


SEPARATION


Separate all timber framing timbers from concrete, masonry and brick by: -

Maximum allowable equilibrium moisture content (EMC) for non air-conditioned or centrally heated buildings, for framing to which linings are attached.

3.5


TOLERANCES


Permissible deviations from established lines, grades and dimensions equal to or less than the following. Multiples of given limits are not cumulative.

Application

Set-out framing generally in accordance with the requirements of NZS 3604, to carry superimposed loads, and as required to support sheet linings and claddings. When necessary provide framing to suit required cladding/lining control joints and sheet joints.

Set timbers true to required lines and levels with mitres, butt joints, laps and housings cut accurately to provide full and even contact over the whole of the bearing surface.

Select and cut spanning members to minimise allowable defects and avoiding knots and short grain on edges in the middle third, and shakes, splits and checks at mid-span and close to ends.

Fix to steelwork with bolts and washers or approved proprietary fastenings at 1 metre maximum spacing and not less than 2 fixings to each member, or to engineering specific design.

Limit holes and notches, checks and half-housing for the structure to those allowable in NZS 3604. Neatly form holes and notches for services without lessening the structural integrity of the member.

Cutting for straightening to comply with NZS 3604, 8.5.3, Straightening studs.

Do not use steel timber connectors and fixings on any structural framing exposed to view unless detailed on the drawings.

Comply with the requirements of WorkSafe and the Health and Safety at Work Act 2015. Powder-actuated fastening tool operators to have the appropriate current Certificate and/or Licence and tools to have the appropriate certificate of fitness if necessary.

Position and fix all necessary members for the fixing of all services, fittings, fixtures, edges of linings or claddings, and to provide lateral support to load carrying framing.

Fully drive nails in all structural joints with the number and location for each particular joint, to the requirements of the nailing schedules of NZS 3604. Where splitting could occur, pre-drill to 80% of nail diameter.

Drill for and set bolts to ensure full bearing and development of the joint strength, with tension to just set the washers into timber or to engineering specific design.

Fit connectors and fixings to obtain full bearing over all contact surfaces and full development of the required loading capacity for that particular joint and in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements or to engineering specific design.

Fit and fix 20mm cavity battens over wall underlay or rigid air barrier, fully nail to timber studs to the requirements of the manufacturer or to NZS 3604. Make allowances for cladding control joints where required. Fit and fix related flashings. Fit and fix cavity closers to base of walls, open horizontal (or raking) junctions and over openings (windows, meters etc).

Fit and fix subfloor, wall and roof bracing elements to the requirements of the manufacturer or to NZS 3604, to develop the full number of bracing units required.

Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC section

Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC section

Completion

Clean up timber framing as the work proceeds so no offcuts, chips, sawdust or any other matter or items remain behind the claddings or linings.

Leave work to the standard required by following procedures.

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC section

4.15 CONNECTORS

Location

Type

Material

Finish

3897  REPLACEMENT & TREATMENT OF DECAYED

TIMBER

This section relates to identification and testing of decayed timber and for its replacement and/or treatment to NZBC B1 and NZBC B2. It includes;

Refer to the appropriate timber framing section for additional timber work.

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: BAE             Boric acid equivalent

Documents

Requirements

Work to be carried out by trades people experienced and familiar with identifying, treating and replacing decayed timber. Workers to be familiar with the health and safety requirements relating to this work.

Where (fungi and mould) decayed timber has been identified as part of the Building Consent, arrange for required inspections. Where the decayed timber is identified after the Building Consent has been issued, agree with the BCA inspector the required identification, testing and replacement required.

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                      3897 REPLACEMENT & TREATMENT OF DECAYED TIMBER Page 74

Where (fungi and mould) decayed timber has been identified and a specialist consultant is engaged or the building consent requires inspection and certification by separate consultants, arrange for and co-ordinate these inspections.

Take a photographic record of all stages of the work including before work commences, after the decayed material has been removed and after replacement.

Provide temporary protection from weather and water for all interior parts of the building exposed by the work.

Materials

Boron glycol type treatment, to a minimum concentration of 20% bae. For concealed timber, add coloured dye to help with even application.

Removing fungi and mould affected timber

Take samples as required for testing. Samples must be of the required size and labelled to identify the source.

To Health and Safety at Work Act 2015.

Where moulds and fungi have to be removed as part of the repair, comply with relevant Health and Safety requirements. Ensure workers removing moulds and fungi in the building wear suitable protective equipment including disposable overalls, appropriate breathing masks and gloves. Refer to MBIE Workplace Health Bulletin No. 17 and WorkSafe for further information.

Disturb moulds and fungi as little as necessary.

Where materials have heavy mould growth on them, replace them rather than attempting to clean off mould. Wrap the materials in polythene or put in polythene bags, and seal to prevent them drying out. Clean mould from smaller isolated areas where it would be difficult or impractical to remove materials. This should be done by thorough washing and rinsing, and collecting the cleaning solution and rinse water for disposal. A wet dry vacuum cleaner is useful for this. If areas of mould need to be cleaned, this should be done before they dry out.

Once suitable temporary covers are in place, cladding can be removed with the linings still in place. This avoids any potentially dangerous moulds being released into the building. The lining also acts as a wind barrier reducing the wind load on the covers.

Where internal remediation work is needed, avoid contaminating other areas of the house with mould. Advice should be sought from a specialist on how to keep the work area separate from the rest of the dwelling (for example with polythene sheets and taped joints and using a negative pressure environment). The work environment must be kept well-ventilated.

If a specialist consultant is engaged, follow their recommendations for timber removal, otherwise generally as follows.

Err on the side of caution when replacing untreated timber framing. If the timber has been adequately preservative treated, then it may be possible to remove less timber.

Particular care is needed where several pieces of timber are fixed together.

The timber faces exposed after the cladding is removed may appear sound but there could be fungal decay on the hidden faces of the timber which can be difficult to detect. Examples of these are multiple studs, doubling or jack studs, boundary joists and lintels.

Where the timber shows obvious signs of failure (Refer MBIE Dealing With Timber In Leaky Buildings, photos 3 and 4) there is typically no need to test the decayed portions before removal. Testing should focus on identifying where the timber is sound. Cut out any timber at least one metre beyond the last visual signs of fungal decay on any individual piece of timber (Refer MBIE Dealing With Timber In Leaky Buildings, Figures 1 and 2).

Removed timber and debris, to be disposed of offsite.

Where timber members are difficult to replace such as floor joists running back into a building, it may be possible to reduce the recommended one metre distance by taking samples of timber at 150mm, 300mm and 600mm distances from the visible signs of decay and getting them analysed in a laboratory. The timber will only need to be removed as far back as the first sample that has no decay present.

Removing borer affected timber

Remove all timber that has significant disintegration and/or soft areas.

Remove structural, framing and waterproofing timber that has significant intense areas of borer holes. Cladding, linings and trim can be temporarily removed and inspected, if unaffected or only slightly affected but sound, then treated and reused.

Native timber framing which are mostly unaffected heart wood, but with small pockets of infected sap wood, must be assessed for structural adequacy. If deemed structurally adequate, treat and leave in place.

Isolated single floor boards without disintegration or soft areas, but sound with intense areas of borer holes (above or below) can be left in place, treated and holes filled. Reinforce from underneath with minimum 12mm H3 plywood panels, screwed and glued to at least two non-infected boards on either side.

Err on the side of caution when replacing untreated timber framing.

Generally it is preferable to remove, treat then replace.

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                      3897 REPLACEMENT & TREATMENT OF DECAYED TIMBER Page 76

However, in some cases, as long as there is no fungi or mould present, it may be possible to treat insect infected timber framing, install replacement framing and then remove badly affected timber. Treat cuts afterwards.

Removed timber and debris, to be disposed of offsite.

Treating timber

Remove any existing coatings, paint, applied finishes etc, that will inhibit the absorption of the treatment into the timber.

Sound timber uncovered during repairs that is untreated or has a preservative treatment that does not meet B2/AS1, must be treated, where practical, with a brush-on preservative treatment.

To maximise the surface area of framing that can be treated, it is important to apply brush-on timber treatments after decay-affected timber has been removed, but before new treated timber is installed. Where localised repairs are carried out, any timber in the area of the repair should be treated.

Apply brush on timber preservative treatment to areas affected.

These methods apply to all fungi and mould treatment, but would only apply to major active insect infestation.

For studs where three faces cannot be accessed, a combination of two coats applied by brush and injection of boron glycol into holes drilled into the interface between studs is recommended. The holes to be 6mm in diameter and 80mm deep, sloping downwards (at approximately 30 degrees to the horizontal) at 300mm intervals (Refer MBIE Dealing With Timber In Leaky Buildings Figure 7). 10ml of treatment solution to be injected into the holes followed by a second 10ml injection 30 minutes later.

For double lintels, two coats of boron glycol to be applied by brush followed by injection of boron glycol into 6mm by 45mm deep holes drilled into the outer lintel 10mm below the top edge. A drill hole spacing of 100mm is recommended starting 75mm from the end of the lintel (Refer MBIE Dealing With Timber In Leaky Buildings, Figure 8). 15ml of treatment solution to be injected into the holes followed by a second 15ml injection 30 minutes later.

Temporarily clamp the lintel timbers together if there is a large gap between them. Apply adhesive tape to the bottom of the joint before injecting the treatment to minimise treatment running out the bottom of the lintel.

Because of the variability associated with the boron injection process, use his remediation method only where there is a high degree of confidence that there is no fungi or mould decay present between studs or lintel members.

While boundary joists have some similarities to lintels, this method of treatment cannot be relied on to achieve adequate levels of site preservative treatment because of more limited access to the timber surfaces. In addition, as boundary joists have less drying potential than lintels, hidden and difficult to find decay can occur. Accordingly, the removal of the boundary joist as shown in (Refer MBIE Dealing With Timber In Leaky Buildings, Figure 5) is required, which allows for preservative application and for any timber with decay to be identified and removed.

Replacing timber

3.15


REPLACING TIMBER


For framing, select the most cost-effective technique to replace decayed timber in a particular area either;

Note, NZS 3604 does not allow the jointing of studs, so replace studs as necessary.

Where more than 40% of the timber in a particular section of the framing has to be removed, replace all framing.

3.17


FLOOR FRAMING


Where decay has affected floor joists, it may be possible to insert a new beam within the floor space to support the remaining length of joist and the replacement joists, usually by using joist hangers (Refer MBIE Dealing With Timber In Leaky Buildings, Figures 6a and 6b). The beam will need to be supported and the design must ensure loads are transferred to the foundations.

3.18


CLOSING IN


Do not close in timber framing until the moisture content is less than 20%. Note, some brush-on timber treatments can cause resistance moisture meters to read higher than the actual timber moisture content.

4


SELECTIONS


4.1


CONSULTANT INSPECTOR


Company:

Person:

Contact details:

4.2


TESTING LABORATORY


Company:

Person:

Contact details:

4.3

LOCATION OF SUSPECTED DECAY

Location:        Wall & Roof framing

Type of decay: Fungi, mould, borer

4.4

LOCATION OF KNOWN DECAY

Location:        N/A

Type of decay: Fungi, mould, borer

4.5

TIMBER PRESERVATIVE

Brand/type:      Protim FrameSaver

Type of decay: Fungi, mould, borer

4161T

THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS, DPC, DPM, & TAPES

1

GENERAL

This section relates to the application of Thermakraft Ltd, DPC, DPM, Wall & Roof Underlays, Foils, Flashing Tapes, and accessories.

1.1

RELATED WORK

Refer to 3821 for Timber Framing

Refer to 4171IB for IBS RigidRap rigid air barrier system

Refer to 4171HR for JH Rigid Air Barriers

1.2

ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

NZMRM        New Zealand Metal Roofing Manufacturers Inc.

The following definitions apply specifically to this section:

Wall underlay the same meaning as defined in NZBC E2/AS1, covering kraft based and synthetic wall underlays, sometimes called wall wraps, building wraps or building papers.

Documents

1.3

DOCUMENTS

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

NZBC C/AS2    Protection from fire

NZBC E2/AS1   External moisture

AS 1530.2       Methods for fire tests on building materials,

components and structures - Test for flammability of materials

NZS 2295       Pliable, permeable building underlays

AS/NZS 2904   Damp-proof courses and flashings

NZS 3604      Timber-framed buildings

NZS 4214       Methods of determining the total thermal resistance

of parts of buildings

AS/NZS 4389 Roof safety mesh

AS/NZS 4534 Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire

NZMRM CoP NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding Code of Practice

1.4

MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Thermakraft documents relating to work in this section are:

Thermakraft product manual and technical data sheets.

BRANZ Appraisal 329 - Supercourse 500™ Damp-Proof Course and

Concealed Flashing

BRANZ Appraisal 611 - James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers

BRANZ Appraisal 651 - Thermakraft Covertek™ 407 Roof and Wall Underlay

BRANZ Appraisal 695 - Watergate Plus™ Wall Underlay

BRANZ Appraisal 743 - Thermakraft Covertek 405™ Roof and Wall Underlay

BRANZ Appraisal 878 - Thermakraft Aluband™ Window Flashing Tape

BRANZ Appraisal 912 - Thermakraft 220™ Synthetic Wall Underlay

BRANZ Appraisal 917 - Thermakraft Covertek 403™ Roof and Wall Underlay

BRANZ Appraisal 942 - OneSeal™ Multi-Fit Pipe and Cable Penetration Seals BRANZ Appraisal 943 - Thermakraft Covertek 401™ Roof Underlay BRANZ Appraisal 1000 - Thermakraft Thermabar 397™ Light Diffusing Reflective Underlay

BRANZ Appraisal 1029 - Thermakraft Ausnet™ Hexagonal Wire Mesh BRANZ Appraisal 1104 – Thermathene Orange™ Concrete Underlay BRANZ Appraisal 1122 – Thermaflash™ Flashing Tape

Code Mark Certificate 30069 - Thermakraft Covertek 403™ Absorbent Breathable Roof Underlay

Code Mark Certificate 30030 - Thermakraft Covertek 405™ Absorbent Breathable Roof Underlay

Code Mark Certificate 30028 - Thermakraft Covertek 407™ Absorbent Breathable Roof Underlay

Code Mark Certificate 1002 - Thermakraft Watergate Plus™ Wall Underlay

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company:      Thermakraft Ltd

Web:           www.thermakraft.co.nz

Email:           info@thermakraft.co.nz

Telephone:      0800 806 595

Warranties

Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of materials and execution. Thermakraft Ltd warrant performance of products if design and installation comply with relevant technical literature, NZBC, and recognised industry Codes of Practice. Copy of Thermakraft ™ Product Warranty available on request.

Requirements

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to qualifications.

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified materials, or associated products, components or accessories.

Compliance information

Provide the following compliance documentation:

Performance - general

Group Number to NZBC C/AS2, Table 4.3. Refer to SELECTIONS.

Quality control and assurance

Hold Point: Pre-Clad: Work may not proceed until the work in question has been inspected.

Materials

Damp Proof Course

Supercourse 500™, high-impact polyethylene film toAS/NZS 2904 and embossed on both sides. Manufactured in NZ from 100% recycled materials for use as a damp-proof course and concealed flashings around doors and windows and to BRANZ Appraisal 329. Thickness 500 microns minimum.

Refer to SELECTIONS for type of joining tape.

Wall underlays

Wall underlays - synthetic, fire-retardant, air barriers

Watergate Plus™, specifically designed as a wall underlay. Absorbent breathable spun bonded non-woven polyolefin type building membrane, coated with a water resistant vapour permeable film. Maximum exposure 90 days. A fire retardant membrane, with Flammability Index of ≤ 5, when tested to AS 1530.2. Refer to BRANZ Appraisal 695.

Roof underlays

Roof underlays - synthetic, fire-retardant, self-supporting

Covertek 407™, a fire retardant non-woven self-supporting roof underlay, consisting of two spun-bonded polyolefin fabric layers bonded to a micro porous inner layer, designed for use as a water absorbent, breathable, water resistant roof underlay for sloped roofs. A fire retardant membrane with a flammability index of ≤ 5, when tested to AS 1530.2, to NZBC C/AS2, meets the requirements for suspended fabrics, BRANZ Appraisal 651 and Code Mark Certificate 30028. Can be used in areas exposed to view in occupied spaces. Available in 1250mm and 2550mm roll widths.

Window and joinery flashing tape

Thermaflash™ is a self-adhesive synthetic flexible window flashing tape, with superior adhesion. can be used with rigid air barrier or rigid wall underlay products. Suitable for use as a flexible flashing around window and door joinery openings, available in widths of 75mm, 150mm and 200mm. On windows, the use of a Thermakraft Corner Mould™, is optional however butterfly strips must be applied. Use in conjunction with air seals and joinery flashing systems around window and door joinery on timber, steel framed and medium rise buildings. Compatible with a wide range of sealants but check compatibility. Maximum exposure 180 days. Refer to BRANZ Appraisal 1122.

Approved for use with the James Hardie™ RAB™ Board system, ref BRANZ Appraisal 611.

Joining tape

Thermakraft Premium Joining Tape™, an acrylic, reinforced tape with superior adhesion and tear resistance used to join laps of wall and roof underlays, plywood rigid underlay, OSB board, fibre cement and insulation panels, DPM and vapour control products such as foil underlays. Maximum exposure 180 days, install from -10oC. Compatibility of the substrate with Premium Joining Tape must be checked by the designer or the installer prior to use.

BRANZ Appraised and approved for use with the James Hardie™ RAB™ Board system, refer to BRANZ Appraisal 611. Not to be used as a flashing tape.

Thermakraft White General Purpose Tape™ is a medium duty acrylic tape is commonly used on synthetic underlays, damp proof and for sealing edges of vapour control layers. Not to be used as a flashing tape. Suitable for joining and sealing underlays, foils and membranes.

Penetration seal

Thermakraft OneSeal™, multi-fit pipe seals comprise a UV resistant EPDM material which forms a weathertight air seal for pipes and penetrations with a high strength acrylic adhesive suitable for use on all underlay systems.

Available for use with pipes 15-110mm and cables 7-22mm both are pre-punched ensuring a tight accurate fit. No special tools required for installation. Approved for use with the James Hardie™ RAB™ Board system refer to BRANZ Appraisal 611.

Accessories

Thermakraft Corner Mould™, used in conjunction with Thermakraft Aluband™ and the Thermakraft Hand Tool to ensure good adhesion and a tight fit into corners. Refer to Thermakraft Data Sheet for installation details and BRANZ Appraisal 878.

Vapour barrier

Thermakraft Vapour Shield™, a woven synthetic sarking and moisture vapour barrier, coated both sides with a vapour impermeable film. One side is coated black and the reverse side white. Refer to SELECTIONS for joining tape.

3


EXECUTION


Conditions

3.1

DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING OF PRODUCTS

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to delivery, storage and handling of products.

3.2


ROUTINE MATTERS


Refer to 1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES for protection requirements.

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to defective or damaged work, removal of protection and cleaning.

3.3

PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Check work previously carried out and confirm it is of the required standard for this part of the work. Carry out remedial work identified before laying underlay. Moisture content: 20% maximum

3.4


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


Design application and installation of Thermakraft Building products to NZBC E2/AS1, BRANZ Appraisals, Thermakraft Technical Literature and Industry Codes of Practice.

Application generally

3.5


STANDARDS AND TOLERANCES


Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for general requirements.

Application DPC

3.6

DPC TO LOSP/CCA TREATED TIMBER

Lay Supercourse 500™ DPC under LOSP or CCA treated bottom plate of all timber framed walls on concrete, in a single layer with 50mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier.

3.7


DPC TO TIMBER / STEEL


Lay Supercourse 500™ under the bottom plate of all timber / steel framed walls on concrete, in a single layer with 50mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier.

Refer to SELECTIONS for type.

3.8

DPC TO MASONRY AND BRICK VENEER

Lay Supercourse 500™ along based of cavity and fix top edge to studs with galvanized clouts. Turn DPC out over concrete rebate under bottom course of veneer.

Application - wall underlay

3.9


WALL UNDERLAY


Fix horizontally to outside face of framing in true alignment, with succeeding sheets overlapping 150mm to NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.7, Wall underlay, and refer to Thermakraft for requirement for fastenings. Fix to Thermakraft Technical Data specifications. Scribe neatly around penetrations and openings to leave no gaps. Flash all openings and tape all penetrations in accordance with Thermakraft Installation Guides. Keep clean, undamaged and without visible weather deterioration until closed in.

3.10

INSTALL STUD STRAPS

Over underlay, install stud straps horizontally at 300mm centres, draw taut and fix to studs with stainless steel staples.

Application - roof underlay

3.11

ROOF UNDERLAY

Lay vertically over purlins on wire netting with a 150mm side lap. Fix securely to purlins with galvanized fixings. Lay underlay to avoid excessive dishing between purlins. When used vertically, limit individual runs to 10 metres for bituminous underlays. Do not lay vertically on roof pitches under 10° without support.

Horizontally lay across the rafter/trusses starting at the gutter line with succeeding sheets in true alignment and lapping 150mm. Scribe around and fit neatly to all penetrations and avoid prolonged exposure by installing the roof immediately.

Application - Vapour barrier

3.12

VAPOUR SHIELD™ VAPOUR BARRIER LAYER

Lay Thermakraft Vapour Shield™ either side up in a continuous manner with 150mm minimum laps fully taped and sealed. Pull taut before fixing. Fix with 8-12mm stainless steel staples or 20mm flat head galvanized clouts at 300mm centres to timber framing. Fix to steel framing to NZMRM CoPrequirements. Where battens are nailed through the membrane, cover pre-nail battens with sealant. Seal projections and penetrations with sealant or Thermakraft joining tape.

Completion

3.13

COMPLETION MATTERS

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for completion requirements and if required commissioning requirements.

4

SELECTIONS

For further details on selections go to www.thermakraft.co.nz.

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Damp Proof Course

4.1

THERMAKRAFT SUPERCOURSE 500™ DPC

Location:         External bottom plate

Type:          Supercourse 500™

Joining tape: Thermakraft Thermaflash™ flashing tape

Wall underlays - synthetic, fire-retardant, air barriers

4.2

THERMAKRAFT WATERGATE PLUS™ WALL UNDERLAY

Location:        Exterior walls over JH RAB (If used)

Type:           Thermakraft Watergate Plus™

Roll width:

Joining tape:    Thermakraft White General Purpose Tape

Flashing tape: Thermakraft Thermaflash™ joinery and flashing tape

Accessories:    Thermakraft Oneseal™ penetration seal

Roof underlays - synthetic, fire-retardant, self-supporting

4.3

THERMAKRAFT COVERTEK 407™ ROOF UNDERLAY

Location:        Entrance Canopy

Type:          Covertek 407™

Joining tape:    Thermakraft White General Purpose Tape

Flashing tape:   Thermakraft Thermaflash™ joinery and flashing tape

Accessories:

Window and joinery flashing tape

4.4

THERMAKRAFT THERMAFLASH™ FLASHING TAPE

Location:       Window and door opeings

Sill/head tape: 150mm Thermakraft Thermaflash™ (for 90mm framing)

200mm Thermakraft Thermaflash™ (for 140mm or

150mm framing)

Sill second layer: 75mm Thermakraft Thermaflash™ (on top of sill over first layer)

Sill corners:     Thermakraft Thermaflash™

Head corners: 75mm Thermakraft Thermaflash™ butterfly corners

Accessories:    Thermakraft Corner Mould™

Joining tape

4.5

THERMAKRAFT PREMIUM JOINING TAPE™

Location:

Joining tape: 75mm Thermakraft Premium Joining Tape™

4.6

THERMAKRAFT WHITE GENERAL PURPOSE TAPE™

Location:

Joining tape: 60mm Thermakraft White General Purpose Tape™

Penetration seals

4.7

THERMAKRAFT ONESEAL™ PENETRATION SEAL

Location:         penetrations: cable and pipe (If required)

Type:          Thermakraft OneSeal™

Vapour barriers

4.8

THERMAKRAFT VAPOUR SHIELD™ VAPOUR BARRIER

Location:

Type:           Thermakraft Vapour Shield™

Joining tape:

4171HR JAMES HARDIE® RIGID AIR BARRIERS

1

GENERAL

This section relates to the supply and fixing of James Hardie® rigid air barrier products;

• RAB™ Board - 6mm and 9mm

1.1

RELATED WORK

Refer to 4231HA JAMES HARDIE® AXON™ PANEL CLADDING for Hardie™

Axon Panel cladding

Refer to 4239JH JAMES HARDIE® SOFFITS for soffit lining

1.2

ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

FRR            Fire resistance rating

SED            Specific engineering design

Documents

1.3

DOCUMENTS

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

NZBC C/AS2    Protection from fire

NZBC E2/AS1   External moisture

AS/NZS         Structural design actions - Wind actions

1170.2:2011

AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheet

NZS 3602       Timber and wood-based products for use in building

NZS 3604      Timber-framed buildings

1.4

MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Board Installation Manual by Jame Hardie®

Bracing Design Manual by James Hardie®

Fire and Acoustic Design Manual by James Hardie®

CodeMark™ Certificate GM-CM30130 RevA HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding an

RAB™ Board by James Hardie®

BRANZ Appraisal 611 - James Hardie® HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Board

BRANZ Appraisal 775 - 3M All Weather Flashing Tape 8067

BRANZ Appraisal 846 - SUPER-STICK Flexible Flashing Tape

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company:      James Hardie New Zealand Limited

Web:           www.jameshardie.co.nz

Email:          info@jameshardie.co.nz

Telephone:     Ask James Hardie™ on 0800 808 868.

Warranties

1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                                 4171HR JAMES HARDIE® RIGID AIR BARRIERS Page 87

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:

15 years:      For HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Boar

(refer to James Hardie® product warranty)

15 years:        For accessories supplied by James Hardie® (refer to

James Hardie® product warranty)

From:           Date of purchase

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

Workers / Installers / applicators to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and techniques specified.

To James Hardie® requirements for safe working practices with James Hardie® products, particularly with regards to cutting and drilling.

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products.

Performance - Wind

The design wind pressures are to NZS 3604, up to and including Very High Wind Zone. This is within the scope of the manufacturer’s literature and details.

Performance - Acoustic

Refer to James Hardie Acoustic Systems for details.

Materials

Hardie™ RAB™ Board, 6mm or 9mm thick, manufactured from treate cellulose fibre, Portland cement, sand and water, cured by high pressure autoclaving manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2, face and edge sealed.

Components

Fasteners to minimum durability requirements of the NZBC. Refer to NZS 3604, section 4 Durability, for requirements for fixing's material to be used in relation to the exposure conditions.

Refer to NZBC E2/AS1, Table 20, Material selection, and NZBC E2/AS1, Table 21, Compatibility of materials in contact, for selection of suitable fixing materials and their compatibility with other materials.

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                                 4171HR JAMES HARDIE® RIGID AIR BARRIERS Page 88

Zone

Fixings Material

Zone D, Zone E

Grade 316 Stainless

Zone B, Zone C

Hot-dipped galvanized or Grade 316 Stainless

Hot-dip galvanized nails to James Hardie® requirements. Refer to SELECTIONS.

316 Stainless Steel nails to James Hardie® requirements. Refer to SELECTIONS.

RAB™ uPVC Horizontal Flashing for horizontal joints.

Accessories

SUPER-STICK Building Tape® (75mm wide) or 3M™ All Weather Flashing Tape 8067 (75 mm wide) or Thermakraft™ Premium Jointing Tape.

SUPER-STICK Building Tape® or 3M™ All Weather Flashing Tape 8067 or Thermaflash Flashing Tape.

Conditions

Take delivery of products dry and undamaged on pallets, and keep on pallet. Protect edges and corners from damage and covered to keep dry until fixed.

Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces. Do not drag sheets across each other, or across other materials. Protect edges, corner and surface finish from damage.

Check work previously carried out and confirm it is of the required standard for this part of the work.

Provide framing plumb, level, in true alignment and in accordance with NZS 3604 or SED requirements. Stud and nog spacing must not exceed James Hardie® requirements. Moisture content of timber framing must not exceed the requirements specified by NZS 3602 to minimise shrinkage and movement after sheets are fixed.

Application - generally

Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames and other penetrations through the cladding. Required preparatory work includes the following:

Cut edges where exposed (not covered by uPVC flashing, flashing or sealing tape) must be primed prior to installation. Refer to SELECTIONS for primer.

Install Rigid Air Barriers

Refer to the HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Board Installation Manua by James Hardie® for sheet layouts to suit general installations.

Join sheets to the HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Board Installatio Manual by James Hardie®.

Join sheets to the HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Board Installatio Manual by James Hardie®.

Form in accordance with the HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Boar Installation Manual by James Hardie®, using a 75mm minimum wide sealing tape.

Fix in accordance with the HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Boar Installation Manual by James Hardie® with the sealed face towards the external cladding and unsealed face towards the framing. Fix sheets to suit installation requirements for general fixing, bracing and fire rating requirements. Refer to SELECTIONS for fixing type. Use hand-driven nailing for fixing bracing sheets.

Form in accordance with the HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Boar Installation Manual by James Hardie®.

Form in accordance with the HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Boar Installation Manual by James Hardie®. Exposed timber framing around window, door, meter box and other penetrations must be covered with a 150mm wide minimum flashing tape or sealing tape. Flashing tapes must be lapped over the HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding or RAB™ Board by 50mm minimum.

3.14

3.15

3.16

3.17

3.18

3.19

3.20

4

4.1

FLASHINGS AND JUNCTIONS

Form in accordance with the HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Boar Installation Manual by James Hardie®. Install flashing tape over any flashings and at all junctions with other materials or building elements.

AT SOFFITS

Form in accordance with the HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Boar Installation Manual by James Hardie®.

BASE CLEARANCES

Form in accordance with the HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding and RAB™ Boar Installation Manual by James Hardie®. Lining is required to extend below the bottom plate / floor joist by 15mm minimum to form a drip edge and must finish a minimum 100mm clear of finished ground. Where base of sheets are cut to suit site requirements seal the bottom edge with primer.

Completion

ROUTINE CLEANING

Carry out routine trade cleaning of this part of the work including periodic removal of all debris, unused and temporary materials and elements from the site.

REPLACE

Replace all damaged or marked elements.

LEAVE

Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

REMOVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

SELECTIONS

For further details on selections go to www.jameshardie.co.nz Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

RAB™ BOARD - RIGID AIR BARRIER 6MM

Brand/type:     Hardie™ RAB™ Boar

Sheet length:

Sheet thickness: 6mm

Nails:           40 x 2.8mm hot dipped galvanized Hardie™ Flex

nails

Primer:         Resene Quick Dry to exposed cut edges

4221KH KLC HORIZONTAL WEATHERBOARD CLADDING SYSTEM

1 GENERAL

This section relates to the supply and fixing of KLC Limited horizontal cladding system on timber framed buildings to NZS 3604.

It includes the KLC Generation 2 H3.2;

Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC for underlays, foils and DPC.

Refer to 6711R for RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR

Refer to timber framing section for wall framing.

Refer to painting sections for on-site finishes to weatherboard cladding.

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

D4S FSC® COC

Dressed four sides

Forest Stewardship Council®

Chain of Custody

Documents

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work:

KLC "Generation 2" H3.2 Exterior Cladding systems brochure

Data Sheet: KLC Generation 2 Micropro® (MCA) Fascia and other externally applied wood products

CodeMark CM70062 (7th Feb. 2020) KLC "Generation 2" H3.2 Exterior

Cladding Systems

FSC Certificate No. FSC-C010457, COC Code SCS-COC-000824 - expires 26

April 2021.

GreenTag™ Level A Cert KOP-001-V1-2018 MicroPro® Wood Treatment

Technology

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company:

KLC Limited

Web:

www.klc.co.nz

Email:

info@klc.co.nz

Telephone:

(07) 366 9900

1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:

50 years

2 months

MicroPro® treatment warranty

Factory applied, dual coating primer system (provided that the primed substrate is top coated with an undercoat and two (2) coats of a premium 100% acrylic topcoat at a spread rate of 12m² to 14m² per litre per coat within 4 weeks of installation)

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Installers to be experienced, competent tradespeople familiar with the materials and techniques specified.

All work to be installed by a Licensed Building Practitioner (LBP), or supervised by an LBP.

Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified KLC Generation 2 H3.2 systems, components and associated products listed in this section.

Performance

Design and use the fixings appropriate for the wind zone (R) and topographical classification (T) of this site and building height; as required by NZS 3604.

Refer to KLC Limited fixing details and technical specifications for KLC Generation 2 system.

Accept responsibility for the weather-tight performance of the completed cladding system, including all penetrations. To NZBC B2/AS1 Durability and NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture.

Materials

New Zealand Radiata pine, grade FSC, KLC Generation 2 H3.2 weatherboards, with a H3.2 MicroPro® treatment as detailed. Glued laminated structural timber to AS/NZS1328. The timber blocks are finger jointed together with Henkel's Loctite Purbond adhesive system to a range of lengths. Radiata pine is supplied from New Zealand forest sources, certified legal and responsibly sourced by third party verified FSC certification systems. Refer to KLC Limited for details.

To KLC Generation 2 H3.2 factory pre-primed profiles as detailed, with species and grading to comply with NZS 3602. To NZS 3602, table 2, reference 2A.3, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 15-year durability performance.

To KLC Generation 2 H3.2 factory pre-primed profiles, with species and grading to comply with NZS 3602. To NZS 3602, table 2, reference 2A.3, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 15-year durability performance.

For flexible wall underlays, rigid wall underlays and rigid air barriers, refer to the appropriate separate section(s).

To NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0 Flashings. Material, grade and colour as detailed and scheduled and to NZBC E2/AS1; Table 21: Compatibility of materials in contact and Table 22: Compatibility of materials subject to run-off. Ensure that materials used for flashings are compatible with the window frame materials and fixings and cladding materials and fixings.

Fixings

Jolt head hot-dip galvanized steel fixings to AS/NZS 4680 and to NZBC E2/AS1 Table 24. Refer to KLC Generation 2 H3.2 construction details for fixing details and to SELECTIONS for fixing sizes.

NOTE: Select appropriate nail size / length to achieve a minimum of 35mm embedment into the framing.

Finishes

KLC Generation 2 H3.2 weatherboard and fascia and finishing products are pre-primed with a two coat primer system consisting of 2 coats of PPG 839 Enduraprime exterior oil based alkyd wood primer, colour KLC Green

Site application of acrylic undercoat and two top-coats of 100% acrylic low gloss paint to manufacturer's specifications to KLC Data Sheet: KLC Generation 2 Micropro® (MCA) Treated Finger Jointed Radiata Weatherboards, Fascia and other externally applied wood products.

Refer to SELECTIONS.

Conditions

Execution to NZBC E2/AS1: 3.0 Weathertightness risk factors, and 9.0 Wall claddings, 9.1.8 Drained cavities and 9.4 Timber weatherboards. To KLC Data Sheet: KLC Generation 2 Micropro® (MCA) Fascia and other externally applied wood products.

Take delivery of KLC Generation 2 timber products, dry, unmarked and undamaged from freight and handling (Grade characteristics excluded). Stack KLC Generation 2 weatherboards flat and true, clear of the ground by a minimum of 150mm and supported on dry, clean timber bearers at maximum 900mm centres. Keep weatherboards dry at all times, either by storing within an enclosed building, or when stored externally place on a protective ground covering and an additional secondary protective cover on the plastic wrapping. Care must be taken to avoid damage to weatherboard edges and surfaces.

Before starting fixing ensure that the substrate conforms to NZS 3604, section 2, table 2.1, Timber framing tolerances and the requirements of NZS 3604, section 6, Foundation and subfloor framing and NZBC E2/AS1, 9.4 Timber weatherboards governing support for timber board cladding.

Do not start fixing until 90% of the values obtained are within the range in NZS 3602 table 4, Allowable moisture content (%) at time of installation or in the case of framing timber at time of enclosure .

Do not install if the moisture content for the KLC product is above 15%. Immediately before starting fixing, test the moisture content of the boards. Use an electrical moisture meter to test 5% of boards, but not less than 10 boards in the centre of the length.

Application - preparation/general

Weatherboards are dual coated pre-primed before delivery. Prime and coat any exposed bare timber faces and edges two coats of premium alkyd oil-based primer to coating manufacturers specifications. Once dry, place boards in fillet stack, laid flat and true, until fixed. Keep dry and undamaged. Allow to re-coat, pre-prime if exposed for more than 4 weeks before the final coating is applied.

Note: Prime immediately any exposed bare timber or damaged pre-prime with a premium exterior alkyd primer on site. Ensure the painter pre-paints board overlaps with one coat of top coat (colour) to KLC recommendations.

Using laser or mechanical devices set-out the overlap boards to ensure dimension to exposed face in line of weather is constant and that boards remain horizontal. Use a string line to set out all nailing that will be visible in the finished work. Align all nailing accurately in straight lines.

Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames and other penetrations through the cladding. Required preparatory work includes the following:

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                 4221KH KLC HORIZONTAL WEATHERBOARD CLADDING SYSTEM Page 95

3.9

3.10

3.11

3.12

3.13

3.14

3.15

3.16

3.17

4

4.1

TIMBER FRAMING SUBSTRATE

Timber framing is to be in accordance with NZS 3604. Studs at max 600mm centres, Nogs at max 800mm centres if installing horizontal weatherboards.

Fix cladding over a water proof, breathable building wrap, rigid air barrier or other suitable waterproof substrate in conformance with NZBC E2/AS1.

Note: In Sea Spray and Geothermal Zones nails must be stainless steel.

Application - ancillary

WINDOW FIXING

Fix to KLC Limited fixing details and technical specifications.

INSTALL FLASHINGS

Install flashings, covers and soakers as detailed on the drawings and to NZBC E2/AS1. Material compatibility to NZBC E2/AS1, table 21, Compatibility of materials in contact and table 22, Compatibility of materials in run-off.

CORNER AND JOINT SOAKERS

Fix to KLC fixing details and technical specifications.

SCRIBERS

Scribers are to be wet sealed in place and fixed in accordance with KLC fixing details and technical specification.

COMPLETE

Ensure the work is complete with all flashings, finishing and trim properly installed so the cladding system is completely weathertight.

Completion

REPLACE

Replace all damaged or marked elements.

LEAVE

Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

REMOVE

Remove all debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

SELECTIONS

For further details on selections go to www.klc.co.nz.

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Components

KLC GENERATION 2 H3.2 MOULDINGS (D4S) AND SCRIBERS

Species:        KLC Radiata pine

Grade:          Select cuttings grades

Mouldings (D4S):

40mm x 18mm D4S, 65mm x18mm D4S, 90mm x 18mm D4S, 115mm x 18mm D4S, 135mm x 18mm D4S, 180mm x 18mm D4S

Box Corners:

85mm x 18mm (int. & ext.), 98mm x 18mm (int. & ext.)

Scriber:

40mm x 18mm

Surface finish:

Box corners: Dressed Face Sanded (DFS) and pre-primed

Mouldings: Dressed Four Sides (D4S) and pre-primed

Moisture content: ≤ 15%

4.2 KLC GENERATION 2 H3.2 FASCIA

Species:

KLC Radiata pine

Grade:

Select cuttings grades

Size:

Refer to details, confirm by site measure

Surface finish:

Dressed Face Sanded (DFS) and pre-primed

Moisture content:

≤ 15%

Fixings

4.3 NAILS

Type:

Galv steel

Size:

Select appropriate nail size / length to achieve a minimum of 35mm embedment into the framing.

4231HA JAMES HARDIE® AXON™ PANEL CLADDING

1

GENERAL

This section relates to the supply and fixing of James Hardie® Axon™ Panel cladding.

1.1

RELATED WORK

Refer to 4239JH JAMES HARDIE® SOFFITS for soffit lining

Refer to painting section/s for the protective coating required to meet the NZBC durability requirements.

1.2

ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

LRV: Light Reflectance Value

CLD: Ceramic Low Density

Documents

1.3

DOCUMENTS

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

NZBC E2/AS1   External Moisture

AS/NZS         Structural design actions - Wind actions

1170.2:2011

AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products-Flat sheet

NZS 3602       Timber and wood-based products for use in building

NZS 3604      Timber-framed buildings

1.4

MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

James Hardie® documents relating to this part of the work:

Axon™ Panel technical specification

HardieFlex™ Sheet technical specification

James Hardie® Fire and Acoustic Design Manual

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company:      James Hardie New Zealand Limited

Web:           www.jameshardie.co.nz

Email:          info@jameshardie.co.nz

Telephone:     Ask James Hardie™ on 0800 808 868.

Warranties

1.5

WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:

15 years:       For James Hardie® Axon™ Panels

(refer to James Hardie® product warranty)

15 year:         For accessories supplied by James Hardie® (refer to

James Hardie® product warranty)

From:           Date of purchase

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products.

To James Hardie® requirements for safe working practices with James Hardie® products, particularly with regards to cutting and drilling.

Provide relevant James Hardie® maintenance requirements at completion of the work.

Performance

The design wind speeds/zones are to NZS 3604, up to and including Extra High Wind Zone. James Hardie® Technical Specifications are suitable for these conditions.

Materials

Refer to section 4171HR JAMES HARDIE® RIGID AIR BARRIERS.

Radiata pine battens, minimum 45mm wide x 18mm thick, H3.1 treated, height to match timber framing studs. To NZS 3602, Table 1, reference 1D.10, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 50-year durability performance.

Perforated uPVC, with upstands.

James Hardie® Axon™ Panel, a face primed shiplap jointed panel, 9.0mm thick, manufactured from cellulose fibre reinforced cement to AS/NZS 2908.2.

Components

Fasteners to minimum durability requirements of the NZBC. Refer to NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, for requirements for fixing's material to be used in relation to the exposure conditions.

Refer to NZBC E2/AS1, Table 20, Material selection for fixing material, and NZBC E2/AS1, Table 21, Compatibility of materials in contact, for selection of suitable fixing materials and their compatibility with other materials.

Zone

Fixings Material

Zone D, Zone E / Microclimates (incl. Geothermal)

Grade 316 Stainless

Zone B, Zone C

Hot-dipped galvanized

Bracing - All zones

Grade 316 Stainless

Check against SED (specific engineering design) requirements for microclimate conditions.

Refer to SELECTIONS.

Accessories

Inseal® 3259 black compressible medium density closed cell foam tape, 1.5mm thick x 50mm wide for vertical joints, and 1.5mm thick x 80mm wide for internal corners.

Polypropylene or polyethylene DPC under CLD™ Structural Cavity Batten internal corners.

Refer to James Hardie® Axon™ Panel technical specification for selection of required width.

Extruded aluminium etch primed. External box corners and horizontal 'h' flashing suitable for dark paints.

Extruded uPVC. Alternative accessories only suitable for light paints.

Flexible sealant. Refer to the sealant manufacturer's technical literature to confirm suitability for the application.

Conditions

Take delivery of products dry and undamaged on pallets, and keep on pallet. Protect edges and corners from damage and covered to keep dry until fixed.

Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging shiplap edges and surfaces. Do not drag panels across each other, or across other materials.

Protect edges, corner and surface finish from damage.

Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required for the specified finish; plumb, level and in true alignment. Moisture content of timber framing must not exceed the requirements specified by NZS 3602 to minimise shrinkage and movement after panels are fixed.

Confirm that 70mm framing for vertical joints for timber cavity construction has been correctly installed.

Seal site cut sheet edges prior to installation. Seal panel edges around window and door openings, meter boxes and at other penetrations.

Application - generally

Refer to 4171HR JAMES HARDIE® RIGID AIR BARRIERS.

Install 18mm minimum thick cavity battens to NZBC E2/AS1: 9.0 Wall claddings, where required. Fix vertical cavity battens to wall framing studs. The battens are fixed by the cladding fixings which will penetrate the wall framing studs over the wall underlay. Seal the top of the cavity and install cavity closer/vermin-proofing at base of walls, open horizontal (or raking) junctions, over openings (windows, meters etc).

Do not use continuous horizontal cavity battens at nogs or at bottom plate. Use cavity spacers where fixing is required between cavity battens.

Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames and other penetrations through the cladding. Required preparatory work includes the following:

Install Axon™ Panel cladding

All panel edges must be supported by the framing. Fix Axon™ Panels vertically.

Joint Axon™ Panels to James Hardie® technical specification.

Provide a horizontal joint at floor joist levels to accommodate the movement resulting from timber joist shrinkage and settlement. Install a 'z' flashing where drainage is required at floor level.

For Axon™ Panels use a James Hardie® aluminium 'h' mould complete with 'h' mould jointer, external corner jointer or a purpose made 'z' flashing to form a horizontal joint.

For direct fix and timber cavity battens, install 50mm x 50mm James Hardie corner underflashing or 80mm wide 3259 Inseal® tape over continuous wall underlay to internal corner. For CLD™ Structural Cavity Battens there is no requirement for underflashing or Inseal® tape. Install Axon™ Panels fixing to corner framing and leaving a 6mm minimum gap between sheets at corner. Fix 18mm minimum from square edge of sheet. Apply approved and compatible sealant to gap to manufacturers specifications. Ensure site cut Axon™ Panel edges are sealed before fixing and sealant is applied. Refer to Axon™ Panel technical specification.

For direct fix, install aluminium external box corner over continuous wall underlay to external corner. For cavity construction, with timber battens or CLD™ Structural Cavity Battens, install aluminium external box corner over battens. Install Axon™ Panels fixing to corner framing 40mm minimum from corner. Ensure site cut Axon™ Panel edges are sealed before fixing. Refer to Axon™ Panel technical specification.

Fit aluminium horizontal 'h' mould over lower Axon™ Panel and lap the upstand under upper Axon™ Panel. Leave 15mm gap maximum between upper and lower Axon™ Panels at the solid timber floor joist levels.

Fit James Hardie® aluminium external box corner under the aluminium 'h' mould with flanges removed locally. Mitre the 'h' mould over box corner flashing to cover it. Install "h" mould external corner jointer over. The upper box corner flashings are to be finished flush with the bottom edge of upper Axon™ Panel.

A uPVC corner underflashing is required under the aluminium box corner where the box corner is terminated under the 'h' mould. James Hardie aluminium external box corner flanges to be removed locally over the aluminium 'h' mould and corner underflashing to be lapped under the upper box corner flashing. Lap wall underlay over aluminium 'h' mould or seal to flashing with a flashing tape. Refer to Axon™ Panel technical specification.

Fix Axon™ Panels to framing using the fixings specified in James Hardie® Axon™ Panel technical specification, Table 4 Panel fixing, and in accordance with the following requirements:

Fix with 40mm x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ nails. Fix sheet at 200mm centres at all sheet edges as well as all intermediate framing. Alternatively fix with ND50 brad nails at 150mm centres.

Fix with 60mm x 3.15mm HardieFlex™ nails. Fix sheet at 200mm centres at all studs and at 150mm centres at top plate and bottom plate.

Axon™ Panels can be fixed using nail guns. The gun nails used must have a full round head to provide the required holding power. The length and gauge of nails must at a minimum be as specified in the James Hardie® Axon™ Panel technical specification.

3.18

SEALANTS

Apply and use of sealants to manufacturer's instructions. Check with sealant manufacturer prior to coating over sealants.

3.19

PAINTING

Refer to painting section/s for protective coating system.

Completion

3.20

REPLACE

Replace all damaged or marked elements.

3.21

LEAVE

Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

3.22

REMOVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

4

SELECTIONS

For further details on selections go to www.jameshardie.co.nz.

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

4.1

TIMBER CAVITY BATTENS

Timber species: Radiata pine

Treatment:      H3.1

4.2

JAMES HARDIE® AXON™ PANELS - SHEET CLADDING PANELS

Brand/type:     James Hardie® Axon™ Panels

Thickness:      9mm

Fastener type: 75mm x 3.15mm HardieFlex™ nail over rigid air barrier

Fastener finish: Hot-dipped galvanized

Finishing

4.3

PAINTING

Refer to painting section/s for details.

4231HE JAMES HARDIE® EASYLAP™ PANEL CLADDING

1

GENERAL

This section relates to the supply and fixing of James Hardie® EasyLap™ Panel cladding.

1.1

RELATED WORK

Refer to 3821 for Timber framing

Refer to 4239JH for JAMES HARDIE® SOFFITS

Refer to 6711R for RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR

Refer to painting section/s for the protective coating required to meet the NZBC durability requirements.

1.2

ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

LRV            Light Reflectance Value

CLD           Ceramic Low Density

Documents

1.3

DOCUMENTS

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

NZBC E2/AS1   External Moisture

AS/NZS         Structural design actions - Wind actions

1170.2:2011

AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products-Flat sheet

NZS 3602       Timber and wood-based products for use in building

NZS 3604      Timber-framed buildings

1.4

MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS

James Hardie documents relating to this part of the work:

EasyLap™ Panel technical specification

HardieFlex™ Sheet technical specification

James Hardie Fire and Acoustic Design Manual

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company:      James Hardie New Zealand Limited

Web:           www.jameshardie.co.nz

Email:          info@jameshardie.co.nz

Telephone:     Ask James Hardie™ on 0800 808 868

Warranties

1.5

WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:

15 years:       For James Hardie EasyLap™ Panel cladding

(refer to James Hardie product warranty)

15 years:        For accessories supplied by James Hardie (refer to

James Hardie product warranty)

From:           Date of purchase

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products.

To James Hardie® requirements for safe working practices with James Hardie® products, particularly with regards to cutting and drilling.

Provide relevant James Hardie maintenance requirements at completion of the work.

Performance

The design wind pressures are to NZS 3604, up to and including Extra High Wind Zone. James Hardie Technical Specifications are suitable for these conditions.

Materials

Refer to section 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS.

Refer to section 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC.

James Hardie CLD™ Structural Cavity Batten, 2450mm long, 70mm wide and 19mm thick manufactured from treated cellulose fibre, Portland cement, sand and water. Cured by high pressure autoclaving and manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2. James Hardie EasyLap™ Panel and CLD™ Structural Cavity Batte installed as per the James Hardie technical specification demonstrate compliance with requirements of NZBC Sections B1, B2 and E2. The battens have both faces and all edges presealed.

Perforated uPVC, with upstands.

James Hardie EasyLap™ Panel, a face primed shiplap vertical jointed panel, 9.0mm thick, manufactured from cellulose fibre reinforced cement to AS/NZS 2908.2.

Components

2.6


FASTENER TYPE

Fasteners to minimum durability requirements of the NZBC. Refer to NZS 3604, section 4, Durability, for requirements for fixing's material to be used in relation to the exposure conditions.

Refer to NZBC E2/AS1, Table 20, Material selection for fixing material, and NZBC E2/AS1, Table 21, Compatibility of materials in contact, for selection of suitable fixing materials and their compatibility with other materials.


Zone

Fixings Material

Zone D, Zone E / Microclimates (incl. Geothermal)

Grade 316 Stainless

Zone B, Zone C

Hot-dipped galvanized

Bracing - All zones

Grade 316 Stainless

Check against SED (specific engineering design) requirements for microclimate conditions.


2.7


2.8


2.9


2.10


2.11


2.12


3


3.1


NAIL CLD™ STRUCTURAL CAVITY BATTEN FIXING - TIMBER FRAME

Hot-dip galvanized 65mm x 2.8mm RounDrive ring shank nail for fixing to timber framing.

NAIL / SCREW EASYLAP PANEL FIXING TO CLD™ STRUCTURAL CAVITY BATTEN

EasyLap™ Panel fixing to CLD™ Structural Cavity Batten, as follows

For wind pressure up to 1.5kPa:

  • •    stainless steel C-25 'T' Head brad nail.

For wind pressure up to 2.5kPa:

  • •    25mm x 2.5mm annular threaded fibre cement nail or

  • •    25mm x 8-10g countersunk screw (class 3/4 or stainless steel).

Accessories

FLASHING TAPES

Polypropylene or polyethylene DPC under CLD™ Structural Cavity Batten internal corners.

Refer to James Hardie EasyLap™ Panel technical specification for selection of required width.

ALUMINIUM ACCESSORIES

Extruded aluminium etch primed. External box corners and horizontal 'h' flashing suitable for dark paints.

ADHESIVE FOR CLD™ STRUCTURAL CAVITY BATTEN

Adhesive to be applied continuous 6mm thick bead(s) to the face of CLD™ Structural Cavity Batten to adhere the EasyLap™ Panel.

SEALANT

Flexible sealant. Refer to the sealant manufacturer's technical literature to confirm suitability for the application.

EXECUTION

Conditions

STORAGE


Take delivery of products dry and undamaged on pallets, and keep on pallet. Protect edges and corners from damage and covered to keep dry until fixed.

Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging shiplap edges and surfaces. Do not drag panels across each other, or across other materials.

Protect edges, corner and surface finish from damage.

Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required for the specified finish; plumb, level and in true alignment. Moisture content of timber framing must not exceed the requirements specified by NZS 3602 to minimise shrinkage and movement after panels are fixed.

Seal site cut sheet edges prior to installation. Seal panel edges around window and door openings, meter boxes and at other penetrations.

Site cut batten ends to be between 20 - 45 degrees and sealed with Dulux AcraPrime 501/1 or Resene Quick Dry sealer prior to installation with the butt joint deflecting moisture to the exterior.

Application - generally

Refer to 4171HR JAMES HARDIE RIGID AIR BARRIERS.

Refer to 4161 UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC.

Fix battens to all studs over the wall underlay or rigid air barrier using 65mm x 2.8mm RounDrive ring shank nails at fixing centres as per James Hardie EasyLap™ Panel and CLD™ Structural Cavity Batten technical specification Table 1: Batten Fixing. Refer to Table 1 notes for durability requirements of fixings.

Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames and other penetrations through the cladding. Required preparatory work includes the following:

Install EasyLap™ Panel cladding

All panel edges must be supported by the framing. Fix EasyLap™ Panels vertically.

Joint EasyLap™ Panels to James Hardie technical specification.

Provide a horizontal joint at floor joist levels to accommodate the movement resulting from timber joist shrinkage and settlement. Install a 'z' flashing where drainage is required at floor level.

For EasyLap™ Panels use a James Hardie aluminium 'h' mould complete with 'h' mould jointer/external corner joint or a purpose made 'z' flashing to form a horizontal joint.

Install EasyLap™ Panels fixing to corner framing and leaving a 6-10mm gap between sheets at corner. Fix 18mm minimum from square edge of sheet. Apply approved and compatible sealant to gap to manufacturers specifications. Ensure site cut EasyLap™ Panel edges are sealed before fixing and sealant is applied. Refer to EasyLap™ Panel technical specification.

Install aluminium external box corner over battens. Install EasyLap™ Panels fixing to corner framing 40mm minimum from corner. Ensure site cut EasyLap™ Panel edges are sealed before fixing. Refer to EasyLap™ Pane technical specification.

Fit aluminium horizontal 'h' mould over lower EasyLap™ Panel and lap the upstand under upper EasyLap™ Panel. Leave 15mm gap maximum between upper and lower EasyLap™ Panels at the solid timber floor joist levels.

Fit James Hardie aluminium external box corner under the aluminium 'h' mould with flanges removed locally. Mitre the 'h' mould over box corner flashing to cover it. Install 'h' mould external external corner jointer over. The upper box corner flashings are to be finished flush with the bottom edge of upper EasyLap™ Panel.

An uPVC corner under flashing is required under the aluminium box corner where the box corner is terminated under the 'h' mould. James Hardie aluminium external box corner flanges to be removed locally over the aluminium 'h' mould and corner under flashing to be lapped under the upper box corner flashing. Lap wall underlay over aluminium 'h' mould or seal to flashing with a flashing tape. Refer to EasyLap™ Panel technical specification.

Fix EasyLap™ Panels to framing using the fixings specified in James Hardie EasyLap™ Panel technical specification, Table 3 Panel fixing, and in accordance with the following requirements:

Apply continuous 6mm thick bead(s) of adhesive to the face of CLD™ Structural Cavity Batten to adhere the EasyLap™ Panel, and fix with C-25 brad nails at 150mm centres. Refer to EasyLap™ Panel technical specification.

SEALANTS

Apply and use of sealants to manufacturer's instructions. Check with sealant manufacturer prior to coating over sealants.

FINISHING

Refer to painting section/s for protective coating system. EasyLap™ Panel suitable for paint, rolled on texture or trowelled on texture finishes.

Completion

REPLACE

Replace all damaged or marked elements.

LEAVE

Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

REMOVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

SELECTIONS

For further details on selections go to www.jameshardie.co.nz.

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

JAMES HARDIE EASYLAP™ PANELS - SHEET CLADDING PANELS

Brand/type:     James Hardie EasyLap™ Panels

Thickness:      9mm

Fastener type:   5mm x 2.5mm annular threaded fibre cement nail

Fastener finish:  316 Stainless Steel

Finishing

PAINTING

Refer to painting section/s for details.

4239JH JAMES HARDIE® SOFFITS

1 GENERAL

This section relates to the supply and fixing of James Hardie® products to the underside of exterior soffits, verges and eaves. It includes:

Refer to 3821 for TIMBER FRAMING

Refer to 6711R for RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR

Refer to painting section/s for the protective coating required to meet the NZBC durability requirements.

Documents

1.2 DOCUMENTS

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

NZBC E2/AS1

AS/NZS 1170.2:2011

AS/NZS 2908.2

NZS 3602

NZS 3604 NASH Standard Part 2

External moisture

Structural design actions - Wind actions

Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheet

Timber and wood-based products for use in building

Timber-framed buildings

May 2019 Light Steel Framed Buildings

James Hardie® documents relating to this part of the work: Eaves and Soffits Installation Manual by James Hardie® Fire and Acoustic Design Manual by James Hardie®

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company:

James Hardie New Zealand Limited

Web:

www.jameshardie.co.nz

Email:

info@jameshardie.co.nz

Telephone:

0800 808 868

Warranties

1.5


1.6


1.7


1.8


1.9


2


2.1


2.2


Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

QUALIFICATIONS

Workers / Installers / applicators to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and techniques specified.

NO SUBSTITUTIONS

Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified systems, components and associated products listed in this section.

SAFE WORKING

To James Hardie® requirements for safe working practices with James Hardie® products, particularly with regards to cutting and drilling.

INFORMATION FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Provide relevant James Hardie maintenance requirements at completion of the work.

Performance

PERFORMANCE - UP TO AND INCLUDING VERY HIGH WIND ZONE

The design wind speeds/zones are to NZS 3604, up to and including Very High Wind Zone. Eaves and Soffits Installation Manual by James Hardie® requirements are suitable for these conditions.

PRODUCTS

Materials

VILLABOARD™ SOFFIT LINING

James Hardie® Villaboard™ Soffit Lining, 6mm and 9mm thick cellulose fibre reinforced cement sheet. Manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2 from Portland cement, ground sand, cellulose fibre and water.

Components

FASTENER TYPE

Fasteners to minimum durability requirements of the NZBC. Refer to NZBC E2/AS1, Table 20, Material selection for fixing material, and NZBC E2/AS1, Table 21, Compatibility of materials in contact, for selection of suitable fixing materials and their compatibility with other materials.


Exposure

Fixing

Fixing Material

Zone

Sheltered

Nail

Hot-dip galvanized steel

B

Sheltered

Nail

Stainless steel

B, C, D, E

Sheltered

Screw

Stainless steel

B, C, D, E

Check against SED (specific engineering design) requirements for microclimate conditions. Refer to SELECTIONS for fastener type.


2.3


Components - Villaboard™ Soffit Lining

POLYPROPYLENE TAPE


2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.9

2.10

3

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

Polypropylene tape, 30mm minimum width.

CONTROL JOINT

Refer to SELECTIONS.

HARDIE™ DRIVE SCREW

Hardie™ Drive Screw, 316 stainless steel, 30mm x 7g

VILLADRIVE SCREW

Villadrive Screw, 30mm x 6g, Class 3

FIBREZIP® SCREW

FibreZip® Screw, self drilling rib head screw, Class 3

HARDIE™ FLEX NAILS

Hardie™ Flex Nail, 40 x 2.8mm stainless steel or galvanized nail, Refer to SELECTIONS.

BASE COMPOUND

Hardie™ Base Coat for flush finishing over recessed screw heads.

Components - General

FLEXIBLE JOINT SEALANT

Refer to SELECTIONS.

EXECUTION

Conditions

STORAGE

Take delivery of products dry and undamaged. Store on site, lay flat on a smooth level surface clear of the ground. Protect materials, finished surfaces, edges and corners from damage, water and moisture.

HANDLING

Move/handle goods in accordance with James Hardie® requirements. Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces. Do not drag sheets across each other, or across other materials. Protect edges, corner and surface finish from damage. Reject and replace goods that are damaged or will not provide the required finish. Install materials in a dry state.

SUBSTRATE - TIMBER FRAMING

Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required for the specified finish; plumb, level and in true alignment. Moisture content of timber framing must not exceed the requirements specified by NZS 3602 to minimise shrinkage and movement after sheets are fixed.

COMMENCE WORK

Do not commence work until the roof has been installed.

Application - general

SHEET LAYOUT

All sheet edges must be fully supported by framing or rebates in fascia and barge boards.

Cut sheets dry using score and snap method, hand guillotine method or fibreshear heavy duty method. If these methods are not feasible, use an alternative manufacturer approved method.

Mark the centre of the hole on the sheet, pre-drill a pilot hole. Use the pilot hole as a guide for a hole saw fitted to a heavy duty electric drill.

Drill a series of small holes around the perimeter of the proposed hole, tap out the waste piece from the sheet face.

Install in accordance with James Hardie® installation manual requirements.

Refer to SELECTIONS for fixing and jointing methods.

Paint sheet edges prior to installation.

Install control joint to James Hardie® installation manual requirements.

Fix sheets to framing using fasteners as nominated in SELECTIONS. Fix to James Hardie® installation manual requirements.

Application and use of sealants to manufacturer's instructions. Check with sealant manufacturer prior to coating over sealants.

Fill over driven fasteners with Hardie™ Base Coat to the required level of finish.

Refer to painting section/s for protective coating system.

Completion

Ensure the work is complete with all components, accessories, trim, sealant and finishing properly installed so the soffit cladding system is completely weathertight.

Replace all damaged or marked elements.

Clean surfaces.

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                                           4239JH JAMES HARDIE® SOFFITS Page 113

Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

For further details on selections go to www.jameshardie.co.nz Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Materials

4.1

VILLABOARD™

SOFFIT LINING - SQUARE EDGE

Location:

New soffits

Brand/type:

James Hardie® Villaboard™ Soffit Lining

Edge:

Square edge

Thickness/size:

6

Joint:

Butt joint - with 30mm polypropylene or flashing tape, 1mm gap between sheets

Fixing method:

Screw

Fixing Type:

Stainless steel countersunk screw with cup washer

Level of Finish:

4

Painting

4.2

PAINTING

Refer to painting section/s for details.

4337 PLYWOOD ROOFING & DECKING SUBSTRATE

1 GENERAL

This section relates to the use of plywood sheets for:

Refer to 4424RL for ROOFLOGIC ULTRATHERM XTREME FIBERTITE ROOFING SYSTEM.

Documents

1.2


DOCUMENTS


Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section::

NZBC B1/AS1

NZBC E2/AS1

AS/NZS 1170.2:2011

NZS 1170.5


Structure

External moisture

Structural design actions - Wind actions


Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand

Preservative-treated wood-based products - Part 1: Products and treatment.

Plywood - Structural - Specifications

Timber-framed buildings


AS/NZS 1604.1


AS/NZS 2269.0

NZS 3604


1.3


MANUFACTURER DOCUMENTS


Manufacturer and supplier documents relating to work in this section are:

Copies of the above literature are available from

Web:

Email:

Telephone:

Performance (design by contractor)

Design the installation to the wind zone parameters of NZS 3604, table 5.1. Refer to general section 1220 PROJECT for details.

Design the system and its anchorages/fixings to resist the earthquake loads of the earthquake zone in accordance with NZS 3604, 5.3 Earthquake bracing demand.

Refer to general section 1220 PROJECT for details.

Requirements

Materials

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022

Radiata pine veneer ply to AS/NZS 2269.0, face sanded, grade as scheduled. H3 CCA treated to AS/NZS 1604.1 when used as a deck substrate. Confirm compatibility with adhesives being used with the waterproofing membrane.

F11 grade to be used as a substrate for decking membranes. F8 or F11 grades to be used for roofing.

Components

Stainless steel, counter-sunk. Refer to the plywood manufacturer's requirements for size and use.

General

17mm plywood:        No. 10 x 40mm

19 - 21mm plywood: No. 10 x 45mm

Under membranes

17 - 25mm No. 10 x 50mm (to E2/AS1, 8.5.5.1) plywood:

Single pack waterproof general purpose construction adhesive, as recommended by the manufacturer.

20mm H3.2 CCA treated triangular timber internal corner fillets, for membrane installations.

Conditions

Handle sheets carefully and reject those with damaged faces or edges.

Refer to 1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES for protection requirements.

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to defective or damaged work, removal of protection and cleaning.

Check work previously carried out and confirm it is of the required standard for specified finish. Carry out such additional preparatory work as required to bring the substrate to suitable condition.

Ensure support framing is completed to the plywood manufacturer's stated requirements for laying plywood sheets.

Application/installation

Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for general requirements.

Fully support edges and joints on square edged sheets.

Minimum 7mm, maximum 15mm from the edge, 150mm centres along edges and 200mm centres on intermediate supports.

To NZBC E2/AS1, 8.5 Membrane roofs and decks. Screw and adhesive fix sheets for membrane to the plywood and membrane manufacturers' requirements. CD grade plywood with the C face up (or better). Provide a 5mm radius chamfer to external edges where the membrane is to be wrapped over. Fix internal corner fillets.

Provide whichever is the greater falls:

Completion

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for completion requirements and if required commissioning requirements.

4424RL ROOFLOGIC ULTRATHERM XTREME FIBERTITE ROOFING SYSTEM

1 GENERAL

This section relates to the supply and fixing of RoofLogic Limited UltraTherm Xtreme FiberTite insulated roofing system to substrates comprised of Existing metal tray roofing, or plywood, complete with accessories.

System includes:

Refer to 4161 for UNDERLAYS, FOIL AND DPC for underlays, foils and DPC. Refer to 4337 for PLYWOOD ROOFING & DECKING SUBSTRATE Refer 7411D DIMOND RAINWATER SPOUTING SYSTEMS

Documents

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.

The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

NZBC C/AS1-AS2

NZBC E2/AS1

AS 1366.2

Protection from fire

External Moisture

Rigid cellular plastics sheets for thermal insulation -

Rigid cellular polyisocyanurate (RC/PIR)

AS/NZS 2269.0 ASTM C1177

Plywood - Structural - Part 0: Specifications Standard specification for glass mat gypsum substrate for use as sheathing

BS 476-4

Fire tests on building materials and structures – Non-combustibility test for materials

BS EN 13501-1

Fire classification of building products & building elements

ISO 5660.1

Reaction to fire test - heat release, smoke production & mass loss rate. Part 1: Heat release rate (cone calorimeter method) & smoke production rate (dynamic measurement)

ISO 9705

Full scale fire test

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work:

RoofLogic UltraTherm Xtreme FiberTite product literature

RoofLogic UltraTherm Xtreme Technical Data Sheets

RoofLogic UltraTherm Xtreme Material Safety Data Sheets

RoofLogic UltraTherm Xtreme FiberTite Installation Manual

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022        4424RL ROOFLOGIC ULTRATHERM XTREME FIBERTITE ROOFING SYSTEM Page 118

RoofLogic UltraTherm Xtreme FiberTite Fully Adhered Installation Manual

RoofLogic UltraTherm Xtreme FiberTite Construction Details

RoofLogic UltraTherm Roof Systems Acoustic Performance

RoofLogic Ultratherm Quality Assurance Documentation

RoofLogic Ultratherm Maintenance and Inspection Manual

Branz Appraisal FiberTite Roofing Systems 884

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company:

RoofLogic Limited

Web:

www.rooflogic.co.nz

Email:

technical@rooflogic.co.nz

Telephone:

04 475 7663

Warranties

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:

20 years For RoofLogic Limited UltraTherm Xtreme FiberTite roof system

Refer to RoofLogic Limited for warranty conditions and details. Provide a copy of RoofLogic Limited maintenance requirements with the warranty, including all relevant RoofLogic maintenance information on completion of the roofing works, in accordance with 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE.

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Provide an installer warranty:

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products.

Roofers to be experienced in the installation of RoofLogic Limited UltraTherm Xtreme FiberTite roof system and approved by RoofLogic Limited. If requested provide evidence of qualification / experience prior to commencing work.

Contact RoofLogic Limited for a current list of UltraTherm Xtreme FiberTite approved installers.

All components and detailing shall be in accordance with project specification and drawings and where not documented in accordance with RoofLogic standard drawing and technical data sheets. There shall be no deviations from approved documents without prior written approval by RoofLogic.

Where a standard detail does not exist, or if a standard detail cannot be applied, an approved alternative must be obtained from RoofLogic Limited before proceeding with the installation.

Compliance information

Provide the following compliance documentation: -

Quality Assurance

Quality assurance requirements to be as follows:

Performance - fire

The Group Number Classification to NZBC C/AS2, table 4.3, has been determined in accordance with NZBC C/VM2 Appendix A, following testing to ISO 9705 & ISO 5660.1.

System

Group Number

Ultratherm Xtreme FiberTite System

1-S

Ultratherm Xtreme FiberTite System with RL Roof Board HD Primed

1-S

Performance - thermal

RL Rigid PIR insulation (foil faced) or RL Stonewool insulation with a range of thicknesses and R-Values.

Refer to SELECTIONS for options.

Performance - acoustic

RoofLogic roof system incorporating RL Roof Board HD is tested to ISO 10140 -2 (for airborne sound transmission) and ISO 140-18 (for noise generated by artificial rainfall). Refer to RL UltraTherm Roof Systems Acoustic Performance Technical Summary for details of testing.

Refer to SELECTIONS for acoustic performance options.

Performance - testing

Carry out leak detection test using the ILD electronic leak detection method as required in 4481LD INTERNATIONAL LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM.

Accept responsibility for the weather-tight performance of the completed roofing system, including all penetrations through the roof and junctions with walls and parapets. All penetrations to comply with NZBC E2/AS1 and RoofLogic requirements.

Prior to installation:

Note: RoofLogic are available to make recommendations necessary to ensure compliance with project specifications and specification alternatives due to unforeseen job conditions.

Materials - substrates

Existing metal tray roofing used as a substrate for UltraTherm Xtreme FiberTite roof system.

Used as a substrate for UltraTherm Xtreme FiberTite roof system.

For plywood specification details refer to appropriate plywood section(s) and EXECUTION clauses.

Materials - Xtreme FiberTite roof system

RL Vapour Control Layer, a self-adhesive SBS modified vapour control layer 0.6mm thick. Comprised of a top layer of special foil with integrated web reinforcement, a coating of elastomeric bitumen, and a bottom layer of self-adhesive elastomeric bitumen and detachable foil. Installed directly over the substrate.

RL PIR Board, a polyisocyanurate rigid foam panel. Available in RL PIR (FF) faced on both sides with a multi-layered aluminium lining or RL PIR (CF) both sides with coated fiberglass facer that membrane can be directly adhered to. Complies with AS 1366.2 and tested to ISO 9705. Board supplied in thicknesses 40mm, 50mm, 60mm, 80mm, 100mm and 120mm, and a range of corresponding R-Values.

Refer to SELECTIONS for options.

RL Tapered PIR Board, a polyisocyanurate rigid foam panel. RL Tapered PIR Board (CF) comes with coated fibreglass facer to both sides that membrane can be directly adhered to. Complies with AS 1366.2 and tested to ISO 9705.

Board supplied in thicknesses 10-30mm and 30-50mm at 1° slope and 10-50mm and 50-90mm at 2° slope and a range of corresponding R-Values. Refer to SELECTIONS for options.

RL Ultratherm Xtreme FB FiberTite, a ketone ethylene ester (KEE) based membrane, fleece backed with a heat bonded 120gm/m² polyester backing and reinforced with a 140gm/m² knitted polyester fabric. Available in colours slate grey (dark grey) or energy grey (light grey) and rolls 1.82m wide x 24.40m long. Additional roll dimensions and product thicknesses available on request.

Refer to SELECTIONS for options.

RL Ultratherm Xtreme SM FiberTite, a ketone ethylene ester (KEE) based membrane, reinforced with a 140gm/m² knitted polyester fabric. Available in colours slate grey (dark grey) or energy grey (light grey), 1.88m wide x 30.48m long. Additional roll dimensions and product thicknesses available on request. Refer to SELECTIONS for options.

Components

RL Ultratherm Xtreme FiberTite Flashing Membrane, an unreinforced membrane, 1.5mm thick used for all detailing e.g. downpipe and overflow detailing, internal and external corners of gutters.

Adhesives

RL-490u, a high performance, moisture controlled solvent free urethane adhesive for use with FiberTite FB (fleece backed) membrane. RL-490u adhesive can also used for the adhesion of PIR Insulation Board and RL Roof Board HD Primed.

RL-190e, a low VOC solventborne contact adhesive, for use with FiberTite SM (non-fleece backed) membrane.

Armac 120 Fast Bond is a single component, polyurethane spray adhesive for bonding FiberTite SM (non-fleece backed) membrane to substrates.

Armac 220, Fast Bond is a single component, polyurethane spray adhesive for bonding FiberTite FB (Fleece-backed) membrane to gutters and upstands.

Armac 400u Fleecebond is a single component, moisture curing polyurethane adhesive for bonding FiberTite FB (fleece backed) membrane to substrates.

Accessories - spray applied adhesives

Armac Cleaning Solvent and Armac Canister Cleaning adaptor for cleaning canisters, used for cleaning Armac spray adhesives.

Armac spray adhesive gun and Armac PTFE hose (3.6m long) for use with spray adhesive canisters. Armac spray adhesive gun available:

Accessories

RL Bond Breaker Tape used over all joins in plywood substrates. Supplied in rolls 25mm wide & 55m long.

Bostik MS Safe Seal or Dow Corning® Dowsil 688 Glazing & Cladding Silicone Sealant or Dow Corning® 791 Silicone Weatherproofing Sealant, single component gun grade sealants to seal flashing terminations.

RL Termination Bar, a 2mm x 25mm x 3m extruded aluminium bar with pre-punched holes at 200mm centres. Used for the restraint and termination of membrane flashings.

To E2/AS1, 4.0, Flashings.

Formable grade 0.55 BMT for galvanized, aluminium/zinc, aluminium/zinc /magnesium - coated and pre-painted steel, and 0.70 BMT or 0.90 BMT for aluminium (or 0.7mm for small aluminium flashings).

Refer to 4481LD INTERNATIONAL LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM for ILD electronic leak detection.

304 stainless steel leak detection grid (mesh opening size usually 50mm x 50mm x 0.7mm) and termination points for electronic leak detection. Installed directly under adhered membrane for all roofs other than where the membrane is directly applied to reinforced concrete.

Conditions

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to delivery, storage and handling of products.

Take delivery of membrane rolls undamaged in manufacturer’s unopened packaging. Stack on end, off the ground on a level surface, completely protect from moisture with tarpaulins. Manufacturer’s packaging is not adequate for outdoor storage. Store adhesives and sealants between 5º C and 28º C.

Flammable materials shall be stored away from sparks or open flames. Refer to all precautions as outlined on Material Safety Data sheets.

RL PIR board is supplied in polythene packs which are designed for short term protection only. For longer term protection on site, product should be stored indoors or undercover off the ground. Slabs should not be left permanently exposed to the elements.

Refer to 1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES for protection requirements.

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to defective or damaged work, removal of protection and cleaning.

Lay membrane in fine, dry weather at a minimum of 5ºC ambient air temperature. No moisture may be present when adhering membranes.

Humidity can effect drying times of adhesives and/or cause condensation to form on newly applies adhesive.

Installation - general/preparation

Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for general requirements.

Ensure that preliminary structural work, including formation of falls, flashing rebates, grooves, ducts, provision of battens and fixing of vents and outlets are complete and properly constructed to enable the system to work as intended.

Ensure substrate is smooth, clean, dry and stable.

Confirm that the structure and substrate, including sumps, outlets and projections, will ensure work of the required standard. Ensure falls comply with E2/AS1 including correct fall to rainwater outlets to avoid ponding, although ponding water will not compromise the integrity of Xtreme FiberTite membrane.

Plywood to be a minimum of 17mm thick and complying with AS/NZS 2269.0, minimum CD structural grade with the sanded C side upwards. Treated H3 with waterborne CCA treatment and kiln dried after treatment.

NOTE: Do not use LOSP treated plywood.

Lay with staggered joints (brick bond) with all edges of the sheets fully supported. Chamfer all external edges with a minimum radius of 5mm. Fix with 10 gauge x 50mm stainless steel countersunk head screws. Fix at 150mm centres on edges and 200mm in the body of the sheets.

All plywood joins or large cracks to be taped with RL Bond Breaker tape.

Plywood and the timber substructure to have maximum moisture content of 20% when the roof system is installed.

Set-up the Armac spray adhesive canisters in accordance with the manufacturer's and RoofLogic requirements and instructions.

Installation - profiled structural steel substrate - RL Base Deck

Install RL Base Deck in accordance with RoofLogic's Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details, and as follows:

Installation - RL Xtreme insulated roof components, mechanically fixed over RL Base Deck

Install RL Vapour Control Layer in accordance with RL Vapour Control Layer Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details, and as follows:

Install selected RL PIR Board / RL Tapered PIR Board in accordance with RL PIR Board Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details, and as follows:

Fixings to RL Base Deck substrate to be in accordance with RoofLogic Fixing

Plans, and as follows:

Mechanical Attachment:

Installation - RL Xtreme insulated roof components over plywood substrate

Install RL Vapour Control Layer in accordance with RL Vapour Control Layer Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details, and as follows:

Install selected RL PIR Board/ RL Tapered PIR Board in accordance with RL PIR Board Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details, and as follows:

Fixings to plywood substrate to be in accordance with RoofLogic's Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details, and as follows:

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022        4424RL ROOFLOGIC ULTRATHERM XTREME FIBERTITE ROOFING SYSTEM Page 126

Installation - RL FiberTite membrane

Install RL Fibertite membrane to FiberTite Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details.

Use RL490u adhesive with FiberTite FB membrane.

Use RL-190e adhesive with FiberTite SM membrane.

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022        4424RL ROOFLOGIC ULTRATHERM XTREME FIBERTITE ROOFING SYSTEM Page 127

substrate dependent (this is a guide only).

Unroll and position membrane over prepared substrate. Ensure membrane is cut to size and prepared for bonding to begin, protecting the edges from adhesive contamination that are to be welded or joined later in the installation.

Pull back roll to expose a workable area at a time, approximately 10m when using Armac 400u and 5m when using Armac 220. Amount of substrate that can be coated with a workable amount of adhesive will be determined by ambient temperature, humidity and available technicians.

Apply Armac 400u spray adhesive with the spray gun in 'splatter'pattern directly to the substrate. Refer to Armac 400u TDS for coat application details. Allow the adhesive to form body for 1-3 minutes (depending on temperature and humidity) and roll FiberTite FB membrane into the wet adhesive, avoiding any wrinkles or air pockets. Broom the adhered portion of the membrane to ensure full contact and consolidate with use of a weighted roller.

For gutters and upstands, apply Armac 220 spray adhesive with the spray gun in 'splatter'pattern directly to the substrate and the underside of membrane. Refer to Armac 220 TDS for coat application details. Allow the adhesive to form body for 1-3 minutes (depending on temperature and humidity) and roll FiberTite FB membrane into the wet adhesive, avoiding any wrinkles or air pockets. Broom the adhered portion of the membrane to ensure full contact and consolidate with use of a weighted roller. If adhering directly to plywood substrate prime the substrate first with Armac 220 spray adhesive.

Lap adjacent rolls of membrane a minimum of 75mm, ensuring correct lapping of the membrane to shed water along the laps. No adhesive shall be applied to the lap "seam" areas of the membrane. Areas contaminated with adhesive are difficult to clean, will impair proper welding of the seams and require a membrane patch or strip.

Unroll and position membrane over prepared substrate. Ensure membrane is cut to size and prepared for bonding to begin, protecting the edges from adhesive contamination that are to be welded or joined later in the installation.

Pull back roll to expose a workable area at a time, approximately 5m. Amount of substrate that can be coated with a workable amount of adhesive will be determined by ambient temperature, humidity and available technicians.

Apply Armac 120 Fast Bond with the spray gun at 90° to the surface and apply two uniform generous coats of adhesive directly to the substrate and to the underside of membrane, ensuring 80-100% coverage. Ensure each two metre pass takes a minimum of 10 seconds. Do not allow adhesive to puddle. Refer to Armac 120 Fast Bond TDS for coat application details. Allow the solvents to evaporate for 1-2 minutes (depending on temperature and humidity) and roll membrane into the adhesive, avoiding any wrinkles or air pockets. Broom the adhered portion of the membrane to ensure full contact and consolidate with use of a weighted roller.

Lap adjacent rolls of membrane a minimum of 75mm, ensuring correct lapping of the membrane to shed water along the laps. No adhesive shall be applied to the lap "seam" areas of the membrane. Areas contaminated with adhesive are difficult to clean, will impair proper welding of the seams and require a membrane patch or strip.

Welding of FiberTite membrane

Welding of field seams to be in accordance with FiberTite Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details, and as follows:

Welding of field seams to be in accordance with FiberTite Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details, and as follows:

Welding of field seams to be in accordance with FiberTite Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details, and as follows:

Flashing of FiberTite membrane

All flashing to be in accordance with FiberTite Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details, and as follows:

Application - sealants

Apply sealant in accordance with FiberTite Technical Data Sheet, FiberTite Installation Manual and RoofLogic's details, and as follows:

Testing Procedure

Refer to 4481LD INTERNATIONAL LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM for ILD electronic leak detection.

Test the waterproofing membrane using Electronic Leak Detection procedure upon completion of roof membrane installation and prior to any covering. Test to be carried out by experienced ILD operator.

Make good any lack of water tightness when the surface is completely dry. Depending on conditions, repeat a total or localised test process after making repairs.

Finishing

The roofing contractor shall carryout daily inspections of all completed work which shall include, but is not limited to, the probing of all FiberTite field welding with a dull pointed instrument to assure the quality of the application and ensure that any equipment or applicator deficiencies are immediately resolved.

Make good any covering, cut or deformed by later work. Making good to take the form of inserting a new whole or part infill sheet to maintain the appearance of the covering as originally laid.

Completion & Commissioning

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for completion requirements and if required commissioning requirements.

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for general test and certification requirements at completion.

Electronic Leak Detection Testing. Test results and / or certification is to be submitted to Project Manager.

For further details on selections go to www.rooflogic.co.nz.

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Ultratherm Xtreme FiberTite roofing system - mechanically fixed systems

Accessories

4.3 FLASHINGS

Brand/type:

FiberTite Flashing membrane (1.5mm thick for downpipe and overflow detailing, internal and external corners of gutters)

Coating system:

To match roofing

Coating colour:

To match roofing

Testing

Refer to 4481LD INTERNATIONAL LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM for details

4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS &

DOORS

This section relates to the fabrication, supply and installation of APL Window Solutions commercial window and door systems manufactured by either Altherm, First or Vantage.

It includes:

Refer to appropriate glazing sections for glass types

Documents

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

NZBC E2/AS1 NZBC F4/AS1 NZBC G4/AS1 NZBC H1/VM1

NZBC H1/AS1 AS/NZS 1170.2:2011 NZS 1170.5

External moisture

Safety from falling

Ventilation

Energy efficiency

Energy efficiency

Structural design actions - Wind actions

Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand

AS/NZS 1580.108.1

Methods of test for paints and related materials -Determination of dry film thickness on metallic substrates - Non destructive methods

AS/NZS 1734

Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate

AS/NZS 1866

Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollow shapes

NZS 3604

NZS 4211

NZS 4223.3

Timber-framed buildings

Specification for performance of windows

Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements

NZS 4303

AS/NZS 4680

Ventilation for acceptable indoor air quality Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles

AAMA 2603

Voluntary specification, performance requirements, and test procedures for pigmented organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels (with coil coating appendix)

AAMA 2604

Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test procedures for high performance organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels

AAMA 2604.05

Performance requirements and test procedures for high performance organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels

AAMA 2605

Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test procedures for superior performing organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels

BS 3900

Methods of tests for paints, Part C5: Determination of film thickness

BRANZ BU 636

Protecting Glass From Damage

Window & Glass Association NZ (WGANZ) documents:

Window Guide to Window Installation as described in E2/AS1

Installation Guide Amendment 7

PQAS

SFA 3503-03

Powder Coating Quality Assurance System Anodic Oxide coatings on wrought aluminium for external architectural application (2005)

US Federal Specification:

TT-S-001543A

Sealing compound, silicone rubber base (for caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures)

TT-S-00230C

Sealing compound, elastomeric type, single component (for caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures)

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work:

Altherm Specifier's Guide

First Specifier's Guide

Vantage Specifier's Guide

Vantage Guide to Fluoroset FP - Selling, Fabricating, Handling, Care and Maintenance

APL Guide to specifying powders and issuing/applying for warranties APL Window Energy Efficiency Rating System (WEERS) Report Series

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company:

APL Window Solutions

Web:

www.altherm.co.nz www.firstwindows.co.nz www.vantage.co.nz www.aplnz.co.nz

Email:

specifiersguide@aplnz.co.nz

Telephone:

07 849 2113

Warranties

1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER / SUPPLIER

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:

5 years:

For fabrication

2 years:

For hardware

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements

Provide an installer/applicator warranty:

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

Shop drawings to show the general arrangement of the aluminium joinery including, but not be limited to:

Construction details (minimum scale 1:5) showing the interface between joinery elements and the building structure including: -

And where required the following: -

Where requested provide the following additional information

Complete shop drawing review before commencing fabrication.

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified APL aluminium system, or associated components and products.

Work to be carried out by trades people experienced, competent and familiar with the materials and techniques specified.

Windows and doors to be manufactured and installed to NZBC E2/AS1.

Provide evidence of a certificate by a laboratory accredited by International Accreditation of New Zealand that the windows and doors offered comply with the requirements of NZS 4211.

Performance

To NZS 4211, including:

Refer to SELECTIONS.

The structural and weather-tight performance of the completed joinery, the glazing and infill panels is the responsibility of the window fabricator.

Performance - Wind (design by contractor)

Design the installation to the wind zone parameters of NZS 3604, table 5.1.

Refer to SELECTIONS for wind zone.

Finishes

Certify on request, compliance with this specification and support with control and sampling records. Test for film thickness to BS 3900, part C5, method No.

The coating should be applied by an applicator who can certify that the coating has been applied in accordance with the specification.

Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish.

Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish.

Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish.

Materials

Alloy designation to comply with AS/NZS 1866. Branded and extruded for anodising or powder coating.

Complying with AS/NZS 1734 of suitable thickness. Rolled for anodising or powder coating.

Alloy 5251 - H16 or 5005 - H16 designation:

Type:            316 austenitic steel

Finish grade:     2B (satin lustre)

Refer to the glazing section for glass types and installation.

Reveals

Timber reveals for paint finish with all sides primed grooved for wall linings or flush finished for architraves.

Accessories

To NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.10 Windows and Doors. Material, grade and colour of head flashings to match the window frames. Ensure that materials used for head, jamb and sill flashings are compatible with the window frame materials and fixings and cladding materials.

Components for installation - cavity systems

A device constructed from either aluminium or PVC to close the cavity above the window or door unit, between the cladding and head flashing, to provide ventilation in accordance with NZBC E2/AS1 to the spaces above the window or door.

WGANZ extruded aluminium support bar with built in drainage and ventilation to NZBC E2/AS1, to provide continuous support to the window unit. Size to suit cladding type.

Components

Thermoplastic rubber. Do not stretch glazing gaskets during installation. Measure and cut gaskets 5-10% over length before installation.

Hinges, stays, catches, fasteners, latches, locks and furniture as offered by the window and door manufacturer. Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish.

Key alike all lockable window hardware able to be keyed alike.

Stainless steel non releasable restrictors to limit window opening to NZBC F4/AS1, Section 2.0, Opening windows.

Designed by manufacturer to specific design.

Sealants

Silicone chemically curing sealant specifically formulated and tested or approved equivalent with not less than a ± 40% movement factor complying with US Federal Specification TT-S-001543A.

Building sealant used in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for weather sealing aluminium frames to the cladding, complying with US Federal Specification TT-S-001543A, or a one-part polyurethane moisture curing, elastic joint sealant of medium modulus (± 25% movement) to US Federal Specification TT-S-00230C.

Finishes

High-performance polyester powder coating in accordance with WGANZ PQAS and AAMA 2604.

Conditions - generally

Do not deliver to site any elements which cannot be unloaded immediately into suitable conditions of storage.

Unload, handle and store elements in accordance with the window manufacturer's requirements.

Avoid distortion of elements during transit, storage and handling.

Store windows and doors on site in a clean and dry environment in such a manner as to prevent damage to prefinished surfaces. Stack the units in a vertical position resting on their sills, with layers interleaved between to prevent rubbing. Keep paper and cardboard wrappings dry.

Fix in accordance with the window manufacturer's requirements.

Retain protective coverings and coatings to BRANZ BU 636 and keep in place during the fixing process. Provide protective coverings and coatings where required to prevent marking of surfaces visible in the completed work and to protect aluminium joinery from following trades. Remove protection on completion.

Supply and fix additional protection as necessary to prevent marking of surfaces which will be visible on completed work.

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                    4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 138

Conditions - fixings and fastenings

3.8

SUPPLY OF FIXINGS

Use only fixings and fastenings recommended by the manufacturer of the component being fixed and to comply with the ULS wind pressure stated in SELECTIONS. Ensure fixings and fastenings exposed to the weather are of aluminium, or Type 316 stainless steel or if not exposed to the weather may they be hot-dip galvanized steel with a coating weight of 610 g/m² complying with AS/NZS 4680.

3.9

INSTALLATION FIXING

To NZBC E2/AS1, 9.1.10.8, Attachments for windows and doors. Fix windows/doors through reveal to frame with a pair of 75 x 3.15mm minimum galvanised jolt head nails or a pair of 8 gauge x 65mm minimum stainless steel screws. Fix at a maximum of 450 centres along all reveals and a maximum of 150mm from reveal ends. Ensure fixings do not penetrate metal flashings. Install packers between reveals and framing at fixing points, except at the head.

Assembly

3.10

FABRICATION

Fabricate frames as detailed on shop drawings. Install fixing brackets, glazing, hinges, stays and running gear as scheduled. Provide temporary bracing and protection. Temporarily secure all opening elements for transportation.

3.11

TIMBER / PVC REVEALS

Before fixing to aluminium frames, ensure that timber reveals which are being painted have been primed on all surfaces. Securely fix reveals through aluminium fin.

3.12

HARDWARE GENERALLY

Factory fit all required and scheduled hardware. Account for all keys and deliver separately to the site manager.

3.13

SAFETY STAYS

Factory fit safety stays to all windows scheduled for safety stays and to all windows where safety stays are required to comply with NZBC F4/AS1 4.0, Opening windows.

Installation - windows and doors

3.14

SUPPLY OF FIXINGS

Use only fixings and fastenings recommended by the manufacturer of the component being fixed and to comply with the ULS wind pressure stated in SELECTIONS.

3.15

EXPOSED FIXINGS AND FASTENINGS

Ensure fixings and fastenings exposed to the weather are of aluminium, or Type 304 stainless steel.

3.16

PROTECTED FIXINGS AND FASTENINGS

Fixings and fastenings not exposed to the weather may be hot-dip galvanized steel with a coating weight of 610 g/m² complying with AS/NZS 4680.

3.17

CORROSION PROTECTION

Before fixing, apply suitable barriers of bituminous coatings, stops or underlays between dissimilar metals in contact, or between aluminium in contact with concrete.

Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all window and door frames. Do not proceed with the window and door installation until required preparatory work has been completed.

Required preparatory work includes the following:

Fix to comply with the reviewed shop drawings and installation details including flashings and bedding compounds, pointing sealants and weathering sealants.

Install to WGANZ Window Installation Guide details and drawings including WGANZ sill support bars.

For thresholds with support bars fixed through membranes, pre-fill support bar screw holes with silicone sealant to NZBC E2/AS1, figure 62(d).

Install flashings to heads, jambs and sills of frames as supplied and required by the window manufacturer and as detailed on the drawings. Finish head flashings to match window finish.

Place all flashings so that the head flashing weathers the jamb flashings, which in turn weathers over the upstand of the sill flashing. Ensure that sill flashings drain to the outside air.

Except where window/door frames are recessed, ensure that head flashings over-sail unit by 20mm plus any jamb scriber width at each end.

To NZBC E2/AS1:9.1.6 Air seals. Form an air-tight seal by means of proprietary expanding foam or sealants used with PEF backing rods, applied between the window / door reveal and structural framing to a depth of 10 -20mm, to provide a continuous air tight seal to the perimeter of the window or door.

Fix all sash and door hardware and furniture as scheduled.

Application - jointing and sealing

3.25

3.26

3.27

3.28

3.29

3.30

3.31

3.32

3.33

Seal frames to each other and to adjoining structure and finishes, to the requirements of the window and sealant manufacturer and to make the installation weathertight. In very high and extra high or greater wind zones, seal between the window head and the head flashing. Do not seal the junction between the sill member and the cladding or sill flashing which must remain open.

PREPARE JOINTS

Ensure joints are dry. Remove loose material, dust and grease. Prepare joints in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's requirements, using required solvents and primers where necessary. Mask adjoining surfaces which would be difficult to clean if smeared with sealant.

BACK UP

When using back-up materials do not reduce depth of joint for sealant to less than the minimum required by the manufacturer of the sealant. Insert polyethylene rod or tape back-up behind joints being pointed with sealant.

SEALANT FINISH

Tool sealant to form a smooth fillet with a profile and dimensions required by the sealant manufacturer. Remove excess sealant from adjoining surfaces, using the cleaning materials nominated by the sealant manufacturer and leave clean.

Completion - cleaning

REMOVE TRADE DEBRIS

Remove trade debris by appropriate means on a floor by floor basis as each floor is completed and again before any work is covered up by others. Arrange for general removal.

TRADE CLEAN

Trade clean window frames, operable windows and doors, glass and other related surfaces inside and out at the time of installation to remove marks, dust and dirt, to enable a visual inspection of all surfaces.

Completion

PROTECTIVE COVERINGS

Retain protective coverings and coatings and keep in place during the fixing process. Provide protective coverings and coatings where required to prevent marking of surfaces visible in the completed work and to protect aluminium joinery from following trades.

Anodised finishes should be protected from cement products and requires immediate clean-up of cement splashes. Only use tapes that have passed WGANZ testing on powder coated products. Remove protection on completion.

REPLACE

Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements.

PROTECTION

Protect finishes against damage from adjacent and following work.

IN-SITU TOUCH-UP TO POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM

In situ touch-up of polyester or fluoropolymer coated aluminium is only permitted to minor surface scratching. Otherwise replace all damaged material.

3.34

SAFETY

Indicate the presence of transparent glasses for the remainder of the contract period, with whiting, tape or signs compatible with the glass type. Indicators other than whiting must not be applied to the glass surface. Masking tape must not be used for this purpose.

4

SELECTIONS

For further details on selections go to www.aplnz.co.nz.

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

4.1

SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION

Supply and installation of the specified APL aluminium joinery system.

Supply:          By fabricator

Installation:       By Contractor

Performance

4.2

THERMAL PERFORMANCE

R-value:        R 0.26 (as determined from NZBC H1/VM1 or

H1/AS1)

4.3

AIR INFILTRATION

For NZS 4211, table 3 Air infiltration.

Non-air          Confirm on site

conditioned

zones:

Air conditioned Confirm on site

zones:

Performance - Wind (design by contractor)

4.4

DESIGN PARAMETERS - NON SPECIFIC DESIGN

Building wind VH (refer to NZS 3604, table 5.1) zone

Finishes - Powder Coating

4.5

DURATEC - POWDER COATING FINISH

Type:           Polyester organic powder coating

System integrity: Minimum 20 years film integrity, up to 20 years colour integrity

Colour:         Appliance White

Finish:            Matt

Glazing

4.6

GLASS

Type/thickness: Refer to appropriate glazing sections for type and thickness.

Hardware

Window fastener: Urbo Helix, double tongue

Location

Item

All awnng windows

Safety stays - non releaseable

Safety stays - disconnectable

Sash locks

Louvres

DOOR HARDWARE

4.7


WINDOW HARDWARE


4.8

Locks & handles: Elemental range of hardware, powder coated.

Sliding Door Refer to the hardware schedule mechanism

4.9

Location

Item

nD03

Parliament hinges

nD01, nD03

Hold back devices

nD01, nD03

Patio bolts

nD01, nD03

Door restrictors

HARDWARE FINISH

Finish:           Powder coat

Colour:          Black

Flashings and Sealant

4.10


FLASHINGS


Material/type: Aluminium BMT 0.9 Min, Powder coated

Pattern:          Formed to suit details provided

4.11


WEATHERING SEALANT


Type:            1-part polyurethane moisture curing, elastic joint

sealant

Colour:          Match joinery colour

Reveals

4.12

TIMBER JAMB REVEALS

Timber species:  Radiata pine

Grade/treatment: finger jointed to AS/NZS 1491 / H3.1

Thickness:      19mm

Reveals:         flush finish for architraves, Confirm with interior

project documentation.

Finish:            Paint

Window and door system - METRO SERIES

4.13

APL METRO SERIES - AWNING WINDOW

Brand:          Metro Series

Window No.:    All windows, Refer to window and door schedule

Facing:        40mm

Fasteners:       Urbo Helix

Window and door system - APL ARCHITECTURAL SERIES

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                    4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS Page 143

4.14

APL ARCHITECTURAL SERIES - HINGED DOOR

Brand/type:         APL Architectural Series for Altherm, First or

Vantage

Door Nos.:        nD01

Frame size:       158mm

Reveal/plasterboard None

adaptor:

4.15

APL ARCHITECTURAL SERIES - HINGED DOOR

Brand/type:         APL Architectural Series for Altherm, First or

Vantage

Door Nos.:        nD03

Frame size:       106mm

Reveal/plasterboard None

adaptor:

Shopfront system

4.16

APL SHOPFRONT - 100MM

Brand:          APL Shopfront

Doo No.:       nD02

Frame size:     100mm

Glazing system: double

4610AG AGP® GLAZING RESIDENTIAL

This section relates to the supply and fixing of AGP® glass products for use only with APL Window Solutions external and internal joinery in residential type buildings and includes:

Note; This AGP section is to be read in conjunction with APL Window Solutions branded sections. AGP glass products are only available in the North Island with the APL brands; Altherm, First, or Vantage Window and Doors.

4521AC APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS for aluminium joinery

IGU = Insulating Glass unit

Documents

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section: AGP Product Notes

Copies of the above literature are available at

Company:

AGP

Web:

www.agpl.co.nz

Email:

technical@agpl.co.nz

Telephone:

07 849 8880

Warranties

Warrant glass under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of materials.

Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT and details of when completed warranty must be submitted.

Requirements

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to qualifications.

Performance

For non-heat treated glass obtain a thermal stress analysis for spandrel panels, tinted, reflective and other solar control vision glass including IGU's for review before placing final order.

Provide glazing to meet the energy requirements of NZS 4218 and NZBC

H1/AS1 for housing small buildings.

Refer to SELECTIONS and schedules for location and type of glazing.

Design the installation to the manufacturer requirements and as appropriate for the project wind design stated in the general section 1220 PROJECT.

Materials

Clear ordinary annealed transparent float glass for general window glazing.

Thickness to NZS 4223.1 and NZS 4223. Supp 1.

Grade A Safety Glass to AS/NZS 2208.

Heat soaked toughened glass to NZS 4223.1, Appendix E required for critical areas.

Refer to SELECTIONS.

Either coated float glass incorporating both solar and thermal insulation properties; or coated float glass with only the thermal insulation properties.

To the performance requirements of NZS 4223.2.

Marking to NZS 4223.2 as modified by NZBC B2/AS1, 3.5.

Refer to SELECTIONS for specified surfaces of the IGU.

Surface numbering order for glass panes in an IGU are #1, #2, #3, and #4 as follows:

Components, aluminium and uPVC glazing

Single/double sided pressure sensitive self-adhesive low/medium/high density foam tapes/butyl tapes selected to suit the glazing detail to window manufacturers' requirements.

APL Window and Door Systems setting blocks. Refer to APL, Altherm, First and Altherm window manufacturer's manufacturing packs for part numbers to suit the frame and panel type. Setting blocks must be PE, PP or PA material.

Conditions

To NZS 4223.1, NZS 4223.2, NZS 4223.3 as modified by NZBC B1/AS1, 7.3.1, and NZS 4223.4. All external glazing to be wind and watertight on completion.

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to delivery, storage and handling of products, and to the AGP Glass Handling and Storage Guide.

Refer to 1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES for protection requirements.

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to defective or damaged work, removal of protection and cleaning.

All glass to have undamaged edges and surfaces in accordance with AS/NZS 4667.

Whether stated in a glazing schedule or not, confirm glass thicknesses to NZS 4223.1, NZS 4223.3, NZS 4223.4. For windows tested to NZS 4211, ensure glass meets the requirements of the window testing.

Determine the final glass thickness based on whether wind loading, or human impact considerations govern.

3.7

3.8

3.9

3.10

3.11

3.12

3.13

3.14

3.15

3.16

REBATE DIMENSIONS

Provide rebates for glazing to the widths and depths necessary for each situation including minimum glass edge cover to NZS 4223.1, Section 4 Glazing.

Conditions - human impact safety requirements

SAFETY GLAZING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Glazing of doors, side panels, low level and window seat glazing, bathrooms, stairwell landings and similar locations, to NZS 4223.3 as modified by NZBC B1/AS1, 7.3.1, for thickness and maximum areas of safety glass.

SAFETY GLAZING MATERIAL

Use only safety glazing materials defined in NZS 4223.3, that also comply with the relevant requirements of AS/NZS 2208. Ensure material is permanently marked and if cut by the distributor or installer mark each piece to NZS 4223.3, 2.8 Identification.

CONTAINMENT

Edge cover to comply with NZS 4223.1, Section 4 Glazing, table 5. Otherwise to NZS 4223.3, 2.3 Edge cover.

Assembly

WORKING OF GLASS

All working of glass as required in NZS 4223.1.

EDGE WORK AND BEVELLING

Edgework other than a clean cut. Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for type.

Installation/application

STANDARDS AND TOLERANCES

Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for general requirements. Refer to AS/NZS 4667 and NZS 4223.1 for glass and glazing.

INSTALL SAFETY GLASS

To NZS 4223.3.

INSTALLING INSULATING GLASS UNITS

Refer to the APL branded window manufacturer's requirements and before glazing ensure that the materials forming the opening are strong enough to accept the weight, the rebates are the correct size and prepared to receive the units to the manufacturers requirements. Fit setting and location blocks and bead glaze units using a compatible sealant.

INSTALLING REFLECTIVE AND COATED GLASS

In addition to the type of glazing specified refer to the requirements of the glass manufacturer and ensure that the rebate dimensions, clearances and edge cover are sufficient to allow for the movement created by the particular solar glass being used. Check thermal stability for the particular location and ensure any sealant or compound is compatible with the coating.

Application aluminium

Install glass to NZS4223.1.

Finishing

Indicate the presence of transparent glass for the remainder of the construction period, with whiting, tape or signs compatible with the glass type.

To NZS 4223.3, 2.2 Manifestation (making glass visible).

Completion & Commissioning

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for completion requirements and if required commissioning requirements.

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for general test and certification requirements at completion.

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Performance - wind

Building wind zone: VH (as determined from NZS 3604, NZS 4223.4)

Glass by type

Location:         all IGU

Brand/type:     AGP

Thickness:      4mm minimum, actual thickness as required by

NZS4223 set.

CONTROL GLASS

Location:        ALL IGUs

Brand/type:     AGP SOLUX-E

Outer glass type: Clear float

Coated surface: #2

Outer glass: 4mm minimum, actual thickness as required by

NZS4223 set.

Spacer width: 15mm nominal, actual width to suit wind pressure,

IGU size & APL suites selected.

Spacer type: ATS-Architectural Thermal Spacer®

Space gas: Argon

Inner glass type: Clear

Inner glass:

4mm minimum, actual thickness as required by NZS4223 set.

4811S SIKA SEALANTS

1 GENERAL

This section relates to the selection of Sika sealants/adhesives and appropriate application methods for sealants nominated in other work sections.

It includes:

Refer to 4231HA for JH Axon Panels

Refer to 4231HE for JH EasyLap panels

Refer to 4231HJ for JH Soffit

Refer to 4521AC for APL COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS

The following abbreviations and terms are used throughout this part of the specification:

VOC Volatile Organic Compound

Documents

Copies of the above literature are available from Sika (NZ) Ltd

Web:

nzl.sika.com

Email:

info@nz.sika.com

Telephone:

0800 SIKA NZ, 0800 745 269

Facsimile:

0800 SIKA FAX, 0800 745 232

Warranties

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty:

10 years:        For Sika sealants and adhesives

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements

Provide an installer/applicator warranty:

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

Sealant work, including preparation, to be carried out by competent and experienced sealant applicators, approved by Sika. Provide evidence of technical competence and experience for review before commencing work. Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for additional requirements relating to qualifications.

Refer to the Sika (NZ) Ltd current Technical Data Sheet before commencing sealant installation. Ensure that the correct sealant has been selected for the intended application and substrates. Check that the joint design allows for movement and or substrate thermal expansion and contraction, and is within the sealants range of service.

Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified Sika systems, components and associated products listed in this section.

Performance

Typically the life of any sealant is between 15 to 25 years, whereas generally a building is designed to a minimum 50 year life. The applied sealant should be regularly inspected, cleaned and repaired and replaced as required. The sealant will require to be replaced during the life span of the building.

Joint Substrate Primers & Accessories

ADHESION

Sika Aktivator-205, a transparent, alcohol based, one component cleaner with adhesion promoters for cleaning and activating non-porous substrates prior to the application of Sika sealants. For use with Sika products only.

Sika Primer-3N, transparent solvent based, one component, reactive epoxy resin primer for use on a wide range of porous substrates. For use with Sika products only.

Sika PEF Backing Rod is a closed cell polyethene foam backing rod used to fill the base of a joint to control depth of applied sealant. Available in a range of diameters.

Facade sealants for timber / fibre cement sheets and boards

Sikaflex® AT-Facade is a one component hybrid (silane terminating polymer), low VOC, moisture curing sealant with good weathering and a joint movement capacity +/-25%. Conforms to ISO 11600 Type F, class 25LM and has a BRANZ Appraisal 613.

Can be over-painted with a range of paints and coatings.

Window and door sealants - aluminium / timber / PVC

Sikaflex® AT-Facade, is a one component hybrid (silane terminating polymer), low VOC, moisture curing sealant with good weathering and a joint movement capacity +/-25%. Conforms to ISO 11600 Type F, class 25LM and has a BRANZ Appraisal 613.

Can be over-painted with a range of paints and coatings.

Conditions

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to delivery, storage and handling of products.

Refer to 1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES for protection requirements.

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for requirements relating to defective or damaged work, removal of protection and cleaning.

Check work previously carried out and confirm it is of the required standard for this part of the work.

Ensure conditions for application are clean, dry and dust free as possible.

Avoid dust, dirt, water and other contamination settling on the cleaned and prepared joint substrate.

Ensure adequate ventilation is maintained during the preparation and application of sealant work and all relevant health and safety equipment is utilised.

Ensure application of Sika products occurs when the ambient and substrate temperature is in accordance with the appropriate Product Data Sheet.

Ensure that joints to be filled are in accordance with the current best practice such as BRANZ Bulletin 584 and in accordance to joint requirements stated in the relevant Product Data Sheet.

Unless stated otherwise in relevant Product Data Sheet, a typical joint should be configured on a 2:1 width to depth ratio. Minimum joint width should be not less than 10mm and should not exceed 50mm.

A Sika PEF backing rod should be applied to the base of all open backed joints and a generic bond breaker tape should be adhered to the base of all shallow joints to prevent 3-sided adhesion.

Ensure compatibility by using only Sika branded sealants with Sika branded products including cleaners, primers, sealants, adhesives, filler and backing rods. Products should not be substituted without the prior approval of the specifier.

Note that some sealants can cause staining on porous substrates such as concrete, masonry and natural stone. If in doubt, compatibility testing should be undertaken to confirm suitability prior to application.

Ensure that a paintable sealant is selected when the sealant joint requires painting. The overpainting of sealant will reduce its flexibility at the coating interface. If in doubt about the sealant / over-coating compatibility, testing should be undertaken to confirm suitability prior to application.

NOTE: This excludes silicon based sealants which are not paintable.

Refer to SELECTIONS for colour option/s. Where colour is not specified, choose sealant colours from the Sika standard/special colour ranges.

All relevant and current Sika Technical Data Sheets must be consulted prior to application, to ensure that the specified product is suitable based on the actual site / joint conditions observed. All current technical literature is available on nzl.sika.com or by phoning 0800 SIKANZ.

Installation/application

Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for general requirements.

Preparatory work

Ensure that joints to receive Sika sealants are suitable for the proposed application and are within the specified width to depth ratios in accordance with the relevant and current Product Data Sheet.

Ensure that surfaces are sound, dry, free from dust, dirt, scale, laitance, corrosion or other loose material, oil, grease, paint, release agents or other contaminants which may affect the bond, or the performance of the sealing material.

If in doubt about the suitability of substrate, test the affected substrate for indications of poor adhesion, staining and contamination.

If poor adhesion is evident from initial tests, consult Sika about the application of a suitable cleaning and preparation process and the application of a primer. Only use combinations of sealants and substrates for which favourable adhesion and compatibility have been confirmed.

Prepare and clean joint substrates in accordance with the relevant and current Product Data Sheet. Protect adjacent surfaces from abrasion or other damage.

Typically concrete surfaces should be ground to remove concrete laitance and other surface contaminates. Non-porous surfaces such as metal to be cleaned with a Sika approved cleaner / activator to remove any contaminating films or barriers.

Apply a suitable masking tape to the adjacent surfaces along the length of joints to prevent contamination during application. Mask off any surfaces which would be difficult to clean if smeared with sealant, or where excess sealant could not be neatly trimmed off or removed.

Application - sealants / adhesives

Insert a Sika PEF backing rod to the specified depth within the cleaned and prepared joint to provide a solid base for the sealant application.

The diameter of the Sika PEF backing rod should be 25% larger than the gap width and compressed evenly into the joint using a blunt instrument to avoid puncturing or damaging the rod. Do not twist the rod during application. Punctured rod may lead to 'out-gassing' which can cause the bubbling during sealant curing.

The rod should be consistently and evenly installed without any gaps. The midpoint of the installed rod should be sitting at the specified depth for each joint.

Confirm the porous primer selection with the selected sealant current Product Data Sheet. Generally, porous substrates such as concrete, masonry or unpainted timber, apply by brush a uniform, thin film of Sika Primer 3N to the substrate. The primer seals, densifies and increases the surface area of substrate to promote adhesion of the selected sealant.

Allow primer to dry for the recommended time, at least 30 minutes before the application of sealant and should be left no more than 8 hours. Do not prime more than can be sealed in one day. Primed joints that have been left for more than specified time (or overnight) or have become contaminated will need to be cleaned and re-primed prior to sealant application.

Do not contaminate the bond breaker tape or backing rod with primer.

Confirm the non-porous primer selection with the selected sealant current Product Data Sheet. Generally, non-porous substrates such as aluminium (coated / anodised), stainless steel, galvanised steel, powdercoated metals, zinc, glazed tiles and paint/epoxy coatings, should be cleaned and treated using Sika Aktivator-205.

Wipe on Sika Aktivator-205 with a clean cloth and allow to dry for minimum 15 minutes and a maximum of 6 hours prior to sealant application. Primed joints that have been left for more than 6 hours (or overnight) or have become contaminated will need to be cleaned and re-treated.

Do not allow primer to contaminate other surfaces as a slight discolouration on some finishes may occur.

For substrates not mentioned above, refer to the relevant and current Sika Sealant Product Data sheet for priming requirements.

Sika sealant are supplied ready to use, insert the cartridge / uni-pack into a sealant pressure gun. After the necessary substrate / joint preparation and priming, extrude uniformly the selected sealant into the joint cavity.

Apply sealant to ensure full contact with the substrate on each side of the joint with no voids or pockets of entrapped air. There should be a minimum amount of overfill.

Tool sealant as soon as practical after application and prior to the sealant surface forming a skin. Tool sealant face firmly to compact into the joint to form a smooth, flat or concave profile, to give the desired effect when cured.

Tooling must be carried out carefully, ensuring that the sealant minimum depth profile is not compromised.

A compatible tooling agent or fresh clean water, can be used sparingly to assist with the smoothing of the tooled surface. Do not use products containing solvent, alcohol or fuel, as these products will inhibit the curing of the sealant.

Remove masking immediately after tooling and remove excess sealant from adjoining surfaces before sealant surface starts to skin. Refer to the relevant and current Product Data Sheet for information on curing times. Note skinning times are temperature dependent.

Any cured sealant can only be removed mechanically and care must be taken to avoid damage of surrounding surfaces.

3.20

SURROUNDING WORK

Leave surrounding surfaces in a neat, clean condition with no evidence of spill over.

Completion

3.21

COMPLETION MATTERS

Refer to 1270 CONSTRUCTION for completion requirements and if required commissioning requirements.

4

SELECTIONS

For further details on selections go to nzl.sika.com.

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Facade joints - Timber, fibre-cement sheets & boards

4.1

SIKAFLEX AT FACADE - FACADE SEALANT FOR TIMBER / FIBRE CEMENT

Location:        As required

Application

detail:

Product:        Sikaflex® AT Facade

Product colour: match adjacent

Joint width: _mm

Substrates:      Fibre cement / Aluminium

Primer/cleaner: Sika Primer 3N - for porous substrates

Backing:        Sika PEF Backing rod - (diameter - 25% wider than

joint)

Window & Door Sealant - Aluminium / PVC / Timber

4.2

SIKAFLEX® AT-FACADE - WINDOW & DOOR SEALANT

Location:

Application

detail:

Product:        Sikaflex® AT-Facade

Product colour: Appliance white

Joint width: _mm

Substrates:      fibre cement / Aluminium

Primer/cleaner: Sika Aktivator 205 - for non-porous substrates or

Sika Primer 3N - for porous substrates

Backing:        Sika PEF Backing rod - (diameter - 25% wider than

joint)

4821 FLASHINGS

1 GENERAL

This section relates to the fabrication and installation of flashing systems not forming part of a proprietary system.

Documents

Requirements

Work to be carried out by trades people experienced, competent and familiar with the materials and techniques specified.

Verify dimensions against site measurements prior to fabrication.

Standards of performance

Design and install the flashings appropriate for the durability applications in accordance with NZBC B2/AS1. The Building Code B2, 3.2 requires that all hidden elements have at least the same durability as that of the element that covers it. Refer to NZBC B2/AS1 Table 1: Durability Requirements of Nominated Building Elements and NZBC E2/AS1 Table 20 Material selection.

Each flashing material shall be selected in accordance with NZBC E2/AS1 Table 20 to minimise corrosion. Refer to either NZS 3604 Clause 4.2 or AS/NZS 2728 for the relevant exposure conditions. For compatibility of materials in contact and subject to run-off, refer to NZBC E2/AS1 table 21 and NZBC E2/AS1 table 22.

Refer to the general section 1270 CONSTRUCTION for details of how prototypes will be reviewed and how instructions to proceed will be given. For flashings where there are no specific details or drawings, provide full size prototypes of the flashings to integrate components into the weathertight system. Co-ordinate with the trades affected by the installation. Provide the prototype flashings to the contract administrator for review.

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                                                            4821 FLASHINGS Page 158

Acceptable materials for flashings are described in NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0.

Material, grade and colour as detailed and scheduled. Ensure that materials used for flashings are compatible with the building and cladding materials and their fixings.

Fabricate flashings generally to NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0, from a ductile grade of metal designed for lateral strength by folding, stiffening or ribbing on external edges, having a maximum un-stiffened width of 300mm. Provide all hooks, hems, kick outs, bird's beaks, stop ends, soft edges and turn downs etc. to NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0, or as shown on the drawings.

Rivets, screws, nails and cleats to be compatible with the materials being fastened. Fasteners complying with the corrosion requirements of AS 3566 are suitable for use with ZINCALUME® steel products. Use only low carbon non-conductive sealing washers.

Neutral Curing silicone or MS polymer sealant as required, with low resistance to compression and be-able to withstand large temperature variations. MS polymer sealant to be used where the sealant is exposed and the surrounding surfaces are to be subsequently painted or coated.

Eutectic solder of 60% tin/40% lead using a suitable proprietary flux.

Conditions

Keep flashings dry in transit. Take delivery of flashings in an undamaged condition. Reject all damaged materials.

Store materials and accessories on a level, firm base, in dry conditions, well ventilated, out of direct sunlight and completely protected from weather and damage. Ensure storage areas are away from current work areas. Cover to keep dry until fixed.

Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces/substances. Do not drag flashings across each other, or across other surfaces. Protect edges, corners and surfaces from damage.

Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required by the installer for the specified flashings, level and in true alignment.

Protect surfaces, window and door joinery, and finishes already in place, from the possibility of damage during the installation process.

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                                                            4821 FLASHINGS Page 159

Before commencing work confirm the proposed installation of the flashings and expansion joints and other visual considerations of the finished work.

Co-ordinate installation of flashings with associated trades.

Application

Install flashings in accordance with NZMRM CoP and in compliance with NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0 Flashings. For very high wind zones and where the pitch of the roof is below 15° the flashing joint laps shall be sealed with sealant at each end of the lap to prevent the ingress of water.

Refer to NZBC E2/AS1 Table 7 for general dimensions of flashings.

Fix flashings with fasteners appropriate to the situation. For fixing flashings with proprietary brackets or clips ensure they are aligned to allow for movement and are compatible with the flashing material.

Fix screws with the shank perpendicular to the surface of the flashing with the washer fitted firmly against the flashing. Screws to be compatible with the flashing material.

Rivets 'blind' or 'pop' are to be sealed when used. Aluminium rivets are compatible with zinc or AZ coated steel. Monel and stainless steel rivets can be used to fix galvanized steel flashings. Minimum diameter of rivet to be used is 4.0mm. Drill hole 1mm larger than the rivet size. Seal head of rivet with neutral cured silicone.

Clean surfaces to be lapped using a solvent ensuring all traces of the solvent are removed with a clean rag. Apply sealant by gun in a continuous bead of approximately 5mm diameter. Width of sealant when compressed should not exceed 25mm. Sealant joints shall be mechanically fixed for strength. Refer to NZMRM CoP for details.

Solder joints in galvanized steel and non-ferrous metals when specified with lead/tin solder. Clean joint ensuring it is dry and free of grease immediately prior to applying a proprietary flux. Lap the flashing 25mm in the direction of the water flow and fasten the lap with rivets or screws at 50mm centres.

Completely sweat the joint to avoid leaving any flux residue. Wash down the joint to remove any trace of flux.

A final inspection by the installer to take place after completion of the flashing work. Any defects or subsequent damage to be made good.

Completion

Protect new work from damage.

Replace all damaged or marked elements.

Leave work to the standard required for following procedures.

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

Type             Material and finish/colour

General        Aluminium

flashings:

Window/doors:

Appliance White

Appliance White

Cladding:

- External corner: Concealed: uPVC 0.75 Min.

- Internal corner: Soffit:

Wall/roof junctions:

Barge:

Apron:

Saddle:

Roof penetrations: Wall

Penetrations

Concealed: uPVC 0.75 Min.

Aluminium BMT 0.9 Min. Powder coated, Colour:

Appliance White

Aluminium BMT 0.9 Min. Powder coated, Colour:

Appliance White

Membrane plus aluminium clamping bar

Pre-finished steel, BMT 0.55 Min. Colorsteel Maxx, Colour: Grey Friars.

Aluminium BMT 1.6 Min. Fully welded joints, Powder coated, Colour: Match adjacent

Membrane: by membrane roof system manufacturer

Marshall TradeSeal penetration seal

4851   EXTERIOR HANDRAILS & TIMBER BALUSTRADES

This section relates to the fabrication and installation of exterior handrails and timber balustrades.

Related work

Refer to for .

Documents

Documents referred to in this section are:

NZBC B2/AS1   Durability

NZBC F4/AS1   Safety from falling

NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are:

Copies of the above literature are available from

Web:

Email:

Telephone:

Facsimile:

Timber species, grade, installation moisture and treatment to NZS 3602, table 2, and NZBC B2/AS1. Refer to SELECTIONS/DRAWINGS.

Proprietary handrail or non-fabricated handrail to manufacturer/supplier specifications and instructions. Refer to SELECTIONS for options.

Handrail brackets, metal supports, angles and sundry fittings, all as shown and described on the drawings.

Conditions

Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the current syllabus for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

4

4.1

4.2

4.3

Check site dimensions. Carry out machining within the practices recommended for the particular timber, wood product or pre-finished wood product being used. Machine drill and cut holes and recesses and form joints to the componentry manufacturer's recommendations. Work to be accurate, square and true to line and face.

Application

HANDRAILS

Fabricate and install the handrails and balustrading as detailed, complete with all associated metal componentry and hardware. Unless otherwise detailed construct to comply with NZBC F4/AS1.

BALUSTRADING

Fabricate and install the balustrading as detailed, complete with all associated metal componentry and hardware. Unless otherwise detailed construct to comply with NZBC F4/AS1.

Completion

LEAVE

Leave work to the standard required by following procedures.

REMOVE

Remove all debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

SELECTIONS

TIMBER BALUSTRADE

Timber:         Pinus Radiata

Finish:            Stain

NON-TIMBER HANDRAIL

Description:      Steel tube

Finish:           Galvanised

ACCESSORIES

Brackets:        Steel

Finish:           Galvanised

6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL

This section relates to the general matters related to Resene painting work. • 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR

Refer to 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR

Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations and definitions used throughout the specification.

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: MPNZA Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc.

SIPDS Surface Information & Preparation Data Sheets

Documents

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

Health and Safety at Work Act

AS/NZS 5131 Structural steelwork - Fabrication and erection

AS/NZS ISO Quality management systems - Requirements 9001

MPNZA Health and Safety Programme

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are:

Resene Surface Information & Preparation Data Sheets (SIPDS)

(hard copy or at www.resene.co.nz)

Resene Product Data Sheets

(hard copy or at www.resene.co.nz)

Resene         Putting your safety first

Copies of the above literature are available from Resene

Telephone:     0800 RESENE (0800 737 363)

Warranties

Warrant this work under normal conditions of use against failure referring to the Resene Promise of Quality in the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual.

Requirements

This painting specification is written based on information available at the time of writing.

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified Resene coating system, or associated components and products. Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system.

If in the applicator's own expertise and judgement an amendment to this specification is required, or where a substrate preparation, or required painting system is not covered in this specification, this shall be brought to the attention of the contract administrator and any amendment agreed before work proceeds any further.

Painters to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the techniques specified and with the Resene coating systems and be members of the Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc.

The applicator is to have the necessary skill, experience and equipment to undertake the work. The applicator remains responsible for ensuring proper completion of the work.

Painters to be selected from the Resene Eco Decorator programme. The Resene Eco Decorator programme is designed to recognise a nationwide network of environmentally responsible, quality focussed painting contractors. Refer to www.resene.co.nz/ecodecorator.htm for a list of Eco Decorators in your area.

Before any work commences painters should verify, with Architects or specifying authority, that their paint matches a previously supplied standard card or panel. Differently coloured paints will vary in price, opacity and durability. Resene normally only specify two coats of colour but with certain colours, such as yellows and oranges, three coats may be needed. Refer to SELECTIONS for location and type.

Refer to the general section 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE for provision of the following general operation and maintenance information as electronic PDF format documents:

Maintenance guide for Resene paint finishes www.resene.co.nz/comn/services /maintenance.htm.

Provide this information prior to practical completion.

Refer to and comply with the requirements of the Health and Safety at Work Act 2015 including the obligation to:

Obtain from Resene (phone 0800 RESENE, or www.resene.co.nz) the safety data sheet for each product used and comply with the required safety procedures. Keep sheets on site.

Performance

1.12


RESENE INSPECTION


Permit representatives of Resene to inspect the work in progress and to take samples of their products from site if requested. Resene will take care when inspecting the work, but does not accept any responsibility for the proper completion of the work before or after such inspection.


1.13


INSPECTION OF THE WORK


Inspection of the whole of the work at each of the stages set out in SELECTIONS may be made. Agree on a programme that will facilitate such inspection, including notification when each part and stage of the work is ready for inspection.


2


PRODUCTS


Materials


2.1


MATERIALS GENERALLY


Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system.

Use only Resene products (which are guaranteed for consistency and performance under AS/NZS ISO 9001 and APAS) prepared, mixed and applied as directed in the Resene One-Line Specifications and Product Data Manual. This specification has been written using where practical and available both low/no VOC and Environmental Choice approved products.


2.2


DARK COLOURS


Darker colours in areas of high sun exposure place significant stress on the coating and substrate. Resene 'CoolColour' technology reduces heat absorption of a wide range of colours. Contact your local Resene Representative or visit www.resene.co.nz for more information or visit www.resene.co.nz/coolcolour. View a list of Resene colours that can be made using Resene CoolColour technology at www.resene.co.nz/colourlibrary.


2.3


THINNERS/ADDITIVES


Use only if and when expressly directed by Resene for their particular product in a particular application. Always wear gloves when handling any solvents including turpentine as harmful chemicals may be absorbed into the body through the skin.

Accessories


2.4


ACCESSORIES


Contact your local Resene ColorShop for a full range of accessories and usage advice.


3


EXECUTION


Conditions


3.1


EXECUTION


To conform to required trade practice, which shall be deemed to include those methods, practices and techniques contained in the Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc. Specification manual.

Where surfaces have been treated with preservatives or fire retardants, check with the treatment manufacturer that coating materials are compatible with the treatment and do not inhibit its performance. If they are not compatible, obtain instructions before proceeding.

Co-ordinate with cladding and/or lining installer as to who will do the work and timing.

Exterior

For exterior cladding and trim that require on site finishing, paint the back and exposed bottom edges at the base of the cladding (generally, bottom plate overhang and horizontal flashings) to the manufacturer's requirements, but at least to 150mm up from base. Coating to match front finish, generally apply 2 coats or 1 coat if pre-primed.

Refer to appropriate exterior paint sections SELECTION clauses for claddings to be back painted.

Interior

For lining and trim that require on site finishing and/or back painting (usually wet areas), paint the back and exposed bottom edges at the base of the lining, to the manufacturer's requirements, but at least to 150mm up from base.

Coating to match front finish, generally apply 2 coats or 1 coat if pre-primed, or if no front finish, seal to manufacturer's requirements.

Refer to appropriate interior paint sections SELECTION clauses for linings to be back painted.

The descriptions of areas in schedules and elsewhere are of necessity simplified. Coat ancillary exposed surfaces to match similar or adjacent materials or areas, except where a fair-faced natural finish is required or items are completely prefinished. In cases of doubt obtain written instructions before proceeding.

Do not paint hinges or hardware that cannot be removed. Before commencing work carefully remove hardware, fixtures and fittings, set aside where they cannot be damaged or misplaced and replace on completion. Refer to SELECTIONS for hardware, fixtures and fittings for removal.

Supply, lay and fix drop sheets, coverings and masking necessary to protect adjoining, fixtures, fittings and spaces from paint drops, spots, spray and damage.

Application - preparatory work

Refer to the Resene Surface Information & Preparation Data Sheets (SIPDS) and product data manual for surface preparation sheets (or obtain them by phoning 0800 RESENE, or at www.resene.co.nz) listed in the materials systems schedule clauses. Carry out the preparatory work required by them for each of the substrates.

Remove and/or repair sharp edges, cracks and holes if present, as outlined in the preamble of the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual.

3.9

3.10

3.11

3.12

3.13

3.14

3.15

3.16

3.17

Elastomeric sealants, if used, should not be painted. The paint film will not match the flexibility of the sealant and may severely limit its effectiveness.

REMEDIAL WORK

If any substrate or surface, that even with the preparation work called for in this section, cannot be brought up to a standard that will allow painting or clear finishing of the required standard then do not proceed until remedial work is carried out.

GAP FILLING

Make good cracks, holes, indented and damaged surfaces. Use suitable gap fillers to match the surface being prepared. Any special priming requirements of the fillers must be satisfied. Allow to dry or set before sanding back level with the surface. Prime or seal timber before using putty.

Exterior and wet areas: Use only Portland cement base or water-insoluble organic base gap fillers.

OFF-SITE WORK

Carry out this work under cover in a suitable environment with suitable lighting. Store items, both before and after coating, in a clean, dry area protected from the weather and mechanical damage, properly stacked and spaced to allow air circulation and to prevent sticking. Specific instructions for transport to site to avoid damage to the factory applied paint system may be required particularly for metallic top coat paints.

PRIMING JOINERY

Pre-treat any cut surfaces of preservative treated timber before priming. Ensure L.O.S.P treated joinery has dried sufficiently to lose solvent odour.

Pre-treat bare timber with Resene TimberLock (see Data Sheet D48) to improve the durability of subsequent coats.

Liberally coat end grain, allow to soak in and then recoat.

CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES

Where off-site coatings are specified they must be applied to surfaces including those concealed when incorporated into the building.

CONCEALED METAL SURFACES

Apply primer to suit the coating system to surfaces which will be concealed when incorporated into the building.

EXTERNAL DOORS

Prime or seal and paint bottom edges before hanging.

BEAD GLAZING

Stained, varnished, or painted joinery to have the first two coats of a suitable primer and one undercoat, applied to rebates and beads before glazing.

PUTTY FRONTING - LINSEED GLAZING PUTTIES

According to the putty manufacturer's instructions allow putty to set, then prime with Resene Wood Primer (see Data Sheet D40) or Resene Enamel Undercoat (see Data Sheet D44). Fully protect the putty by completing the Resene coating system as soon as it is sufficiently firm.

Glazing putties not based on linseed oil to be over coated according to the putty manufacturer’s instruction.

Application - generally

Comply with the Resene SIPDS Surface Information & Preparation Data Sheets or Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual data sheets and the additional requirements of this work section.

Ensure large wall areas that require more than one container of paint per coat, have enough paint boxed (mixed) together to complete the final coat. This will not apply if a single factory batch of paint, rather than shop tinted paint, is applied.

Although generally supplied ready to use, all paints must be thoroughly mixed to lift any settled pigment and ensure the paint is homogeneous.

Defer painting of exterior surfaces until weather conditions are favourable -warm dry days without frost or heavy dews. Avoid painting in direct sunlight any surfaces that absorb heat excessively. As far as possible apply paint in the temperature range 15°C to 25°C. If temperatures fall outside the range of 10°C and 35°C do not paint unless paints with the necessary temperature tolerance have been specified. Resene Hot Weather Additive can be added to most Resene waterborne top coats to extend open time when application is undertaken at elevated temperatures or conditions that will cause rapid loss of water from the applied wet film. Do not apply solvent borne paint if moisture is present on the surface.

Painting work to generally follow the following sequences:

Select brush, roller, or pad and apply coatings to the requirements of Resene to obtain a smooth, even coating of the specified thickness, uniform gloss and colour.

Lightly sand primers, sealers, undercoats and intermediate coats to remove dust pick-up, protruding fibres and coarse particles. A more thorough sanding to provide a mechanical key for the new paint system may be required depending upon the condition or age of the existing paint system..

Correct defective work immediately and recoat as required, following precisely the Resene system being applied. The same applies to transportation damage to site of factory painted items.

Each coat of paint and the completed paint system to have the following qualities and properties:

Completion

Clean adjoining surfaces, glass and fittings of any paint contamination. Clean off glass indicators at the completion of the building works. Clean glass inside and out to a shining finish. Use the Resene Washwise on site 'paint equipment clean-up water' reclamation system to minimise the environmental impact of cleaning paint application tools.

Leave the whole of this work uniform in gloss and colour, of correct thickness, free from painting defects, clean and unmarked and to the standard required by following procedures.

Remove drop sheets, coverings and masking to leave surrounding surfaces and areas clean, tidy and undamaged. Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

Replace hardware without damage to it or the adjoining surface and leave hardware properly fitted and in working order.

Note: The use and disposal of paint and thinners represents a significant environmental hazard.

Ensure all paint and thinners are disposed of in the following manner:

Good maintenance of coating systems involves a routine of regular cleaning as well as regular inspections. Regular inspections of the coating systems are recommended to identify breakdown, accidental damage to or undesirable deterioration of the paint.

Wash down of exterior coatings should be undertaken on an annual basis using Resene Paint Prep and Housewash (see Data Sheet D812).

Refer the Resene Caring for your paint finish brochure and the Resene website, www.resene.co.nz/comn/services/maintenance.htm.

4

SELECTIONS

4.1

SELECTIONS

Refer to 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR and 6721R RESENE PAINTING INTERIOR for selections.

6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR

This section relates to the surface preparation, painting and clear finishing of new and existing exterior substrates using Resene architectural and decorative coating systems.

Related work

Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for general matters related to painting work.

Materials

Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for product clauses.

Conditions

Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for execution clauses.

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

Resene exterior paint systems

Exterior cementitious - new

Surface Prep: Resene SIPDS No3 and Spec Sheet 3:1/1

Saturation coat: Resene Solventborne Aquapel D65S, Water

Repellent (NEC)

2nd coat:        Not Required

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                                         6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR Page 172

3rd coat:

Not Required

Exterior cementitious - existing

4.4 RESENE EXISTING EXTERIOR IN-SITU/TILT SLAB/PRECAST CONCRETE

Surface Prep:

Resene SIPDS No3 and Spec Sheet 3: 1/3

Spot prime:

Resene Sureseal D42, Solvent borne pigment sealer (NEC)

1st coat

2nd coat:

Resene Lumbersider D34, Low Sheen Acrylic

Resene Lumbersider D34, Low Sheen Acrylic

4.5 RESENE EXISTING EXTERIOR CONCRETE BLOCK/MASONRY

Surface Prep:

Resene SIPDS No3 and Spec Sheet 3: 2/3

Spot prime:

Resene Sureseal D42, Solvent borne pigment sealer (NEC)

1st coat

2nd coat:

Resene Lumbersider D34, Low Sheen Acrylic

Resene Lumbersider D34, Low Sheen Acrylic

4.6 RESENE EXISTING EXTERIOR CONCRETE RENDER/PLASTER

Surface Prep:

Resene SIPDS No3 and Spec Sheet 3: 3/3

Spot prime:

Resene Sureseal D42, Solvent borne pigment sealer (NEC)

1st coat

2nd coat:

Resene Lumbersider D34, Low Sheen Acrylic

Resene Lumbersider D34, Low Sheen Acrylic

Exterior timber - new

4.7 RESENE NEW EXTERIOR TIMBER, WEATHERBOARDS - FACTORY PRIMED

Surface Prep:

Resene SIPDS No2 and Spec Sheet 2: 2/1

1st coat:

Resene Wood Primer D40, Solvent-borne Primer (NEC)

2nd coat:

Resene Sonyx 101 D30, Semi-Gloss Acrylic

3rd coat:

Resene Sonyx 101 D30, Semi-Gloss Acrylic

4.8 RESENE NEW EXTERIOR PINE TIMBER DECK - PAINT

Surface Prep:

Resene SIPDS No2 and Spec Sheet 2: 6/1

1st coat:

Resene Wood Primer D40, Solvent-borne Primer (NEC)

2nd coat:

Resene Walk-On Flooring & Paving Paint – D322, Waterborne

3rd coat:

Resene Walk-On Flooring & Paving Paint – D322, Waterborne

4.9 RESENE NEW EXTERIOR PINE TIMBER DECK - STAIN

Surface Prep:

Resene SIPDS No2 and Spec Sheet 2: 5/1

1st coat:

Resene Woodsman Decking Stain D57d (NEC)

2nd coat:

Resene Woodsman Decking Stain D57d (NEC)

Exterior fibre cement cladding - new

Exterior fibre cement cladding - existing

4.12 RESENE EXISTING EXTERIOR FIBRE CEMENT CLADDING

Surface Prep:

Resene SIPDS No3 and Spec Sheet 3: 4/3

Spot Prime:

Resene Concrete Primer D405, Acrylic Concrete Primer

1st coat:

Resene Lumbersider D34, Low Sheen Acrylic

2nd coat:

Resene Lumbersider D34, Low Sheen Acrylic

4.13 RESENE EXISTING EXTERIOR FIBRE CEMENT SOFFITS

Surface Prep:

Resene SIPDS No3 and Spec Sheet 3: 4/3

Spot Prime:

Resene Concrete Primer D405, Acrylic Concrete Primer

1st coat:

Resene Sonyx 101 D30, Semi-Gloss Acrylic

2nd coat:

Resene Sonyx 101 D30, Semi-Gloss Acrylic

Exterior metal - existing

4.14 RESENE REPAINT EXISTING EXTERIOR GALVANIZED/ZINC COATED STEEL

Surface Prep:

Resene SIPDS No4 and Spec Sheet 4: 2/3

Spot Prime:

Resene GP Metal Primer D411, Solvent borne Modified Alkyd (NEC)

1st coat:

Resene Quick Dry D45, Waterborne Acrylic Primer Undercoat

2nd coat:

Resene Lustacryl D310, Semi-Gloss Waterborne Enamel

3rd coat:

Resene Lustacryl D310, Semi-Gloss Waterborne Enamel

Exterior PVC - new

4.15 RESENE NEW EXTERIOR PVC GUTTERING, DOWNPIPES

Surface Prep:

Resene SIPDS No5 and Spec Sheet 5: 1/1

Primer:

Not required

1st coat:

Resene Sonyx 101 D30, Semi-Gloss Acrylic

2nd coat:

Resene Sonyx 101 D30, Semi-Gloss Acrylic

7411D DIMOND RAINWATER SPOUTING SYSTEMS

This section relates to Dimond rainwater disposal systems including spouting and downpipes, in metal.

Refer to 4424RL for ROOFLOGIC ULTRATHERM XTREME FIBERTITE

ROOFING SYSTEM

Refer to 7411MA for MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS

The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section:

BMT           Base metal thickness

NZMRM        New Zealand Metal Roofing Manufacturers Inc

Documents

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

NZMRM CoP NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding Code of Practice

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Dimond, Roofing and Cladding Systems Design Manual, (web based Manual with dated update pages)

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Web:          www.dimond.co.nz

Warranties

Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions against:

Failure of coating adhesion: 5 year manufacturer's standard warranty

Weatherproofing by material penetration: 5 year manufacturer's standard warranty

Weatherproofing by substandard workmanship: 3 years

From: Date of completion of installation

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for details of when completed warranty must be submitted.

Requirements

Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and products.

Installers to be experienced competent gutter installers, familiar with the Dimond materials and the techniques specified.

© CIL Masterspec Jul 2022                            7411D DIMOND RAINWATER SPOUTING SYSTEMS Page 175

Provide one copy of all relevant Dimond maintenance information on completion of the roofing work.

Performance

Test the completed rainwater disposal system with water to ensure spoutings are laid to correct falls, that both spouting and downpipes are unobstructed and that no ponding occurs in spoutings.

Materials

Complete with matching brackets to suit the spouting and screws. Refer to SELECTIONS for type.

Complete with stand-off brackets, galvanized screw fixed. Refer to SELECTIONS for type.

Components

Steel or plastic droppers, sized to fit inside the downpipe.

Wire mesh in round form with legs to clip inside the outlet opening to the downpipe.

Conditions

Handle and store downpipes, spouting and accessories to avoid damage.

Store on site under cover, on a clean level area, stacked to eliminate movement and away from work in progress. Avoid exposure to sunlight if strippable film is still on the product.

Check that fascia, barges or cladding are level and true to line and face and will allow work of the required standard without distortion to the product alignment.

Do not proceed until they are suitable to fix to standard.

Make adequate provision in the fixing and jointing of the spouting for thermal movement in the length of the spouting. Provide an expansion joint in spouting over 12 metres in length for steel gutter.

Separate metals subject to electrolytic action from each other and from treated timber, concrete and other lime substances by space, painting of surfaces, taping, or separator strips.

Check compatibility of metals used for rainwater goods, against the materials being used for roofing and flashings.

Application - metal

INSTALL METAL SPOUTING

Establish minimum falls necessary (minimum 1:500) to outlets to prevent ponding and screw fix brackets true-to-line at 900mm centres maximum or 600mm centres maximum when using profile option Box 300. In areas where snow fall is possible and or high wind areas, the centres should be reduced to 450mm. Lap spouting joints in direction of flow, a minimum of 40mm to seal between and over the top of joint and seal with silicone sealant and fix with rivets. Ensure the joint is fixed over its full girth. Cut out neatly for and fit the pre-formed downpipe dropper and rivet and seal around the joint. All installation to Dimond details and NZMRM CoP recommendations.

INSTALL METAL DOWNPIPES

Form downpipes complete with cast zinc 115 degree angle bends as needed with all joints lapped and silicone sealed and fixed with 2-4mm diameter aluminium blind rivets. Galvanize screw fix with galvanized steel pipe clips to rigidly stand 40mm off the wall plumb and discharging into stormwater gully or inlet pipe. All installation to Dimond details and NZMRM CoP recommendations.

INSTALL PROTECTION

Fit wire mesh domes to downpipe outlets and plastic mesh to spouting to the spouting manufacturer's requirements.

Completion

REPLACE

Replace damaged or marked elements.

LEAVE

Leave the whole of this work discharging completely and freely into the stormwater system and free of all debris. Leave work to the standard required by following procedures.

REMOVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

SELECTIONS

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

DIMOND SPOUTING

Profile:           Box

Size:            175

Base material:   Steel

BMT:          0.55mm

Coating system: ColorCote MagnaFlow™ or Colorsteel Maxx

Dimond colour: New Demin Blue

4.2


DOMES

Metal:


Galvanised


7411MA MARLEY RAINWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS

1 GENERAL

This section relates to Marley rainwater disposal systems.

It includes;

Refer to 7411D for DIMOND RAINWATER SPOUTING SYSTEMS

Documents

1.2 DOCUMENTS

Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section:

NZBC E1/AS1

NZBC E2/AS1

AS/NZS 3500.3:

Surface water

External moisture

Plumbing and Drainage - Stormwater drainage

2018 AS/NZS 4020:2005

Testing of products for use in contact with drinking water

Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work:

Marley Rainwater Sales Brochures

Marley Product Catalogue

Marley - Spouting and Downpipe DIY Installation Guide

Manufacturer/supplier contact details

Company:

Marley New Zealand Limited

Web:

www.marley.co.nz

Email:

info@marley.co.nz

Telephone:

0800 MARLEY (0800 627 539)

Warranties

Provide a material manufacturer/supplier Guarantee:

15 years:        Against defects in material and manufacture

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Provide an installer/applicator warranty:

Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements.

Requirements

Installers to be experienced, competent workers familiar with the materials and techniques specified.

Substitutions are not permitted to any of the specified Marley systems, components and associated products listed in this section.

Performance

Test the completed Marley rainwater disposal system with water to ensure, spouting is laid to correct fall, that both spouting and downpipes are unobstructed and that no ponding occurs in spouting.

Layout, falls and capacity of spouting to falls and the size and position of downpipes to comply with NZBC E1/AS1.

Layout, falls and capacity of spouting to falls and the size and position of downpipes to comply with AS/NZS 3500.3: 2018 as modified by NZBC E1/AS2.

Materials

Marley uPVC spouting and downpipe systems in white and grey uPVC.

Products

Marley downpipe system, complete with Marley fittings including bends, clips, joiners and junctions supplied by Marley. Refer to SELECTIONS for type.

Components

Only Marley MCS® Solvent Welding Cement to be used in conjunction with the spouting and downpipe systems to manufacturer's instructions. Colour match to spouting or downpipes.

Marley expansion outlet/droppers, compatible with spouting and downpipe profile.

2.5

2.6

SCREW FIXINGS - TIMBER FASCIA

Stainless steel, grade 304 finish, self tapping screws 6g x 20mm pan head or wafer head.

NAIL FIXINGS - TIMBER FASCIA

Marley galvanised nails (MCNAILS).

2.7


FABRICATION


Special items can be fabricated by Marley to specific dimensions on request including but not limited to angle flats, angle rakes, outlets and adaptors.


3


EXECUTION


Conditions


3.1


HANDLING AND STORAGE


Handle and store Marley downpipes, spouting and accessories to avoid damage. Store on site under cover, on a clean level area, stacked to eliminate movement and away from work in progress. Store out of direct sunlight. Refer to Marley installation guides for further details.


3.2


SUBSTRATE


Check that fascias, barges or cladding are level and true to line and face and will allow work of the required standard without distortion to the product alignment. Do not proceed until they are up to standard.


3.3


THERMAL MOVEMENT


Make adequate provision in the jointing of the spouting for thermal movement in the length of the spouting by using Marley expansion joiners and/or expansion outlets. Refer to Marley expansion technical information.


3.4


ENVIRONMENTAL


Marley Spouting and Downpipe systems are suitable for most environmental conditions and will never rust, rot or corrode.


3.5


RECYCLING


All Marley manufactured spouting and downpipe systems are 100% recyclable and Marley operates recycling programs with industry suppliers where uPVC pipes can be returned from site for recycling at Marley.

Application


3.6


INSTALL MARLEY DOWNPIPES


Install to Marley's current published installation instructions available at www.marley.co.nz. Ensure that all joints are sealed properly using Marley MCS® Solvent Welding Cement. Assemble downpipes, solvent cement jointed complete, fit to outlets, fix with pipe clips every 1.2 metres, fix pipe clips with 304 stainless steel screws, plumb and discharging into the stormwater gully or pipe inlet to the Marley required practice.

Painting Marley uPVC spouting/downpipes


3.7


PAINTING


After installation use a mineral based undercoat and two coats of 100% weatherable acrylic paint. Do not paint the inside of spouting or internal brackets.

Completion

3.8

REPLACE

Replace damaged or marked elements.

3.9

LEAVE

Leave the whole of this work discharging completely and freely into the stormwater system and free of all debris. Leave work to the standard required by following procedures.

3.10

REMOVE

Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

4

SELECTIONS

For further details on selections go to www.marley.co.nz

Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise.

uPVC system - downpipes

4.1

MARLEY UPVC DOWNPIPES - RP80®

Manufacturer:   Marley

Profile/type:     Marley RP80® 80mm Round

Size:           80mm

Colour:          White

Bracket type: Flush or stand off

4.2

MARLEY UPVC DOWNPIPES - MAGNUM®

Manufacturer: Marley

Profile/type:     Marley Magnum® 100mm Round

Size:           110mm

Colour:         Grey

Bracket type:    Stand off

4.3

MARLEY MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

Manufacturer: Marley

Item:

Painting

4.4

PAINTING

Brand/type:      Resene Exterior

Finish/colour:    Consult with Project Manager

SPECIFICATION

of work to be done and materials to be used in carrying out the works shown on the accompanying drawings

Naenae College Admin

Building Exterior

(project name)

910 High Street, Avalon, Hutt City, New Zealand

(project address)

Ministry of Education

(client)

Project Ref: R21112

Date: 21 July 2022

Manufacturer Documents Index

4161T

Thermakraft Underlays, Foils, DPC, DPM, & Tapes

2

4171HR

James Hardie® Rigid Air Barriers

19

4231HA

James Hardie® Axon™ Panel Cladding

33

4231HE

James Hardie® EasyLap™ Panel Cladding

38

4239JH

James Hardie® Soffits

42

4424RL

RoofLogic Ultratherm Xtreme Fibertite Roofing System

76

4521AC

APL Commercial Aluminium Windows & Doors

84

4610AG

AGP Glazing Residential

97

4811S

Sika Sealants

101

6711R

Resene Painting Exterior

104

4161T Thermakraft Underlays, Foils, DPC, DPM, & Tapes

Thermakraft

Thermakraft Ltd +64 09 2733727 info@thermakraft.co.nz www.thermakraft.co.nz

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

BRANZ Appraisal 651 - Thermakraft Covertek™ 407 Fire Retardant Self-Supporting

Roof Underlay

Ref 10566. Uploaded 1 Jul 2022

Purpose:       Performance

Code Mark Certificate 30028 - Thermakraft Covertek 407™ Absorbent Breathable

Roof Underlay

Ref 10577. Uploaded 11 May 2022

Purpose:       Performance

Thermakraft Aluband Window Sill Flashing Tape 104520

Ref 10293. Uploaded 26 Jun 2020

Purpose:        Installation, Warranty

Thermakraft Wall Underlay Watergate Plus 102752

Ref 10299. Uploaded 26 Jun 2020

Purpose:       Performance, Installation, Maintenance, Environmental, Warranty

Page 2 / 129


BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 651 [2019]


THERMAKRAFT COVERTEK 407 ROOF AND WALL UNDERLAY


Appraisal No. 651 (2019)

Amended 26 June 2020



BRANZ Appraisals

Technical Assessments of products for building and construction.


Th ermakraft ™ere s "° “b*™™


Thermakraft Limited

PO Box 58 112

Greenmount

Auckland

Tel: 09 273 3727

Free phone: 0800 806 595

www.thermakraft.co.nz



BRANZ


BRANZ

1222 Moonshine Rd, RD1, Porirua 5381

Private Bag 50 908

Porirua 5240, New Zealand

Tel: 04 237 1170

branz.co.nz



Product

1.1 Thermakraft Covertek 407 Roof and Wall Underlay is a fire retardant, synthetic building underlay for use under roof and wall claddings. The product consists of a micro-porous water-resistant film laminated between two layers of non-woven spun-bonded polyolefin.

Scope

Roof Underlay

  • 2.1    Thermakraft Covertek 407 has been appraised for use as a self-supporting roof underlay on buildings within the following scope:

  •    the scope limitations of NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1, Paragraph 1.1 with regards to building height and floor plan area; and,

  •    with masonry tile roof cladding; and,

  •    with metal tile and profiled metal roof cladding; and,

  •    situated in NZS 3604 Wind Zones up to, and including, Extra High.

Flexible Wall Underlay

  • 2.2    Thermakraft Covertek 407 has also been appraised for use as a flexible wall underlay for buildings within the following scope:

  •    the scope limitations of NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1, Paragraph 1.1 for timber framed buildings; or,

  •    the scope limitations of NASH Building Envelope Solutions, Paragraph 1.1 for steel framed buildings; and,

  •    with direct fixed absorbent and non-absorbent wall claddings; or,

  •    with absorbent and non-absorbent wall claddings installed over an 18 mm minimum drained cavity; or,

  •    with masonry veneer in accordance with NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1 for timber framed buildings or NASH Building Envelope Solutions for steel framed buildings; and,

  •    situated in NZS 3604 and NASH Standard Part 2 Wind Zones up to, and including, Very High; or,

  •    situated in NZS 3604 and NASH Standard Part 2 Wind Zones up to, and including, Extra High when used over a rigid wall underlay in accordance with NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1 or NASH Building Envelope Solutions Paragraph 9.1.7.2.

Specific Design

  • 2.3    Thermakraft Covertek 407 has also been appraised for use on buildings subject to specific weathertightness design. Building designers are responsible for the building design and for the incorporation of Thermakraft Covertek 407 into their design in accordance with the declared properties and the instructions of Thermakraft Limited.


BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 651 [2019]

Building Regulations

New Zealand Building (NZBC)

Clause B2 DURABILITY: Performance B2.3.1 (a), not less than 50 years, B2.3.1 (b), 15 years and B2.3.2. Thermakraft Covertek 407 Roof and Wall Underlay meets these requirements. See Paragraphs 9.1 and 9.2.

Clause C3 FIRE AFFECTING AREAS BEYOND THE FIRE SOURCE: Performance C3.4 (c). Thermakraft Covertek 407 Roof and Wall Underlay meets this requirement. See Paragraph 10.1.

Clause E2 EXTERNAL MOISTURE: Performance E2.3.2. When used as part of the roof or wall cladding system, Thermakraft Covertek 407 Roof and Wall Underlay will contribute to meeting this requirement. See Paragraphs 12.1 and 12.2.

Clause F2 HAZARDOUS BUILDING MATERIALS: Performance F2.3.1. Thermakraft Covertek 407 Roof and Wall Underlay meets this requirement and will not present a health hazard to people.

Technical Specification

Accessories

Handling and Storage

Technical Literature

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 651 [2019]

Design Information

General

Timber and Steel Framing

Use as a Roof Underlay

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 651 [2019]

Use as a Wall Underlay

Structure

Durability

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 651 [2019]

Serviceable Life

Control of Internal Fire and Smoke Spread

10.1 Thermakraft Covertek 407 Roof and Wall Underlay has an AS 1530 Part 2 flammability index of not greater than 5 and therefore meets the requirements of NZBC Acceptable Solutions C/AS1 and C/AS2, Paragraph 4.17.8 b), for the surface finish requirements of suspended flexible fabric used as an underlay to exterior cladding that is exposed to view in occupied spaces.

Prevention of Fire Occurring

External Moisture

Installation Information

Installation Skill Level Requirements

Underlay Installation

General

gaps around service penetrations, must be repaired. Damaged areas can be repaired by covering with new material lapping the damaged area by at least 150 mm and taping, or by taping small tears.

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 651 [2019]

Roof Underlay

Wall Underlay

Inspections

Basis of Appraisal

The following is a summary of the technical investigations carried out:

Tests

Other Investigations

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 651 [2019]

Quality

Sources of Information

AS 1530.2: 1993 Test for flammability of materials.

NASH Standard Part Two: 2019 Light Steel Framed Buildings.

NZS 2295: 2006 Pliable, permeable building underlays.

NZS 3604: 2011 Timber-framed buildings.

Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment Record of amendments - Acceptable Solutions, Verification Methods and handbooks.

The Building Regulations 1992.

Amendments

Amendment No. 1, dated 09 July 2019

This Appraisal has been amended to update Table 1.

Amendment No. 2, dated 26 June 2020

This Appraisal has been amended to include the use of Thermakraft Covertek 407 Roof and Wall Underlay as a wall underlay.

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 651 [2019]

BRANZ

In the opinion of BRANZ, Thermakraft Covertek 407 Roof and Wall Underlay is fit for purpose and will comply with the Building Code to the extent specified in this Appraisal provided it is used, designed, installed and maintained as set out in this Appraisal.

The Appraisal is issued only to Thermakraft Limited, and is valid until further notice, subject to the Conditions of Appraisal.

Conditions of Appraisal

For BRANZ


Chelydra Percy


Chief Executive

Date of Issue:

20 March 2019

Certificate of Conformity

This product Certificate is issued under Section 269 of the Building Act 2004 for:

Thermakraft Covertek 407

Page 1 of 4


global-mark


Product Description

Thermakraft Covertek 407 Fire Retardant Self-Supporting Roof Underlay (Covertek 407) is a synthetic building underlay for use under roof claddings. The product consists of a micro-porous water resistant film laminated to two layers of non woven spun-bonded polyolefin. Covertek 407 is coloured white on the top bottom faces.

Product purpose and use

Covertek 407 has been assessed for use as a self-supporting roof underlay on buildings within the following scope:

  • •  the scope limitations of NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1 (Amendment 8, 30 November 2018), Paragraph 1.1 with regards to

building height and floor plan area; and,

  • •  with masonry tile roof cladding; and,

  • •  with metal tile and profiled metal roof cladding; and,

  • •  situated in NZS 3604-2011 Wind Zones up to, and including Extra High.

Covertek 407 is supplied in rolls 1.250 m wide x 20 m and 40 m long or 2.550 m wide x 29.5 m long. The product is printed with the Covertek 407 logo repeated along the length of the roll as well as lap lines. A customer specific version without the Covertek 407 print is also available. The rolls are wrapped in clear polythene film.

Accessories used with Covertek 407 which are supplied by the installer are:

  • •  Fixings - stainless steel staples, clouts, screws or proprietary underlay fixings, or other temporary fixings to attach the roof

underlay to the framing.

For use as an alternative to kraft paper roofing underlays: fixed over timber or steel framed roofs in order to limit the entry of wind into the roof cavity and to assist in the moisture management of the cladding system.

Certificate holder

Thermakraft Limited

11 Turin Place, East Tamaki Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: +64 9 2733727

www.thermakraft.co.nz

CodeMark Certification Body

j^Ml^

11/3/2013

1/7/2019

1/7/2022

GM-CM30028-RevF

Global-Mark Pty Ltd, Suite 4.07, 32 Delhi Road, North Ryde NSW 2113, Australia Tel: +61 (0)2 9886 0222 www.Global-Mark.com.au

Herve Michoux Managing Director

Date of issue

Last

update

Date of next re-certification

Certificate Number

The purpose of construction site audits is to confirm the practicability of installing the product; and to confirm the appropriateness and accuracy of installation instructions. In issuing this certificate, Global-Mark has relied on the independent expert and/or laboratory advise or reports.

This certificate is issued by Global-Mark Pty Limited, an independent certification body accredited by the product certification accreditation body (JAS-ANZ) appointed by the Chief Executive of the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment under the Building Act 2004. The Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment does not in any way warrant, guarantee, or represent that the building method or product the subject of this certificate conforms with the New Zealand Building Code, nor accept any liability arising out of the use of the building method or product. The Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment disclaims, to the extent permitted by law, all liability (including negligence) for claims of losses, expenses, damages, and costs arising as a result of the use of the building method(s) or product(s) referred to in this certificate. This Certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety.

It is advised to check that this Certificate of Conformity is currently valid and not withdrawn, suspended or superseded by a later issue by referring to the Ministry of Business Innovation and Employment website, http://www.mbie.govt.nz/

New Zealand Building Code (NZBC) references the Building Code in force at the time of issuing the product certificate.

Certificate holder will notify Global-Mark Pty Ltd in accordance with Regulation 15 of the Building (Product Certification) Regulations 2008

Certificate of Conformity


This product Certificate is issued under Section 269 of the Building Act 2004 for:


Thermakraft Covertek 407

Page 2 of 4


JAS-ANZ

www.jas-anz.org/register



global-mark


CodeMark


Compliance with the New Zealand Building Code (NZBC):

Subject to the following conditions and limitations:

Design and Installation Conditions:

Timber and steel roof framing must be provided in accordance with the requirements of the NZBC and the roof cladding manufacturer.

Certificate of Conformity


This product Certificate is issued under Section 269 of the Building Act 2004 for:


Thermakraft Covertek 407

Page 3 of 4


JAS-ANZ



global-mark


CodeMark


Covertek 407 is intended for use as an alternative to conventional kraft paper roof underlays, which are fixed over timber or steel framed roofs in order to limit the entry of wind into the roof cavity, and to assist in the moisture management of the roof cladding system.

The material also provides a degree of temporary weather protection during early construction. However, the product will not make the roof weathertight and some wetting of the underlying structure is always possible before the roof cladding is installed. Hence, the entire building must be closed-in and made weatherproof before moisture sensitive materials such as ceiling linings and insulation materials are installed.

Covertek 407 is suitable for use under roof claddings on buildings as a roof underlay as called up in NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1 (Amendment 8, 30 November 2018), Table 23. Refer to Table 1 for the material properties of Thermakraft Covertek 407 Fire Retardant Self-Supporting Roof Underlay.

Covertek 407 is suitable for use in residential and commercial roofs with roof pitches of minimum 3°. The product must not span unsupported more than 1200 mm in one direction. Spans greater than 1200 mm require additional support such as galvanised wire mesh or safety mesh.

o horizontally, or

o vertically if installed over a roof underlay support.

Refer to Table 2 for a summary of the roof underlay support requirements.

Table 2: Roof Underlay Support Requirements

Roof Pitch

Span

Roof Underlay Suppor

t Required?

Horizontally Installed

Vertically Installed

10° or more

Greater

than 1200 mm

Yes

Yes

1200 mm or less

No

No

Less than 10° (minimum 3°)

Greater

than 1200 mm

Yes

Yes

1200 mm or less

No

Yes

Covertek 407 is suitable for use in all Wind Zones of NZS 3604-2011 up to, and including, Extra High.

Covertek 407 meets code compliance with NZBC Clause B2.3.1 (a), not less than 50 years for roof underlays used where the roof cladding durability requirement or expected serviceable life is not less than 50 years, e.g. behind masonry roof tile cladding, and code compliance with NZBC Clause B2.3.1 (b), 15 years for roof underlays used where the roof cladding durability requirement is 15 years.

Provided it is not exposed to the weather or ultra-violet light for a total of more than 7 days, and provided the roof cladding is maintained in accordance with the cladding manufacturer’s instructions and the roof cladding remains weather resistant, Covertek 407 is expected to have a serviceable life equal to that of the roof cladding.

Covertek 407 has an AS 1530 Part 2 – 1993 (including Amendment 1) flammability index of not greater than 5 and therefore meets the requirements of NZBC Acceptable Solutions C/AS2 to C/AS6 Amendment 4 (1 January 2017), Paragraph 4.17.8 (b), for the surface finish requirements of suspended flexible fabric used as an underlay to exterior cladding that is exposed to view in occupied spaces. It may therefore be used with no restrictions in all buildings.

Separation or protection must be provided to Covertek 407 from heat sources such as fire places, heating appliances, flues and chimneys. Part 7 of NZBC Acceptable Solutions C/AS1 – C/AS6 Amendment 4 (1 January 2017), and NZBC Verification Method C/VM1 Amendment 4 (1 January 2017) provide methods for separation and protection of combustible materials from heat sources.

Certificate of Conformity


This product Certificate is issued under Section 269 of the Building Act 2004 for:


Thermakraft Covertek 407

Page 4 of 4


JAS-ANZ



global-mark


CodeMark


Covertek 407 must only be used under roof claddings that meet the requirements of the NZBC, such as those covered by NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1 (Amendment 8, 30 November 2018).

Thermakraft Covertek 407 Fire Retardant Self-Supporting Roof Underlay, when installed in accordance with Thermakraft Covertek 407 Synthetic Roof Underlay (J2902-05/17), will assist in the total cladding system’s compliance with NZBC Clause E2.

Covertek 407 must be fixed at maximum 300 mm centres to all framing members with large-head clouts 20 mm long, 6-8 mm stainless steel staples, self drilling screws or proprietary underlay fixings. The membrane must be pulled taut over the framing before fixing.

Covertek 407 may be run vertically or horizontally. Refer to Table 2 for a summary of roof underlay support requirements. The roof underlay must extend from the ridge and overhang the fascia board by 20-25 mm.

Vertical laps must be no less than 150 mm wide. Horizontal laps must also be no less than 150 mm, with the direction of the lap ensuring that water is shed to the outer face of the underlay. End laps must be made over framing and be no less than 150 mm wide. To assist with achieving the correct lap dimension, Covertek 407 has a 150 mm lap line printed continuously along the top face.

When fixing the product in windy conditions, care must be taken due to the large sail area created.

Any damaged areas of Covertek 407, such as tears, holes or gaps around service penetrations, must be repaired. Damaged areas can be repaired by covering with new material lapping the damaged area by at least 150 mm and taping, or by taping small tears.

Shall be carried out by:

The installer shall also:

Comply with all relevant technical information relating to the products use, including information contained within the Thermakraft Covertek 407 Synthetic Roof Underlay (J2902-05/17) and the Appraisal.

End of record

Tape

Product Technical Statement: 104520

A polymeric faced modified bituminous self adhesive flashing tape

View miproducts listing




Level of assurance needed to demonstrate NZ Building

Code Compliance

Supporting documentation should include technical information by manufacturer and either a BRANZ or independent Appraisal or CodeMark


Thermakraft confirms that this minimum level of assurance has been met or exceeded by the following:

BRANZ Appraisal

878




Product Description

Thermakraft Aluband™ ensures protection from moisture damage in the window openings. Aluband is part of the Thermakraft Window Sealing Warranty System when combined with Thermakraft underlay. Aluband is a premium tape with the benefits of heavier bituminous adhesive and a foil backing offering high strength bond and excellent abrasion resistance. Aluband can be exposed to the elements for up to 42 days. For more information see BRANZ 878 [2014].

Design Guidelines

Aluband is a premium tape with the benefits of heavier bituminous adhesive and a foil backing offering high strength bond and excellent abrasion resistance. Aluband can be exposed to the elements for up to 42 days.

Quality Assurance


master iec partner


Company Contact Details

Th er ma kraft

Company: Thermakraft Ltd

Physical     11 Turin Place

Address:    East Tamaki

AUCKLAND

Postal      PO Box 58112

Address:    Botany

AUCKLAND

Telephone: 64 09 2733727

Fax:       64 09 2733726

Email:      info@thermakraft.co.nz

Website:    www.thermakraft.co.nz

Technical Statement

Scope

Thermakraft Window Sealing Flashing Tapes can be used as a flexible flashing system around window and door joinery openings on timber and steel framed buildings within the following scope: The scope limitations of NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1, Paragraph 1.1; and, with a risk score of 0-20, calculated in accordance with NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1, Table 2; and, With wall cladding systems complying with NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1; or a valid BRANZ appraisal that specifies a flexible flashing system; and, With wall underlays compatible with the flashing tape; and, situated in NZS3604 Wind Zones up to, and including ‘Extra High’.

Thermakraft Window Sealing Flashing Tapes meet the Performance Requirements of NZBC Clauses B2, Durability (B2.3.1 [a] 50 years, B2.3.1 [b] 15 years and B2.3.2), E2 External Moisture, and F2 Hazardous Building Materials.

Thermakraft Window Sealing Flashing Tapes are expected to have a serviceable life equal to that of the cladding, when installed in accordance with this application and installation sheet, provided they are not exposed to the weather or ultra-violet for a total number of no more than 42 days, or are damaged on installation.

Thermakraft Window Sealing Flashing Tapes are designed to work on all Thermakraft based building underlays that meet the requirements of NZBC E2/AS1 Table 23, and on all Thermakraft BRANZ appraised wall underlays. Aluband Sealing Flashing Tapes should be installed when temperatures are above 5°C

New Zealand Building Code (NZBC)

The product will, if employed in accordance with the supplier's installation and maintenance requirements, assist with meeting the following provisions of the building code:

Tape

Product Technical Statement: 104520

Notes

Supporting Evidence

The product has and can make available the following additional evidence to support the above statements:

BRANZ Appraisal 878


Special Conditions

Installation requirements

Aluband should be installed by or under the supervision of a suitably qualified Licensed Building Practioner, following the instructions provided on the packaging or from the Thermakraft technical literature

V? Date last validated: 17 March 2016

Date last updated: 17 March 2016

Disclaimer: The Product Technical Statement (PTS) template is copyright to Construction Information Limited. However the content of this PTS is the responsibility of the product manufacturer/supplier. Refer to the miproducts Terms and Conditions

Fire retardant absorbent breathable composite non-woven wall underlay View miproducts listing



Level of assurance needed to demonstrate NZ Building Code Compliance

Supporting documentation should include technical information by manufacturer and either a BRANZ or independent Appraisal or CodeMark



Thermakraft confirms that this minimum level of assurance has been met or exceeded by the following:

BRANZ Appraisal

695


Technical Statement

Product Description

Fire Retardant Absorbant Breathable Wall Underlay. Is a white composite Non-Woven polypropylene, specifically designed as a Wall Underlay behind exterior wall claddings. Watergate Plus offers a high degree of water resistance, with a high level of water vapour permeability.

Can be used as a wall Underlay on timber and steel framed buildings with absorbant and non-absorbant wall claddings direct fixed to framing. Can be used a Wall Underlay in a drained cavity. Can be used as an air barrier where walls are not lined (attic spaces, gable ends). Suitable up to and including "very high". Building Wind Zones of NZS 3604. Unaffected by LOSP Timber.

Scope of use

Watergate Plus is a Fire Retardant Absorbent Breathable Composite Non Woven Wall Underlay can be used as a wall underlay on timber framed buildings within the following scope:

  • •    the scope limitations of NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1, Paragraph 1.1; and,

  • •    with absorbent wall and non-absorbent wall claddings directly fixed to framing; and,

  • •    with absorbent and non-absorbent wall claddings installed over an 18mm minimum drained cavity; and

,• with masonry veneer in accordance with NZS 3604; and,

  • •    situated in NZS3604 Building Wind Zones up to, and including ‘Very High’.

Fire Retardant Absorbent Breathable Composite Non Woven Wall Underlay can be used as a wall underlay on timber framed buildings within the following scope:

New Zealand Building Code (NZBC)

The product will, if employed in accordance with the supplier's installation and maintenance requirements, assist with meeting the following provisions of the building code:

  • •    Clause B2 Durability: Performance B2.3.1(a), B2.3.1(b), B2.3.2

  • •    Clause E2 External moisture: Performance E2.3.2

  • •    Clause F2 Hazardous building materials: Performance F2.3.1

Supporting Evidence

The product has and can make available the following additional evidence to support the above statements:

BRANZ Appraisal

695


Product Criteria

Design requirements

Product Advantage:

  • •    Can be used as a wall underlay on timber and steel framed buildings with absorbent and non-absorbent wall claddings direct fixed to framing.

  • •    Can be used as a wall underlay on timber and steel framed buildings with absorbent and non-absorbent wall claddings installed over an 18mm minimum drained cavity.

  • •    Note: must not be used as a roof underlay

• Can be used as an air barrier where walls are not lined e.g attic spaces at gable ends, and is suitable for use in all Building Wind Zones of NZS3604 up to, and including ‘Very High’.


Flammability:




Company Contact Details


Thermakraft


Company:

Thermakraft Ltd

Physical

11 Turin Place

Address:

East Tamaki AUCKLAND

Postal

PO Box 58112

Address:

Botany

AUCKLAND

Telephone:

64 09 2733727

Fax:

64 09 2733726

Email:

info@thermakraft.co.nz

Website:

www.thermakraft.co.nz



Installation requirements

Watergate Plus 295 must be fixed with printed side out and the non-printed side to the frame.Must be applied to all exterior walls from below bearers to the top plate. Fix securely to the frame with fasteners such as galvanized Little Grippers, 6mm-8mm staples or 20mm large head galvanized clouts at 300mm centres horizontally and vertically.

Additional fasteners should be used around each opening to be cut out.If using either 2740mm or 1370mm width, a minimum of150mm lap is required at joins and all vertical laps must be made over studs. Make good repairs on any forced tears with White GP Tape.Insure it is wide enough to cover the height of a standard wall from below the bottom plate to the top plate. Initially, cover all windows and door openings. Use extra fastenings around each window or door opening to be cut out. It is recommended that the wall underlay is not cut and prepared for window installation until the arrival of the windows.

Maintenance requirements

No regular maintenance required.

Warrantees

For Warrantee details see link

http://www.thermakraft.co.nz/sites/default/files/Warrantee_Statement_0.pdf

Company Product Information

Environmental

Watergate plus has no known negative environment conditions

Watergate has no VOCs in manufacture installation or use

Watergate plus is recyclable at end of life with no harmful residue

^ Date last validated: 02 November 2015

Date last updated: 02 November 2015

Disclaimer: The Product Technical Statement (PTS) template is copyright to Construction Information Limited. However the content of this PTS is the responsibility of the product manufacturer/supplier. Refer to the miproducts Terms and Conditions

4171HR James Hardie® Rigid Air Barriers

^) JamesHardie

James Hardie

+64 0800 808868

info@jameshardie.co.nz

www.jameshardie.co.nz

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

BRANZ Appraisal 611 - James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers

Ref 19035. Uploaded 14 Jan 2021

Purpose:       Performance

James Hardie RAB™ Board 102641

Ref 10169. Uploaded 26 Jun 2020

Purpose:        Performance, Installation, Environmental, Warranty

Page 19 / 129


BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 611 [2011]

JAMES HARDIE RIGID

AIR BARRIERS


Appraisal No. 611 (2011)

Amended 4 October 2019

BRANZ Appraisals


Product


Technical Assessments of products for building and construction.

Scope

(Note: James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers can be used to provide structural bracing. RAB™ Board can also be used in fire resistance rated construction. These aspects have not been assessed by this Appraisal and are outside its scope.)

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 611 [2011)

Building Regulations

New Zealand Building Code (NZBC)

Clause B1 STRUCTURE: Performance B1.3.1, B1.3.2 and B1.3.4. James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers meet the requirements for loads arising from earthquake and wind [i.e. B1.3.3 (f) and (h)]. See Paragraphs 8.1 - 8.7.

Clause B2 DURABILITY: Performance B2.3.1(a), not less than 50 years, B2.3.1(b), 15 years and B2.3.2. James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers meet these requirements. See Paragraphs 9.1 - 9.3.

Clause C3 FIRE AFFECTING AREAS BEYOND THE SOURCE: Performance C3.5 and C3.7.

When used as part of an external wall system, James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers will contribute to meeting this requirement. See Paragraphs 11.2 and 11.3.

Clause E2 EXTERNAL MOISTURE: Performance E2.3.2. When used as part of the cladding system, James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers will contribute to meeting this requirement. See Paragraphs 12.1 and 12.3.

Clause F2 HAZARDOUS BUILDING MATERIALS: Performance F2.3.1. James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers meet this requirement and will not present a health hazard to people.

Technical Specification (section reformatted)

Accessories

Handling and Storage

Technical Literature

Design Information

Framing

Timber Treatment

Timber Framing

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 611 [2011)

James Hardie Rigid Air Barrier Set Out

General

Temporary Weather Protection

Structure

Mass

Wind Zones

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 611 [2011)

Table 2: HomeRAB™

NZS 3604 Wind Zone

Framing Set Out

HomeRAB™ Pre-Cladding Nailing Centres to Studs, Plates and Dwangs

Low, Medium, High and Very High

Studs at

600 mm centres maximum and dwangs at 1200 mm centres

200 mm

8.3 RAB™ Board is suitable for use in design wind pressures up to and including 4.5 kPa ULS when used in conjunction with wall cladding systems able to resist the same face load pressures. The sheets must be fixed at centres as specified in Table 3. The fixings must be positioned a minimum of 12 mm from all sheet edges, and a minimum of 50 mm horizontally and 75 mm vertically from sheet corners. The fastener heads must finish flush with the sheet surface.Basis of Appraisal

Table 3: RAB™ Board Fixing Centres

Wind Pressure

Framing Set Out

RAB™ Board Nailing Centres to Studs, Plates and Dwangs

≤ 1.5 kPa ULS (NZS 3604 Wind Zone Very High)

Studs at

600 mm centres and dwangs at 1200 mm

200 mm

> 1.5 kPa ULS

and ≤ 4.5 kPa ULS (NZS 3604 Wind Zone Extra High and above)

Studs at

400 mm centres and dwangs at 1200 mm

200 mm

Top Plate Hold Down Connections

Wall Cladding Fixing

Bracing

Inter-storey Deflection

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 611 [2011)

Durability

Serviceable Life

Maintenance

Prevention of Fire Occurring

External Vertical Fire Spread

(Note: NZBC Clause C3.5 applies only to buildings where the building height exceeds 10 m. In these instances, the compliance of the selected cladding system with all aspects of the Building Code must be addressed by the designer.)

(Note: Alternative insulation types specified by James Hardie have not been assessed by BRANZ and is outside the scope of this Appraisal.)

(Note: James Hardie Axon Panel cladding system has not been assessed by BRANZ and is outside the scope of this Appraisal.)

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 611 [2011)

External Moisture

Installation Information

Installation Skill Level Requirements

System Installation

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 611 [2011)

Joint Sealing Tape Installation

Flexible Sill and Jamb Tape Installation

Inspections

Health and Safety

Basis of Appraisal

The following is a summary of the technical investigations carried out:

Tests

Other Investigations

based on evaluation of all details within the scope and as stated within this Appraisal. The details contained within the Installation Manual have been reviewed, and an opinion has been given by BRANZ technical experts that the system will meet the performance levels of Acceptable Solution E2/AS1 for rigid wall underlays.

Quality

Sources of Information

AS/NZS 2908.2: 2000 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheet.

AS/NZS 4200.1: 1994 Pliable building membranes and underlays - materials.

AS/NZS 4201.4: 1994 Pliable building membranes and underlays - Methods of test - Resistance to water penetration.

NFPA 285: 2012 Standard method of test for the evaluation of flammability characteristics of exterior non-loadbearing wall assemblies containing components using the intermediate scale, multi-storey test apparatus.

NZS 3602: 2003 Timber and wood-based products for use in building.

NZS 3603: 1993 Timber Structures Standard.

NZS 3604: 2011 Timber-framed buildings.

Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment Record of amendments – Acceptable Solutions, Verification Methods and handbooks.

The Building Regulations 1992.

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 611 [2011)

BRANZ

Amendments

Amendment No. 1, 3 September 2013

This Appraisal has been amended to update clause changes as required by the introduction of NZBC Fire Clauses C1-C6 Protection from Fire and A3 Building Importance Levels.

Amendment No. 2, 15 December 2014

This Appraisal has been amended to replace 3.5 mm thick HomeRAB® Preclad™ Lining with 4.5 mm thick HomeRAB® Pre-Cladding. The use of James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers as an alternative to the NZS 3604 top plate hold down connections has also been included.

Amendment No. 3, 13 March 2019

This Appraisal has been amended to add 9.0 mm RAB Board sheets and to increase the construction exposure time to 180 days and inter-storey deflections, clarify non-combustibility of James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers.

Amendment No. 4, 4 October 2019

The Appraisal has been amended to extend the scope of use regarding building height and clarify external vertical fire spread performance.

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 611 [2011)

BRANZ

In the opinion of BRANZ, James Hardie Rigid Air Barriers are fit for purpose and will comply with the Building Code to the extent specified in this Appraisal provided they are used, designed, installed and maintained as set out in this Appraisal.

The Appraisal is issued only to James Hardie New Zealand, and is valid until further notice, subject to the Conditions of Appraisal.

Conditions of Appraisal

Chief Executive

Date of Issue: 26 August 2011


A pre-sealed air barrier for use behind cavities in medium to high-rise facade construction

View miproducts listing



Level of assurance needed to demonstrate NZ Building Code Compliance

Supporting documentation should include technical information by manufacturer and either a BRANZ or independent Appraisal or CodeMark




James Hardie confirms that this minimum level of assurance has been met or exceeded by the following:

BRANZ Appraisal

611



Technical Statement

Product Description

RAB™ Board is a pre-sealed rigid air barrier for use behind cavities in medium to high-rise facade constructions. It forms part of a drained and ventilated cavity or rainscreen systems and helps in equalizing the wind pressures within a cavity to that experienced on a building façade. It is normally used in specific engineering design projects. RAB™ Board also forms an effective drainage plane which helps in draining moisture. The sealer applied on RAB™ Board surface acts as moisture repellant and helps protects the timber frame from moisture.

6mm x 3000 x 1200 or 2750 x 1200 or 2450 x 1200

9mm x 3000 x 1200 or 2750 x 1200 or 2450 x 1200

New Zealand Building Code (NZBC)

The product will, if employed in accordance with the supplier's installation and maintenance requirements, assist with meeting the following provisions of the building code:

  • •    Clause B1 Structure: Performance B1.3.1, B1.3.2

  • •    Clause B2 Durability: Performance B2.3.1(a), B2.3.1(b), B2.3.2

  • •    Clause C3 Fire affecting areas beyond the fire source: Performance C3.6, C3.7(a)

  • •    Clause E2 External moisture: Performance E2.3.2, E2.3.3, E2.3.4, E2.3.5, E2.3.6

  • •    Clause F2 Hazardous building materials: Performance F2.3.1

  • •    Clause H1 Energy efficiency : Performance H1.3.1

Evidence

The product meets the requirements set out in the following documents, or relevant parts of cited standards within the documents:

Structure - B1: RAB Board installed as per its installation manual has been assessed to withstand wind pressures for various wind zones as per NZS 3604 and SED wind zones up to a wind pressure of 4.5kPa and meets the requirements of B1.3.1, B1.3.2 and B1.3.4 of Clause B1. RAB Board is tested as per BRANZ P21 test and is suitable for use in bracing applications for buildings within the scope of NZS 3604.

Durability - B2: RAB Board is manufactured in accordance with AS/NZS 2908.2 and meets the durability performance requirements of section B2.3.1(a) and B2.3.2 of Clause-B2.

External Moisture - E2: RAB Board has been tested and meets the requirements of Table 23 of E2/AS1.

RAB Board has also been appraised for use as a rigid wall underlay and temporary weatherprotecting sheathing on timber framed buildings up to 25m.

Hazardous Building Materials - F2: RAB Board complies with the requirements of F2.3.1.

Fire Performance - C: RAB Board has been assessed and is classified as non-combustible material and are suitable for use in fire rated external walls close to boundaries. Also been tested to NFPA 285 standard and is suitable for timber framed buildings more than 10m high.

Supporting Evidence

The product has and can make available the following additional evidence to support the above statements:

BRANZ Appraisal

611



Company Contact Details


JamesHardie


Company:    James Hardie

Physical       50 O'Rorke Road

Address:       Penrose

AUCKLAND

Postal        PO Box 12070

Address:       Penrose

AUCKLAND

Fax:          64 09 5254810

Email:        info@jameshardie.co.nz

Website:       www.jameshardie.co.nz


Product Criteria



Design requirements

RAB Board 6mm is a 6.0mm thick fibre cement sheet which is sealed on the face and edges and is suitable for use as a rigid air barrier in Extra High Wind (EH) zones or in wind pressures up to 4.5kPa. It complies with the requirements of Table 23 of E2/AS1. It is suitable for use as rigid underlay as per the requirement of section 9.1.4 of E2/AS1. RAB Board 6mm is also suitable to withstand high wind pressures experienced on building facades where it creates a wind barrier which equalises pressure within the cavity to the external pressures. RAB Board 6.0mm has been tested to withstand wind pressures up to 4.5kPa(ULS).

RAB Board 9mm is a 9.0mm thick fibre cement sheet which is sealed on the face and edges and is suitable for use as a rigid air barrier in Extra High Wind (EH) zones or in wind pressures up to 4.5kPa. RAB Board 9mm is suitable for specific design shear wall for residential or commercial applications where the structural design require strong/stiffer shear walls. RAB Board 9mm is an ideal rigid backing substrate for use behind the facade cavities to improve the acoustic performance of the wall assembly. The continuity of RAB Board 9mm on the exterior of framing with its heavier mass cuts down the environmental noise, blocks noise flanking paths and therefore enhances the overall acoustic performance of building facades. It complies with the requirements of Table 23 of E2/AS1. It is suitable for use as rigid underlay as per the requirement of section 9.1.4 of E2/AS1. RAB Board is also suitable to withstand high wind pressures experienced on building facades where it creates a wind barrier which equalises pressure within the cavity to the external pressures. Flexible underlays can deteriorate caused by positive/negative pumping actions created by gusting winds within the cavity and on building facade. Due to these pressures a flexible underlay may not perform as desired in the long term. RAB Board 9.0mm is suitable for use for wind pressures up to 4.5kPa (ULS).

Installation requirements

Fix as per the rigid air barriers installation manual.

When being used as a bracing element or in a fire rated system fixings are closer together. Refer to the Bracing Design Manual and/or the Fire and Acoustic Design Manual respectively.

Warrantees

RAB Board has a standard product warranty of 15 years

Company Product Information

Environmental

We aim to conduct business in an environmentally sound and sustainable manner and to use management systems and operating procedures to identify, monitor, control and reduce the impact of our operations and our products on the environment. We strive to continually improve our manufacturing processes and product formulations to minimise our carbon footprint. As such, we are committed to ecologically sustainable development (ESD) principles.

Quality Assurance

ISO 9001 (Quality Management)

Relationships


New Zealand Made


^ Date last validated: 15 October 2019

Date last updated: 15 October 2019

Disclaimer: The Product Technical Statement (PTS) template is copyright to Construction Information Limited. However the content of this PTS is the responsibility of the product manufacturer/supplier. Refer to the miproducts Terms and Conditions

4231HA James Hardie® Axon™ Panel Cladding

James Hardie

+64 0800 808868

info@jameshardie.co.nz

www.jameshardie.co.nz

^) JamesHardie

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

Axon Panel Care and Maintenance

Ref 45838. Uploaded 5 May 2022

Purpose:       Maintenance

Axon Panel Product Warranty Feb 2022

Ref 41847. Uploaded 5 May 2022

Purpose:        Warranty

James Hardie Axon™ Panel 101218

Ref 10161. Uploaded 26 Jun 2020

Purpose:       Performance, Installation, Maintenance, Environmental, Warranty

JamesHardie

Axon™ Panel

Care and Maintenance

The extent and nature of maintenance required will depend on the geographical location and exposure of the building. It is the responsibility of the Specifier to determine any site specific maintenance requirements to comply with the New Zealand Building Code.

As a guide, it is recommended that the basic normal maintenance tasks shall include, but not be limited to:

manufacturer for re-coating requirements related to ongoing paint performance

Date:

Project:

Address:

Customer Name:

Ask James Hardie™ Call 0800 808 868 | jameshardie.co.nz

© 2021 James Hardie New Zealand Limited.

TM and ® denotes a Trademark or Registered Mark owned by James Hardie Technology Limited.

Axon™ Panel

James Hardie New Zealand Limited (“James Hardie”) warrants for a period of 15 years from the date of purchase that the Axon™ Panel (the “Product”), will be free from defects due to defective factory workmanship or materials and, subject to compliance with the conditions below, will be resistant to cracking, rotting, fire and damage from termite attacks to the extent set out in James Hardie’s relevant published literature current at the time of installation. James Hardie warrants for a period of 15 years from the date of purchase that the accessories supplied by James Hardie will be free from defects due to defective factory workmanship or materials.

Nothing in this document shall exclude or modify any legal rights a customer may have under the Consumer Guarantees Act or otherwise which cannot be excluded or modified at law.

The warranty is strictly subject to the following conditions:

Disclaimer: The recommendations in James Hardie’s literature are based on good building practice, but are not an exhaustive statement of all relevant information and are subject to conditions (c), (d), (f) and (g) above. James Hardie has tested/assessed the performance of the Axon™ Panel when installed in accordance with the Axon™ Panel technical specification, in accordance with the standards and verification methods required by the NZBC and those test results demonstrate the product complies with the performance criteria established by the NZBC. However, as the successful performance of the relevant system depends on numerous factors outside the control of James Hardie (e.g. quality of workmanship and design) James Hardie shall not be liable for the recommendations made in its literature and the performance of the relevant system, including its suitability for any purpose or ability to satisfy the relevant provisions of the NZBC, regulations and standards, as it is the responsibility of the building designer to ensure that the details and recommendations provided in the relevant James Hardie installation manual are suitable for the intended project and that specific design is conducted where appropriate.

© 2022. James Hardie New Zealand Limited. TM and ® denotes a Trademark or Registered Mark owned by James Hardie Technology Limited.

©


JamesHardie


Fibre cement panel with subtle vertical lines View miproducts listing



Level of assurance needed to demonstrate NZ Building Code Compliance

Supporting documentation should include technical information by manufacturer and either a BRANZ or independent Appraisal or CodeMark



James Hardie confirms that this minimum level of assurance has been met or exceeded by the following:

Axon Panel meets the E2/VM1 test criteria. Call James Hardie for further information


Axon Panel James Hardie


Technical Statement

Product Description

James Hardie's Axon™ Panel presents you with a cladding product with subtle vertical lines. Panels can be painted any colour of the spectrum, including black. Shiplap jointing option facilitates concealed vertical joints giving it a versatile look. Combined with its superior weather resistance and durability, when you select Axon Panel you'll be designing a home that will reflect your style and personality.

New Zealand Building Code (NZBC)

The product will, if employed in accordance with the supplier's installation and maintenance requirements, assist with meeting the following provisions of the building code:

  • •    Clause B1 Structure: Performance B1.3.1, B1.3.2

  • •    Clause B2 Durability: Performance B2.3.1(b), B2.3.2

  • •    Clause C3 Fire affecting areas beyond the fire source: Performance C3.6, C3.7(a)

  • •    Clause E2 External moisture: Performance E2.3.2, E2.3.3, E2.3.4, E2.3.5, E2.3.6

  • •    Clause F2 Hazardous building materials: Performance F2.3.1

  • •    Clause H1 Energy efficiency : Performance H1.3.1

Evidence

The product meets the requirements set out in the following documents, or relevant parts of cited standards within the documents:

Structure - B1: Uniform wind face load tests have been completed at a NATA accredited James Hardie laboratory and the suitability of its fixings has been verified to meet wind pressure requirement in various wind zones classified in NZS 3604 and SED wind zone up to wind pressure of 2.5kPa and meets the requirements of B1.3.1, B1.3.2 and B1.3.4. Axon Panels have been tested as per BRANZ P21 test method for structural bracing.

Durability - B2: Axon Panel has been tested at a NATA accredited laboratory in accordance with AS/NZS 2908.2 and meets the durability performance requirements as per B2.3.1(a) and B2.3.2 of this clause.

Fire Performance - C: Axon Panel has been assessed and is classified as non-combustible material and is suitable for use on external walls close to boundaries.

External Moisture - E2: Axon Panel cavity cladding as per its details has been tested for weathertightness as per E2/VM1 (as contained within NZBC Clause E2).

Hazardous Building Materials - F2: Axon Panel complies with the requirements of F2.3.1 and will not present a health hazard when handled as per its technical specifications.

Energy Efficiency - H1: Axon Panel walls constructed using bulk insulation meets the construction R Value requirements as per Table 1 of Clause H1..

Supporting Evidence

The product has and can make available the following additional evidence to support the above statements:

Axon Panel meets the E2/VM1 test criteria. Call James Hardie for further information

Axon Panel James Hardie


Product Criteria

Design requirements

Axon™ Panel is ideal for general cladding purpose for both residential and light commercial buildings.Axon™ Panel can also be used to achieve special feature looks combined with other





Company Contact Details

64/) JamesHardie


Company:    James Hardie

Physical       50 O'Rorke Road

Address:       Penrose

AUCKLAND

Postal        PO Box 12070

Address:       Penrose

AUCKLAND

Fax:          64 09 5254810

Email:        info@jameshardie.co.nz

Website:       www.jameshardie.co.nz



amesarecangssucasneaeateroarantanaçaeane.

Installation requirements

For installation information refer to Axon™ Panel Technical Specification.

Maintenance requirements

Warrantees

Axon Panel has a standard product warranty of 15 years when installed and maintained as per the technical specification.

Company Product Information

Environmental

We aim to conduct business in an environmentally sound and sustainable manner and to use management systems and operating procedures to identify, monitor, control and reduce the impact of our operations and our products on the environment. We strive to continually improve our manufacturing processes and product formulations to minimise our carbon footprint. As such, we are committed to ecologically sustainable development (ESD) principles.

Quality Assurance

ISO 9001 (Quality Management)

Relationships

3 New Zealand Made

^ Date last validated: 21 August 2019

Date last updated: 21 August 2019

Disclaimer: The Product Technical Statement (PTS) template is copyright to Construction Information Limited. However the content of this PTS is the responsibility of the product manufacturer/supplier. Refer to the miproducts Terms and Conditions

4231HE James Hardie® EasyLap™ Panel Cladding

James Hardie

^) JamesHardie

+64 0800 808868

info@jameshardie.co.nz

www.jameshardie.co.nz

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

James Hardie EasyLap™ Panel 106438

Ref 10162. Uploaded 26 Jun 2020

Purpose:       Performance, Installation, Maintenance, Environmental, Warranty

Fibre cement wall cladding with a shiplap vertical joint View miproducts listing



Level of assurance needed to demonstrate NZ Building Code Compliance

Supporting documentation should include technical information by manufacturer and either a BRANZ or independent Appraisal or CodeMark



James Hardie confirms that this minimum level of assurance has been met or exceeded by the following:

EasyLap Panel meets the E2/VM1 test criteria. Call James Hardie for further information.


EasyLap Panel James Hardie


Technical Statement

Product Description

EasyLap™ Panel is a strong fibre cement sheet with a shiplap vertical joint. Finished on site with rolled-on acrylic texture it creates a textures look with a subtle vertical joint.

EasyLap™ Panel is installed to the CLD Structural Cavity Battens as per its Technical Specification.

Sizes:9mm thick x 2450mm or 2750mm or 3000mm long x 1200mm wide

Key Features and Benefits:

  • •    Offer a cost effective alternative to traditional texturing methods.

  • •    Fast installation: Shiplap joint eliminates the need for a vertical set joint and control joint.

  • •    Design flexibility, complement other James Hardie cladding in modern composite design.

  • •    Resistant to fire, damage from moisture and rot.

  • •    Complies with New Zealand Building Code and has a 15 year product warranty.

Scope of use

EasyLap™ Panel is used on residential and commercial buildings where the maximum wind pressure exerted on the building facade is up to 2.5kPa (ULS).

New Zealand Building Code (NZBC)

The product will, if employed in accordance with the supplier's installation and maintenance requirements, assist with meeting the following provisions of the building code:

  • •    Clause B1 Structure: Performance B1.3.1, B1.3.2

  • •    Clause B2 Durability: Performance B2.3.1(b), B2.3.2

  • •    Clause C3 Fire affecting areas beyond the fire source: Performance C3.6, C3.7(a)

  • •    Clause E2 External moisture: Performance E2.3.2, E2.3.3, E2.3.4, E2.3.5, E2.3.6

  • •    Clause F2 Hazardous building materials: Performance F2.3.1

  • •    Clause H1 Energy efficiency : Performance H1.3.1

Notes

Structure B1: Wind load tests completed at a NATA accredited James Hardie laboratory and the suitability of EasyLap Panel. Fixings have been assessed to meet wind pressure requirement in various wind zones classified in NZS 3604 and SED wind zone up to wind pressure of

  • 2.5kPa it complies with B1.3.1, B1.3.2 and B1.3.4

Durability B2: EasyLap Panel has been assessed at a NATA accredited laboratory in accordance with AS/NZS 2908.2 and meets the durability performance requirements as per B2.3.1(a) and B2.3.2 Fire Performance C: EasyLap Panel has been assessed and is classified as non-combustible material and is suitable as external walls close to boundaries

External Moisture E2: EasyLap Panel as per the details published in its technical specification has been tested for weathertightness as per E2/VM1 (as contained within NZBC Clause E2

Energy Efficiency H1: EasyLap Panel walls constructed using bulk insulation meets the construction R-Value requirements as per H1, Table 1

Evidence

The product meets the requirements set out in the following documents, or relevant parts of cited standards within the documents:

Structure - B1: Wind load tests have been completed at a NATA accredited James Hardie laboratory and the suitability of EasyLap Panel and its fixings have been assessed to meet wind pressure requirement in various wind zones classified in NZS 3604 and SED wind zone up to wind pressure of 2.5kPa and complies with the requirements of B1.3.1, B1.3.2 and B1.3.4.

Durability - B2: EasyLap Panel has been assessed at a NATA accredited laboratory in accordance with AS/NZS 2908.2 and meets the durability performance requirements as per B2.3.1(a) and B2.3.2






Company Contact Details



JamesHardie


Company:    James Hardie

Physical       50 O'Rorke Road

Address:       Penrose

AUCKLAND

Postal        PO Box 12070

Address:       Penrose

AUCKLAND

Fax:          64 09 5254810

Email:        info@jameshardie.co.nz

Website:       www.jameshardie.co.nz



of this clause.

Fire Performance - C: EasyLap Panel has been assessed and is classified as non-combustible material and is suitable for use on external walls close to boundaries.

External Moisture - E2: EasyLap Panel as per the details published in its technical specification has been tested for weathertightness as per E2/VM1 (as contained within NZBC Clause E2)

Energy Efficiency - H1: EasyLap Panel walls constructed using bulk insulation meets the construction R-Value requirements as per Table 1 of Clause H

Supporting Evidence

The product has and can make available the following additional evidence to support the above statements:

EasyLap Panel meets the E2/VM1 test criteria. Call James Hardie for further information. EasyLap Panel James Hardie

Product Criteria

Design requirements

The EasyLap™ Panel installed as per the technicalspecification provides a durable, shiplap vertical joint panel appearance for residential/ commercial building façades. The panel is finished with a site applied roll on textured acrylic paint to create a rendered look with subtle vertical joint.

EasyLap Panel is used on buildings, where the maximum wind pressure exerted on the building façade is up to 2.5kPa (ULS).

Installation requirements

Refer to technical specification. EasyLap™ Panel / CLD Structural Cavity Batten Technical Specification for further information.

Careful adherence to technical specification literature is critically important for completing EasyLap™ Panel construction. The construction shall comply with the requirements of the relevant building consent. Any variation made must be informed to the BCA.

Maintenance requirements

Warrantees

EasyLap Panel has a standard product warranty of 15 years when installed and maintained as per the technical specification.

Company Product Information

Environmental

We aim to conduct business in an environmentally sound and sustainable manner and to use management systems and operating procedures to identify, monitor, control and reduce the impact of our operations and our products on the environment. We strive to continually improve our manufacturing processes and product formulations to minimise our carbon footprint. As such, we are committed to ecologically sustainable development (ESD) principles.

Quality Assurance

ISO 9001 (Quality Management)

Relationships


New Zealand Made


^ Date last validated: 21 August 2019

Date last updated: 21 August 2019

Disclaimer: The Product Technical Statement (PTS) template is copyright to Construction Information Limited. However the content of this PTS is the responsibility of

eproucmanuacurersupper.eeroemproucsermsanonons

4239JH James Hardie® Soffits

James Hardie

+64 0800 808868

info@jameshardie.co.nz

www.jameshardie.co.nz

^) JamesHardie

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

James Hardie Eaves and Soffits Installation Manual - Aug 2017

Ref 10424. Uploaded 30 Jul 2020

Purpose:         Installation

Villaboard Soffit Lining Product Warranty

Ref 10389. Uploaded 19 May 2022

Purpose:        Warranty

Eaves & Soffits


James Hardie

Installation

Manual

AUGUST 2017 I NEW ZEALAND


Content

1

INTRODUCTION

3

6

JOINTING AND FINISHING

23

1.1

HardieSoffit™ Lining

3

6.1

General

23

1.2

HardieFlex™ Eaves Lining

3

6.2

Glancing Light

23

1.3

Eclipsa™ Eaves Lining

3

6.3

Level of Finishes

23

1.4

HardieGroove™ Soffit Lining

4

6.4

Paint Finishes

24

1.5

Villaboard™ Soffit Lining

4

6.5

Villaboard Soffit Lining Jointing and Stopping

24

1.6

Product Description

5

Mixing Instructions

24

1.7

Accessories

6

6.6

Set Joints

25

2

SAFE WORKING PRACTICES

9

7

FINISHING

26

7.1

Painting

26

3

FRAMING

11

3.1

Timber Frame

11

8

PRODUCT INFORMATION

27

3.2

Steel Frame

11

8.1

General

27

3.3

Framing Set-Out

11

8.2

Durability

27

3.4

Batten Requirements

12

8.3

Finishes

27

3.5

Skillion Roof Design

12

9

MAINTENANCE

27

4

JOINTING OPTIONS

13

PRODUCT WARRANTIES

31

HardieSoffit Lining

13

HardieFlex Eaves Lining

13

Eclipsa Eaves Lining

13

HardieGroove Soffit Lining

13

Villaboard Soffit Lining

13

5

INSTALLATION

15

5.1

General

15

5.2

Fastener Durability

15

5.3

HardieSoffit Lining

15

5.4

HardieFlex Eaves Lining

15

5.5

HardieGroove Soffit Lining Fixing Method

16

5.6

Eclipsa Eaves Lining

16

5.7

Villaboard Soffit Lining (small soffits)

17

5.8

Villaboard Soffit And Ceiling Lining (Large Areas)

18

5.9

Titan™ Facade Panel

21

5.10

Internal Swimming Pool Application

21

5.11

Special Details

22

WE VALUE

YOUR FEEDBACK

To continue with the development of our products and systems, we value your input. Please send any suggestions, including your name, contact details, and relevant sketches to:

Ask James Hardie™

Fax 0800 808 988

literaturefeedback@jameshardie.co.nz

James Hardie have a wide range of soffit linings and pre finished soffit linings that enable you to create the look you want.

Cool, wide soffits and verandahs have, over the years, been a feature which specifiers have used to provide shade from the hot summer sun and to give UV protection to exterior paintwork and interior fabrics.


of these methods — tried and proven — is the use of wide soffits, verandahs and covered outdoor living areas. James Hardie products are resistant to fire and damage from moisture and rotting when installed and maintained as directed.

James Hardie HardieSoffit Lining, HardieFlex Eaves Lining, Eclipsa Eaves Lining, HardieGroove Soffit Lining and Villaboard Soffit Lining are not suitable for use as a cladding.


Today’s high energy costs demand that all avenues be explored to develop cost-efficient ways for keeping our homes cool. One



1.1


1.2


HardieSoffit I ®

SOFFIT LINING


HardieFlex"I©

EAVES LINING



HardieSoffit™ Linings are 4.5mm thick and are specifically manufactured for the narrow soffit around the perimeter of the house or building. Standard widths of 450mm, 600mm and 750mm are available.

  • •    HardieSoffit Linings have an unsanded finish suitable for semigloss acrylics or lightly textured semi-gloss or high-gloss coatings. Smooth high-gloss coatings must be avoided as some surface undulations may be visible in critical light.

  • •    HardieSoffit Linings can be nail-fixed to timber or mechanically fixed to a steel frame.

  • •    HardieSoffit Linings can be uPVC jointed or the joints can be left expressed.


HardieFlex™ Eaves Lining are 4.5mm in thickness and are available in wider widths for use in wider soffits, ceilings and verandahs. They are complementary to the HardieSoffit Lining and are fixed and jointed in a similar way.

  • •    HardieFlex Eaves Lining has an unsanded finish suitable for semigloss acrylics or lightly textured coatings. Smooth high-gloss coatings must be avoided as some surface undulations may be visible in critical light.

  • •    HardieFlex Sheet 6mm, can also be used in eaves application for extra rigidity on larger spanning eaves.

  • •    When higher impact or wind resistance is required, 6mm thick HardieFlex Sheet is used.


1.3



Eclipsa"I©

EAVES LINING


TM


EclipsaTM Eaves Lining is a 4.5mm thick, pre-finished acrylic eave providing innovative style and enduring performance.

  • •    Easy to install, saving both time and money.

  • •    A slipsheet minimises surface marks on paint during transportation and installation.



1.4                                                1.5


HardieGroove I ®

SOFFIT LINING


Villaboard'I®

SOFFIT LINING



HardieGrooveTM Soffit Lining has the charm of traditional tongue and groove timber panelling, but has all the qualities of a modern James Hardie fibre cement product. It’s perfect for enhancing design lines on modern buildings or renovating old villas and bungalows.

  • •    HardieGroove Soffit Lining comes with a half groove length ways along the edge of the sheet to achieve concealed joints.


Villaboard™ Soffit Linings are 6mm and 9mm in thickness to suit both residential and commercial applications. The recessed edges are suitable for flush jointing to give a smooth flush finish. Ideal for larger sized soffits.

  • •    The sheets are fully sanded to give a smoother face surface.

  • •    Two long sheet edges are supplied with a recessed finish and site-cut edges can be readily ground on site. Other combinations are also available. Refer Table 2, page 5.

  • •    Square-edge sheets are also available. These sheets can be used for the alternative expressed, sealant-filled or uPVC joint finish.



This manual covers the use of HardieSoffit Lining, HardieFlex Eaves Lining, Eclipsa Eaves Lining, HardieGroove Soffit Lining, and Villaboard Soffit Lining in external eave and soffit applications. Further technical literature relating to these products and internal linings are available from James Hardie in the following manuals:

The specifier or other responsible party for the project must ensure the information and details in this manual are appropriate for the intended application and specific design and detailing is undertaken for areas which fall outside the scope of this document.

MAKE SURE YOUR INFORMATION IS UP TO DATE

When specifying or installing James Hardie products, ensure you have the current manual. If you’re not sure you do, or you need more information, visit www.jameshardie.co.nz or Ask James Hardie™ on 0800 808 868.

Table 1

HardieSoffit Lining Sheet Sizes

Square–cut edge for use with jointers

Length (mm)

Mass (kg/m2)

Width 1200mm

450

600

750

4.5mm thickness

6.5

2400

401948

401947

401946

Table 2

HardieFlex Eaves Lining Sheet Sizes

Square-cut edge for use with jointers

Width (mm)

Mass (kg/m2)

Length (mm)

1800

2400

2700

3000

4.5mm thickness

6.5

900

400194

1200

400190

400187

400185

400183

Table 3

Eclipsa Eaves Lining Sheet Sizes

Villaboard Soffit Lining Sheet Sizes


Length (mm)

Mass (kg/m2)

Width 1200mm

Edge Finish

4 rec/ edges

2 rec/ edges (long)

Square edges

6mm thickness

8.6

2400

400432

400429

400444

2700

400428

3000

400427

400442

9mm thickness

12.4

2400

400439

400436

400445

2700

400435

3000

400434

400059


Smooth recessed edge for flush jointing.

Square-cut edge also available for use with jointers.

Villaboard Lining 6mm has no chamfer on square edge sheet.

Villaboard Lining 9mm has small chamfer on square edge sheet.



Pre-finished square-cut edge sheet for use with jointers

Length (mm)

Mass (kg/m2)

Width (mm)

600

1200

4.5mm thickness

6.6

2400

404807

404808

Table 4

HardieGroove Soffit Lining Sheet Sizes

Half groove length ways to achieve concealed joints

b------ 100mm -------H i

2.5

1T mm

Half groove edge

Length (mm)

Mass (kg/m2)

Width (mm) 1200

7.5mm thickness

10.4

2400

400246

2700

400245

Table 5

1.7 ACCESSORIES

Table 6

HardieFlex™ Eaves Lining And HardieSoffit™ Lining —

Accessories / Tools Supplied by James Hardie

Accessories

Description

Product Code

Accessories

Description

Product Code

Soffit 4.5mm PVC 2-way

Jointer

2400mm long, uPVC / White

300915

Hardiejointer 5mm uPVC / White 2400mm long 750mm long 600mm long 450mm long

300729

300921

300920

300919

6mm Hardiejointer uPVC/Bone colour 2400mm long 3000mm long

300730

300734

HardieFlex 5mm

Capping Mould

2400mm long, uPVC / White

300538

6mm Capping Mould uPVC/Bone colour 2400mm long 3000mm long

300539

300540

Scotia Mould (base and cap) 2400mm long, uPVC / White

300916

Fastfix Fasteners

38 x 12mm, Nylon / White

300632

^^^^^

Inseal 3259

1.5mm thick

50mm wide x 50m long, Black compressible foam

300767

^r^^

HardieKnife™

Scoring tool for easy cutting.

305926

Table 7

Eclipsa Eaves Lining — Accessories / Tools Supplied by James Hardie

Accessories

Description

Product Code

Accessories

Description

Product Code

Hardiejointer 5mm uPVC

2400mm long

750mm long

600mm long

450mm long

300729

300921

300920

300919

Soffit 4.5mm PVC

2-way Jointer

2400mm long, uPVC / White

300915

Soffit Scotia Mould (base and cap)

2400mm long, uPVC / White

300916

HardieFlex Capping

Mould 5mm

2400mm long, uPVC / White

300538

^^1^^

Fastfix Fasteners

38 x 12mm, Nylon / White

300632

Inseal 3259

1.5mm thick

50mm wide x 50m long, Black compressible foam

300767

1

Eclipsa Eaves Lining

Touch-up Paint 15ml

Free

Ask James Hardie on 0800 808 868

i^T^^

HardieKnife™

Scoring tool for easy cutting.

305926

HardieGroove Soffit Lining — Accessories / Tools Supplied by James Hardie

Accessories

Description

Product Code

Accessories

Description

Product Code

Soffit Scotia Mould (base and cap)

2400mm long, uPVC / white

300916

^^^^^

Inseal 3259

1.5mm thick

50mm wide x 50m long, black compressible foam

300767

HardieBlade Saw Blade

Ø184mm poly crystalline diamond blade, for fast, clean cutting of James Hardie fibre cement.

300660

•

James Hardie Base Coat

Base compound for filling over screws.

4kg Pail

15kg Bag

304490

304491

^I^^^^

HardieDrive Screw s/s 316 30mm x 7g. 100 per jar For fastening to timber frames.

300928

^%Hy

Villadrive Screw 6g x 30mm For fastening to timber frames. 100/jar

5kg Box

Collated/ 1000

300992

300993

300994

iT-

HardieKnife™

Scoring tool for easy cutting.

305926

Table 9

Villaboard® Soffit Lining — Accessories / Tools Supplied by James Hardie

Accessories

Description

Product Code

Accessories

Description

Product Code

y^

Soffit Scotia Mould (base and cap)

2400mm long, uPVC / White

300916

Inseal 3259

1.5mm thick

50mm wide x 50m long, Black compressible foam

300767

Hardiejointer 6mm uPVC / Bone colour 2400mm long 3000mm long

300730

300734

9mm Hardiejointer uPVC / Bone colour 3000mm long

300736

HardieFlex Capping Mould 6mm

uPVC / Bone colour

2400mm long

3000mm long

300539

300540

Control Joint

2700mm long, uPVC / White

300978

Corner Angle uPVC 3000mm long

300669

James Hardie Top Coat

Topping compound for flush finished jointing.

3kg Pail

15kg Pail

304492

304493

James Hardie Base Coat Base compound for flush finished jointing.

4kg Pail

15kg Bag

304490

304491

HardieBlade Saw Blade Ø184mm poly crystalline diamond blade, for fast, clean cutting of James Hardie fibre cement.

300660

^’^^^^

HardieDrive Screw s/s 316

30mm x 7g 100 per jar

For fastening to timber frames.

300928

^^^v

Villadrive Screw 6g x 30mm For fastening to timber frames. 100/jar

5kg Box

Collated/1000

300992

300993

300994

^^^

FibreZip® Screws

Self drilling rib head screw Box 1000

303840

^f^^

HardieKnife™

Scoring tool for easy cutting.

305926

Components Not Supplied by James Hardie

James Hardie recommends the following products for use in conjunction with its eaves and soffit linings. James Hardie does not supply these products. Please contact component manufacturer for information on their warranties and further information on their products.

Accessories

Description

Accessories

Description

|j™----->

HardieFlex Nail

40 x 2.8mm galvanised or stainless steel nails.

^^^^

Second Coat Trowel 200mm

For installing second coats on set joints on Villaboard Lining.

Rondo P35

Control joint used in movement joints.

</^^^

Finishing Coat Trowel

For installing top coats on set joints on Villaboard Lining.

Perforated Paper Tape Joint reinforcing tape.

Corner Tool

For setting of internal corners on Villaboard Lining.

Level/straight Edge

For checking straightness of frame.

Hawk

To assist in the application of finishing compounds especially with the use of trowels.

Hand Guillotine

Guillotine for cutting fibre cement.

Hand Sander

For sanding set joints on Villaboard Lining.

Collated Screw Gun

Notched Trowel

For applying tile adhesive to face of Villaboard Lining.

Hole Saw

Broadknife 150mm

For setting of joints on Villaboard Lining.

Electric shear/Fibreshear

For cutting Villaboard Soffit Lining, HardieGroove Soffit Lining, HardieSoffit Lining, HardieFlex Eaves Lining.

1^^

Flashing to Table 20 ‘E2/AS1’

Flashing fabricator

Flashing Tape

Proprietary tape to adhere to building wrap.

Tyvek, Protecto wrap or similar

■=^_______1

Flexible Joint Sealant

Tube

Sikaflex MS or similar

Masking Tape

3M Scotch™ Blue 2090 - I8E 70006576972 or

Sellotape 5855 Long Life

Paperback Corners

‘Goldline’ corner moulds

Polyurethane Tape

Adhesive Sealant Sikaflex-11FC by Sika Seal N Flex-1 by Bostik

Acrylic Paint

Dulux X10 or similar brand

Waterproofing Admixture

Multiplast Resin by Plaster Systems. Used in diluted form over Villaboard Lining sheet edges to control moisture suction before flush stopping.

2 Safe working practices

Use one of the following methods based on the required cutting rate:

BEST

  • •    HardieKnife™

  • •    Hand guillotine

  • •    Fibreshear

BETTER

  • •    Dust reducing circular saw equipped with HardieBlade™ Saw Blade and M Class extractor unit.

GOOD

  • •    Dust reducing circular saw with HardieBlade™ Saw Blade

Working outdoors

A Make sure you work in a well ventilated area

it Position cutting station so wind will blow dust away from yourself and others in the working area

A Cut products with either a HardieKnife or fibre cement shears or, when not feasible, use a HardieBlade™ Saw Blade (or equivalent) and a dust-reducing circular saw attached to a M Class extractor unit

it When sawing, sanding, rebating, drilling or machining fibre cement products, always:

  • -    Wear your P1 or P2 mask (correctly fitted in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions) and when others are close by, ask them to do the same

  • -    If you are not clean shaven, then use a powered air respirator with a loose fitting head top.

  • -    Wear safety glasses

  • -    Wear hearing protection

  • -    When others are close by, ask them to do the same.

Working indoors

  • ■ 9 Never cut using a circular saw indoors

it Position cutting station in a well ventilated area

it Cut ONLY using a HardieKnife, hand guillotine or fibreshears (manual, electric or pneumatic)

it Make sure you clean up BUT never dry sweep. Always hose down with water/wet wipe or use an M Class extractor unit

IF CONCERN STILL EXISTS ABOUT EXPOSURE LEVELS

OR YOU DO NOT COMPLY WITH THE ABOVE PRACTICES, YOU SHOULD ALWAYS CONSULT A QUALIFIED INDUSTRIAL HYGIENIST.


STAY HEALTHY WHEN WORKING WITH BUILDING PRODUCTS CONTAINING CRYSTALINE SILICA


Crystalline Silica

What is it? Why and when is it a health hazard?

Crystalline Silica is

  • •    Commonly known as sand or quartz

  • •    Found in many building products e.g. concrete, bricks, grout, wallboard, ceramic tiles, and all fibre cement materials

Why is Crystalline Silica a health hazard?

  • •    Silica can be breathed deep into the lungs when present in the air as a very fine (respirable) dust

  • •    Exposure to silica dust without taking the appropriate safety measures to minimise the amount being breathed in, can lead to a potentially fatal lung disease – silicosis – and has also been linked with other diseases including cancer. Some studies suggest that smoking may increase these risks.

  • •    The most hazardous dust is the dust you cannot see!

When is Crystalline Silica a health hazard?

  • •    It’s dangerous to health if safety protocols to control dust are not followed when cutting, drilling or rebating a product containing crystalline silica.

  • •    Products containing silica are harmless if intact (e.g. an un-cut sheet of wall board).

FAILURETO ADHERE TO OUR WARNINGS, SAFETY DATA SHEETS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS WHEN WORKING WITH JAMES HARDIE PRODUCTS MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.

AVOID BREATHING IN CRYSTALLINE SILICA DUST!


Safe working practices

■^ NEVER use a power saw indoors or in a poorly ventilated area

■p NEVER dry sweep

it ALWAYS use M Class extractor unit as a minimum and always hose down with water/wet wipe for clean up

■p NEVER use grinders

it ALWAYS use a circular sawblade specifically designed to minimise dust creation when cutting fibre cement – preferably a sawblade that carries the HardieBlade™ logo or one with at least equivalent performance.

I* ALWAYS follow tool manufacturers’ safety recommendations it ALWAYS expose only the minimum required depth of blade for the thickness of fibre cement to be cut

II


t ALWAYS wear an approved properly-fitted, approved dust mask (P1 or P2) or respirator


Working Instructions

  • •    Refer to Recommended Safe Working Practices before starting any cutting or machining of product.



JAMES HARDIE IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE DUE TO IMPROPER STORAGE AND HANDLING.

TIPS FOR SAFE AND EASY HANDLING

Weatherboard products

  • ■^ Do not lift planked products flat and in the middle

  • ■^ Carry the products on the edge

it If only one person is carrying the product, hold it in the middle and spread arms apart to better support the product

it If two people are carrying the plank, hold it near each end and on edge

it Exercise care when handling weatherboard products to avoid damaging the edges/corners

Sheet products

it Carry with two people

it Hold near each end and on edge

li Exercise care when handling sheet products to avoid damaging the edges/corners


HardieBlade™ Saw Blade

The HardieBlade™ Saw Blade used with a dust-reducing saw is ideal for fast, clean cutting of James Hardie fibre cement products. A dust-reducing saw uses a dust deflector or a dust collector connected to a vacuum system. When sawing, clamp a straightedge to the sheet as a guide and run the saw base plate along the straight edge when making the cut.


Hole-Forming

For smooth clean cut circular holes:

• Mark the centre of the hole on the sheet.

• Pre-drill a ‘pilot’ hole.


  • •    Using the pilot hole as a guide, cut the hole

to the appropriate diameter with a hole saw fitted to a heavy duty electric drill.


For irregular holes:

  • •    Small rectangular or circular holes can be cut by drilling a series of small holes around the perimeter of the hole then tapping out the waste piece from the sheet face.


STORAGE & DELIVERY

Keeping products and people safe

Off loading

it James Hardie products should be off-loaded carefully by hand or by forklift.

it James Hardie products should not be rolled or dumped off a truck during the delivery to the jobsite.

Storage

James Hardie products should be stored:

it in their original packaging

it under cover where possible or otherwise protected with a waterproof covering to keep products dry

it off the ground – either on a pallet or adequately supported on timber or other spacers

it flat so as to minimise bending

3 Framing

  • 3.1    TIMBER FRAME

Timber framing must be in accordance with NZS 3604 Timber Frame Buildings.

Specific design to NZS 3603 and AS/NZS 1170 can also be undertaken providing that:

  • •    the framing centres do not exceed those given in this specification

  • •    the framing member widths conform to this specification.

Also refer to the Approved Document for NZBC Clause B2 ‘Durability’ and NZS 3602 (Timber and Wood-Based Products for use in Buildings) regarding timber treatment requirements and allowable moisture contents in timber for various components of the building. Also refer to the framing manufacturer’s literature for further guidance on the use of treated timber.

  • 3.2    STEEL FRAME

The figures in this brochure are drawn for timber framing. However, steel framing and furring channels can also be used.

All metal framing centres are to be the same as specified for timber frame in this manual.

Steel framing members must be fabricated from light-gauge sheet steel 0.55mm thick minimum to 1.6mm maximum. If heavier sections are used difficulties may be experienced in fixing the self-drilling, self-tapping fasteners. Refer to specific details for the minimum flange width requirements.

Sheets must not be fixed directly to drawn steel or hot-rolled steel sections. These must first be battened out with ex 50mm-thick (40mm minimum) timber battens or light-gauge metal furring channels.

Screw-fix 6mm or thicker sheets only.

Screw fixings can be finished flush or sunk a maximum of 0.5mm below the sheet surface ready for filling.

NOTE: The fasteners must not be over driven as will reduce the holding capaciity of the sheet.

  • 3.3    FRAMING SET-OUT

For the framing set-out of up to 600mm-wide soffit refer to Figure 1.

For the framing set-out of 601mm to 1200mm wide soffits refer to Figure 2.

  • 3.3.1    Pre-finished steel fascia/gutters

When pre-finished steel fascia/gutters are used the soffit edge must be supported 4mm minimum into fascia recess, similar to Figure 10.

Ribbon board to be continuous for product fixing.

NOTE: Because of the limited fascia groove available with some metal fascias a supporting ribbon board will be required with fixings at 300mm centres maximum. Pre-finished soffits can distort due to surface tension when adequate edge support is not provided.

Table 11

Eaves Lining Framing Centres

Eaves And Soffit

Width (mm)

Wind Zone

Max. Soffit Bearer Centres (mm)

Up to 450

L, M

1200

H, VH

900

451 - 600

L, M

1200

H, VH

600

601 - 1200

L, M, H, VH

600

Various

EH*

600

*HardieFlex Sheet 6mm or Villaboard Lining 6mm must be used in EH Wind Zone with soffit bearers maximum 600mm centres.

Figure

: Eaves and soffit up to 600mm

. up to 600mm wide

soffits

Refer iointinq

options

4.5mm thick HardieSoffit™

■r i

O'

*12mm

i

i \

' ।

Lining

40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ nails at 200mm centres

Soffit bearers

Ribbon board

edge distance

11 ’ i

i i

CD

I I

•!

ro

1

£

Q or

E

E

LO *

o o

E

2

  • • i i i

  • • i i i

j______

Fascia board - fix sheet / edge into fascia board rebate a minimum of 4mm

HardieFlex™ nails

' to centre of sheet

distances

Notes

  • 1.    HardieFlex™ HardieSoffif be used as c

  • 2.    When fastfix and Figure 8

nails are Lining.

n alterna fastening and 9.

the usual fixing method for he fastfix method can also Ive.

s are used refer to Table 7

Figure 2: Eaves and soffits 601mm to 1200mm

  • 1.    HardieFlex™ nails are the usual fixing method for HardieSoffit™ Lining. The fastfix method can also be used as an alternative.

  • 2.    When fastfix fastenings are used refer to Table 7 and Figure 8 and 9.

NOTE: Because of the limited fascia groove available with some metal fascias a supporting ribbon board will be required with fixings at 300mm centres maximum. Pre-finished soffits can distort due to surface tension when adequate edge support is not provided.

Battens are required when sheets are fixed over:

Timber battening is to be a minimum of 35mm deep x 40mm wide to achieve adequate sheet nail penetration.

Steel battens must be minimum 0.55mm thick, 23mm deep and have a bearing surface of 38mm min. Battens must be galvanised to meet the durability requirements of the New Zealand Building Code (NZBC) and fixed to manufacturer’s specifications. All battening centres and sheet fixing is to be strictly in accordance with the framing and fixing required by this manual. Care must be taken to ensure the battens are packed and aligned to give a true even surface for the sheets to be fixed. Check the face of the battens with a long straight-edge before fixing sheets.

When installing soffit linings direct to the under side of skillion roof framing, ensure that sufficient ventilation has been provided within the roof space. The temperatures within these smaller roof spaces can reach very high levels in certain conditions and this can cause cracking in flush stopped joints due to excessive movement in roof framing. Therefore the framing in skillion soffits and ceilings need a specific engineering design consideration.

General design guide for a narrow strip of flash stopped soffits is to provide a control joint at 4.8m centres.

General design guide for large flash stopped soffits is to provide control joints at 4.8m x 3.6m in either direction when fixing to this type of framing.


4 Jointing options

  • •    All soffit lining sheet edges must be supported by framing and/or a fascia board.

HARDIESOFFIT LINING

  • •    Refer to Figure 3 for uPVC Hardiejointer detail

  • •    Refer to Figure 5 for express joint detail

  • •    Refer to Figure 9 for two-way uPVC jointer

HARDIEFLEX EAVES LINING

  • •    Refer to Figure 3 for uPVC Hardiejointer detail

  • •    Refer to Figure 4 for butt joint detail

  • •    Refer to Figure 5 for express joint detail

  • •    Refer to Figure 9 for two-way uPVC jointer

ECLIPSA EAVES LINING

  • •    Refer to Figure 3 for uPVC Hardiejointer detail

  • •    Refer to Figure 8 for Fastfix Fasteners fixing detail. Use a 6mm diameter masonry drill bit to drill a hole and fix fasteners

  • •    Refer to Figure 9 for Two-way uPVC Jointer

HARDIEGROOVE SOFFIT LINING

  • •    Sheets have half groove along the long edges for butt jointing

  • •    Sheets to have chamfer formed on site along the short edge for butt jointing

VILLABOARD SOFFIT LINING

  • •    Refer to Figure 6 for flush joint details. Refer to Section 5.5 for flush jointing

  • •    Refer to Figure 3 for uPVC Hardiejointer detail

  • •    Refer to Figure 4 for butt joint detail

  • •    Refer to Figure 5 for express joint detail

  • •    Refer to Figure 7 for sealant joint detail


Figure 5: Expressed joint detail


12mm min

12mm min

10mm max gap



Figure 4: Butt joint detail


45mm min


Figure 7: Sealant joint detail



40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ nails

30mm wide polypropylene or flashing tape

Edge of board must be primed prior to installation


Factory edge



Figure 8: Fastfix fastener fixing detail                         Figure 10: Cladding detail with scotia mould


15mm15mm

2 - 3mm gap

Note: Use a 6mm drill bit for drilling holes in sheet for fixing Fastfix fasteners.

Figure 11: Brick veneer detail with scotia mould

Figure 9: Two-way uPVC jointer

45mm min

6mm gap


provide ventilation as required by NZS 3604

Note: Use a 6mm drill bit for drilling holes in sheet for fixing Fastfix fasteners.

5 Installation

This installation manual covers the use of James Hardie Eaves and Soffits for buildings within the scope of NZS 3604. For all other buildings specific engineering design is required.

  • 5.1    GENERAL

Refer to Table 11 and Figure 1 and 2 regarding nail fixing centres, for framing and types of fasteners.

The eaves/soffits must be sealed against claddings to minimise moisture ingress behind the claddings. The roof must have been installed before installing the soffits linings. Where the soffits are sloping upwards away from the wall, a mechanical flashing must be provided in the soffit to wall junction. The flashing is fixed under soffit lining and laps over the face of cladding by 35mm minimum Refer to Figure 27 - Figure 30.

  • 5.1.1    Drip Edge

All soffit linings must either be installed with a grooved fascia, refer Figure 10, or with exterior cladding which forms a drip edge below the soffit lining by 15mm minimum. Soffit linings are generally fitted into the recess formed in fascia board to form the drip edge.

  • 5.1.2    Structural Ceiling Diaphragms

HardieFlex Eaves Lining and Villaboard Soffit Lining are suitable for use in structural ceiling diaphragms as per NZS 3604. Refer to the James Hardie Bracing Design Manual.

  • 5.1.3    Curved Applications

HardieFlex Eaves Lining and Villaboard Soffit Lining can be used for curved applications.

The minimum bending radii are shown below.

Table 12

Curved Soffit/Ceiling Minimum Bending Radii

Along length (mm)

9mm Villaboard Lining

3000

6mm Villaboard Lining

1800

HardieFlex Eaves Lining

1800

HardieSoffit Lining

1800

NOTE: The bending radii given above require no pre-wetting of the sheet. Mechanical fix at 200mm centres maximum to entire framing.

To maintain the smoothness of the curve, ceiling battens are generally required at spacings as shown below.

Table 13

Curved Lining — Soffit Batten Spacing

Range of Radii (mm)

Soffit batten spacing (mm)

1800 to 3000

300

Above 3001

400

  • 5.1.4    FIRE RATED SOFFITS

For full details refer to the James Hardie Fire and Acoustic Design Manual or Ask James Hardie on 0800 808 868.

  • 5.2    FASTENER DURABILITY

Fasteners used in external applications must meet the minimum durability requirements of the NZBC. NZS 3604 specifies the requirements for fixing’s material to be used in relation to the exposure conditions and are summarised in Table 14.

Table 14

Exposure conditions and nail selection prescribed by NZS 3604

Zone / Nail Material

Zone D*

Zone C outside sea spray zone and Zone B and geothermal hot spots

Bracing — All zones

Grade 316 Stainless

Hot-dipped galvanised or 316 stainless

Grade 316 Stainless

* (Zone C areas where local knowledge dictates that increased durability is required, appropriate selection shall be made)

When using screws to fix into steel framing a minimum class-3 coated screw must be used.

  • 5.3    HARDIESOFFIT LINING

For framing and fixing schedules refer to Section 3.

All sheet edges are to be supported by framing or a fascia board. Fixings are to be at 200mm centres to all framing (refer Figures 1 and 2).

HardieSoffit Lining up to a max. width of 600mm can be jointed up to a maximum 150mm off the ceiling/soffit batten when using uPVC jointers.

NOTES

  • 1.    Use of 6mm thick sheets will minimise the deflection and enhance the impact resistance.

  • 2.    Sheets can be jointed as per Section 4.

  • 3.    Do not screw fix 4.5mm thick sheets.

  • 5.4    HARDIEFLEX EAVES LINING

For framing and fixing schedules refer to Section 3.

All sheet edges are to be supported by framing or a fascia board. Fixings are to be at 200mm centres to all framing (refer Figures 1 and 2).

NOTES

  • 1.    Use of 6mm thick sheets will minimise the deflection and enhance the impact resistance.

  • 2.    Sheets can be jointed as per Section 4.

  • 3.    Do not screw fix 4.5mm thick sheets.

For framing and fixing schedules refer to Section 3.

The recommended fixing methods are combined nail and adhesive or screw and adhesive. (Refer Figure 12).

To achieve a concealed joint, butt the long edges together (half grooved). (Refer Figure 13).

Figure 13: Sheet edge and groove detail

100mm centres

Figure 12: Nail or screw and adhesive fixing

Note: Sheets are grooved along the length of the sheet.

1200mm wide soffits

Fascia board

7.5mm HardieGroove™ Soffit Lining

Daubs of adhesive at 300mm centres

Double nails or screws 50mm apart to centre of sheet

Ribbon board

40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ nails or Villadrive screws at 200mm centres

Butt joint with

1 - 2mm gap

NOTES

  • 1.    Do not place nails or screws within 100mm of the adhesive daubs.

  • 2.    Fix with either HardieFlex nails 40 x 2.8mm (galvanised or 316 stainless steel), Villadrive wood screws or HardieDrive stainless steel 30mm x 7g wood screws.

  • 3.    Use only stainless steel fixings in sea spray zones.

  • 4.    When butt jointing short ends of HardieGroove Lining in ceiling/ soffit applications, the short edges must be cut square and have chamfer formed.

Nails must be finished flush with the sheet surface. Screw heads can be finished 0.5mm below the sheet surface and stopped.

In steel framing the fasteners should be driven as close as possible to the stud corners to avoid deflection of the stud flange

  • 5.5.1    Finishing

Once the sheets are in place, fill over all driven fixings with James Hardie Base Coat to the required level of finish.

  • 5.6 ECLIPSA EAVES LINING

  • •    Eclipsa Eaves Lining are to be supported by bearers and fasteners at the maximum spacings specified for the 4.5mm sheets in Section 3, Table 11 and Figures 3, 8 and 9 of this manual

  • •    To fix larger soffit, ceiling or verandah applications provide a perimeter frame to all sheet edges and intermediate nogging at the centres shown in Table 11.

  • •    Fix the Eclipsa Eaves Lining into the fascia board groove then nail into the ribbon board at 300mm centres with 40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex nails. Ensure nails will be hidden by the scotia mould or timber scotia (refer Figures 10, 11 and 14).

  • •    Use a 6mm-diameter masonry bit to drill holes and fix Fastfix fasteners (refer Figures 8 and 9).

  • •    Eclipsa Eaves Lining up to a maximum 600mm width can be jointed up to a maximum 150mm off the ceiling/soffit batten when using uPVC jointers.

    Figure 14: Fastfix fastener and adhesive fixing

  • 5.6.1    Fastfix fasteners

Fastfix fasteners (38mm long) can be used as an alternative fixing for prefinished soffit and ceiling systems in conjunction with adhesives.

Drill a 6mm-diameter hole through the sheet and framing to insert the Fastfix fastener. In timber the hole must be 40mm deep.

  • 5.6.2    Masking Tape

The recommended masking tape for use with Eclipsa Eaves Lining is 3M Scotch Blue I8E 2090 or Sellotape 5855 longlife. This tape can only be left on the Eclipsa Eaves Lining for maximum 7 days, otherwise tape removal may cause paint loss.

  • 5.7 VILLABOARD SOFFIT LINING

(SOFFITS UP TO 1200mm)

Villaboard Lining 6mm-thick is used when a smooth sanded sheet is required to achieve a painted flush finish.

Refer to the framing fixing schedule Section 3 Table 11, Figures 1 and 2, and finishing schedules on Section 6.

Refer to the flush jointing procedures, Section 6.

Fix with either HardieFlex nails 40 x 2.8mm (galvanised or 316 stainless steel), Villadrive sood screws or HardieDrive stainless steel 30mm x 7g wood screws

Screws finished 0.5mm below surface,

Nails finished flush with surface.

Figure 15: Nail/screw and adhesive fixed soffit

Fascia board

Villaboard® Lining

Double nails or screws 50mm apart to centre of sheet

Daubs of adhesive at 300mm centres

Soffit bearers

Ribbon board

40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ nails or Villadrive screws at 200mm centres

Figure 16: Soffit cross section


  • 5.7.1    Control Joints

Control joints are required in long runs of Villaboard Lining soffits/ ceilings to accommodate structural movement. Control joints must also be provided where the soffits change in direction, change in level, where there is a construction joint in framing or where the soffits continue into passage ways etc. See Table 15 for maximum control joint spacing and Figure 17 for a typical control joint detail.

  • 5.7.2    Jointing Options

Villaboard Soffit Lining is suitable for:

  • •    Flush-jointed narrow strip soffits around a building

  • •    Flush-jointed ceilings over verandahs, porches and entryways to residential and small-scale commercial buildings

  • •    Expressed, uPVC-jointed and sealant-filled joint ceilings where a smooth surface finish is required

    • All edges to be supported by the framing. Table 15

    Maximum spacing for control joints (m)

    STEEL FRAMING

    TIMBER FRAMING

    General

    4.8

    7.2


In these applications sheets must be jointed on the framing as shown in Figures 1 and 2. Control joints, as shown in

Figure 17, must be located at a distance as specified in Table 15.

Sheets must not be fixed to the bottom cord of roof trusses.

Figure 18: Ceiling layout

at corners

Figure 17: Control joint


NOTE

Refer Section 5.7.3 for skillion roof design.

  • 5.8 VILLABOARD SOFFIT AND CEILING LINING (LARGE AREAS)

For standard commercial soffits and ceilings, framing must be at 600mm maximum centres and 6mm thick Villaboard Soffit Lining can be used. For high-impact areas, heavy-use commercial areas, and high-wind areas, framing at 600mm maximum centres and 9mm thick Villaboard Soffit Lining should be used. Sheets must not be fixed to the bottom cord of roof trusses. Timber or steel ceiling battens must be fixed to the underside of the roof truss. Sheets must be laid in an offset pattern so that adjacent end joints do not coincide. Timber ceiling battens must comply with the requirements of NZS 3604 or the specific engineering design. Steel ceiling battens must be a minimum of 37mm wide x 23mm deep x 0.55mm thick and have a bearing surface of 37mm minimum. Battens must be galvanised steel (275 g/m2 zinc coating), have a suitable coating to meet the durability requirements and be fixed to the manufacturer’s specifications. Refer to the flush-jointing and finishing procedures on Section 6.

For specific engineering design projects consideration must be given to framing deflections expected due to loadings and appropriate selection of sheet jointing method must be made.

NOTE

  • 1.    It is recommended that flush stopping of joints is suitable when using recessed edge Villaboard Lining.

  • 2.    When nogs not installed for perimeter support, the unsupported sheet edges across the framing must be supported by back blocking using a 300 – 400mm wide Villaboard Lining strip adhered to rear face and centred between the framing.

  • 5.8.1    Control Joints

The ceilings must be divided into bays not exceeding 7.2 x 4.8m. To permit movement, control joints must be formed at the perimeter of each bay (refer Figures 19, 20, 21 and 22) and at the junction of large ceilings with narrow passage strips or where there is a change in direction (also refer Figures 20 and 21). Each bay must be independent of adjacent bays and the surrounding building structure. When the ceilings or soffits contain sloping areas then control joint centres must be reduced to coincide with the slope change lines (refer Figure 22). Framing members (to which the sheet is fixed) must not continue across this control joint. Sheets shall be fixed across the ceiling joists or ceiling battens (refer Figures 24 and 25). Figures 20 and 21 show control joints with the battens running in the same direction as the sheet joint. When these ceilings are wider than one sheet width the sheets can be fixed to the framing provided the control joints are placed to limit the bay size to 7.2m x 4.8m maximum.

Figure 21: Timber control joint detail

Figure 19: Control joint layout

Gap 10mm minimum 12mm maximum

Bearers

Acoustic sealant (optional)

Villaboard® Lining

Fix at 200mm centres with

2.8mm HardieFlex™ nail

Flush over then remove protective tape


uPVC control joint section (refer Table 8)

Figure 20: Steel ceiling batten control joint detail


Figure 22: Directional changes to soffits and ceilings — control joint

Villaboard® Lining

Control joint (refer Figure 21)

4200mm maximium between control joints

Steel or PVC tie at 300mm centres

Two fixings into each framing member each side of tie


Control joint (refer Figure 21)

Note: Tie fixings to be 40 x 2.8mm HardieFlex™ nails.

Figure 23: Skillion Roof/Ceiling


  • 5.8.2    Skillion Roof Design

When installing soffit linings direct to skillion roof framing ensure that sufficient ventilation has been provided within the roof space. The temperatures within these smaller roof spaces can reach very high levels in certain conditions and this can cause cracking in flush stopped joints due to excessive movement in framing. Therefore the framing in skillion soffits and ceiling need a static engineering design consideration. General design guide is to provide control joints at 4.8m x 3.6m in either direction when fixing to this type of framing.

  • 5.8.3    Fixing Option One

A smooth surface finish is obtained by minimising the visible sheet fixings. For painted finishes the combined nail or screw and adhesive method gives this superior finish (refer Figure 24). Fix at 200mm centres down each sheet end with edge fixings in each joist or batten. Double-fix in the centre of each joist or batten. Do not place nails or screws within 100mm of adhesive daubs. Daubs of wallboard adhesive 25mm diameter and 15mm thick must be applied to the intermediate joists or battens at 250mm centres (refer Figure 24). When nogs are not installed for perimeter support, the unsupported edges between ceiling joists or battens must be supported with back blocking using a 300-400mm wide Villaboard Lining strip adhered to rear face and centred between framing.

NOTES

  • 1.    All surfaces to receive adhesive must be clean, free of dust, oil etc.

  • 2.    Ensure daubs of adhesive never coincide with permanent fastener points, as adhesive shrinkage may cause fastener head protrusion.

    Figure 24: Nail or screw and adhesive fixing

  • 5.8.4    Fixing Option Two

For an alternative nail or screw-fixing method, fasteners are to be driven along the sheet perimeter at 200mm centres and along intermediate ceiling battens at 250mm centres (refer Figure 25).

When nogs are not installed for perimeter support, the unsupported edges between ceiling joists or battens must be supported with back blocking using a 300-400mm wide Villaboard Lining strip adhered to rear face and centred across ceiling joists.

  • 5.8.5    Column Or Wall Abutments

Soffit sheeting must be free to move independently from the building element it abuts with. This is critical for flush-jointed sheeting, otherwise cracking at the joint may occur.

  • 5.8.6    Square-Edge Villaboard Lining Ceilings And Soffits

Square-edge Villaboard Lining is used for butt-joint; expressed-joint or uPVC-jointed ceilings.

  • 5.9    TITAN FACADE PANEL

May be used as soffit with expressed joint when installed as per Figure 5 and fixings as per Villaboard Soffit Lining.

  • 5.10    INTERNAL SWIMMING POOL APPLICATION

For fixing Villaboard Lining and HardieGroove Lining in internal swimming pool areas;

  • •    The sheets must be back and edge sealed before installation.

  • •    When fixing Villaboard Lining to the ceiling under a skillion roof, roof ventilation must be considered to minimise thermal movement and sheet joint cracking.

  • •    All Villaboard Lining recessed sheet joints must be stopped.

  • •    Alternatively, when using square edge Villaboard Lining, the sheet joint must be butted over an Inseal 3259 tape with an appropriate flexible sealant in the 1mm joint.

  • •    All HardieGroove Lining joints must have continuous bead of sealant applied to edge of sheet before butting together.

Only stainless steel fasteners must be used.

  • •    Full perimeter fixing required.

  • •    In addition, it is recommended that H3.1 treated timber ceiling battens are used to resist decay due to higher condensation levels present in this area.

Figure 27: Sloping soffit and direct fixed flatsheet cladding


Figure 29: Sloping soffit and direct fixed weatherboard cladding


Figure 28: Sloping soffit and cavity fixed flatsheet cladding


Figure 30: Sloping soffit and cavity fixed weatherboard cladding


FOR VILLABOARD LINING

  • 6.1    GENERAL

Villaboard Soffit Lining is finished with paint complying with parts 7, 8, 9 and 10 of AS 3730. The application and maintenance must be in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.

NOTE: Before flush stopping sheet edges must be sealed with Multiplast resin, water proofing admixture or other similar products.

  • 6.2    GLANCING LIGHT

In some instances, due to glancing light, set joints may be noticeable in Villaboard Lining walls, especially where paint finishes have a high gloss level. Work closely with your builder or designer to minimise this.

Artificial lighting needs to be considered in relation to soffits.

Where glancing light is an issue its effect can be lessened by:

  • •    Artificial light shading devices.

  • •    The use of light coloured, matt finish paints.

  • 6.3    LEVEL OF FINISHES

Different levels of finishes are typically specified for different applications. Higher levels of finishes are used to address the glancing light issues with painted Villaboard Soffit Lining referred to above. A description of the various levels of finishes and the jointing/coating requirements can be found in Table 16.

Table 16

Levels of Finishes

Level of finish

Definition*

Typical jointing/setting

Finish

0

This level of finish may be useful in temporary construction.

No stopping, taping, finishing or accessories are required. The work is confined to gluing or screwing/nailing sheets in place.

For use in areas where finishing and stopping is not considered necessary.

1

For use in plenum areas above ceilings, in areas where the work would generally be concealed, or in building service corridors and other areas not normally open to public view.

Joints and corner joints will be set with James Hardie Base Coat reinforced with perforated paper tape.

Surface free from excess jointing compound. Tool marks and ridges are generally acceptable.

2

For use in warehouse, storage or other areas where surface appearance is not of primary concern.

Joints and corner joints will be set with James Hardie Base Coat reinforced with perforated paper tape and James Hardie Top Coat.

Minor tool marks and ridges are generally acceptable.

3

For use in areas which are to receive heavy or medium texture (spray or hand applied) finishes or where heavy wall paper coverings are to be applied as the final decoration. This level of finish is not generally suitable where smooth painted surfaces or light to medium wall coverings are specified.

Joints and corner joints will be set with James Hardie Base Coat reinforced with perforated paper tape and James Hardie Top Coat.

This level of finish must be sufficiently smooth to accept heavy vinyl, tiles or textured coatings without blemishes.

4

This is generally the accepted level of finish for domestic construction. It is used where light textures or wall coverings and smooth textured finishes and satin/flat/low sheen paints are illuminated by noncritical lighting.

Refer to flush jointing recommendations on page 24.

All joints and corner joints will have tape embedded in James Hardie Base Coat applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories.

This application is applicable to recessed edge sheets only. The use of square edge sheets will require a high build application and coating finish.

For use where light-texture coatings or wallpaper or other lightweight wall coverings are to be applied. For painted finishes in non-critical lighting areas flat and low-sheen textured paints are to be applied. Gloss and semi-gloss paints are not generally suitable over this level of finish as any minor blemish will show under critical light.

The weight, texture and sheen level or wall coverings applied over this level of finish must be carefully evaluated. Joints and fasteners must be adequately concealed if the wall-covering material is lightweight, contains limited pattern, has a gloss finish, or any combination of these features is present. Unbacked vinyl wall coverings are not suitable over this level of finish.

5

This level of finish is for use where gloss or semi-gloss paints are specified or where critical lighting conditions occur on satin, flat or low sheet paints.

Refer to page 23 steps 1–4 for jointing.

Final James Hardie Base Coat application should be feathered out to approximately 200mm + each side of the joint. Then a full skim coat of James Hardie Top Coat must be applied over entire sheet surface in order to achieve a uniform finish.

This application is applicable to recessed edge sheets only.

The use of square edge sheets will require a high build application and coating finish.

This level of finish is for use where gloss, semigloss, low-sheen or non-textured paints are specified or where critical lighting conditions occur.

*Reference: AS/NZS 2589.1: ‘Gypsum lining in residential and light commercial construction — Application and finishing. Part 1: Gypsum plasterboard’

  • 6.4    PAINT FINISHES

Prior to application of paint finishes, remove any residual sanding dust and ensure the surface is suitable for paint application.

Always follow the paint manufacturer’s recommendations for paint suitability, mixing and application.

NOTES

  • 1.    Use of a ‘sealer coat’ or ‘preparation undercoat’ is recommended.

  • 2.    Do not tile ceilings.

MIXING INSTRUCTIONS

Table 17

James Hardie Base Coat Mixing Instructions

Step 1

First, add 1 part of clean water into bucket.

Then add 2½ parts James Hardie Base Coat powder

Allow to soak for 1 minute.

1 minute

  • 6.5    VILLABOARD SOFFIT LINING JOINTING AND STOPPING

Villaboard Soffit Lining joints are set with James Hardie jointing compounds reinforced with perforated paper tape. Recessed edge sheet joints require joint setting by using the jointing products outlined. The performance of joints is the responsibility of the installer, as this is governed by the installation practices and the standard of workmanship applied. However, James Hardie considers that the recommendations provided in Table 16 describe best practice to reduce the risk of joint cracking or other problems. There are various factors that can affect the performance of jointing compounds on edge recessed fibre cement substrates. These factors include the framing, movement, installation quality, vibrations, moisture, humidity, temperature, etc. To achieve satisfactory joint performance these factors need to be carefully considered and understood by the installer and designer when positioning joints and selecting jointing compounds. Furthermore, it is important that the jointing compound used has the physical attributes required to perform considering these factors. James Hardie compounds have been specifically developed for use with Villaboard Soffit Lining.

In addition, provision for movement needs to be made by the installation of control joints. Refer to clasue 5.7.1.

COMPOUND COVERAGE

1kg of Base Coat will provide approximately 5 lm of standard joints.

1kg of Top Coat will provide approximately 5.6 lm of standard joints.

NOTE

Follow the mixing instructions carefully when mixing James Hardie Base Coat and Top Coat.

2 minutes

Water

Step 2

Mix for 1½ – 2 minutes using paint mixer or equivalent. (approximately 2500-3000rpm)

James Hardie Base Coat is NOT like the plaster based compounds. Initial mixing will indicate a dry mix and further mixing WITHOUT further addition of water will deliver the ideal workable paste.

Warning: Inadequate or over mixing can lead to poor workability and can cause performance issues. Do not hand mix.

Step 3

The mix at this stage should be consistently smooth.

Based on the environmental conditions (i.e. temperature and humidity) you may add maximum of 25ml of water per 1Kg of base coat powder in the mix at this stage to adjust workability. Mix it well.

(Note: Adding excess water than the recommendation may delay the drying of base coat and may cause joint cracking due to excessive shrinkage.)

Mix should be glossy and smooth. There should be no lumps in the mix.

Important Notes:

  • 1.    Do not apply James Hardie Base Coat in temperatures above 40º C or below 5º C.

  • 2.    Allow the compounds to dry before applying the next coat. The drying time will vary between 12 to 24 hours depending upon the weather conditions.

  • 3.    Site cut and site recessed sheet edges must be sealed with an acrylic sealer e.g. Dulux Acraprime 501/1, Dulux 1 Step or similar product.

  • 4.    In corners, use James Hardie uPVC internal/external corner mould primed with Dulux Primerlock or similar. A ‘GIB® Goldline™ Platinum’ corner mould can also be used.

  • 5.    Use only perforated paper tapes in straight joints.

  • 6.    It is recommended that one (1) base coat bag is mixed in three (3) portions.

  • 7.    Before stopping the sheet edges, Multiplast Resin or a similar product in diluted form must be applied over the sheet edges. Mix the resin as per the manufacturers recommendations.

Product Life:

James Hardie Base Coat has a shelf life of 12 months in unopened bags when stored in a cool dry place.

James Hardie Base Coat has a bag life of 1 month if opened bags are resealed and stored in a cool dry place.

  • 6.6    SET JOINTS

Step 1 — Preparation

Ensure that the recesses are clean and free of dust and contaminants. Sheet edges must be sealed with Multiplast resin, water proofing admixture or other similar products. If working conditions are hot and dry, dampen the area around the joint prior to working.

NOTE

The jointing method shown below provides a Level 4 finish. For more information about this and other finishes refer to page 21.

Step 2 — First Coat

Apply James Hardie Base Coat to fill the recess with a 150mm broad knife.

Step 3 — Embed Tape

Firmly embed the perforated paper tape centrally into the joint using a 50mm broad knife. Ensure that there are no voids under the tape and remove excess compounds.

Step 4 — Thin Layer

Immediately cover tape with a thin layer of James Hardie Base Coat applied with a 150mm broadknife.

NOTE

Steps 5, 6 and 7 are only required for paint and wall paper finish.

Step 5 — Second Coat

When the first coat is fully dry, use a 200mm wide second coat trowel to apply the James Hardie Base Coat. Apply this coat approximately 180mm wide, laid down over the recess and feather the edges.

Step 6 — Finishing Coat

Ensure the second coat is fully dry. Using a finishing trowel, apply a coat of James Hardie Top Coat 280mm wide centrally over the joint and feather out the edges. Allow to dry fully before sanding. Sand with a 180 grit sand paper to achieve a smooth finish for painting.

  • 7.1    PAINTING

HardieSoffit Lining, HardieFlex Eaves Lining, Villaboard Soffit Lining and HardieGroove Soffit Lining sheets are to have a minimum of two coats of acrylic paint applied after fixing in order to meet the requirements of the NZBC. All sheets must be coated within 3 months of installation.

Use quality 100% acrylic paints. Economy paints are not recommended because generally they are less well bound, less moisture resistant and more prone to mould growth.

In all cases the manufacturer’s specification for the selected paint must be followed. Note that some paints require an undercoat before applying finish coats.

Damp, shady situations, proximity to bush, agricultural paddocks or seaspray environments may induce an extra tendency to mould growth. Use mould-inhibiting and alkaline-resistant undercoats and consult the paint manufacturer for details of maximum mouldresistant paints.

Before painting, remove any surface grime or other contaminants and ensure the HardieSoffit Lining, HardieFlex Eaves Lining, Villaboard Soffit Lining and HardieGroove Soffit Lining is dry. Paint must not be applied when the air temperature is below 10˚C.

When using uPVC moulds avoid dark colours (paints must have light reflection of 40% or more) as excessive movement may cause buckling of the uPVC when exposed to direct sunlight.

Enamel-based paints can be used, utilising a three-coat system.

For full details apply to the selected paint manufacturer before commencing the work.

Step 7 — Fastener Heads

Apply a finishing coat of James Hardie Base Coat to fastener heads, feathering out the edges. Allow to fully dry before sanding.


8 Product 9 Maintenance information

  • 8.1    GENERAL

HardieSoffit Lining, HardieFlex Eaves Lining, Eclipsa Eaves Lining, HardieGroove Soffit Lining and Villaboard Soffit Lining are a cellulose fibre reinforced cement building product. The basic composition is Portland cement, ground sand, cellulose fibre and water.

HardieSoffit Lining, HardieFlex Eaves Lining, Eclipsa Eaves Lining, HardieGroove Soffit Lining and Villaboard Soffit Lining is manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2 ‘Cellulose-Cement Products Part 2: Flat Sheets’ (ISO 8336 ‘Fibre Cement Flat Sheets’).

James Hardie New Zealand Limited is an ISO 9001 ‘Telarc’ certified manufacturer. HardieSoffit Lining, HardieFlex Eaves Lining, Eclipsa Eaves Lining, HardieGroove Soffit Lining and Villaboard Soffit Lining are classified Type A, Category 3 in accordance with AS/NZS 2908.2 ‘Cellulose-Cement Products’.

For Safety Data Sheets (SDS) visit www.jameshardie.co.nz or Ask James Hardie on 0800 808 868.

  • 8.2    DURABILITY

Resistance to moisture/rotting

HardieSoffit Lining, HardieFlex Eaves Lining, Eclipsa Eaves Lining, HardieGroove Soffit Lining and Villaboard Soffit Lining has demonstrated resistance to permanent moisture induced deterioration (rotting) and has passed the following tests in accordance with AS/NZS 2908.2:

  • •    Heat rain (Clause 6.5)

  • •    Water permeability (Clause 8.2.2)

  • •    Warm water (Clause 8.2.4)

  • •    Soak dry (Clause 8.2.5)

  • 8.3    FINISHES

HardieSoffit Lining, HardieFlex Eaves Lining, Eclipsa Eaves Lining, HardieGroove Soffit Lining and Villaboard Soffit Lining must be paint finished within 90 days of their installation. Refer to the paint manufacturer for paint suitability, mixing and application.

  • 8.4    GROUP NUMBER CLASSIFICATION

HardieGroove Lining and Villaboard Lining have a ‘Group Number’ classification of 1 – S as per the requirements of Clause C of the NZBC.

It is the responsibility of the specifier to determine normal maintenance requirements for eaves and soffits to comply with NZBC Acceptable Solution B2/AS1. The extent and nature of maintenance will depend on the geographical location and exposure of the building. As a guide, it is recommended that basic normal maintenance tasks shall include but not be limited to:

  • •    Washing down exterior surfaces every 6-12 months*,

  • •    Pre-painted soffits, such as Eclipsa Soffit Lining, when used in harsh costal environments, the soffit must be washed down using a hose and soft brush minimum once every four months in addition to the other maintenance requirements*,

  • •    Re-applying exterior protective finishes**,

  • •    Maintaining the exterior envelope and connections including joints, penetrations, flashings and sealants,

  • •    Cleaning out gutters, blocked pipes and overflows as required,

  • •    Pruning back vegetation close to or touching the building.

  • *    Do not use a water blaster to wash down the soffits.

  • * *Refer to your paint manufacturer for washing down and recoating requirements related to paint performance.

All James Hardie eaves and soffit linings come with a 15 year product warranty. Pre-finished products such as Eclipsa Eaves Lining come with a 10 year coating warranty and 15 year warranty on the base sheet. All accessories supplied by James Hardie are warranted for a period of 15 years. For full warranty details visit www.jameshardie.co.nz or Ask James Hardie on 0800 808 868.

Disclaimer: The recommendations in James Hardie’s literature are based on good building practice, but are not an exhaustive statement of all relevant information and are subject to conditions (c), (d), (f) and (g) in each products warranty under “Conditions of Warranty”. James Hardie has tested the performance of the HardieSoffit™ Lining, HardieFlex™ Eaves Lining, Eclipsa™ Eaves Lining, HardieGroove™ Lining and Villaboard™ Soffit Lining, and when installed in accordance with the HardieSoffit™ Lining, HardieFlex™ Eaves Lining, Eclipsa™ Eaves Lining, HardieGroove™ Lining and Villaboard™ Soffit Lining installation manual, in accordance with the standards and verification methods required by the New Zealand Building Code (NZBC) and those test results demonstrate the product complies with the performance criteria established by the NZBC. However, as the successful performance of the relevant system depends on numerous factors outside the control of James Hardie (e.g. quality of workmanship and design) James Hardie shall not be liable for the recommendations made in its literature and the performance of the relevant system, including its suitability for any purpose or ability to satisfy the relevant provisions of the NZBC, regulations and standards, as it is the responsibility of the building designer to ensure that the details and recommendations provided in the relevant James Hardie installation manual are suitable for the intended project and that specific design is conducted where appropriate.

Copyright April 2019. © James Hardie New Zealand Limited. TM and ® denotes a Trademark or Registered Mark owned by James Hardie Technology Limited.

James Hardie



Copyright April 2019. © James Hardie New Zealand Limited. TM and ® denotes a Trademark or Registered Mark owned by James Hardie Technology Limited


Product Warranty


Villaboard

SOFFIT LINING


TM


James Hardie New Zealand Limited (“James Hardie”) warrants for a period of 15 years from the date of purchase that the Villaboard™ Soffit Lining (the “Product”), will be free from defects due to defective factory workmanship or materials and, subject to compliance with the conditions below, will be resistant to cracking, rotting, fire and damage from termite attacks to the extent set out in James Hardie’s relevant published literature current at the time of installation. James Hardie warrants for a period of 15 years from the date of purchase that the accessories supplied by James Hardie will be free from defects due to defective factory workmanship or materials.

Nothing in this document shall exclude or modify any legal rights a customer may have under the Consumer Guarantees Act or otherwise which cannot be excluded or modified at law.

CONDITIONS OF WARRANTY:

The warranty is strictly subject to the following conditions:

Disclaimer: The recommendations in James Hardie’s literature are based on good building practice, but are not an exhaustive statement of all relevant information and are subject to conditions (c), (d), (f) and (g) above. James Hardie has tested the performance of the Villaboard™ Soffit Lining when installed in accordance with the Villaboard™ Soffit Lining Installation Manual, in accordance with the standards and verification methods required by the NZBC and those test results demonstrate the product complies with the performance criteria established by the NZBC. However, as the successful performance of the relevant system depends on numerous factors outside the control of James Hardie (e.g. quality of workmanship and design) James Hardie shall not be liable for the recommendations made in its literature and the performance of the relevant system, including its suitability for any purpose or ability to satisfy the relevant provisions of the NZBC, regulations and standards, as it is the responsibility of the building designer to ensure that the details and recommendations provided in the relevant James Hardie installation manual are suitable for the intended project and that specific design is conducted where appropriate.

Copyright April 2019. © James Hardie New Zealand Limited. TM and ® denotes a Trademark or Registered Mark owned by James Hardie Technology Limited.

4424RL RoofLogic Ultratherm Xtreme Fibertite Roofing System

RoofLogic Limited +64 04 4757663 sophia@rooflogic.co.nz www.rooflogic.co.nz/

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

Branz Appraisal 884 FiberTite Roofing Systems

Ref 10710. Uploaded 17 May 2022

Purpose:       Performance

Page 76 / 129


BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 884 [2020]

FIBERTITE ROOFING SYSTEMS


Appraisal No. 884 (2020)

This Appraisal replaces BRANZ

Appraisal No. 884 (2015)



BRANZ Appraisals

Technical Assessments of products for building and construction.


// Seaman Corporation

Seaman Corporation

1000 Venture Blvd

Wooster

Ohio 44691

Web: www.fibertite.com


Marketed By:

ROOFLOGIC

INT€LUG6NT ROOFING SOLUTIONS



Rooflogic

PO Box 1848

Wellington 6140

Tel: 04 475 7663

Web: www.rooflogic.co.nz



BRANZ


BRANZ

1222 Moonshine Rd, RD1, Porirua 5381 Private Bag 50 908

Porirua 5240, New Zealand

Tel: 04 237 1170

branz.co.nz



Product

1.1 FiberTite Roofing Systems are fully bonded, ketone ethylene ester (KEE) based waterproofing membranes for roofs and decks.

Scope

  • 2.1    FiberTite Roofing Systems have been appraised as roof and deck waterproofing membranes on buildings within the following scope:

  •    the scope limitations of NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1, Paragraph 1.1; or,

  •    the scope of limitations of NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1, Paragraph 1.1 with regards to building height and floor plan area when subject to specific structural design; and,

  •    with substrates of plywood or suspended concrete slab; and,

  •    with minimum falls for roofs of 1:30 and decks of 1:40; and,

  •    with deck size limited to 40 m2; and,

  •    situated in NZS 3604 Wind Zones, up to, and including Extra High.

  • 2.2    FiberTite Roofing Systems have also been appraised as roof and deck waterproofing membranes on buildings within the following scope:

  •    subject to specific structural and weathertightness design and,

  •    with substrates of plywood or suspended concrete slab; and,

  •    situated in specific design wind pressures up to a maximum design differential ultimate limit state (ULS) of 6 kPa; and,

  •    with the weathertightness design of junctions for each specific structure being the responsibility of the building designer.

  • 2.3    Roofs and decks waterproofed with FiberTite Roofing Systems must be designed and constructed in accordance with the following limitations:

  •    nominally flat or pitched roofs and decks constructed to drain water to gutters and drainage outlets complying with the NZBC; and,

  •    with no steps within the deck level, no integral roof gardens and no downpipes directly discharging to the deck; and,

  •    with the deck membranes continually protected from physical damage by a pedestal protection system.

  • 2.4    The design and construction of the substrate and movement and control joints is specific to each building, and therefore is the responsibility of the building designer and building contractor and is outside the scope of this Appraisal.

  • 2.5    The membranes must be installed by Rooflogic approved applicators.


BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 884 [2020]

Building Regulations

New Zealand Building Code (NZBC)

Clause B2 DURABILITY: Performance B2.3.1 (b), 15 years. FiberTite Roofing Systems meet this requirement. See Paragraphs 10.1 and 10.2.

Clause E2 EXTERNAL MOISTURE: Performance E2.3.1 and E2.3.2. FiberTite Roofing Systems meet these requirements. See Paragraphs 13.1 - 13.9.

Clause F2 HAZARDOUS BUILDING MATERIALS: Performance F2.3.1. FiberTite Roofing Systems meet this requirement and will not present a health hazard to people.

Technical Specification

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 884 [2020]

Handling and Storage

Technical Literature

Design Information

General

Structure

Substrates

Plywood

Concrete

Existing Construction

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 884 [2020]

Durability

Serviceable Life

Chemical Resistance

Maintenance

Prevention of Fire Occurring

External Moisture

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 884 [2020]

Installation Information

Installation Skill Level Requirement

construction, in accordance with instructions given within the Rooflogic Technical Literature and this Appraisal.

Preparation of Substrates

Membrane Installation

Inspections

Health and Safety

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 884 [2020]

Basis of Appraisal

The following is a summary of the technical investigations carried out:

Tests

Other Investigations

Quality

Sources of Information

AS/NZS 2269: 2012 Plywood - Structural.

BRANZ Good Practice Guide - Membrane Roofing, 2nd Edition, 2015.

NZS 3101: 2006 Concrete structures standard.

NZS 3604: 2011 Timber-framed buildings.

ICC-ES - AC75 - Membrane roof covering systems, July 2010.

Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment Record of amendments - Acceptable Solutions, Verification Methods and handbooks.

The Building Regulations 1992.

BRANZ Appraised

Appraisal No. 884 [2020]

BRANZ

In the opinion of BRANZ, FiberTite Roofing Systems are fit for purpose and will comply with the Building Code to the extent specified in this Appraisal provided they are used, designed, installed and maintained as set out in this Appraisal.

The Appraisal is issued only to Seaman Corporation, and is valid until further notice, subject to the Conditions of Appraisal.

Conditions of Appraisal

Chief Executive

Date of Issue: 27 May 2020

WINDOW SYSTEMS

Care, maintenance and warranty

FOR YOUR WINDOWS AND DOORS

«iK^!

.sfe

‘■i^

! W

%t/^

i*'£?^^^^*#4i

WINDOW SOLUTIONS

4^

MV

«Ml H- x<^










Producer Statement/Warranty

Our windows and doors comply with the New Zealand building code

All products supplied by Altherm Window Systems meet or exceed the requirements of the New Zealand Building Code and New Zealand Standards; NZS4211, Performance of Windows, and NZS4223, Glazing in Buildings - Parts 1-4 incl.

This means our windows and doors have been designed and successfully tested to perform in New Zealand’s most diverse conditions, and will:

In accordance with the TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF WARRANTY (altherm.co.nz/terms), a warranty for all Altherm Window Systems products

is provided, under normal conditions of use, against failure of materials and/or workmanship for a period of 5 years from the date of practical completion.

The surface finishing of the aluminium extrusion is covered by a separate Performance Warranty which is dependent on the actual finish selected.

A window and door hardware/component warranty protects against defects in manufacturing, functionality and surface finish for a period of 5 years, provided care and maintenance guidelines have been followed. Plated (soft) finishes are excluded from the warranty.

PLEASE NOTE

Warranty details

Warranty Number:

Manufacturer:

Warranty queries should be directed to the above manufacturer

.zx. i_n-1—i ^= r? ix/x WINDOW SYSTEMS

FSC

4610AG AGP Glazing Residential


SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS


AGP IGU Warranty 2101

Ref 19055. Uploaded 17 Jun 2022

Purpose:        Warranty


Architectural Glass Products Limited

+64 07 8498880

technical@agpl.co.nz

www.agpl.co.nz


Architectural Glass Products Limited (AGP) hereby provide the following warranty (“Warranty”) regarding Insulating Glass Units (IGUs).

IGUs supplied by AGP meet, or exceed, the requirements of the New Zealand Building Code and New Zealand Standards NZS 4223, Glazing in buildings - Parts 1-4 included, Joint Australian/New Zealand Standard AS/NZS 4667 (Quality requirements for cut-to-size and processed glass).

This means our IGUs have been designed and successfully tested to perform in New Zealand’s diverse conditions, and will, in accordance with the standards:

will remain free of;

This Warranty is only for IGUs (comprising two or more glass panes) manufactured by AGP with either a silicone or a polysulfide secondary seal at the perimeter of the unit.

In accordance with the TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF WARRANTY, this Warranty is provided, under normal conditions of use, against failure of materials and/or manufacture for a period of 12 years from the date of supply to You.

WARRANTY TERMS AND CONDITIONS -

This Warranty is given by us to the original purchaser (“You”) for IGUs manufactured by AGP (“We” or “us”). The Warranty is subject to the terms and conditions set out below.

Where We elect to do A or B We do not guarantee an exact colour match for any replacement.

We otherwise exclude all liability for loss and damage (including without limitation all indirect and consequential loss).

In all cases, our liability under this Warranty is limited to the value of the IGUs supplied to You.

Whether you have provided enough information supporting this Warranty shall be at our discretion.

First Name* |

Last Name* |

Address* |

Address |

Suburb* |

Town/City* |

Postcode* |

Phone* |

Email* |

Installation Date* |

Purchased from* |

Warranty/Purchase Order number* |

4811S Sika Sealants


Sika (NZ) Ltd +64 0800 745269 info@nz.sika.com https://nzl.sika.com/


SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

Sikaflex AT-Facade 101970

Ref 30595. Uploaded 9 Aug 2021

Purpose:         Installation


For sealing joints in porous and non porous and non-porous façade substrates eg concrete, aluminium

View miproducts listing

master iec partner

Company Contact Details

Company:      Sika (NZ) Ltd


Level of assurance needed to demonstrate NZ Building Code Compliance

Supporting documentation should include self-assessment and technical information by manufacturer


LOW



Sikaflex confirms that this minimum level of assurance has been met or exceeded by the following:

BRANZ Appraisal

613


Physical        85-91 Patiki Road

Address:       Avondale

AUCKLAND


Postal         PO Box 19192

Address:       Avondale

AUCKLAND


Technical Statement

Email:         info@nz.sika.com

Website:        https://nzl.sika.com/

Product Description

Sikaflex AT-Façade is specifically designed to seal movement joints in building façade systems for both cladding and windows. It is capable of a service movement +/-25% in expansion and contraction of a given joint width. Sikaflex AT-Façade is able to bond to a wide variety of substrates. It is assessed to conform to the performance requirements of the NZBC E2 AS1 by BRANZ (appraisal Number 613(2008))

Scope of use

Sikaflex AT-Façade is a Polyurethane based joint sealant It is suitable for a wide variety of substrates and features excellent UV stability and weathering resistance. Sikaflex AT-Façade meets EC1 requirements for very low emissions. It is not compatible with bitumen or rubber waterproofing membranes. This product can be specified as part of a full Sika waterproofing system from basement to roof to form a complete and compatible waterproofing system

New Zealand Building Code (NZBC)

The product will, if employed in accordance with the supplier's installation and maintenance requirements, assist with meeting the following provisions of the building code:

Notes

Sikaflex AT-Façade has been tested and meets the requirements of the following standards;

ISO11600 Class F 25LM for façade joint sealants

EMICODE EC1 plus R, very low emissions

Cleanroom certification for TVOC and biological growth

Supporting Evidence

The product has and can make available the following additional evidence to support the above statements:

BRANZ Appraisal

613

Product Criteria

Design requirements

Please refer to the Product Data Sheet

Installation requirements

Please refer to the Method Statement

Company Product Information

Quality Assurance

1 ISO 9001 (Quality Management)

Relationships


Member of New Zealand Green Building Council

^ Date last validated: 09 August 2021

Date last updated: 09 August 2021

Disclaimer: The Product Technical Statement (PTS) template is copyright to Construction Information Limited. However the content of this PTS is the responsibility of the product manufacturer/supplier. Refer to the miproducts Terms and Conditions

CAD File: S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae Colle

Copyright RESOLVE iTARCHITECTS 2022©



Project Name:

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street

Avalon Hutt City

Prepared for:

Naenae College


Issued for:


WRP Review & Procurement


Location Plan


Scale 1:20000


Architectural Drawings

No. Sheet Name

Revision

500

Construction Details

A

501

Construction Details

A

502

Construction Details

A

503

Construction Details

A

504

Construction Details

A

505

Construction Details

A

506

Construction Details

A

507

Construction Details

A

508

Construction Details

A

509

Construction Details

A

510

Construction Details

A

511

Construction Details

A

512

Construction Details

A

513

Construction Details

A

514

Construction Details

A

515

Construction Details

A

516

Construction Details

A

517

Construction Details

A

700

Joinery Schedule

A


Architectural Drawings


No.

Sheet Name

Revision

000

Location Plan

A

001

General Notes

A

100

Plan - Ground - Existing/Demo

A

101

Plan - Clerestory - Existing/Demo

A

102

Plan - Roof - Existing/Demo

A

110

Plan - Ground - Proposed

A

111

Plan - Ground - Proposed 1:50

A

112

Plan - Clerestory - Proposed

A

113

Plan - Roof - Proposed

A

114

Plan - Rainfall Calculation

A

200

Elevations - Existing

A

201

Elevations - Existing

A

210

Elevations - Proposed

A

211

Elevations - Proposed

A

212

3D Views - Proposed

A

213

3D Views - Existing & Proposed

A

214

3D Views - Existing & Proposed

A

300

Sections

A

301

Sections

A

302

Sections

A

303

Sections - Proposed Enlarged 1:20

A

304

Sections - Proposed Enlarged 1:20

A


Location Plan

Scale 1:1000


PROPERTY INFORMATION

Parcel ID:

Legal Description:

Address:

Earthquake Zone:

Exposure Zone:

Climate Zone:

Wind Region:

Lee Zone:

Rainfall Intensity:

Wind Zone :


3944421 & 4053628 Lots 1 & 2 DP 18397 910 High Street, Avalon.

Zone 3

Zone C

Zone 2

W

No

70

Very High


Project No:R21112

Date:Monday, 15 August 2022

Drawing :Location Plan, DWG 000 Rev -A


RESOLVE’:


ARCHITECTS


PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON - RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


EXISTING AND DEMO PLAN

2110 Demolition

I            I Existing timber framed walls to remain.

Remove elements indicated with hatching or broken lines an/or notation as required to facilitate roof and exterior wall remediation.

Remove existing interior walls, linings etc as per interiors package by IR Group.

Walls & Windows:

rW

rWX

rRWX

Remove existing direct fixed timber boards or fibre cement sheet wall claddings and underlay.

Window to be removed.

Refer to Existing/Demo Plan & Elevations.

Window to be removed and retained for re-use into existing opening. Remediate and store securely.

Refer to Existing/Demo Plan & Elevations.

Roofs and Skylights:

eR

rR

rSX

rCX

Existing roof retained, prepare for new overlay roof system.

Existing profiled metal roof cladding and underlay removed.

Existing skylight to be removed.

Existing canopy to be removed.

Spouting and Downpipes:

Remove all spouting and downpipes.

Allow to temporarily remove all pipes, vent grates, antenas, lights, taps, misc items as required for removal of wall cladding and set aside for reinstallation or replace with new if required after reclad.

3897 Replacement & Treatment of Decayed Timber

Replacing Covered Rotten Timber

The following is an outline summary of the what to do if rotten timber or timber with excess moisture content is found where cladding is removed to carry out remedial work. Excess moisture in timber is defined as timber with a moisture content in excess of 16%.

  • 1.    Where cladding is removed appointed NZIBS Registered Building Surveyor to be notified to inspect and identify damaged timber framing to be removed.

Photographic record of existing timber framing to be made.

  • 2.    Cut out all defective timber identified as directed by building surveyor (timber to be removed to be marked and photographic record to be made showing timber identified for removal)

  • 3.    Treat all remaining timber (including the cut ends) as directed with Protim Framesaver timber preservative to manufacturers specifications and instructions (2 liberal coats of PROTIM FrameSaver - colour red). This is designed to be applied in-situ and the main active ingredient is Boric acid. (refer specifications for full application details)

  • 4.    Replace cut out framing with treated timber to match size and placement of existing (refer specifications for treatment of timber). Photographic record made of replaced timber prior to recladding.

Refer to specification section 3897 Replacement & Treatment of Decayed Timber

Refer also to Quality Assurance Plan

PROPOSED PLAN

GENERAL NOTES

  • •    Refer to Relevant Trade Specification Sections

  • •    Refer to manufacturers installation instructions & BRANZ appraisals

  • •    Refer to 200 ELEVATIONS Series for selected exterior wall claddings.

  • •    Refer to CONSTRUCTION DETAILS 500 series drawings

3820 Carpentry

wall framing notes:

NOTE: All timber framing to be SG8 unless noted otherwise

Windzone is Very High for all NZS3604:2011 tables and figures.

All existing timber framed walls remain. Remediate/replace damaged timbers as per directive of qualified timber remediation specialist.

For all timber treatments refer to carpentry section of the specification.

Allow for solid blocking to wall framing to support apron upstand and cavity construction.

Allow for solid blocking to wall framing to support shelving, lining edges... etc.

Allow for doubling stud under ends of all lintels, allow for trimming studs as per NZS3604:2011 table 8.5, or refer to engineer's dwgs.

Allow for double studs to all vertical sheet joins to new Hardiflex exterior cladding.

Lintel fixing to trimmer studs refer to NZS 3604: 2011 Table

  • 8.14 and figure 8.12)

Fixing trimmer studs to floor. (Refer NZS 3604: 2011 figure

  • 8.12)

Refer bracing specification and plans for specific requirements for bracing walls.

Fixing roof framing to wall framing refer to NZS 3604:2011 table 10.1.

NOTE: refer to engineers drawings for:

  • -    Wall and roof bracing

  • -    Structural support

  • -    Concrete foundations

    Lintels: (Grade SG8 to NZBC 3604 Table 8.9)

    Location

    Loaded

    Dim (m)

    Span (m)

    Size (mm)

    nW05

    1.0

    2.0

    90x90

    nW08

    2.8

    2.0

    190x90

    nW09

    1.9

    1.4

    90x90

    nW10

    1.9

    0.8

    90x90

    nD01

    2.0

    4.0

    290x90

    nD02

    2.0

    4.0

    290.90

    nD03

    1.9

    3.3

    240x90

    Lintel Option: Prolam PL8 LVL

    nD03

    1.9

    3.3

    190x90

Timber trim - Exterior: Refer to details.

Timber trim - Interior:

Refer to IR Group interior project documentation.

Wall Cladding:

Refer to elevations for exterior wall claddings.

Windows and Skylights:

nWX New window joinery: Refer 4521AE for APL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS & DOORS - EDUCATION FACILITIES

nSX New Skylight: Refer 4554VS for VELUX OPENING & FIXED SKYLIGHTS

4711P PINK® BATTS® & BIB INSULATION

  • -    R2.6 fibreglass insulation to all exterior wall cavities

Typical Insulation Notes:

  • -    Wall insulation to extend continuously up to the underside of the new insulated overlay roof system.

  • -    Existing ceiling insulation: Remove if practical to remove, do not add to the existing ceiling space insulation as this may cause interstitial condensation forming within the building.

5120 Linings

Wall lining notes:

Refer to IR Group interior project documentation.

Exterior Fittings:

Allow to reinstate all pipes, vent grates, antennas, lights, taps, misc items as required which were removed to carry out the remedial work.

ROOF PLAN

4300 GENERAL ROOFING NOTES

Exposure Zone: C

Wind Zone: Zone VH

Refer to Relevant Trade Specification Sections

Refer to manufacturers installation instructions & BRANZ appraisals.

Refer to CONSTRUCTION DETAILS 500 series drawings.

NOTE: all roof penetrations/flashings are to be within the scope of work of the roofing contractor

eR

nR1

nR2

Existing roof cladding retained.

New overlay roof system with waterproof membrane roof cladding.

New overlay roof system with waterproof membrane on plywood substrate over new entrance roof structure.

ROOF FRAMING

3820 Carpentry (roof framing notes):

  • -    Any new replacement timber framing to be SG8.

  • -    For new roof elements, refer to Str. Eng. Documentation.

  • -    All wall bracing by Str. Eng.

  • -    Read this drawing in conjunction with Str. Eng. drawings

Truss design, refer specification for truss design & layout.

new proprietary roof truss, H1.2 treated at 900mm max ctrs as shown.

ROOF CLADDING

4161T THERMAKRAFT UNDERLAYS, FOILS, DPC, DPM, & TAPES

For underlays that are not part of the Roof Logic Ultrtherm

MSR & Xtreme systems.

Roof Underlay: Thermakraft Covertek 407 Flashing Tape: Thermakraft ThermaFlash.

Joining Tape: Thermakraft general purpose tape.

Existing steel roof cladding: trapezoidal and tray profile roof on existing roof structure to remain in place to avoid disturbing asbestos layer beneath.

New overlay roof system installed over exisitng metal roof cladding.

Roof Fixing: Roof Fixings by overlay roof system manufacturer to be approporiate for the design loads of site. Allow for specific loadings @ corners & the periphery of the roof where localised pressure factors apply

Roof fixing in Very High Wind Zones (refer 3604 for specific fixing types)

4337E ECOPLY ROOFING & DECKING

Substrate:19mm H3.2 CCA treated CD plywood fix with s/s screws, butt jointed allow 3mm gap between sheets with tape over.

4424RL ROOFLOGIC ULTRATHERM XTREME FIBERTITE

ROOFING SYSTEM

Membrane: RL single ply membrane, Colour: Slate Grey PIR insulation: RL PIR board 40mm .

Vapour Barrier: RL Vapour barrier.

Basedeck: New plywood substrate.

4821 Roof Flashings

To be fabricated from same material as roof unless detailed otherwise. Material: Colorsteel Maxx BMT 0.55 Min.

Saddle Flashings: Aluminium fully welded BMT 1.6 Min. Powdercoated. 4550 Roof Windows and Skylights

nS01

new Velux Manual opening skylight. Model: VCM 3030, Size: 895x895 with solar blind. Pitch 15° to the north.


nS02

new Velux fixed low pitch skylight.

nS03

Model: FCM 3030, Size: 895x895

nS04

Pitch 15° to the north.


https://www.velux.co.nz/products/skylights

Provide additional framing to edge of roofing penetration and to create curb upstand as per detail and per NZBC E2/AS1 fig. 21.

Cricket Diverter: Create a cricket diverter from PIR.

7411 Rainwater Spouting System

  • -    Spouting: Steel box section, 175mm Colorsteel Maxx.

  • -    Downpipes: new uPVC, Size: as shown on drawings

  • -    Wire mesh domes to top of all downpipes.

  • -    Rain Water Heads: Aluminium, fully welded, powder coated.

  • -    Colour; Colorsteel New Denim Blue.

NOTE:

New section of SW drain shown on ground level plan

Downpipe positions as per Plans and Elevations.

ROOF CATCHMENT PLAN

Catchment Calculations - (NZBC Clause E1: Table 5)

Rainfall Intensity (range): 60-70mm/hr (BRANZ Maps)

Spoutings and Downpipes:

Refer to Rainwater Calculation Plan.

ELEVATIONS

Wall cladding scope:

Clerestory and dormer walls only.

Ground level wall cladding to remain (To be remediated at a later stage).

Wall Cladding - note key to match model elevation

Various existing direct fixed wall claddings: Timber vertical shiplap

Fibre Cement.

eW

nW1

nW2

New vertical fibre cement panels over a drained and ventilated cavity.

James Hardie Axon Panel 133 Smooth

Paint finished, Colour: 6711R Resene Painting Exterior.

New fibre cement panels over a drained and ventilated cavity.

James Hardie EasyLap Panel

Paint finished. Colour: 6711R Resene Painting Exterior.

nR1

nR2

nSX

New overlay roof system with waterproof membrane cladding installed over existing metal roof cladding.

New overlay roof system with waterproof membrane cladding installed over new plywood substrate.

New skylight.

4221KH KLC HORIZONTAL WEATHERBOARD CLADDING SYSTEM

Fascias: Ex 230x18 and 280x18, H3.2, Paint Finish.

Barges: Ex 230x18 and 280x18, H3.2, Paint Finish.

Cavity Battens: 45x20 H3.2

Cavity Closers: WANZ rigid PVC cavity closer, 9010500

OR : WANZ Aluminium Cavity Closer

Fixings - Nail, Screw Fastenings

  • -    Material, grade & positioning to cladding to manufacturers requirements & complying with NZS3604 Section 4 Durability

4161 Wraps, Underlay and DPC

  • -    Wraps: Thermakraft Watergate Plus wall underlay

  • -    Flashing Tape: Thermakraft ThermaFlash flashing tape.

  • -    PEF rod: Thermakraft Window worm

  • -    Roofing Underlay: Thermakraft Covertek 407, laid horizontally.

  • -    Penetrations: Shall be sealed with Marshall "Trade Seal" one piece self adhesive collar to Rigid wall underlay. Sized to suit pentration.

Seal all around opening to cladding with flexible sealant.

4171 Rigid Air Barrier

James Hardie Rigid Air Barrier System:

  • -    JH RAB 6mm installed in accordance with James Hardie Rigid Air Barrier Installation Manual with Thermakraft Watergate Plus wall underlay over.

  • -    Fixings: 40x2.8mm stainless steel Hardie Flex nails or 50x2.8mm Stainless steel round drive nails for nail guns.

WINDOWS & DOORS

All windows to comply with NZS 4211

4521 Aluminium Windows & Doors

Window to be removed.

Refer to Existing/Demo plan.

New window. Refer to Proposed plan.

APL Architectural Series 158mm

APL Shop Front

APL Architectural Series 106mm

APL Mero Series (All new windows).

  • -    CHECK ALL DIMENSIONS ON SITE!

  • -    All windows sized to fit openings, "Site Measure".

  • -    Wind zone: Very High, refer to NZS 3604:2011

  • -    Confirm thickness of walls prior to manufacture

Finish

Powder Coat: Dulux Duratech, Thickness: 60 microns minimum

Colour: to be confirmed

Reveals

  • -    Material: Radiata Pine, H3.1 for paint finish.

  • -    Mitre corners

  • -    Type: Confirm with interior project documentation.

Window Hardware

  • -    Urbo Helix (powder coated, Black)

  • -    Security/safety stays (Non releasable) to all windows.

  • -    2 stage wedge fasteners to all windows

  • -    Fixed wedge

  • -    Window hinges: stainless steel

Installation

  • -    Refer WANZ, WIS 2005 (window installation system), for aluminium

windows & doors only.

  • -    Rough opening size: allow 10 - 20mm perimeter gap between reveal and wall framing.

  • -    Flashing tape to be used to the entire perimeter of opening. Two layers of flashing tape to be used on the sill, refer manufacturers installation instructions.

  • -    Sealant to perimeter of opening, Sika AT Facade Sealant on PEF rod.

  • -    Fix window and door at jambs, no fixing thru sill.

  • -    No packer to top.

  • -    Do not fix through flashings.

NOTE: DO NOT USE EXPANDING FOAM TO GAP BETWEEN

REVEALS AND WALL OPENING

NOTE: DO NOT USE SILICON SEALANT IN COMBINATION WITH BITUMEN BASED FLASHING PRODUCTS

4610 Glazing Exterior

All glazing Double glazed.

Double glazing to be Low E coated (surface 2) and Argon filled. Inner pane to be laminated.

  • -    All windows to be clear float glass, unless otherwise stated.

  • -    All glazing to comply with NZS 4223, parts 1, 2 & 3.

  • -    VH wind zone

    The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.

    Rev.

    Description

    Date

    P-05

    Detail Design-04

    27/07/2022

    A

    WRP Review & Procurement Issue

    15/08/2022

    Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©

    4821 Flashings

    Thickness:

    - uPVC concealed flashings

    0.75mm

    - Aluminium (Powder Coated)

    0.9mm BMT

    JOINERY:

    - Aluminium (Powder Coated)

    0.9mm BMT (min)

    - Aluminium Custom Flashings (Powder Coated)

    2.0mm BMT

    GENERAL:

    - Aluminium Welded Flashings (Powder Coated)

    1.6mm BMT

- Penetrations: Marshall TradeSeal one piece self adhesive collar to RAB board. Size to suit pentration.

Seal all around opening to cladding with flexible sealant.

5230 Interior Doors

  • -    Refer IR Group Interior Project documentation for all interior door information.

6700R Resene Painting General

  • -    Refer specification for paint system to be used

  • -    The painter is to allow for an adequate number of paint coats to ensure an even paint finish to the substrate.

6721R Resene Painting Interior

  • -    Refer IR Group Interior Project documentation for all interior finished and colours.

6711R Resene Painting Exterior

Refer specification for paint systems to be used.

Scope:

  • -    Fibre cement soffit linings

  • -    New fibre cement planks and panels

  • -    New timber H3.2 facing boards & trims

  • -    uPVC downpipes

Colours:

RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


- Main Walls;

Resene Triple Athens Grey

- Entrance Walls;

Resene Triple Athens Grey

- Soffit;

Resene Black White

- Entrance Soffit;

Resene Black White

- Panels under windows;

Resene Black White

- Facing boards;

Resene Regatta

- Concrete Foundations;

Resene Cod Grey

- Feature Elements;

Resene Bullseye

If not listed; Consult the project coordinator.


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

General Notes


Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:100                  Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

001

A

33,648

N

PROJECT NORTH

co

Existing windows and wall claddings.

Remove existing porch, stairs and external door. Remove exterior cladding back to the line of the projecting concrete wall.

Remove window.

New and existing wall cladding demarcation point.

EXIT

Remove section of wall and

nS03

CORRIDOR

HALL

4

3

2

1

5,820

3,100

Remove window.

.Existing timber deck and stairs.

D

5m

Existing timber .deck and stairs.

Existing windows and wall cladding retained and refurbished as required. Unless noted otherwise.

Remove existing ramp.

Remove section of wall and prepare for new window.

Remove section of wall and prepare for new door.

Remove window.

10m

1:100 - A2

0 1m 2m

L



Remove existing windows and wall claddings north of wall cladding demarcation point.

--—


Interior Works

Refer to IR Group documentation.


Centre line of proposed new entrance.

Remove window.


Remove section of wall and prepare for new entrance.


Make good existing wall cladding and windows south of wall cladding demarcation point.


HALL LOBBY ENTRANCE


Plan - Ground - Exist/Demo

Scale 1:100




HALL LOBBY ENTRANCE


STAIRS


Remove and retain existing door for reuse.


Existing timber accessible ramp.



The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


EXISTING AND DEMO PLAN KEY NOTES: REFER SHEET 001


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:


Project Number: R21112


Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Plan - Ground -Existing/Demo

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022


Scale: 1:100


Drawing No.

100


Size: A2


Revision No.

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


N



PROJECT NORTH



The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


EXISTING AND DEMO PLAN KEY NOTES: REFER SHEET 001


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Plan - Clerestory -Existing/Demo

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022


Plan - Clerestory- Exist/Demo

Scale 1:100


0 1m 2m                  5m                              10m

]                                       1:100 - A2


Scale: 1:100                  Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

101

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


N



33,648

28,060

PROJECT NORTH

6,303

STAFFROOM

3,420

D


Remove existing porch roof cladding and roof.


Remove existing roof cladding and roof.


Remove existing roof cladding and roof for new Administration Entrance.


NOTE


Roof works fo the new Administration Entrance are dependant on the proposed ground level floor plan.


Centre line of proposed new entrance.


Remove existing skylights (5 off)


HALL LOBBY ENTRANCE


Plan - Roof - Exist/Demo

Scale 1:100


2,490



Remove existing skylight (1 off)


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.



STAIRS


CORRIDOR


Refer to Clerestory Plan for lower level roof. Typical.


HALL LOBBY ENTRANCE




Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


EXISTING AND DEMO PLAN KEY NOTES: REFER SHEET 001


RESOLVE1;

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:


Project Number: R21112


Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Plan - Roof -

Existing/Demo

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022


Scale: 1:100

Size: A2

0     1m

2m

5m

10m

Drawing No.

Revision No.

1:100 - A2

102

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


33,648

N

3,600

5,820

PROJECT NORTH

co

Zig-Zag line defines extent of new wall cladding scope.

Existing windows and wall claddings.

New and existing wall claddings demarcation point.

Timber palisade barrier. New wall structure on new foundation

EXIT

nD15 (Int)

nD1

TEACHING SPACE

TEACHING SPACE

CORRIDOR

OFFICE 5

KITCHEN

IND LOBBY

OFFICE 7

4

MEETING

nD05 (In

nD0

nD

(Int)

OFFICE 4

nD13 (Int)

.Existing timber deck and stairs.

HALL

2m

5m

Existing timber .deck and stairs.

Existing windows and wall claddings, make good as required.

Existing windows and wall cladding retained and refurbished as required. Unless noted otherwise.

New and existing wall claddings demarcation point.

10m

1:100 - A2

0 1m

New Stairs, Decking and Accessible Ramp. Refer to enlarged 1:50 Plan

4

3

2

1



New timber trusses above. Setout and design by Str. Eng or truss manufacturer.


New exterior doors, windows and wall claddings to the new Administration Entrance and walls north of demarcation point.


Interior Works

Refer to IR Group documentation.


ADMINISTRATION ENTRANCE


New section of SW drain connecting to existing SW main (Indicative). /'

New downpipe connecting to a new section of stormwater drain.


HALL LOBBY ENTRANCE


Plan - Ground - Proposed

Scale 1:100



4


nD12 (Int)


RECEPTION


New non-structural screen Refer to


nW01 (Int)nW02 (Int)


ADMIN


nD08

1 (In


Ceiling Hatc 560 /560


WC LO




HALL FOYER


OFFICE 3


OFFICE 2


OFFICE 1


(Int)


nD07 (Int) ^


ALLWAY


nD11 (Int)


WAIT

New glazed aluminium partitions .Refer to Interiors Project.


SICK BAY


STUDENT ENTRANCE

New non-structural screen, design to be confirmed.


nD1


(Int) STORE 1


MEDICAL


Existing timber accessible ramp.


TEACHING SPACE


STUDENT

ADMINISTRATION

ENTRANCE




HALL LOBBY ENTRANCE



The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-03

Detail Design-02

15/02/2022

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


PROPOSED PLAN KEY NOTES: REFER SHEET 001


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:


Project Number: R21112


Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Plan - Ground - Proposed


Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022


Scale: 1:100


Drawing No.

110


Size: A2


Revision No.

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


N



PROJECT NORTH


Top of Stair handrail height 900-1,000


Deck Specification

Design load: 3kPa as per MOE requirements.

(NZS 3604 3kPa Floor Loading)

Decking: 88 x32 H3.2

Joist: 140x45 Min. SG8 H3.2, (Span 2.15m Max).

Bearer: 90x90 SG8 H3.2, Span 1,300 Max. Loaded dimension 1,000 Max.

Pile: 125x125 H5

Footing Concrete: 225x225x200 Min

Stringers 140x45 Min. H3.2 Bolts M12 at 0.7m centres Max.


Concrete plinth to support timber stairs shown hidden.


New Main Entry Stairs

Final bottom of stair relative height to be determined by the new ground level of the new landscape plan.

Stair dimensions to NZS 4121

Riser: 160 Min. -180 Max.

Going: 310 Min - 350 Max.

Constrasting nosings to stair treads and landing.


Final bottom of ramp relative height and position to be determined by the new ground level of the new landscape plan.


Pile setout is indicative and requires confirmation on site, pile spacing 2,000 centres (2,150 Max.).


Pile setout is indicative and requires confirmation on site, pile spacing 1,300 Max. centres.


Concrete Accessible Ramp

Slope 1:12 Max.

Slip resistance, broom finish 0.4µ Min.


310

nW0

3,600 ___________L

2,555 _____

1,700

Top of Deck handrail height 900-1,000

Top of Ramp handrail height 840-900

700

2

246

150 Max.)

,000 (2

Ceiling Hatch

560 /560

entry steps.


Timber palisade barrier.


Dress exposed sides of deck with vertical decking timbers


Plan - Proposed Deck/Stair/Ramp 1:50

Scale 1:50


Deck Level = Internal floor level -20mm.


2,307

3,403


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


PROPOSED PLAN KEY NOTES: REFER SHEET 001


RESOLVE1;

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Plan - Ground - Proposed 1:50

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:50, 1:100             Size: A2

0     1m

2m

5m

10m

Drawing No.

Revision No.

1___

____r

1:100 - A2 I

111

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


N

nW02a

nW02b

Fall 2

DP8

DP7

Fall 2

DP5

nD0

Fall 1.5

Fall 4

Fall 4°

17

507

18

506

B

301

PROJECT NORTH

C

5

15,747

11,685

5m

New clerestory windows within existing openings. Sills raised to provide 150 upstand to new roof cladding. Typical

17,373 26,060

Remediate existing roof with new membrane & PIR overlay roofing over existing metal tray roof.

Existing roof pitch varies 1° - 2°, New pitch 2° nominal.

Remediate existing roof with new membrane & PIR overlay roofing over existing metal tray roof.

Existing roof pitch varies 1° - 2°, New pitch 2° nominal.

Teaching Space

4,07 2,590

0 1m 2m

L


New timber trusses.

Design by truss manufacturer.


ADMINISTRATION

ENTRANCE e^--^-


HALL LOBBY TRANCE


Plan - Clerestory - Proposed

Scale 1:100


DP6


nD17 (Int) nW02c


nW02e


nW02f


nW02g


nW02h


nW02i


nW02j


nW02       nW02l


nS02


nS03


Existing concrete wall.


New window fitted into existing opening. Opening size reduced. Upstand 150 Min. to new roof cladding.


<2 CORRIDOR


STUDE

ADMINISTRATION ENTRANCE



New skylights over in existing locations (4 off).



HALL LOBBY ENTRANCE




10m

1:100 - A2


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


PROPOSED PLAN KEY NOTES: REFER SHEET 001


2ESOLVE


ARCHITECTS



LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Plan - Clerestory -

Proposed

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:100                  Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

112

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


33,648

N

New prefinished steel box gutter

DP4

New gutter adjacent to existing concrete wall. Waterproof membrane on new plywood substrate. DP5

28,060

77H‘ I O

oo

New prefinished steel box gutter.

New timber framed trusses.

Design and spacing by truss manufacturer

Hatched area represents new roof extension.

Membrane on PIR over plywood substrate.

Timber infill where skylights were removed (5 off).

co

co

2

STAIRS

nS03

DP9

Fall 2

nDP2

Fall

DP6

514

4 300

32

31

514

D

302

CORRIDOR

Fall 2°

New skylights over corridor at existing locations (3 off).

Remediate existing metal tray roof cladding as required. Install new membrane & PIR overlay .roofing over existing roof cladding. Existing roof pitch varies 1° - 2°, New pitch 2° nominal.

DP8

STAFFROOM

4

5

5m

1:100 - A2

0 1m 2m

ru l


PROJECT NORTH


ADMINISTRATION ENTRANCE


Hatched area represents new roof Pitch 20°. Clad with membrane on PIR over plywood substrate.

Remediate existing roof with new membrane & PIR overlay roofing over existing metal tray roof (Pitch 2° estimate).


New light shafts with integral mechanical extract over WC cubiles. Roof penetrations in locations where existing skylights were removed.


WC vent pipes (2 off)


HALL LOBBY ENTRANCE


Plan - Roof - Proposed

Scale 1:100


DP1


nS02


DP7


New skylight at existing location. Timber infill existing opening as required to accept new skylight.


STUDENT

ADMINISTRATION

ENTRANCE


Timber infill where skylights were removed (3 off).


HALL LOBBY ENTRANCE


Remediate existing roof with new membrane & PIR overlay roofing over existing metal tray roof (Pitch 3° estimate).



\ B





10m


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


PROPOSED ROOF PLAN KEY NOTES: REFER SHEET 001


RESOLVE1:


ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Plan - Roof - Proposed


Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:100                  Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

113

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


N



The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


PROJECT NORTH


DP4


SP3


DP5


SP2

Min downpipe size 100mm for <<133m2>> of roof served

DP3

Naenae College

Catchment Calculations - (NZBC Clause E1: Table 5)

Rainfall Intensity (range):100mm/hr (NZBC Clause E1: Appendix A)

Min Cross Sectional Area of spouting required

<<112m2>> of roof served

SP5 DP9

Effective Cross Sectional Area of new selected spoutings: Dimond Box 175

Min downpipe size 63mm for <<24m2>> of roof served

DP8

DP7

Min downpipe size 80mm for <<63m2>> of roof served

nDP2

DP1

Min downpipe size 85mm for <<64m2>> of roof served

SP1

DP6

SP4

Min Cross Sectional Area of spouting required: 10,000mm2>> for <<87m2>> of roof served.

Min downpipe size 100mm for <<100m2>> of roof served.

112.12 m2

118.03 m2

66.79 m2

51.64 m2

23.80 m2

63.49 m2

CSA = 19,250

Effective Cross Sectional Area of new selected spoutings: Dimond Box 175 CSA = 17,250mm2

Naenae College

Catchment Calculations - (NZBC Clause E1: Table 5)

Rainfall Intensity (range):100mm/hr (NZBC Clause E1: Appendix

A)

Roof Pitches: 0 - 25°

Min Cross Sectional Area of spouting required: <<~12,500mm2>> for <<250m2 / 2 outlets = 125m2 /Outlet>> of roof served.

Effective Cross Sectional Area of new selected spoutings: Dimond Box 175 CSA = 19,250

Roof Pitches: 0 - 25°

<<~

Naenae College

Catchment Calculations - (NZBC Clause E1: Table 5)

Rainfall Intensity (range):100mm/hr (NZBC Clause E1

Appendix A)

Roof Pitches: 0 - 25°

Min downpipe size 100mm for <<87m2>> of roof served.

45.47 m2

Min downpipe size 74mm for <<84m2>> of roof served.

Naenae College

Catchment Calculations - (NZBC Clause

E1: Table 5)

Rainfall Intensity (range):100mm/hr (NZBC

Clause E1: Appendix A)

Roof Pitches: 0 - 25°

Min Cross Sectional Area of spouting required: <<~10,500mm2>> for <<100m2>> of roof served.

Effective Cross Sectional Area of new selected spoutings: Dimond Box 175 CSA = 17250mm2

Spouting 4.

Catchment Calculations - (NZBC Clause E1: Table 5)

Rainfall Intensity (range):100mm/hr (NZBC Clause E1: Appendix

A)

Roof Pitches: 0 - 25°

Min Cross Sectional Area of spouting required: <<9,000mm2>> for <<190m2 / 3 outlets = 64m2 /Outlet>> of roof served.

Effective Cross Sectional Area of new selected spoutings: Dimond Box 175 CSA = 19,250

Naenae College

Catchment Calculations - (NZBC Clause E1: Table 5)

Rainfall Intensity (range): 100mm/hr (NZBC Clause E1: Appendix A)

Roof Pitches: 0 - 25°

Min Cross Sectional Area of spouting required: <<~12,000mm2>> for <<63 + 118 = 181m2>> of roof served.

Effective Cross Sectional Area of new selected spoutings: Dimond Box 175

Naenae College

Catchment Calculations - (NZBC Clause E1: Table 5)

Rainfall Intensity (range):100mm/hr (NZBC Clause E1: Appendix A)

Roof Pitches: 0 - 25°

Min Cross Sectional Area of spouting required: <<4000mm2>> for <<24m2>> of roof served.

Effective Cross Sectional Area of new selected spoutings: Dimond Box 125 CSA = 7500mm2


Rev.

Description

Date

P04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


PROPOSED ROOF PLAN KEY NOTES: REFER SHEET 001


RESOLVE1;

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Plan - Rainfall Calculation


Plan - Rainfall Calculation

Scale 1:100


0 1m 2m                   5m                                10m

ii                                   1:100 - A2 i


Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:100                  Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

114

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


Hall gable wall beyond.


Remove existing fibre cement wall cladding.

Assume to be asbestos unless proven otherwise.


15,500 Approximate.


Roof 1 +3,960 Clerestory +3,360


Ground Floor

+660


if




North Elevation - Exist/Demo

Scale 1:100


Roof 1 +3,960 Clerestory +3,360


Ground Floor

+660



1

, OTTO        —,

r a M

F 7T

TA1

IF F T/FII

\ Hr AT

। \ Hr ATI1

lOfO

M ^

nD01

11440




West Elevation - Exist/Demo

Scale 1:100


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


EXISTING AND DEMO PLAN KEY NOTES: REFER SHEET 001


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Elevations - Existing


Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:100                  Size: A2

0     1m

2m

5m

10m

Drawing No.

Revision No.

1:100 - A2

200

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


Roof 1


+3,960

Clerestory

+3,360


Ground Floor

+660







East Elevation - Exist/Demo

Scale 1:100



0 1m 2m


5m                              10m


1:100 - A2


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


EXISTING AND DEMO PLAN KEY NOTES: REFER SHEET 001


RESOLVE1;

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Elevations - Existing

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:100                  Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

201

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


Roof 1 +3,960 Clerestory +3,360


Ground Floor +660



The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.



New fibre cement vertical shiplap wall cladding over drained cavity. Paint finish.


Existing timber and fibre cement wall cladding, paint finished. Refurbish as required.

New spouting and downpipes.

Hall gable wall beyond.

New fibre cement sheet wall cladding over draind cavity to north facing gable.

New timber batten balustrade.

Existing timber weatherboard wall cladding, paint finished. Refurbish as required.

Existing concrete foundation wall, paint finished.


North Elevation - Proposed

Scale 1:100


Existing timber window joinery, paint finished. Refurbish as required.


New fibre cement sheet wall cladding over drained cavity. Paint finish.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


ELEVATIONS KEY NOTES:

REFER SHEET 001




Terminal Vent (2 off).

New light tubes c/w mechanical extract (3 off).

New timber batten balustrade.

Roof 1 +3,960 Clerestory +3,360

Ground Floor +660


New fibre cement vertical shiplap wall cladding over drained cavity over synthethic breathable wall underlay and RAB.


Existing steel framed windows. Refurbish as required (4 off).


Existing timber paint finished wall cladding. Refurbish as required.


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


W West Elevation - Proposed


110


Scale 1:100


Drawing Title:

Elevations - Proposed


Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:100                  Size: A2

0     1m

2m

5m

10m

Drawing No.

Revision No.

1:100 - A2

210

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln



nW10

+3,360


New decorative facade treatment shown as hidden line. T.B.C.


New clerestory windows. Typical.


Roof 1 +3,960 Clerestory


Ground Floor

+660


D23 (In



East Elevation - Proposed

Scale 1:100


Roof 1 +3,960 Clerestory +3,360


Ground Floor

+660



New clerestory windows. Typical.




nD04 (Int)


nW02



South Elevation - Proposed

Scale 1:100


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


ELEVATIONS KEY NOTES:

REFER SHEET 001


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Elevations - Proposed

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:100                  Size: A2

0     1m

2m

5m

10m

Drawing No.

Revision No.

1:100 - A2

211

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


3D View 03

3D View 07

3D View 05





The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:


Naenae College


Project Name:


Project Number: R21112


Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

3D Views - Proposed

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022


Scale:


Size:


Drawing No.

212


Revision No.

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln




3D View 04 - Existing



2 3D View 04 - Proposed


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

3D Views - Existing &

Proposed

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale:                          Size:


Drawing No.

Revision No.

213

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.



Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©



3D View 02 - Existing



RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City



3D View 02 - Proposed


Drawing Title:

3D Views - Existing &

Proposed

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale:                          Size:


Drawing No.

Revision No.

214

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


2

110


Clerestory

+660

Ground Floor

Scale 1:100

Clerestory

+660

Ground Floor

Clerestory

+660

Ground Floor

Clerestory

+660

Ground Floor

4

110

5

110

3

110

600


+3,960

R+3o,o3f601


Section 5-5


+3,960

R+3o,o3f601


Section 4-4


Scale 1:100


+3,960

R+3o,o3f601


Section 3-3


Scale 1:100


+3,960

R+3o,o3f601


Section 2-2


Scale 1:100


Setout to ensure that the fascia alignSsewtoituht tthoaet nosf uthre tmhatinthbeufiladsincgia.


0 1m 2m


Scale 1:100


Section 1-1


5m


10m

1:100 - A2


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:


Naenae College


Project Name:


Project Number: R21112


Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Sections


Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022


Scale: 1:100


Drawing No.

300


Size:


Revision No.

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.



Rev.

Description

Date

P-01

8/10/2021

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


A

110


Section A-A


Scale 1:100



RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:


Naenae College


B

110


Section B-B


Scale 1:100


Project Name:


Project Number: R21112


Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Sections


Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:100

Size:

0

1m

2m

5m

10m

Drawing No.

Revision No.

m

1:100 - A2

301

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln



The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-05

Detail Design

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©



Section E-E

Scale 1:100


+3,960

R+3o,o3f6 01

Clerestory



+660

Ground Floor




Section D-D

Scale 1:100


+3,960

R+3o,o3f6 01

Clerestory


+660

Ground Floor




RESOLVE1;

ARCHITECTS


fed


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


C

110


Section C-C

Scale 1:100


Drawing Title:

Sections


0 1m 2m                   5m                                10m

ii                                   1:100 - A2 i


Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:100                  Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

302

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


Hand rail bracket fixed to posts.

Galvanised steel handrail.

300 Min.

Existing stair (Indicative)

300 Min.

Hand rail bracket fixed to posts.

1,200 Min. Tread width.

+660

+660

Ground Floor

Ground Floor

Side fixed posts

Section H-H

Scale 1:20

Stanchion set into concrete footing.

Dressed timber edge board H3.2 with 20 Gap to ramp.

Stanchion extends below deck level and fixed to structural members.

Paling: 45x45, Dressed timber H3.2, with equal gaps of 30mm approx.

Galvanised steel railing with handrail and mid-rail, Posts equi-spaced at 1275 approx.

Galvanised steel plate edge with 20 Gap to ramp.

Support stair base with

Bowmac Angle stainless steel BS175

Galvanised steel handrail.

Slope Posts and Palings 5°

Ramp structure:

Refer to Structural Engineer's documentation.

H 111

Scale 1:20

Section F-F

Section G-G

Scale 1:20

Scale 1:20

0      0.25m     0.5m                1m

ru i___________i       1:20 - A2


Deck Design (NZS 3604 3kPa Floor Loading)

Decking: 88 x32 H3.2

Joist: 140x45 Min. SG8 H3.2, (Span 2.15m Max).

Bearer: 90x90 SG8 H3.2, Span 1,300 Max. Loaded dimension 1,000 Max.

Pile: 125x125 H5

Footing Concrete: 225x225x200 Min


300 Min.


Typical.


Post: 90x90 dressed timber H3.2 at 1,350 centres approx, fastened to boundary joists fastened to deck structure with S.S. fixings.


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Dress exposed sides of deck with vertical decking timbers


Section L-L


Post: 90x90 dressed timber H3.2 at 1450mm centres approx, Gap to opening 30mm approx.

Paling: 45x45, Dressed timber H3.2, with equal gaps of 30mm approx.


Rev.

Description

Date

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


ELEVATIONS KEY NOTES:

REFER SHEET 001


Post fastened to concrete foundation with stainless steel anchors.


RESOLVE1;

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:


Project Number:   R21112


Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Scale: 1:20

Size: A2

Drawing Title:

Sections - Proposed

Enlarged 1:20

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Drawing No.

Revision No.

303

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Post: 90x90 dressed timber H3.2 at 1,350 centres approx, fastened to boundary joists fastened to deck structure with S.S. fixings.

Paling: 45x45, Dressed timber H3.2, with equal gaps of 30mm approx.



Dressed timber edge board H3.2 with 20 Gap to ramp.


Galvanised steel hand rail, brackets fixed to posts.


ELEVATIONS KEY NOTES:

REFER SHEET 001



Section J-J

Scale 1:20


Ramp structure:

Refer to Structural Engineer's documentation.


300 Min

Dress exposed sides of deck with vertical decking timbers

Galvanised steel posts, handrail mid-rail and base board


RESOLVE1;

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City



Section K-K

Scale 1:20


0      0.25m     0.5m                1m

ru i___________i       1:20 - A2


Drawing Title:

Sections - Proposed

Enlarged 1:20

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:20                   Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

304

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln




Exterior wall cladding, fibre cement sheet.


Flashing tape

Existing wall framing, add addition studs to support sheet joints as per cladding manufacturers details.

Powdercaoted aluminium flashing set into concrete chase.

Fibre cement panel wall cladding installed vertically over H3.1 timber cavity battens. Paint finish.

Continuous sealant bead over PEF rod.

Exterior Detail

1:5


Flashing tape over head flashing.

Cavity batten blocking 100mm @ 5°, H3.1.

uPVC cavity closer Cacity batten at sheet joints. Powdercoated aluminium head flashing BMT 0.9 Min. with stpoends, extend 20 Min. beyond joinery.


•

•

•

•


Cover to joinery 10 Min.

Gap to cladding 5 Min.

Slope 15° Min.

Cover to cladding 35 Min.

New aluminium joinery refer to Window and Door Schedule.

Flashing tape dressed into opening (all around).


Do not install insulation within ceiling void. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

HEAD

New insulation.

New ceiling lining and finish. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Interior lining and finish. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Lintel 140x90 Min., SG8, H1.2 (NZS 3604 Table 8.9).

Architrave. Refer to "Interiors" specification


_ v_ AFFL. 2,400

Air seal: Continuous sealant bead on PEF rod

Note: Remove temporary packing from head.


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.

Isometric View - Flashings


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Cladding System External Corner (Typical)


Flashing tape.


New wall lining. Refer interior project spec.

New wall insulation.

Cladding system aluminium external corner extrusion.

Cladding and cavity batten fixing as per manufacturer's system specification.

Existing wall framing.

Fibre cement panel wall cladding installed vertically over H3.1 timber cavity battens. Paint finish.




Exterior Detail

1:5



Flashing tape dressed into opening (all around).

WANZ sill support bar.


Gap 5 Min.


Cavity batten blocking 100mm @ 5°, H3.1.


Existing wall framing, add addition studs to support sheet joints as per cladding manufacturers details.

Fibre cement panel wall cladding installed vertically over H3.1 timber cavity battens. Paint finish. Extend 50mm below floor framing.


Rigid wall underal with wall underlay over. Extend 15mm below floor framing.

Flashing tape over both flashing and cavity closer.

Cavity batten blocking 100mm @ 5°, H3.1.


uPVC cavity closer Cacity batten at sheet joints. Aluminium Flashing BMT 1.2 Min. Powdercoated.


Flashing tape separation.


15° slope to top edge. Ankascrew M8 @ 600 ctrs, recess into timber

Existing concrete perimeter foundation.


AFFL. 1,000

Wall finish. Refer to interior project.

Existing timber floor (Indicative).

JAMB

SILL


New floor finish. Refer to interior project. (Indicative).



Exterior Detail

1:5


Cladding System Internal Corner (Typical)


Flashing tape over existing wall underlay.


Cladding and cavity batten fixing as per manufacturer's system specification.

x Back Flashing, powdercoated aluminium, BMT 0.9 Min. Continuous sealant bead.

Fully welded internal corner flashing, Refer to isometric view.

Window sill below.


Flashing tape over existing wall underlay.

Powder coated aluminium flashing BMT 0.9 Min. Terminates at bottom of cladding.


Continuous sealant bead


Scribber & cover board H3.2, Paint finish.


Line of window sill above.

Existing bevel back weatherboards remain in place. Refurbish as required.


06

110


Through Window Jamb

Existing window reveal &

New wall lining. Refer interior project spec.

Below Window Jamb


New wall lining. Refer interior project spec.


Existing steel window joinery remains in place.

Refurbish as required.


RESOLVE1:


ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Exterior Detail

1:5


New wall lining. Refer interior project spec.


Existing interior lining.


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5                    Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

500

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


**Provide locations for fixing future decorative features to front face and interior walls. Photograph and as-build framing prior to installing the RAB and deliver to contract administrator.




Cladding system aluminium external corner extrusion.

Fibre cement panel wall cladding installed vertically over H3.1 timber cavity battens. Paint finish.

New wall framing, H1.2


Double studs to be well spiked.

Sealant bead 6mm.

Cladding System Panel Joint (Typical)

**Double studs and cavity battens to provide fixing of future decorative features to solid timber framing.

PFC post of portal frame (Indicative), refer to Structural Engineer's documentation.

Continuous sealant bead Inseal tape 1.5mm thick

Double stud and cavity battens at sheet joints as per manuufacturers specification.

Future decorative features may be fixed into solid framing and sheet joint.



Cladding System Wall End Termination (Typical)


Fibre cement panel wall cladding installed vertically over H3.1 timber cavity battens. Paint finish.

Cladding system aluminium external corner extrusion.

Exterior wall cladding.

Rigid wall underlay with flexible wall underlay over.


Flashing tape.


Double studs and cavity battens to provide fixing of future decorative features to solid timber framing.


Leg length 100 plus cavity and cladding. uPVC internal corner XW^ back flashing from above.


Back of cavity.


1 *—Upstand 100 Min.

J >—Cover to wall cladding 90 Min.


Continuous sealant bead to new concrete foundation.



.Leg length 100. Typical. Terminates at bottom of wall cladding.


Powder coated aluminium, BMT 1.2 Min. Fully welded Cover to wall cladding:

  • -    Horizontal 75 Min.

  • -    Vertical 90 Min.


Saddle Flashing Isometric


Exterior Detail

1:5


New wall lining. Refer interior project spec.

Existing wall framing, add addition studs to support sheet joints as per cladding manufacturers details.

Cladding System Internal Corner (Typical)

Cladding System Panel Joint (Typical)

Gap: 1 - 2mm.

Cladding and cavity batten fixing as per manufacturer's system specification.

Inseal tape 1.5mm.

Continuous sealant bead.

Flashing tape to RAB junction.

Gap 6mm, continuous sealant bead.

Upstand of Saddle flashing below.

100


Cladding and cavity batten fixing as per manufacturer's system specification.

uPVC corner back flashing


Temporary EPS formwork, to be removed post concrete cure.

Gap 6mm, continuous sealant bead.

Flashing tape to isolate flashing and concrete and seal internal corner.

Saddle flashing located at back of cavity and terninates at bottom of wall cladding.

Powder coated aluminium saddle flashing, fully welded BMT 1.2 Min. Refer to isometric view.


Foundation wall below


Section B-B / Detail 29.

Internal Corner Below Deck Level


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©



RESOLVE1;

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5                    Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

501

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


New aluminium joinery mechanism.


Wall insulation to extend continuously up to the underside of the new insulated overlay roof system. Typical. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

New aluminium joinery (Indicative) Refer to Window and Door Schedule.

Existing insulation *Remove if practical to remove, Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

New aluminium joinery refer to Window and Door Schedule.

Architrave. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Interior lining and finish. Refer to "Interiors" specification


Interior ceiling and finish. Refer to "Interiors" specification



Air seal: Continuous sealant bead on PEF rod

Interior floor covering. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Fibre cement sheet 6mm Min. to create rigid backing for flashing tape.

Existing timber floor (Indicative).



Through Interior Wind Lobby Sliding Door


Exterior Detail

1:5


Soffit lining.

Top of cavity ventilation Gap 5mm.

Vent batten.

Flashing tape dressed into

Interior lining and finish. Refer

to "Interiors"

specification

JAMB

Door leaf

New timber decking,

Notation as per adjacent detail.

New aluminium joinery refer to Window and Door Schedule.

Possible future decorative feature shown dashed.

Architrave. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Soffit Battens: 90x45 H1.2 @ 600 ctrs Fixing Type "U" (1/14g x 100mm self-drilling type 17 screw).

Note: Over sized to provide fixing of future decorative features to solid timber framing.

New entrance canopy roof structure.

Air seal: Continuous sealant bead on PEF rod

Architrave. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Interior lining and finish. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Air seal: Continuous sealant bead on PEF rod

Note: Remove temporary packing from head.

Interior ceiling and finish. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Wall insulation to extend continuously up to the underside of the new insulated overlay roof system. Typical. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

HEAD

SILL

uPVC cavity closer

Powdercoated aluminium head flashing BMT 0.9 Min.

•

•

•

•

Flashing tape over head flashing.

New aluminium joinery (Indicative) Refer to Window and Door Schedule.

Cover to joinery 10 Min.

Gap to cladding 5 Min.

Slope 15° Min.

Cover to cladding 35 Min.

Flashing tape dressed into opening (all around).

New aluminium joinery refer to Window and Door Schedule.

Existing foundation (Indicative).


Airflow


Provide locations for fixing future decorative features to front face and interior walls.

Photograph and as-build framing prior to installing the RAB and deliver to contract administrator.


Compressible foam seal.


Deck Specification

Design load: 3kPa as per MOE requirements.

(NZS 3604 3kPa Floor Loading)

Decking: 88 x32 H3.2

Joist: 140x45 Min. SG8 H3.2, (Span 2.15m Max).

Bearer: 90x90 SG8 H3.2, Span 1,300 Max. Loaded dimension 1,000 Max.

Pile: 125x125 H5

Footing Concrete: 225x225x200 Min

Stringers 140x45 Min. H3.2 Bolts M12 at 0.7m centres Max.


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


New aluminium joinery fixed panel (Indicative) Refer to Window and Door Schedule.

Flashing tape dressed into opening (all around).


Fibre cement exterior wall cladding.


Through Side Light


Through Door Leaf


RESOLVE1:


ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5                    Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

502

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


Lintel 140x90 Min., SG8, H1.2 (NZS 3604 Table 8.9).


Sill tray upstand 8 Min.

New wall lining. Refer interior project spec.

Flashing tape to junction of new RWU and existing soffit.

Architrave. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Interior lining and finish. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Air seal: Continuous sealant bead on PEF rod

Note: Remove temporary packing from head.

JAMB

•

•

•

•

Cover to joinery 10 Min.

Gap to cladding 5 Min.

Slope 15° Min.

Cover to cladding 35 Min.

New fibre cement sheet wall cladding to match adjacent existing wall cladding. Paint finish.

Continuous protective sealant bead.

HEAD FLASHING

Powdercoated aluminium head flashing BMT 0.9 Min. extend 20 Min. beyond joinery.

Head flashing above.

AFFL. 1,000

New aluminium joinery refer to Window and Door Schedule.

Flashing tape dressed into opening (all around).

Frame block by window manufacturer

Flashing tape dressed into opening (all around).

Gap 5 Min.

Powdercoated aluminium sill tray BMT 0.9 Min.


*AFFL. 2,150-V__

* Match existing retained window on same wall.


HEAD


SILL


Existing fibre cement soffit retained. Continuous sealant bead.

New Cover board H3.2. over fibre cement sheet cladding.

50mm sealant bead to each end of head flashing.

Head flashing


Architrave. Refer to

"Interiors" specification

*AFFL. 2,150_v_

* Match existing retained window on same wall.


Flashing tape to junction of new RWU and existing soffit.

Interior lining and finish. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Air seal: Continuous sealant bead on PEF rod

Note: Remove temporary packing from head.

Lintel 240x70 Min. SG8, H1.2 (NZS 3604 Table 8.9). *Available space may necessitate a steel beam C.O.S.

•

•

•

•

Cover to joinery 10 Min.

Gap to cladding 5 Min.

Slope 15° Min.

Cover to cladding 35 Min.

New aluminium joinery refer to

Window and Door Schedule.

HEAD FLASHING

Powdercoated aluminium head flashing BMT 0.9 Min. extend 20 Min. beyond joinery.


HEAD


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Existing fibre cement soffit retained. Continuous sealant bead.

New Cover board H3.2. over fibre cement sheet cladding.

50mm sealant bead to each end of head flashing.

Head flashing

Flashing tape dressed into opening (all around).


New wall lining. Refer interior project spec.


New wall insulation.


New fibre cement sheet wall cladding to match adjacent existing wall cladding. Paint finish.

New wall underlay.

Continuous protective sealant bead.


Head flashing above.

Sill Tray below shown hidden.


JAMB



Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Existing wall lining. Refer interior project spec.

Existing interior wall lining. Refer interior project spec.

Window jamb detail.

Refer to Detail 8.

interior project spec.

Exterior Detail

1:5


Existing exterior wall cladding (No Change).

.Continuous sealant bead.

Powdercoated aluminium inte corner back flashing BMT 0.9 Lap new and existing wall underlay, flashing tape to lap.


New wall insulation.

Wall finish. Refer to

New wall underlay.

Existing timber floor (Indicative).

Existing concrete perimeter foundation.


New floor finish. Refer to interior project. (Indicative).


Existing wall framing, add addition studs to support sheet joints as per cladding manufacturers details.

New fibre cement sheet exterior wall cladding to match adjacent existing wall cladding.

Extend 50mm below floor framing. Paint finish.

Remove timber decking as required to install new wall cladding.

Existing timber deck (Indicative).


dressed into opening (all around).


*Flush threshold.

cement sheet 6mm Min. to create rigid backing for flashing tape.

Interior floor covering. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Existing timber floor (Indicative).


Existing concrete perimeter foundation.


SILL


Sill tray upstand 8 Min.

Frame block by window manufacturer *Set door sill height to achieve 20mm Max. to exisiting deck level.


Remove timber decking as required to install new wall cladding.


Existing timber deck (Indicative).


Gap 12 Min

Gap 5 Min.


Powdercoated aluminium sill tray BMT 0.9 Min.


Fibre cement exterior wall cladding.


Paint finish



Exterior Detail

1:5


Existing foundation (Indicative).


Existing foundation (Indicative).



RESOLVE


ARCHITECTS



LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details


Exterior Detail

1:5


Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5                    Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

503

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln



Aluminium pressure bar.

Vapour barrie

New pressure bar

New fascia board, H3.2, Paint finished.

Existing fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.

Existing timber framing (Indicative).

Roof Logic (R.L.) overlay roof system Single ply waterproof membrane over PIR insulation board 40mm, over PIR infill fillets and vapour barrier.

xisting insulation *Remove if practical to remove, Refer to eynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

Existing timber Hall Lobby doors, no work.

New timber reveal

New internal linings to match existing.

(Indicative)

Existing soffit, no work.

Overlay roof system

Existing timber Hall Lobby doors, no work.

New overlay roof system installed over existing metal tray clad roof.

Spouting to fascia Gap 6 Min.

Existing metal clad roof remains.

Existing roof framing (Indicative). Existing ceiling lining. (Indicative)

Existing timber framing (Indicative).

New fascia board, H3.2, Paint finished.

Existing fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.

Single ply membrane

PIR infill fillet.

Exterior Detail

1:5

Exterior Detail

1:5


Aluminium pressure bar

Folded aluminium flashing BMT 2.0 Min.


Trim existing metal roofing to this line.

Extruded aluminium angle cleat Ex. 75x50x3.

Screw fix to solid timber framing.

Vapour barrier


Existing soffit, no work.


fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.


Existing fibre cement soffit retained.

Continuous sealant bead.


Flashing tape to junction of new RWU and existing soffit.

Timber facing board, continuous across length of wall.

New window joinery


Existing timber structure (Indicative).


HEAD


New timber architrave


Overlay roof system


PIR board.

New vapour barrier

PIR infill fillet.


Existing tray profile roof cladding to remain.

Existing original membrane containing asbestos.

Existing original roof substrate (Indicative).

Existing roof structure (Indicative).


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

y roof

alled o

ver

tal tra

cla

tained

me

ng ov

er

braneight RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Existing insulation *Remove if practical to remove, Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.


Existing ceiling lining(Indicative).


Existing timber clerestory windows over hall lobby remain in place.

Dress membrane up to maximum attainable height.

Continuous sealant bead.


New timber trim to replace existing removed.

New upstand substrate JH RAB 6 or 9mm.

Vapour barrier


Membrane dressed into opening and extend up framing 100 Min.

Frame block by window manufacturer


WANZ sill support bar.

Fibre cement wall cladding, Paint finish.


New upstand substrate JH RAB 6 or 9mm.


PIR board (tapered) to achieve pitch of 2° Nom.

New vapour barrier


SILL


Wall insulation to extend continu up to the underside of the new insulated overlay roof system. T Refer to Keynote 4711P on She


Existing framing (Indicative)


New timber infill framing to raise window sill within existing openin

Existing framing.

(Indicative)


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022


Scale: 1:5


Size: A2


Drawing No.

504


Revision No.

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


New pressure bar


New fascia board, H3.2, Paint finished.


Existing timber framing (Indicative).


Existing fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.


3


New overlay roof system installed over existing metal tray clad roof.

Existing retained metal roof cladding over original membrane (containing asbestos) and substrate.


Aluminium pressure bar

Trim existing metal roofing to this line.

Screw fix to solid timber framing.

Folded aluminium flashing BMT 2.0 Min.

Extruded aluminium angle cleat Ex. 75x50x3.

Existing insulation *Remove if practical to remove, Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

Existing window.

Flashing tape to junction of new RWU and existing soffit.

Existing fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.

Spouting to fascia Gap 6 Min.

New Cover board H3.2 if replacing window. New head flashing if replacing window, flashing tape over top edge.

CAUTION

Assume all exisitng fibre cement sheet to contain asbestos unless confirmed otherwise.

Existing fibre cement soffit retained.

Continuous sealant bead.


PIR board.

Overlay roof system

Flashing tape.

Fibre cement cladding on wall underlay. Seal and paint back of sheet 150 Min. before installation

Flashing tape to junction of new RWU and existing soffit.

Timber facing board, continuous across length of wall.

Timber packing H3.2 between windows.

Existing fibre cement soffit retained.

Continuous sealant bead.

Extend membrane up behind cavity closer.

Cavity batten blocking 100mm @ 5°, H3.1.

uPVC cavity closer Cacity batten at sheet joints.

Single ply membrane

Existing ceiling lining(Indicative).

Existing tray profile roof cladding to remain.

Existing original membrane containing asbestos.

Existing roof structure

New vapour barrier PIR infill fillet.

Single ply membrane

New vapour barrier

PIR infill fillet.

PIR board (tapered) to achieve pitch of 2° Nom.

Existing Internal linings (Indicative)

Overlay roof system

Maximise height of PFC beam (Indicative), Refer to Structural Engineer's documentation.

Existing framing (Indicative)

Wall insulation to extend continuously up to the underside of the new insulated overlay roof system. Typical. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

Existing metal clad roof remains.

New overlay roof system installed over existing metal tray clad roof.

Existing insulation *Remove if practical to remove, Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

Existing roof framing (Indicative).

Existing ceiling lining. (Indicative)


New upstand substrate JH RAB 6 or 9mm.


13

#LayID


Exterior Detail

1:5


12

#LayID


Exterior Detail

1:5


New overlay roof system installed over existing metal tray clad roof.


Existing insulation *Remove if practical to remove, Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Existing retained metal roof cladding over original membrane (containing asbestos) and substrate.

Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5                    Size: A2

Drawing No.                  Revision No.

505      A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


Apron flashing lap, 150 Min.

Existing concrete wall (Indicative).

Upstand 100.

Existing concrete wall (Indicative).

Existing siesmic gap (Indicative).

Existing timber framed wall (Indicative).

Existing concrete wall (Indicative).

Existing concrete wall (Indicative).

Existing metal tray roof.

Apron flashing shown hidden.

New membrane finish overlay roof system, over existing metal tray roof.

Existing timber roof structure.

Membrane manufacturers cover flashing BMT 0.55 Min.

Membrane manufacturers termination bar fastened @ 200 ctrs.

Window flashings not shown for clarity. Refer to Detail 20.

New concrete infill to window opening.

Existing siesmic flashing (Indicative).

New 2 piece internal corner siesmic flashing fitted over existing. Terminates under soffit above.

Internal corner flashing below.

Apron flashing below.

SO

Single ply membrane

PIR board (tapered).

New vapour barrier

PIR infill fillet.

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Existing ceiling lining(Indicative).

Overlay roof system

The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.

LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Existing tray profile roof cladding to remain.

Existing original membrane containing asbestos.

Pre-finished steel external corner flashing. Folded and sealed joints. BMT 0.55 Min.

Cover to membrane below 90 Min

Existing original roof substrate (Indicative).

Existing roof structure (Indicative).

Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City

View A-A

Scale: 1:5, 1:10

New ceiling lining to match exxisting. (Indicative)

New ceiling lining to match exxisting. (Indicative)

Existing roof framing (Indicative).

Existing ceiling lining. (Indicative)

Existing roof framing (Indicative).

Existing ceiling lining. (Indicative)

Exterior Detail

1:5


Existing siesmic gap (Indicative).

Existing timber framed wall (Indicative).

Existing siesmic flashing

New 2 piece inte(Irndailccaotirvnee)r. siesmic flashing fitted over existing. Terminates under soffit above.


1 Pre-finished steel internal corner flashing. Folded and sealed joints. BMT 0.55 Min.

Apron flashing: Pre-finished steel BMT 0.55 Min.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Window shown for context only. Refer to Detail 20.


Aluminium pressure bar.


New fascia boards, H3.2.


Exterior Detail

1:5


Existing concrete wall (Indicative).


Existing siesmic gap (Indicative).


Existing timber framed wall (Indicative).



Exterior Detail

1:5


Existing wall cladding (Indicative).


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


Client:

Naenae College


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Size: A2


Drawing No.                  Revision No.

506      A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln



The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Trim existing metal roofing to this line.

Waterproof roof membrane to upstand. Waterproof roof membrane.

Pre-finished steel external corner flashing. Folded and sealed joints. BMT 0.55 Min.

Pre-finished steel external corner flashing. BMT 0.55 Min.

Apron flashing: Pre-finished steel BMT 0.55 Min.

Flashing Cover Dimensions (Typical). Horizontal 150 Min.

Vertical 100 Min.

Extruded aluminium angle cleat Ex. 75x50x3.

Screw fix to solid timber framing.

Waterproof roof membrane saddle flashing.

Bottom edge aligns with fascia board.

Pre-finished steel internal corner back flashing. BMT 0.55 Min.

17

Pre-finished steel internal corner back flashing. BMT 0.55 Min.

Pre-finished steel external corner flashing. BMT 0.55 Min.

Folded aluminium flashing BMT 2.0 Min.

17

External corner flashing.

ISO

View A-A

New fascia board, H3.2, Paint finished.

Existing cover board and wall cladding. No change.

Membrane saddle flashing

Pre-finished steel internal corner back flashing. BMT 0.55 Min. Bottom edge aligns with fascia board.

Aluminium pressure bar

Existing interior linings (Indicative).

Existing structure unknown (Indicative).

Bottom edge aligns with fascia board.


Bottom edge aligns with fascia board.


Aluminium pressure bar


Spouting to fascia Gap 6 Min.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Lap: 150 Min.


View B-B


Existing fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.


Existing plaster finished concrete wall. No change.


2,200 N.T.S.

Continuous sealant bead.

Cover flashing BMT 0.55 Min.

Existing plaster finished concrete wall. No change.

Plywood subtrate 12

Min. H3.2 CCA.

Gap Est. 50mm.


Apron flashing over siesmic gap BMT 0.55 Min.


New timber framed upstand (Indicative)

Confirm construction following determination of existing conditions.


New vapour barrier


Existing tray profile roof cladding to remain.

Existing original membrane containing asbestos.

Existing original roof substrate (Indicative).

Existing roof structure (Indicative).


Existing interior linings (Indicative).

ExistEinxgisstitnrugcitnutreeriuonr klinionwgns (Indicative).



Exterior Detail

1:5


Continuous sealant bead.


Expansion joint flashing BMT 0.55 Min.


Saddle flashing


Existing concrete wall. Waterproof roof membrane to upstand.

Waterproof roof membrane saddle flashing.

Waterproof roof membrane.


resolve:

ARCHITECTS


A


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:20, 1:5                Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

507

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


Flashing Profile.

Membrane upstand 150 Min.

Ventilation Gap: 3 - 5mm.

Existing interior gs (Indicative).

Membrane saddle flashing

Aluminium pressure bar

Existing fibre cement soffit retained.

Continuous sealant bead.

Exterior Detail

1:5


Membrane supplier's cover flashing


Existing wall finish.

Flashing tape.

JAMB

Existing Internal linings (Indicative)

Exterior Detail

1:5


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


DPC

Concrete bonding agent.

Existing concrete wall.

Existing wall finish.

Existing fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.

Window installation refer Detail 20.

New concrete infill to raise sill height.

New finish to infill concrete to match existing adjacent finish.

Scabble surface of existing window opening.

Continous sealant bead on PEF rod all-around opening.

DPC

Aluminium powder coated flashing, BMT 0.9 Min.

Single ply membrane PIR board (tapered). New vapour barrier

PIR infill fillet.

HEAD

Existing concrete wall.

DPC.

Timber opening, H3.1.

JAMB

Existing soffit lining (Indicative).

Compressible foam seal.

Flashing tape all-around and full depth of opening.

Head flashing above (dashed).

Aluminium joinery (indicative).

Timber reveal H3.1.


Reinforcement and starter bars by Str. Eng.

Continuous sealant bead. Membrane manufacturers proprietory cover flashing.

Membrane manufacturers termination bar fastened @ 200 ctrs.


New fascia board, H3.2, Paint finished.

Existing timber framing (Indicative).


Existing tray profile roof cladding to remain.

Existing original membrane containing asbestos.

Existing original roof substrate (Indicative).

Existing roof structure (Indicative).


Exterior Detail

1:5


New finish to infill concrete to match existing adjacent finish.

— New concrete infill.

Concrete bonding agent.

Scabble surface of existing window opening.

Reinforcement and starter bars by Str. Eng.


Sealant bead.


Jamb detail "Typical".


Continous sealant bead over PEF backing rod. Grind smooth and clean existing concrete to accept both flashing tape and sealant.

Powdercoated aluminium Jamb flashing, BMT 0.9 Min.


Water resistant air seal on PEF backing rod.


20

112


Exterior Detail

1:5


Single ply membrane

Membrane manufacturers termination bar shown hidden.

Membrane manufacturers cover flashing.

Trim existing metal roofing to this line.

Existing concrete wall beyond.

Membrane to be wrapped aroung external corner 100mm.

Folded aluminium flashing BMT 2.0 Min.

ISO

22

Existing retained metal roof cladding over original membrane (containing asbestos) and substrate.

New overlay roof system installed over existing metal tray clad roof.

Existing fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.

Existing fibre cement soffit retained.

Spouting to fascia Gap 6 Min.

23

113

Exterior Detail

1:5


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


1,000 REF N.T.S.


Extruded aluminium angle cleat Ex. 75x50x3.


22


Aluminium pressure bar


High build exterior paint finish.

Sill tray upstand beyond. Flashing tape over

Powdercoated aluminium flashing BMT 0.9 Min. to be sealed and riveted in place.

Continous sealant bead over PEF backing rod. Grind smooth and clean existing concrete to accept both flashing tape and sealant.

Jamb flashing beyond. Reinforcement and starter bars by Str. Eng.

Compressible foam strip or sealant bead.

Flashing tape over new timber packer and existing concrete.

Roof membrane upstand dressed into opening.

Sill Tray with corner saddles.

Refer to isomeetric view.

SILL


Screw fix to solid timber framing.


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5, 1:10

Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

508

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


New pressure bar

closer.

Existing framing.

Diverter cricket by overlay roof system manufacturer.

Skylight installation Refer to Detail 15.

New fascia board, H3.2, Paint finished.

Existing fascia boards retained if suitable C.O.S.

Existing timber framing (Indicative).

Existing Internal linings (Indicative)

SILL

Existing sill location.

Interior lining and finish. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Air seal: Continuous sealant bead on PEF rod

Note: Remove temporary packing from head.

New framing to raise window sill in existing opening.

Lintel: Existing (Indicative).

Architrave. Refer to "Interiors" specification

JAMB

Exterior wall cladding, fibre cement sheet.

Flashing tape dressed into opening (all around).

Compressible foam seal.

match existing.

Existing insulation *Remove if practical to remove, Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

Existing roof framing (Indicative).

Existing ceiling lining. (Indicative)

Exterior Detail

1:5


Roof structure: Existing


Membrane dressed framing 100 Min.


Existing fibre cement soffit retained.

Continuous sealant bead.


Ventilation Gap: 3 - 5mm.

Flashing tape to junction of new RWU and existing soffit.


Flashing tape over head flashing and cavity

Cavity batten blocking 100mm @ 5°, H3.1. uPVC cavity closer

Cacity batten at sheet joints.

Powdercoated aluminium head


flashing BMT 0.9 Min. with stpoends, extend 20 Min. beyond joinery.


•

•

•

•


Cover to joinery 10 Min.

Gap to cladding 5 Min.

Slope 15° Min.

Cover to cladding 35 Min.


New aluminium joinery refer to Window and Door Schedule.


Flashing tape dressed into opening (all around).

Frame block by window manufacturer

WANZ sill support bar.

Cladding beyond shown hidden.


New upstand substrate over solid blocking.

RL Roof Board LW 10mm.

Plywood 12mm, H3.2 CCA.

JH RAB 6 or 9mm.


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Sill height of adjacent window.

Continuous head flashing over all clerestory windows.

Flashing tape over waterproof membrane, head flashing and cavity closer.

Stopend to end windows only.

Exterior Detail

1:5


Existing structure (Indicative).


Flashing tape over vapour and waterproof membrane. Membrane height 100 Min. above adjacent sill height.

Window joinery beyond shown hidden.


Existing sill location.


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5

Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

509

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


New overlay roof system installed over existing metal tray clad roof.


Aluminium pressure bar.

Trim existing metal roofing to this line.

Screw fix to solid timber framing.

Bottom of sheet parallel to roof below. Height to roof 150 Min.

New fibre cement sheet fascia board. Paint finish.

Extruded aluminium angle cleat Ex. 75x50x3.

Single ply membrane over plywood substrate 17 Min. H3.2 CCA.

New waterproof membrane/PIR roof system installed over new plywood substrate. Aligns with overlay roof system beyond.

New roof structure and trusses. Refer to Str. Eng.

Existing insulation *Remove if practical to remove, Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

Existing interior lining. Finish: Refer interior project specification.

Existing ceiling lining(Indicative).

Existing roof structure (Indicative).

Existing wall framing (Indicative)

Timber eaves mould 40x27, H3.1. Paint finish.

Cavity ventilation gap 3 - 5mm.

Flashing tape Soffit/RWU junction.

New fascia board, size and alignment as per existing fascia board beyond.

Fibre cement panel wall cladding installed vertically over H3.1 timber cavity battens. Paint finish.

Folded aluminium flashing BMT 2.0 Min.

LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City

New timber framing SG8 H1.2.

Scale: 1:5

New interior linings. Refer interior project specification.

New interior linings. Refer interior project specification.

Existing interior lining. Finish: Refer interior project specification.

New fibre cement soffit, aligns with existing soffit beyond.

New truss/roof structure by Str. Eng. TBC.

Spouting to fascia Gap 6 Min.

Existing exterior wall cladding, various (Indicative).

Existing wall framing (Indicative)

Do not install insulation within ceiling void. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

Exterior Detail 1:5

Exterior Detail

1:5


New waterproof membrane/PIR roof system installed over new plywood substrate. Aligns with overlay roof system beyond.


Purlins to tie top chord of trusses, SG8, H1.2.

Centres and fixings to be confirmed.

Plywood subtrate 17 Min. H3. CCA. Str. Eng. to confirm if utilised as roof plane bracing.


Wall insulation to extend continuously up to the underside of the new insulated overlay roof system. Typical. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.


Continuous sealant bead.


New roof truss by Truss Manufacturer.


Do not install insulation within ceiling void. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.


Rigid wall underlay with


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Aluminium pressure bar


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


Client:

Naenae College


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

510

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©

New timber decking, H3.2, smooth side up.

Plywood subtrate 17 Min. H3.2 CCA.

Floor within building beyond shown dashed.

Waterproof membrane over PIR board over vapor barrier and plywood substrate.

Steel ridge beam.

Refer Structural

Engineer's documentation.

Timber screen/balustrade.

Roof Framing

Rafters: 190x45 SG8 Min. @ 600 Ctrs Max.

Fixings: Type E, 2/90x3.15 skew nails plus 2 wire dogs.

NZS 3604 Table 10.1

Centred about new Administration Entrance.

Align with Centreline of handrail

Slope Posts and Palings 5

Airflow

uPVC cavity closer

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5

Size: A2

FC sheet soffit, paint finish.

Concrete foundation: Refer Structural Engineer's documentation.

Concrete foundation: Refer Structural Engineer's documentation.

Head flashing as per window head flashing. Powdeer coated aluminium, BMT 0.9 Min.

Powdercaoted aluminium external boxed corner extrusion.

Spouting to fascia Gap 6 Min.

Fix head flashing through EPDM packer.

Align with adjacent fascia of main building.

Stringers 140x45 Min.

SG8, H3.2, Bolts M12

S.S. at 0.7m centres Max.

LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Flashing tape over both flashing and cavity closer.

Cavity batten blocking 100mm @ 5°, H3.1.

flexible wall underlay over. Exterior wall cladding.

Flashing tape over soffit and wall underlay.

Top of cavity ventilation Gap 5mm.

Vent batten.

Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City

Exterior Detail

1:5


Rev.

Description

Date

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022


Roof space ventilation Gap 8mm.

Vent batten.


FC sheet soffit, paint finish.

Future suspended artwork / panelling.


FC sheet soffit, paint finish.


1,590 N.T.S.


Soffit Battens: 90x45 H1.2 @ 600 ctrs Fixing Type "U" (1/14g x 100mm self-drilling type 17 screw). Note: Over sized to provide fixing of future decorative features to solid timber framing.


**Provide locations for fixing future decorative features to front face and interior walls. Photograph and as-build framing prior to installing the RAB and deliver to contract administrator.


Cavity ventilation Gap 5mm.

Vent batten.

Timber blocking at sheet fixing locations or


castellated cavity


batten.


RESOLVE1;

ARCHITECTS


Client:

Naenae College


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Drawing No.

Revision No.

511

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


New overlay roof system installed over new plywood. roof substrate.

New overlay roof system installed over new plywood roof substrate.

Rafters: 190x45 SG8 Min. @ 600 Ctrs Max.

Fixings: Type E, 2/90x3.15 skew nails plus 2 wire dogs.

NZS 3604 Table 10.1

Airflow

Existing insulation *Remove if practical to remove, Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

Interior lining and finish. Refer to "Interiors" specification

Interior ceiling and finish.

Refer to "Interiors" specification

PFC beam of portal frame (Indicative), refer to Structural Engineer's documentation.

Top of cavity ventilation Gap

Vent batten.

Aluminium pressure bar New Barge board, H3.2, Paint finished.

Exterior Detail

1:5


Wall insulation to extend continuously up to the underside of the new insulated overlay roof system. Typical. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.


Wall insulation to extend continuously up to the underside of the new insulated overlay roof system. Typical. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.


w overlay roof system installed over new


lywood


roof substrate.


Soffit Battens: 90x45 H1.2 @ 600 ctrs Fixing Type "U" (1/14g x 100mm selfdrilling type 17 screw).

Note: Over sized to provide fixing of future decorative features to solid timber framing.


Aluminium pressu

Future decorative

New fascia board Paint finish.

Single ply membrane

Soffit lining.

shown dashed.

Overlay roof system

New entrance canopy roof structure (Indicative).

PIR board.

Plywood roof substrate 17mm H3.2 CCA.



The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©



**Provide locations for fixing future decorative features to front face and interior walls. Photograph and as-build framing prior to installing the RAB and deliver to contract administrator.


2,300 NTS

New overlay roof system installed over existing metal tray clad roof.

New overlay roof cladding over new roof structure.

Cavity ventilation Gap 3 - 5 mm.

Flashing tape to timber top plate and wall underlay.

New timber framing SG8 H1.2.

Rigid wall underlay with flexible wall underlay over.

Exterior wall cladding.

Existing wall removed

Str. Eng. to confirm load bearing prior to removal.

New timber trusses (Indicative). Design by truss manufacturer.

Wall insulation to extend continuously up to the underside of the new insulated overlay roof system. Typical. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

Purlins to tie top chord of trusses, SG8, H1 Centres and fixings to be confirmed.

Existingroof sturcutre remains (Indicative).

Existing original roof substrate (Indicative).

Existing original membrane containing asbestos.


Plywood subtrate 17 Min. H3.1 CCA. Str. Eng. to confirm if utilised as roof plane bracing.


28

113


Exterior Detail

1:5


New ceiling lining on purlins (Indicative).


Do not install insulation within ceiling void. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.



RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5

Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

512

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


A

Detail 29


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


280

Flashing tape over cavity closer.

New timber decking, H3.2, smooth side up.

Cavity batten blocking 100mm @ 5°, H3.1.

Wall finish. Refer to interior project.

Steel Portal Frame, refer Structural Engineer's documentation.

Floor within building beyond shown dashed.

Fibre cement panel wall cladding installed vertically over H3.1 timber cavity battens. Paint finish. Extend 50mm below floor framing.

Rigid wall underal with wall underlay over. Extend 15mm below floor framing.

uPVC cavity closer Cacity batten at sheet joints.

180

12 Min.

Detail 4

9A

00

Exterior Detail

1:5

Section A-A 1:5


Deck Design (NZS 3604 3kPa Floor Loading)

Decking: 88 x32 H3.2

Joist: 140x45 Min. SG8 H3.2, (Span 2.15m Max).

Bearer: 90x90 SG8 H3.2, Span 1,300 Max.

Loaded dimension 1,000 Max. Pile: 125x125 H5

Footing Concrete: 225x225x200 Min


A

Detail 29


Stringers 140x45 Min.

SG8, H3.2, Bolts M12

S.S. at 0.7m centres Max.


Concrete foundation: Refer Structural Engineer's documentation.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Temporary EPS formwork, to be removed post concrete cure.


RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5

Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

513

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln



New overlay roof system installed over existing metal tray clad roof.

Screw fix to solid timber framing.

Trim existing metal roofing to this line.

Extruded aluminium angle cleat Ex. 75x50x3.

Existing retained metal roof cladding over original membrane (containing asbestos) and substrate.

Existing Internal linings (Indicative)

Wall finish. Refer to interior project.

Existing framing (Indicative)

Wall insulation to extend continuously up to the underside of the new insulated overlay roof system. Typical. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

Do not install insulation within ceiling void. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

New floor finish. Refer to interior project. (Indicative).

Existing timber floor (Indicative).

Aluminium pressure bar

Folded aluminium flashing BMT 2.0 Min.

New plywood substrate to existing skylight opening as required.

Continuous sealant bead.

Existing direct fixed vertical shiplap weatherboards.

Make good and paint finish.

Existing direct fixed vertical shiplap weatherboards.

Make good and paint finish.

Timber eaves mould 40x27, H3.1. Paint finish.

Existing fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.

Existing fibre cement soffit retained.

Spouting to fascia Gap 6 Min.

Pipe penetration

Modified silicion sealant all around.

New timber framing H1.2 to existing skylight opening as required.

Secure pipe with suitable brackets and pipe clamp.

CAUTION

Assume all exisitng fibre cement sheet to contain asbestos unless confirmed otherwise.

32

113

Exterior Detail

1:5

Exterior Detail 1:5


Existing insulation *Remove if practical to remove, Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.



Pressure sealing tape

S.S. worm drive clamp.

Flashing tape to seal vapour barrier.

Roof membrame system detail piece.

Proprietory natural lighting tube.

Proprietory flashing and adapter for natural lighting tube.

Timber framed opening to natural light tube manufacturers specification. Upstand 150 Min.

Roof membrane system collar fully welded by approved installer..

Pipe Penetration

framing (Indicative).

Proprietory natural lighting tube ceiling diffuser.


Natural Light Tube


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


RESOLVE'1


ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5                    Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

514

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


New overlay roof system installed over existing metal tray clad roof.


Existing metal clad roof remains.


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Existing Hall interior linings (Indicative).

Membrane roof below.

Membrane manufacturers proprietory diverter below.

Rustic plug.

Spouting below.

Membrane internal back flashing taken up behind roof membane.


Existing Hall interior linings (Indicative).

Existing Lobby interior linings (Indicative).


Existing fibre cement soffit retained. Continuous sealant bead.

Cavity ventilation gap 3 - 5mm. Flashing tape Soffit/RWU junction.

Fibre cement panel wall cladding installed vertically over H3.1 timber cavity battens. Paint finish.

Existing framing (Indicative) Flashing tape over both flashing and cavity closer.

Cavity batten blocking 100mm @ 5°, H3.1.

uPVC cavity closer Cacity batten at sheet joints. Aluminium Flashing BMT 1.2 Min. Powdercoated.

Flashing tape separation.


Timber batten H3.2. Profile to match existiing on east and west sides of hall.


Plywood substrate.

Waterproof membrane upstand.


Existing rusticated weatherboards.

Rustic plug, installed with sealant.

Timber packing H3.2.

Timber cover board 180x18 H3.2.


View C-C


Membrane internal back flashing taken up behind roof membane.




Single ply membrane PIR board (tapered).


New vapour barrier PIR infill fillet.


Existing tray profile roof cladding to remain.

Existing original membrane containing asbestos.

Existing original roof substrate (Indicative).

Existing roof structure (Indicative).


Membrane manufacturers proprietory diverter.

Existing weatherboards remain in place.

Membrane behind cover board shown hidden.

Existing fibre cement soffit retained.

Membrane internal corner back flashing.

Existing fascia board retained if suitable C O S



RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ



Exterior Detail

1:5



Exterior Detail

1:5


Rustic Plug

Sealed to wbd. Typical.


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5                    Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

515

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


Rustic Plug, sealed to wbd.

Aluminium pressure bar

New fibre cement panel cladding on drained cavity to Hall gable.

New horizontal cladding change band.

Folded powder coated aluminium flashing, BMT 2.0 Min.

Membrane saddle flashing.

Membrane internal corner back flashing.

New fascia board, H3.2, Paint finished.

Membrane upstand behind cladding shown hidden.

Membrane internal back flashing taken up behind roof membane.

Existing timber framing (Indicative).

Existing fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.

560 REF. N.T.S.

Exterior Detail

1:5


Existing weatherboards removed and replaced with new as required to facilitate membrane installation.


Existing Hall interior linings (Indicative).



Existing framing (Indicative)

Existing Fibre cement wall cladding (Indicative).

Existing horizontal band

New corner saddle flashing, Prefinished steel flashing BMT 0.55 Min. folded and fully sealed. Refer isometric view.

,u

Flashing tape over corner.

New timber external corner boards, H3.2, Paint finished.

New horizontal band below.



Rigid wall underlay with flexible wall underlay over.


Fibre cement panel wall cladding installed vertically over H3.1 timber cavity battens. Paint finish.


Exterior Detail

1:5


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Weatherboard cladding 50 Min. clear of membrane roof.

Membrane behind wall cladding shown hidden.

Membrane internal back flashing taken up behind roof membane.

Membrane manufacturers proprietory diverter.

Membrane brought forward of weatherboard cladding.

Existing fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.

Membrane internal corner back flashing.


Rustic Plug, sealed to wbd.



View B-B



RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details


Exterior Detail

1:5



Exterior Detail

1:5


Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5                    Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

516

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


Existing Internal linings (Indicative)

Timber eaves mould 40x27, H3.1. Paint finish.

Existing fibre cement soffit retained.

Continuous sealant bead.

Detail 39D


New pressure bar


New fascia board, H3.2, Paint finished.


Existing insulation *Remove if practical to remove, Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.


Existing fascia boards retained if suitable C.O.S.


Existing timber framing (Indicative).


Single ply membrane.

Plywood subtrate 17 Min. H3.2 CCA.

New wall insulation to extend continuously up to the underside of the new insulated overlay roof system if practicable. Refer to Keynote 4711P on Sheet 001.

Single ply membrane

PIR board (tapered).

PIR infill fillet.


New vapour barrier


New overlay roof system installed over existing metal tray clad roof.



Existing framing.

Window installation. refer Detail 14.

Ridge of N-S roof above.

uPVC back flashing from soffit of roof above to bottom of fibre cement cladding.

Fibre cement cladding on cavity on existing wall framing.


Fascia of E-W roof above.


Cavity batten spacing as per cladding manufacturers specification.


uPVC corner back flashing

Fixings as per cladding manufacturers cavity internal corner detail.

Sealant bead.


Detail 39A


linings (Indicative)


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

13/12/2021

P-04

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


Existing tray profile roof cladding to remain.

Existing original membrane containing asbestos.

Existing original roof substrate (Indicative).

Existing roof structure (Indicative).


Existing metal clad roof remains.


uPVC back flashing from soffit of roof above to bottom of fibre cement cladding.

Existing fascia board retained if suitable C.O.S.

Aluminium pressure bar.

Fibre cement cladding on cavity on existing wall framing.

New fascia board, H3.2, Paint finished.

Fascia of E-W roof above.

Existing timber roof framing (Indicative).




Detail 39B



Existing fascia board shown dashed.


Ridge of roof below.




Detail 39C


39         Exterior Detail

112                      1:5




RESOLVE1:


ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO

PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ


Client:

Naenae College


Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City


Drawing Title:

Construction Details

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:5                    Size: A2

Drawing No.

Revision No.

517

A


CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.

Rev. Description Date

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©



RESOLVE?

ARCHITECTS

LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College

Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City

Drawing Title:

Joinery

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale:                           Size: A1

Drawing No.                  Revision No.

600

CAD File:    S:\Projects\R21112 - Naenae College Roof Remediation\A-Cad\R21112 Naenae College Admin Block-Developed Design 220727.pln


1 item (nD01)



1,400



nW02b, nW02c, nW02d, nW02e, nW02f, nW02g, nW02h, nW02i, nW02j, nW02l)


1 item (nW03)


The contractor shall confirm all conditions and dimensions on site before proceeding with work. Do not scale dimensions off drawings. Contractor is to report any discrepancies to the architect immediately. Plans to be read in conjunction with the specification. RIA accepts no responsibility for any changes made to the issued documents.





2 items (nW05, nW08)



1,100


Rev.

Description

Date

P-02

Detail Design

13/12/2021

P-03

Detail Design-03

18/02/2022

P-05

Detail Design-04

27/07/2022

A

WRP Review & Procurement Issue

15/08/2022

Copyright RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS 2022©


11 items (nW01a, nW01b, nW01c, nW01d, nW01e, nW01f, nW01g, nW01h, nW01i, nW01j, nW01k)



RESOLVE';

ARCHITECTS


LEVEL 1, 171 VIVIAN STREET, TE ARO


PO BOX 9792, WELLINGTON

RESOLVEiTARCHITECTS.CO.NZ

Client:

Naenae College          Q

_

Project Name:       Project Number: R21112

Naenae College

Administration Exterior

Project Address:                                    g

910 High Street Avalon Hutt City |

g

Drawing Title:

Joinery Schedule         I

Status: WRP Review & ProcurDate:t 15/08/2022

Scale: 1:50                   Size: A2              i

Drawing No.

Revision No.

700

A


Project Budget Summary

Naenae College : Interior & Exterior Admin Upgrades

Date                                            11/12/2022

JR GR^UP

PLAN 0£$ICN 0£LtV£A

Item

Description

Quantity

Unit

Rate

INTERIOR

EXTERIOR

TOTAL

Comments

1.0

Main Contractor - PBJ Construction

1.1

Exterior

$       1,095,388.01

sum

1

$      1,095,388.01

Quoted sum

1.2

Interior

$        690,654.04

sum

1

$       690,654.04

Quoted sum

1.3

Removal of Autex feature walls

-$           7,000.00

sum

1

-$           7,000.00

Section Total

$       683,654.04

$      1,095,388.01

$      1,779,042.05

2.0

Provisional Sums

2.01

Structural Steel

$         15,000.00

sum

1

$         15,000.00

2.02

Window winders and control gear

$         15,000.00

sum

1

$         15,000.00

2.03

Master Keying

$          2,500.00

sum

1

$          2,500.00

2.04

HWC connection to toilets

$          2,000.00

sum

1

$          2,000.00

2.05

Solatube systems

$          4,000.00

sum

1

$          4,000.00

2.06

Electrical DB upgrade

$          5,000.00

sum

1

$          5,000.00

2.07

Autex colour mix (one colour allowed for)

$          1,000.00

sum

1

$          1,000.00

Section Total

$         10,500.00

$         34,000.00

$         44,500.00

3.0

Professional Fees

3.01

PM Exterior Fee

$       1,129,388.01

Sum

4.38%

$         49,467.19

3.02

PM Interior Fee

$        694,154.04

Sum

4.38%

$         30,403.95

3.03

IRG Design

$         19,200.00

Sum

1

$         19,200.00

3.04

Resolve It Design

$         70,000.00

Sum

1

$         70,000.00

3.05

Stephenson Turner

$          5,000.00

Sum

50%

$          2,500.00

$          2,500.00

3.06

Spencer Holmes

$          8,000.00

Sum

1

$          8,000.00

3.07

Exterior BC - HCC

$          6,000.00

Sum

1

$          6,000.00

3.08

Interior BC - HCC

$          8,000.00

Sum

1

$          8,000.00

3.09

MCG Asbestos Survey

$          5,175.00

Sum

1

$          5,175.00

3.10

Simx Ventilation Design

$           200.00

Sum

1

$           200.00

3.11

Pharaoh Construction

$          1,098.00

Sum

1

$          1,098.00

3.12

Tracer Construction

$          2,629.00

Sum

1

$          2,629.00

3.13

GRJ Developments

$          1,271.07

Sum

1

$          1,271.07

3.14

LB White

$          1,536.85

Sum

1

$          1,536.85

Section Total

$         58,103.95

$        149,877.11

$       207,981.06

4.0

Contingencies

4.1

Project Exterior Contingency

$      1,279,265.12

Sum

15.00%

$        191,889.77

4.2

Project Interior Contingency

$       752,257.99

Sum

12.50%

$         94,032.25

Section Total

$         94,032.25

$        191,889.77

$       285,922.02

Total Project Estimate

$      846,290.24

$    1,471,154.89

$      2,317,445.13

© Out of Touch, Too Much Risk - All Rights Reserved
This site is not affiliated with or endorsed by Naenae College